|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 18:50:26 GMT
It's dark. Really dark. And I feel...numb. Oh... I've got my eyes closed. I want to open them. I just can't. I struggle, but I can't move. Where... am I?
"Hey, you awake?"
It's a deep, almost monotone voice. It most definitely belongs to a man, probably a big one.
"Can you hear me? Are... you still with us?"
He pauses in between his speech. He seems slow with his words, maybe he has been touched in the head?
"I can't open my eyes. Who are you? Where am I?" you yell out, desperate for answers.
"Shhhh... Please, you gotta b- be quiet. They'll hear us, and they'll bloody us up again". the man answers.
"Again?" you think to yourself. You feel your eyelids being torn open. You hear something being torn apart, and you feel the stinging pain on your face and in your eyes. The confusion sets in as the white light blinds you, leaving you a bit disoriented.
"They stitched your eyes shut. They must really think you're dangerous."
You blink your eyes hoping to get some tears in there to lubricate your eyes. You're sure they're bloodshot and dry.
"Why did they do that?" you ask.
"Beats me. I've been here all my life and never seen it done to anyone else".
You look around the room. The room is sterile white, or rather, it would be. But there's loads of blood all over the room, worse than any butcher shop. You notice you're in the middle of the room, your hands bound and placed above your head, hanging you from the ceiling.
"Who are you?" You inquire with increasing curiosity. Yet none of the blood bothers you. You wonder why that is... "And this blood? What?"
"That's your blood. All of it. I ha- have no idea why they did it to you, but they cut you like a pig. And my name... It's Randel Oland."
You focus your eyes better and look at the man. Actually, you stare directly into his chest. This man is enormous, well over 7 feet tall. He has a large scar across his face. He looks imposing, yet you feel a certain calmness emanating from him.
"What's your name sir?" the mountain of a man asks you.
"I don't... know" you reply.
----------------- A: Ask him to help you out of your bindings. You don't think you can do it yourself, and you feel really weak. B: Ask him for more information about this place and why are you two being held here C: Ask him to help you escape out of this place. You don't know where you are, and you really don't care. D: Sit around and wait for someone else to come around and play possum hoping to get the jump on them and escape alone. You don't really care about Randel. Free Will: Make your own decision
"What is going on here Randel?"
He shakes his head and shrugs his shoulders. "I know why I'm here. They wanted to make a perfect shinobi. Someone who could take a lot of punishment, and not really have a conscience. They... felt it was something that ninja didn't need. So.. I've been here for a while. I came here because my mother was really sick, and they came to me and said they'd help me if I helped them".
"Who came to you?"
"Some old man. Not really sure what his name was, he never gave me his name. Must be some important member here though. Probably has some... political strength. I guess..."
"Why is my blood all over here?"
"Well... I think this facility is here for experiments. I've never been able to talk with people. You're the first guy I've actually spoken to in years. When I saw what they did to you... well, I guess that's when I figured it out. This place HAS to be for experiments. What they did to me, and what I saw them do to you... That's the only way I think to explain this place".
"What did they do to me?"
"Well.. I didn't believe it at first, but I saw it. I know I saw it... I think I did anyway... They split you open. I couldn't believe it. They put a scalpel to your chest and then cut you down to the belly. I can't believe it, really."
"That makes no sense. I don't feel anything," you explain.
"That's because you he- healed. You just put yourself back together. Like nothing never happened... You had one side of your body one way, and the other, well the other way. And then, your skin just pulled itself together... You stopped bleeding soon as that happened. I can't believe it either, but I saw it. I think I sa- saw it."
"I don't remember any of that..."
"You must be special. There's a lo- lot of special people here. Lots of em'. I figure that is why they have you here".
"Where exactly is here anyway Randel?"
"Well, I think we're below the Hidden Leaf right now. Sometimes I hear people talking from somewhere above us... through pipes and stuff, I mean."
So much has happened to you, and you have no idea what it has to do with you.
-------------------
A: Ask Randel what kind of experiments they have done on him B: Ask Randel to please put you on the floor and remove the ropes holding your hands together. C: Try to figure out a way to get out of here. Randel said he has been here a long time, maybe he can help you. D: Wait until whoever "they" are to return Free Will
"Hey Randel, would you do me a favor? Please get me out of these restraints. I don't think I can do it myself"
"Well... I guess, I ca- I mean, I could. But please, if they ask you, will you please say you managed to undue the chains yourself? They tend to get angry when you go against them".
You nod your head and exclaim in pain as Randel lifts you up and then lowers you gently to the floor. This guys a monster you think to yourself. He completely manhandled you, without any effort at all. You look down at your hands and notice your hands are being held together by chains that have spikes aimed toward the inside of the binding effectively holding your hands together by the piercing spikes more so than the actual chain itself.
Randel looks at you curiously.
"You need help with that? I guess that would hurt a lot..."
"Yeah please. I don't think I could" you answer.
Randel bends down to try to meet your gaze.
"This is probably going to hurt a lot. Alright? So, I guess I'm saying I'm sorry in advance. Don't hold it against me".
You shake your head and lower your head to the collar of your shirt. You notice it looks like some sort of medical scrubs. Randel wasn't lying about you being cut down the middle either. You notice the scrubs are cut right down the middle. But you don't have any scars, no stitches, nothing. You bite down on the collar of your scrubs.
"Go, I'm ready for you" you say with a muffled voice.
Randel grimaces and pulls the spiked chain off of you. You grunt in pain as you feel the cold metal scrape against the bones in your wrist. You bite down harder on your collar as you hear the rending of your flesh. Randel isn't gentle, his vice-like grip isn't letting you move either.
"There" he says. He lets the larger part of the chain fall to the ground and he holds up one of the pieces of the spiked chain up to his eyes.
You look down and shudder as you see the damage. The spikes were bigger than you thought they were, and they completely shredded your hands and wrists. It seems the majority of the spikes went right through.
"These spikes have poison in them" Randel informs you, yanking you out of your thoughts.
"Poison?" you ask. "Why would they poison me?"
"I don't know that sir," Randel admits.
You look back down at your hands. They're throbbing and you bet your hands are broken. You notice Randel is looking at your hands also.
"The wounds... they aren't closing up like they used to. I swear, I saw them do it. I saw th- them cut you open. And you just healed, right then and there."
"Well, if I did, that's not happening right now. There's no way I'm getting out of here with these hands. They're busted up"
The door opens, and in walks an elderly man. He has half of his head covered in a gray cloth that goes down to his right arm. He walks with a cane. He's holding some sort of clipboard.
"It's you" Randel says with shock on his face. "How is my mother? How much longer do I have to be here?"
"Now now, Randel" the elderly man says calmly, "I will release you as soon as we are done with you. This is for the sake of the Hidden Leaf after all".
"I haven't seen you in years! I have never been able to see my mother. Why would you do this to me," asked Randel. You noted that this is the first time he has shown any hint of emotion.
"We're almost done with you Randel, just please be patient," the elder assured. He turned his gaze onto you. "And as far you're concerned, after all the tests I've run, I have finally figured out everything about you. It's been a long time 21, but finally, I been able to crack your secret".
"What secret?" you ask in outrage.
"Well, I finally was able to determine what makes you, you" he explains. "It seems you have---------
Stat/Bloodline Determination
The elder looks at you, and looks back down to his clipboard. He spots the chains on the ground and smirks a little.
"So, I see you managed to escape from the chains 21," he says with a sour tone. "Or perhaps, you had help? Randel?"
He looks at Randel with a piercing expression.
"I- well, I" Randel stutters.
"No, I escaped by myself. This ass here tried to keep me bound, is he on your payroll or something? Least you could have done was help me out you jerk," you say with an irritated tone.
The old man closes his eyes a little and looks towards you once again.
"That's good then Randel," the elder stated, "I would hate to have to teach you a lesson again. But then again 21, I should have figured that a man of your genius would not be held by such a trivial restraint".
"Who are you, and what the hell do you want with me?" you ask angrily.
"Have you forgotten everything 21? That is most interesting... This is the second time you have done this, I'm beginning to think this is a defense mechanism your body employs... That is what it must be".
"Why do you keep calling me 21? Who are you old man? I want answers" you demand.
"You are 21 because weapons have no need for names," he answers coldly, "your purpose is to serve the village Hidden in the Leaves... You will be the foundation for an entire army of ninja. The template for a perfect shinobi. You'll get the opportunity to save lives, the lives of your countrymen! Isn't that something you want?!"
You look down at the spiked chains. You remember everything Randel said, about you being cut open and about the poison on the chain.
"You poisoned me," you state sternly as you stare down this old man.
"Yes, I did, and I will do so again and again. Until all your secrets are revealed".
"You poisoned me to control my healing ability," you rationalize.
The man looks at Randel with an almost amused look on his face. Randel backs up into a corner.
"You really are brilliant 21, truly a genius. I haven't found a way to kill you yet, but I will. You are too dangerous to be left alive. That is of course, unless you wish to help me. Join my group and you'll be treated with dignity. You'll have anything you want. And you won't have to deal with these... limitations. I always get what I want 21. So you might as well swear fealty to me. If you do, you live, if you don't well... I'll use you and discard you as I do all my failed experiments".
He turns to look at Randel with disgust.
---------------------------------- This is an alignment based decision and will give me an idea of what type of guy your character will be
A: Swear loyalty to this man, as long as he promises to give you all the answers you seek B: Swear loyalty to this man with no strings C: Lie to him and say you will follow him, with the intention of betraying him at the first moment D: Reject him outright. Tell him to go pound sand E: Ask him about what will happen to his other experiments. Including Randel Free Will: Make your own fate
You sigh and crack your neck. The old man looks at you, his patience obviously wearing thin.
"I swear my allegiance to the Hidden Leaf," you state.
The old man smiles triumphantly. You see him about to start speaking before you continue. You figure this would be a good moment to put him in his place.
"But I don't pledge my loyalty to you. I won't bow to you, old man"
His eyes widen in anger, but only briefly. He regains his composure and narrows his uncovered eye.
"Is that so? Well, that is a start at least," he begins, "but in time you will see that serving me and serving the Hidden Leaf are one in the same. I am the Leaf, and the Leaf is me. You will bow to me, if you care about the Leaf".
He lets out a small chuckle and smiles a very fake smile.
"You'll come to learn I'm actually one of the only people loyal to Konoha, everyone else is working against the interests of our village," he explains, his tone getting more serious and stern. "If and when you regain your memories, you'll see this to be true. I have a mission for you, an important one. Are you ready right now?"
"I don't remember a thing," you admit, "I'll help the village, but I'm not going to be able to do anything as I am".
"Hmmm... Interesting," the elder mutters, "this is exactly the same as the first time. I wonder why it is you lose your memory... This mission I have, it requires your special skills. Your blood... it is... very valuable".
"Yeah, I know," you reply sharply, "to you, I'm just a rat in a cage for you to prod and poke. My blood is a direct result of your experiments, isn't it?"
He laughs. You don't remember much, but you do remember this laugh for some reason. You dislike this man. And you hate that laugh.
"You foolish boy," the elder retorts, "I have only experimented on you BECAUSE of your blood. You were born this way. You're some sort of monster. You heal wounds at an almost impossible rate. That is, as long as this poison isn't in your system. But I assume you've gathered that much".
"I have".
"I will send in my doctors, see if they can restore your memory and your... other abilities," the elder states, "if this is just like last time, I imagine you'll regain your jutsus as soon as they treat you. If not... then I will experiment on you and I will GIVE you jutsus. You WILL serve me, and my tools are always sharpened and ready to defend the Leaf".
He begins to turn to walk away.
"Oh, and one more thing 21," he says as he pulls out a small kunai and a syringe. The syringe has a thick, red liquid in it that is slow to move. "If you choose to disobey me, I can still find other uses for you".
He makes his way slowly closer to Randel. Randel lowers his head a little in a defeated manner.
"Randel, your arm please," the old man asks.
Randel rips the sleeve on his left arm off and extends his arm without a second thought. The old man slashes Randel's arm with the kunai viciously, creating a huge gash in Randel's arm that is spurting blood everywhere. You realize that the old man has slashed the brachial artery, this would could be fatal if left untreated. The old man looks at you with that fake smile again.
"This," he says as he presents the syringe, "is your blood".
He stabs Randel unceremoniously in the chest. Randel doesn't move nor make a sound. But you notice that Randel is extremely confused at this moment. You also enter a state of confusion as you see Randel's wound close up before your very eyes. Within a minute, the wound has closed and Randel's arm looks as if nothing ever happened.
"My blood can heal others..." you say softly.
"It does," he answers, "and if you will not serve me, you will merely be held in a cell until the end of your days. Serving me for the rest of your death as a human first aid kit. I'll bleed you dry if need be, do not test my resolve".
The elder puts the items away into his robe and begins to walk out of the room.
"Wait what's your name?" you demand.
"I am Danzo," he states, "the next Hokage of the Hidden Leaf," he says without turning and exits the room, locking the door behind him.
You look over at Randel. He seems dejected and concerned.
"You alright Randel?"
He nods silently.
The door to the room once again opens. A lone figure stands in the doorway. It's a man of a thin build. His face his extremely pale, and he has strange purple markings around his eyes. His eyes are a deep green, and there's something primal about his gaze. This must be one of the doctors that Danzo was referring to.
-------------------- A: Bum rush the doctor and try to escape this facility B: Let the doctor examine you, and land a sneak attack on him and then escape C: Let the doctor examine you, the timing isn't right for an escape attempt D: Refuse treatment from the doctor Free Will: Decide your own fate
The doctor walks into the room making no noise as he moves. He's holding a large black bag, and has a big tome under his left arm. He puts the bag on the floor and opens up the book. He reads to himself softly.
"So 21, here we are again?" the doctor asks. His voice is quite effeminate. "What did they do to you this time you pretty thing?"
He lets off a creepy laugh. His face causes flashes in your mind to speed through your thoughts. You close your eyes as you try to process all the information. Your head pulsates rhythmically, creating a sharp pain with each new image that you see. You fall to your knees and grip your head. Everything is so blurry, so bright. It's all so, fast
And then it stops suddenly and you're sent crashing to the floor. You open your eyes hesitantly. The doctor is holding your arm and has an empty syringe in his other hand.
"You're... Orochimaru," you whisper, the name seeming familiar.
The doctor smiles. "I am. And Danzo is underestimating you. I wouldn't make such a silly mistake. What an old fool. Has all of your memory returned?"
"No," you answer, "I saw a lot of things, but only some of it makes sense. Can you tell me? Why am I this way?"
"You were born this way child," Orochimaru says with a smile as he puts away his medical tools. "I'm just using Danzo for the meantime. He is merely a means to an end".
"Why can't I do any jutsu? I know I could... I think I could. I remember being able to make things come alive".
"Yes, you called it golem style," he asserts, "you basically breathed life into the unliving. There is much potential for you. I once... knew someone who could do that as well. It's very powerful, it's quite a gift. It's important that you don't tell Danzo about this. The fool thinks you're only capable of regeneration. He actually thought you were a taijutsu specialist... Listen, I must leave before he gets suspicious, but I did leave something for you".
Orochimaru stands up and makes his way to the wall. He pries open a tile from the wall, revealing a secret compartment. It contains what appears to be a treasure trove of knowledge. Scrolls, books, and some vials containing an unknown liquid.
"My days here might be limited," Orochimaru admits, "I don't know how much longer they'll let me play here in the Hidden Leaf. They can be so boring. I prepared this for you in the case that you would lose your memory again. Also, I wanted to try certain... things on you. But I couldn't under Danzo's stare. That poison he uses on you stifles your healing ability. But, I think that if you take a drop or two every day, your body might eventually become immune to it. The scrolls and books are there for you to try to remember your techniques, they are yours after all".
He reaches in and grabs a salt shaker.
"The vials have the poison, should you feel compelled to follow my advice," he says, "and this. Well, this is for you to sprinkle on your food. Your food is poisoned also, but this will counteract that".
He puts it back into the hole in the wall and turns around to pick up his bag and book.
"Wait Orochimaru. Why are you doing this? Why are you helping me?"
"I see it as an investment, I hope one day you will return the favor. Be seeing you". And with that, he leaves.
You look back at Randel.
"Weirder and weirder," you say in frustration.
------------------------------------ A: Speak to Randel about what he knows about this place. He said he has been here his entire life. B: Read up on the materials Orochimaru left you C: You figure that if Orochimaru is telling the truth, the contents in the salt shaker are probably some sort of antidote. Eat some of the ingredients to get all the poison out of your system D: Follow Orochimaru's instructions to the letter Free Will: Make your own fate
You follow Orochimaru's instructions to the letter. You don't know why, but for some reason, no one has come in to speak with you. Randel and you have both been receiving your food regularly and at the same scheduled time.
Two days have passed, and you feel completely and totally healthy. Your memory is still a little fuzzy, but you have been reading the journals you yourself left behind. The scriptures have helped you regain your memory a bit, and you feel that you can practice some jutsu. You spoke with Randel about it, and you feel confident he won't tell anyone that he saw you doing anything.
In your books, you read that you were able to manifest a "golem" out of steel. This golem was your permanent bodyguard, and was always looking out for you, even while you slept.
You also found a passage talking about your chakra affinity. Apparently, you also had the ability to cast other non-golem style jutsu.
You read about a jutsu that turns shuriken into walking bombs. Each shuriken bomb is capable of swift movement, but the individual explosion itself isn't very powerful. You saw that you also used these as scouts before.
Finally, in the short time you studied these books, you saw that you also used to use golem style to create a flying machine. You used to create ones big enough to actually ride on for transportation, or small enough that they could enter a man's ears and affect the brain with twisted illusions.
You decide you're able to practice one just in case they check up on you. ---------------------------------------- A: Learn to make golems 65% of success B: Learn a nature related jutsu (you guys pick the chakra type and technique, I'll be very lax about which) 90% C: Learn to make shuriken bomb 80% D: Learn the flying machine 75% E: Keep searching for another technique to practice (20% you might not be able to find one in time)
You look over the section explaining nature chakra jutsu that you wrote in your book. It seems you used to be a lightning user. You read through the pages. It all seems so familiar... You feel yourself get discouraged at the idea that your memory loss is so great that you don't remember your own name.
"It's pathetic Randel, I have to learn who I am from a book that I wrote. I can't believe it".
"Don't worry sir, you'll get it eventually. I know you're special, if not, they wouldn't ha- have kept you here," Randel answers.
You lower your head and put the book away. You close your eyes, and the image of the book's pages appear in front of you. You have a clear picture of everything you read with no effort. You open your eyes in disbelief and blink your eyes a bit. You close them again and concentrate on the jutsu techniques you read.
The book pages appear again. "I can do this, this is who I am. I have done this before, and I will do it again" you think to yourself.
Suddenly, you feel the chakra building in the pit of your stomach. Raw, pure, unbridled energy. And it's all at your disposal. You feel the raw and brutal power of nature. Of lightning.
"Lightning Style! Lightning Clone!"
The seals flow effortlessly from your hands. Rat, Snake, Ox, Rat, Dragon.
You feel lightning wash over you. You manage to open your eyes just in time to see the lightning reach your head and zip to the floor next to you, creating an exact copy of you. You smile in accomplishment.
"You did it sir!" Randel is elated.
"So I did," you reply confidently, "and this was one of the harder techniques. There are more techniques there, and even harder ones".
A light flashes before your eyes, forcing you to close them once more. You feel yourself drop to your knees as your head roars in pain. A memory is forcing it's way back into your presence. You see a dark skinned young man, obviously a shinobi. He has silver hair, and dark glasses on. He's giving you a thumbs up.
"He taught me," you gasp as you try to control your hyperventilation, "he taught me. It was an agreement of some effort, to make an alliance with the Hidden Leaf. The Hokage... he knows-"
You're interrupted by the door slamming open. Your clone turns to face the shinobi. With the door open, you hear a ton of screaming coming from down the hall.
"We're under attack! We got to get you out of here!"
This doesn't seem right you think to yourself. Why would Danzo make sure to evacuate you with such priority?
------This is a clutch moment guys------
A: Your clone is out, you could easily attack him and escape B: Try to escape through the commotion C: Go peacefully with the shinobi D: Refuse to move and stay here Free Will: Choose your fate
"I don't think we can go yet," you admit, "I'm sure there are other people left to evacuate. Why is Danzo placing such importance on me?"
"That's not important right now! We're going to be killed if we stay here?!" the shinobi answers, now frantic in his speech.
Now you're 100% certain, something is very wrong here.
"Why would we be killed? We're under the Hidden Leaf aren't we? Who could possibly kill us?" you ask calmly.
The shinobi becomes visibly flustered. He shakes his head several times and jumps at you with a kunai he had hidden with the palm of his hand.
You ready yourself and place yourself in a combat stance. But Randel has already acted. He backhands the shinobi's neck, and the shinobi collapses immediately.
You bend over and disarm the shinobi, hoping to interrogate him. Blood is oozing from the back of his head.
"You hit a vein Randel, luckily not an artery," you inform, "he'll be alright. I'm surprised you didn't kill him".
"It was my intention to only knock him out, sir," Randel reports, "I still hit him too ha- hard it would seem".
You're impressed with Randel's taijutsu, maybe he's not just a hulking beast.
"Well, I won't be able to ask this guy anything," you say as you rip a piece of the shinobi's uniform off and dress his wound. You notice something inside the shinobi's mouth.
"His tongue... it's swollen. And there's a seal on it," you observe aloud, "know what any of this means?"
Randel shakes his head no. "I have seen it before, sir. I don't kn- know what it means".
This guy was obviously working for Danzo. You look at the kunai he attacked you with. It is definitely coated in poison, the same poison Orochimaru spoke to you about.
"This guy was working for Danzo alright," you announce, "now what Randel?"
"I don't know, sir," Randel admits, "but it's obvious Danzo has no intention on helping ei- either of us". ----------------------- A: Stay here and wait B: Search out Danzo C: Search out Orochimaru D: Escape this place and run for the Hokage's mansion Free Will: Make your own fate
"I'm going to see the Hokage!" you yell at Randel. The echoing shouts and rallying noises from the complex making it necessary for you to yell to be heard.
"The Ho- Hokage sir?" Randel answers befuddled, "Are you sure?"
"It makes perfect sense to me now, Danzo is the guy behind this. The fact he just tried to take me out proves it".
"Well, I'm afraid I have nothing left for me here... Ca- Can I go with you, sir?"
"Let's get in gear and get out of here," you answer as you make your way to your secret stash and gather up all the contents.
You once again bend over to the fallen shinobi and grab some articles of his clothing, specifically a bag and a couple weapons he hand on him.
"You need a weapon Randel?" you ask as you look up. You see Randel pull out a huge handgun. The thing looks big even in Randel's massive hands.
"I have everything I need right here sir," Randel reports, "I just don't have any ammunition. But between my Door Knocker and my Lantern, I'll be alright. I'm mostly a taijutsu specialist anyway".
You notice Randel pointed to a small metallic lantern on his waist when he said that. You hadn't noticed it before, perhaps he had it hidden away. But now is not the time for that you think.
You both run out of the room and notice that the place is in an absolute uproar. The complex itself is dark and foreboding. Everything seems ominous, and most of all, lonely. You feel a profound sadness lingering in the air. You realize that most of the people rioting are wearing scrubs just like you and Randel. However, you also notice Leaf ninja making their way through the crowds. They are wearing colored animal masks to cover their face. Why are Leaf shinobi attacking a Leaf facility?
The Leaf ninja are not actually attacking anyone. As you move, you try to make your way in the direction the Leaf ninja are coming from. You hear Leaf ninja screaming for Danzo and Orochimaru. You figure they are long gone by now. You escape the complex alongside Randel with ease. You both make your way to the Hokage's mansion, but are stopped near the steps up to the manor.
You see an older man with a staff. He is holding it almost as if it is helping him up. You look above you at the mountainside. You recognize this man's face on the cliffside. "Bingo" you think to yourself, this is the Hokage. With him is another Leaf ninja who hides his face behind an animal mask. You approach him and he looks at your face with a puzzled face as he examines your clothing.
"What are you doing here, young one?"
------------------------------ A: To do you a favor old man. I put Danzo out of commission, and I got the inside scoop on everything B: I am seeking your help Lord Hokage. We were imprisoned against our wills and experimented on C: I'm thinking we can both help each other. Let's have a talk, shall we? D: I have only ever served the Leaf, and wish to continue to do so. Could we talk in private? Free Will: Make your Fate
You look at all the shinobi that have seemingly appeared out of nowhere. Unbeknown to you, you are now completely surrounded.
You raise your hands in the air.
"I am seeking your help Lord Hokage. We were imprisoned against our wills and experimented on".
The Hokage raises his left eyebrow and eyes the scene. He sighs softly and removes his hat.
"Scatter ANBU! Find me Danzo, NOW!" the Hokage orders before looking at you and Randel again. "And as for you two, I am truly sorry this could happen under my responsibility. Please follow me".
You lower your hands and follow him into the mansion. The ANBU standing next to him turns to start walking with the Hokage.
"No please," he instructs as he grabs the ANBU's shoulder, "that will not be necessary. I think these poor souls have been through enough. Let us not worsen things".
The ANBU bows and jumps into the evening darkness, swallowed by the pitch black of the moonless night.
"What a sad time has befallen us," the Hokage begins again as he continues towards the mansion. You walk beside him and feel a sort of awe just being in your presence. This man is older, with many scars and the wrinkles of a man that has survived a tough life. He gives you an impression of a silent, humble, majesty. The complete opposite of Danzo you think.
You all make your way into what you assume is his office, and he offers you seats. He looks at Randel and chuckles softly.
"I believe even if you're sitting down, you'll be taller than I, young man. But please," the Hokage states softly, "call me Hiruzen".
Sarutobi looks at you and pauses. He nods his head a little and exhales deeply.
"I recognize you, young man," Sarutobi states, "though I was told you had died. I suppose the Leaf is in greater peril than I thought... Would you please tell me everything? These are desperate times, and I need all the help I can get". ------------------------------------------- A: Be cordial and explain everything in detail. Orochimaru, Danzo, the seal and experiments. Dish it all. B: Hide certain details. Don't mention Orochimaru, or the experiments for fear of your memory loss C: Ask Sarutobi why should you help him for free D: Tell Sarutobi you both have been through hell and just want to rest for now Free Will: Make your own fate
You articulate every grim detail and terrible experience you are able to remember. You even include the memory lapses, the conversation with Orochimaru, and the seal you saw on the tongue of the fallen shinobi. Throughout the entire dialogue, Sarutobi only nods silently. He waits until you have finished saying everything you could politely, listening very intently. When you were done, Randel explained everything he could. This took far longer than your explanation. Not only was Randel in there for a much longer time, but Randel's manner of speaking has always been very slow.
But even during that, Sarutobi did not look away or yawn. He was showing sincere concern and curiosity. The situation must be bad you think.
"That is a very interesting and tragic account my friends," Hiruzen says after Randel's briefing. Sarutobi stands up and begins to pace behind his desk. "I feared that the rumors were true. But, your very presence here is fortuitous for the Leaf".
"Tell me, Lord Hokage," you start respectfully, "how did you know about Danzo's secret base under the village?"
"Orochimaru... he told me. It is my biggest disgrace and failure as Hokage," Sarutobi admits bowing his head in shame. "There have been kidnappings. People, even women and children have gone missing. I refused to believe it, but the matter had to be investigated. The truth was revealed, a Leaf shinobi was in fact kidnapping our villagers. And it was Orochimaru... my former student".
He pauses his speech with a deep sigh full of lament.
"I couldn't do it, you see," he continues, "I found him. He was... experimenting on a young boy when I found him. The boy was still alive, and Orochimaru was playing with his insides as a dog would play with a bone. Yet I couldn't kill him. I knew I should, now more than ever. Yet I failed the Leaf. I failed the younger generation. But Orochimaru did help me out in at least finding out Danzo's facility".
"But why would he do that?" you ask, none of this making any sense.
"I have my suspicions," Sarutobi acknowledges, "however, I am not sure yet. For that matter, we have so many things going on right now... This couldn't have come at a worse time".
You look at Randel who is resting his head on his hand.
"Lord Hokage, what exactly is going on with the Leaf right now?" you ask in earnest.
"I want to help you, and I swear I will," Sarutobi affirms, "your memories, your life is the very reason Danzo held you. I suspect at least. But these are just one of the many suspicions I hold without certainty. I don't want to elaborate on them in case they are wrong, and I pray that they are".
He sits down again and looks at you in the eye.
"I will tell you everything I know about you 21," Sarutobi says sharply. You almost jump in your seat as you hear the number you've been branded with. Has the Hokage known all along?
"I promise I will tell you whatever I can," he reiterates, "but as far as telling you what ails the Leaf. I'm afraid I can't trust you with that unless you swear to help your home and maintain these secrets. There are many things that must be done, and there are those that wish to erase the problem rather than repair it. Will you help us? Will you keep our secret?"
You look over at Randel. A gigantic bomb has been dropped on you, and you have no idea how to respond.
"I wi- will go along with whatever you say, sir," Randel states, "I realize my mother probably never got the help she was promised now".
You look at your hands and breathe in deeply.
--------------------------------------------------------------------- A: This is way too much, just please tell me about myself B: I swear allegiance to the Leaf, and to you Lord Hokage. Teach me what I've forgotten and I will defend the Leaf. C: I swear allegiance to the Leaf, and to you Lord Hokage. Teach me what I've forgotten and I will defend the Leaf. (Lie) D: Can I have a moment to think about this and discuss it with Randel? Free Will
"I swear allegiance to the Leaf, and to you Lord Hokage. Teach me what I've forgotten and I will defend the Leaf".
"Your eyes, 21," the Hokage says almost as if astonished, "they possess... The Will of Fire. If only more of our shinobi had those eyes. Yes, I will entrust you with the secrets of this village. I... wish your"-
The Hokage cuts himself short. He shakes his head several times and clears his throat.
"Very well then," he begins again after a short cough, "I will tell you first, about yourself. Your father was a legendary shinobi. I knew him very well, in fact, I almost saw him as a son. But he was destroyed. It was... perhaps even my fault. For that, I am truly sorry. I will make amends to you as best as I can. Your mother, was a foreigner, and I hear she was very respected in her lands. But truthfully, I know very little of her. She... disappeared. But I have reason to believe that Danzo and Orochimaru were experimenting on her. I also believe they were keeping you for your unique bloodline. Your mother was extremely powerful".
He stands up again and he grabs a pen from his desk. He walks in front of his desk and stands before you, holding the pen.
"You see this?" Sarutobi asks you as he holds the pen at your eye level, "any true shinobi can kill with even this. We have academy students that can do it. But what your mother could do, was special. She could make the pen sit there, acting like any regular pen would. Lifeless, motionless... until the moment to strike was at hand. She could stir life where there was never any. This is truly a great gift, but it will also be your curse. For where there is power, there are men that crave it".
You nod your head thoughtfully. His words ring true, all you remember is men trying to manipulate you and use you for power.
"Imagine my friend," he continues, "being able to kill indirectly. You could place poison in the pen and stab your intended target and never be in harms way. Although from what I hear, your mother chose a more direct approach. But what will you do with this power young man?"
"I will defend this village and serve you Lord Hokage," you answer without hesitation.
"My friend, observe what you have learned from Danzo," he answers as he places the pen down on his desk. "He would have you swear loyalty to him and do as he says. He would say it is in the village's best interest, and he truly believes this. Does it make his actions right? I would suggest, instead of serving me, you create your own ninja way. For if I ever stray from helping this village, it's people and walking the path of right, I would expect any Leaf ninja loyal to our village to strike even me down. Do you understand?"
You do. You understand implicitly. This man standing before you serves others without thought for himself. You nod your head in admiration.
"I am afraid I can not teach you about your bloodline, but we can work on any other jutsu you would like. I used to be a teacher myself, although it seems so long ago now," Sarutobi says with an expression that suggests a fond memory. "I will gladly mentor you, and perhaps occasionally spar with you. I am not as young as I used to be, but we can spar when my body permits it".
He steps around his desk again and sits down in his chair.
"The young man you described in your memories was a shinobi from the Land of Lightning," Sarutobi announces almost out of nowhere, "he was a feisty young man. But that was years ago, many years ago. I suspect he has grown much by now. We sent you there at your father's request. Tensions were running high between all of the great ninja nations, and your father suggested it to me. I granted this request in hopes that we could establish peace. But that... that really was ages ago.And you, you don't look to have aged a day. Most curious. If anything else stirs in your memory, please be sure to tell me".
"I will Lord Hokage," you answer respectfully.
"That's Sarutobi-sensei from now on young man," he replies kindly with a smile, "now... to the business concerning our home. There are two pressing matters that I have that concern me greatly. Regardless of which one you choose to work on first, you must be trained properly. I will not send in any man to die. These will be dangerous, and I will not have you going in ill prepared".
He clears his throat again and puts his elbows on the desk, leaning closer to you.
"I might have cleaned out Danzo tonight, but that will only be temporary," Sarutobi admits, "he has much political power. I believe he is running an organization, separate from the ANBU. I have ordered it to be disbanded, but it seems he does not wish to follow my edict. The seal you describe only worsens my fears. That seal is meant to prevent information from being spoken by the person who bears it. Even through horrible interrogation, they will not speak it. If they do, the person dies... I was thinking I could enlist you and Randel here, into our ANBU and let the rumor slip that it might be you under the mask. If Danzo hears of this, and I know he will, he will try to capture you. I want you to allow yourself to be captured, escape, and recover all the evidence you can on his operation. With that, I can finally end his ROOT organization or whatever it's called, and place Danzo in jail".
He leans back in his chair and sighs.
"That will be extremely difficult to accomplish and highly dangerous," Sarutobi states, "but it needs to be done, and you're in the best position to do it. But, I also need someone to infiltrate the Uchiha..."
"The Uchiha? A clan?" you ask.
"Yes, they have grown quite unhappy with their station in the village," Sarutobi confesses, "it pains me deeply. Perhaps yet another failing of mine as Hokage. However, there are talks of a possible rebellion. There are also more sinister rumors".
"What could possibly be more sinister than a full on rebellion?!" you ask in shock.
"I hear the Jonin council is plotting to destroy them... all of them. I fear Danzo might also have a hand in this, but unfortunately I can't prove anything. My word is sometimes respected, but it has fallen on deaf ears in the council. I can not allow a rebellion or mass genocide. My mistakes are far too vast already".
"Maybe if I speak out about Danzo to the council, would that help?" you ask.
"I would allow it, although it is unheard of," Sarutobi replies with a little touch of negativity in his voice, "but I do not think it would be best. If we do that, there would be no chance of quelling the rebellion in silence. It would become public knowledge, and it might make the situation worse. Or, perhaps that's exactly what the Uchiha need, to be acknowledged. But it's risky. And if we fail, we won't have a second chance. Knowing Danzo as I do, if he sees the council turn against his plan, he might order the massacre right then and there... Which would mean we need to find out who would join in this genocidal order. You'd need a small army to destroy the Uchiha clan, they are most formidable".
He exhales deeply, a heavy sense of sorrow weighs on the Hokage's shoulders, or perhaps more appropriately, he feels it in his very soul.
"But the choice, is yours 21" ------------------------------------------ Free Will: Make your own fate
"I wish to save the Uchiha," you state, "there is no reason for bloodshed, especially amongst fellow villagers. Are there any leads or possible entry means into the clan itself? I'm obviously not an Uchiha, and trying to claim such would be foolish. Are any working for you that you trust? I can perhaps befriend them, and maybe that's how I can enter the fold".
Sarutobi furls his brow deep in thought.
"A novel idea, but it will be dangerous," he says, "if you are caught, that will further the animosity between the Leaf and the Uchiha".
"Then I should make sure not to be caught," you answer confidently as you look at Randel. "I also think it would be best if I try this alone. But we should try to stop this division immediately Sarutobi-sensei. There is no Leaf and the Uchiha, the Uchiha are part of the Leaf just as the Leaf are part of the Uchiha".
The Hokage looks at you as if measuring you. He seems satisfied after a couple seconds and acknowledges you with a smile.
"I am happy with my decision," he says, "Randel shall stay with me, I will help him train and find out more about his mother. I have a feeling I can kill two birds with one stone however".
He walks to the corner of his office towards a filing cabinet. He opens it and pulls out a large manila folder. Sarutobi then places the folder gently on the desk and slides it to you. You take it and open the folder. It's a ninja dossier, fairly common, except this is on an ANBU member. This is highly classified information he is giving you.
"But sensei, this is a child!" you exclaim as you hold the young ninja's picture in your hand.
Sarutobi shakes his head and bites his lip.
"These are sad times we live in," Sarutobi replies with a subtle hint of melancholy in his tone. "21, this child is merely 10 years old. However, he is a chunin already, and I just signed his papers to allow him into the ANBU. But his age isn't what bothers me. It's who sponsored his admission into the ANBU".
A jolt of electricity crackles down your spine. The denouement of this conspiracy is finally coming full circle.
"My lord, you don't possibly mean... Was Danzo pushing for him to be admitted?" you ask barely able to formulate a proper sentence.
"Unfortunately, yes. And with much fervor. I do not know him very well, but my sources tell me he is a good kid. Perhaps, it is not too late to pry Danzo's claws off of him. He has a good friend, name Shisui. That would be another way to gain his trust".
"I understand my lord".
"I will instruct him that he is to work with you on your jutsu," Sarutobi instructs, "I will say the truth, for the most part. You were born here a while ago, but you were kidnapped and experimented on. Because of this, you have forgotten your jutsus and proper chakra control".
"It might not be a bad idea for him to train me in taijutsu either," you surmise, "and if this Shisui really is his best friend. Well, that's definitely the route I should take. But as far as my father and mother are concerned, I will say I don't know a thing".
"That is probably in the best interest," he acknowledges, "however, you are still fresh from that hell, you do not have to work on this right away. I will instruct some of my attendants to give you quarters and meals. Use your time however you see fit".
"Itachi.... Itachi Uchiha," you mutter to yourself as you close the folder.
-------------------------------- A: Rest a couple of days and then meet Shisui B: Rest a couple of days and then meet with Itachi C: Rest a couple of days and get some training in before doing anything D: Go to bed for tonight, but begin your mission immediately tomorrow going to see Itachi E: Same as D, but you meet with Shisui first
You meet the attendants and say good night to Sarutobi-sensei and Randel. The Hokage had said he wanted to speak with Randel a bit before calling it a night.
You make your way to your quarters and you settle in. Deciding to go straight to bed, you thank the attendants but refuse any dinner. Before going to bed you look over the information Sarutobi-sensei gave you. You pour over it, making sure to engrave everything in your mind. You close your eyes to try to get some sleep, but you keep seeing everything in the file. You are ready. You eventually pass out from exhaustion, memorizing the information over and over again.
You wake up the next morning feeling refreshed, but notice it's a little later than you had planned. You get dressed and immediately head over to the Uchiha district of the village. You remember from the file that Shisui likes to spend his days staring at the lake near Itachi's home.
You find him there, and walk up to him nonchalantly looking at the lake.
"I remember this lake," you say as you stare out towards the lake, "I feel like I'm home now. It brings back... memories".
Shisui looks at you oddly, your face is obviously new to him.
"I'm sorry," you say extending your hand offering a smile, "I'd introduce myself, but oddly enough, I don't have a name. Everyone's calling me 21".
Shisui looks at your hand hesitantly. You notice he has spotted the headband Sarutobi-sensei has given you. You hold your smile. Shisui shakes your hand.
"You're a little old to still be a genin aren't you?" he says coolly. "Didn't pay attention in class much? I'm Shisui, Shisui Uchiha".
You laugh and scratch your head. "Yeah well, that's not even the best part. You'll really think I'm sad when you find out why I'm here. I mean, I'm unfortunately not an Uchiha".
Shisui smirks at you.
"I'm here to train under a ten year old, the kids a genius I hear," you say casually, "I wish I could be a better ninja. It's pretty embarrassing to tower over your superiors. But you know, things happen, missions go bad-"
"People get kidnapped and experimented on," Shisui says as he interrupts you.
Sensei is good, he got the word out. You bow your head in shame and play the part.
"Yeah... I don't remember much. Truth is, my memory only starts at three days ago. But something about this lake. It... makes me feel at home".
You sigh solemnly and wait for Shisui to bite. The two of you stare at the water.
"I know what you mean," Shisui says, finally breaking the silence. "Very few things are as simple as this lake. There aren't any missions, politics, or even combat. It just, is".
Shisui laughs under his breath and turns to you. "And that ten year old you're referring to, that's Itachi, Itachi-sensei to you. And he's like my little brother, so watch your tone".
You act flustered and embarrassed. "No senpai, I didn't mean that, I would never. I mean, I'm just saying it's sad that a ten year old has it more together than I do, that's all. I mean, I'm honored to train under an Uchiha".
You stop talking when Shisui raises his hand to stop you.
"It's alright, it's hard for even me to believe how strong Itachi has become," Shisui admits, "the Uchiha name carries a lot of pressure. Don't dishonor your family. You aren't honoring the Uchiha by dishonoring your family".
You lower your head and close your eyes. "I'm sorry senpai. I didn't mean anything by it. I just feel... unlucky. I don't have a family. I almost wish for any clan name. All I have is a number. A number senpai. I don't have anything else... Please forgive my behavior, I don't know if I've always been such an idiot or if it's the result of my disappearance. But, I won't disappoint Itachi-sensei, or you senpai".
Shisui gasps and stares at you. You awkwardly bow your head twice.
"Don't try so hard, you've had it pretty rough," Shisui says as he pats you on the shoulder, "I'm sorry, I just have a lot of my mind right now".
"Jackpot" you think to yourself, "but I better take this slow". -------------------------------------------- A: Ask about Itachi B: Ask him for combat advice C: Listen to him and wait to see if he says anything else D: Continue the conversation casually Free Will
"You sure chose a terrible time to return home, that's for sure," Shisui says as he turns back to face the lake. "What with the raids on that secret facility last night and everything. Word is Danzo was responsible for it, but that wouldn't make sense. At least not on the surface".
You feel Shisui's gaze on you. He is testing you. You won't fail.
"Who is Danzo senpai?" you ask innocently.
"You don't know who Danzo is? That's interesting, you did come out of his facility didn't you?" Shisui glares at you coldly.
He is obviously well informed. No wonder the Uchiha are up in arms. They have no idea who is on their side.
"I came out of a torture chamber yesterday," you say honestly, "I don't know anything other than that. Well that, and my cellmate. He was a taijutsu user named Randel Oland".
"Oland? I recognize that..." Shisui places his fingers to his chin in a pensive expression, "Ah, the foreigner. I heard about him too. They say he's big, really big".
"Yeah he is," you answer, "if it wasn't for him, I might be dead right now. He saved my life".
"You know, you're a shinobi 21," Shisui says as he turns to face you again. "You are entirely too honest for your own good. It never pays for a ninja to be honest and speak so much".
You notice Shisui's eyes are changing color. They are turning a deep red, with 3 tomoes surrounding the tiny black pupil. You know what this is, it's the sharigan. Shisui of the Body Flicker is known to possess excellent sharingan techniques. He could control you if he wanted to, but you have a split second decision to make. Is he serious? Or just testing you? ----------------------------- Clutch Moment A: Jump backwards and cast a jutsu (The one will be determined later if this wins) B: Look at him curiously and act confused as to what he's doing C: Place a kunai to Shisui's throat and demand that he stop, ignoring eye contact D: Tell him that the Uchiha Sharingan is world famous and you've never seen it up close before. Playing it off as if you don't realize you're being attacked Free Will: Make your Fate
You put your hands up in front of your face and say "Senpai! Is that the sharingan!? Have I done something wrong?! Is there an enemy nearby?!"
You pull out a kunai and look around and give your back to Shisui.You feel the air get cut behind your head right before you feel a sharp sting upside your head.
"Fool! Never give your back to an enemy!" Shisui's voice echoes throughout your ears.
You turn around and lower your hands. You know you're not in a genjutsu, you feel the earth beneath your feet firmly.
"Senpai? You're my enemy?" you ask. You make your lip quiver. You obviously were convincing enough.
"Fool..." Shisui says as the crimson disappears from his eyes, "you're too stupid to be a spy. What would possess you to stand in front of the Sharingan?"
"I di -didn't," you stammer, "I didn't know... I mean, was that a test? A spy? What? Wha- what's wrong senpai?"
Shisui seems frustrated.
"I suppose it would really be idiotic to send a spy the day right after such an event? My apologies kohai," Shisui says with a very slight bow of his head. "I was... a little... quick to judge. The Uchiha are not used to being greeted with such fervor. Most despise us, or at least envy us. We are also not used to be in someone's debt, and for mistrusting you, I feel I am in your debt... But that will change".
"Shisui! Shisui!" you hear a voice cry from behind you.
You turn and see a small, skinny, frail looking boy. He seems cheerful and naive. Friendly and sweet. How little he knows of the world. How could this Itachi Uchiha help you?
"Itachi-sensei!" you say with a bow.
"Sensei huh? Beat ya to it Shisui!" Itachi exclaims as he lands next to you and Shisui gracefully. Itachi playfully bumps Shisu on the elbow.
Indeed, they do look like two brothers playing cheerfully.
"Yes, you sure did Itachi," Shisui says with perhaps the first real smile you've seen him make. "It doesn't matter though, I'm still ahead of you in the looks department. Besides, 21 here might be honest, but I doubt he'll make for much of a ninja. I'm glad they gave him to you and not me".
You get the feeling that Shisui is pouring it on a little thick. You're almost positive that he doesn't fully trust you yet. But he trusts you enough, for now.
"So, 21 huh?" Itachi says with a smile. "Don't you have any name at all?"
"No, I do not," you answer. "At least, not one I remember".
"Well, you're a little too old to be a genin," he states the obvious, "how old are you? 16? 17? 20?"
"I don't know how old I am sir," you answer honestly, "but I will make up for my underdevelopment with hard work".
"You're both knuckleheads," Shisui states, "but, you're both kindhearted knuckleheads. It would seem anyway". Shisui throws a glance full of caution at you.
"Well, how about a practice match, so I know where you stand 21?" Itachi asks as if ignoring Shisui.
"He is not even in your brother's league Itachi," Shisui says, "and he is fearful of the Sharingan. As he should be. Isn't that right kohai?
"I will not have you insulting my student Shisui!" Itachi announced with a sudden change in tone. His eyes now glowing with a ferocity that demanded respect.
"As you wish Itachi," Shisui said with a bow of respect.
This boy... He's ten. He's a genius. His file has nothing but commendations and accolades. One instructor even went so far as to say that he was a genius that only comes around maybe once in a century. Could this boy REALLY be this powerful? In the ANBU? A chunin... Could he really beat.. you?
You're not sure how well you can act and maintain your cover during a fight. Especially with two esteemed Uchiha here watching your every move. You might be able to pull it off, but if you fail, it might be messy. ------------------------ A: Let's spar! B: I don't think that's a good idea sensei, I'm not ready C: I was hoping for some instructional training instead D: Ask to fight Shisui instead, so that Itachi could see all of your faults Free Will: Make your Fate
"Actually sensei, I was hoping for some instructional training instead," you admit, "I don't really think I'm ready to spar. I don't even know much. My memory's gone, so, if I were to spar with you, it'd be like fighting a newborn".
"At least your students knows his limits Itachi," Shisui snickers.
Itachi turns to Shisui with a cold, emotionless expression. "Hey Shisui?"
"Yeah?" he answers still snickering.
"I got a better idea," Itachi announces, "instead of sparring, why don't we just practice the jutsus he does know. On a live target. That would be you, Shisui of the Body Flicker. Why don't you use that famous Body Flicker of yours to dodge my student's attacks?"
Well that sure shut Shisui up.
"Wait, what?" Shisui raises his eyebrows in outrage, "you want me to be his target? Have you forgotten our bloodline? We are Uchiha!"
"A name is nothing without action Shisui," Itachi informs calmly, "you would empower the name with words, but lack the humility to help others? Is that what our family has sunk to my friend? Have we become braggarts and hyenas, preying on the weak and kicking those who cannot kick back?"
Seems like there's something to this kid after all.
"Very well," Shisui says as he takes off his jacket, "I will only use my Body Flicker and my Sharingan for defense purposes. Can I hit kohai if he drops his guard?"
"That depends on my student, we are here are teachers, not bullies," Itachi clarifies, "what do you say 21?"
You know that you've backpedaled quite a bit, and anymore avoidance will look more than a little peculiar. But if you do decide to try your jutsu on him, you're not sure how you could make yourself look like a pure novice. You feel that even with your stronger jutsu, Shisui might still deck you properly if he felt like it, especially if he uses the Sharingan. ---------------------------------------- A: I'll agree with the condition that he doesn't strike me. He's on another level, striking me would prove nothing. B: I'll agree with whatever condition he wants C: I'm not really comfortable with this, Shisui could get hurt D: Can't we work on the basics instead? E: He can hit me if he wants, but the Sharingan is too much of a handicap Free Will
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 18:53:05 GMT
"I will fight senpai, but I think him using the Sharingan is too much," you say meekly, "I don't even know what the Sharingan can do, but I know it means I'm going to get demolished".
"Tch" Shisui exclaims with disgust, "at least he isn't a complete idiot. You are right to fear the Sharingan".
"Enough, show me your style then 21. Without the Sharingan however, I wish Shisui to at least try to attack you. Shisui, show restraint, nothing powerful, and not too much, or I WILL interfere. It's a fair compromise," Itachi orders as he jumps away from you two.
Oh great. Itachi just gave him the go ahead to attack you.
Shisui eyes you and backs away slowly. He then starts circling you, his eyes never leaving yours.
I can only use low level jutsu, at least for now, you think. I'll use my body flicker, and my lightning shuriken. But I don't want to seem completely inept. I'll go no higher than B rank jutsu. I don't want to seem like a complete waste of time.
Shisui yells and disappears in a cloud of smoke. He appears next to you and knees you in the face, you tumble backwards, struggling to regain your footing.
"Fire style! Fireball jutsu!" Shisui places his fingers to his mouth and blows a steady stream of fire that turns into a ball of flaming chakra at you. You decide to move just enough to be able to still take about half of the blow, you can't be too obvious.
The fireball slams into your right half and sends you spinning through the air. You hear Itachi yell in sympathy. As you fall to the earth, you make your own seals. ---------------------- A: Cast Lightning Clone B: Cast Lightning Beast C: Cast Static Field and try to ensnare him in it D: Throw lightning shuriken at him.
You look at the left and right of the field as you descend to the earth.
"Lightning Style: Static Field" you touch the ground and place your hands on the earth.
You shake your head in frustration.
"Damn!" you yell out in frustration. Shisui merely laughs at you.
You use your body flicker to gain some distance between you and Shisui, and stop on top of the lake.
"I will show you why I am called Shisui Uchiha of the Body Flicker!" he proclaims loudly as he runs swiftly towards you. Shisui roars in pain as the invisible trap you laid springs as he passes the proximity of the Static Field.
Shisui gathers his composure and starts a series of handseals. He's very proficient, you can tell, in a straight up match, you'd be completely outclassed.
"Fire style! Fire Wing!"
Shisui spits into the air a heavy flame that shapes itself into a giant bird. The bird flies at you in a high speed dive. -------------------------- A: Summon a lightning beast to disperse the flames B: Try to substitute as soon as the flame gets near you, you think you can make it underwater. C: Throw Lightning Shuriken at him D: Use force lightning on Shisui and try to get to him before the bird reaches you
You wait and watch the fire bird swoop down at you. You wait until the last available moment. When the fire bird is almost upon you, you kick water up and perform a substitution jutsu. You slip underwater and stay under the surface and watch. The fire bird swoops to where you used to be and creates a gigantic steamy mist.
You swim as fast as you can and emerge behind Shisui, about ten feet away.
"Lightning Style: Lightning Shuriken STORM!" You throw a dozen chakra infused shuriken at Shisui.
He never had a chance. The shurikens arc with electricity between one another creating a rather large electric field. Shisui screams as he feels your lightning chakra course through his body. He falls into the water and starts dog paddling to keep himself afloat.
"ENOUGH!" Itachi screams as he jumps onto the lake to help Shisui up.
Itachi sighs and looks at Shisui.
"You're better than this Shisui," Itachi states, almost in a berating tone, "you let your anger and pride get the better of you. You were beaten by basic techniques".
Shisui grunts in protest as he gets to his feet. "You have bested me this day 21," Shisui gives you the weapon and shield sign and bows. His first sign of respect. "I wonder how you would fare against the Sharingan. You won fairly though, and I commend that".
Itachi smiles and walks towards you.
"And you," Itachi points his finger at you, "you won by pure strategy and intellect. If everyone could fight using their brains over brawn, there would be much less bloodshed. You did very well, I can hardly wait until I see your intellect combined with actual elite techniques. You would be something truly legendary. For now, I recommend you take a break, I will teach you some techniques which will help you. After this, rest and see me tomorrow. Much earlier this time please".
Shisui smiles at you, a real smile and disappears from sight with a splash of water.
"So what would you like to learn?" ------------------------ Excellent work guys. Experience Reward A: 1 point to your base stats B: Learn a jutsu of your choosing (this includes golem style, the ones I mentioned earlier. These will come with a much higher success rate, but I can't tell you the %) C: Gain a continue D: Master an already known jutsu (less chakra cost, possible efficiency and/or damage bonus) E: Increase your chakra pool
"Golem style huh?" Itachi says, almost in awe, "that sounds really useful actually. I can't say I've ever seen anyone do something like that; I think I might have heard about it, but it was a long time ago, I don't really remember. I was just a little kid back then!"
Itachi smiles at you anxiously. It's hard to keep up with Itachi-sensei's mood changes, his demeanor changes one minute from a gleeful kid the next to a stone cold killer.
You close your your eyes and you see your journal in the dark recesses of your mind. You open it and flip to the page for golem style. There it is... So that's the trick, not too difficult at all.
You open your eyes and do the necessary seals. Unfortunately, the seals for this technique are new and untraditional. It takes a little longer to cast than other jutsus.
"Golem Style! Steel Golem!"
You channel your chakra over all the weapons Itachi has laid before you. Your chakra pours over each weapon visibly and you manage to get a "wow" out of Itachi-sensei. The weapons stack up, meld, melt, and conform to fit one another and create a human sized golem.
"That's... really disturbing actually," Itachi states as he walks around the golem.
The golem turns to face you, inside your head you hear what sounds the screeching of metal against metal.
"Master? What would you like me to specialize in? I can..." ------------------------------- A: Specialize in close quarters combat. I can use all my weapons for melee B: Specialize in ranged combat. I can launch all my weapons at targets and make them come back to me. This makes me a little vulnerable while the weapons are separated from my body however C: I can balance my fighting style and practice both long and short range D: Don't do anything right now
You postulate that the golem responds to your mental commands. This could come in handy.
"This might sound odd," you think trying to communicate with your golem, "but could I conduct my lightning chakra through you?"
"Yes master..."
"Great," you will keep that in mind as that might prove invaluable, "I want you to specialize in close combat".
The golem changes configuration. You hear the grating noise of steel on steel as the weapons settle into a different location.
"That things really something else," Itachi says, "that's enough for today I think. You did a great job today 21. Keep up the good work. Don't think that today was normal. Your training under me starts at the break of dawn, not late in the afternoon. And today you did well, so you're getting a short day. But tomorrow, you're going to be worked real hard".
"Yes Itachi-sensei," you say with a bow. The golem looks at you curiously and also bows to Itachi.
"That thing is also kinda creepy," Itachi says with a sly smile.
"So, what will you do now sensei?" you ask casually as you walk over to your golem. You start examining the golem closely, in interest and in trying to seem aloof.
"I have to stop by my house," Itachi answers as he skips a rock across the lake, "things are uneasy right now. Hey, if you act properly, maybe you can even stop by one day!"
"That sounds great sensei," you say calmly, "it'd be nice to visit a normal home and see what it's like. Maybe that'll help jog my memories. Sure whenever you want, just let me know".
"Well, it's still early," Itachi says matter-of-factly, "if you want you can come today, it's not too far off".
This is a great opportunity, but this also means going deeper into Uchiha territory. If Shisui is anything representative of the clan, you will be even more closely scrutinized by the family. But damn, it sure could pay off... but shouldn't I report to the Hokage? Wow, maybe I shouldn't report to the Hokage at all, Shisui knows so much, he might find out.
"Hey, you still with us 21?" Itachi says with a clap of his hands to get your attention.
"Sorry sensei, I was experiencing a memory," you lie.
"Well, that's great right? One step a time!" Itachi cheers you on, "so, what are you going to do kohai?" ------------------------- A: Report to the Hokage B: Call it a day and get your golem home to examine it and maybe learn more about it C: Go with Itachi-sensei to his home, you'll wing it with his folks D: Tell Itachi-sensei you just want to look at the lake some more and train Free Will: Make your Fate
"I'm sorry sensei," you say softly, "I am really honored by your invitation. I would take it, but these memories, they keep flooding in. It's bittersweet".
Itachi smiles and pokes you in the arm.
"Don't worry about it kohai," he says without a hint of hesitation, "You did really well today. I'm pretty proud. You're not half as bad as I thought you would be".
You laugh and scratch your head.
"Yeah, apparently everyone knows more about me than I do," you reply, "Shisui was pretty scary earlier. I just... I just really like it out here. Shisui's right about this lake. It's nice and peaceful. It's not complicated. How do you deal with it sensei? I mean- I only have a couple day's worth of memories. But in my heart, in my soul you know? I feel like I have a lot to protect here. I don't remember why. I don't remember anything, but I know I have to protect the Leaf. That's why I need to get stronger. I was really happy when they told me about how strong you are and that you would teach me. But, I also feel kind of pathetic standing next to you. You're so young and have already accomplished so much-"
"Stop," Itachi says firmly cutting you off. He gazes at the lake with sad eyes. Is this his true self? Is the perky child just a facade? What has this prodigy seen that has given him these eyes? "I can identify more with you than you think kohai. I'm ten and I have quite a lot on my mind. It's interesting to hear you talk about me and the Uchiha. You sound like you want to be in my shoes. You sound envious. In truth, I wish I was in your shoes kohai".
Itachi turns to face you, he motions for you to take a seat on a nearby rock. You bow and accept his invitation. He pulls out a kunai and shows you the handle. There is a red and white fan on the handle, it's small, barely visible, but you know what it means. It's the Uchiha clan symbol.
"You see that fan?" Itachi asks softly, "that fan is supposed to fan away the smoke of war. It's meant to be a symbol of a proud clan. However, lately, it feels as if that fan only fans the fires of war, making peace impossible. I have impossible goals to live up to. I am proud to be Uchiha, but it's also a burden".
You see Itachi place the kunai away. A thin film of moisture begins to cover Itachi-sensei's eyes. Is he fighting back... tears?
"You know what my father said to me when I joined the ANBU?" Itachi asked, his tongue rolling against the inside of his cheek. He shakes his head in remembrance. "He said 'about time, you better make me proud'. I never hear 'good job' or 'hey, don't sweat it'. But that's not even the worst part. I have my brother... Sasuke".
Itachi's eyes glow with fondness at the idea of his brother. How old is Itachi's soul you wonder? What could make a ten year old child so cynical and concerned?
"Sasuke is 6 years old, and he wants to grow up to be just like me," he says as he regains his composure and looks at you, "and I don't want that to ever happen. I don't want Sa-chan to be burdened with my father's pressure and the Uchiha name. I want him to be as different as me as possible. I want him to be happy".
Itachi-sensei lowers his head almost in mourning. You feel sadness pick at your stomach. Should you ask what happened that nags at his soul? He turns to you.
"So when you say that you want to be powerful and great like me," Itachi starts as his expression turns into a smile, "I respond by saying I want to be like you. No memories. With the only goal in mind to find myself and know myself truly. Not the me that my father and everyone else wants me to be, just the real me. I want to defend the Leaf too. So let's promise to do our best together, alright?"
Itachi holds out his fist and shows you his pinky. A promise? ---------------------------- Make your Fate
You hold out your hand and shake his pinky with your pinky.
"Let's protect the Leaf and all the people we care about together sensei," you swear, "there are so many great people here. I will protect them. Even if Shisui kills me first".
You laugh cheerfully. Itachi smiles, trying to stifle his laughter, but he erupts into laughter as well.
"You know, I don't think I've seen Shisui so mad, ever," Itachi states humorously, "I thought I was going to have to step in there and get him off of you".
"Yeah, I thought you might have had to do that as well, he's real scary".
Itachi continues to chuckle softly and throws another rock into the lake.
"Nah, he's just concerned. He's pretty protective of me. I see him as an older brother, actually. He was there for me when I was younger. You wouldn't believe it, but I used to refuse to fight".
"What?" you ask in shock, "what do you mean refuse to fight?"
"I know, right?" Itachi laughs, "yeah. I still hate fighting, it doesn't solve anything. All it does is cause more fighting. Think about it. First guy fights the second guy. First guy wins. Second guy comes back for revenge. First guy loses that time, so then he comes for revenge. It never ends".
"So what do you mean, Shisui was there for you?"
"Well, when you're the first born of the leader of the Uchiha and you refuse to fight, there are problems," Itachi says with a bit of a grimace. "So I got picked on a lot. I wouldn't fight back or anything, you would think that make them stop but nah. They just beat me up. Pretty bad too. Shisui is older and he would come and scare the bullies away. That's how it was for... months I guess. Maybe even years, this feels like it was way back".
You laugh softly.
"Sensei, with all respect, you're only ten," you state. You feel confident you can get a little more familiar with him. "When you say things like way back, you sound like an elder".
Itachi chortles at the thought.
"That is pretty funny actually," he admits, "but I do feel old I guess. I mean, it all changed with the Third Great Shinobi World War. Father was out fighting, and it fell to me to protect Sa-chan. I had to... change I guess. The world is a sad one..."
Itachi's expression turns sour once again.
"So yeah, the bullies stopped altogether after that, the ones that were alive anyway. But enough gloom and doom".
Itachi gets up and dusts himself off.
"I gotta get going before dad gets mad. If he comes to look for me, I'll work you three times as hard tomorrow as punishment. It's your fault after all, for being so late".
"Three times Itachi-sensei? You skipped right over two times?"
"Like I said, you were late today, you're working twice as hard tomorrow regardless. See ya".
And with that Itachi disappears, a flock of crows caw as they appear in Itachi's place.
"What the hell... crows?" you say out loud, astonished. "Itachi-sensei really is something else".
You get up and dust yourself off as well.
"Well, what the hell do I do now?" --------------------------------- A: Report to the Hokage B: Walk around the Uchiha district and try to memorize the layout C: Head back to your quarters and do some brushing up on Itachi's family through attendants (so as to avoid any direct contact with the Hokage D: Train some more here in.... (your choice)
You look around and contemplate your situation. By the looks of it, the mission is going well so far. But Shisui is really protective of Itachi-sensei, and that means you might be under surveillance right now. Keeping that in mind, you look at your golem. You wonder what you could do with it. Maybe a... fusion? Seems interesting you think.
"I should name you shouldn't I?" you say out loud to your golem. "You're going to be around all the time, I don't think I'd feel comfortable calling you 'it' or 'golem'. Hmmm..."
You look at the lake and smile.
"I got it, from now on, you're Mizuumi, understand?"
You hear the golem acknowledge your moniker.
"Let's get out of here Miz," you instruct your golem. You feel it's unsafe to train in Uchiha territory. If you are going to be stalked by Shisui or any other Uchiha, you're going to make them work for it.
You shunshin all the way to the Hokage mansion. You look at the top of the mansion. It's a little dramatic, but hey, it's effective you think. You order Mizuumi up to the roof. To your surprise, Mizuumi is very nimble despite his weight. He jumps ledge to ledge and ends up on the roof. You channel your chakra and run up the side of the building.
"Hey Miz, I doubt it, but I got to ask. Can you walk up the side of the building like me? Or stand on water?"
You feel silence in your mind, until a brief "No" is spoken to you by Mizuumi.
"Great, I get the mindless pile of steel with an attitude problem," you say with a smirk, "I just wanted to be sure alright. As if the fact that a ton of weapons is walking and talking to me inside my head is just a normal day at the office".
"I can talk normally too," Mizuumi says out loud in his scratchy voice.
You wince, it is a little annoying to the ear.
"Alright chatty, try to work on not causing me to shiver when I hear your voice. Anyways, I got an idea. Look at what I'm thinking right now".
You wait patiently and think out a battle strategy. It's pretty effective actually.
"That should work out just fine. Crude yet elegant, you ready?" you ask Mizuumi.
You hear his affirmation in your mind.
You make the seals necessary for both Golem Style and Lightning Style.
"Golem Fusion! Lightning Rod!"
You extend your right arm and throw a bolt of lightning towards Mizuumi. Mizuumi extends all of his weapons out of his body and thrashes his body like a spinning top. Katanas, tantos, wakizashis, knives, kunais, and all sorts of metallic mayhem whirl around in a death spin. Lightning arcs back and forth from all the tips of the weapons on Mizuumi. After about 10 seconds, the lightning dies down and Mizuumi stops spinning and reconfigures to his normal form.
You pant. It's a chakra intensive technique, and the casting time sucks. You really need to train your hand seals in Golem Style, it takes too long to cast. The technique itself would be great for battle, but you'd need an opening to cast it at this level.
You GAIN: Golem Fusion: Lightning Rod A Rank Jutsu Chakra cost: 50 points of chakra
------------------- Make your Fate
You look around and contemplate your situation. By the looks of it, the mission is going well so far. But Shisui is really protective of Itachi-sensei, and that means you might be under surveillance right now. Keeping that in mind, you look at your golem. You wonder what you could do with it. Maybe a... fusion? Seems interesting you think.
"I should name you shouldn't I?" you say out loud to your golem. "You're going to be around all the time, I don't think I'd feel comfortable calling you 'it' or 'golem'. Hmmm..."
You look at the lake and smile.
"I got it, from now on, you're Mizuumi, understand?"
You hear the golem acknowledge your moniker.
"Let's get out of here Miz," you instruct your golem. You feel it's unsafe to train in Uchiha territory. If you are going to be stalked by Shisui or any other Uchiha, you're going to make them work for it.
You shunshin all the way to the Hokage mansion. You look at the top of the mansion. It's a little dramatic, but hey, it's effective you think. You order Mizuumi up to the roof. To your surprise, Mizuumi is very nimble despite his weight. He jumps ledge to ledge and ends up on the roof. You channel your chakra and run up the side of the building.
"Hey Miz, I doubt it, but I got to ask. Can you walk up the side of the building like me? Or stand on water?"
You feel silence in your mind, until a brief "No" is spoken to you by Mizuumi.
"Great, I get the mindless pile of steel with an attitude problem," you say with a smirk, "I just wanted to be sure alright. As if the fact that a ton of weapons is walking and talking to me inside my head is just a normal day at the office".
"I can talk normally too," Mizuumi says out loud in his scratchy voice.
You wince, it is a little annoying to the ear.
"Alright chatty, try to work on not causing me to shiver when I hear your voice. Anyways, I got an idea. Look at what I'm thinking right now".
You wait patiently and think out a battle strategy. It's pretty effective actually.
"That should work out just fine. Crude yet elegant, you ready?" you ask Mizuumi.
You hear his affirmation in your mind.
You make the seals necessary for both Golem Style and Lightning Style.
"Golem Fusion! Lightning Rod!"
You extend your right arm and throw a bolt of lightning towards Mizuumi. Mizuumi extends all of his weapons out of his body and thrashes his body like a spinning top. Katanas, tantos, wakizashis, knives, kunais, and all sorts of metallic mayhem whirl around in a death spin. Lightning arcs back and forth from all the tips of the weapons on Mizuumi. After about 10 seconds, the lightning dies down and Mizuumi stops spinning and reconfigures to his normal form.
You pant. It's a chakra intensive technique, and the casting time sucks. You really need to train your hand seals in Golem Style, it takes too long to cast. The technique itself would be great for battle, but you'd need an opening to cast it at this level.
You GAIN: Golem Fusion: Lightning Rod A Rank Jutsu Chakra cost: 50 points of chakra
------------------- Make your Fate
You choose to go and get some much needed rest. The attendants provide an invigorating shower and a great meal. You pass by Randel in the hallway. You both exchange pleasantries and talk about your respective days. Apparently, the Third is pounding the hell out of Randel, but he doesn't even notice it. Randel has an extreme pain threshold. You take note of that and ask him to have the Hokage give you all the information he has on the Uchiha. He nods and walks away. You go to your quarters to wait patiently for the intel you requested. After a couple short minutes, you hear a knock on your door. You answer it and see a gigantic pile of books at your doorstep.
"What the?" you say aloud as you look up and down the corridor looking for the courier. "There's no way I can pour over all of this tonight..." You grunt as you lug all the heavy tomes into your room. You browse the files and books and look for certain specifics. Amongst your speedreading, you find several important pieces of information.
Itachi's father is a man named Fugaku. Not only is he the leader of the Uchiha clan, but he is also the head of the Konoha Military Police Force, a force that primarily consists of other Uchiha. It's main purpose is for the most elite shinobi to watch and ensure that the Leaf ninja themselves are all following the law.
It seems that this organization was founded by an Uchiha at first. But while reading further, you found an entry dating back to the second Hokage that contradicted this. While comparing the two sources, you realize that the Second actually made and gave the KMPF to the Uchiha clan as a sign of respect and accomplishment. Somewhere, over the years perhaps, the Uchiha's have grown to resent this and see it as a distraction method so that they would never get true power over the government.
"Their unrest runs deep," you mutter to yourself and shake your head. "This has been decades in the making... Who knows when this will boil over. These suggests a bloody and violent rebellion. I'm surprised it hasn't happened already...How could they let this evolve to this?"
You continue reading and find a reference made to a 9 tailed beast. The hell? You thumb through the books impatiently trying to find something on this 9 tailed beast. You find nothing except what you originally found. The Jonin council hold the KMPF and the Uchiha directly responsible for the 9 tailed beast attack. But what the hell is this 9 tailed beast and what does it have to do with the Uchiha?
You look at the door and consider leaving to go talk with Sarutobi-sensei. Unfortunately, that's risky. And you took a great risk already with all these notes.
Alright, so apparently Fugaku and Mikoto, Itachi's mother, were both absent before the attack. As the leader of the KMPF, this was considered a huge failure of his duties. Fugaku is considered a prudent and strict man, one who wasn't prone to falling out of a pattern. No wonder they think this was intentional... Could it have been? And what happened during the attack of the 9 tailed beast?
The questions continue to pile on without end. If the questions continue to arise without any answers, this investigation will be over real soon.
Fugaku apparently had wanted to place Itachi into the ANBU for a while...but kept getting his request rejected. No doubt he is steaming mad that now Itachi gets placed on Danzo's request. Maybe you can play the angle that the Third was hoping to make Itachi the bridge to peace between the two factions by granting Danzo and Fugaku's request. So many factors, your mind reels.
Further reading shows that, according to the Third himself, Fugaku is completely unwilling to compromise. Sarutobi-sensei suspects that Fugaku is vengeful towards the Leaf, and while on the surface appears to be willing to negotiate and pacify the Uchiha clan, Sarutobi feels that Fugaku is the one behind the coup.
That's a problem because Fugaku is admired and seen as a father figure to the entire clan. How can you possibly defuse this situation? You realize that only time will allow you to get into the Uchiha's good graces, and Itachi is central to that. Fugaku has placed his clan's entire future on Itachi's shoulders. THAT'S what Itachi meant about pressure. Damn...
You exhale and nervously tap your fingers on the desk. You know this will take time, but do you have enough? CAN this even be defused peacefully? You're going to have to read up more on Fugaku. Hopefully you don't meet up with him for a couple days, that would be catastrophic. But you simply don't have enough time tonight. You wonder about the 9 tailed beast attack and Fugaku. You pray you don't run into him. And worst of all, you still haven't even read on Mikoto or Sasuke. Your worries fatigue you to sleep.
You wake up early and run to the lake as agreed with Itachi-sensei. Your world has officially ended. There is Itachi-sensei, and next to him, is Fugaku. He looks at you with absolute disgust.
"So this is what my son has been burdened with," Fugaku announces. His voice is not loud, but the tone makes it sound supersonic in volume. He spits on the floor and curls his upper lip. "And it doesn't even have a name does it? Do you see how the village mocks us? They spurn and insult us with irrelevant swine unworthy of a proper lineage!" --------------------------------------- not a clutch moment... BUT BE CAREFUL. Cause... **** just got real A: Ignore Fugaku and bow to Itachi-sensei, it's not his fault his dad's a jerk B: Bow to both of them with respect and apologize for your lack of pedigree, but that you make up for it with hard work C: Tell Fugaku you are honored to be in his presence D: Leave. To hell with them. E: Wait for Itachi-sensei to say something Make your Fate------ but like I said, be careful. This one in particular can really help you, or hurt you
You bow to both of them respectfully.
"Greetings Itachi-sensei," you say still bowing, "I am honored to be trained by the mighty Uchiha clan".
"21, this is my father, Fugaku Uchiha, he is the head of the Konoha Military Police Force," Itachi reports with respect.
"I am most honored Fugaku-san," you say with another bow, "your son is an excellent teacher. I'm really lucky to have him".
Fugaku looks at you with utter contempt. He shakes his head and turns around, giving you his back.
"Shisui told me all about you," Fugaku says, "he says that you say you admire the Uchiha. He also said you have a good head on your shoulders. Odd that you appear so suddenly, out of nowhere, with no name or family".
"Yes sir, I had an incident where I lo"-
"I know that, I have been informed," Fugaku interrupts you, "he also told me how you beat him in combat yesterday. Even with the handicap my son placed on Shisui, it is hard to believe you defeated Shisui".
"I merely got lucky," you answer.
"Yes, that's another thing Shisui mentioned, your honesty and humility. It's all a little picture picture, isn't it?" Fugaku questions, "It's a bit too convenient. As soon as Itachi gets into the ANBU, because of Danzo no less, his first assignment is to train some no one who has taken too many hits to the head".
"Father, I will not have you disrespecting my student," Itachi snaps. Fugaku is infuriated.
"Excuse me, Itachi?"
"You heard me father, he is my student, my responsibility, it is not his fault that the Uchiha are suffering political turmoil," Itachi pleads.
"This solidifies my point further," Fugaku announces, "the Leaf are now trying to turn my own son against me. Itachi told me all about you, and your promise boy. Shisui tells me about your honesty. I say you prove it. The Uchiha have many enemies and we will not have the next head of the family teaching a man who might be planning to overthrow our clan. Are you willing to prove it? No matter what?"
"I have no interest in overthrowing the Uchiha, I respect them greatly," you answer honestly.
"Then prove it, enter my Sharingan," Fugaku suggests.
"Father, no, this is ridiculous, you could hurt him," Itachi says as he moves closer to your side.
"I will not hurt him, I just want him to tell me the truth," Fugaku states as he makes his way slowly to you.
"I sponsor him father," Itachi says as he activates his Sharingan. "I will enter a blood pact. I will take this man as my blood brother. He will be unable to betray us then".
"Yes, I remember this silly idea from last night Itachi," Fugaku says, his anger seething through his face. He activates his Sharingan as well. "If you do that Itachi, you would be letting this clanless ape into the Uchiha".
"As the next head of the Uchiha clan, it is my right and within my power to do so," Itachi states.
Fugaku is incensed, this has turned nasty. "If the ape accepts this, then he must be sealed and made to be unable to betray the Uchiha clan".
Itachi is at a loss for words. -------------------------------- Clutch Moment A: Let him place you in a genjutsu and try to count on your body's natural regeneration to resist it B: Refuse outright and leave C: Say that you only wanted to learn and get your life back on track, not be the constant object of scrutiny and accusations D: Accept Itachi's idea Make your Fate
"Excuse me gentlemen," you say politely at the first opportunity, "I do not mean to be rude. But I'd like to say something on my behalf".
Fugaku raises his head and looks away from you. "If you must," he says.
"Itachi-sensei has been nothing but fair and kind to me," you announce, "He has been patient, even though he was given what most would consider a tedious task that is beneath him. He has never complained and he has been the best teacher anyone could hope to have. With all respect intended, Shisui hated me from the moment he saw me. He bullied me, and he threatened me. But I was fine with it. I was fine with it because I understand. Just like I understand you right now Fugaku-san. You want to protect Itachi-sensei because he is so worthy of being protected. Your son is noble and brilliant. I will enter this blood pact and be honored to become Itachi-sensei's blood brother. I will finally have a family. But I will not agree to this seal to prevent me from supposedly betraying the Uchiha".
You raise your head up high and show your resolve.
"You see! He practically admits to being a traitor!" Fugaku shouts.
"I wasn't finished Fugaku-san," you inform. "I said I would not enter a seal that ensures I wouldn't betray the Uchiha. But I WILL enter a seal to never even THINK about betraying Itachi-sensei. To me, Itachi-sensei IS the Uchiha. And besides, Fugaku-san, as you yourself mentioned, Itachi-sensei is the future of the Uchiha clan, and the future leader. If I were to ever betray Itachi, it would be betraying the entire clan. But this seal will remove that possibility. Make it a killing seal. I am serious about your son Fugaku-san, I will protect him with my life if need be".
You look at Itachi-sensei. He seems uncomfortable but also complimented.
"That is unless Fugaku-san," you continue, "you wish the seal to be on me so that the Uchiha can attack me and I would be unable to defend myself? I saw the bloodlust in Shisui's eyes yesterday, and I see that same murderous intent in you sir. But I swear to you, I am not the monster you think I am".
"This is outrageous!" Fugaku shouts in frustration, "but very well! The Uchiha do not need an advantage in dealing with scum like you. I will make it a seal with the penalty of death. If you ever betray my son, you betray the Uchiha itself, like you said. And you will be lucky the shiningami will take you, for my wrath would be worse".
You roll up your sleeve and take out a kunai and stab it straight through to the bone. You leave the kunai there when you notice your arm is healing. Fugaku comes towards you and removes the kunai.
"Itachi, your arm," Fugaku demands.
Itachi gives him his arm. Fugaku cuts him with the kunai you handed him.
"There, your blood is mixed, now it's your turn," Fugaku says as he slowly starts turning to you, he stops as he notices Itachi's wound closing up right in front of his eyes. "What on earth?"
You step forward and grab the kunai from Fugaku's hand and once again stab yourself mixing Itachi's blood with your own.
"That's my family trick, the only thing I inherited from my parents" you inform. Fugaku's mouth is gaping, his eyes in shock.
"Would you please place the seal on me now Fugaku-san?" you request.
Fugaku looks at you and hurries to place the seal on you, reciting the conditions of the seal and empowering the seal.
"Perhaps this is exactly what we needed Itachi," Fugaku states, "now this monster is on our side".
This might have been a mistake you think, Fugaku seems the type to exploit.
"I am your son's brother now Fugaku-san," you announce, "please do not call me a monster".
Itachi looks at you and smiles innocently. "Well father, now that that's over with, is it alright if we get to his training?"
"Yes, ye-, yes of course," Fugaku states, "I would like to watch if you don't mind. After all, 21 is like a member of the family now".
Yeah, right. You're sure Fugaku is biting his tongue as he speaks those words.
"What shall we practice on today then bro?" Itachi says with a small laugh. You get the sense he's trying to bother Fugaku, but Fugaku seems to be deep in thought. ----------------------- Make your Fate
You tell Itachi about the problem with the Golem Style and the seals. Itachi explains that a basic foundation is key to mastering hand seals, regardless of the actual seal system itself. He also promises to try to help you improve on golem style later, but that he needs to see you use it a little more so that he can get a basic understanding of the way it works.
Itachi truly is a genius. As he shows you his seals, he uses a fireball jutsu to demonstrate.
"See the thing is," Itachi says as he takes a look over at his father, "the Sharingan helps immensely with hand seals. It just makes it a lot faster, but just like anything else, you got to practice until you get it. And you promised me loads of hard work. And you better deliver. You're an Uchiha now, and my big brother, so you can't make us look bad".
You hear Fugaku suck his teeth loudly showing obvious disapproval of Itachi's statements.
You continue the training for hours, you feel yourself becoming more comfortable, but you can tell you will need to practice.
"We'll work on this for the next couple of weeks," Itachi states, "then we'll see how you fare from there".
Itachi's brilliance is truly awe-inspiring, if you can't improve your hand seals under his tutelage, then you're hopeless you joke to yourself.
After a while Fugaku stands up and walks away. "Great, now I have two useless sons," he screams in anger before disappearing out of sight.
"What is that supposed to mean?" you ask Itachi-sensei.
Itachi seems hurt by Fugaku's statement.
"You're the best Itachi-sensei," you reassure, "you're not useless at all! You're the best!"
Itachi looks up at you and pokes you in the arm.
"First, drop the sensei honorific," Itachi says with a sadness in his eyes, "I meant what I said. We're brothers now and brothers don't use honorifics. Secondly, he's not talking about me. He's talking about Sa-chan... He really is hard on him. He goes on and on about how useless he is, and how embarrassing it is for Sasuke to be his son. It's my fault, I set the bar too high. Truth is, I didn't even do it on purpose, I just kept doing what my father told me to do. And somewhere... along the way... he just kept comparing me to Sa-chan and kept getting disappointed. At this point, he's practically given up on Sasuke. I really don't know what to do about it".
"Well, since we're brothers, you know what that means right?" You ask in an attempt to cheer Itachi up.
"Nah, I'm afraid I don't follow you bro," Itachi answers.
"It means Sasuke is my brother too," you say with a smile. This immediately brightens Itachi's expression. "And brothers train together. Why don't we all train together? Let's get Sasuke so powerful that Fugaku HAS to acknowledge him".
"I like that idea, actually, I love it," Itachi says, "And it means Sa-chan and I get to hang out more".
You smile and put your hand on his shoulder.
"Hey Itachi," you say lowly, "why did you do it?"
"Do what?"
"You barely know me, and you put your name, your family, everything on the line for me," you reply softly, "it's moving. But, why did you do it?"
He turns to face you and stares at you. His eyes turn a deep red, it's the Sharingan. You wonder why he is doing this, but you stand your ground and look at his eyes.
"Because you look at me in the eyes 21," Itachi says confidently, "because these eyes are not just for combat. The Sharingan has been used for far too long for combat. This all powerful eye should be used to see the good in people. I see the good in you 21. The fact that you don't avoid my gaze proves my trust in you isn't misplaced".
You slap him softly on the shoulder.
"Besides, it doesn't hurt that if you try to hurt me the seal will kill you dead," Itachi says with a laugh and a sudden turn. "Hey! Wanna go visit Sasuke right now? We've been at it for hours! I told him all about you yesterday and he really wanted to meet you, of course, dad was against it. But now, he's pretty much stuck" ---------------------------- A: Sure, let's go visit our youngest brother B: How about I take you out to eat instead, my treat? C: How about we pick him up and we all go eat, my treat? D: Nah, not today. I want to keep training in these hand seals
"I got an even better idea Itachi," you suggest gleefully, "how about I take my new little brothers out for some dinner? Somewhere nice, anywhere you guys want to go?"
Itachi looks at you and puts his hand up to his mouth. "Do you know how much that will piss dad off?" he says barely holding back a laugh, "that would be so terrible, but really, really funny at the same time".
"Well, I'm not one for defying dad, but if I'm part of the family, I got to act like it right?" you reply with a bit of mischief in your voice.
"Quite right older brother, quite right," Itachi replies with a mock serious tone. He pokes you in the arm and laughs.
You join him in his laughter and for a moment, you forget that you're on a mission. This feels... nice. Being able to say you're Itachi's older brother feels... like an honor. Can it be that from days ago being in hell, you've actually gained... a family? Are you in too deep?
Itachi claps his hands in front of your face. "Wake up! You look like a crazy person!" he shouts with a giggle still lingering.
"Sorry little bro, this time, it's not old memories. I'm making new ones you know?" you say with a touch of sentimentality.
Itachi looks at you and erupts in wild laughter. "You're such a sap!" He pokes you in the arm again. "Calm on princess, race you to the house!" He starts running swiftly.
"Hey!" you say, "I don't know where your house is!"
"Then you better keep up you big girl!" Itachi answers as he turns a corner.
You sprint as fast as you can to try to keep up with him, as you turn the corner you see that he is almost out of eye sight. Geez, how fast is this kid?
"Lightning Style! Speed Shroud!"
Electricity springs forth from your stomach and extends to the outer edges of your body. You sprint as fast as you can and manage to find Itachi who looks at you with a disappointed expression.
"You cheater! I didn't use any jutsu!" he says jokingly.
"You also had a head start and know where to go," you reply. "You also didn't have a hard ass sensei grilling you to death the entire day. I guess what I'm trying to say is, tough luck, cry me a river".
He narrows his eyes. "Is that right?" He makes a plethora of hand seals within an instant and disappears amongst a flock of crows again. But the crows are all heading towards one direction this time as opposed to the last time.
This kid really is something else. You find yourself repeating that thought over and over again. You bet that this is another test, just more training. You jump to the house near by and dash from rooftop to rooftop following the flock of crows. Until it takes you to what you secretly know to be Itachi's house. You jump around to the backyard, where the crows were heading and there's Itachi with a playful grin on his face.
"Not bad kohai!" he says still smiling, "Sa-chan is this way. Come on!"
You follow him deeper into the backyard til you hear the thumping of wood. You eventually come to a boy who is training really thoroughly with the throwing of kunai and shuriken on wooden targets. He is a little small for his age, and he looks a lot like Itachi, except his black hair has almost a blue hue to it and it's not the raven black that Itachi's hair is.
"So, you must be Sasuke," you say as you bend over and extend your hand. Sasuke looks at you and then runs to Itachi and grabs his arm.
"It's ok Sa-chan, this is 21, remember him?" Itachi asks with closed eyes and another smile, "he's our older brother now. I kind of adopted him".
Sasuke points to the lightning rippling up and down your body.
"Oops, I'm sorry," you say hastily dispelling the jutsu, "I had to keep up with Itachi and it proved a bit difficult".
You laugh nervously. Sasuke comes closer to you now curiously and shakes your hand.
"He's a little shy, but really nice," Itachi says to you, "you just got to get him to know you, like I know you kohai. Oh, and don't mind the lightning jutsu. It's just I told him something I probably should have waited for".
"What's that?" you ask.
"Well, I've known that Sa-chan's chakra nature is lightning too, for a while now," Itachi explains, "so when he heard about you... Well, he wanted to see what it looked like. I'm fire, like most Uchiha, well and water too, oddly enough actually. But Sa-chan here is lightning".
Sasuke nods at you. "Nice to meet you 21," the little guy says, "that's your name? Did your mom have 20 kids or something?"
You chuckle. "That might be it come to think of it," you answer, "but I really don't know. I don't know my mother and father. You're really lucky in that regard Sasuke. Hey, would you like to go out to dinner?"
Sasuke smiles and nods his head
"I'd like to think you would ask his parents first," you hear a woman's voice behind you, "Itachi might be your sensei, but you hold no obligation or sway over Sasuke".
It's Mikoto and you don't know a thing about her personality. Oh ****. ------------------------------- Make your Fate
You bow and smile. "Greetings Mikoto-san," you say as you raise your head, "I was just following Itachi-sensei home. I had hoped to show my gratitude and respect for him and his family by inviting Itachi-sensei and Sasuke-san to dinner. I hope I wasn't rude or overstepping my bounds, I was just trying to be friendly".
She looks at you sternly, she looks pretty mean. Until she lets out a very feminine laugh and a nice looking smile.
"I'm just kidding dear," she says through a smile, "Sa-chan has been very anxious to meet you. I'm not like Fugaku, I understand that boys will be boys".
Wow. She is exactly what you would expect from a mother. Was your mother like this? You can tell where Itachi got his looks and personality from.
"Now listen here 21," Mikoto says, her expression taking a serious tone, "I am much more relaxed than Fugaku, but I was once a shinobi as well. So I will say this only once, to clear the air and remove any confusion. I have no problem with you being next to my boys, but I am their mother. And if you harm them, I will end you. I heard about the seal, so that puts me at ease. But no nonsense will be tolerated, these boys are more precious to me than my very life. Is that understood mister?"
Wow again. She turned that on switch real fast.
"Yes mam," you say with a serious expression as well, "please know that when I say this, I am not exaggerating or lying in any amount. Your son Itachi-sensei, has been very good to me, that is why I accepted the shiningami seal without hesitation. I have grown to care about him, as much as what I think a real brother would love. And I want you to know that my intentions are without taint. I just want to learn and be there for Itachi-sensei and Sasuke-san".
She eyes you for a moment before smiling and nodding once.
"Very well then," she says her disposition softly dramatically, "if that's true, then enough of this sensei and san business. And you need a proper name young man. No adoptive son of mine will be running around with a number like some sort of machine or cattle".
"But mom!" Sasuke says as he runs up to his mother. Mikoto lowers her head to meet his gaze. Sasuke puts his arms around Mikoto's neck.
"I think 21 is a really cool name!" Sasuke says with a bit of a whine to his tone, "it's like he's a hero in one of those books you read me!"
Mikoto looks at Sasuke and seemingly melts away all opposition.
"Very well," she says with a sigh. "I don't really like it, and you shouldn't either 21. But, as long as Sasuke and you both want it... well, I guess I can't go against two sons. Now don't be too late".
"Don't worry mother," Itachi says as he tights up his headband, "21 has a lot of work to do tomorrow too, he can't be out late. Just try to calm down father when he gets home and finds out where we are".
"I'll try," Mikoto says with a worried expression on her face. "But that's going to be easier said than done".
She raises her eyebrows in concern.
"So where do you guys want to go?" you ask as you bend over and place your hands on your knees to look at Sasuke, "any place in particular?"
"I want the barbecue place!" Sasuke says cheerfully.
You look at Itachi and he shrugs his shoulders.
"I guess that settles it then," Itachi announces, "I think they have that special going on now anyway. But don't eat too much like last time Sa-chan. You don't want to get sick again".
Sasuke crosses his arms.
"And lose the attitude mister," Mikoto says as she places her hand on Sasuke's shoulder, "you still have to take a shower when you get home too. You should be happy I'm making this exception, you know I don't like you eating with being clean, it's improper".
"Mom..." Sasuke complains.
Mikoto smiles and pats Sasuke on the butt and pushes him forward.
"Have fun boys," Mikoto says gregariously.
Sasuke turns around and looks at Mikoto with a blushing face, showing obvious discomfort. Mikoto merely laughs and walks away into the direction of the house.
"Off to the barbecue joint there Itachi," you say, "you lead the way though. I have no idea where it is".
"Wow, you're really empty up there aren't you?" Sasuke says as he looks at you with wonder.
You laugh and knock on your head twice. "Seems that way, doesn't it?" You give Sasuke a smile, he smiles back and smiles at Itachi who is watching both of you intently.
"Alright then, let's go," Itachi advises as he dashes off.
"Itachi, wait!" You and Sasuke both scream in unison. You look at each other and laugh.
"This happens often?" you ask Sasuke.
"All the time," Sasuke admits with a bit of frustration, "it seems like I'm always chasing after Itachi. Always running towards his back".
They're both smart kids you realize, way too mature for their age. You hope to learn the reason behind that.
The three of you make your way to the restaurant and get yourselves a table. You talk about all sorts of things including jutsu, Sasuke's training, your memory loss, the Uchiha family, and all kinds of different topics. Itachi notes that Shisui will probably be really angry at him now because of the seal, but that this feels right.
"I feel like you are going to be important for this family, 21," Itachi admits as he looks at you. "Who knows, you might just be what this family needed".
"Yeah, I can certainly use another older brother!" Sasuke exclaims, "and this one is pretty weak, so I'm going to be sure to catch up to him!"
"I hope you don't count on that," you say with a smile, "I have lots of secret techniques you know. Including that metal guy waiting outside".
Sasuke smiles.
"Is he like a robot?" Sasuke asks ignoring his food, "does he have like a dead guy's brains in there?"
You shake your head. "What type of books ARE you reading Sa-chan?" you ask.
"Yeah, really, eat your food," Itachi says motioning with his chopsticks. "Mom was right though you know, this whole seal business was really out of the ordinary. It was really drastic, but I had no choice. Dad was super pissed and ready to hunt you down himself, and then Shisui came and made everything worse. I didn't want to botch my first assignment, and that promise we made kept playing over in my mind. And it reminded me of a promise I made to Sa-chan. I just had to protect you 21".
It's kind of pathetic you think. At this moment, he isn't exaggerating at all. The difference in your power is vast. It's really pretty amusing that a ten year old is talking about protecting you, but then the reality sets in and it's just depressing. But then again, you feel happy. and Itachi was right. This DOES feel right. Maybe family is like this. Arguments and hardship and then peaceful moments like this one.
"So anyway," Itachi continued snapping you out of your trace, "we should probably give you a 'proper' name. Technically, you're viewed as an Uchiha now. My station in the clan as next soke means that I have the weight of the family behind my word. Father is technically the president, while I'm the vice-president, I guess. No decisions can be made without my father's support, and luckily he gave it. I'm glad he did, he usually disapproves of what he considers 'my radical behavior'. So like I said, you're technically an Uchiha now".
You look at Itachi in admiration. You know your intellect is your strong suit, but this kid is just....amazing.
"You knew he would didn't you?" you say honestly.
"Hmmm?" Itachi says as he stuffs a pork chunk in his mouth. He chews politely and raises a finger to excuse himself properly. "I'm sorry, I knew he would what? Who is he?"
You smile. "You knew he would approve, you knew your father would have to approve".
He smiles back at you and picks up another piece of pork.
"I had a sneaking suspicion he might," Itachi says with a sly smile, "I mean, if I'm to be soke, I have to be infallible in the eyes of the clan right? And certainly, father wouldn't allow the soke to be anyone outside our family. And... well..."
"It can't be me," Sasuke interrupts, "father hates me".
Itachi looks at him remorsefully. "He doesn't hate you Sa-chan," Itachi says comfortingly. "Dad's just really rough. You think I've ever heard a nice thing out of him?"
You look at Sasuke too. "You don't even want to think about how rough he's been with me," you say with a chuckle.
Sasuke smiles a little. He doesn't seem to be too helped out by the thought.
"Anyways Sa-chan" Itachi continues, "I made a promise to you remember?"
"How could I forget," Sasuke says, "it was during that horrible day... I wish I could forget".
"That's right, and I meant it. I'll always be by your side, no matter what I will always protect you. And you too big bro," Itachi says keenly.
"I'll always protect you too Itachi, and you too Sasuke," you say with a playful smirk, "That's a promise".
Sasuke looks at you, his eyes narrowing. He smirks right back at you.
"My brothers call me Sa-chan," he answers, "so you're supposed to call me Sa-chan, I won't respond to anything else!"
Itachi inhales and exhales deeply. "You really can never win against this one".
"I see that," you answer.
"So what's been on your mind 21?" Itachi asks, "you look real troubled. Is it the name thing? The fact that you're an Uchiha now? What is it?"
"Well..."
---------------- A: I guess it is the name thing, 21 Uchiha sounds pretty bad B: I'm just hoping to make Fugaku proud C: I'm concerned about how the rest of the clan will take my admittance D: What happened on that horrible day, you guys keep mentioning it, and I'm in the dark. E: I'm just happy to have a family now Free Will
"It feels great having a family," you say, truly happy, "but a part of me thinks... Well, how well I'll fit in. And well"-
"21," Itachi says with a quick shake of his head. "Let's talk about that after dinner".
Itachi knows something. You're sure of it. You suspect he has seen through you a bit. It's a hunch, but a strong one. What gave you away?
You continue having dinner, following Itachi's request making no further mention. You pay the bill for dinner and make your way out of the restaurant.
"OOOOH man, that was SO good," Sasuke says stretching his arms and yawning.
"Not so fast there Sasuke," Itachi replies, "you got to get home. Mom will kill me".
"Yeah, yeah," Sasuke admits defeat, "the older brothers always get more freedom I guess. I'll make it home right away Itachi! See ya tomorrow 21!"
You wave and smile. Sasuke turns and walks home.
"You think he'll be safe by himself Itachi?"
"Of course he will," Itachi replies, "he's really powerful too. He'd recognize his own power too, if father would give him some breathing room that is. Anyway, what's on your mind? You're worried about my father and Shisui?"
"Yes, quite worried actually," you confess, "I respect your father and Shisui. But I can't help wonder how much they detest me. I'm thinking, I am happy having you and Sasuke as my brothers. I truly see you two as my brothers. You've done so much for me... I just want to be there for you and Sasuke, he's really great too. I'm just happy to have a family, it really feels like I've accomplished something... I just don't want anything to endanger that".
"I'll handle them, just trust me," Itachi states, "I will make to you the same promise I made to Sasuke on that day now".
He turns to you and puts his hand over his own heart.
"You and I are flesh and blood. I'm always going to be there for you, even if it's only as a stepping stone for you to benefit from. Even if you do hate me for it. That's what brothers are for," Itachi swears, "I meant it, we are now blood. So please, let me help you overcome everything that ails you".
"Itachi, what happened on that day?" you ask sadly.
Itachi sighs and looks at the floor.
"It's said that there was once a great shinobi, the father of all ninja. The Sage of the Six Paths," Itachi explains, "he created ninjutsu. But there was a ten tailed beast, a monster made of pure chakra. It ran chaotically throughout all the lands, leaving destruction in it's wake. But when the Sage found it, he knew he couldn't destroy it. So he sealed it, and turned it into 9 different beasts".
Your mind thinks at lightspeed as you process this information and the ramifications of this. Could THIS be the 9 tailed beast?
"Each beast had a different amount of tails, 1 for the shukaku, 2 on another, 3 on another, you get the point," he continues, "but the 9 tails. Was different. It was extremely powerful. And... it came to attack us. Sasuke was just about a year old. He still remembers the attack, at least he says he does. I think he just remembers what our father tells him happened. But I did make that promise to him, and I will NEVER break a promise to him, or to you".
Itachi gives you his back and looks up at the moon.
"So tell me brother, tell me honestly," Itachi says, "did you know about the 9 tailed beast attack?"
"I had heard about it," you answer honestly, "I don't know the specifics".
"My father was blamed for it you know," Itachi says, "did you know that?"
You consider your options. You know better than to hold this pause for too long.
"Yes, I did," you say honestly, "but"-
"How did you know that, brother?" Itachi says as he cuts you off. "I swear to not be shocked. But don't lie to me".
----------------------------------------- A: Tell Itachi the truth B: Explain to Itachi you were curious about his father afterwards and looked him up C: Say you have researched the Uchiha clan for a while D: Say you'd rather not talk about it.
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 18:56:54 GMT
You sigh and wonder what your options are. You contemplate running away. You contemplate lying. You feel backed up into a corner.
"Listen, Itachi," you start, completely befuddled, "there's a lot I have to say. A lot I have to admit to, I guess. Could we talk some place a little more private?"
Itachi continues to gaze at the moon.
"Did you know that supposedly, this Sage, created the moon, 21?" Itachi says, a comment almost entirely out of context. "He couldn't handle the entirety of the ten tailed beast's power, so he created the moon. What if life was that easy? No more bloodshed? Just as easy as let me snap my fingers, and magically create a place for my problems to escape to.I know a good spot for us to talk to brother. Follow me".
Itachi's tone and mannerisms put you on guard, but in your heart, you still trust him.He walks slowly towards you and does several handseals. An uproar of crows sweeps the area, he grabs your arm and starts running, you follow his lead and continue running. Such was your hurry that you left Mizuumi behind outside the restaurant. Before long your journey ends, and Itachi has taken you to an old abandoned home. He looks around cautiously and then enters the home.
"Wait one moment," Itachi instructs, "I will make sure we're clear, and then we'll continue".
You nod your head and agree.
Itachi closes the door behind him and you wait a few minutes in anxious anticipation. Itachi open up the door and nudges for you to get inside.
"One last step," Itachi informs as he pulls a large scroll out, "this used to be a former Uchiha storehouse. Now it's not used at all, but I have set up certain barriers. I do a lot of my thinking in private you see. Put your name on this scroll, I will reverse summon you to my hideout. It can only be accessed through here, with the help of the barriers".
What the hell you think to yourself. These are some heavy duty precautions here. You put the number 21 on the scroll and watch carefully as Itachi holds your hand and warns you before he cuts you and places your blood on the scroll.
Once again, he does a series of handscrolls, and you feel your body disappear and reappear in a completely different locale. This place is bright and cheery on one end. In the middle, half in the bright light and half in the gloomy darkness of the other end hangs the Uchiha clan banner on the wall. In the bright area are pictures of Sasuke as a baby, and tons of other pictures that apparently Itachi keeps as fond mementos. Pictures of him and Shisui and his parents and him at the academy graduation ceremony.
You hear a poof behind you and see Itachi there.
"This is where I keep all the things that make me happy," Itachi says with a smile, "It's really sad to think I have to hide it like this. But everyone would look down on me for such things. Now, we're alone here. Shisui has been watching us for days, probably at my father's request. But here, well, no one knows this place exists. So what were you about to say?".
You clear your throat and gulp.
"Well, the thing is Itachi, I lied and told Shisui I didn't know Danzo," Itachi looks at you with an unsurprised look on his face.
"I did speak with Danzo, I was being held by him," you continue, "and well, I met Orochimaru there too".
You continue and recap the experiences you held there at the Root facility. Itachi stops you every once in a while to ask you certain questions, but other than that, he seems to reserve judgment.
You go on to talk about Sarutobi-sensei's mission and his instructions. You told him about the Third's concerns that Danzo might be trying to quell an Uchiha rebellion by a slaughter. You tell him that you are trying to prevent that with all your ability, and that the Third is legitimately trying to help the Uchiha. You apologize for not coming forward with the truth earlier. You admit to not wanting to lie, but that the needs of the village demanded you to be sure that Itachi was someone who was capable of acting fairly. You tell him about how much you truly respect him, and how much you truly meant what you said when you promised and allowed yourself to be sealed.
After hours of conversation, Itachi merely laughs and smiles at you.
"I told you 21," Itachi says with one eye closed. He points to his open eye. "The Sharingan sees much. It's not just for combat".
"I don't understand brother," you admit, "after Shisui left, I was able to use my Sharingan on you. I made you not realize you were under my genjutsu. I made you think my eyes were normal. But in reality, I was using my Sharingan to see whether you were being honest or not. Did you know that there are changes to your chakra when a person lies? When a person is righteous and fair, his chakra is clear and easier to see. When a person is full of trickey and malevolence, his chakra is dark and murky, it oozes out, almost as if trying to hide the person. All I had to do was use my Sharingan, and make you not notice the difference in my eyes. After that, it was a simple matter of watching you talk and react. You never lied to me when you spoke about protecting Sasuke and I. There wasn't a hint of hesitation in your chakra. And there still wasn't, even now. So I thank you for telling me the truth".
You feel at ease as if a great burden has been lifted from your shoulders.
Itachi holds up a handseal and softly says "Release". Your eyes flash a little, and you notice you're still in the same place, only Itachi seems different. He did in fact have his Sharingan activated.
"Well, there's no need for that anymore," Itachi says with a smile on his face, "It's nice to know I wasn't mistaken about you. It's also nice to have someone to share the burden with. My father had been petitioning me to join the ANBU as a way to spy on the Leaf. You're right in your concerns that my father is planning a coup. For years it has been talked about, but I fear it may happen now. They are noticing my strange behaviors, and no doubt, adopting you as my brother will only make them even more antsy. But, now I'm even more proud to call you my brother. I have to apologize though, for in your hope for peace, you might have bitten off more than you can chew".
He goes to the dark end of the hallway and opens up two books to a place he had marked previously. He looks down at the first and begins to muse aloud.
"Did you know that the Uchiha value the Sharingan so much that they always strove to attain it, no matter the cost?" Itachi says with an almost disgusted look on his face, "There is an advanced form of the Sharingan. It is called the Mangekyo Sharingan. If the user can attain it, he has even more vast powers than the ordinary Sharingan... The Uchiha cared so much about battle prowess that they would kill their own best friends, brothers and sisters to activate it. That's one of the ways to guarantee a regular 3 tomoe Sharingan can turn into a Mangekyo Sharingan. A 3 tomoe Sharingan wielder must kill his best friend, brother, or sister. And they did it, and not only was it NOT looked down upon, it was practically encouraged".
You can almost literally feel the disgust and sorrow in Itachi's words.
"It of course, goes farther," Itachi says as he probes the second book, "there exists also an Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan. As if the act of killing someone so close to you, that betrayal, wasn't enough. You then had to wait, and loot a brother or sister's Mangekyo Sharingan off of their dead bodies and place it in your own eye sockets. Then, you would reach an almost infinite place of power. Infinite use of the Mangekyo Sharingan, with no downsides, and minimal chakra consumption".
Itachi turns to you slowly. "I want to stop this brother, but how can I stop this? It's been going on for decades, how do I stop this?"
"Listen, we can stop this together," you say to him, "but I need you to trust me. I think Sarutobi-sensei is on the level. I really think he wants to help, but if Danzo keeps getting his way, this is going to be really bad. Look at all the damage Orochimaru did".
"Yes, unfortunately Orochimaru's damage hurt the Uchiha even more," Itachi says with a deep sigh, "According to father, he was suspected of the kidnappings. This did NOTHING to improve his temperament".
"Great, more crap to deal with," you reply in frustration, "well, what do you think about talking to the Third?"
"That sounds like an idea," Itachi answers with optimism, "But honestly, my father will not be dissuaded. I don't think he will allow peace unless a DRASTIC change happens".
"Well, what if you were to become the soke right now?" you suggest in earnest, "wouldn't that reverse the roles? Wouldn't Fugaku be respected still, but you would be the one to ultimately make or deny the decisions?"
"That's genius," Itachi says, "But I can't make my father lose face. And there's another problem too".
"What?" you ask desperately, you don't need more problems. You need solutions damn it.
"I spoke with a man," Itachi says, "Uchiha Madara," he says with caution in his tone.
That name sounds so familiar. Why does it sound familiar. You close your eyes and open up the book in your mind and search in your photographic memory for that name.
"Wait a second," you say as you pull the memory from your mental bank, "it can't be the same Madara can it?"
"I don't know," Itachi confesses, "I hope it isn't, because if it is, my sources say he has quite the axe to grind".
"****," you say, "we have to get Danzo out of power too. If not, that will just continue to stir up the anti-Uchiha regime".
"Look," Itachi says, "let's sleep on it for now. We'll rest here. I'll say that I took you on a late night mission the Hokage asked me to complete, no one will question that because of the nature of ANBU. But for now, I really think I should help you learn something new, you're going to need it".
"Do we have the time for that?" you ask sincerely, both anxious and excited at the opportunity but still worried about the task you both have to take care of.
"Regardless if we do, or don't," Itachi clarifies, "it's not going to matter. Besides, I've noted your genius. You've got incredible mental aptitude. So, what are you going to learn brainiac?"
------------------------ Clutch Moment + Experience Reward A: Put your brains together to figure out a way to meet the Third so that all three of you can talk B: Speak to the Hokage yourself and get some sort of cover for the Third to summon Itachi to talk C: Sneak into the Hokage mansion dressed as foreign shinobi D: Send a note through Randel
1: 2 points to dispense amongst your stats as you wish 2: 1 continue 3: Mastery over one jutsu, extra efficiency, potency, and chakra cost 4: Bigger chakra pool 5: Learn a new jutsu (with Itachi's tutelage, you only have a 10% of failure) (also, list what jutsu you want to learn that you've seen, you can't pick any new ones because you don't have your book with you. Unless it's one Itachi knows) 6: Karma reward, you've done such great deeds, the universe itself rewards you by giving you a % chance to rectify a huge screw up you might commit in the future and turn it into the best possible outcome
"Well, Itachi," you start, "the way I see it, if we can't put our heads together to find a way to get all three of us to meet, then we aren't the brains we both thought we were".
Itachi sighs and sits down next to you. He places his right elbow on his knee and cups his head with his right hand.
"Well, I got an idea you know," you say hesitantly, "I could hide you inside my golem, no one would ever know you're in there. For that matter, I could hide myself in there too, but then it wouldn't make sense that you are reporting to the Hokage. But if you really are going to report that we went out on an ANBU mission tonight... What if I was kidnapped by the enemy and told my golem to go with you? And you're just reporting to the Hokage to try to get some help".
"That's actually not bad," Itachi replies, "but then, the Hokage would have to spare another ninja or two to help me 'rescue' you. Then we'd have to bring two more into the mix".
"Well, I have Randel there waiting at the Hokage mansion," you say as you start planning everything in your head, "that's ONE shinobi. What about the other one?"
"I wish Sasuke was older," Itachi admits, "if he was, then he could easily be our fourth. There is another ANBU member I think we can trust though..."
"Well, spill it bro," you demand, "we're going to be doing real bad if this thing goes south".
"Well the thing is big brother," Itachi states confidently, "almost ALL ninja teams work in groups of four. Except the ANBU. We can work in pairs if we want. And there is one guy who I have met, briefly... in the ANBU. But I don't know if he would help or hurt our cause".
"What do you mean?" you ask, "would he be on our side or not?"
"He would definitely be on our side," Itachi reassures, "that's not the problem. The man is a legend, and he's only 18. The problem is, he led a mission a few years back that resulted in the death of an Uchiha member. The guy was a really good friend to the clan member, so some still were iffy about what to think. To make matters worse, he apparently lost an eye during the mission. And the Uchiha member gave him his Sharingan with his dying breath, or so the story goes..."
"Let me guess," you say exasperated, "The Uchiha think that he let the Uchiha die, or worse, killed him himself, solely for the Sharingan? And what do you mean gave him the Sharingan? He implanted his Sharingan into his own head?"
"Not exactly," Itachi hesitates, "there was a medical-nin with them that performed the surgery. But she ended up dying later, not in the same mission. Not all the Uchiha think he murdered the guy, but enough of them do that it might make me even more untrustworthy in the eyes of the Uchiha".
You scratch your chin.
"Would you say the situation is completely irreparable at this point?"
"No, not yet," Itachi says, "but it's been going on for so long, it might get that bad soon".
"How well do the Uchiha trust you?" you ask desperately searching for a game plan.
"Well, I'd say implicitly. But if my father starts casting doubt, it will get ugly. I've already been missing out on clan meetings. I've been saying it's all because of me getting acclimated and whatever else popped into my mind".
"If we get this ANBU guy into the fold, how bad would that affect your reputation?"
"Not sure, it's not just the fact that he has a Sharingan and let a member die 21. His father was dishonored as a shinobi. He even took his own life".
"What did he do Itachi?!" you ask with surprise. Suddenly, this ANBU member isn't looking that good anymore.
"Shinobi are taught that the mission is more important than anything, right? That means everything falls second to our mission. Our lives, our lovers, our families, our friends. His father refused that, and let a mission fail to protect a friend".
"Tch," you exclaim, "he sounds like my kind of guy".
Itachi shakes his head slowly, "yeah, he does actually. Well, I don't think my reputation will suffer that much. And we can always repair it later".
"Yeah, you start attending clan meetings, just don't add fuel to the fire of the Anti-Leaf movement," you instruct, "anything else we can do to improve your station?"
"Honestly?" Itachi says, sorrow drowning out his face, "We could kill Danzo. But it won't be easy. Shinobi don't live to his age without being seasoned, powerful warriors. I'd really not like to kill anyone if possible".
"I'll do it," you say without thinking, "at best, we can make it look as if I just wanted revenge. If we get caught".
"They won't buy that," Itachi says with a shake of his head, "you'll be hunted down and butchered like a pig. And now that you're an Uchiha, you might even endanger the clan itself. The Leaf could just say that the Uchiha urged you to do it, and then we're even worse than before".
"Well, wait a second, I forgot something," you say surprised at your own idiocy, "bro, I completely forgot. The Hokage's other mission. Getting evidence on Danzo's treason! If we can do that, the Hokage will jail him up til he dies, and no one can blame anyone because old age took his life".
"You're right bro, you're absolutely right," Itachi says with a revelation, "but how do we infiltrate the Root headquarters? I'm famous, not to toot my own horn, and you, well, they want you real bad".
"Let's go meet the Hokage, request my 'rescue' and get together with this ANBU guy. If we mesh well, and we know for sure he's on our side, we bring him into the fold. Then we find a way to infiltrate Root".
"Sounds good to me then," Itachi agrees nodding his head, "then we could spend the time 'looking' for you training our team tactics and getting to know one another. We'll have to go to some remote place. I'll have to think about that later. You ready to move out, or you got something else in mind?" ----------------------------- A: The plan sounds flawless, let's do it B: I don't think I want to trust this ANBU guy after all C: I'd rather come up with a different way to destroy Danzo D: I don't know about this after all...
You have confidence that this plan will work and is most likely the best you've got. Your nature makes you cautious, almost paranoid, in considering every variable. You know you can trust Itachi, and you are sure you can trust Sarutobi-sensei, but this ANBU guy. He's a foreign variable. Not to mention, Danzo is still a problem. He can't be assassinated, that will just start the civil war. And what really lingers in your mind is what story you're going to be giving out to people. And where will you train? Too many things to consider, this is the plan, and you're going with it.
"Hey, 21," Itachi says as he resummons himself back into the hideout. "We're clear, it seems everyone is asleep. Your golem ready?"
"Yeah, Miz is ready," you state.
"Miz?" he asks with confusion.
"I called the golem Mizuumi, you know, to commemorate the fact that you trained me at the lake," you explain.
"That would be heartwarming if it wasn't for the fact that the lives of hundreds rest on our success".
"You really brighten up a room Itachi, seriously. We should rent you out for parties".
Itachi shrugs and grabs onto your shoulder. Your eyes flash and you're back in the abandoned home. You feel Mizuumi outside. You instruct him to form around you. Other than the confusion you feel from his response, he seems to understand you want to hide in him. His shape opens up and you squeeze in there. You make sure to instruct Mizuumi to be careful in his placement of weapons.
"Alright, let's make our way to the Third, and I hope you're right about him," Itachi cautions.
"For the sake of the hundreds of people, yeah, let's hope so," you answer.
Itachi stealthily guides Mizuumi to the Hokage mansion. That was the most uncomfortable, bumpiest ride, you think there could ever be. But then again, you don't remember anything from last week, so who knows? You follow Itachi still inside Mizuumi and watch him through a really tiny crack in the golem's shell. An ANBU member stops Itachi as he approaches the Hokage's chambers.
"What business do you have here Itachi?" you hear the ANBU's voice muffled through his mask.
"I have urgent news about 21, my student, please awake the Hokage," Itachi exclaims with urgency in his voice.
"Very well, then. Wait here. And what is this thing?"
"This thing," Itachi says with a hint of outrage in his voice, "is the only thing that is going to be left of 21 if you don't hurry and get the Third!"
After several minutes of patiently waiting, you hear Sarutobi-sensei's voice.
"Yes Itachi? What is it, you seem troubled? Has something happened to 21?"
"Yes, Lord Hokage, something has, can we please talk in private? This golem belongs to 21, and 21 can speak through him," Itachi explains.
"I understand," Sarutobi-sensei responds, "please follow me to my bed chambers".
After a little bit of walking you hear a large set of double doors open and close and you're now in a very dark room.
"Please tell me, what has happened to 21?" you hear Sarutobi-sensei ask, you think he's questioning Mizuumi.
"Is this room completely safe and private Lord Hokage?" you make the golem speak your words.
"Is that you behind that awful noise 21?" Sarutobi-sensei asks, "yes, it is. No one can listen in here, I made certain of that long ago".
You instruct Miz to release you and you gently slip out. The Third seems a bit confused, but trusts you enough to allow you to explain.
You go into deep details about everything, and what you planned with Itachi at the hideout.
"You want Kakashi, eh?" Sarutobi asks. "That will take some time, he is currently in the hospital from his last mission".
"Get me a syringe, and I can fix him right up and we can leave as soon as you give the order Sarutobi-sensei," you inform.
"What?"
"My blood, it's more powerful than we thought," you explain, "Itachi was cut with a knife coated in my blood, and it healed the wound immediately".
The Third gasps and recoils back.
"Do you realize how many lives we could save with that type of bloodline?" he asks.
"You can have all the blood I can spare Lord Hokage, I'll make sure no one ever dies again while I'm alive," you inform. "But that's also why Danzo wants my blood I imagine".
"He would create an invincible war machine," Sarutobi answers with a grim demeanor, "he would even be able to overthrow our government. 21, with this new information, it only makes me worry more about your safety and the safety of the village. I had no idea it could instantly rejuvenate wounds, even if it's just a trickle. If Danzo got you he would bleed you dry. We should get you as far away from here as possible".
"I made a promise to you Lord Hokage and to Itachi," you reply, "and besides, I have a score to settle with Danzo".
"It's such a risky proposition my child," Sarutobi-sensei answers, "I give you my full support. Randel has become quite adept at taijutsu, he seems to have been born for it. He can be ready in a couple days, and I'm sure Itachi can help with his progress in my absence, as can Kakashi... but how to get him out of the hospital and explain his miracle recovery. Danzo will no doubt find out about it and know you had your hand in this. As is, he most likely already knows about Itachi being assigned as your teacher... Which means he knows you've sided with me. He'll most likely try to erase any incriminating evidence. We will have to cross that bridge when we get to it. For now, you two rest here in my chamber, while I get Kakashi out of the hospital".
"You will, Lord Hokage?" Itachi asks in shock.
"I might not look it, but I was a capable shinobi years ago," he says with a warm smile, "wait here".
Sarutobi leaves for a bit and comes back with a syringe and wearing infiltration gear.
"Sorry to have to do this 21, but could I have your arm?" Sarutobi asks.
"As you wish," you say as you roll up your sleeve and present your arm.
Sarutobi-sensei extracts a vial full of your blood and removes the needle. He places the vial securely in a vest pocket.
"I'll be back in an hour, at the most. I've instructed everyone to leave you be in this room Itachi".
"Thank you, Lord Hokage".
"And as for you 21," the Hokage says as he turns to you, "you have managed to do much for the Leaf. Let us not hope it is in vain.
He closes the double doors. You look at Itachi and shake your head. There's really a lot of variables, and now there are added variables. It can never be easy it seems.
After about half an hour, you notice movement near the double doors. Itachi springs immediately to his feet, kunai in one hand, a handful of shuriken in the other. You dive behind Mizuumi and order him ready for combat should it be anyone other than Sarutobi-sensei. The doors open and you see Sarutobi-sensei. Behind him is a silver-haired young man, older than you, with his headband on titled down towards one eye, which meets with a lower face mask that covers up the majority of his features. He is in hospital scrubs. Sarutobi-sensei urges the shinobi into his room and closes the double doors.
"Alright, no one was able to see us, thankfully," Sarutobi-sensei says as he removes the hood from his outfit. I present to you Kakashi Hatake. Although I do believe you've met Itachi".
Kakashi bows his head at Itachi knowingly and walks towards you.
"It's good to meet you," he says extending his hand while closing his visible eye. His other hand is behind his head calming his wild hair. "I hear I have you to thank for my speedy recovery".
You shake his hand and introduce yourself.
"While on my excursion," Sarutobi-sensei says, "I did a lot of thinking. Danzo is going to be on the move, it's going to be near impossible to prove his guilt, unless we get his accomplices. I've got your cover story down too. Itachi, you took 21 along with you on your mission because you thought it would be a good learning experience. Little did you know, that I was lied to by the client and told it was a B rank mission. In reality, it was an S class mission, that required a team of seasoned jonin. The mission was to take what we thought was a family heirloom to the Land of Rivers. Instead, you found out that it was the symbol of a clan leader, and it was priceless. You two were stalked for days, and you broke your ankle. 21, knowing about his abilities, was able to heal you, and told you to escape with the clan's leadership symbol. You reported back here with the golem and I ordered a rescue mission".
He coughs and clears his throat before continuing.
"Randel found out and was anxious to help his friend," he informed, "he volunteered for the mission. And, being low on other potential shinobi to fill out the team, I assigned Kakashi and gave him what was left of your miracle cure that Itachi didn't use".
"Miracle cure?" you ask in confusion.
"Yes, I suppose I left that part out," Sarutobi corrects himself, "you're classified as a medical-nin now. It's the only way to explain how Itachi and Kakashi got miraculously better".
"Makes sense," Itachi states with a frown and a head nod, "you think they'll buy all that though?"
"Why not?" you ask, "It sounds believable enough. And this works to our benefit. It wasn't you who screwed up, it was me. I was inexperienced and cost you the mission".
"Well, considering what I've heard, it sounds like a sound plan, but there's one hiccup," Kakashi chimes in. "Why is 21 important enough to risk Randel, Itachi, and myself? Won't the Uchiha feel as if you're throwing away their future soke's life away for a nobody? No offense 21".
"None taken," you assure, "he's right".
"No, not necessarily, that could work for us too," Itachi replies, "it was my mistake to bring 21 along at all. It wasn't the Lord Hokage's fault he was given crap information. I came back feeling responsible that 21 was in that position to begin with. The blood pact we made makes him an Uchiha and my brother. Plus, my family knows I promised to protect him as if he were Sasuke. My father will be pissed to no end, but he'll believe I acted that way".
"Plus," you continue without missing a beat, "Sarutobi-sensei, you can use this for your position as well. You can assure the Uchiha that you were just trying to honor Itachi's request as future soke. You can say you did it because Itachi accused you of not wanting to help because 21 was an Uchiha now. That covers ALL of our angles".
Sarutobi-sensei nods with a sly smile as he probes his fingers through his facial hair.
"I like it," he admits, "I like it a lot. It works on every level. And when you all come back, it will explain your closeness and friendship. I will praise the Uchiha for their dedication, sacrifice and loyalty to the Leaf. And it will only make it easier to accept when you go on your next mission".
"Sarutobi-sensei, sorry to interrupt," you start, "but will you be able to forge all the necessary documents? Who are you going to say was the clan leader? And the client?"
"Don't you all worry about that," he says humbly, "I will make a paper trail so long they won't know where it ends. But that does bring me to the last thing I realized while I was out... perhaps most important... After your 'rescue mission' is successful. How will you all find the evidence on Danzo? I am most concerned about Madara Uchiha".
"Lord Hokage?" Kakashi questions with concern.
"If it is Madara Uchiha... this is worse than any of you could possibly imagine," Sarutobi says, his head hung in lamentation, "he hates the Leaf AND the Uchiha. I would not be surprised if he is orchestrating the entire thing".
"To what ends?" you ask.
"I wish I knew child," Sarutobi replies mournfully. "Consider our enemies. We have Orochimaru to contend with, for we do not know if he is completely out of the picture. If I know my former student well, I know he is just waiting to strike back at us. Danzo, who is still a powerful combatant, of that I can assure you. His political clout is nothing to take lightly. If he wishes it, he could probably create a civil war this very instant. Plus... his experiments. They reek of Orochimaru's influence. I doubt that Orochimaru would sever his ties completely, that's why I feel he is still a threat. But the person who would arguably gain the most from all of this, is Madara Uchiha. He wishes for nothing more than for the complete destruction of the Leaf. And with Danzo, Orochimaru, and the entire Uchiha clan up in arms, that is almost a certainty".
You stretch your arms and exhale loudly in frustration.
"So what do we do?" you ask.
"Kakashi, I want you to follow Itachi's orders to the letter," Sarutobi-sensei says. Kakashi nods without hesitation. "Itachi, you know what is riding on this, let's make sure we save our home and our people. ALL of them. I want you to set out immediately, I will have an attendant call Randel here and he can be filled in on all the details. For now, you go somewhere, anywhere in the Land of Rivers and make yourselves scarce. Train hard, so as not to waste the time, after two and a half weeks, you will return. Make sure to move your camp every couple of days".
"Yes, sensei," you assure.
"There's only one last order of business," Sarutobi-sensei states reluctantly, "this is a 3 headed hydra. And it will not die until all three are removed, killed, or somehow compromised. Which one will you go after first? Regretfully, I couldn't bring myself to kill Orochimaru, and for this... I will be forever in regret. But Danzo can NOT be killed. He must have a very public trial and be sentenced for the oppression of the Uchiha, before we have an enormous insurrection on our hands. Danzo will be had to catch, perhaps one of his accomplices can lead you to him? And lastly, there is Madara. If the tales and legends are to be believed, none of us are ready to combat him, but we have to find a way to neutralize him in some manner".
Sarutobi pulls out a scroll and hands it to you. You feel Kakashi and Itachi's gaze upon you.
"21, you have so far proven to be a remarkable tactician, it is up to you to analyze the information there," he says as he hands you the scroll, "it's a summoning scroll. Inside I have sealed all the information I have on all three of them. Every secret note, dirty lie, or trivial rumor has been placed in there. Literally, a library. Study it, and take your targets down".
You nod and bow.
"See you in 2 and a half weeks," he says with a smile, "who will you be targeting first?" -------------------------- TURNING POINT A: Hunt down Orochimaru B: Find a way to incriminate Danzo C: Find a way to neutralize Madara
Itachi and Kakashi look at you. You look down at the scroll and clutch it tightly in your hand.
The double doors open again and you see Randel following Sarutobi-sensei inside the Hokage's bedroom.
"Randel has been informed," Sarutobi announces, "he's ready he says. He's got the cover story down. But Itachi, Kakashi, I want you to make sure you train these two as best as possible".
"Well, considering Itachi knows the most about our abilities," Kakashi says as he finishes booting on his boots, "he should probably decide who gets who".
"I'll train 21, we got to continue working on his handseals," Itachi announces, "you take Randel and work on his taijutsu, not that I've seen Randel fight".
Randel nods and Kakashi closes his eye and it seems like he is smiling under his mask, but you're not too sure.
"Well master planner," Itachi says getting back to the main topic at hand, "have you decided on who to get first?"
"All the targets are going to be almost impossible to get," you admit, "but, I'm confident in all of our abilities. I started reading the scroll and from what I was able to see about Kakashi, I think we have an incredible team here. Let's rely on Randel for close range engagements. Itachi, you and Kakashi should be close to mid range, anything that gets in our way in that zone, you squash. As for me, well, I'm the long range specialist who just happens to have magic blood. I'm working on that too, by the way".
You reach into the pack you had been preparing and bring out a handful of vials.
"As disgusting as this is going to sound, I've got a lot of ideas," you explain, "I got tiny capsules that I'm making for you for lighter injuries. And these bigger ones, they're for serious injuries, burns, broken arms, you get the picture. I did the calculations based on the amount of blood I've estimated to be in the injured areas. A sliced finger requires a couple drops, a broken arm requires about an armful of blood".
Sarutobi-sensei looks at you curiously. "How did you manage to figure all this out? I was only gone for an hour".
"It wasn't pretty," Itachi informs, "he summoned some sort of lightning clone and started cutting the crap out of him. I think you sort of gave him too many ideas by classifying him as a medical-nin".
Sarutobi-sensei winces.
"A necessary evil," you reply, "lastly, I got this giant thing here. If you're near death, stab yourself in the chest with this bad boy, aim for your heart specifically. It should get you at least on your feet and able to get away".
"Pardon me child," Sarutobi-sensei interrupts, "This is the reason why I didn't want Danzo to get his hands on you. He'll bleed you dry. How did you aerate so much blood from your body and not pass out?"
"My blood regenerates too, almost as fast as small injuries," you inform him, "I'm starting to wonder if someone cut my head off if I would grow another".
"Well, apparently it keeps you healthy and young as well," Sarutobi-sensei comments.
"I thought about that too actually," you answer, "been doing a lot of thinking. And I thought back to that conversation we had. I hypothesize that my blood is the key to my regeneration, literally. I think if we could get my blood, it might even be able to heal certain diseases, like arthritis, tetanus and tuberculosis. Considering Danzo only used one specific kind of poison on me, I might make be resistant to poisons as well".
"I can test that theory if you'd like," Sarutobi-sensei says, "I have terrible arthritis in my knee. The medical-nin have been able to give me temporary comfort, but nothing that lasts".
You take out a syringe and hand it to Sarutobi-sensei.
"Try it on the area where you feel it sensei," you instruct, "this might prove valuable".
Sarutobi injects his right knee with it. He tests his right leg and puts a little weight on it. He smiles as he dangles his leg back and forth.
"I actually think you fixed it, it's never felt this good," he says.
You furrow your brow and crack your neck.
"It seems the mystery to my lineage gets thicker," you announce, "but, it seems that at least I can be of some good. Alright, so as far as the target is concerned, I've been thinking about that as well".
Sarutobi walks around the room like a kid with a new toy. He seems genuinely thrilled that his knee is healed, you feel happy for him.
"The target will be Danzo," you report confidently. Sarutobi stops walking and looks at you. "The fact remains, he's got a time limit attached to him. As it's been said, he could start a war right now if he wanted to, and that makes him a threat. We have to leave for over 2 weeks, by then, his trail will probably be cold already. But luckily, he won't be thinking about me being a threat, he'll have Itachi, Kakashi, and Randel out of the way. He'll also have to assume that Sarutobi-sensei will be occupied with maintaining the Uchiha calm. So he won't be in a hurry to make his move. But... still. 2 weeks is a real long time, and we're going to have to make up for it regardless. We're going to be at a disadvantage. I weighed tracking down Orochimaru, and I almost decided to go for him. But he isn't as dangerous as Danzo right now. Madara, if it's true that he is the true puppeteer, would be irrelevant anyway if we can't subdue him. So that leaves Danzo".
You sigh as you hand out your blood packs to everyone on the team. You pack up everything else in your backpack and sling your backpack over your shoulder.
"It sucks, we got nothing else we can really do, and the trails going to be cold," you admit, "but that's the hand we've been dealt, and we really have no other option".
"I agree," Itachi says almost immediately, "Danzo has probably been erasing his tracks since the moment you escaped. But that doesn't mean he can't be found. It does however, mean we have to find him before he completely goes off the map".
Itachi and you look at Kakashi is appears to be deep in thought.
"None of our options are any good," Kakashi reflects with a touch of whimsy in his voice, "you know you're hard pressed when you are thinking you'd rather take on one of the legendary Sannin instead of someone I had never heard of before today. I owe the Uchiha, I owe the Uchiha to make sure Danzo rots behind bars".
Everyone looks at Randel, who apparently has no opinion. He shrugs his shoulders.
"Then it's settled, let's get out of here before we lose anymore moonlight," you say with confidence as you wave at Sarutobi-sensei. The rest of the crew follow you out the door as the Hokage leads you out of the mansion. Mizuumi changes form and carries you inside him again. You travel for roughly twenty minutes before Itachi says it's safe for you to exit Mizuumi. You exit the golem and stretch your back.
"Usually, it's a couple days to the Land of Rivers, at least," you announce, "but I think if you take the capsules I gave you, you'll notice your stamina will increase dramatically. We can make it there probably in a couple hours. If I'm right, you'll be able to sprint the entire way".
Everyone looks at their capsules doubtingly. They take their individual capsule and you can see the vigor erupting from their eyes. Faint traces of chakra, your chakra is coming off from their bodies. Interesting.
You all make a mad dash to the Land of Rivers and arrive there even earlier than you had predicted. The capsules were a smashing success, you're pretty proud of that actually. You set up camp with the others and rest until noon.
For over 2 weeks, Itachi trains you extensively in handseals. You managed to train even longer than expected, once again thanks to the capsules, the need for rest was even less. So much time was spent training that you actually were able to train in some taijutsu with Randel and Kakashi. Kakashi is really amazing too, and has a ton of experience, something that Itachi just hasn't had the age to accomplish yet. You realize that between you, Itachi, Kakashi, and Sarutobi, you could probably get a lot of good done, not just for the village, but for everyone.
Kakashi has got a funny personality too. He's kind of cool, but kind of a dork too. It's strange to place your finger on though. The four of you had so much time to train that you actually were able to engage in all out free for alls. Thanks to your forethought, you were able to take care of any injuries and the like that occurred during training. The four of you have pretty much become inseparable over the 2 weeks, especially considering you only needed about 4 hours of sleep a night. You of course, slept much less. You were busy reading up on your enemies and on what possible ways you could infiltrate Danzo's organization.
After 18 days, you decide to make it back to the Hidden Leaf. Everything worked out as planned. Sarutobi-sensei managed to talk to the Uchiha, and worked everything in a way that looked as if he was just bending over backwards to satisfy the Uchiha interest. After a brief meeting with the Hokage, he explained that it seemed to have worked, but that Danzo hasn't been seen for an entire week.
Let's see... what was it you read while in the Land of Rivers that you should focus first on? ---------------------------- A: Danzo is a man of fine tastes, even his walking stick is old oak, extremely expensive. Speak to the manufacturer B: Danzo is in constant need of medical supplies. Trace the medical supplies through the chain, and see where it leads C: Just because Danzo is gone doesn't mean his subordinates are. Go to the old Root facility and hope to bait a trap D: After reading about the jonin council, maybe you can find a friend of his there E: Try to see if someone from the Inuzuka or Aburame clans will help you track them down
"Guys, we can't even use the traditional methods of tracking this guy down," you announce remorsefully, "it'd be so much easier if we could. The Inuzuka or Aburame clans would be great in this situation. But we can't blow our cover".
"My ninja hounds have never failed to find a target," Kakashi says, "they are still inexperienced, but they haven't let me down yet".
"Ninja hounds?" you say, "that wasn't in your file".
"Well, I bet there's a lot about me that's not in my file," he admits with a chuckle. "Did it list my jutsu repertoire? Not to brag or anything..."
"The Copy Cat Ninja," Itachi says with a slight smile, "that Sharingan has really made you quite famous, hasn't it?"
You narrow your eyes and do double takes between the two.
"I heard the title," you admit, "But Kakashi, why do they call you the Copy Cat ninja? As for your jutsu, I only have about 30 jutsu here listed".
Kakashi smiles visibly under his mask, taming his hair with closed fist.
"It's the Sharingan," Itachi states, "formally, most people know about the genjutsu prowess of it. But they don't realize the added secondary benefits. Some learn things easier, some react faster, some can tell if you're lying".
"Like you," you point out, "but, what else?"
"Well, I have a knack for being able to mimic any jutsu I have seen once," Kakashi admits with humility in his voice.
No wonder the Sharingan are so valued. Something of this worth would carry a bloody history indeed.
"So how many then?" you ask.
"Hmmm?"
"How many jutsu DO you have?" you ask eagerly.
"Well, I never wrote down a list or anything, but I know it's over 1000," he answers slowly.
"What the hell," you say in protest, "okay, whatever. Listen, I read that Danzo has to constantly replenish his medical supplies. Let's check out the hospital, and see where they get their supplies from".
"Nah, no need," Kakashi says, "I've been in there enough to know. Before the canal, there's a shop, it's mostly just an importer, but it does carry everyday things for the ill or injured. Painkillers, crutches and you know, the basics".
With that you head towards the place, Kakashi leading the way. You enter the shop and are greeted by a tiny older man. Kakashi is recognized immediately.
"Hatake-san!" the old man exclaims, "so good to see you up and about! How can I help you today? I was expecting you since I heard you had been discharged from the hospital".
You lean down and whisper quietly into Itachi's ear. "What is this? Is he a preferred customer or something?"
Itachi turns to you and looks at you as if you're an idiot. He whispers back into your ear. "What, was it also missing from the file that somehow Kakashi spends about 70% of his time in the hospital?"
"Alright you two, let's go," Kakashi instructs as he makes his way out the shop. You all follow.
Kakashi calls you closer and then punches you in the shoulder. "The Sharingan also reads lips flawlessly," he advises with a chuckle, "we got a couple possible leads. It turns out that the shopkeep usually gets an ANBU member buying in bulk once a week, all sorts of odds and ends. This week, however, they didn't pick up their order. It was a smaller order than usual, and it was special. It was a dozen underwater diving masks and rebreathers".
"Our ANBU wouldn't purchase anything from a local shop, they'd have it made, and never in such small numbers," you point out, "and underwater equipment? A dozen? Sounds like a small detachment, enough to protect Danzo".
"What kind of rebreathers?" Randel chimes in.
"Small, black prototype technology," Kakashi answers, "literally meant to just cover your nose".
"I wo- wore those once," Randel answers with his slow methodical speech, "I know it was in this village. At lea- least I think it was. There was a rocky shore, and a large tree. That's all I remember, they put a bag over my head before I saw much, but it was in this village for sure".
You and Itachi immediately look at each other.
"Danzo would definitely hide himself in that lake," Itachi states, "He's arrogant enough. And if you really think about it, it makes sense. Hiding amongst the Uchiha province, his greatest enemies, would be ideal. But how would he construct a base with no one noticing?"
"It's a better lead than anything else we got," you agree, "Let's give it a shot".
You all arrive at the lake that has been so important to you. Randel looks around and he assures you this should be it. ------------------ A: Tell Randel to take a look underwater and see if it seems familiar B: Scour the perimeter of the lake, looking for anything suspicious. Seals, traps, hidden doors, etc. C: Wait until nightfall to avoid potential Uchiha spying D: Report back to the Hokage, at least now you know where to look
"Alright, secure the perimeter fellas," you advise confidently, as you hand out communicators to the team, "I want nothing missed. Be careful in case any Uchiha see us and get the wrong idea. Randel, you're on me. Mizuumi, stay here for now. If you get any trouble, no matter how light, warn us and fall back. Check for the usual. Any seals, traps, etc. And seriously, I can not stress this enough, it's a big lake, be careful with the Uchiha, we don't want to piss them off".
Your team nods at you and heads in their distinctive routes. You notice Kakashi lifts his headband as he walks away. Good, he's using his Sharingan. Hopefully he doesn't kill his chakra. You learned that him having a Sharingan really drains his chakra when he uses it, merely because he isn't an Uchiha. Although you've been noting that with the regular consumption of blood capsules they've been taking, both he AND Itachi have been building up their stamina. Kakashi was notably easier to notice, as his chakra drained almost instantly when activating the Sharingan, yet you recall at the end of the training, he was comfortably maintaining his Sharingan for hours.
You hope that the blood affects them permanently with no ill effects, especially addiction or withdrawal, but your thoughts digress. You watch your team scour the area, and you begin to do the same. You notice an odd amount of footprints near the rocky area Randel mentioned. Curious, there are about 13 pairs of tracks going in at one point, and then several pairs of footprints coming in and out of the water.
"21," you hear over your transmitter. It's Kakashi.
"I got something here, it's a camera," he says, "almost missed it, but it has a faint heat pattern. It was disguised to look like a rock".
"I got something similar," Itachi says, "this is not good. If the clan finds out about this, there's going to be lots of trouble".
"Take them out discreetly, and destroy whatever remains they leave. Make the remnants unidentifiable," you instruct, "I think I found the entry point. It's definitely underwater".
"Not good, electricity and water?" Kakashi pauses, "do you realize the kind of mayhem is going to be waiting down there? Not to mention, our surprise attack is now neutralized".
"Yeah, no ****," you answer in frustration. You look back at Randel and Mizuumi. Randel shrugs and smiles a goofy looking smile.
There's no way you can take Mizuumi under the surface. And what if Randel can't be trusted? It's not like he's been with you the whole time, what if he himself is a Danzo agent? The thought hadn't crossed your mind until just now.
"Hey Randel, let me see your tongue?" you instruct as you make your way towards Randel.
"My tongue, sir?" Randel asks with confusion. "Why wo- would you want to do that?"
Hmmmm.... --------------------- A: Just in case, ask him to bend over and open his mouth and show you his tongue B: Same as A, but have the team reunite on you C: Go underwater, trusting Randel D: Send Randel back to the Hokage E: Seal or not, Randel still might be a double agent, explain to him Mizuumi will hold him.
"Kakashi, Itachi," you whisper into your transmitter as you get near to Randel, "on me".
"Randel, let me see your tongue, I want to make sure you don't have a Danzo seal on it," you instruct Randel.
Randel looks hurt at your accusation. He bends down and opens his mouth. You examine his tongue thoroughly, no, no seal at all.
"I apologize," you say, "it just struck me you could be working for Danzo. You're the person in our group I've spoken to the least".
Randel stands back up straight and shakes his head slowly. "I understand, sir".
You feel like an utter piece of crap. Randel is a little too innocent to be a shinobi you rationalize, not cut out for espionage at all.
Kakashi and Itachi appear suddenly behind you.
"I wish there was better news," Kakashi admits, "but the fact remains, everything Root appears to be using is so advanced, it's beyond belief really. The camera was water proof, and hard to bust open. They know we're here, or at the very least, that they've been found out".
You nod your head.
"Your assessment bro?" you motion towards Itachi.
"Honestly?" Itachi says with doubt, "if they have any type of contingency, we're royally screwed. Best case scenario, they vacated Danzo out of the facility and closed down the entrance you found. Worst case, they evacuated Danzo and are waiting for us to go in so they can bring the thing down on our heads".
"I was considering the same thing," you confess. Your chances are not starting to look good. "But I also wonder how much they can really do in the middle of the Uchiha prefecture. I'd send Mizuumi down there, but that's not happening. Do you really think they would blow the underground facility? They got the numbers down there after all. Wouldn't an explosion or any type of huge trap stir the popular and pretty much guarantee Danzo's guilt?"
"Possibly," Kakashi answers.
"We might be safe to enter, but it's a risk," Itachi suggests.
"I can send my clone in, but if we do that, no matter what, I lose a huge chunk of my chakra," you think out loud. -------- A: Fallback B: Go in anyway, face the risks C: Stake out the place and wait for some kind of opening. There's no other way to get in there from here, and you don't know if there's another exit D: Send in the lightning clone Free Will: Make your Fate
You search through your gear in hopes of finding extra communicators. You find two of them. You once again apologize to Randel and inform him to just take a seat, this might be a while.
You inform Itachi and Kakashi of your intentions.
"But, there lies the problem," you begin, "I can go ahead and use my clone, but it's not exactly meant solely for scouting. It'll get the deed done, just wish it wouldn't drain my chakra as bad as it does".
"Well, the later it gets, the worse," Kakashi says as his one eye searches the village visually, "as much as I'd hate to admit it, even a nice guy like me won't get a real warm welcome if we keep just standing her all suspicious like".
"We'll send in your lightning clone, my crow clone, and Kakashi's shadow clone," Itachi states, "that way it looks like it's actually us".
"Yeah, that's exactly what I was thinking bro," you agree, "let's set them up like we would set ourselves up. Kakashi you in front, Itachi in the middle, my clone in the back. Try to figure out if the only way down there is this entrance. But let's be as fast as we can while double timing this, we've lost enough of an edge already".
Kakashi, Itachi, and you cast your clones and provide them with thorough instructions. The two extra communicators you have you provide to Itachi's clone and your clone. Now you sit and wait. An extremely long two hours pass by before you hear any hint of progress from the scouting team.
"Hey 21, this is, well, it's you in a way," you hear your clone address you sarcastically.
You place your finger to your ear and inform that you copy.
"We got some real bad news, and some I guess, good news," he states.
You close your eyes in frustration, are you this much of a pain in the ass to work with?
"What's the score?" you ask your clone.
"Well, the good news is, we searched the entire area and surprisingly, no one tried to kill us," your clone reports, "we expanded our search radius to account for possible emergency exits, and well, there aren't anyway. So we came in. That's more good news there. We didn't get blown up, that's always a plus".
"What's the situation down there?" Itachi says as he starts losing his patience with your clone, "it's been 2 hours here, we can't just keep waiting".
"Well Itachi," your clone replies, "it seems something big tunneled it's way out of this underwater facility. Either it tunneled out of here, and destroyed what could have possibly been an exit, which I doubt, or it made it's own exit and then just left everything however it laid after the dust cleared. It seems like it was either escaping from this facility, or at least sabotaging it. We have several dead Root members down here, no sign of Danzo yet. But, we really haven't gone that deep yet".
"He's still in there," you state emphatically to Itachi, "whatever that 'thing' was that tunneled out of there, it trapped Danzo in there. At least, that's what I hope".
"What, or who could go into that facility, create such an uproar, and leave without a trace?" Kakashi asks quite puzzled.
"We'll find out I suppose, but hopefully not today," Itachi replies.
"If we have our clones guard the entrance, we should be alright," you suggest, "but what do we do about Randel? You want him to stay up here or come down?"
"Either way, Mizuumi has to stay, and that's suspicious," Itachi answers, "I just really want to get this done. We've wasted enough time".
"Agreed," Kakashi states, his concern rising to the top as well.
They're right to be worried. You all could be blamed for the attack, especially considering you have a walking, metallic drilling machine next to you.
Oh ****, again. -------------------- A: Have Randel keep an eye on the area with Mizuumi, have the clones stay where they are, and you, Itachi and Kakashi dive and follow the clone team for instructions on how to get down there. B: Same as A, but bring Randel, leaving Mizuumi alone. Your concern is that now Mizuumi might be left vulnerable C: Tell Mizuumi to go back to the Hokage's mansion and update him of the situation and to stay there, while you do B D: Have the clones scout deeper. Not what you would consider... best, but maybe safest. Maybe being the key word
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 18:58:24 GMT
You instruct Mizuumi to go back to the Hokage and inform him of everything that has happened. You know that it would be terrible for this needless idling around the lake. Mizuumi understands and starts walking as inconspicuously as a huge heaping monster of metal possibly can. You turn to your three compatriots and you go over any last minute precautions.
"Are we all set then?" you say as you look over your medical supplies, "everyone is resupplied and ready to go?"
Kakashi and Itachi shake their heads yes, while Randel. Well... Randel. Randel's awkward. Very awkward. You seem him tinkering with his last minute preparations and gives you a completely fake thumbs up. He doesn't have everything under control. Jeez, you wonder if your comment got him on edge. You wait patiently as he finishes.
"I want Randel in the front," you state, "I took the liberty of having my clone tie us a line. It should be floating somewhere over there, by the island near the shallow water. Let's get moving".
You grab Randel's shirt and pull him into the water. You start wading through the water and then start swimming. The rest of the group follows your lead. You make your way into the area around the tiny island and search around for the rope. You find it and pull yourself down as swiftly as you can. Eventually, you find yourself being helped out of the water by the clones that scouted ahead. You exit the water quickly and quietly as does the rest of your party, and to your surprise, even Randel.
Your clone hands you the two extra communicators you gave them earlier and gives you a nod. Itachi and Kakashi come up behind you and dispel their clones. You put away the communicators and look at your lightning clone.
"Afraid your work isn't done yet," you advise your clone, "still need you. Could get sticky".
"I know he responds," he responds as if you didn't need to tell him that.
It's dead quiet in this top secret facility. By the layout of the place, you can tell that more experiments were done here. You step forward and then fall to one knee. The memories, they flood back in an instant. It's all too much. Too bright...
You're in so much pain. Why won't they stop. You're begging them to stop, but they just... won't... stop. They cut and stab you. They burn and club you. They try suffocating you. Why would you do this? To anyone?
You gasp and struggle for air desperately, you're hyperventilating. Itachi and Kakashi are bent down near you and Randel is apparently keeping a lookout.
"What... happened?" you say struggling for words. It feels like a sledgehammer has been placed to your chest.
"You tell us 21," Kakashi says with his eye narrowing in obvious concern. "You were fine one minute, then fell down to one knee. Your clone agonized for a bit, and then it was dispelled and you were on the floor... whimpering and pleading for us to stop".
"My... clone? Disappeared?" you say as you sit up and adjust yourself for comfort. You wonder if that's what your clone felt when you experimented on it. You feel as if you have been here before, and you know who it was. It was Danzo who was always present while atrocities were being committed in the name of science. You vow to apologize to your clone properly, if you make it out of here alive. Assuming it remembers your experiments, you hope it doesn't, but you're not sure how it works just yet.
"It was Danzo, he had me here," you stammer in speech as you get up. "He's the one that ran this facility. For a while I think... and there were others too".
You feel rage building up inside you. You resolve to keep your anger in check as you get next to Randel.
"Hey Randel, buddy," you start, "I'm starting to remember a lot of things. A lot of things that maybe, I shouldn't have remembered. Things I was probably better off having forgotten. But, you haven't forgotten, have you?"
Randel looks down at you, his massive, wide body making you look like a child in comparison. His eyes are soft and teeming with misery. He shakes his head no.
"Where you here?" you ask patiently.
A single tear forms in his left eye and rollls down his battle-worn face. It trickles down and rolls over the massive scar that goes across his face. He shakes his head.
"This... is... hell... sir" Randel states softly. "They made me... the perfect soldier here... no pain.... no fear... except... that is all I have".
Randel is truly a testament to the resolve of man as a species. The fact that he is standing here amongst the tragedies he must be reliving is astounding.
"I need you to do something for me, please," you say softly as you recover from your massive head ache. "I need you to just stick with me a bit longer. Lead us to where Danzo would be".
"Only one place that could be, sir," he answers gloomily, "I... will take you there, sir".
You pat him on the shoulder, which is quite a feat in itself to reach his shoulder, and turn around and nod at Itachi and Kakashi.
"Gentlemen, you know the formation," you inform, "I'm afraid my chakra is pretty shot to ****, but we didn't sign up for this job for the perks, did we?"
Kakashi smiles under his mask and tilts his head to the side. Itachi however, seems infuriated. He seems to be chasing ghosts. Ghosts that have haunted his family for far too long.
You walk throughout the facility following Randel, who has his Door Knocker in one hand, and his other hand touching the lantern on his belt as if he was using it as a safety net. Bodies upon bodies of Root members are here, all with the same seal on their tongue. The floorplan to this place is quite easy to follow, it's obvious this was never intended to be a military facility.
You take note of the tunnel your clone informed you of earlier. It certainly seemed like something drilled itself out of here, and the cave in wouldn't hold back the water forever you rationalized. Water was already starting to trickle through.
"We are really pressed for time here people," you say quietly as your shoes start to let water in to wet your feet.
You continue down the hallway, leading to the main chamber, according to Randel. The entire place is destroyed. Bestial claw marks accent some walls, with blood being splattered in almost every direction, including the ceilings.
You are mortified as you see all sorts of demonic experiments. Apparently, Danzo even went as far as trying to crossbreed animals with humans. You walk over the body of a poor girl, no more than 6 years of age who appears to have some sort of hunting cat DNA spliced with her own.
"This guy is a monster," Itachi says coldly. Perhaps without realizing it, or maybe even in preparation for the battle, Itachi has activated his Sharingan. And it is pulsating violently.
"We're going to square things out brother," you say trying to calm him down. Kakashi doesn't seem to want to say anything.
The further you go, the more atrocious the experiments get. There will be more than enough evidence to condemn this man, you realize, but you have to get him first.
The last set of labs you pass, were apparently testing on siblings, with a particular interest on brothers that have a bloodline ability. As you walked you were able to read various clipboards that insinuated that they were trying to force the bloodline abilities to come out in brothers that didn't show any aptitude with the family trait. It was their theory, that eventually, KG's would eventually belong to whoever was willing to go through the "procedure". Grisly business indeed.
"This is where he always saw me... here... his eye- eyes, never missing anything," Randel announced nervously, "he was a doc- doctor. But I don't think doctors are supposed to act thi- this way, sir. No, sir".
You slide open the door that is mostly busted glass and wait for everyone to make their way in.
"You know, you ruined everything," you hear a voice echoing throughout the large laboratory. You KNOW this voice. "It was YOU!" You filthy traitor! It was YOU, who destroyed the Leaf! You have single-handedly wrecked the village and doomed us to this filth! You and your filthy bloodline! I curse the day I allowed you to live 21!"
"It can't be that bad now Danzo," you say sarcastically as you eye the giant lab. This is not a good place to combat. He's got lots of hiding spots, and you know their are flammables all over the place. Lightning + flammables = bad day, and you don't need a genius level intellect to know that. "Why don't you come on out and we can talk this out?"
"You! You filthy mongrel, you would ally with the Uchiha!" the booming voice echoes throughout the lab. Shadows play tricks on your eyes as the fires burning in the lab cast shadows over everything. The lights flicker on and off, shining light over some places, while others are completely black. "It was because of you that Madara came and destroyed this place! My employees, my life's work. EVERYTHING. Gone because of YOU! And you dare to bring Itachi?! The boy king of the pigs themselves? And Kakashi?! A wannabe Uchiha who lives eternally in the shame of his pathetic father".
Kakashi seems completely unfazed by this verbal assault, Itachi on the other hand scours vigorously with his Sharingan. Randel trembles nervously, you think he is suffering from PTSD. This isn't good...
"Come on now Danzo, you started it with me," you answer honestly, "you don't think I would remember again? You cut me up like some sort of pig, except pigs get the courtesy of being dead before their intestines are on the chopping block!"
"No, YOUR FATHER STARTED THIS," Danzo screams back, "and I CURSE the day I trusted HIM AS WELL. But if I am to die in this place, let me give you one final piece of advice".
You look around, now desperate to find any hint of him. This is mounting up and it's not looking good.
"Don't trust your father, OR your mother," he screams, "that ***** that blew a hole in this place that will be our watery grave!"
My... mother? You think to yourself. But she was dead, or?
Kakashi looks at you and shakes his head rapidly as if to warn you. The four of you place yourselves in a circle with your backs facing one another.
"I can tell by your expression that you didn't know about your mother," Danzo continues with a deep, booming... ominous laugh. "Your mother was one of my best research subjects. That cave-in you saw? That was her handiwork. And your father... well he was a model employee, but I should have known better than to trust him. Who could trust a snake, after all. Although... in seeing you here, you do take more after your mother. Rabid and instinctive. As smooth as a brutish gorilla. Very unlike Orochimaru indeed".
"What did you say?!" your mind reels.
"Brother, mind yourself," Itachi warns.
You know he's right, but the memories they are flooding back. The lights, they are so bright... You fight to regain yourself. ---------------------- CLUTCH Moment + Free Will How do you regain yourself from this? and, if successful, what battle preparations are you making? Or are you going to try to negotiate? Withdraw to a better location? The possibilities are endless, but be careful, the waters coming
No... not now. Images flash before your eyes at blinding speeds. Your senses at overwhelmed, you shake your head and focus on the present. You remember going out to eat with your two little brothers, Itachi and Sasuke. You made a promise, an undying pledge to defend the Leaf with your life. To hell with what you were, you think. This is what I am NOW. You can't go crying about a past that you can't change. You've been through hell and back, and you're still standing. The man responsible for this is Danzo, and he's right here... This is for you... Itachi... Sasuke... Sarutobi-sensei... Kakashi...
You snap out of it as the pandemonium is about to boil over worse. Your will has pulled you out of the psychological aspect of this trial, but what about Randel? He is suffering the same, but he's alone. Randel is visibly shaken, he doesn't look like he can make it much farther. Perhaps it would have been a good idea to speak with him about how he felt about all this, and create a stronger bond. This is something you will live for and endure in creating. You have a team now, a real family, and you must protect it.
"Good to have you back brother," Itachi says as he scours the room searching for Danzo.
How long was I out? Well, at least you're standing.
You touch Randel's shoulder. "Randel, I almost lost it just now too"
"Si-, sir,?" Randel looks at you in disbelief, "please, trust me. What he did to us, was unfathomable. But we're still here. We're still standing up against this, and we can't let him win. Not after everything, not after this. I am here for you. Itachi AND Kakashi are here for you".
"That's right big guy," Kakashi says calmly, "and right now, we're stronger than any family, our lives are riding on one another".
"Kakashi, your ninja hounds," you suggest, "can they find Danzo in this anarchy?"
He shakes his head negatively. "Not a chance," he replies, "there's no smell for them to base a scent on. Plus, all the water and chemicals and the fire. There's just no way".
Damn, you think to yourself. The water level is rising, and Danzo's madness is getting the better of him. His maniacal laughter still echoes the area, threatening of a comeuppance for you and your team, and all of your families and friends.
"We need to find a way to get the hell out of here," you state with urgency in your voice, "we can't use any jutsu that would spark an explosion, we'll blow ourselves up. The water's rushing in, we need to get Danzo and get the hell out of here. Kakashi, can you stop the water from coming in? Those 1000 jutsu include any earth style?"
Kakashi nods knowingly, "On it," he reports. He leaves the room and heads deeper into the water.
You didn't want to cut a valuable asset from the team now, but there really was no choice.
"Itachi, can you find him?" you ask hiding the panic in your voice.
"No good either," he answers, "the old man's shame must be great. To hide so much from justice".
You realize something like a jolt of lightning in a sun filled sky. So immediate and unprovoked, yet still undeniable.
"DANZO!" you scream, his laughter stops, "Why can't you be more like Sarutobi-sensei?! He puts the Leaf before himself, as a true leader does! He recognizes the height of every tree! You would chop and burn an edge of the forest to make the forest better. But all you do is steal the splendor of the forest! The forest CAN be saved, but not by the culling the weak from the herd. Don't chop down the sick trees, treat them! Heal the sick trees so that the forest may once again be healthy and strong!"
"You fool! What do you know of this?!" Danzo responds hysterically, "what do you know of MY trials? Of my tribulations?! Have you any idea what it is, to live under the shadow of Hiruzen? A man everyone loves? He walks in the light unable to do the necessary! I am the true savior of Konoha! I am the one who does the unthinkable and the unwanted! So that people like you can point your finger and accuse me a villain. It is because of I boy, that people like you have such a great life to begin with! Because we don't take the moral highground, we just think about getting the job done and get it done no matter what!"
You signal to Itachi while Danzo continues his speech. Itachi leans in and you signal to Randel who also leans in.
"This guy is off his rocker," you whisper, "I'm going to piss him off and try to draw him out. But we NEED an escape plan. The fact we haven't been attacked yet shows us he either doesn't want to fight, or he knows we could take him".
"In a straight up fight, perhaps," Itachi whispers back, "but this isn't a straight up fight. The fires making everything impossible to see, and we still have the water coming. All this water and fire coming in at the same time... 21, soon we won't be able to breathe".
"Yeah, I know," you answer as if Itachi making you think about it is the only reason it became reality.
"Danzo! Are you jealous of Sarutobi-sensei or something?!" You scream at Danzo in an effort to get him to fly off the handle.
"Jealous?! Of that vulture?!" Danzo answers in pure outrage. He's really getting close to budging you think. But there just isn't ANY time.
Itachi has been continuing his search, and even with his brilliance with the Sharingan he has been unable to get anything done. The space is just must too large, the fires are all engulfing, and the water is up to your waist now.
You hear water displacing and you turn to see Kakashi running at you. He stops near you and has a grim expression on the bit of face you can see.
"I have placed supports and earth domes over the cave in, but 21, they won't hold," Kakashi reports in a low voice.
Great, more to think about. Absolutely great. You look around for anything that might help you.
"Kakashi, can you three go and capture Danzo? He's lost his mind at this point I think," you whisper, "you might be able to catch him off guard".
They nod and climb the water and begin to chakra walk on the surface.
Danzo is still talking like a madman.
"Danzo, would you give yourself up?" You ask trying to discern a location, "you really want your legacy to end like this? You served with Tobirama! Is this how he would want to see you? This legacy, is this YOUR legacy?"
"Don't you dare mention Tobirama-sama," he screams back. You're unsure whether to continue or not, this really seems to be a sore subject.
The waters been stalled, although not completely, you have managed to regain your sense of self, and for the moment, Randel seems to have gotten a hold of himself; although you know you will need to speak with Randel further.
What should you do? ------------------------------------- Clutch Moment A: The hell with it, keep talking about Tobirama hoping to bring him out. Appeal to his sense of justice B: The hell with it, keep talking about Tobirama and about how much of a punk he was for having Danzo serve him C: Change the subject but continue to try to talk him down D: Stop talking to him altogether and look for him yourself
"You're upset that I mentioned Tobirama?" you goad him.
"Kakashi," you whisper into your transmitter, "if you can still hear me, I need an earth technique to kill these fires. I'm pretty sure Danzo is going to lose it, nail him after he takes me out. I don't need you guys getting hurt".
"But bro-" you hear Itachi's transmission before you kill the communication line.
"Danzo, your death, this explosion," you continue hoping to lure him out, "all it's going to do is provoke the Uchiha and destroy the Leaf".
"The LEAF!?" Danzo replies angrily, "since WHEN has the Leaf cared about me?! You would have me grovel before the Uchiha! If they want so much, then they can die under the weight of their own amibitions! All everyone has ever done is try to put me down, while all I do is raise people up! Make them more than what they can be! And how do they repay me?! With THIS?! This underground facility I had to divert public funds for? I had to become the darkness before the Leaf could shine in the sun".
Alright, he's lost it. His ranting does not fit the psychological profile you read about him. He seems to be completely out of touch with reality. To hell with this.
"What about Tobirama?! What about him?! He tried pushing you up, towards that platform you deserved," you bully back with some ferocity of your own, "but what happened Dan-chan?! You couldn't take the pressure?! Did YOU die under the weight of your own ambitions?! What prevented you from being Hokage old man?! WHAT?!"
You wait around, you don't hear anything except the fire and the crackling of electricity.
"Your silence PROVES your cowardice. Where has your bravery gone?!" you yell out, "I'll tell you where old man, you sent your bravery the same place you sent Tobirama. You sent it to HELL! You're nothing but a two bit, sniveling, pathetic"- your words get cut off by a sudden bludgeon to the side of your head.
You crash down into the water and struggle under the lab equipment to try to get some sort of environment advantage. You climb up and look up at Danzo. He has removed the gray cloth from his right eye, and his arm is completely covered... in eyes?! In... Sharingans?!
"Wha?" you say with bewilderment as you look at Danzo's right eye, also a Sharingan. Danzo's face is burned to the cheek bone on the left side. He is a man possessed.
"You just couldn't shut up huh Uchiha?" Danzo says, spit flying from his mouth in frustration. "You just couldn't shut up. Your obsession with the Uchiha has led you to this".
You cup your right hand over your head and feel your blood rushing out. You stand taller and use your chakra to stand on the water to see Danzo eye to eye. He smiles coldly at you. You spit blood into the water between you two.
"You know how much stronger you would have been had you sided with me?" Danzo asks, "I would have made you great in my place. I would have been to you what Tobirama was to me. Instead, you will know death".
He really cracked your head open, it's not healing. The shock must be apparent on your face as Danzo cackles with glee.
"You haven't perfected that healing ability of yours, have you Uchiha?" Danzo spats at you with hatred. "I shouldn't give you the death you deserve. No, not with the beloved Sharingan. That is a death worthy of an Uchiha, one you would crave".
You're beginning to black out.
"Instead, I will save the greatest technique for your friends, but they won't be here in time," Danzo says as he stabs you in the chest with a broken piece of lab equipment.
The pain reanimates you like a jolt of lightning. You wince and grunt as Danzo starts twisting the metal shard around your body.
"Earth style! Blinding Dust!" you hear from somewhere in the room. It's Kakashi's voice.
Danzo uses his free hand to cover his eyes while you get blindsided by what feels like a desert's worth of sand.
You hear Danzo grunt as he collapsed into the water in front of you, splashing about in the darkness. It's Randel and Itachi, they look concerned as they examine your wounds. You don't get up. Instead, you examine the room in it's new found lighting. The fires are completely out, the only thing illuminating the room now is the light fixtures that are flickering on and off and the few that have remained intact.
"Sir," Randel says to you as he picks up Danzo's body and drapes him over his shoulder.
"Listen to me," you whisper with a raspy voice, it's all you can manage. "Get him out of here and get him behind bars. I'm pretty wounded, and I'm not healing".
"Carry him," you hear Kakashi say as he suddenly appears next to you, "I'll carry our prisoner. You treat 21 with the utmost care".
You smile at Kakashi and feel the blood pouring out of your smile. You spit to the side out of respect.
"Sorry if I get my blood all over you," you whisper to Kakashi. Randel bends down and goes to try to remove the shard from your body.
"No, don't," you refuse softly.
"He's right," Kakashi agrees, "if you remove it, he'll bleed out. You'll kill him".
You look up at Itachi and frown in humility. "Sorry I couldn't be a better big brother".
Itachi is incensed. He still hasn't deactivated his Sharingan. You pass in and out of consciousness for a bit, when an idea comes to you.
"Kakashi..." you whisper, "the cave-in.."
"I took care of it 21," he assures.
"No... when it does cave in...the pressure," you cough, "there'll be so much pressure".
"The water... it'll cause the rocks to pop out like a champagne bottles," Kakashi says as he finishes your sentence.
You smile at him again and look at Itachi. His eyes are changing color, a black design is forming inside his eyes... What is happening to your little brother?
The panic gives you a second, and perhaps final, wind. You pull on Randel's shoulder and help yourself up by pulling on his uniform. You cry out in pain as the shard pokes around inside your chest.
"Let's go, Randel, please... help me walk," you instruct, "this mission isn't over. Let's go... little brother".
Kakashi carries Danzo and Randel cradles you gently into his arms. Itachi follows without saying a word. You make it all the way to the cave-in spot. It looks like it's about to burst. This would have been a good time to use it, had you learned how to use those exploding scout golems you read about, you think.
"The sudden burst of pressure will push the rocks outward," Kakashi explains to the group as you struggle to regain consciousness, "the water will then flow as fast as possible to the end of the facility. When the facility is completely filled with water, it will cause a shooting wave back this way. The water will try to occupy all the space it can within this facility. It's only going to happen once, and if we miss our chance, we're all dead. We ride the wave to the top of the lake and swim to shore".
"I would have made it sound cooler," you joke with a cough. Itachi is still not himself, he just stands there, brooding.
"You will need something to float with, sir," Randel says as he looks down at you.
"He's right," Itachi says his eyes now showing a strange black, almost Z shape in his red eyes. "Put my brother down Randel, I'll help him swim. You can't carry him and swim".
Randel looks at Kakashi hesitantly. Kakashi merely nods his head slowly. Randel places you gently onto your feet. You yell in pain and hold onto Itachi, who is surprisingly strong for his age.
"I will dispel my jutsu so that the thing bursts when we want it to," Kakashi explains, "are we ready?"
"No," Randel says as he places his hand on the lantern on his belt. He flicks it on, it emits an eerie blue light in the darkness, like the will o' wisp of old lore. Randel's expression and demeanor completely change. He goes to a nearby door and rips it right off the hinges. He holds it above his head with both arms.
Kakashi seems to understand what he is doing, but you don't. Your head sways uncontrollably.
"Alright, here we go!" Kakashi says as he releases his jutsu.
The cave-in blows water ferociously. The water claws and stabs it's way through before the rocks finally give way. You all make your way to the hole as quickly as possible.
"When the wave hits, you jump on this door!" Randel screams as he floats the door on the water. Itachi lays you down on the door and holds onto the door and you, trying as hard as he can to not let you loose. You hold onto the door as well as you can as well. Randel on the other hand goes towards the water. He picks up another door, this one made of steel it seems and much larger than the other and holds it like a shield towards the incoming wave.
"Let's make this count!" Kakashi screams as he rushes towards the hole with Danzo in his arms.
Itachi floats your raft closer to the exit and readies himself for the wave.
The wave hits with the intensity of a tidal wave. Randel held his ground for about one second before the metal door slams into him, his effort wasn't in folly however. It managed to alert Itachi as to when to start paddling. He slides the door and starts heading out of the facility. The wave pushes its way past Randel and you feel the water pushing your feet. The wave jets you out of the hole like a bullet from a gun and you feel the water wash over you as you get launched onto the surface of the lake.
You look around and see Kakashi and Danzo floating towards the shore slowly. But you don't see Itachi or Randel. Several medical-nin come to your aid and place you in a stretcher, even though you're atop the water. You turn to your left to see Sarutobi-sensei aiding Kakashi out of the water. Danzo, who is still knocked out is being held by the KMPF.
"He still as the weapon in his chest," you hear the one medical-nin say to the other, "smart thing you did not removing it. You have a serious open chest wound".
"Where's my brother?" you ask fervently.
The medical-nin both look confused. You hear a loud splash as Randel surfaces onto the water surface with Itachi in hand, carrying him like a baby's doll. His lantern still activated and maintaining the creepy blue light, even among the light of the village.
"That's my brother, see to him first," you instruct.
Before you know it, almost all of the village is on scene and helping out. Randel deactivates his lantern when Itachi has been properly taken care of, and then promptly passes out himself. That's a good idea you think. You should pass out yourself-
You awake in a groggy state. You're in the hospital, in a private room. You're laying down in a white and blue bed. You look around and see Sarutobi-sensei is sitting down looking at you. He jumps to his feet when you come to. To your left are three beds, and in them are Itachi, Kakashi, and Randel respectively.
"What, why?" you ask, "why are they in bed? What about the syringes I prepared for them?"
Your question reeks of concern, but Sarutobi only offers you a smile.
"I know what it's like to be in a hospital by yourself, so I figured you'd like the company," you hear as you see Kakashi sit up.
"Next time, don't be so foolish with your life brother," Itachi says obviously disturbed by your behavior.
"I'm fine too, sir," Randel says.
"Everyone is fine, thanks to your blood," Sarutobi-sensei says, "but you. You still need to heal. We don't know what Danzo did to you, but you're body isn't healing like normal. It's still faster than a regular human, but it's still much slower. As far as these three, well, we had to keep up appearances, didn't we?"
Sarutobi walks over in between the two beds of Itachi and your own.
"Itachi here suffered a concussion. Kakashi suffered a broken right arm. Randel... well, Randel," he pauses, "when the hospital staff treated Randel, they were mortified to see all the damage. His body was already riddled with scars, the poor boy almost passed for a large map. He suffered 7 broken ribs, a herniated disc, torn hamstring, not to mention several concussions. But everyone is better now, thankfully. I'm just here to personally discharge you, when you're ready. After seeing the reaction to Randel's wounds, I felt better to intervene myself. No one thought he would make it, and we couldn't have people knowing about the secret you possess, it would cause even more anarchy. So I took care of it".
"Good job Sarutobi-sensei," you say with a slight smirk. You feel tired, but otherwise well. You examine yourself and you seem to be physically fine, on the outside at least. "I should be good to go. I'd like to check myself out further though, hopefully the poison isn't permanent".
"We'll wait until tonight and sneak you boys out of here," he answers warmly. "Now... about Danzo. We fished him out of the water, and were able to seal his Sharingans without anyone outside of the ANBU knowing. But... I'm not sure a public trial would be in the best interest of everyone now. The facility was a horror, and Danzo himself was placed under a strong genjutsu, strongest I've ever seen. If we give him a public trial, he might reveal the experimentation he did on himself at the sake of the Uchiha. And the Leaf will suffer for it. He is being interrogated by the Yamanaka clan as we speak however, we will see what he knows".
Sarutobi lowers his head to get closer to you.
"You all did a great job, I'm really proud of all of you," he says before standing straight again. "Now, how should we proceed?"
"We could just have a public sentencing," Itachi says, "my father should be present, as should I. He should be bound and gagged. But he should be publicly sentenced. And his crimes should be at least made known to the Uchiha, or they will raise all sorts of hell at this".
"That might be a disaster as well," Kakashi responds, "if Danzo was a known Uchiha hater, him just going to trial and being sentenced might be enough to appease the Uchiha for now. Have him sentenced for crimes 'against the entire village'. We could always try to find other ways to smooth over the hostilities later".
"You're burying the crimes he did if you do that," Randel states to your surprise. "By doing that, you're covering up hi- his acts as a monster. You're just making the government look unfair by sentencing a man to an unknown crime. You'll look like a dictator sensei".
"Hmmm... Good point Randel," Sarutobi says, "if we have a public trial and announce his crimes, it could put the entire blame on him however. But everything will seem better because the village did something about it. But Danzo would need to be prosecuted by a person who knows what is at risk, is an excellent orator, and will know what he should keep secret. I don't know if we have someone qualified for that".
Itachi sucks his teeth in protest, the deliberation is making him obviously annoyed.
"Perhaps, I can just hand Danzo over to your father Itachi?" Sarutobi suggests, "let the Uchiha deal with him as they see fit? It might help the Uchiha problem, but the village as a whole wouldn't benefit as much". -------------------- Turning Point A: Itachi's plan sounds best B: I agree with Kakashi C: Randel is right, have a public trial. I would like to prosecute him if you'll let me D: Give him to the Uchiha
"I think it's important that we display the strength of the justice in the Leaf," you explain, "what is most important is that we control how we present the evidence. Can we properly restrain Danzo? Ensuring he doesn't have any access to the Sharingan?"
"Indeed," Sarutobi-sensei says as he strokes his chin, "interestingly enough, they were provided by Madara. He also came up with the idea. Orochimaru performed the surgery itself... There was also talk of... further 'enhancements' that I think you should know about".
You sit up in your hospital bed and crack your neck.
"What did he have planned?" you ask with increasing curiosity. What could possibly be worse than an arm full of Sharingans? Do you even want to know? Probably not.
"He had intentions... he wanted to inject the honored First into his shoulder," Sarutobi explains. "He was talking with Orochimaru about it. He wanted the Senju DNA, and hoped to complete a working method of copying the First's fabled wood style... And also, there is more. Orochimaru was allowed to work a line of experiments that tried to do the same thing with other people. Dozens of them, all newborn infants and young children. There was only one survivor. He's been taken into shelter, but he's still shocked".
You hang your head in shame. Is this the shadow that the Leaf has cast?
"As much as I do not want to, I think we will need to bring him into the trial. It will make what happened seem more real if we have an actual survivor," you rationalize. "And also, if and hopefully when Danzo escapes the genjutsu, I wish to speak with him".
"That will be arranged, of course 21," Sarutobi agrees, "anything else?"
"Not right now, I got to do some more checking up on his psychological profile," you say stepping off the bed and starting to change, "what are you guys going to do?"
"I need to speak with my father and report this properly," Itachi informs, "and... well, there's more. And I need to look into it".
Your mind recounts the black shapes in Itachi's eyes. Oh no...
"Of course brother," you answer with a smile, "hey, something came to mind too".
"Hmmm?" Itachi responds with a slight tilt of his head.
"I was thinking with all this, maybe your father would consider stepping down as soke. Leave you in charge, after all, you destroyed the Uchiha's main oppressor. Besides, we will need their support in destroying Madara. The Uchiha hold a stake in this too".
"I'm not really thinking about that now 21," Itachi admits, "maybe later. We'll talk about it later". And with that, Itachi leaves.
"A lot on his mind," Kakashi realizes out loud. "He's really amazing though. It's hard to see him and think he's only 10".
"Kakashi, you know, there's something I wanted to tell you," you say aloud, "whatever happens, it seems like you're the voice of reason in our group. I wanted to thank you for that".
Kakashi closes his eye and you can tell a smile is under his mask.
"It's nothing," he says, "you guys make it easy. With younger shinobi like you and Itachi, the older generation has to adjust or get swept away".
"No, it's quite the accomplishment," you correct him, "and I want you to know, we never would have made it without you. And Itachi... well, Itachi lost his cool. Something that I never expected, especially after reading about him. But... there was something in his eyes".
You look at Sarutobi who looks back at you and raises an eyebrow.
"In, his eyes, you say?" he questions you.
"The Mangekyo Sharingan," you answer, "it's formed. I'm almost positive it's what Itachi described. I fear he might be targeted by his clan members if they find out. So we must make it a priority to keep them in the dark".
"Is that why you suggested he become soke?" Kakashi asks.
"That would make sense," Sarutobi adds, "I will support it with all my backing. I will somehow, get that boy made soke. But you realize he will have to leave the ANBU? If he leaves the ANBU, it wouldn't be normal for him to be teamed up with shinobi who aren't ANBU".
"Then I guess that's my resignation," Kakashi clarifies removing any doubt. "I understand what the situation is, but as things stand, we can't ruin team stability".
"Regardless," you correct once more, "the title will only be in name. The primary responsibilities will still fall on Fugaku. The beauty of it will merely be, that the clan can't act without Itachi's support. Which is a beautiful thing".
Sarutobi smiles at you and then at Kakashi.
"Aw child," he starts, "how proud I am of you all. And how happy I am that you walk in the light. Otherwise, the Leaf wouldn't be. Now, rest up. Take it from me. Paperwork is much more exhausting than infiltration".
You smile and bow.
"I'm off to see a friend," Kakashi instructs before he vanishes in a puff of smoke.
"Quite the team, sir," Randel says with an emotionless expression.
"What will you do?" you ask Randel.
"I'm going to stay here if you don't mind," he replies, "I really like hospital food".
Sarutobi looks at him oddly before getting up.
"As long as you still make it early to training, you can stay where ever you choose Randel," he iterates.
"Yes sensei," Randel answers quickly, almost in a panic.
"I'm off then," you say before disappearing yourself.
You make your way to the library to present your case. You are studying for nearly an hour before a messenger comes looking for you. The messenger explains that Danzo has been released from the genjutsu and that the Yamanaka can confirm a man in Danzo's memory wearing a mask with a strange design on it that called himself Madara.
In keeping with your original intentions, you go and interrogate Danzo. When you make it to the interrogation corps, you find Danzo tied to a chair in a lone room. His arm and eye sealed and covered with leather armor, almost like a horse.
"Ah, 21," he says to you as he sees you walk in, "you who poisoned the Leaf. Have you come to gloat? Or merely observe?"
"Actually Danzo," you start..."That's up to you". ---------------------------- A: Ask Danzo why Madara came after him B: Explain to Danzo that he will be publicly tried C: Tell Danzo that you know him and how he would normally act. Explain that he will be placed on trial. Promise as much leniency as possible, given that he tells the truth and doesn't act up in court D: Same as C. (Lie) E: Start with C, then A F: Start with D, then A
"Danzo," you acknowledge politely before sitting down. You look at him, analyze his face, his posture. This man shows little remorse for his actions. "Do you realize how much damage you could have done to Konoha?"
Danzo looks at you as if you're a fool.
"The one that struck against the Leaf was you," he replies vulgarly, "you chose the Uchiha over an entire village!".
"You're a powerful political figure, respected by all," you counter without losing your cool, "your actions are only going to make us struggle further for stability".
"Only because you would expose me and brand me a monster, a traitor," the elder replies again.
"And what are you if not those things?" you ask sincerely, "answer me! What are you if not a monster for condemning innocents, that aren't even part of the battle? You could argue that the infant Uchiha would grow up to be traitorous, even then, what do you say about the people you affected that had nothing to do with the Uchiha? The ANBU you stole for your purposes? The family of those shinobi? The people affected throughout the various explosions YOUR operations have caused. You've left orphans and widows. Your trial is only evidence that no one is above reproach, and that no one can spit in the eyes of what is right".
He scoffs at you.
"You, who sit there unblemished and untested," he continues, "you have no right. Live amongst the people and know their pain and sit back and do nothing. Then speak to me. I would have made this village powerful, and in this power, untouchable. Never again would fleeting alliances have to be made! NEVER!"
"But at what cost Danzo?" you ask as you slam your hand on the table and face him, inches away. "At the cost of people like Tobirama? How would he have felt about your intentions with the First?"
Danzo tries to meet your gaze, but can't. His shame is too much.
"What happened between you and Madara?"
"He is the one that came to me," Danzo says breaking down, "he came with Orochimaru already in tow. We've been working together for years. He had other compatriots, or at least, he said he did. He promised to destroy the Uchiha for me and leave the rest of the village alone. He would give me the methods to do so, and would oversee from afar to protect in our common interests. That's what he promised anyway. I was a fool to trust either of them".
"And at the facility? When you incapacitated me?" you ask softly.
"I saw glimpses of what I did, but nothing more, it was like a nightmare," Danzo answers, "but I do not regret it. Not at all. I only regret that I failed".
You stare at him thoughtfully. -------------------------- Make your Fate
"Danzo, at the facility, you first said that it was Madara," you begin your line of questioning, "but then, you mentioned my mother... Why? Was Madara actually there?"
"Madara usually works through agents," Danzo answers shortly, "at the facility however, he somehow managed to sneak in. First he came to see me. He questioned my failure and told me that you would be reaching me soon. I dismissed the idea as nonsense, I obviously underestimated you. He became infuriated, angry at the lack of interest I was showing. Mentioned something about the 'purity of your blood' or some other nonsense. Then he released your mother. He overwhelmed me, and your mother... well, your mother destroyed the facility like the beast she is".
You feel a slight tinge at the base of your brain. Do you even care about your parents? You're not sure, but the priority is this village, learning about yourself comes last.
"Are there any other people like you in the Leaf? Others who are working behind the scenes to help out Madara?"
"Most likely," he shakes his head, "but now I'll never know, as I'm sure to be hanged".
"Why do you think it's likely?" you ask curiously.
"As I said, Madara doesn't get his hands dirty, he works through people, like a puppeteer," Danzo clarifies, "it's unlikely that he reached his level of current affairs by simple reconnaissance".
You stand up and put your foot on the chair.
"Where is Orochimaru? How can I reach him? Does he have anything we can use against him? He's trying to bring down the Leaf" you state with emphasis.
"I would have no idea," the criminal responds with an increasing sense of agitation, "he does have several other bases, but that much I know by simple necessity. He is always moving around, but to where, I have no clue. And as far as a weakness goes. Well, that's simple. He has far too many weaknesses. He wishes to learn all jutsus and have the perfect body for a shinobi. His obsession with the Uchiha is only matched by his obsession for you. He wants to steal your body for experiments".
"I heard you meant to disgrace the First," you mention casually and look at Danzo with a steely glare.
"Disgrace? No," Danzo corrected, "his legacy would live on forever. The First was Madara's mortal enemy. He defeated Madara, and with it, became Hokage, our first Hokage. Madara felt cheated by the Leaf and his own clan, the Uchiha. The Uchiha were conquerors in the time of the First Hokage... This all goes back to the founding of Konoha, and the two major roles of the foundation of Konoha itself were played by Hashirama Senju and Madara Uchiha".
You're a bit confused by Danzo's explanation. Upon asking him to elaborate, he gives you a detailed account of the Senju and the Uchiha and the clans they conquered forming Konoha. He explains the dark history of Konoha, and why Madara despises everyone in the Leaf. It's a long story, and a lot to absorb, but luckily, Danzo likes to hear himself talk. He describes Madara as cold, cunning, and very resourceful. Given Danzo's description, it sounds as if Danzo is almost envious of the power Madara wields. He describes the little he knows about Madara himself, which isn't much more than the story of the forming of Konoha.
"That would make for a fine story of revenge," you reply as Danzo ends his history lesson. "But how was Madara controlling you? How could he possibly destroy the Leaf?"
"I don't have a clue how he would destroy the Leaf, he mentioned something about the ten tailed beast, but that's impossible," Danzo reasons, "the ten tailed beast was destroyed long ago, the jinchuriki made sure that the beast's power would never be absolute again. With the jinchuriki spread out over all the land, no one nation could hope to use them as weapons, but as defense, scare tactics to prevent an all out assault".
Once again, Danzo is unclear. You ask him to explain what the jinchuriki are and what the ten tailed beast was. You told him you thought it was all a legend. He goes on to explain more about the Sage of the Six Paths and about the sealing of the beasts within human hosts, the jinchuriki. He explains that there is even a jinchuriki in the Leaf itself. A young boy is hosting the 9 tailed Fox, a beast of immeasurable power.
"I suppose I will just have to find solace in the fact that while I hang in the gallows, Madara will keep you around as a tool, as he did myself," Danzo says with a smile, the first you've seen from him that was sincere. "He's a powerful opponent, and if he made me look like a fool, he'll utterly destroy you and your cheer committee".
You sneer a little.
"Well then Danzo..." ------------ A: That'll be all B: Will you be willing to cooperate in court? Or should we just lock you up and not even bother? C: If you cooperate in court, they might show leniency D: Thanks for everything, I'll see you in court to ensure you don't get out for a long time
"I suppose that'll be all then Danzo," you state as you remove your foot from the chair. "Leave it up to the younger generation to take care of the Leaf for you".
Danzo scoffs again. You bow your head and leave. That could have gone a LOT worse you think. Although you feel as though Danzo was very forthcoming, something still nags at you. It seems that the more you know, the deeper the rabbit hole goes. Again there was a mention of the tailed beasts. What exactly would anyone want with such power? Surely, if it IS indeed Madara, an elder such as he would know that such raw power can never be controlled by anyone...
"Absolute power corrupts absolutely," you think aloud without realizing it.
"That it does child," Sarutobi-sensei agrees as he sees you. He must have been waiting outside for you. "Did you learn anything?"
"Well, I learned a lot actually, I just don't know how you think we should go through with this," you reply in earnest.
"How so?" Sarutobi-sensei says with a puzzled look on his face.
"Well, I only see this trial going one of two ways," you confess your fears, "it could go really well and fix everything. Or, it could set off a bomb in our village. If Danzo sounds off like he just did to me, he's as good as convicted. But Danzo is too smart for that. He thinks he will hang for this. And right now sensei... I'm not sure on what I should do".
Sarutobi-sensei turns around and looks out a nearby window. He spots children playing and smiles as if he had a secret only he knew. A knowledge in his old age that not only comes through wisdom, but in seeing both sides to any argument.
"You see this children, 21?" He asks you as he waves to them. "I teach them, I speak to them. They are completely innocent. Some of them will grow up to be shinobi, because they wish it. Some... because their family and duty compels them. And some, will have a worse fate. This life of ours will be forced on them, because of necessity or revenge. Name your motive. These innocent children, they laugh and they play because that is all they know. They don't have to worry about what they don't know exists".
He turns to you before continuing.
"Is ignorance bliss?" He shakes his head slowly, "perhaps, in a way it is. But just like these children, this village will one day have to grow up, and face the sins of their fathers and all those that came before them. If I could protect these children, and their children's children from that fate, I would. But I don't know if I can. Do you think Danzo should hang? Or should we jail him and risk the possibility he will escape one day?"
"I don't know," you confess honestly, "on one hand, I think he is too proud to escape. On the other, the man is so deluded, that he thinks what he did was righteous. He thinks the ends justify the means, and there was no convincing him otherwise. I... I don't know what to do with him. And sensei..."
You trail off as you look back to the moment Danzo informed you about the tailed beasts and the origins of Konoha. You wonder if this place is as good as any to bring this up.
"Speak freely child," he instructs. "I have never been one to chastise for honesty. At worst, you might not like the answer I give, but an answer is best than sitting and wondering, is it not?"
He's right. An answer is better than wondering why or who.
"Can we talk here?" you ask as you look around. It's quiet and unoccupied at least, in this branch of the building.
"Of course, you'll be hard pressed to find a more secure spot to talk than in here," he answers.
You open up about what Danzo told you. About the tailed beasts, about the jinkchuriki the Leaf houses. And most important, about the very real risk Madara Uchiha presents. You ask him why didn't he tell you about any of this. Throughout your rant, he looks at you fondly. This irritates you, but you can't help but feel comforted. Finally you ask if there's anything else he's keeping from you.
This question makes him turn serious and somber for a moment before turning again to the window.
"21," he begins, "you see that blonde haired boy there? His name is Uzumaki Naruto. He is a good child, a bit mischievous but good and kind. He is an outcast, and he doesn't know why. He is our jinchuriki, and I have always kept an eye out for him. It would seem as if fate has compelled you to speak about these things at the moment Naruto was outside. He is ostracized because the parents all know him to have the demon fox inside him, so they tell their children he's a monster, not to be trusted. The children are not to be blamed, they are only following what they know, how is a child to distrust his mother or father? You are like these children. A child of the Leaf. As you may have guessed, you are not the teenager you think you are. You may look young, but your body isn't, your memory is still new".
He turns again and points to the children.
"That means, that you are exactly like these children out there. Most of all, you are like Naruto," he answers, "and some things, I did know about. Others, most of the information you tell me, is brand new. The things I held from you was because like these children, you needed to grow up and be ready to bear the responsibilities of being a shinobi. Just like Naruto, this life of a shinobi has been forced upon you. And for that... there can be no forgiveness. But for a moment, what of Naruto? Should I go and tell that boy that he holds inside him a monster? Should I explain to him every sordid detail involving Madara and the bloody history of our village? I never acted unfairly towards you, I merely protected you. How would you have acted if from the moment you came to my door I had told you everything? Would you had been able to handle it?"
"I don't have an answer to that, because you never presented that possibility to me back then," you answer with a bit of frustration in your voice.
"Now you understand, and I think you benefited from this," he responds, "you grew from it, as you will continue to grow. And I will continue to trust in you as I have trusted in you. So, with this said, what concerns you most?"
"Well," you mutter briefly, "I don't know whether to hunt down Orochimaru or let him loose for now. Chances are he is working for Madara, and regardless of who we take, we can't fight Madara right now. He is too powerful, or so they say, and there are too many unknowns. Too many variables... just too many variables. And Danzo... Well, I don't know should Danzo get a trial or a hanging or what, I just don't know".
"What does your heart tell you?" he asks warmly.
My heart... My heart says
------------------ Free Will: Make your Fate
These questions need to be answered: How are you going to handle Danzo? There are many options, and they have been presented, but which should you go with?
What about this new information: Should you share it with the team? Or let them be ignorant yet blissful?
The fate of Orochimaru: The fact remains he is probably near Madara. Do you risk the chance to find him out before he causes further damage, or do you prepare for what may come?
The fate of Madara: Do you seek him out knowing you're outclassed? Will you share his secret openly with those you trust? Maybe with everyone? Or will you train to fight him and one day bring him to justice?
The fate of Naruto: You feel a bond with Naruto now that Sarutobi has mentioned this to you. You are like this poor child. Should you keep him in the dark as well? Shelter him? Or should he grow up and become a shinobi who holds his head up high?
The fate of the Leaf: All of the above will mold the very future of the Leaf. How will you help sculpt what will one day become the Leaf's history? Do you even wish to serve the Leaf anymore knowing its secrets?
"Sensei... I never told you my nindo," you bring up after careful thought. "I will raise the Leaf out of it's murky past into the bright future lit by the Will of Fire. I will continue to serve it until it or I no longer exists. I will seek out and destroy any snakes or shadows that dare harm it because THAT is my ninja way".
Sarutobi looks at you pensively and then smiles as he examines your eyes.
"Your eyes," he says, "they do indeed have the Will of Fire. I am glad to see the new generation is in good hands. I will trust you to help lead Konoha into a new era. Hopefully one of peace".
He bows to you, joy easily visible on his face and walks away. You walk towards the window. You look at that blonde haired boy that sits lonely under the shade, staring at the rest of the boys playing. Naruto. Naruto Uzumaki huh? So they made you a jinchuriki and an orphan? War is indeed an ugly thing... But can it be changed? Do such extremes have to be taken by men such as Danzo in order for us to truly know peace and security? No, you will find your own way.
You make your way down there to try to talk to Naruto. He sees you coming and looks at you. He has blue eyes, but in reality, they are just lifeless, regardless of how shining they are. His loneliness seems to be killing him.
"You're Naruto, right?" you say with a smile and sit next to him.
He looks at you as if shocked. He blinks his eyes several times before he does anything else. You look around to stall for time and hopefully give him time to adjust. You notice all the children and nearby villagers are looking at you as if you're crazy. So I'm crazy just for talking to this poor kid? No wonder this kid is having such a tough time. Out of the corner of your eye, you see Sarutobi-sensei smiling as he looks at you both from the window. When you turn your head to meet his gaze, he isn't there. Maybe you didn't see him after all.
"So, what are you doing by yourself here Naruto?" you ask as you try to engage him in conversation again.
He pokes you.
"I guess you're real," he says softly. "Did I do something wrong? I've been here all day".
"No, not at all," you answer, "I just figured you and I are a lot alike. You're friends with Sarutobi-sensei right?"
"The Hokage is your sensei?" he asks with eagerness suddenly washing over him.
You nod and smile.
"That must be SO cool!" he says with a huge smile as he turns to you and adjusts himself in his seat. "What has he taught you? Has he taught you like tons of jutsu? Or are you a taijutsu user? You look pretty weak to be a taijutsu user. What's your rank? Are you a jonin?"
"Woah, wait with all the questions," you say with a laugh, "take it easy Naruto. Besides, it's not nice to call people weak. But you're right, I'm not much of a hand to hand fighter, although I'm working on that. I plan on training a lot. Do you train?"
His mood saddens once more.
"Yeah, I guess I do," he answers, "but I really suck. I can't do anything. I'm just waiting to start the academy, but that's a long time from now for someone like me. I have no talent..."
Hmmm, maybe if you could train him, you could get him to join the Academy. Sasuke immediately comes to mind. They're both around the same age, and Sasuke is always training. Maybe he could transfer some of his drive over to Naruto? You remember Itachi mentioning that Sasuke was surprising strong and that he would enjoy bringing Sasuke along on his missions so he could keep a closer eye on his little brother. It's a pretty good idea, we can keep everything in the family that way. If poor Naruto is left alone to wallow in sadness, who knows what will happen to him. Maybe fate did inform you of Naruto for this very purpose. It's an interesting thought at least. And with Madara being your enemy, it wouldn't be a bad idea to keep the 9 tailed jinchuriki close.
"Hey Naruto," you say, "I was thinking..." --------------------- A: I got to go see my friends, you want to come with me? B: I was thinking maybe I could train you, but it'd have to be a secret because you're too young, and I'm not really a teacher C: I forgot about something I had to do. I want to speak with you later though alright? D: I forgot there was something I had to do. See you around
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:02:11 GMT
"Hey, Naruto, I was thinking," you say as you pat him on the shoulder, "why don't you come along and meet my friends? There's a boy who should be about your age. His name's Sasuke. I could invite you to the BBQ restaurant if you wanted. That's where I'm meeting my friends. Would you be interested?"
Naruto looks at you in complete disbelief. He turns to see all the shocked faces and expressions of disgust. You notice them too yet you smile.
"Listen to me," you say as you grab his head and make him look at you, "they're idiots alright? People that can't treat anyone with respect and dignity, they're all just sad, pathetic, idiots. Whenever you think about how a person SHOULD behave, I want you to think about Sarutobi-sensei. That's a real role model of what everyone should be like. But the world's not like that little guy".
"It's not that," he says softly diverting attention away from your face. "You don't call me Naruto-kun. No one except Sarutobi-sama calls me by Naruto. Everyone else would rather... get far away from me I guess. I'm just still shocked you'd sit next to me. And use my name..."
"Why?" you ask in a little bit of outrage over the way the villagers are treating this innocent boy. "Why should you be shocked or surprised that you're getting the dignity every human should get? Listen here Naruto, you're just as important as anyone else in this village. If they don't recognize that, then maybe they aren't worth your attention or concern. Understand?"
He nods his head, a small sign of his mood improving.
"There are people out there that are never going to be happy, so they struggle to make others as unhappy as they feel inside," you say with a smile, "but, if you REALLY want to win. You just smile bigger each day. And every day that passes, you get a little happier, because you're beating these guys. You get me?"
He nods rapidly.
"So, how about it, you coming?" you ask as you stand up and extend your hand.
"It's not ramen!" Naruto asserts as he grabs your hand, "but it'll have to do!"
He smiles and laughs, he's got a really goofy laugh.
You two make your way to the BBQ restaurant and meet up with your friends. All the way, Naruto was asking you all sorts of questions about being a ninja and about what kind of things you can do. You told him that someone hit you really hard in the head a while back, and you don't remember a lot. Kind of true you suppose.
"You're late bro," Itachi says as he walks up to you with Kakashi waving at you behind him. "Randel's inside, he said he was starving. I don't know if you noticed, but when he says he's starving, it usually gets expensive".
You laugh and crack your neck. Naruto keeps exchanging his attention as you two converse.
"This is Uzumaki Naruto," you say as you push the little guy forward, "Naruto, this is my younger brother, Uchiha Itachi. He's the most powerful shinobi I know, and he's only a little older than you. Pretty amazing right?"
Naruto balls his fist up in excitement and starts hopping up and down.
"Oh man!" he excites, "how did you get to be so strong? Did you work your butt off in training?! What jutsu can you do? I bet you can do a ton!"
Itachi looks at him, and then you. He smiles shortly and introduces himself. He then introduces Sasuke to Naruto. He then leaves Sasuke and Naruto under the supervision of Randel.
"You know," Itachi begins as he begins walking back from the BBQ place, "he reminds me of you in a way. His innocence I mean".
"Innocence?" you smirk, "I wouldn't exactly say I'm innocent".
"Naive is more like it," Itachi replies with a bit of irritation in his voice.
Kakashi jumps into the middle of you two.
"Now Itachi, remember, we spoke about this," Kakashi says almost like a warning, "you said you wouldn't lose your cool".
"I remember, and I'm not losing my cool," Itachi corrects, "I just want 21 to know something. Stop protecting him all the time Kakashi".
"Keep it brief," Kakashi shakes his head.
"21, you might have been saved during our last mission, but you were reckless and defiant," Itachi points out, "you might have been the team strategist, but I was the team leader. And by sacrificing yourself, you disobeyed a directive that I placed. You know how important you are to the Leaf".
"Hey, chill out little bro," you say dismissively, "it's not that big of a deal. I did what I had to do, and that's all. I couldn't risk Danzo hurting you guys, and I was the most expendable".
"I am tired of hearing this type of talk 21," Itachi replies, "what do you think any of us would do if we lost you huh? What about Sasuke? How do you think he would handle it? You're a part of this team".
"Hey listen," you interrupt, you're getting a bit angry now. "I did what I had to do because this team means everything to me. And I'm not losing you all. We're a family. And as far as I'M concerned Itachi, you guys are the ONLY family I have".
Itachi sucks his teeth and looks to the side.
"Just because I have a mother and a father, doesn't mean that I'm more important than you," Itachi says seriously, "let's not let ANY of us fall in battle alright? Let's all live to have grandkids and have them hang out and play together too".
Kakashi lowers his head in mourning.
"That's a great thought little brother, but now who is being naive?" you ask. A small taste of loneliness is tainting your voice. "In this ninja world of ours, where battle is something that occurs dozens of times a day. How are we going to count on not losing anyone?"
"That's simple," Kakashi says while maintaining his head down, "we just have to train and keep training. I've been thinking about this a lot actually. Last mission was way too close, and if we're going to keep going at it like this, with bigger and bigger targets, we need to make our team stronger".
Itachi and you both look at Kakashi in confusion.
"Huh?" you ask.
"In my generation of shinobi, there's only one other person that really stands out in my mind," Kakashi explains, "I'm the ninjutsu expert, so I can work on our team's ninjutsu, Itachi is the genjutsu expert, he can help all of us with genjutsu. But what about taijutsu? Of course, Itachi and I are very adequate at it, I'd say we're pretty damn good, almost second to none. But who can improve our taijutsu so that we don't lack in anything? This guy I'm thinking about can. He's a pain in the ass, a real workaholic, trains more hours than there are in the day, and a real loud mouth. But... the guy is really good, and I think we should bring him aboard. I know he'll go for it, and I know he'll train with us, because frankly, I think that's his hobby".
"Something to consider," Itachi says, "but can he be trusted?"
"That's a great point Itachi," you say, "I actually have a lot to talk with you guys about..."
You explain everything in great detail to them about what you learned from Danzo and Sarutobi-sensei. For the most part, they were expressionless. But when the subject of Naruto came up, there was some discussion. Itachi had no idea who Naruto was, while Kakashi did.
"Can we trust this kid to not monster out on us?" Itachi said.
"He's as much of a monster as I am," you reply, "he was forced as a little kid to house this demon inside of him. It's not his fault, he was just born, just like me. Besides, I think it would be good for Sasuke to have a kid his own age to train with. You yourself said you wanted to help Sasuke get stronger right? Well, how should we go about that? Should we throw Randel at him? Or maybe he should taste Kakashi's raikiri? It's just practical, not to mention yeah, this is kind of close to home. I identify with the kid's situation".
Kakashi nods. "I think we should bring him on. If Madara wants him, he'll have to get through us, and while he might be able to, it'll make it even harder on him".
Itachi also nods. "I think we should as well and I do think the idea makes sense. It's just my father, I don't know how he will react to it".
"Well, did you suggest to Fugaku about him handing over the torch to you?" you ask.
"Yeah, and he agrees," Itachi says, "I told him about us capturing Danzo. He was thrilled... But that brings me to our next problem. My father will hand over the soke position to me, but he wants you to make sure that Danzo gets handed over to the Uchiha for sentencing".
"Woah," you reply, "that's a little crazy there. Danzo is a fountain of knowledge, we could need his information later. Let him rot in jail I say".
"My father said that anything other than that would probably mean the village is covering up his actions," Itachi replies, "he said he doesn't think Danzo will be found guilty anyway. And if he's held in jail for the rest of his life, he'll probably break out. He even went as far as to say that if Danzo doesn't get a public hanging that it means the Leaf probably released him in secret".
You contemplate this situation for a moment.
"I'll see what I do about that, for now let's just eat, I'm starving," you answer.
"What about my guy?" Kakashi asks.
"Great, just another concern..." you answer, "going to have to think about that too".
You all eat a great meal together and enjoy each other's company. Even after eating you just stayed at the table talking and laughing. Telling stories and jokes. Sasuke and Naruto really got along well, they were both just really friendly kids, hard to imagine they could grow up to take a life one day. You all stayed there so long that it eventually came time for dinner, and you decided to stay there for dinner too. After dinner, you decided to cut the chit chat and have a repeat of earlier. You said your farewells and made it to your quarters.
"Now what to do..." you say to yourself
Author's Note
I screwed up, and I forgot to add that Itachi and 21 spoke about Fugaku knowing about Itachi's MS, and Itachi had already decided on not telling anyone about it. That's going to be a secret everyone shares, with the exclusion of Naruto and Sasuke, they don't know about it at all.
-------------------------- Answers these questions:
Kakashi wants to bring another guy to help you all in taijutsu. He did mention that he would vouch for him and that he could never see him betraying the Leaf. Do you let him in?
What about Naruto and Sasuke? They are both anxious to get stronger and become great ninja. Do you want to leave them be for now? Or do you want to take them to your private training grounds in the Land of Rivers?
What about Danzo? Now, Fugaku wants him either executed in public or handed over to the Uchiha. You consider that you "could" hand over Danzo to "the victims of the crimes he committed" and that it would be clean and legal. But would it be right?
With everything in your group getting bigger and bigger, what are you going to do to wrap up this Danzo situation? Will you proceed with the trial, despite Fugaku's request? It's not exactly legal or ethical to have a sentencing set before the criminal is even found guilty. Or perhaps you want to speak with the Hokage about it? Or do you want to go to trial and push for the death penalty yourself? It's something you could do, but how would it look?
Next morning you wake up with a bit of a light head. You over-thought yourself to death last night. It seemed like at every impasse, you would use your resourcefulness to come up with a solution. Then, you followed that solution to its logical conclusion. And then that too, prove a terrible idea. Yours thoughts kept spawning over, and before you knew it, it was one giant circle. If I let Danzo go to the Uchiha, that solves the civil situation going on. But if I do that, I break the laws that have been in place. That will make Danzo the exception to the rule, and might even let other prisoners that are currently locked up go free when the villagers notice the unfair treatment.
It seems as if you can't make everyone happy. You'll have to compromise on something. In trying to figure all this out, you realized two things. This made you feel better in the face of your previous uncertainty.
The first, Kakashi's judgment is not to be questioned. Without hesitation you choose to bring aboard this mystery man, whoever he may be.
The second, well, was a bit harder to come at. But after weighing the pros and cons of each outcome, you decided to bring Sasuke and Naruto along for training. It'd be a great bonding experience and would benefit everyone involved. The only concern you had was for Fugaku and his old regime. But, then again, they apparently are feeling such bloodlust that they only care about having Danzo's head on a platter.
And that brings you to your current situation. What in the hell do you do with that old bastard? Damn... You think yourself in circles yet again. You decide to speak with Sarutobi-sensei on the matter and walk to his room. It's early and the door to his bedchambers are open. You knock on the door anyway.
"Please come in 21," he urges.
"Sensei, I have a bit of a problem," you confess. "I was hoping to hear your thoughts on the matter".
"Oh?" he says as he turns to you. "I had a tough time sleeping yesterday. I was hoping to have breakfast. Can this be discussed over breakfast?"
"No sensei, it can't," you reply reluctantly.
Sarutobi-sensei frowns and sits on his bed.
"Well then, let's talk. I'm anxious to hear what has you so concerned my child," he motions you to sit on the bed next to him.
You sit down and exhale.
"We've got a problem," you admit, "and I really don't know what to do about it. I was hoping you could help me along my way, like you usually do".
"21, don't you think I've guided you enough?" he answers. "You are growing into a fine man, why must your hand be held? I have trusted you with the Leaf's entire future. Which, by the way, I'd like to thank you for speaking with Naruto. He's a good child, and you're a good person for doing what you did".
"About that sir," you insist, "I've decided to take him with me. Sasuke and Naruto. I will take them when we go train. If Madara comes"-
Sarutobi raises his hand and shushes you.
"21, I have never called your wisdom into question," he says almost looking hurt. "Please, do not insult me with a reasoning behind it. I do not need an excuse, or to be convinced to trust your resolve. Besides, I think it's an excellent idea. All of you can learn much from one another".
Damn... Now you feel pretty bad about coming to him about this. He holds you in such esteem it seems as if talking to him about this kind of puts that faith in doubt.
"It's Uchiha Fugaku," you let the words escape from your mouth. You didn't want to, but you blurted it out nonetheless.
He looks at you and urges you to continue.
"He gave Itachi the position of soke, but he demands that Danzo be handed over to the Uchiha. He says he doesn't trust our government with such a high ranking politician. He wants either a guarantee of a death sentence and of course conviction, or that we just hand Danzo over right now".
Sarutobi takes off his hat and places it down on the bed.
"And what are you going to do?" he asks patiently.
"Well, I don't know," you confess, "my mind tells me to just do it. It's most practical and eliminates the threat that Danzo poses. But I also know he could be a wealth of knowledge in the days to come... the problem is of course, I also think he'll escape in the future however if we just jail him for the rest of his days. He has too many followers and friends outside of Konoha".
"That would make you wonder, wouldn't it 21?"
"Wonder what sir?"
"Is justice real?" Sarutobi poses.
You reflect on that. It's simple, yet powerful. You look at Sarutobi-sensei with confusion. He notices it and smiles.
"You know what my favorite thing is?" he asks you. You shake your head. "My favorite thing, in the whole world, is to read stories to the children at the playground. I could do that forever. I've been tortured, and even brought near death many times. I've lost loved ones... I've sent men and women to their deaths, all with a heavy heart. But if you were to take away my ability to read to the children... well, that would destroy me. It would affect me at the very level of my soul".
You contemplate on his parallel.
"For you see, what is bitter to one man, may be sweet to another," he continues. "Such is fairness. Such is even good and evil. Remember when you said Danzo believed himself righteous even now? Do you think his death and conviction will make him guilty? Not to Danzo. You could slay him ten times, and he will still look the Reaper in the eye and proclaim his innocence. So when you say to me, 'should I let Danzo go with the Uchiha?' all I can say to you 21 is. 'Look inside yourself'.
"Hmmm.. my heart tells me it's wrong," you answer, "but my mind tells me it's right. But if I make such a decision, I am no better than Danzo".
"Let's not exaggerate 21," he interrupts, "on any scale, you are a much better man than Danzo. You spoke about means justifying the ends. You said that Danzo didn't care as long as the ends justified the means. What are the means in this scenario? A corrupt politician turned mass murderer and sadist? I don't particularly worry about Danzo, even though we were great friends once. I worry about the people and the fairness we hold. It's important not to have a double standard, whether it be negatively or positively. But, as with everything, there are exceptions. It might very well be that Danzo IS the exception. However, the benefit of growing old is that you can depend on the young to handle things".
Sarutobi turns and grabs his hat off the bed and puts it on. He stands up and pats you on the knee.
"With that being said, I'm going to get breakfast. Stay safe 21".
Well... that's just great... What now? --------------------- A: Proceed with the trial, fairly B: Give Danzo to the Uchiha C: Try to negotiate with Fugaku D: Proceed with the trial without breaking any rules, but imply heavily that you wish for a death penalty E: Stack the deck against Danzo in his trial and ensure the death penalty through less than noble means
Your talk with Sarutobi-sensei leaves you a bit... dumbfounded. Yeah, you talked it out. But in the end, you found yourself right back at the point you started. You appreciated the faith the Third gave you, but as usual, his faith has driven you to a state of questioning everything. Fugaku wants a guarantee, that's something you can't give him. And you can't give him Danzo either, that's not the way you are.
So it's come to this then. You're going to be a prosecutor. You really didn't think it would come to this. But then again, you do have the aptitude for it. So you venture back to your quarters. You pull out a stack of paper, Danzo's file which includes his history and complete psychological evaluation (conducted by two different doctor's, nice). Actually, wait a second. There was a third doctor, his file was purged and the guy went missing. What?!
There is absolutely no record of the doctor at all. You wouldn't have even noticed it had you not gotten your finger stuck in between the contents of the folder. It seems that two sheets of paper will almost perfectly glued together. When you tore them apart, you see the heading. It gives Danzo's full name and station and other dull common information. It says "Psychological Evaluation and Opinion" on the top line. On the second line it says By:
But... that's it. There's literally nothing else on the page. You look at it, and find nothing on it. No eraser marks, no paint over it, nothing to suggest falsification. But... there is your gut. The problem is, the court won't believe your gut.
You put that aside as nonsense. You could bring it to the trial if you wanted, but it's all circumstantial and will most likely hurt your case by making it seem as if you are out to get Danzo. But that doesn't mean you can't use this knowledge to your benefit. A doctor found something out about Danzo and then wrote a report that Danzo didn't like. Is Danzo certifiable? Maybe you could make him lose it in court. It's a thought, but a risky thought because then he might spill the beans on important matters that shouldn't be discussed, such as Madara.
Crap. It's just never easy.
Back to your paper. What notes and points do you want to make for your big trial that is scheduled to go on ASAP? ---------- Free Will
You've compiled your case and spoke to the witnesses. You're ready.
The people rush in as soon as the doors are open. Danzo had been wheeled into the room earlier. He's bound and gagged. He has not stopped giving you the evil eye.
So many people come to the trial, that the courthouse itself isn't large enough. Sarutobi-sensei, who was scheduled to act as judge had to recuse himself to avoid unnecessary rumors. It's for the best you think, you need to win this fairly and soundly. Instead, presiding over the courtroom will instead be Nara Shikaku, a very well respected jonin, widely regarded as brilliant, if not a bit lazy.
Shikaku, recognizing that there wouldn't be enough room ordered everyone outside the courthouse. A large tent was set up quickly to cover the judge, yourself, along with Kakashi who is acting as co-counselor, Danzo, and of course the jury. It seems as if almost the entire village is there. Even some children are seen. This won't make you particularly popular, but it needs to be done.
"Ladies and gentlemen of the jury, Honorable Judge Nara, and what seems to be the entirety of the Leaf; I am saddened by the fact that you have to be here today," you start your opening statement, "But I am also happy that I live in a village that cares enough about it's state that we have such a showing. In my most humble opinion, this trial is something that should stand as a landmark in every country. Danzo, a most respected elder of our village and trustee of the jonin council is being charged with the most grievous of crimes. He is being charged with mass murder, conspiracy, conspiracy in the second degree, conspiracy to treason, high treason, kidnapping, extortion, blackmailing, treason, corruption of a public official, and do I REALLY need to go further? This man sitting before you here, is bound and gagged, not because of anything OTHER than the fact that he is SUCH a dangerous man, that we might all suffer. During my case, I hope to prove this to you all, beyond ANY shadow of doubt, that this man is solely responsible for the kidnapping and murder of dozens of Konoha citizens, not to mention of course, citizens from other lands as well. This man has diverted public funds to stage his sinister stage. I will show you photos that will leave your mind reeling. In light of this fact, parents, I do not think that this is a place for small children to be".
You take a sip of water and clear your throat. No one is moving anywhere. Apparently the parents don't care about traumatizing their kids. Whatever.
"I have some key people that will talk to you about the deprave acts of evil this man has committed upon them and in their presence. May this criminal serve as an example that no one, no matter how powerful or respected they are, can just go destroying lives as he pleases. In this case, I am demanding the death penalty. This man, because of his connections, and the high risk of flight he possesses, should never be allowed to breathe our air, taste of our food, and drink our water ever again. I will prove that your hard earned tax dollars should not be wasted on his continued well-being, especially after I show you some of these things".
You sit down and look at Kakashi. He nods quietly towards you.
Sarutobi-sensei heads over to Danzo and whispers something in his ear and then removes the gag from his mouth.
Danzo stretches his neck and then begins his rebuttal.
"This young man would have you believing in his poison," Danzo argues. "But the real truth is, I have been and always will be a patriot to our village. In my quest for innocence, I will prove to you, that this young man is nothing but a pawn to the Uchiha, and that I am merely a victim of the Uchiha's plot to cover up THEIR misdeeds. Look at how they bind and gag me. Does this seem like a fair trial to ANYONE? Has anyone ever had this done to them before? Of course not! But then again, no one has ever been railroaded as I have been!"
Danzo is apparently done. The murmurs coming from the crowd of so many is actually a loud roar. Judge Nara bats his gavel.
"That's enough!" he shouts demanding peace.
"It's a loud harder to prove a man guilty than to plant a little doubt in the minds of people," Kakashi says as he leans in to your ear. "If these people have any idea of reluctance, he might go free".
**** --------------- A: Call a witness B: Present evidence
You stand up and exhale.
"It's interesting that he implies that this is some sort of frame job brought on the by the Uchiha," you state as you stand up. "The very first piece of evidence, and perhaps the most condemning, is Danzo himself. Has anyone ever wondered why he covers up his eye and his arm? I never really did, it's a common thing for a shinobi to have wounds. But the reason Danzo covered up his features was because he had surgical enhancements done. Surgical enhancements that are not only a form of forbidden jutsu! But also, a direct result from his victimization of the Uchiha and this very village! My first piece of evidence, I present to you, Danzo's arm, filled with the eyes of the Uchiha, the Sharingan!".
You motion towards the court proctors and they remove the sleeve on Danzo's arm. The entire courtroom erupts in an uproar the likes of which you never imagined. The Uchiha are now in a state of total recklessness. Shikaku bangs the gavel to regain control. Danzo remains silent.
"Danzo in an interview with me, stated that he did this for the Leaf itself. That there were things that needed to be done for the sake of everyone, but couldn't be done in the public eye. Things that were too depraved, but Danzo considered these things to be a necessary evil. By the count of all the stolen sharingan eyes, that's at least 5 dead".
Shikaku watches closely before asking.
"Danzo, do you have anything to say against this evidence being admitted against you?" Judge Shikaku asks.
"No, I do not," Danzo says, "even though this is clearly a rigged courtroom! How could I do this to myself!?"
Shikaku pounds his gavel once more.
"Once again, I hear excuses from Danzo," you state, "are you saying that you had these Sharingan placed in your arm against your will?".
"Counselor," Shikaku says interrupting, "now is not the moment to speak to him. If you'd like to bring him as a witness you can, but he has the right to refuse the stand".
"I'm sorry your honor," you respond, "in the case that there is any sort of misconception, let me clarify. Danzo has literally been in custody for less than 2 days. In those two days, he has spoken with myself, the interrogation staff, and the Lord Hokage as well. There is no way that these Sharingan were placed in his arm after his imprisonment. He did this before we captured him, and I can prove that later on with witnesses from the Interrogation Corps and one of the poor victims of this madman's experimentation".
You sit down next to Kakashi again.
"How'd I do?" you ask him.
"Pretty hard to argue with that," he states, "but for right now, you might get away with a lighter sentence. All you've proven is that he has personal effects of people who are probably dead, and is practicing forbidden jutsu. That's not enough for a death penalty".
"I need that death penalty now, after this, the Uchiha might riot right here if he doesn't get stringed up".
Hmmm... What next? ------------------------- A: Testimonies from witnesses B: More evidence
You call to the stand the medical-nin that was on scene and helped Kakashi and Danzo out of the water. He's very nervous to be on the stand because of Danzo's power and influence. He's visibly shaken, you decide to take a risk.
"Thank you so much for your courage, it is very moving to see someone put themselves on the line for truth and justice," you start, "however, you seem a little nervous. May I ask why?"
The medic has gone into a state of near panic.
"I want to sa- say my story- but Danzo is a very powerful man. It's best not to make an enemy out of him. I've seen what he does to his enemies".
The people begin their murmuring again. You allow the crowd to stop after they've had their own fill. No need to cut short your momentum.
"When did you see these things that he does to his enemies?" you ask.
"I was on duty about two days ago, and we got a call that there was a small explosion by the Uchiha Lake," he answers, "there was a lot of chatter and not a lot of it made sense. We arrived on scene and we saw Kakashi and Danzo coming out of the lake. Kakashi had dragged Danzo out of the lake and onto the shore. Danzo was unconscious".
"Two days ago you say?"
The medic nods his head.
"Did you examine Danzo on scene for injuries?"
He nods his head again.
"Did you notice anything strange or different about Danzo's body?"
"He had an arm that had several eyes installed in it," he said, "we were told to wrap it up immediately as Kakashi suspected it was a weapon. I wrapped it up myself after making sure that Danzo would make it".
You walk away from the stand and look at Danzo before starting your dissertation. You make it seem as if you're talking to Danzo.
"So what you're saying doctor," you continue, "is that Danzo had an arm that had eyes implanted in it two nights ago?"
"Yes, that is what I'm saying".
"So then the implication that this is a recently performed surgical procedure could not possibly be. Could you please see Danzo's arm and tell me whether or not that is the same arm you recognized two nights ago?"
The court proctors help the medic remove the bindings and he analyzes the arm.
"That's the same arm," he says confidently, "and with my medical expertise I can state that this is not anything recent. There aren't any stitches or even bruising. These wounds have had quite a while to heal".
"Interesting," you say whimsically, "Danzo might say however, that it was dark that night and that you couldn't possibly have seen the arm well. Is there anything you can say to that in response?"
The medic looks confused.
"Of course, I took him to the hospital myself along with my partner," he replies, "Lord Danzo was then examined once again at the hospital before he went with the interrogation corps".
The courtroom roars ferociously. The judge tries to get his courtroom back under control, but it's really looking impossible.
"So this ARM! This forbidden jutsu that benefits from the eyesight of others, was something that has been there for a while? Then Danzo has hid this arm for what purpose? Why wouldn't Danzo have reported that someone had held him against his will, and then performed this horrendous experiment on him? Ladies and gentlemen, the answer is easy. DANZO DID THIS TO HIMSELF! THERE WAS NO REASON TO COMPLAIN! He HAD to keep his secret safe because of the other horrendous acts he was doing! Including the continuous kidnappings and murders!"
You sit down in victory. Kakashi looks at you, but it's not what you expected. You expected joy, but instead he casts serious doubt.
"21..." Kakashi begins with a whisper, "listen, if we don't calm these people down, we're going to have a full scale riot. The evidence is getting pretty condemning, and Danzo is probably going to be found guilty no matter what. But that's not the problem, the problem is the sentencing and the people here. We can't continue a trial with these constant outbursts, but we can't exactly tell them to go away. And we do need to keep presenting our case the way it's been going if we want the death penalty".
"So, what you're telling me, is that no matter what, we're pretty much screwed?" you answer back.
Kakashi nods. "I'm saying that we have to tread carefully about this".
"I want to speak to Judge Shikaku about this," you answer.
"That's an idea, get the Third to join you in your sidebar," Kakashi suggests.
You motion towards Sarutobi-sensei and fill him in. He confesses that he shares your fears. ------------------- What do you want to say to Judge Shikaku in your sidebar? Sarutobi is present with you
In Sarutobi's presence, you discuss all your issues about the case with Judge Shikaku. You delineate all your points and what evidence and witnesses you were going to bring up.
Sarutobi brings forth the jury foreman, something extremely irregular. Sarutobi speaks with him in reference to whether or not the jury is leaning towards anything right now. The foreman explains that it's pretty clear to him Danzo's guilty and he thinks that the rest of the jury seems to be of the same opinion.
This is not just unethical this is REALLY illegal. You knew that the court trial would just be a formality, but this is pretty ridiculous. Sarutobi motions to you and you walk towards him.
"21, I think you know me better than this. I would never put a rush to justice nor would I break any laws. But this... this has turned into a circus," Sarutobi states, "not to mention. Well, you need to find some way to speak with Itachi. He has certain news for you".
Crap. You excuse yourself from the Judge's presence. Shikaku has now started speaking with Sarutobi-sensei and the jury foreman. Danzo seems indifferent to all of this, although the entire village is in a commotion now. You wonder if perhaps giving Danzo to Fugaku directly might have been the logical choice. Well, sometimes it's more important to stay true to oneself than to do what's easier and best. After all, being true to yourself IS what's best.
You push your way towards the crowd and feel someone grab your wrist. You turn and see it's Itachi.
"So, the Lord Hokage passed on my message?" he asks.
You shake your head.
"No, he just told me to speak to you," you answer, bewildered by the sheer insanity of thousands of people arguing.
"Listen, this is going really badly," Itachi answers, "my father got a tip that Danzo was being broken out of here. On that tip, he had several people hired to kill Danzo should that happen. Somehow, the word got out of my father's orders, and I think we stand the risk of someone trying to take a shot at Danzo and blame our clan for the hit. You need to either postpone this trial for a further date or end it now".
"I can't guarantee a death sentence if I ask for sentencing, besides, Danzo hasn't even offered a rebuttal," you answer.
"Well, maybe a recess then 21," he suggests.
"No, that's not exactly easier either," you answer, "what if that is all a ploy to get Danzo moved out of here? If he gets assassinated, we're stuck. Besides even if I suggest a recess, that might cause a riot. There are victims amongst the crowd, they demand justice. I don't think a recess will solve anything. And... asking people to leave, well, it's crossed my mind. But that could spark the riot too".
"Well, what the hell are you going to do?" Itachi asks desperately as he gets bumped by a villager who got pushed. Itachi pushes the villager back. "This is going to turn into one big fight soon".
Did Danzo count on this? That sly old bastard counted on this, that's why he's so calm. An ugly secret has been uncovered and the people weren't ready for it. ----------------------- Clutch Moment A: Speak to Danzo and tell him about the situation. See what he says B: Go back to the Judge and explain the assassination risk. Ask for a recess C: Same as B, but instead ask that Danzo be sentenced D: Continue the trial as scheduled and hope that they quiet down. It'd take a miracle.
It is complete pandemonium here. You look around to see the villagers almost at a point of near riot. That ass Danzo must be behind this, to what extremes will he go to? Wait a minute... His psych profile... You run towards him and look him dead in the eyes.
"Did you orchestrate this?" you ask. "And please, let's skip our usual little mind games with one another. They're fun, but right now, I'm trying to stop the death of thousands of Konoha citizens".
Danzo smiles at you and sits back relaxed in his chair.
"I sparked a fire under your ass did I boy?" he replies, "So what? You have me figured out, bravo. Right and wrong can get very iffy can't they? Look at this anarchy. As far as the law goes, yes, I should be hanged. But they don't want law, they want something clean. They want something pure and perfect. That doesn't EXIST boy. Do you say why you need people like me? You need them to clean your messes when your beautiful image of the world comes crashing down around you".
You lean on the table in front of you both. You really hate this guy. You try to not have such strong feelings about anyone, and to be fair. But as much as you hate to admit it, you HATE this guy. Especially since in this chaos, he's right... The world isn't fair. The world isn't all black and white. There are shades of gray... But that won't stop you from trying to always do the right thing. He might have been right about this instance, perhaps it would have been wiser to given him to the Uchiha and keep this secret. You reflect back on Sarutobi's words whilst he looked out the window. You have so much to learn.
"I know about Tobirama," you say quietly, "But you can sacrifice yourself this time. You'll be a hero to the Leaf. You can save us from this insanity. If you allow this to continue, all the work of your ancestors and teachers will have been in vain. The Uchiha you hate so much will take over the village. They will justify their conquest because the Leaf refused to hand down judgment on you. And then Madara will come and destroy them. And we'll all not even be a memory, because no one will care to remember us. Is that what you want Danzo of the Leaf? For your name to fade away? Do you want to die knowing your life meant nothing? That you helped your greatest enemies strip you of your greatest love? Look me in the eye and tell me that's what you want".
He raises his head and looks to you with a stern expression.
"You taught me something Danzo," you admit, "and I want you to know something. I'm not a liar, nor do I ever hope to become one. So believe me when I say this. I really disagreed with everything about you. I didn't think much about you as a person, and I really hated your methods. But you were right about something. Things aren't always black or white. There's a gray there. And I'm asking you to do something for me. Even though you hate me, and you disagree with my methods, I want you to admit that there is SOME degree of reason to it. Help me stop this. They are ignoring everyone".
"You wish for me to confess my crimes? And die like a dog?" he asks you.
"You'll be a martyr for the Leaf," you correct. "You will save this village. Madara could very easily knock down our door tonight. Do you wish for us to still be recovering from the war that pits brother against brother? Is that what you want? Or do you wish to be a hero and rest with that fact?"
He sighs and bows his head.
"Very well," he says, "I am old and weary. I wanted to be Hokage... But it seems that I will have to settle for this. Even in my darkest hour, I still shall shelter the Leaf from damnation".
He nods towards his restraints. You look at Judge Shikaku and Sarutobi-sensei and assure them everything's fine. You release Danzo from his restraints and follow him as he makes his way to the center of the makeshift courtroom. He stands before the Judge's podium and the Third. After a few minutes, the roar dies down. The village is silent as Danzo raises his hands.
"I have lied to you all," Danzo admits, "I am guilty in every crime I have been accused of, except treason. I have NEVER acted against the Leaf. Everything I have done has been FOR the Leaf. One day, I know you all will know that. Our enemies are not playing with the same rules that we are. That's why I did what I did! Sarutobi wishes for you all to be lambs and allow yourselves to be slaughtered by the wolves at our door! I went about my mission the wrong way perhaps. I can not apologize to the ones I have hurt because I would do it again. I did it to PROTECT OUR VILLAGE! Remember me now, for when I die, you all shall carry my story. I only ever wanted to save you all".
Judge Shikaku bangs his gavel to interrupt Danzo. The trial proceeds to the sentencing, and Danzo is hung from the gallows until he was proclaimed dead. The man was deluded, but he was strong in his convictions. That day will forever be remembered in the history of the Leaf as the Day of Rude Awakening. For on that day, although sadness was overpowering, a patriot of the village had died. The Uchiha were satisfied and Fugaku was smiling during the entire process. Itachi even says that Fugaku refuses to acknowledge the holiday as the Day of Rude Awakening. Instead, he refers to it as the Day of Justice.
You can't help but think back on all the proceedings. The Third was right...
Is justice real?
Perhaps not. Not in a world that doesn't follow the rules... But you would set off to make it so. You spent a week reflecting on the events of the previous month. Although satisfied at the success of stopping the rebellion, something else was lost. A little bit of the Leaf died that day with Danzo. The Leaf had lost its innocence.
You made your way to Sarutobi-sensei that day after a day of reading and studying from your journal. Hopefully you could grow a little more in strength...
"Ah, my child," Sarutobi-sensei greets you, "you have a somber demeanor. You have learned a truth perhaps? Is ignorance bliss?"
"Maybe it is sensei," you answer, "maybe it is... But I will have my entire life left to figure out what is best for me and my friends"
He smiles warmly at you and pats you on the side of the arm.
"Indeed you will child, indeed you will," he assures, "but perhaps you wish to tell me of what you have planned next? We can't leave you to rest on your laurels! The mightiest sword will rust if not properly maintained! Have you thought about what you will do? Or how will you train?"
"Yeah, about that..." ---------------------------- END OF ARC 1 Is Justice Real?
Pick from these three lists:
In your week of studying from your old journal you have found several techniques that you could learn! Which one did you focus on? A: The scout bugs that blow up B: You found you had another chakra nature (which one was it?) C: You realized your golem style could be used to reanimate the dead. It's not quite moral or natural, and has a rather iffy chance of success at this current stage however. D: You worked on Mizuumi exclusively throughout this week. It's now much more powerful and looks like a human being, unless someone touches him. It's voice is normal now as well
You have maintained the essence and character of 21. You are a beacon of hope for those around you. The universe has chosen to reward your good karma with: 1) Master a jutsu (increase efficiency and effect, and lower cost) 2) Fame. Everyone knows who you are! They treat you with respect wherever you go, well unless you go into the bad part of town... 3) Upgrade Mizuumi to repair itself passively 4) The world itself wants you to continue your good work. It's almost as if it's speaking to you directly. ( I've been giving you guys a lot of hints. I wanted to get you guys through the first arc without incident. If you pick this, you'll continue to get subtle hints from me every now and again. If you don't, well, I will try to stop myself from giving hints)
Experience Reward- You guys have done so well that you deserve it S: Master a jutsu T: Gain 4 points for you to use in your stats X: Increase your regeneration to almost impossible levels Y: Gain 5 moves that your companions have with almost the same level of proficiency (Of course, they can always be worked on later to improve this) Z: Give Mizuumi a chakra pool of 100 and teach him how to cast the jutsu you know
"About my training," you answer, "actually sensei, I've done a lot of training myself over this past week. I've been through a lot of inflection. I have also thought a lot about what I want to do and who I want to become... Speaking with Danzo and just really, the whole experience has changed me. I realize that I'm just not ready for someone as ancient as Madara, it's sad that it took Danzo to show me that".
Sarutobi lets out a thoughtful hum.
"So, what are the fruits of your labors?" he asks.
"I developed this new technique, I am able to create small scouting insects out of objects," you explain with a contained excitement, "They can tell me what they see, I can even see through their eyes. It takes recon to a WHOLE new level. Also, they are able to explode. I devised this as a sort of, utility jutsu. It has a special function and can work for offense and defense. Their explosion isn't much more powerful than a regular paper bomb, but imagine ten paper bombs converging on one opponent!"
Sarutobi smiles as if he's impressed.
"Leave it to you to come up with a jutsu that can serve more than one role. I'm not surprised, your mind does work in incredible ways," Sarutobi compliments you.
"I also just feel this... oneness with the earth, the environment, it's strange," you reply, "my blood has somehow become more potent. And I got a paper cut the other day, and literally, as the paper was going through my finger, it was healing. So... I got a little curious. I cut my arm and started observing it.. I know it's morbid, but sensei... As soon as I slash my skin, it starts healing... I don't know what's going on with me. Even my chakra feels uplifted. I tested my blood out in the potion form, and I have to estimate that they are now at LEAST 300% more potent... The only test I haven't done is against poison and that's because obviously if I'm wrong, I'm dead. Oh and against decapitation or limb removal".
Sarutobi-sensei looks at you in a curious way.
"The way you go on about such things with such excitement are morbid indeed my son," Sarutobi-sensei points out, "Have you decided on what you're going to do? Are you going to go after Madara or Orochimaru? Or both perhaps? Or are you going to stay a while and train? Would you like to rest? I can also send you on some missions if you want to clear some cobwebs. I know the Danzo affair has rattled you.."
"Well, actually..." ---------------- A: I'll hunt Orochimaru B: I'm going after Madara C: I'm going to rest a while D: I want to stay and train E: Give me some missions! F: First Orochimaru, then Madara
"I'm going to stay and train," you inform Sarutobi-sensei.
You talk about your plans and then exchange farewells.
You meet up with your friends and explain the benefits of your most recent training. They're all pretty happy to hear about the benefits of your new abilities, but are worried about the changes your body is undergoing. You shrug it off and look at Kakashi.
"So, we meet your friend today right?" you ask eagerly.
"Yep, we all get to meet him, hehe," Kakashi chuckles nervously and closes his eye, "now remember. I warned you all that he was very eccentric and a bit of a loud mouth..."
"Alright... but he's loyal and trustworthy right? Besides, if he's a taijutsu expert, that's the only mastery we're really missing," you state while looking at Randel, Sasuke and Naruto. "Besides, every ninja can benefit from taijutsu because let's face it, if all else fails, you can at LEAST fall back on that. And the young guys here need an early start. Isn't that right little bro?"
Sasuke smiles and cheers. Naruto jumps and grabs ahold of Sasuke's shoulder. They start arguing over who is going to be the strongest.
It's pretty heartwarming.
"YES!!!!!!!!!!" You hear a loud voice come from somewhere that you can't quit pinpoint. "My EYES! They are witnessing the bond of friendship! It makes me wonder if everyone is this lucky! But then I realize that it can't be, and I am TRULY BLESSED!"
"What the fu-?" you say as you're cut off.
"Oh boy, here' we go," Kakashi says as he places his face in his palm and tries to hide from the group.
"DYNAMIIIIIIIIIC ENTRYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY!!!!!!"
A shinobi about Kakashi's age enters the scene with a flying side kick. It's flawless, his technique is extremely impressive. But... his haircut... jeez. He wears an all green outfit and has a shiny bowl cut haircut. He has... you can't believe this. He actually has TEARS in his eyes.
"You can't understand how HAPPY I am to be among your group of friends here! No it's a family really!" he says with a thumbs up! This guy is really pretty exciting. And extremely awkward and eccentric. Perfect for this motley crew you've gathered. "My name is Might Guy! But please, we're all a family now! Just call me Guy, the Leaf's Handsome BEAST!"
He does a crazy kata pose. Is this guy serious? Jeez...
"I heard we are going to train, train train, and this only makes me excited," Guy says. Funny how Kakashi kept saying there's this guy I know. Haha Kakashi, wordplay, very nice.
"Let us begin our training!," Guy suggests, "but let's make sure we train with the POWER OF YOUTH!!!!"
You look at Kakashi who hasn't raised his head. You feel a desperate need to lower your own. What should we train in? You feel that being the team's strategist, you should organize the training regime. Now, let's see... ------------------- Establish a training schedule. Who learns what, and for how long are you going to train for. Remember, you have everyone here, and everyone wants to learn and benefit from this exercise.
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:02:48 GMT
Wow, has it been a long time since you've seen the Leaf. Sarutobi-sensei has sent several letters letting you know everything is fine and to take your time with training, but it still feels good knowing that you are going home.
During this long year, you feel as if you've accomplished so much. Your lightning clone has even managed to figure out the way your blood heals and how it is affected by poison. As you had hypothesized, you are indeed immune to poison. However, your blood is constantly providing more and more antibodies and white blood cells to fight the poison. Neurotoxins, for example, provide a special concern. You realize that a neurotoxin of enough potency might actually affect you for some brief moment. Furthermore, your immunity, isn't so much an immunity to poison really. It's more of an aggressive resistance to the poison.
So what's the kicker? You can't really die from any poison you could come up with. Granted, the company you keep and you are not proficient in advanced poisons, so this concerns you because you know there are shinobi who specialize in poison. So, you can't die from poison but, and there's always a but when it comes to your life you feel, while your blood is fighting off the poison's effects, it can't heal you. Your clone was the first to notice this in an experiment that almost ended up making you have to resummon him. That could be a huge problem, you realized. Your healing can be somewhat compromised, and that's information you gleaned by not even using the high level poisons.
And your next target is most likely Orochimaru, who does have a fondness for toxins. Got to be extra careful you suppose.
L, as you've been calling your lightning clone, also worked on other aspects of your blood. Namely addiction. There's definitely a psychological addiction to your blood, but nothing physical can be found. You're concerned however, because after a year of taking your blood, you're worried the team might be way past the point of being able to cut lose. Thankfully there wasn't any withdrawal symptoms found, so you figure you could wean them off your blood a little at a time. Because of this, towards the end of the training, you had to cut down the blood you were giving your friends. They all understood it, but they all were visibly dragging. You suppose this was the psychological effect of not feeling as "wired" as before, it probably depressed them a bit.
L was also able to increase your proficiency with the Golem Style handseals. Luckily, he's actually given you almost a year's worth of practice. You feel you are now ready with the handseals and are proficient enough to cast Golem Style in battle. Additionally, you can't help but feel much more comfortable using Golem Style now, so that's great.
L also tried to teach Mizuumi how to create jutsu, but there just simply was no way to do it. He ended up having to work on his fighting form instead.
You maintained a strict rule that everyone was to spar at least once a month to make sure that the practicality of the training wasn't lose on just instruction. You even used Golem Style: Ninja Army once to see how far everyone has grown. For the kids, you managed to construct two Golems, using Golem Style: Golem Clone, and based them on the personality of Guy-sensei, so that the kids could spar and learn as much as they could.
As far as the training itself was concerned, well that's another matter altogether.
You had Guy work with Randel to see if he could learn to use a weapon. Guy thought long and hard about which weapon to pick for Randel, seeing as how Randel already had his Door Knocker gun. He figured the best weapon to compliment that long range weapon (even though Randel had been programmed to use it in close quarters for maximum damage and piercing potential) would be a melee weapon. With Randel's massive build and immense strength, he chose a kanabo. It was heavy and gigantic, yet looked like a baby's rattle in the hands of Randel. Randel at first looked at it oddly and didn't really understand why he needed a heavy stick to hit things, but he grew to enjoy it. He eventually gained mastery over it, even more so than Guy, just because of his monstrous strength and size. He affectionately refers to it now as the Door Smasher.
While Guy was teaching Randel about the kanabo, he was putting you through some intense strength and stamina exercises. Your strength actually was pretty easy to increase. Everytime a muscle ripped due to the strain of the reps, it would heal immediately. You actually feel really strong now. As far as stamina, you feel a bit more hardy, but nothing noteworthy.
Guy spent a lot of his time teaching actually. He seemed like a natural for it. He managed to teach you some very important taijutsu basics that you just lacked. And you found yourself often training next to Sasuke and Naruto. Thanks to the Sharingan, Sasuke was able to pick up on things really quickly. You and Naruto often looked at one another in a little bit of embarrassment, but everyone has their strong suits.
Speaking of Naruto and Sasuke. Those two have become pretty much inseparable. They spar everyday, and are constantly trying to one up themselves. Sasuke would watch Naruto train during his breaks, and Naruto would do the same for Sasuke.
They both watched you intently as you trained under Kakashi. Under his masterful teaching, you were able to learn two new elements, Earth Style, and Fire style. With the combined knowledge of Itachi and Kakashi, you were really able to get down some very impressive Fire jutsus. Your Earth style was above average, and you could always use a few more jutsu, but there just wasn't that much time.
Even Randel was able to benefit from your training with Kakashi. He managed to learn some basic, fundamental jutsu. He seemed pretty happy with himself.
Itachi trained everyone in genjutsu defense, and everyone greatly benefited from that, even Randel you think. With Itachi and Kakashi together, they were able to do some really impressive lessons. Kakashi even awoke his Mangekyo Sharingan, but asked you and Itachi to never speak of this to anyone. Apparently, the Uchiha got it all wrong. The Mangekyo doesn't awake because you killed your best friend or family member. It awoke because of a need for survival. The desperation to gain power to protect oneself, and be stronger than your opponents. That is why it awoke in Itachi that day, you conclude, because Itachi felt he couldn't protect you, he thought you were dying. Kakashi awoke his by his necessity to protect the Leaf.
This secret could never be revealed the three of you concluded. And Sasuke... well Sasuke wasn't ready to bear the weight of the Mangekyo just yet.
While you were training with Itachi, specifically trying to master your fire style alongside Sasuke, Kakashi worked with Naruto.
Kakashi taught Naruto several things. He taught him what he thought would be best for Naruto's superhuman chakra supply, Multi Shadow Clone jutsu. Within days, Naruto was able to make hundreds of clones. It was very, very impressive. But perhaps most impressive of all was that Kakashi taught Naruto how to train with those clones, and benefit from their experiences, as you did with L. As a result of this, Naruto started improving dramatically.
You took Kakashi aside at one point to speak about his progression. Kakashi informed you that Naruto's chakra nature was Wind, and that he was hoping to speak to the Third when you all returned to find someone to train Naruto in his chakra nature. He also made some odd remarks about not quite feeling "up to the task" of teaching Naruto everything. He mentioned a man. Jiraiya-sama, you think Kakashi said. Either way, Naruto had improved the most out of everyone.
It was a very fruitful year all in all. And you were proud to show everyone your flying machine jutsu. You made it look like a lion with wings. You thought it looked pretty majestic. Everyone got on top of your "Flying Lion" and made your way to the village... Your eyes longed to see home and show everyone your team's advancement.
As you make it to the Leaf, something cold shivers up your spine. The hairs on the back of your neck stand on end.
"Somethings wrong," Itachi says after activating his Sharingan, "I feel chakra coming from within the village. I see everyone, and they are all acting normal. But there's definitely something there".
"I sense it as well," Kakashi replies lifting up his headband and uncovering his eye. "It seems to be centered right under the Hokage mansion. Maybe we were gone for too long?"
You bite your lip in anxiety.
"Perhaps, but at least it doesn't seem like anything is destroyed or anyone's hurt," you examine, "can you tell what exactly is going on? Either of you two? I was planning on landing this thing in the middle of the village. You know, make a big deal? But that's out of the question now".
"Your spectacle will have to wait 21," Kakashi instructs, "put this thing down outside the village. Sasuke, Naruto, you two should stay away from the village, for now at least".
Naruto and Sasuke look at one another and nod their heads. They learned a while ago to shut up and listen to their elders without question, especially if Kakashi is the one giving the orders.
"Someone has to stay with them here," you reply, "And it can't just be Mizuumi".
"Mizuumi might be the best choice to go with us however," Itachi says, having not removed his sight from the village yet. "This could be anything. If it's a genjutsu, which it might be, he can't get genjutsued can he?"
Crap... This scenario has come up in your head before. You've always been of two opinions. Either he could be genjutsued via his telepathic link to you, and therefore, when he gets genjutsued, you fall under it as well. Or... genjutsu wouldn't affect Miz because he's just a construct. You probably should have tested this out. You're not really sure about what course of action to take now. ------------------------ Pick one OR more from EACH list Sasuke and Naruto are staying behind. Who is staying with them? 1) Kakashi 2) Itachi 3) Guy 4) Mizuumi 5) 21 6) Randel
Are you going to send Mizuumi into the village by himself? X: Yes Z: No
If the vote is No to the above, than what are you going to do? A: Stay and watch the village from the outskirts. Stake the area out and observe the behavior for some hours B: Go in and try to investigate the village C: Go to the nearest mail facility and send a messenger hawk to Sarutobi-sensei and wait for a response. Relax until you get the response.
If you're going into the village. Who are you bringing along? D: Mizuumi E: Guy F: Kakashi G: Itachi H: 21 I: Randel
"Alright, Guy, Kakashi, you two stay here with Naruto and Sasuke," you advise, "I think we can go into the village. The chakra could be anything. But just in case... there are some things I'd like to test out. Itachi, put Mizuumi into the most powerful genjutsu you can please. And if I fall under it for whatever reason, that's your cue to stop it".
Itachi nods and steps in front of Mizuumi. His eyes change into the Mangekyo and he looks at Mizuumi.
And that's the last thing you remember. You're immediately picked up by the leg and thrown into a world of black and crimson. The air blows with a heavy mist the color of wine. You notice yourself crucified upside down, and you can only see what you think is the form of Itachi. You're then immediately pulled out of it.
"You fell down immediately," Itachi reports as he turns off his Sharingan altogether. "I'd say that the ability to be able to see through the eyes of your constructs is quite the disadvantage against a genjutsu type opponent. I sensed inside your mind that you're even more vulnerable to genjutsu depending on how many golems you have out. I was even able to sense and command the Flying Lion".
Kakashi lowers his head and scratches his hair.
"That's pretty bad," Kakashi assesses, "but what's worse is that pretty much eliminates a lot of your arsenal 21. There are a lot of shinobi who can cast genjutsu. Even some genin can. That could be quite the weakness".
"Well yes, it can be," you answer sharply. Your mind is still reeling from Itachi's jutsu, it was... overwhelming. "But that's only if I let it be my weakness. I could always just shut off the connection I have to my golems... But then they would just be mindless and without control or any type of decision making skills. I could just deactivate my Shared Consciousness Jutsu with the rest of the golems, after I give them a basic command. But with Miz... well, he always has his consciousness connected to my own. I could sever that, but if the situation gets too complicated, he won't be able to react".
"Yeah, that's no good," Itachi answers, "I suppose you'd be able to at least put up a fight against a genjutsu type if it is just you bro. But if it's you and all your walking scrap heaps, it'll be really bad for you. I could probably control all of them against you. Which means..."
"Whoever did that, could essentially even use Ninja Army against us," you cut Itachi off.
"Possibly," Itachi suggests, "It's not a definite, and we can't try it out right now. But it's definitely something to save for later when we're in the clear. It's something we need to be ready for. I don't want us to ever have to fight your Ninja Army jutsu unless you're in full control".
"Well, what about the other techniques?" you ask as you change glances from Itachi to Kakashi and then back to Itachi. "Like my Green Animation justsu? Is that going to have the same shortcomings as my golems?"
"That's a bit different," Kakashi ponders, "but if it were me, I'd say most likely yes. It's going to have the same weaknesses as your golems. It is Golem Style after all".
"Yes and no really," Itachi proposes, "Kakashi is definitely right in the basis of his supposition. But it would really depend on how the genjutsu is cast. The Uchiha rely mostly on the Sharingan. You'd have to look into it to fall under it's effect. I have come up with other ways of casting my genjutsu. I think that there have to be other ways of casting genjutsu, such as by taste, or smell, hearing, or merely by having touched the same object. These are genjutsu types that I've been working on, and while they aren't up to my standards for me to use them in battle, I can promise you that it CAN be done".
"Hmmm," you think aloud, "and if what we have here is a genjutsu, we could be dealing with Madara. Which would make our problem here most likely a genjutsu".
"An Uchiha who is as old as he?" Kakashi replies, "most definitely I'd say".
"I don't know," Itachi admits, "I still have much to learn, but if it's a genjutsu, it's something completely out of my league. I don't sense anything from out here, and that's unusual".
Out of Itachi's league? Hmmm... How does something like this even exist? If something under the Hokage's mansion is casting out a genjutsu, how did they get it there in the first place? Or perhaps ROOT is back in business? Maybe you're just looking too much into it... --------------------- A: Go with the original plan. Leave Guy and Kakashi here with the kids.You stay and have Randel lead the way with Mizuumi and Itachi accompanying them. B: Complete change of plans, let's talk about this a bit more C: Tell Randel to turn his lantern on and bring the first villager he sees over here silently D: Disregard the entire thing, this is taking too long and maybe ROOT is back. Go in and assess the situation with everyone present. E: Stake out the village a little more and see if anything changes F: Send in L and see what he feels and if he get's genjutsued. You're not sure if you would be able to know, but it's worth a shot
You look at your options thoroughly. You don't know for sure if there is in fact a genjutsu at work here. All you know is that there is something under the Hokage's mansion. Your newly discovered weakness is definitely an inconvenience, but not something that can't be overcome with time and persistence.
But for right now...
"Hey Randel," you say with a wave of your hand. "Come over here a minute will you?"
Randel looks down and starts walking forward towards you. He's been silent this entire time. He lowers his gigantic frame and waits for your instructions.
"The lantern you use, it makes you immune to genjutsu?" you ask to reassure yourself of what you're planning.
He rises back to his normal stature and rubs his eye.
"Well almost completely sir," he answers honestly. "I've never been placed under one when it's on..."
"It could work," Itachi states, "at least we'd have an idea of what is going on. Randel could go in and search the place looking for clues?"
"Well, actually, I wanted to see how far this genjutsu reaches," you correct, "if it is a genjutsu that is. I want him to grab a villager on the outskirts of the village, first one he sees, and bring him back to us without raising a commotion".
"I have to say! This isn't what I was thinking we'd do!" Guy protests, "we have such fire in our souls! We could RESIST any genjutsu. And if there are people in danger, then we must, as Leaf shinobi do our part. We should use this opportunity for a DYNAMIC! ENTRY! Let's go! Forward with the POWER OF YOUUUUUUUUUTH!"
Kakashi looks at Guy and sighs. He grabs his shoulder and starts walking towards the Flying Lion. Thanks Kakashi, last thing we need is for Guy to fly off the handle.
"That was... odd," Itachi begins, "regardless, I think it could work 21. If it is a genjutsu of that scale, we can't be too careful".
You look back at Randel and nod your head. He understands.
Randel turns toward the village and activates his lantern. The eerie blue light dances around the horizon as Randel walks slowly towards the village. You never really noticed it before, but it really is a creepy sight to see such a giant of a man lumbering his way slowly towards you with a faint blue light just bouncing softly as he walks... The experimentation on Randel must have been... lengthy.
After a while Randel comes back, and he is holding a villager in his massive arms. He makes his way slowly, still lumbering towards you. You walk cautiously up to him and turn off his lantern. That thing kind of creeps you out. As you look at the villager, you notice the villager is completely conscious but not aware of what's going on.
"What happened here Randel?" you ask as you look up to meet his eyes.
"I told him he needed to come, he didn't argue, not much sir," Randel answers, "I told him I cou- could carry him. He jumped into my arms. He said he didn't want me to go through so much trouble".
You watch as Itachi helps the villager down to the ground. He has a blank expression on his face.
"Can you hear me?" Itachi asks the villager.
The villager smiles and nods. "Hi there Itachi, how's everything? We missed you here in the village you know. It's just not the same without the heroes of the village. We're all just happier than ever here in the old Leaf! And it's all thanks to you guys! Even that one there with the great hair cut!" He points his finger at Guy. Guy smiles and gives him a thumbs up. You witness Kakashi sigh in disillusion.
"Look... LOOK into my eyes," Itachi says as he activates his MS. The villager's gaze is calm and happy at first. Then after a few moments, sheer horror. He lets out a long, terrified shriek. You witness as Itachi has the villager locked with his gaze. Sweat pours down the young man's face as he exerts the will of his Sharingan on the villager. The villager passes out.
"He should be fine when he wakes up," Itachi reports, his eyes turning back to normal. "He was suffering under a genjutsu, a good one. My Giga Eye jutsu was the only thing that pulled him back. In his head, he's been living the same day over and over again. I think it was the day he fell under the genjutsu, but there's more to it than that... It seems as if he somehow broke out of it a couple times, just through sheer luck. He remembers a shinobi coming along and getting him out of it. But then he just fell right into it again... The thing below the mansion... It's the source most likely, and it's giving off a constant genjutsu".
"What could possibly power something like that?" you ask as you look at Kakashi.
"That's a good question," Kakashi says with a tone of doubt. "But the better question is, how do we stop it? By the looks of it, we could resist it, for a while. But we can't think we are going to go into the village, go underground, and disable this... 'device' without falling under the genjutsu. If it's true that it's always projecting the jutsu, we could resist it, but we'd have to keep resisting it. And the minute one of us falls to it, we'd have to leave our team member in the genjutsu. If we try to break them out of it, we'll fall into the genjutsu as well. As I've promised to never leave a team member behind, I'm not fond of this plan. You have any ideas 21?"
"Ideas huh?" you answer, "I just might..." ---------------------------- Clutch Moment Make your Fate
"Golem Style!: Green Animation!"
You hear the greenery tinge all around you with life. You feel warm and calm, as if nature itself was trying to make you feel at peace.
"The trees," you start to say, "they don't seem to be affected by this genjutsu, even though I feel their presence".
"Hmmm, I could see that making sense," Itachi stipulates, "a tree is a living organism, before your Golem Style ever did any type of interaction with it. I suppose your jutsu just allows you to speak their language and communicate with them".
"This is a relief, let me see if they can tell me what I need to know, I'm going to try to get as close as I can little bro," you advise. "But if you see me start to go under, you got to save my ass. If for whatever reason I can't get this to work, I'm going to try the Earth Eyes jutsu. Hopefully that works".
"I wouldn't suggest it," Kakashi remarks, "if what Itachi is saying is true, then we have all reason to think that Earth Eyes would get you trapped in the genjutsu. The earth itself isn't alive. If you make it alive or infuse your chakra into it for any reason, that might get you into this genjutsu".
"He's right," Itachi agrees firmly. He crosses his arm and looks over at Sasuke. "Besides, we can't stand out here all day. If we're going in, we need to go in. We can't use all our chakra casting jutsu to test out theories".
Kakashi nods. You know Itachi is right. Well, best to hope that Green Animation is enough then.
You use your jutsu to extend from tree to tree with your mind. You speak to them, they whisper back to you gently. They direct you to the center of the problem. Using your jutsu, you continue through Konoha sometimes from tree to shrub, other times from the very weeds themselves. As you draw nearer to the Hokage Mansion, you lose that sense of warmth and comfort. You start feeling despair and anxiety. There is something going on here that is very unnatural.
You look around the mansion and immediately see the gigantic tree that overlooks the mansion. It's roots must run deep, you reason. And the roots are part of this tree... You wonder how much you can learn from retracing the memories of this tree. But first, you must see what's under the mansion, if possible.
You follow the roots all the way to the end and still nothing, you see nothing but ground. You try to see if there's any other greenery you can move to. You get the sensation that there is another set of roots further down. Odd, seeing as how deep you've gone already. You jump to these roots and follow them until you reach the flower that they belong to. It's an underground cave....
But there's a body of water here leading out. The sun gleams inside as it makes its daily rotation. You're under the mansion, but... what is this chamber? It looks like some sort of emergency tunnel. In the middle of this chamber, you see a large statue. It is emitting visible rays of chakra. You are unaffected because it's not you viewing this, but you're positive that has to be the source. You return to your friends.
"Found it," you say as you blink several times, readjusting your eyes. "There's a statue that's under the Hokage's Mansion. It's in the middle of what seems to be an evacuation tunnel. It extends all the way out, maybe to a river?"
"That spot is guarded and maintained ONLY by the ANBU who work directly for the Third," Kakashi points out, angst in his breath, "that could only mean one thing..."
You think back to speaking with Danzo over a year ago in your mind.
There's Danzo, sitting smugly in his chair at the interrogation room. You look back at your memory with your photographic memory. You see yourself talking to Danzo, it's as if you are viewing two other people, and not your own memory. It's so vivid...
"Are there any other people like you in the Leaf? Others who are working behind the scenes to help out Madara?" You see and hear yourself say.
"Most likely," Danzo shakes his head, "but now I'll never know, as I'm sure to be hanged".
"Why do you think it's likely?" you asked curiously.
"As I said, Madara doesn't get his hands dirty, he works through people, like a puppeteer," Danzo clarifies, "it's unlikely that he reached his level of current affairs by simple reconnaissance".
**** ---------------------- Clutch Moment Make your Fate
You ponder your options for a bit. It's a tough decision. Everyone here with you, you care about deeply. You don't really know what family feels like, but you imagine that if you did, it would feel like this. If you send in anyone into the village, it could be the last time you see them. You look at the two young boys, who have until now, been kept in the dark completely.
"Guy, can I speak to you a minute?" you ask.
Guy comes over with perhaps a level of enthusiasm that's unwarranted. But that's just Guy for you.
"Ready to jump in there?!" Guy asks as he bolts towards you faster than anything you've ever seen.
"We're staying behind," you inform. Itachi and Kakashi look at you with a sense of shock. "It's too dangerous. The young ones have a bright future ahead, we're not dimming it. That statue might be the only thing holding this genjutsu in place, but that doesn't mean it's the only chess piece on the board. I have a feeling about these two. I have a feeling about all of us. I think we're going to mold the future, and if we want to make the world a better place, we got to protect them. Those two together, could do incredible things".
"Yes... indeed," Kakashi trails off. "But do you realize what that means 21? I'm guessing you chose Itachi, Randel and myself to go in. I can't discredit the logic behind the decision... But... Well, let's just say I want to make sure you realize the weight of your words".
Itachi nods. "Brother, you don't have to do this, we can find some other way".
Itachi reads you like an open book. You don't like the idea of possibly sending members of your family to their grave. But what else could be done? You know you're definitely the last person for the job. And unfortunately, there's a sense of urgency here. You hand everyone minus the kids a communicator and exhale deeply.
"Listen carefully," you advise, "we have no idea what we're up against. If it's only that statue thing, it got there somehow. Someone put it there. That means, that someone could still be watching us. I'm going to stay here with Guy and Mizuumi. We'll watch the kids. If things get hectic in there, you guys need to rally back to this point. Don't try to be a hero. What we need now is information. If you feel it's safe enough Itachi, you destroy that statue. If not, then just come right back here".
You look at Randel and slap him hard on the arm.
"As for you," you continue, "you're obviously our greatest weapon here. I want you to turn on that lantern, and make sure you all come back alive. Is that understood?"
Randel looks at you hesitantly before speaking.
"Sir, there's a pro- problem with that, sir," he replies. "When I enter... that way, I don't really have much concern for the welfare of others... I just care about accomplishing the miss- mission. I don't want to risk any of you getting hurt, you've all been so nice to me".
You lower your head in thought. There had to be some sort of flaw to Randel's lantern state. Although, this isn't really a flaw, it becomes a flaw when dealing with people you care about.
"I'm trusting you Randel," you say, "I'm trusting you to keep this family whole. I am trusting you to be stronger than the mission right now. I'm okay with it, can you be fine with it?"
Randel nods reluctantly.
"If this blows up in our face," Kakashi begins, "I just want you to know"-
"Save it for when you're back," you interrupt Kakashi, "I know you guys will be fine. But if you find yourselves with a problem, come straight back".
"I think we should go for the Third first," Itachi admits, "at the least, we can bring him here and get a bigger grasp on what has been going on".
"That's wise, but unfortunately, we have no idea of how long this genjutsu has been in effect," you reply. "I am always hoping to get Sarutobi-sensei's advice, especially when faced with such an important decision. But for now, we have to rely on ourselves. Smash the device, and then we'll see. If that proves impossible, then bring the Third here. We'll see if he knows something we don't".
Kakashi and Itachi both nod. They both look at Randel. Randel hesitates before turning on his lantern. He walks slowly towards the village. Itachi suggests lagging behind Randel a bit to compensate for Randel's slow pace. Kakashi agrees with this. After a few moments though, they're off.
You wait for what seems like decades, but eventually Kakashi and Itachi return. Kakashi is holding Randel, barely. And Itachi is holding Sarutobi.
"What the hell happened?" you ask in concern.
"It was Randel..." Kakashi says as he lays down Randel. By the satisfaction Kakashi shows, you can tell that Randel was indeed a heavy burden to carry. "The genjutsu in there is extremely powerful. I'm surprised we made it. We found that statue you mentioned... Everyone was acting as if everything was perfect in the world. They all had smiles and pleasant expressions on their faces. They weren't even bothered when we broke our way into the secret tunnel. It was all too... rosy".
Itachi grabs Sarutobi and uses his Giga Eye. Sarutobi begins to complain a bit. The horror on his face is easy to notice.
"We saw the statue," Kakashi continued, "but we couldn't get close enough. The jutsu was too powerful".
Sarutobi gasps, yelps, and then falls to the floor.
"He's going to be out of it for a while I think," Itachi states. "I have a jutsu. It's not perfected... and I'd prefer to not use it. But if push comes to shove, I always can. I call it Susanoo. It's... quite ancient. I think I could go back in there and use it on the statue. It should be enough to smash it to pieces. But there's something powerful in that statue... Something... bestial".
"What happened to Randel?" you ask almost desperately.
"He lost it when we ordered the retreat," Kakashi answers. "The chakra was immense. It was almost blinding. It was like it knew we came to destroy it. When we went to retreat, Randel intended to carry the statue with him out to sea. I had to knock him out, he wouldn't listen to reason. We picked up the Third on the way out. We figured he could inform us better of the situation when we got out of there".
Hmmm... Interesting. Sarutobi-sensei is still out of it. Randel, who is most likely immune to genjutsu is out. Are Kakashi and Itachi under the affect of a genjutsu? Or was Randel really unable to avoid the compulsion of his conditioning? What should you do now that Sarutobi-sensei AND Randel are completely out cold? You don't really know how to check to see if Itachi and Kakashi are under a genjutsu... -------------------- Turning Point Make your Fate
You call Sasuke over with a subtle nod of your head.
"What's up big bro?" he asks with a decidedly cheerful disposition.
"Check Kakashi for me. Make it subtle, just make sure that he isn't in a genjutsu," you advise.
Sasuke looks at you and laughs. He then turns to Kakashi and activates his Sharingan. Kakashi looks at you in confusion. After a couple awkward moments, Sasuke turns back to you.
"No, he's okay," Sasuke answers. "They're both just tired".
Sasuke sprints back towards Naruto and starts bragging about how he was able to help out the adults. You see Naruto display a pretty sour expression and he begins to walk towards you.
"Not now Naruto," you say with an extended hand. You know what he wants. "Let me have some time over here, and then we'll find something only you can do".
Kakashi has spent this entire time looking at you with an odd expression on his face. Well, what you can SEE from his face. Itachi on the other hand... hasn't taken his eyes off of the Third.
"You can never be too careful," Kakashi states with a tiny chuckle. "I understand completely. But it's really like I told you".
"It's hard to believe that the three of you together had such a tough time," you confess. "It's actually a little distressing".
Kakashi is about to reply when Itachi cuts him off.
"That's not the worst of it," Itachi points out. "You might not have thought about this yet, as it only struck me right now.But being out of the affected area, that being the village, isn't enough to get the victims out of the genjutsu. I had to use my Giga Eye. It's going to be practically an eternity to dispel every genjutsu victim that way".
He's right. Even with your blood, Itachi can't possibly dispel every single genjutsu in the village. It's going to be a while if he is the only one who can do it.
"Can you do it Kakashi? You do possess the Mangekyo, don't you?" you ask honestly.
"I do, but Itachi's knowledge of genjutsu far exceeds my own," Kakashi admits. "Besides that, I just can't do the Giga Eye jutsu. Not yet, anyway".
Sarutobi-sensei stirs on the floor. Odd that Randel is still out, perhaps the lantern takes it's toll on him. Much more than you had thought it would seem.
"Most embarrassing for a shinobi to be rescued by his students," the Third admits. "But it is good to be rescued. What a nightmare. And what a humbling moment".
Guy comes up to listen in. The four of you bow to the Third and help him up.
"What happened sensei?" you ask courteously.
"I'm not really sure," he replies. "I found myself constantly fighting a genjutsu. Before I knew it, I couldn't help it anymore. It just kept trying to put me under its spell. I couldn't resist it forever. I imagine that's what happened to everyone else".
"It's coming from a strange looking statue under your mansion," you inform. "I'm not sure how to proceed. The statue was too powerful for Kakashi and Itachi to destroy. Furthermore, Itachi seems to be the only one capable of removing people from the genjutsu".
The Third looks at Itachi for a moment.
"It's a jutsu that came after the incident under the lake," Itachi reports. "I call it the Giga Eye. It's a way to put people at ease".
Sarutobi-sensei nods and rubs his eyes.
"I feel, old. But not just old, I know I'm old. I feel... ancient," the Third thinks out loud. "I was reliving the same day over and over. I suppose I should be happy to be in the real world. But to find things in such a sad condition... it's troubling."
"Any ideas of how we can fix this?" you ask the question on everyone's mind. "You are the greatest shinobi in history, surely you must have seen something like this?"
He laughs softly and smiles warmly at you.
"I might have once been in the running for greatest," he corrects. "But right now, I am way past my prime. That is why it is up to you, the new generation to save the Leaf. I know you have all done so much already, but I simply can't do this. I do have one idea, but it's very dangerous. If Itachi can somehow overpower that statue with his Giga Eye jutsu, he might be able to use it to project his jutsu over the entire village".
You look at Itachi pensively. That could kill him. All of the villagers thoughts? At once? That sounds like an incredible strain.
"You could always destroy it, and then we'll take it from there," Sarutobi-sensei continues. "The only danger from there is that we don't know who is watching. This reeks of Madara. I guess he is alive... This is truly grave news. If we do destroy the statue, we can work little by little to restore the village to normal. But if we're being watched, which we most surely are, then it would be a key moment for a sneak attack. Not to mention, I fear there may be a beast inside that statue..."
"A tailed beast Lord Hokage?" Kakashi gasps with shock.
Sarutobi merely nods his head and shuts his eyes.
"Unfortunately," Sarutobi answers. "If it is as you describe... that statue could be harnessing a tailed beast's power. It would certainly explain the long duration and the potency of the jutsu. Can you imagine how angry a demon beast will be after being used for so long?"
Yeah. He's going to be real pissed. But not half as mad as you are right now. You look at Itachi and Sarutobi-sensei. There's a lot at stake. You could have Itachi try to overpower the statue, but it puts him in a great risk. It could kill him. But it would prevent tailed beast from running loose... Is the sake of the village worth it? ----------------- You guys have an open pass to use all the knowledge you have from the manga for this decision. Take your time, because although it's not a "Clutch Moment", it could very easily turn into one. Make your Fate
"This villager needs help 21," Kakashi says. "And the Third... he doesn't look well. We are going to need a serious medical nin".
You pull out a syringe full of your blood and inject it directly into the Third's heart. Just as you suspected... His body is fine, healthy even. His face loses a bit of the emaciation it once held. But the mind... the mind appears to be holding him back from coming to.
"I'm not really a medical-nin," you confess in frustration. "I just have this bloodline that allows me to do this... I let sensei down".
"We might find Jiraiya-sama," Kakashi replies not losing hope. "He was one of the legendary Sannin. The villager, before he passed out, he described who I think might be Jiraiya-sama. If he is here, he can definitely help us".
"Jiraiya?" you ask in confusion. "I don't think I've heard of him".
Itachi shakes his head in frustration.
"You're really dense 21," he says. "Jiraiya is a legend. Almost every shinobi aspire to be his equal, worthy of his respect".
"And he writes incredible stories as well," Kakashi says with a chuckle, "he's really a man of many talents. Something all true warriors should wish to emulate".
Itachi narrows his eyes and looks suspiciously as Kakashi. Kakashi clears his throat and starts loading the villager and the Third onto the Flying Lion. The two kids jump on top of your flying golem and start patting it on the side, trying to get it to move. You look at Randel.
"Guy? Think you can help me here?" you ask, not sure you can muster the strength.
Guy smiles and throws you a thumbs up. He gets to Randel's right side and waits for you to get the left. You both signal your readiness and carry Randel up and onto the golem. You motion for Guy to get on there as well.
"Listen, I think we need an escape plan," you explain. "That's where I come in. Naruto, I'm going to need you to use your multi shadow clone jutsu to copy my shape and send me all over the countryside. I want them to run at full sprint, as if they're searching for something".
You gather your chakra and concentrate yourself.
"Lightning Style! Lightning Clone!"
L appears in front of you with a grimace on his face. He is fearing what you're going to ask him to do. You explain the gravity of the situation, and apologize accordingly. You then bring him to Naruto.
"L here is going to stay and let me know what happens by using my jutsu," you inform everyone. "If our enemy is after me, which I definitely think they are, this little test will remove all doubt. When L gets dispelled, I'll know his memories and any images he managed to catch"-
"Before I die," L interrupts candidly.
You look at him and shake your head. You're sorry, but it's really the only thing you got right now. If it is Madara or Orochimaru, they won't be expecting shadow clones. This might give you an edge in the fight to come.
Naruto looks at L and then looks at you. He hops off of the Flying Lion and casts his Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu. Before you know it, there are literally close to a thousand copies of yourself looking at you.
"You know what you all have to do," you instruct. "We got to make this count. Try to look panicked, but not too panicked".
Naruto shakes his head and jumps back on the Flying Lion. You observe the area around you and plan your exit.
"When I say so... you all disperse. I'm going to use an explosion to cover our escape, but I'm running low on chakra, so make this count Naruto," you explain.
"Golem Style. Scouter Bugs..." you whisper as you make the complicated handseals for your unique style.
Dozens of insect shaped rocks begin to form under your feet. They crawl up to you and await instruction. You instruct them to kick up more sand and dirt than actually propel lethal air waves of force. They understand. You instruct Miz to get back onto the Flying Lion and you shortly follow. You look at L with an apologetic look and command your flying golem to ascend swiftly into the air.
You look below to see the clone army scatter in all sorts of directions. You then order your bugs to detonate and they create a huge dust storm as they project their explosive energy directly below them. Your escape has been concealed, and now there's a lot going on. Whoever is spying can suck on that.
"What now bro?" Itachi looks at you and waits.
"We're going to find Jiraiya... I just don't know where to look first," you report honestly.
"If you're really running low on chakra, maybe we should camp out a safe distance from Konoha," Kakashi suggests. "Otherwise, there's a nearby village to the northeast. It's about 3 days travel for the average shinobi... But for us, we can probably make it there in couple hours? Maybe more? But we'll be so exhausted, we won't really be ready for anything..."
"Any other leads?" you ask intently.
"Only one other I could think of," Kakashi admits. "There's a village, much larger than the other one I mentioned. It would be better suited to care for the villager and the honorable Third... And If Jiraiya-sama is around, he might be there as it's a bit more defensible. It's called Lentown. The other one I mentioned is Benson. But like I said, camping out might not be such a bad option right now..."
"Yeah, I heard you... how far is Lentown?"
"It's going to be seven or 8 hours," Kakashi replies in a defeated tone. "But the way I see it, the village has been like that for a while. It would probably be the place Jiraiya-sama would work out of to try to find a solution. It's the only village in the immediate area with a proper hospital. But I know I don't have to explain how risky it is to continue flying".
You look at Itachi.
"Your call" he says. -------------------- A: Fly for an hour and set up camp. You guys are exhausted B: Fly to Benson nonstop. Rest up and then search for Jiraiya there C: Fly to Benson nonstop. Rest up, and then fly to Lentown. D: Fly directly to Lentown. Rest up, and search for Jiraiya there.
"So Benson's the first stop then," you inform your team. Each of them, except the kids, Miz and Guy look badly in need of rest. "We're going to stop there and get our bearings. But it wouldn't seem likely to find this Jiraiya there. We also have to think about endangering the town we stay at, that could always be an issue. We'll spend a full day at Benson, then get to Lentown".
Kakashi nods with a yawn.
"Going to be a long ride either way," he answers as he lays down on the harness you made for the Flying Lion. "And you could have made this thing more comfortable. This is going to be murder on my back"
Guy laughs that off and begins doing handstand pushups. This normally, would shock anyone, but this is the norm for Guy, so you don't even comment on it.
Guy continues training the entire way, while everyone else just falls asleep out of exhaustion, or sheer boredom. You also have to stay awake, to guide your golem on where to go, and you just don't feel at ease yet.
The journey took about the time Kakashi had predicted and you awoke everyone that could wake up. You advise them to remove their Leaf shinobi headbands for now. It's a huge risk to be advertising that right now. Your biggest concern is also how you're going to hide and provide adequate accommodations for the villager and the Third. You landed the Flying Lion outside of Benson and got everyone out, then you hid the flying golem with Miz keeping watch over it.
"This is going to be our cover story," you say to the group. "Obviously we can't go around as Leaf shinobi right now. If someone sees us, they're going to wonder why we're traveling with so many and carrying two unconscious guys around with us. It's just going to spell trouble".
"We can't very well just leave them here," Itachi says as if trying to rush your instruction.
"Obviously," you reply shortly. "We're going to have come up with a believable story that covers up our... diverse group well. Not to mention our two newest additions. If this was Konoha, I could hide them inside a giant golem, but no one outside of Konoha has seen that, it would also bring up questions. So, we'll just say, if we get caught with them that is, we'll just say that Sarutobi-sensei and this villager are a father and son merchant team. Naruto, Sasuke, and Itachi, you are all brothers and this villager here is your father. The rest of us are security, who happen to have been attacked and we're trying to fix this blunder so we can still get paid".
"Sounds transparent," Sasuke says with a smile.
"Yeah, well, it's the best I got to work with right now. We don't look like the peaceful type," you answer honestly.
You advise them to wait here and you make your way into Benson. You ask around for the best lodging, and find a quaint little inn. You go to that inn and rent out their biggest two rooms. After examining the rooms, you return to your party and bring them to the inn one by one, trying to not make a fuss... But with the personalities and stature of some of your teammates, staring was inevitable. After you situate the Third and the villager with the kids and Randel in the first room, you go back to your room to discuss a few things before going to bed.
"We can't stay here long 21," Kakashi voices his concern. "What did L find out?"
That's right, L. He never said anything. You dispel your jutsu and regain all his memories. You see hundreds of Naruto's clone running around the village impersonating you. But nothing happened. L watched you fly away under the cover of the explosion, and he scouted the area around the village for hours, but found nothing. You convey this to your team.
"That's unsettling," Kakashi admits. "That means either no one was out there, or they knew the real one wasn't there at all, even with the difference in chakra levels between Naruto's clones and your single clone. We're dealing with someone with patience, and the ability to think clearly during the hunt".
"Madara?" Itachi stipulates.
"Who knows?" Kakashi answers honestly. "We shouldn't stay in one area too long, that's for sure."
"We don't have the time to search for Jiraiya here," you answer. "Chances are, he won't be here anyway. This town is very small, someone would have mentioned a man of Jiraiya's description. We'll rest here for one full day, then we'll travel to Lentown as quickly as we can. Any leads on what Jiraiya would do when he's at Lentown? What's he like?"
Kakashi proceeds to brief you and the team on everything he knows about Jiraiya, who he holds in very high regard. So he's basically your average forty something year old man, single, likes his sake, loves the Leaf, and loves women and writing... But he also wouldn't be out boozing it up at a time like this. Hmm...
"We have no idea how long they've been under... for all we know, Jiraiya might have given up by now," you present.
"He wouldn't do that, if he's in Lentown, we should find him easily. His personality makes him pretty hard to ignore," Kakashi states.
You thank him for the information and begin to ponder over all of it as the team falls asleep. You check on the kids, Randel, and the two patients. Unfortunately, the patients remain the same, they need to be rushed to a hospital first thing once you get to Lentown. They are going to have to eat... But you're going to have to come up with a story as to what happened, something... not so transparent.
The day passes by quickly the next night. You haven't rested well at all with so much hanging over your head. You pay the innkeeper and make your way back to the Flying Lion, where everyone had left before you per your instructions. The flight to Lentown wasn't as long as you thought, or perhaps you had just fallen into a daze. The days turning into one, long, hellish, day. You land the Flying Lion outside of Lentown and hide it once again with Miz as your guard.
"Where to first then? Everyone's in pretty good shape," Itachi states. -------------------- What to do about the villager and the Hokage? They need a hospital so they can eat and rest properly. But you don't necessarily want to risk the Hokage's identity being discovered, however slim a chance that might be. You also don't have much of a cover story. A: Take the villager and the Hokage to the hospital and tell them the same story you said at Benson, and hope no one recognizes either of them B: Take them to the best inn you can find and have them wait it out there C: Drop them off at the emergency room without any type of explanation at all D: Same as A, but come up with a different story explaining their condition
The kids? What should be done about them? E: Have them help you search the village as members of the team F: Have them wait at the inn with Randel and Guy H: Send them to the inn by themselves, they're trustworthy after all, if just a bit mischievous I: Have them wait at the inn with Randel or Guy
Where to find Jiraiya? 1: He's probably been hitting the bars, ask around all the local bars. Someone with his description will be hard to miss. 2: Head to the library, he might be researching a way to end this, that's what you would do anyway right? And Kakashi mentioned he's an author, he might be there. 3: Ask around the merchants. A man has to live somehow. 4: Visit every single restaurant in the village and ask about him
You decided to take the villager and the honorable Third to the hospital. It was a huge facility, much bigger than you would expect. You reasoned that because of the location of Lentown, many shinobi probably used this village as a staging area for attacks. That would definitely explain the large hospital size and the town's booming economy.
You informed everyone of their cover. You are all circus performers, and although Guy didn't like it, he was to deny any accusations of him being a shinobi.
You looked over your team and wondered who should search where. Most importantly, you wondered how should the teams be divided? You knew you had to speak with Itachi, as you felt a rift forming and you couldn't allow that. But also, the kids were important as well. You could understand why Madara would want to hurt Sasuke, a vulnerable Uchiha. For that matter, Orochimaru hasn't left your mind either. The thought of him experimenting on your friends left you a bit... vengeful.
So you decided to separate the kids onto one team with Guy and Randel. Guy was respected by the children, and would follow his orders. Randel was there as an extra enforcer, should things go astray.
And so you went along with Kakashi and Itachi. You figured this would be as good as a time as any to speak with Itachi, and so you did, the moment Kakashi was busy speaking with residents.
"Hey, little bro.." you said casually hoping to grab Itachi's attention.
He stopped walking and turns to you. A subtle tilt of his head is detected.
"Yeah?" he answers.
"Everything alright?" you ask. "I get the feeling you're angry about something. I worry about you. We're family, we got to protect one another, be there for each other. You know?"
Itachi nods.
"I've been very... angry lately," he answers. "I don't know exactly where my anger is placed. Sometimes I'm angry at myself... Sometimes at Madara... Sometimes, even at my very own father, or you. I know this anger is misplaced... but I can't help but feel what's there".
You shake your head and exhale cautiously. "What's got you angry? What's on your mind?"
"Everything bro, everything..." he answers looking down. "I am the soke of the Uchiha, a position revered and respected. Yet... I couldn't care less. I feel like it SHOULD bother me that I don't care, but it doesn't. I feel like I SHOULD care to not meet my father's expectations, but it doesn't... All I care is about nailing this bastard Madara before he hurts the Leaf anymore".
He looks up at you and pokes you in the arm.
"The thought of Orochimaru or Madara hurting you or Sasuke..." he says. "It just... drives me insane. And now we have Sasuke with us, and I think, it's thanks to you and your decisions that he's alright. And I'm thankful for that. But look at the rest of Konoha... Mom... and Dad... They're not alright, and that makes me angry. I find myself wishing harm to others... and I never thought I would ever wish that upon anyone... I just want to make this stop, all of it. It just needs to stop".
You look at Itachi thoughtfully. He's grown up a lot with you, you've seen his demeanor change and fluctuate. It's June 2nd, and you've known him for over a year... It's hard to believe, but this little guy is really maturing.
However, you have always known Itachi to be a pacifist. And this talk about wanting to hurt people, and making the pain stop is more than a little distressing.
"Hey listen," you say as you put your hand on his shoulder. "I'm not going to let anything happen to you or Sasuke. No one is going to get hurt here. This world we live in, we're working to change it. But I can't turn the switch off overnight. No matter how powerful all of us are individually, or together, we're not at that level yet. We need to be strong enough to change the world. But we can only do that if we're true to one another and most importantly, to ourselves. This isn't you Itachi. You have always been strong naturally, but you know what made you the strongest? It was your capacity for love".
He looks at you, tears watering up in his eyes. He pokes you in the arm again.
"Thanks big brother," he says, a small stream falling down the corner of his left eye.
You want to cry as well, you don't know why. This joy, this very moment, it's... special. You'd like to capture it and never let it go. But the reality of the world and of what we want is very different. The world you and Itachi hope for has to be forged, and it starts with finding Jiraiya.
"Hey," Kakashi says as he pulls you out of your thoughts.
You shake your head and apologize.
"He's definitely here in town," Kakashi continues. "Hard to miss a 6 foot tall shinobi with long white hair I guess. He's been frequenting the bars lately with some notes. The bartender there says he always orders the same bottle of sake and then sits there and reads. He says that Jiraiya-sama hasn't even been talking to the women that ask him to be treated to a bottle anymore. That's really strange for him".
Yeah no kidding...
"Alright, well, we'll just wait for him here then," you answer.
Kakashi and Itachi nod at you and go into the bar. The bartender starts to make a fuss about Itachi going in, but Kakashi clears it up right away. You pick a table in the opposite corner of Jiraiya's usual spot, and wait. A couple hours go by before you see a large shinobi enter the bar. It HAS to be Jiraiya.
"Lucky break," Kakashi whispers with what you think is a masked smile.
"Does he know you?" you reply casually while still looking at Jiraiya.
"I don't think so... he's a bit of a vagabond," Kakashi replies. "How should we go about this? If he doesn't recognize me, it might spell trouble".
"He's bound to be paranoid, one way or the other," Itachi adds.
"Yeah, no kidding." you reply. "And while the villagers bought our circus act story, he will be able to tell immediately we aren't. If we approach him, he might think we're Madara agents or some other dangerous foe... We don't need a show in the middle of town".
"Yeah..." Kakashi replies. "So, what should we do?" ------------- Turning Point A: Kakashi, go see him and let's hope he recognizes you B: Have the bartender send him a complimentary bottle of his favorite sake C: Same as B, but with Kakashi adding in a special Konoha ANBU code D: Have 21 go over and try to talk to him E: Modify one of these choices
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:03:41 GMT
You open the metaphorical book in your head and focus on what you remember about Jiraiya. The man's a legend alright. Known as one of the three Legendary Sannin. He was hailed as one of the generation's greats, taught by Sarutobi-sensei himself. You remember hearing that he was chosen to be Hokage, but he turned it down.
There's things about this scenario that bother you however. Jiraiya always orders the same bottle of sake, and refuses the advances of women, something unlike him. Jiraiya, who has even referred to himself proudly as a "super pervert", wouldn't do that. And what's that he reads everyday? If Jiraiya himself couldn't work out the problem in Konoha, then we have a serious problem indeed. Is he reliving the same day over and over again? Wait... could he be in a genjutsu himself? Hmmm... surely it was enough to get the Third, it could get Jiraiya...
Crap, the communicators, you forgot to give them to Guy. You bite your lip in frustration, your mind overflowing with thoughts immediately. You hope they behave themselves. And wait a second... June 2nd... crap again. Yesterday was Mikoto's birthday. In a week, Itachi will be 12, and you've let it almost slip by. You look at Itachi fondly, poor Itachi... He's had to grow up during this, and while most 12 year olds would be worrying about what to ask for a present, Itachi has to worry about THE present.
"There's something else I think you should know," Kakashi says softly as he sits back against the booth seat. "He was the sensei to Namikaze Minato, the revered Fourth Hokage. The Fourth... well, he was MY sensei".
You look at Kakashi in surprise.
"That's important information to let slip," you point out. "Why didn't I know that? It wasn't in any of the files. Why would you mention that just now?"
Kakashi looks down at the table.
"Because of Naruto..." he replies. "The Third made everyone swear to keep this a secret, those of us who knew. But I knew, because I was Minato-sama's student. Naruto... is his son. And that man there, was perhaps one of the most important men in Minato-sama's life. He revered Jiraiya-sama. He felt the embodiment of the shinobi would be Jiraiya-sama himself. Also... his first book... Well, it wasn't the popular ones he writes now... It was a tale of a gutsy ninja... named Naruto".
Itachi gasps and leans across the table.
"How could you leave this out?" he says exasperated. "Do you realize Naruto thinks no one cared about him enough to take him in? The kid thought he was worthless and unworthy of being loved. He's an orphan, yet his godfather sits right there".
Kakashi nods slowly and closes his right eye.
"The Third is extremely wise, and his judgment isn't to be questioned or second guessed," Kakashi continues. "But he would probably want us to seek out Jiraiya-sama at this point. Use any resources we can to restore the Leaf. I was sworn to uphold this rule, especially since Naruto is the jinchuuriki of the kyubbi. But Jiraiya-sama would likely find it odd if we didn't know this information about him and claim to have the Hokage under our care. Also 21... it is said that Orochimaru was Jiraiya-sama's best friend until last year... The Third confided in me that Jiraiya-sama saw Orochimaru's defection as his greatest failure as a shinobi and as a person of valor. If Orochimaru really is your fa"-
"Enough," you say sternly. "I don't care to follow that train of thought. I will use it as a means to an end, if necessary. But I don't want to rely on it. Can you speak to Jiraiya-san?"
Kakashi nods once more.
"Pease tell him we have the Hokage and need his help in saving the Leaf, tell him we know what's going on. But before that... ask him if he remembers you".
"It's been at least 8 years since we spoke, I was a child back then," Kakashi argues. "He might not know what I look like now that I grew up".
"Which is why you should mention Minato-san first," you state. "It's better than any other options here. Besides, he wouldn't exactly attack you just for mentioning Minato-san would he?"
Kakashi looks at you with a clear lack of certainty.
"This is a ninja who has survived a World War and seen many things from the front lines himself," Kakashi replies. "We are rosebuds yet to bloom in comparison to him. Add to that, he's completely on edge, incapable of even enjoying a bottle of sake, probably because of his paranoia, and he's a man who loves women more than anything. Except lately of course. And you want me to talk to him? I'll do it, but be ready to prop a bed next to the Third in the hospital for me. If I live that is".
You've never seen Kakashi show so much respect to a shinobi before. He isn't being fearful right now, but his caution is something you find that demands you respect Jiraiya. Could this man be THAT powerful? A living legend?
Kakashi gets up and exhales slowly. He puts his hand into his pocket and retrieves his shinobi headband and a book. Clever Kakashi, very clever. He walks over to Jiraiya's table slowly and stands at the foot of the table. You ready yourself in case you have to step in and help Kakashi out. Kakashi slowly places the book and headband on the table and slides it slowly to Jiraiya. Some indistinct muttering is heard, but little else.
"He's skeptical," Itachi says softly. "He doesn't believe that anyone could save the Third where he failed".
Itachi's lipreading abilities are incredible. All this, without even activating the Sharingan.
"Is he going to come over?" you ask indiscreetly.
"It seems that way," Itachi replies as he keeps staring. "But if his body language is indicative of anything, he's indifferent. He's curious, but not fearful. I don't think he considers us a threat at all. That could be bad if he doesn't believe us to be who we are. Madara's agents would obviously say whatever they needed to ensnare him. He is after all, a loose end. A very powerful, experienced loose end. Would you allow such a threat to your plan's success run around at it's leisure? He's probably had to kill several hunter nin already in defense. We need to be on our toes. I sense his... intensity. He's serious about saving the Leaf, but he doesn't know how".
You look at Itachi in amazement. Is he for real? Did he get all that from a glance?
"It's the Giga Eye, it allows me to understand people better," he answers before you can even manage a question. "I feel everyone's sorrow around me. It buries me deeper and deeper. Until every once in a while, a happiness will lift me up from this profound sadness..."
You will definitely have to do something about this.
"So, you wanted to talk," you hear a loud and thunderous voice. Although he speaks softly, his words demand respect and perhaps even admiration. You look and see the voice belongs to Jiraiya.
"Would you please have a seat Jiraiya-san?" you say as you wave your hand to the open seats at the table and booth. "We really have to talk".
"Yeah, I figure we do," he says as he meets you dead in the eye. He's pretty big for a shinobi you realize, probably 2 or 3 inches more than the 6 feet you were informed about. "I've had a lot of trouble lately. You'll pardon me if I don't trust you so easily. I've had a lot on my mind lately".
"As have we," you admit without hesitation. "Would you like the long version or the short version of our story?"
Jiraiya looks at you cautiously. It's as if you have gone up a few notches in his proverbial book of respect.
"I guess I'll hear it all," he answers as he sits down. "Don't leave anything out. Details are important. Then, we can decide how you can prove to me that you are who you say you are. Anyone working for my enemies could easily have gathered the Third and brought him here. You're going to need a little more than that to prove to me that you are on my side. You gentlemen aren't the first claiming to be trying to help the Leaf. And if you die here today, you probably won't be the last either. So you better make this good".
You smile and look him in the eyes nervously. This man is scary. You can't help but smile nervously. His lips don't even budge though, he's not amused.
"Alright then," you begin. "Where to start..." ------------------ A choice and sort of a free will. Turning Point + Clutch Moment A: Tell him everything you remember from the first moment you awoke in Danzo's place B: Tell him everything you have since you came from the Leaf C: Choice A, but leave out everything about Orochimaru D: Offer to introduce him to his godson Semi Free Will: How will you make Jiraiya trust you and believe you're telling the truth?
You tell Jiraiya everything as discreetly as you can, always watching out for possible spies or civilians watching you. You let Jiraiya know that everyone can be a threat because of what Madara was able to do to Danzo. You explain in detail every single detail you could to the Great Toad Sage. He merely waits and listens as you speak, not showing emotion, nor surprise. It's as if everything in the world that could possibly be thrown at Jiraiya, he's expecting. He doesn't flinch at all.
"That's basically my story," you finish. "As for how to show you that we are who I say we are. I can't really prove that. But you know that already. You know that if I promise or try to prove something like that, I'd be a fake. Because the fact remains, even you, Jiraiya-san, could be a fake right now. I could be buying into Madara's plot right now as we speak, and be losing it all. But it's all I have, because you're the ONLY lead we have to follow".
"You come to me for counsel and then accuse me of being a traitor or a spy?" Jiraiya answers you with a raised brow.
Kakashi lowers his head and sighs.
"I didn't say either of those," you correct. "I doubt Madara would be able to touch you. But you know what Jiraiya-san? I thought Sarutobi-sensei was invincible. Yet he's lying in the hospital here, and I have NO IDEA of how to help him. My blood has been able to heal the near dying, and cure chronic, life debilitating ailments, yet I can't snap him out of that coma. Itachi was able to snap the genjutsu, but all that did was throw his body into a coma. It's like the body's just functioning without a mind. Like Madara just took his brain out and left the husk there as a substitute".
Jiraiya eyes you carefully before putting down his notes on the table. You glance at them casually, trying not to arouse any suspicion and you save the picture in your mind for later review. Jiraiya is staring at you without interruption.
"Are you interested in this?" he asks you as he points to his notes.
"Yeah. I'm hoping you have a plan," you answer candidly. "Because if not, we are all **** out of luck. Kakashi and Itachi, the rest of our team, that's all I know in this entire world. And they're telling me you're the man I got to go to. Are they wrong?"
You look Jiraiya right back in his eyes without blinking. You realize this man could completely overpower you if he chose to. But you don't feel that intensity anymore. He relents in his stare.
"You have good eyes," Jiraiya says with a slight smile. "You also have a certain... fire in your eyes. Interesting... And Naruto... how is he? Has he grown to be big and strong?"
You smile back before replying. "He's a bit eccentric and a goof. But he's a good kid, and he's growing up really strong. He's got tough competition in Sasuke though. The next generation is growing really fast. Maybe one day, we can ensure that there will be no need for shinobi to fight one another. Maybe this generation will be the last to see a great war. I promised Itachi to fulfill that dream, and I NEVER break my promises".
Jiraiya laughs softly.
"Is that so?" he says almost scoffing. "You'll need to learn much more than how to win over an old man with words if you want to stop war kid. But, I get the feeling you're alright. And maybe, just maybe. You all can grow to stop this cycle of hatred. But you're not ready for that yet. And neither am I".
Kakashi raises his head as Jiraiya places his hand on his shoulder.
"Hatake Kakashi, your father would be proud," Jiraiya states. "You've got fine company. If perhaps bold, they seem true enough. And the soke of the Uchiha, Uchiha Itachi... I've heard of you, even outside the Land of Fire. A child prodigy. Well, your group certainly seems colorful. I like color, it defines the artist's canvass".
You wince a little before speaking.
"Well... if that's the case, you're going to enjoy our group," you reply. "We are definitely colorful. And we definitely stand out in a crowd. Speaking of which, perhaps we should meet up with the rest of the team? I don't like to leave the kids alone for long, all things considered. And there's no reason for them to be combing through the village since we found you already. We should meet up with them, and take you to the Third. Maybe you can do something for him?"
Jiraiya shakes his head grimly.
"No, I know exactly of what you mean... When you spoke about the comatose state. There is nothing I can do, but perhaps Tsunade can. She is the great medical-nin in all the lands," Jiraiya states proudly. "And one day, who knows? Maybe she'll even be my wife? But not in these times... Maybe one day..."
"Itachi has a jutsu that MIGHT help. The Giga Eye jutsu, it'll heal their mental states," you inform. "But it would require him overpowering the statue, which we think is powered by a tailed beast, maybe even two. If he can't do it, he could die. I was thinking I could move the statue, but I have a particular weakness to genjutsu that I'm afraid for the moment, I can't compensate for. If we destroy the statue... well, we might just let the beasts out".
Jiraiya considers his options carefully before answering you.
"Destroying the statue is most likely out of the question," he states. "I have no intention of fighting a tailed beast, nor would I ever recommend anyone to do so. They are just raw energy, extremely overwhelming. No reason to undertake such a task unless there's no other choice. Moving the statue is a temporary solution, but, it could help us in the immediate. As far as Itachi's jutsu is concerned... it could also work, but it leaves a problem unsolved. If he is able break the genjutsu all at once, that's great. But who would care for all the people who would be left comatose?"
You look at Kakashi and Itachi before beginning.
"Well, there lies our final problem," you confess. "How do we deal with the thousands of patients? No one person could truly do that. And as I've pointed out, I'm not a medical-nin. I just have a unique bloodline".
Jiraiya smiles knowingly and nods his head slowly.
"Tsunade can help them, I'm almost sure of it," he replies. "I just didn't have a plan to go with until you came along. Now that I know I'm not alone, it eases the burden. Although I still don't know how we should go about releasing the genjutsu".
You place your elbow on the table and try to reason out every variable... But there are just so many... You find yourself in the same circular jam. Every time you grab at a solution, it escapes you and becomes another problem. You rub your eyes wearily, patiently waiting for an idea to enter your mind.
Until you hear the commotion coming from outside. Cheering and jeering from the city streets.
"Oh no," you say out loud before getting up.
"See, the problem with the genjutsu is that is has a building up effect," you hear Itachi explain as you walk away and out into the streets.
It's just as you feared. Your eyes widen as you see Guy, Sasuke, and Naruto walking down the street.
On their hands.
While balancing themselves on Randel outstretched arms and head.
You exhale in a frustrated breath and rush towards the spectacle. You separate the crowd and chastise Randel for allowing them to use his head for such a debacle. You inform them that you found Jiraiya and lead them to the table. You pull up some extra chairs and one extra table.
"Well look at you," Jiraiya says as he looks at Randel in amazement. "I thought I got dirty looks, but you must get murderous looks. You're a giant. I bet you get all the ladies don't you?"
Jiraiya's mood has improved. Apparently he was frustrated at the brick wall he had hit. But now, he was with Team 21, and he had options.
"So, I hear you're some sort of genius? A walking brain?" he says to you pulling you from your thoughts.
"Something like that," you smile with a little bit of pride.
"Yeah well, to manage what you have, I'll give you credit," Jiraiya replies. "But what exactly do we do from here?"
""First, we visit the Third at the hospital," you state confidently. "Then we decide there who is staying with him and guarding him. We might also consider sending a second team back to the Leaf to make sure that the situation doesn't change, but it's dangerous. That team will likely be understaffed and completely out of communication with us, but it's still a possibility that we should address. As far as the main team... I'm still thinking on that. How about..." ------------------------- Turning Point A: Guard the Hokage B: Leave the Hokage under the care of the hospital staff
Pick one or more options from the following, if A is your choice. Who stays with the Hokage? C: 21 D: Itachi E: Guy F: Randel H: Sasuke I: Naruto J: Mizuumi K: Jiraiya L: Kakashi
Do you send a team to the Leaf to watch for activity? Yes or No
If Yes, who do you pick to go? 1: 21 2: Jiraiya 3: Itachi 4: Sasuke 5: Naruto 6: Kakashi 7: Randel 8: Mizuumi 9: Guy
Lastly, what are you going to do now? !: Return to the Leaf and try to destroy the statue @: Return to the Leaf and move the statue #: Return to the Leaf and have Itachi Giga Eye it $: Postpone everything and search for Tsunade. Jiraiya has filled you in, and she's probably capable of healing the coma symptoms. But she's going to be hard to find... %: Something else?
"As far as the main team..." you continue muttering lowly. You look at the rest of your friends, they're having a great time just enjoying everyone's company. It breaks your heart that you have to even think these things... You lean in closer to Jiraiya and whisper. "Can I talk to you alone for a second, please?"
Jiraiya looks back at you with an odd expression and nods his head. He follows you as you take him to the back of the bar.
"What's on your mind kid?" Jiraiya asks.
"Look, this is a little unusual for me," you confess. "But I got to lay everything out on the table, and hope that for once, I can get some perspective... I've been living this... life, and it's not real. I mean to say, I know it's not real. It's not reality. You see those guys over there? They're my family, and they're all I got. And I feel this need to protect them. But I can't, not really. Because this world is cruel and vicious and violent. I want to change that, I NEED to change that. But I can't do it right now, and I can't protect them either. Because I'm just not powerful enough".
Jiraiya scratches his chin and rests his hand over his mouth. He places his hand on your shoulder.
"Why don't you just say what it is you want to say instead of beating around the bush with this speech of yours?" he ponders aloud.
You look at him completely exasperated.
"Someone is going to be in complete danger," you confess. "I'm not the most powerful member of our party. I've tried to be, but I'm not. I've always tried to analyze the situation and the variables to everything. But there are always so many variables. And this time... this time, I think it's going to result in the death of some of my family members".
Jiraiya looks at you and nods knowingly. He lets out a sigh.
"You've been leading the team, not because of power, but because of smarts kid. That isn't something to be ashamed of. The greatest shinobi ever, were not remembered for their power, but for their wisdom," Jiraiya points out smugly. "When I think of Sarutobi-sensei, I first think about how wise and intelligently he looks at any problem. And then secondly, I look at his power as a shinobi, and it is great. But his compassion is what always moved me. He made his decisions based off of compassion and love, with every angle covered thanks to his wisdom and smarts. I hope to be thought of, or remembered in such a way".
Now you look at Jiraiya thoughtfully. You wonder about what Itachi said about him. You explain to him everything that's on your mind, and the choices you've made and why you made them. He questions you when it comes to bringing the children along for the search for Tsunade since you think it's so dangerous. You explain that Itachi has his birthday coming up, that it was his mother's birthday yesterday, and that Itachi has been feeling everyone's sadness because of the Giga Eye. That it would be impossible to separate Sasuke from Itachi at this point, as it would cause so many damage. You express hope that you and Jiraiya are enough to protect the three of them. You lay everything you can out on the table. Jiraiya listens intently to your entire reasoning before speaking.
"21, I can see why people listen to you," Jiraiya begins. "You have a manner of thinking that stems from logic, but is colored by love... That's important. Sarutobi-sensei should be protected, and I agree that Guy and Kakashi are ideal, given their strengths. I can trust them to protect the Third, I'm sure they can ensure his safety, especially with that mountain of a man there, Randel. And I've heard of Itachi, I know him to be the kind of person that maybe comes once in a century, if we're lucky. But you're right. Madara will be anticipating our move, and likely, is on the move. I am ready to die for the Leaf are you?"
He pauses as he examines your ferocity. He doesn't seem satisfied.
"I can't die yet," you answer reluctantly. "there's too much I have to do. I got to make sure the Leaf survives and that everyone there goes on to live happily, with the life THEY choose. Not the life that was thrusted upon them because of this shinobi world we live in".
Jiraiya smiles.
"Good kid, real good. Then just don't die. And I won't either. If Madara comes, we'll either kick his ass, or get the hell out of town. With Tsunade. Does that sound good?"
You smile back.
"Yeah," you reply. "Yeah it does".
"Great then," Jiraiya says with a swing of his arm to your back. He's pretty heavy handed you notice. "That also means I get an opportunity to teach my godson and really bond with him.It's something I really wanted to do... but was afraid of the consequences that it could bring to his life. But now, with the world in upheaval, that concern seems petty. I don't have many leads on where Tsunade might be, I just know her personality. So we'll have to go from there. But for tonight, why don't we celebrate? We won't get a chance to do so for a while".
He's right. The search for Tsunade will most likely take a while if we have no leads. Itachi's birthday will pass, now is the perfect time to celebrate it, with everyone here. You decide to take everyone out to the best restaurant in town. You inform everyone that it's Itachi's birthday in a week, and that he's almost a teenager now. Itachi blushes with embarrassment as the entire restaurant cheers and sings for him. For one night, he's a regular kid. It was... different. And it felt good. After the meal and lots of lighthearted banter, you wait a bit at the restaurant for the crowd to die down and let the food settle in. Then, you discuss your plan and your reasoning behind it. Kakashi and Guy aren't too thrilled about being left behind, but they understand the logic. Randel, as Randel always tends to be, is pretty much ready to follow orders. The kids are psyched because they feel like it's their very first real mission. And Itachi, well Itachi just seems to be happy for once since the whole thing started. You all go and visit the Third in the hospital and say goodbye to Kakashi, Guy and Randel. They'll be sleeping there for a bit on guard duty. The rest of you go to the inn and rest up.
Jiraiya had given you some pretty extensive information on Tsunade and his thoughts on where she could be. He described her as an impressive and beautiful woman. There was affection in his tone, you wondered if he was truly in love with her. It certainly seemed that way. He also spoke about two great tragedies in her life. The loss of her brother and the loss of a man named Dan, whom she apparently loved. When Jiraiya spoke of Dan, he seemed genuinely happy that Tsunade had found love, but there was a certain tinge of melancholy in his debriefing.
Almost as if Jiraiya was a stalker, you gain all canonical knowledge on Tsunade.
The next morning, the kids are in a very playful mood, even Itachi is acting like his age. You poke Itachi in the shoulder.
"Hey little bro," you say with a smile. "Be careful, you're having too much fun. I wouldn't want you to strain yourself".
Itachi chuckles a bit.
"I'll try to take it easy," Itachi replies humorously. "Where are we going anyway?"
"Still deciding on that," you answer.
While you feel there is an obvious sense of urgency, you also remembered that Tsunade had become a problem gambler, and a bit of a boozer. It would be easier to follow the paper trail on foot, going from small village to small village and asking around. But that would take time, lots of it.
You look at your team. "Only thing I know is that Tsunade's habits have given us a unique cover for this search. We're debt collectors, and you three are my bratty little brothers".
You laugh and turn to Jiraiya. He's still thinking about what to do, and he's making it really obvious...
You could also take the Flying Lion to the nearest gambling capital, Kin, and ask there. But you know that if she has such loads of debt, she would likely not be there to avoid having to pay. But it is most likely a way to see how recent ago she was around and where she might be. But there are tons of smaller villages surrounding it.
You inform Mizuumi to head for Konoha and to remain on the outskirts as hidden as possible. He understands his orders.
Now, as far as the Flying Lion... ---------------------- A: Go around this very town and see if there is any underground gambling dens, asking about Tsunade as you go. B: Take the Flying Lion to Kin and ask around C: Take the Flying Lion to the small villages surrounding Kin, and then walk around from small town to small town, gathering intel as you go. D: Start heading to Kin on foot, stopping by at every village to ask for her whereabouts within the gambling community
You walk around Lentown hoping to get a lead on Tsunade. It shouldn't be hard to find a kenoichi fitting her description. Especially one with a gambling habit. Legendary sucker huh? Interesting concept you think. Why would anyone actually get into such a position that the populous actually refer to you as not just a sucker, but "the" Legendary Sucker. And why would you keep gambling? Ah well, whatever.
You find that it wasn't hard to get into the underground gambling community in this town. Apparently, it has quite a bit of a gathering of players. Their usuals even include shinobi who are just passing through on missions. You felt a little awkward having to ask around for Tsunade, especially around other shinobi. But you pressed on because as luck would have it, the few shinobi present were almost exclusively genin. They couldn't possibly make you out to be a shinobi, they just aren't on the same level as Jiraiya.
After a day of asking around, you found out only one thing. One guy "thinks" he might have seen her in Kin, but that was a year ago or so. He's not sure apparently, but he was the only one.
It didn't seem too productive to search around Lentown all things considered. But, at least you were able to confirm that she was in fact in Kin a year ago. Hopefully that's the case. Maybe. Yeah... you really hope so. It's your only lead.
You shuffle your feet, almost dragging your heels as you walk. You're not feeling real great about today, but you at least did learn that there were 2 major villages outside of Kin in case you're looking for gambling. They aren't anywhere near as big as Kin, but they serve a purpose. They offer gambling to the people who want to gamble, but can't afford the stakes at Kin.
You make your way to the inn, but take a quick detour to the hospital, just to check in on things. Kakashi is really surprised to see you still in town. You brief him in with all pertinent updates.
There's Fargo on the north side of Kin. It's mostly foreigners or people who busted out at Kin and are hoping to get a little better luck on their way out of the country.
And there's Leslo, to the southeast of Kin. It's mostly people who are trying to make it big so that they can afford Kin's tables, or just local gamblers. But apparently, enough people go to it to make it significant. A lot just to see if they can beat the games there, believing that if they can, then they're ready for Kin itself.
You map out the three possible destinations with Kakashi and estimate the time it would take. Kin is going to take about 14 hours on the back of the Flying Lion.
Leslo is going to take about 17 hours, and Fargo will take about 15 hours.
But that's not including the many villages surrounding Kin, all of which potentially have SOME form of gambling. It just so happens that Lentown has heard of Fargo and Leslo.
"So, any ideas on where to go?" Kakashi asks. "They're all pretty good starts". ------------------------------ A: Stay in Lentown and find out more about what they know about Leslo, Kin, and Fargo B: Go to Leslo C: Go to Kin D: Go to Fargo E: Go to the first of the tiny villages surrounding Kin. You'd be heading northwest.
You, Jiraiya, Itachi, and the kids rush quickly to Fargo. You've got a bad feeling about this whole situation, and it hasn't sat right with you since this entire thing has started.
Something feels... off. Mizuumi will hopefully be reaching Konoha soon, since he doesn't need to take breaks or sleep. And you only hope that Kakashi and Guy will be fine in your absence. However, you maintain faith that team 21 is more than capable of being split up alone.
But that feeling, it's just there. It won't go away.
Then you realize something. You JUST solved the dilemma about this genjutsu. But Madara would have not only come up with the solution for his trap, he has had an unknown amount of time to prevent it from happening... What if Tsunade has already been taken out of the picture?
... No time to think about that now.
On the way, you advise everyone of the gravity of the situation and your sense of foreboding. Jiraiya says nothing, Itachi merely looks at Sasuke. Naruto just assures you that there's no threat in this world that can beat us.
You land on the outside of Fargo, after what seemed like forever. Your adrenaline is rushing through your body, motivating you to go. The team is rested up, as per your advice. You all take to the streets and make your way to the taverns of Fargo. It's not long before you find a small game of dice. It's going on in public as if it was perfectly legal, and no one gives a damn either.
You work your con job and start the story with the locals. They give you plenty of information about the towns neighboring Kin. Apparently, they're all numbered accordingly to their wealth. The only towns that stick out amongst them are Fargo and Leslo. The numbered villages start from the wealthiest, Town 1, all the way to dirt poor, Town 18.
The people around here are pretty proud of themselves that they live in Fargo, a place distinguished and held separately from the almost blinding light that Kin shows. They talk openly about the illegal activities that happen almost nonstop. Even children are allowed to gamble. Well, you suppose the crime could be more serious.
The cover story was solid. You managed to talk your way into the trust of the locals after a couple of hours of playing the dice, and losing. They blatantly insult Tsunade, whom they only recognize as the Legendary Sucker.
Except this Sucker's hitting it big.
"Yeah well," you continue. "Her name's Tsunade. Let's just say she bamboob-zled me pretty good".
You smile as you look at Jiraiya. He's not happy.
"Tsunade huh?" the local answers. "Well, doesn't matter. She left here... oh... don't know. Bout 8 months or so ago? She took a lot of money with her too".
"Wait a minute," Jiraiya interrupts. "What do you mean she took a lot of money with her? She won at the games?"
The local looks up at Jiraiya's towering physique, he's more than a little intimidated.
"Yeah, she used to lose all the time. Hell, I travel around a lot, usually to 2 and 4. She was a regular on the entire circuit. Lot's of fellas would offer her drinks. Pretty dame after all. But she started winning like crazy, it was bogus! We thought she was cheating for sure. But it didn't matter how many times we switched the dice, the decks, dealers, the balls. Nothin'. She kept winning, and the money kept pouring".
Jiraiya gasps almost in terror. You're put a little off by this.
"Worst part about this whole thing," he continues. "She didn't even seem happy. She even bought a bunch of us drinks. We don't forget things like that, no sir, not here".
"Where did she go?" Jiraiya demands as he leans down to get closer to the man.
"Hey listen mister, if that's your wife or something, no one knew here. We just saw a pretty girl that's all".
"WHERE. DID. SHE. GO?" Jiraiya echoes. The entire establishment is now silent and still, watching the events at your table. You place a hand on Jiraiya's shoulder.
"I'd imagine Kin. Wouldn't you go there if you couldn't lose?" the local answers.
Jiraiya turns to you without saying a word. You apologize to the local and poney up some money. You really should stock up on funds, you're about broke...Jiraiya storms out of the bar, Itachi looks at you and then chases after Jiraiya, the kids follow. You apologize to the entire place for all the ruckus and say that your friend has had a lot to drink and he's just really worried about collecting this debt before rushing outside.
"If she's on a winning streak, that's a bad omen," Jiraiya explains. "She never wins. You don't get a name like the Legendary Sucker for being an ace player. You get it for losing. We used to know things were really going south if she won a game or two. If she can't stop winning. We might be too late already".
"Kin's nearby, we can make it there within 2 hours or less," you reply. "We'll find her, and there's still some light left".
"Yeah," Jiraiya answers. "We've lost enough time, let's get moving".
You mount up on the Flying Lion and take flight. You push your golem to it's limit and blaze your way towards Kin. As you get off, a kunai flies by your face. Itachi parries it with his own just in time to reject its flight path. Jiraiya jumps off your golem. You tell the kids to stay put as you get off. Itachi follows beside you before he stands in front of you. He activates his Sharingan.
"This man, is not a man," Itachi says as he examines the dusk sun.
You don't see anything. Jiraiya is squinting as he looks at the horizon.
"Surely you don't choose to fight the Toad Sage of Mount Myōboku?" Jiraiya yells, he's obviously upset. "Show yourself! You're outnumbered, and outclassed".
"Such petulance..." you hear a deep, raspy voice from the distance. "No, you're right. It's not my place to fight you..."
"Ah my child," you know this voice. "And my dear friend, Jiraiya-chan. What a reunion. And Itachi AND Sasuke. With the 9 tails? Why didn't you just gift wrap them for us Mighty Toad Sage?"
From the distance walks a tall, slender figure. You recognize him immediately. It's Orochimaru. He's wearing a long robe with red cloud patterns all over it.
"This is how you repay Sarutobi-sensei's mercy on you?!" Jiraiya screams. "By disgracing his teachings?!"
"Hmpfh," Orochimaru replies. "You're late you know? Did you really think I would let you gain any type of advantage? We merely watched you hit every obstacle head on. It was entertaining. And then boring. Painfully dull. We let you live because you weren't a threat. But now, this is as far as you go".
A hulking figure drags his way slowly to the side of Orochimaru. He looks wider than he is tall, and covers most of his face with a torn mask.
"Let's not drag this out... Orochimaru..." the man says in an impatient voice. Well, at least now you know who that voice belonged to.
"Tsk, tsk, Sasori," Orochimaru answers. "Business before pleasure? Hmmm... Never the case with me. So Jiraiya, have you been teaching my son well?"
Jiraiya balls his fists tightly.
"You bastard..." he says fiercely. "Have you touched Tsunade?! I'll KILL you! I SWEAR IT! I shouldn't have let you go! I should have ended you!"
"But you didn't," Orochimaru replies with a sadistic smile on his face. "And now, look at you. You brought the Leaf down far faster than I ever could. You brought Itachi, whom I will be using for... fun. And the 9 tails. You were always SO considerate Jiraiya-chan. But what should we get you for being so helpful? You practically are walking around with a giant sign on your backs with "Please do with us as you please" on it. And the old man? Is he still alive and kicking?"
You analyze the surroundings. You're on the outskirts of Kin it seems. The fight will be well over before any authority gets here. You can feel the killing intent emanating from the man known as Sasori. And Sasuke... Naruto. This isn't a good first fight for them. Jiraiya's head isn't on straight either. Things aren't looking good.
"Brother, please send the golem away," Itachi pleads. "If they get Sasuke, I'll never forgive myself. And they seem to want Naruto. He shouldn't have to hear such things".
Orochimaru sighs almost scoffing.
"Itachi, my prize," he says. "You will be my new body. The master of the Sharingan! I am practically tingling with excitement. Can you feel it Jiraiya-chan? Hmmmm, hehe, surely you can".
"Orochimaru..." Jiraiya threatens. ------------------ This is BEYOND a Clutch Moment A: Let Orochimaru and Jiraiya keep talking. You know Oro to be very chatty. Send the golem away with the kids. B: Try to provoke Orochimaru and get his attention C: Try to negotiate with Orochimaru D: Interrupt their chat, it's time for a fight. Let loose a Lightning Lion E: Appeal to their pride. Ask for separate fights
You slide your hand into your back satchel and hang Jiraiya a syringe casually. Orochimaru notices it immediately and smiles as he looks at you.
"Awww, your blood? How sweet my child, my son," Orochimaru says with a false sense of sincerity. "You are your father's son after all. You are just like me, aren't you 21?"
"I'm nothing like you," you answer menacingly. You feel a sneer form on the left side of your lips. "Jiraiya, I know you want him, but you should fight Sasori. Let me handle Orochimaru, or should I say 'father'?"
You stare at Orochimaru and try to walk to the side to exchange sides with Jiraiya but Itachi holds you in place.
"Oh? Itachi? Are you in protest?" Orochimaru asks softly. "21, you ARE just like me. Think about it. You're using your blood to heal your friends. They accept it too, as if it wasn't a forbidden jutsu. You're all hypocrites. You mark me a traitor, a monster? But in reality, I'm just enlightened and on a different level of enlightenment. Your first aid kit, is a direct result of MY work. You using it and condemning me at the same time? Laughable. You're just like your father 21, you will use whatever you can to survive. Whatever advantage you can use, you use. Just like me".
Jiraiya looks down at the syringe. He seems to hesitate. Orochimaru laughs lowly, almost as if he is purring in content.
"It's not true," Itachi replies coldly. "The means do matter. But we have different means and different ends".
"I'm surprised Itachi-chan," Orochimaru informs. "I figured you would be a bit more shaken. Aren't you frustrated that the soke of the Uchiha can't use your genjutsu? It won't work child. I'm already in a genjutsu".
Jiraiya's body jolts.
"What?!" he screams. "Orochimaru, how can you allow yourself to do this?! How can you allow Madara to rise to power?!"
Orochimaru continues to chuckle to himself, as if he is the only one in the room who gets the joke. Sasori hasn't moved an inch.
"Jiraiya-chan, as I said, 21 and I will use whatever we can to rise to power," Orochimaru informs. "In Madara's world, I can be Hokage. I can learn everything I want without having to hide like some sort of field mouse. I'll admit, the end game has changed, but I'm fine with my small piece of land and the ability to learn whatever I want. It's a big world after all old friend, there's enough to go around. To hell with this world. Besides Jiraiya-chan... what has this world done to you? It's taken Tsunade's life away, it's taken YOUR life away. Don't you think it's time that all stops?"
"Orochimaru... you talk too much," speaks the raspy voice under the hat and masked in a torn cloth. "Let's finish them and clean up what's left".
Orochimaru looks at Sasori with a lick of his lips.
"Before that... you should let them know of your work Sasori..." Orochimaru suggests.
You listen closely, in Orochimaru's arrogance, will he continue to brag and destroy his strategic advantages?
"Perhaps that is for the best," Sasori accepts. "I think it will make to speed up this stupidity... We know about your blood whelp. No one shall be healing today. And if you get scratched today".
"You will die," Orochimaru interrupts Sasori with a sense of triumph. Sasori turns his head to Orochimaru and grunts. "We will allow you to come willingly. If you do, I promise you will all live. Maybe even the 9 tails can live. But we'll at least guarantee the lives of the rest of your party, 21".
"Accept it," Sasori says impatiently. "It's a one time offer. We have dragged this spectacle long enough. It's a good deal".
You smirk and begin your handseals. Orochimaru watches with a large grin on his face, he doesn't even flinch. L pops up next to you with an expression of shock on his face. It appears he knows the situation.
"Wait," Itachi begins softly. "You'll let Sasuke go?"
Jiraiya turns to Itachi in surprise, the wind appears to have been taken from his sails.
Orochimaru chuckles once more.
"That's right, and I speak directly for Madara," Orochimaru states calmly. "Sasori and I are the only ones who know the truth behind Madara, at least for now. The others will be informed... eventually".
"You can't even be considering this," Jiraiya protests. "We can't trust him, he's a snake. And we don't even know Madara".
L moves towards the Flying Lion and mounts it, holding the kids closely.
"We can take him little brother," you advise Itachi. "We can do this. Jiraiya will fight Sasori, and he'll wreck him in no time. Then we can find Tsunade and go home".
Everyone watches closely, waiting with baited breath for Itachi to respond.
"You told me everything I wanted to know already Orochimaru," Itachi replies with a ferocious lack of emotion in his voice. "I have no further use for you. I didn't even have to ask for it, you gave it willingly".
For the first time in the entire encounter, Orochimaru is visibly shaken and angered.
"What?!" Orochimaru exclaims.
"You answered all my questions," Itachi explains. "You can't ensure Naruto's safety. Madara's plan focuses on Naruto. And from that, I gathered that it must have something to do with the kyubbi, just like the other tailed beasts in Konoha. From there... well, I put two and two together, and I have a pretty good idea of what Madara has planned. To that, I can only comment that you're a fool. You'll be a Hokage alright, in your mind. Madara's genjutsu will cover the world, and he won't spare you. Sasori is right Orochimaru. You talk too much".
Orochimaru sneers and charges at you both. Jiraiya jumps towards Sasori and begins to engage him in taijutsu in an effort to move the fight away from you and the children, as planned.
Itachi continues to hold onto you. L shakes his head at you and smiles before taking the Flying Lion up. At the last minute, Itachi drops his grab and jumps towards Orochimaru. You flip backwards and unleash a barrage of kunai and shuriken from your chest pockets with both hands. They fly under Itachi and towards Orochimaru with deadly precision. They hit their mark soundly, and you hear Orochimaru complain.
Itachi is on top of Orochimaru as he lies on the floor. You look at Jiraiya fighting Sasori. He uses an unknown jutsu involving his hair. It's pretty amazing, a sweeping attack that acts as a sword and shield, providing both offense and a great amount of defense.
"You poor pathetic fool," Itachi states calmly. "You were already under MY genjutsu".
Orochimaru tries to wriggle from Itachi's grasp, but it proves futile.
"Behold, my Giga Eye," Itachi warns gravely. "But this was all a test, wasn't it? Madara didn't count on my Giga Eye jutsu did he? He wouldn't know about the positive aspects of the Sharingan because all he knows of is hate. Very well. Then drown. Drown in Madara's hate Orochimaru".
Orochimaru screams in pain before he stiffens up like a board on the ground. Itachi looks at you and screams.
"Brother! Sasori is the real threat!" he informs. "The poison is lethal, no one can touch it! We got to finish him before Madara comes! I could sense his presence inside Orochimaru".
You look at Sasori before running towards Itachi. Sasori seems unfazed.
"I believe this is a terrible matchup for all of us involved," Sasori screams as he releases a barrage of throwing weapons at all of you.
You just saw extra limbs come from inside Sasori. What the hell? You flip to the side to avoid the sheet of death and witness Jiraiya and Itachi dodge them as well. But this can't continue, you'll eventually get cut. Someone will. Jiraiya sweeps across the battlefield with another attack. Sasori jumps back deftly and avoids the attack, almost immediately.
"Little help!" Jiraiya calls. ----------------------- A: Cast a Fire Lion Explosion on Sasori B: Summon Scout Bugs to wrap Sasori up and bind him C: False Ash Cloud technique D: Activate Raisoku to help facilitate your dodging
Sasori's the real threat. It's just like Itachi said. He was the threat all along.
But now, and perhaps even worse, you know Madara's on the way. This isn't good.
Itachi throws several kunai with exploding tags on them, Sasori blocks them with ease and rolls to his side to avoid the explosion. How can someone with such girth move so easily?
"Golem Style: Scout Bugs!" you say low as you make the necessary seals.
The earth itself animates itself around you and comes to life in the form of several bugs. They're rigged to explode, and they're going to take Sasori out. You command the dozen bugs to rush Sasori, bind him, and explode when he hits the ground. For the first time ever, you notice Sasori open his eyes widely as he notices a swarm of inanimate insects rushing him. He chuckles shortly and looks at you and then at Jiraiya.
Then you notice it, a giant tail, similar to a scorpion's stinger, comes out from behind Sasori and sweeps against Jiraiya and slams into him, hard.
"This man, is not a man" Itachi said to you earlier. Just what the hell IS Sasori?
Sasori's tail directs Jiraiya towards your swarm. Crap.
"Do you think your mere impersonation of a puppet style is enough to face the Scorpion of the Red Sand?" you hear Sasori exclaim. "Let me show you true puppet mastery! I'll use your own puppets against you! Or should I call them golems?!"
You find yourself vying for control over the insect swarm. The swarm is confused and you feel yourself losing control of their actions. ----------------------- Clutch Moment A: Explode the Scout Bugs before they reach Jiraiya completely B: Erect an Earth Wall between Jiraiya and the swarm C: Try dispelling the jutsu. At this point, the golems are alive, so just releasing control would just hand them over to Sasori. D: Golem substitute every scout bug out of there, and then explode them. *This is within your ability with your current chakra, but will disable you for the rest of the fight you think* Free Will
Feeling your golem insect swarm beginning to fade into Sasori's control, you detonate the swarm before they get any closer. Jiraiya was rolling towards the swarm but got pushed back from the force of the explosion. He lies on the ground for a bit before moving.
"Fire Style: Fire Lion Explosion!"
Your chakra takes the form of a lion with an inferno for a mane and charges at Sasori, hoping to provide cover for Jiraiya.
"Itachi, cover Jiraiya!" you yell.
Itachi jumps towards Itachi and lands in front of him.
"Fire Style: Great Fireball Jutsu!" Itachi screams as he breathes out a large ball of fire as well. He picks up Jiraiya and jumps back towards your side.
Both your attack and Itachi's attack nail Sasori from opposite sides. Sasori doesn't let out any cries of pain, he merely grunts seemingly in frustration.
The robe that he was wearing however, is falling towards the ground as it breaks apart. Revealing Sasori to actually be a puppet. Your suspicions confirmed, Sasori is indeed hiding inside a puppet. But the puppet seems undamaged, just stained with a bit of an ash color.
"Impressive," Sasori's raspy voice taunts. "You've discovered my secret. However, nothing can destroy my Hiruko puppet. Your efforts are in vain. Still impressive however".
"L," you yell. "Get Orochimaru!"
Sasori let's loose another barrage of throwing weapons, this time, even more fierce than before. Itachi jumps with Jiraiya out of the way. You use your chakra to jump into the air and avoid the blanket of death coming your way.
Sasori takes this opportunity to charge at you, his tail swinging wildly in a broad, sweeping motion, preventing anyone from getting close to him. He manages to make it over to Orochimaru and tries to stab at the Flying Lion with his tail.
"21, the children!" Itachi yells.
Crap you think to yourself. The fact that this poison is being hailed as extremely lethal has really changed the layout of this fight. However, Sasori's actions have indeed proven that Madara is interested in capturing the children, or Naruto at least. Sasori doesn't really seem to be trying to protect Orochimaru at all. He just seems to be trying to use the opportunity to get L to drop his guard so that he could use the opportunity to snag control of the Flying Lion.
"Is that another golem up there?" Sasori taunts. "I wonder if I could pull it down from the sky. What do you think would happen if I did that?"
Jiraiya is out of the fight. You see Itachi lay him down and stand in front of him in a defensive stance. You also notice that Itachi is looking at you with suspense as he fears for Sasuke's safety.
The Flying Lion is starting to stumble in the air, you try your best to maintain the balance of your flying golem. If they fall, best case scenario would leave them with some serious, life threatening injuries. -------------------------- Clutch Moment A: Order the Flying Lion to descend B: Yell at L to grab the kids and jump down. Have L break their fall. It's very risky but at least it won't involve a power struggle with Sasori C: Use Golem Substitution. This'll put the kids on the ground, but you free falling from way up there D: Attack Sasori with Fissure and hope that he's too distracted to avoid the attack E: Modify one of the above options
The Flying Lion is teetering dangerously in the air. Sasori is definitely an extremely dangerous man. You feel as if the golem will crash down at any minute. You consider your options carefully. Naruto could make a ton of shadow clones and they could jump for it, but that's way too impractical, and besides, they'd land right next to Sasori. Only one option then...
"Golem Style! Golem Substitution!" You make your seals and vanish with a cloud of smoke. You hear Sasori exclaim from under you, he looks like a tiny ant from way up here. Hmmm... You notice Itachi secures the kids off of the Flying Lion and by the looks of it he has them guarding Jiraiya. It's hard to tell from way up here, but you think that Jiraiya is starting to keel over. And if your vision isn't failing you... you think he's foaming at the mouth.
Sasori laughs as you plummet fast towards the earth.
"What now, hero?" you hear his raspy voice bellow.
You grip the sides of your pocket and make yourself more streamlined for faster velocity. You feel the multitude of ninja tools at your sides. You could create a golem you think... with an extreme mass. And then shove it down his throat. Or you could try regrouping with Itachi and switch places with the Flying Lion once more.
Itachi fires another Grand Fireball at Sasori to distract him, but you notice that the damage is little, if any at all.
"Brother!" Itachi screams inside your mind. This must be another quality of the Giga Eye. "If I have to, I can use that jutsu! But, I could hit you! You'd need to act as bait..."
As you freefall for what seems forever, you decide on your next move. -------------------------- A: Summon a golem from all of your ninja tools, change its mass, and make it huge and smash Sasori once and for all. B: Golem Substitute back and regroup with Itachi C: Option A, but instead cover yourself as you did with Mizuumi and try to pierce Sasori's vitals. This'll be hard, as you suspect Sasori is a man wearing a puppet. D: Option A but instead use Toxicity on the golem and try to drop it on Sasori E: Order Itachi to use Amaterasu, and to forget about your well-being
"I better make this count," you whisper to yourself as you prepare to expel the last remaining shreds of chakra from your being. "Golem Style: Golem Creation!"
You rip open the seals on all of your ninja weapons and make the appropriate handseals. A brutal killing machine emerges from the stockpile of weapons and expresses confusion as it notices it's falling through the air.
"Not done yet," you say weakly. "Golem Style! Mass Change..."
You increase the golem to gargantuan proportions. By your quick calculations and steady head even during this chaos, you approximate the golem's weight at being at least a ton.
You grip the golem as firmly as you can, which is rather weak. You feel your vision getting blurry. You think you hear Itachi yelling something at you, but you can't really make it out. You know for sure that this is it, all or nothing.
The extremely heavy golem crashes into Sasori's body and you see shards and splinters everywhere as you get bumped off of the golem and thrown to the floor. You yell in pain as you feel a couple of your ribs break and pierce your side.
Itachi rushes to your side and drags you backwards towards the children. You're way too dizzy to move on your own right now, and Jiraiya is barely able to maintain a grasp on the emergency syringe you prepared for him.
You wince as you see the wounds on your side slowly close around your bones. ****. The bones are outside your skin, and your body has begun repairing itself already. You're not going to be able to walk write until you break your ribs again and force them together again. The pain is excruciating.
"I've told you about these risks!" Itachi scolds you. "Was it worth it?"
"Yes, tell me, was it worth it?" you hear an unfamiliar voice call out to you. "So much violence, so much destruction... Is it necessary?"
You bite your lip so hard you feel your lips being pierced by your own teeth. Blood runs down the side of your mouth as you force yourself to stand.
A man with red hair stands before you. He's young and has almost a flawless face. No scars, no wrinkles, nothing. Yet, he's definitely a shinobi.
"Enough Sasori," you hear yet another unfamiliar voice. "I think both sides have suffered enough losses today. Wouldn't you agree 21?"
The man walks into view and places his hand on the redheaded man's shoulder. He wears an odd, orange mask with only one eyehole on the side.
"You know me, but I haven't introduced myself properly," the man continues. "I am Uchiha Madara. Do you realize how much hard work Sasori placed on his Hiruko puppet? For you to smash it so brutishly?"
You consider for a moment all the witty retorts you could reply. You could say, just take it, it's still brand new. Or, "really? it didn't seem to be worth much at all". But you're in a lot of pain.
"Do me a favor," you reply. "Sasori, take Hiruko and shove it right up your ****ing ass".
You feign bravado, but you're about to pass out. The chakra loss was massive, and your ribs are in constant pain.
Madara chuckles softly.
"I've seen enough," Madara admits. "What should we do here? Should we have a duel? Itachi and I? Or should we go our own separate ways? I'm not a fool, I could take what I want by force. You're severely outnumbered 21. But I won't have to..."
He laughs once more.
"Itachi and Sasuke will be mine one day. And they'll come to me of their own volition," Madara promises.
You weigh in all the factors as best as you can. Itachi is the only seasoned fighter that can fight right now. There are so many variables to work with....
"You propose we negotiate?" you say mockingly. "Your men just kicked our asses. Why would you negotiate?"
"I have my reasons," he admits. "Besides, I'm growing more and more interested in you. At first, you were an added bonus. But now... it seems that you're going to be much more central to my plan than I originally intended. You seem to be a man of honor. I give you my word that if you won't attack us while we gather ourselves, we won't attack you in turn".
"And Tsunade?" Jiraiya asks boldly.
"She has been approached," Madara admits coolly. "She has time to think about my offer. Nothing has been done to the Slug Princess. Or, you can allow me to duel with Itachi... His Giga Eye intrigues me. But if I beat Itachi, I want Itachi and Sasuke to come with me".
"And if I win?" Itachi shouts.
"Then you can end my life here and now. Rid the world of the blight you think I impose," Madara answers coyly. "But I warn you, I'm the savior of this world. It's last glistening hope".
Itachi seems to be happy with the prospect of being able to end this here and now.
"And Naruto?" you ask, your head throbbing.
"Naruto... we can wait for him," Madara confesses. "I like the way you have been training him. And leaving Kakashi and Guy with the Third? Very smart. You really should be on my team 21".
You spit blood in his direction.
"I think I'll pass," you admit.
"What about my offer?" Madara asks. ----------------- Turning Point + Clutch Moment A: Take your wounded and get the **** out of here B: Itachi, if you want to duel, you can C: Advise Madara that you need a moment D: Whisper to Itachi to give him a surprise attack
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:06:23 GMT
"Very well," you answer with an almost silent grunt. "Take your wounded, and get the **** out of here. I imagine this won't be the last I see of you".
Madara nods his head and motions for Sasori to do something.
Sasori looks at you and smiles.
"I think I'll have to improve upon my designs for any future engagements 21," Sasori warns you. "Next time, Jiraiya won't be the only one to die".
Sasori removes a scroll from his garment and reverse summons what you think were the shattered remains of the Hiruko puppet.
A man wearing the same kind of robe as the rest of them comes carrying Orochimaru. His face is half white and half black. Where has he been this entire time?
"Madara... what do you want me to do with Orochimaru?" the strange man asks.
"Hmmmm," Madara thinks aloud. "Make sure to take him along Zetsu. We'll break him out of this genjutsu, and then I can learn even more about Itachi and his Giga Eye".
You eye Madara as calmly as you can. Your blood is pumping vigorously up and through your brain. You wonder many things, and consider asking them, but you also worry about giving away your current weakness.
"Also, if it's not too much trouble," you say sarcastically. "Get that ****ing statue out of the Leaf. We're going in there to bust it up, and I bet that might hurt your 'plans'. Wouldn't want that would you?"
Madara eyes you thoroughly before saying anything.
"Rest assured 21," Madara replies in a matter of fact tone. "I was already planning on doing that. I wouldn't necessarily consider this a victory if I were you 21. You've given me only information, and the rest can be rebuilt. And shall be rebuilt. And when I do rebuild the minor setbacks you've provided, you'll regret this. We shall return only more powerful than before. But I suppose you knew that already, didn't you? Ah... the burden of genius. Try to get some sleep. And for grace's sake, cover your ribs, you look like a monster".
He laughs deeply at you and places his hands on the backs of Zetsu and Sasori. And then, they merely vanish, as if they walked into a different world.
"Space time jutsu," Itachi says as he clinches his teeth. "He must really be an Uchiha... And what do you think are his motives? Why would he just let us go?"
You hear Itachi, but can't take it anymore. You fall face forward and exhale with both frustration and agony. You happen to see Jiraiya and Sasuke and Naruto. Naruto is crying quietly. But Sasuke... Sasuke is merely breathing ferociously.
"Brother!" Itachi calls to you and you feel him place his hand on your back.
"How is... Jiraiya?" you ask weakly.
"He needs help, and so do you," Itachi states calmly. "You were healing, but now you've stopped. This is unusual, and a huge problem. Jiraiya is in intense pain, he's going to die if we don't do something. Your blood is merely staving off the poison it seems".
You turn your head and think.
You've hurt yourself worse than this before and recovered immediately... The only difference this time was that you are completely out of chakra. Perhaps your healing is dependent on your chakra levels?
"Sasuke... look at Sasuke," you say softly.
Itachi nods at you.
"I know..." Itachi states knowingly. "I wish he hadn't seen any of this. But... perhaps it's for the best. His Mangekyo might be awakening. If it does, we shall need to watch over him even more closely".
"That's why," you reply. "That's why... Madara wants you and Sasuke... You two are especially powerful, even amongst the Uchiha standard...And Naruto... he wants the kyuubi..."
"Yet he didn't take it when he had the chance," Itachi replies. "This man has patience. And he has a plan in mind... He is a dangerous opponent. He could have just finished us off now but didn't... I suspect he was telling the truth and has changed his plans. He's probably going to try to recruit us for real. He doesn't seem to be the kind to kid around".
You tell the Flying Lion to listen to Itachi's orders.
"Itachi... the Flying Lion," you reply softly. "I'm blacking out. It'll listen to you, find... Tsunade".
It all goes black. You're alone in this emptiness. But someone pulls you out from it.
"Don't move," you hear a woman's voice instruct you. "You're as stubborn as Jiraiya it would seem. You're lucky to be alive, even if you're partly superhuman".
"Partly superhuman?" as you ask and place your hand on your forehead.
"Yes, Itachi explained everything to me. I am Tsunade," she says. "I also met that Naruto. He's... interesting. You've got quite the team together. But if you don't mind me saying so, you don't have any skills as a medical-nin".
"Tell me about it," you answer in embarrassment. "Madara... he said he offered you something".
You open your eyes. The light stings you badly. But your ribs don't hurt much anymore, you're just very nauseous. You turn to see a beautiful blond haired woman.
She wears an expression of depression and loss.
"Yes well, he did," she answers honestly. "But I'm still thinking about it. Your blood is quite amazing. I was... hemophobic, have been for what seems like forever now. But for some reason, when I heard about your blood, I had to get over it. And I had to save Jiraiya... But from what I hear... It seems you are a walking, talking jutsu. Have you ever heard of Creation Rebirth? "
"No, I haven't," you answer honestly.
"It's considered the peak of medical ninjutsu," she replies. "It heals cells almost instantly, even replacing organs. But your blood, it seems to be constantly generating chakra. You are essentially, always using Creation Rebirth. But to such an advanced level... And that jutsu was created by me, it makes no sense that you possess it. Although I know about your father. This is all very baffling".
She seems muddled. Even though you don't know this woman at all, you can tell that her speech is full of confusion.
"The jutsu shortens one's lifespan," she continues. "But from what I've heard, you don't suffer from that. In fact, I heard that you think you don't age. Is that true?"
You consider your options carefully as you notice Itachi enter the room and smile at you.
"Lady Tsunade, may I speak to my brother for a while? I thought I had lost him," Itachi explains.
Tsunade sighs and nods her head slowly. She seems disappointed. She gets up and begins to walk away.
"He'll be fine, he just needs a little time to rest," Tsunade says as she heads closer to the open door. "I gave him some of my chakra to speed up the process. I had to break his ribs and settle them in the proper place again. I'm surprised he's alive. I'm interested in seeing just how fast his regeneration sets in. Please let me know".
And with that, Tsunade leaves the room.
You smile and extend your hand to Itachi. He walks towards your bedside and pulls up a chair. He grabs your hand and pokes you in the arm.
"I suppose you heard everything?" you ask.
"I did," Itachi answers. "But there's more... Jiraiya is fine now. And he trusts Tsunade implicity. But there is more to this... I was able to use my Giga Eye on her. The proposition? It's complicated. Madara offered Tsunade to revive her betrothed and her younger brother if she did as she was asked".
"What?" you exclaim as quietly as possible. "What did he want her to do?"
"He wanted her to reverse engineer your blood," Itachi replies softly. "Essentially, your blood is her jutsu perfected. She suspects Orochimaru was using her jutsu as a basis for you. She thinks Orochimaru was experimenting on you, even while you were in your mother's womb".
"That's not important right now," you answer. "Is she going to take Madara up on his offer?"
"I don't know, she hasn't made her decision," Itachi answers. "She's particularly fond of Naruto. His spunk reminds her of her young brother. They've spent a lot of time together since we've been here".
"How long have I been here?" you ask in shock.
"Two days," Itachi answers. "She explained to us that your chakra loss is what limited your healing. Your wounds were still fatal. She's seemed fascinated with your bloodline since the moment we found her. Jiraiya has explained the situation, and she seems genuinely concerned. She seems like she's going to help us, but I don't know if we can trust her implicitly like Jiraiya does. Also brother... Sasuke's Mangekyo has in fact awakened. But... I fear Madara might be right".
"What?!" you exclaim in shock.
"Shhh, quiet," Itachi replies. "His Mangekyo awakened due to hatred, not because of a need to protect. He hated Madara... He wanted to kill Madara. Darkness has entered Sasuke's heart. I don't know if I... if we can do anything about it. I fear Madara might have won that battle, he tainted an innocent heart. Who knows what that will lead to?"
You ponder this new information for a moment.
"We will fix this brother," you comfort. "We protect our own. But for now, we have to get Tsunade to heal Sarutobi-sensei and help the Leaf village. Then we can discuss all this with Sarutobi-sensei after everything is back to normal. We'll decide what to do with Tsunade at that point, but we can't let her give information like my bloodline to our enemy. Madara will be unstoppable".
"I took the liberty of handling all that brother," Itachi answers. "I took the Flying Lion. Tsunade healed the Third and the villager. We left the villager some money and told him to return to the Leaf in a week or so, so that we had time to fix things. I brought Kakashi, Guy, Randel and the Third here".
"You've been busy," you state as you examine Itachi's face. He looks exhausted and in desperate need of sleep.
"There's more... still," Itachi responds. "I was able to use the Giga Eye to some degree on Madara. He wasn't lying, he held his side of the bargain to the letter. He even removed the statue".
"Damn..." you reply. "So now we have a village full of people in a coma? Or are they still in a genjutsu?"
"No, they're in a coma, Madara dispelled the genjutsu," Itachi explains. "I've been flying all over the place, checking on things. This was ALL a test 21. He's forced us to HAVE to rely on Tsunade. Madara is forcing us to HAVE to remain close to Tsunade".
"We have to get to the Leaf immediately then," you say urgently as you sit up.
"Yes... but there's one final thing," Itachi states.
"You really need to rest Itachi," you advise. "Not to mention, you've laid nothing but bad news on me, heh. Yet, there's more? We have to rush to the Leaf, we don't have time for this, those people need to be treated before they die from dehydration or starvation".
"Tsunade has a jutsu especially for that, she says," Itachi informs. "And that's the final thing. Madara is putting us into a position where we need Tsunade. She doesn't know that I know all this, or her motivations. But I'm afraid Jiraiya is deeply in love with her. His reputation as a pervert and a womanizer lies from the fact that he couldn't be with what he deems his one true love, Tsunade. If we have to kill Tsunade, we might have to kill Jiraiya too".
"****," you curse in frustration. "So how do we go about preventing her betrayal?"
"She has a lot of loyalty to the Leaf," Itachi answers. "For now, I have only trusted you and Kakashi with this information. No one in the group knows. But should an argument get heated, and a fight erupt, the rest of the team might not understand why we turned violent. It's going to create a lot of discord. The Third is resting from the ordeal. But I can get Kakashi in here if you want to talk about it with him". ---------------------- Turning Point Do you confide in Jiraiya or anyone else about this dark secret?
How do you go about Tsunade and her possible betrayal? What plans do you wish to make in regards to preventing or perhaps even reacting to Tsunade's betrayal?
Do you trust Tsunade to go to the Leaf and heal the village? That could place her in a position that secures her as a hero, and will make the village loathe you for hurting her.
Do you allow Tsunade to reverse engineer your blood? Perhaps even confront her about it?
You look at Itachi and exhale deeply.
"Jiraiya is a good person," you begin. "He should get what he wants. He barely knows us, yet he almost got himself killed. Just to protect us".
"He fought recklessly," Itachi corrects you. "I expected much more from a member of the legendary Sannin. I fear his emotions have clouded his judgment".
You crack your neck and slap yourself on the back of the head to shake the cobwebs.
"Your Giga Eye tell you that?" you ask honestly.
"I can feel it," Itachi responds without much change in his tone. "He's getting anxious, reckless. His intentions are noble, but he feels a lot of confusion right now. He thinks he failed Orochimaru, they were best friends. He also feels like he failed the Leaf. Now, we didn't take out some powerful enemies. It's only natural that he feels even more disappointment. We got ourselves washed up. We looked like genin out there".
"Hey now," you protest. "Technically, I might be a genin, or maybe even an academy student".
Itachi sighs and sits down next to you.
"This is serious 21," he states, his entire demeanor changing. "The group performed much worse than I expected. You were reckless, and you could have died. What would that have accomplished?"
You shake your head knowingly.
"I know," you answer. "I'm learning more and more each day. I'm just trying to get stronger. I'm tired of relying on others. And this whole mess about Jiraiya, it really pisses me off. But in realistic terms, there was seriously no way to avoid this mess. What could we have done differently? When the fight started, how were we to know that our enemy was THAT strong? We need intel, they know everything about us, and we know nothing about them. We can never be in that kind of situation again".
Itachi nods his head in agreement.
"For now, I want a meeting," you instruct. "I'll work on the rest later. This piss poor performance won't fly. But for now... for now, I want to speak to Sarutobi-sensei and Jiraiya about this problem with Tsunade".
"Are you sure that's wise?"
"Got a better idea?" you ask as you tilt your head to the side. "If you do, I'm all ears".
Itachi looks at you for a moment then shakes his head and smirks. "I'll set it up".
"Good," you reply. "Second, we're going to monitor my healing for a bit. I feel some chakra in me. Hand me a knife please".
Itachi whips his hand in one smooth, swift motion and places a knife near your hand, handle out. You grab it and slice your knuckle. It heals up immediately.
"Back in business," you answer. "Still hurts like a b**** though. Let's get the blood capsules going around. Usual setup, one emergency syringe, several capsules, several vials, you know the layout. I know you did a lot while I was out of it, but did you manage to see if Tsunade happened to do anything shifty? Maybe take some notes on my blood? Was she working with any type of poisons at all?"
Itachi scratches his nose and then rubs his eyes. He really looks tired.
"No, I watched her closely," he answers. "She knows I'm paranoid, but so far she just suspects it's because of our family ties. She doesn't know much about my jutsu. The Giga Eye is unheard of in the Uchiha clan, so even a shinobi of her caliber would have no idea about what I'm capable of. I was constantly surveying her thoughts. She really hasn't decided on anything yet. That's why I waited patiently, until now".
You run your hand through your hair and look around the room.
"You mentioned that Naruto reminded her of her little brother?" you continue. "I hate to say this, but we're going to have to exploit that. Besides, you know how feisty Naruto is. And let's face it, the kid is downright lovable. Let's give him a 'mission' to protect Tsunade from Madara. Tell him it's important, and that Tsunade is going to be a hero to the Leaf, and that if he protects her, he's immediately a hero by association. How's that sound?"
"It'll do," Itachi says with a slight yawn. "I hate to use Naruto too, but it's better than the alternative. What about Sasuke?"
"I immediately thought about Kakashi," you state. "Kakashi was close to someone, very close. And he lost that someone".
"Obito?"
"Yeah," you answer. "I think for now, Kakashi should mentor Sasuke. He looks at you and I as family. Well, he looks at all of us like family, but he still sees Kakashi as an authority figure. And besides, Kakashi can approach him on a different level. Sasuke should be able to understand that Kakashi knows what he went through. And Itachi, it's not like I went anywhere. I'm still here, Sasuke hasn't lost me yet".
"Because you're lucky," he retorts.
"True, but I'd rather be lucky than good," you admit. "Besides, I think you were right. Madara didn't just let us go out of the kindness of his heart. He's planning something, and it's important to him that we play our part, whatever that may be. So for now, I need you to rest up. Before you do, set up that meeting, it's urgent. I'll handle the rest. Oh, and before you go. I'm going to need a bingo book, see if Guy can handle that while Jiraiya, Kakashi, Sarutobi-sensei and I are talking. I want to know who Sasori and crew have associated with. That's it bro. Just rest, you've done so much already".
Itachi nods and heads out of the room. You look around for a shirt, you recognize yours and slam it against the wall a couple times to clean off the dirt. You were out for two days and no one could bother to wash your clothes? Lazy bastards...
You walk out of the room, looking for Tsunade. You find her talking with Sarutobi-sensei and Jiraiya. Jiraiya seems to be in better spirits.
"Tsunade, could I speak to you for a moment?" you ask.
She walks over to you and places her hand on your shoulder and then your neck.
"My... your ability really is incredible," she says almost in awe.
"I was hoping you could do something for me," you say as you hand her a paper. "I took the liberty of writing down the names of crucial people in Konoha that need to be revived with priority. These are mostly other medics that can provide aid and help you as needed. Some others are just key to our safety and government. I'm sure you'll understand why I chose them as you read them. And also, I know we've imposed a lot on you already, but could you please make us soldier pills? We REALLY need them, especially now that I know my limitations".
"As your doctor, I'd say I'm happy to hear that you admit you have limitations," she replies. "As a fellow shinobi, I would challenge you to eliminate all limitations you place on yourself. I'll get this done for you, when are we leaving? The villagers will be needing our help immediately".
"When can you leave?" you ask. You're a little blindsided by this question.
"I can leave right now, that Lion thing of yours can take me right?"
"Let me talk with Sarutobi-sensei and then we'll get a better plan," you respond.
"21," Itachi says as he comes up on you both. "Guy is on it, he should be getting you that book, if there's one to be found that is. The rest is up to you".
You nod and smile.
"Thanks little brother," you reply. "Now seriously, go to bed. I think Tsunade and Naruto might be heading to the Hidden Leaf tonight, if all goes well. But you, you need your rest".
Itachi bows and departs once more.
"Good little brother you have there," Tsunade says with a sad expression.
"He's the best," you answer as a thought enters your mind. "You know, I don't know if they told you my story completely... But I actually have no family, other then maybe Orochimaru. But, Itachi and I became brothers, even after I had everything taken from me, including my memories, and my mother, and whatever else I could have had. One day, I wish to make this world peaceful for him. For Sasuke, Naruto. So that no one will ever have to fight again".
"You sound like Jiraiya," she responds somberly. Her tone sends a sad shiver down your spine.
"You've felt loss? It's like I can... feel your loss. Are you a kindred spirit? Have you also lost loved ones?" you ask, placing the most innocent and sincere expression you can on your face.
Tsunade looks at you and then turns away.
"It's best not to look at the past," she says in excuse. "If you look behind you, you can't see what's coming from right in front of you".
"You're right," you admit with a breath. "I'm just really worried you know. I got the trust and fate of so many people riding on my shoulders. I can't let anyone down you know? I failed the Leaf, and I failed the team. We could have all died. But you saved us Tsunade. Thank you, for that I am truly thankful. I don't know if I could ever make it up to you".
"Stop it already," Tsunade says shortly. "I did what any Leaf ninja should do".
"Well nonetheless, thanks," you say with a courteous bow. "If you'll excuse me, I have a lot of information to debrief".
You walk towards Jiraiya and the Third and they walk towards another room without saying a word. Kakashi sees you and follows you into the room, closing the door behind you.
"Gentlemen, please take a seat," you ask. "There's a lot to explain. And not a lot of time to act on the information".
You explain everything as gingerly as you can, minding Jiraiya's feelings. You delineate all the possible outcomes you foresee and all your concerns. Kakashi, knowing the information already, only studies the expressions and reactions of Jiraiya and Sarutobi. Jiraiya is shocked that Tsunade would even consider such a proposal. Sarutobi merely sighs and lowers his eyes, almost disappointed, but still, he remains silent.
"I told you all this Jiraiya because I want you to know I know how you feel about Tsunade," you confess. "I know you care for her deeply, it's easy to see that. But if she betrays us, what will you do?"
"I will kill her myself if that happens," Jiraiya answers without hesitation. "But please, let me be the one to do it".
"You haven't failed Tsunade," you reply. "She's just feeling guilt and loss, it's normal. And you didn't fail Orochimaru either. He failed the Leaf. It's time you stop with the guilt, you don't deserve it. It's time I stop with the guilt, it's not getting anyone anywhere".
An awkward silence floods the room.
"And now she wants to go to the Leaf?" Sarutobi asks patiently.
"Yeah, she is going to go, she's our only hope in that regard," you answer. "I'm still considering who to send with her. I'd like to send her immediately, with Guy, Randel, and Naruto. I'd say let's all go but Itachi needs a break, especially if Madara is waiting to ambush us".
"I doubt that he is," Kakashi states. "Why would he?"
"I agree, but it's still a possibility," you state. "It wouldn't make sense to let us go, just to ambush us in two days. But it could still happen, and that's what I want to avoid".
"Then I suppose you're faced with another choice," Sarutobi informs you. "You have to decide whether or not to go to the Leaf and rest there, all of you, or whether you want to separate again. You're obviously strongest when together. If you're going to trust Tsunade all alone in Konoha because you choose to chase down your foes, that's another path to walk. I however, will be watching her extremely closely. It's obvious someone within the Leaf is sabotaging us".
"That's another concern I had sensei," you reply immediately. "Someone opened the door for Madara. I'm not sure whether we should divide the group up, or first root out the traitors. If we all work together towards rebuilding the Leaf, the Leaf will be restored faster, and then we can all work on finding the traitor or traitors. If we do that, then we can chase down these jerks with no more worries. But that also means their trail will grow colder, and we'll have to start from scratch in tracking them down".
"I have faith in your decisions 21," Sarutobi-sensei states as he rises from his seat. "Just please let me know, whatever you decide". ---------------------- HUGE Turning Point
1- Do you allow Tsunade to go right now on the Flying Lion to the Leaf? The trip will take quite a while regardless, and the villagers have been in a coma for an unknown amount of time. They might be dying already.
2- Do you choose to separate the teams? Have one team go with Tsunade, the other track down the Akatsuki members who assaulted you?
3- Do you instead choose to go to the village and help in the rebuilding efforts and then try to figure out who the spies are? Leaving with Tsunade right now?
4-If you do send Tsunade now to the Leaf, and you are separating the teams, who is going with her?
You inform the team of your plan. You're all going back to Konoha and regrouping. Hopefully to find the traitors behind all this. You're going to stay behind for a couple of days for Itachi to rest, and the rest of the team will go with Tsunade immediately to the Hidden Leaf.
You filled Naruto as to how important it was for him to protect Tsunade. He's excited and up for the task. The group heading to the Leaf shoves off and makes their way to the village. You watched Itachi closely as he rested that first night. He was pretty torn up after all that. But he definitely got the job done.
After taking a nap yourself, you check on Mizuumi and have confirmation they made it there. They really soared their way there in a hurry, the trip last around 10 hours only. You ordered the Flying Lion to return back.
After another day of rest, you and Itachi go and start your journey back to Konoha. It's a quiet trip, and Itachi actually got some sleep on the way, he really seems worn out.
Upon your return to the Leaf, you make your way to the Hokage's mansion. Surprisingly, everyone is up and about and getting on with their lives. They cheer for you as you walk by. You're really surprised that Tsunade worked that fast. Well, she got it done.
"Oh, you're home child," Sarutobi-sensei says as you walk in. "It's great to have you home. Let me fill you in on what we were able to make out".
Kakashi walks in and makes his way behind the Third. He waves to you and laughs.
"Going over the plan Sarutobi-sama?" Kakashi asks.
Sarutobi-sensei nods and motions for Kakashi to take over. He leans back in his chair and listens intently.
"We've narrowed it down to a couple sections of Konoha," Kakashi states. "Only certain people had access to that tunnel. The ANBU members that protect him, however unlikely that is, they still remain top suspects. There's also the Interrogation Corps. They come and go as they please using that tunnel every once in a while when they have prisoners. The Medical Corps are the ones that maintain it. And of course the Jonin Council itself, who know of it's existence for security reasons".
"Where should you begin?" Sarutobi-sensei asks. ----------------------- A: ANBU, let's make sure our top security is actually secure B: The Interrogation Corps would have all the means to hide their secret C: If the Medical Corps maintain it, they had to have noticed something D: The Jonin Council? Maybe Danzo supporters looking for revenge?
"Why do the medical-nin maintain it?" you ask trying to get some insight.
"They traditionally, always have," Sarutobi-sensei answers. "There's also a storehouse down there that houses emergency medical supplies and surplus supplies as well. Whenever they run out of something, they go down there and restock and leave an order invoice with one of my staff to order more of whatever they just restocked on. It happens almost daily, it's a normal function".
"Is that so?" you reply in surprise. "That sounds like a good start to me. Haven't found motive yet, but they have the capacity to do it".
"I agree 21," Kakashi states cautiously. "You want company?"
"Can't really spare the manpower now can I?" you answer honestly. "I hate doing this, because I'm almost certain that it has to be more than one traitor, but for now, I'll have to go alone. Itachi is resting and trying out the exercise I told him. Randel and Guy are watching over Tsunade and Naruto. And you know that your tutoring of Sasuke has to continue".
"What exercise are you conducting on Itachi?" Kakashi asks.
"The Mangekyo Sharingan eventually rubs the user's eye raw. On the way over here, I made note of it. Itachi was really tired, and I thought his swollen eyes were a result of no sleep," you begin to explain. "But it was actually the use of his Mangekyo that were wearing out his eyes. To my surprise, Itachi knew this. He said that eventually, he would go blind. I conducted a series of tests during the flight, nothing overly scientific or advanced, it was impromptu after all. But I noted his eye's reaction to dust, pressure, and exertion from the Sharingan techniques. I then concluded that perhaps my blood's healing properties could help, after all, it aided Sarutobi-sensei's arthritis. I concocted a lubricant for his eyes made out of my blood, saline solution, codeine, and some pain killers I got from the hospital. They should do the trick".
"And Lady Tsunade said you weren't a medical-nin," Kakashi says with a slight chuckle.
"I suppose I'm not," you admit. "<ib>yet.</ib> For right now, I can make due with being a scientist. Besides Kakashi, you might end up taking this before Itachi does, you're not an Uchiha, the strain on your eye is probably worse than his".
Kakashi looks at you and places his hand on his neck and closes his eye.
"So I wasn't imagining things then? There actually was something going on with my Sharingan?"
"Unfortunately it wasn't your imagination," you reply. "But like I said, if this works, we'll be all set. So for now, try to limit Sasuke to not using his Mangekyo, and explain to him why. If this doesn't work, we're going to need to come up with something else, I refuse to let you all go blind".
"But still," Kakashi protests once more. "An investigation by yourself? Not exactly the wisest choice".
"For right now, it's going to have to do," you answer firmly. "I plan on just doing some light detective work. If I go in there with a group, everyone is going to notice, especially with the fact that we're the talk of the town. Besides, important tasks could be dealt with in the mean time. If this ends up being a total waste of time, then I'll be wasting only my time, whereas you all would have continued working on things we need. If I get into crap, I'm sure everyone will hear about it when the explosions sound off".
You laugh shortly and look at Sarutobi-sensei to see if there's anything else.
"I agree with 21," Sarutobi-sensei affirms. "I don't like him going off by himself, but the last thing we need is another witch hunt like the Danzo affair. If we send in a fully equipped team, it will raise chaos. Even 21's presence alone might be enough to disrupt the investigation. Will you be needing anything from me?"
"Perhaps the Aburame, Yamanaka, and Inuzuka clans will be needed," you add. "When I get more information, I'm going to have to find some way to track this guy down. At that point, we bring in one or three of those clans and they help us hunt the traitors down like a dog. I'm going to need a list of the medics working under you that have access to that storehouse and tunnel. I know it's going to be a huge list, but I still need it. And also sensei, do I have your full authority here? Do I go in there and only report what I see? Or if something goes down, you want me to bring the guys in? In regards to the Danzo affair"-
"I know where you're going with this 21," Sarutobi-sensei cuts you off. "And I agree. If you arrest the traitors and bring them in, they will also need a trial. That's too much of a risk at this point. Unfortunately, we will have to tell the villagers that this was an after affect of Danzo's plans. We'll explain that this was planned by him in case he fell. That should be enough to quell any revolt or protest. If you find the culprit, capture him if you can, if not, kill him. But discretion is a necessity".
Kakashi looks at you before patting you on the shoulder and exiting the room. You bow respectfully and excuse yourself. You have the green light to kill the traitor if necessary, but you really want to capture the people responsible and make them talk. You meet up with Mizuumi outside the Hokage mansion and look over the list that attendants handed you on the way out. There are over 40 people on that list, it's going to be a long search if you don't narrow it down.
You conclude that the traitor wouldn't have been affected by the genjutsu, therefore, would be much healthier looking than the rest of the village. Of course, if any of the suspects were on missions at the time, that would explain their healthier appearance. However, after reading the list, it seems that the medical staff was understaffed to begin with, no one was allowed to go on missions. That's a break in the case. If anyone has a healthy appearance on that staff, they will be hard pressed to find an excuse.
You and Mizuumi head over to the headquarters of the medical-nin and find that the specific division you're looking for has it's own branch at the hospital itself. You ask around in the guise of needing certain meds in large quantities, and suggested that someone help you look in the storehouse.
You find a very useful medical ninja named Tsuki. She guides you down to the storehouse and is quite forthcoming with information. She's actually really good looking you think, but you don't want to get sidetracked. But that's something you're definitely going to keep in mind for later.
"So, Tsuki, this whole Danzo thing, it's really making all of you busy huh?" you ask her as you continue towards the hidden tunnel.
"Yeah, it's been pretty bad," she says trying to maintain a cheerful disposition. "But we all try to keep going. Some are better off than others. Ukyo is still bedridden and has to be waited on. But then you have people like Kabuto-san. There just aren't many like Kabuto-san".
You notice that she's acting all aflutter at the mention of this guy's name. Ah well, there goes that thought. Women only get in the way of the mission anyway. But wait a second...
You think back to the list as best you can in your memory. You don't want to look at the list and provide suspicion, but there definitely was a Kabuto on that list now that you think of it.
"Kabuto huh?" you say coyly. "Is Kabuto your boyfriend?"
"No, nothing like that," she answers shyly. "I really just admire him. He's a little younger than me, but I have always loved the intelligent type. But he doesn't really see me that way..."
"Sorry to hear that," you say dismissively as you two continue down the corridor. You try to remember the last name on that list as best you can, but Tsuki is being pretty chatty as far as Kabuto is concerned. You can't seem to pull the last name from memory.
Wait a second... "Yakushi Kabuto, you mean?" You ask in a curious manner. Her face lights up at the mere mention of his name. "What makes him so special?"
She chuckles a little before answering.
"Only everything. He's so helpful and intelligent. Really polite too. He's one of the few that's been able to work the double shifts without a problem".
"He's able to work double shifts? Isn't he exhausted?"
"Yeah, but luckily for him, the disaster didn't affect him like it did most. He wasn't suffering from malnutrition, just a bit of weight loss. I told you he was something else".
"Yeah, he's something else I bet," you reply softly. Just a little bit of weight loss? No malnutrition? This guy is hiding something. -------------------------- A: Thank Tsuki for her time and let her know that you just forgot something important at the mansion. Go back to the Hokage and ask for a full file on Kabuto B: Ask Tsuki to arrange for a meeting with Kabuto as you have a friend that has some issues you'd like to have him check on C: Continue on with Tsuki to the storehouse as if nothing happened. Gather the materials you said you needed and pretend to go back to the mansion. Instead stake out the storehouse hidden inside of Mizuumi and wait to see or hear anything D: Same as option C, but go back to the hospital and ask around to see who has worked with Kabuto to see if you can get him pointed out and then slam him into an interrogation room when the opportunity presents itself
"You know what Tsuki, I can't believe I wasted your time," you start. You scramble through your pockets and grab the list of medical-nin you were given. You pretend it's the list of items you need. "But I just realized that I completely left out the most important part of the order. The honorable Third gave me two slips, and I forgot the second part. He'll kill me! Can you please take me there later? I can meet you back at the hospital, I'm sorry, this is so embarrassing!"
You chuckle as if nervous, hoping she'll buy it. You narrow your eyes and smirk, placing your hand on the back of your head. Tsuki laughs at and waves you off.
"Hey, trust me, we all have bosses. And we all are human! I mean, who hasn't made a mistake? Don't worry 21, you've got some pull around here! I know you got a lot on your mind too, and besides you did just save the village, how can I be mad at you?"
"Thanks Tsuki, you're the best," you reply feinting shyness. "I'll see you later at the hospital ok?" You won't, but it sounds good.
She smiles and starts heading back to the hospital. You on the other hand, run to the mansion in hopes of making your story seem real. Mizuumi tells you inside your mind that you were really believable. Well, if it faked out a golem with low intelligence, it should have fooled a medic right? Yeah... not a good argument, but you feel confident in your performance nonetheless.
After making it to the mansion, you rush to find the Third sitting, smoking a long pipe. He looks at you with a sort of surprised expression.
"Why the rush 21?" he asks.
"Kakashi," you say, panting. "Where is he?"
"He's on the roof," Sarutobi-sensei reports. "Did you sprint all the way here?"
"Yeah," you answer. Your healing ability makes you almost impossible to fatigue, but as long as the Hokage has all the attendants around, you don't feel comfortable letting that information out. Especially since you don't know who the spies all are just yet. "I need the full file on a medical-nin by the name of Yakushi Kabuto. If you could have it in my room please? Thank you, honorable Third".
Sarutobi-sensei immediately understands and nods his head silently. You bow and rush up to the roof. You hear a high pitched shrieking noise. It's almost painful to your ears.
"Chidori! One Thousand Birds!" That's Sasuke's voice. The noise stops after a burst and a thud.
You turn the corner and manage to see Kakashi moving Sasuke around, placing him in a better stance.
"Much better Sasuke," Kakashi says as he begins to pull on Sasuke's arm. "But you might want to balance yourself more like this. You're leaving yourself a little off balance, and telegraphing your technique. Any enemy you run into that's on our level now will see it coming. You have to work on it, alright?"
"Nice move Sasuke," you comment with a small clap. "I better start practicing my moves. I can't be outdone by BOTH of my little brothers!"
Sasuke turns to you and starts smiling. He looks at Kakashi, subtly asking for permission. Kakashi nods with a chuckle. Sasuke runs to you and gives you a hug.
"You better start practicing for real 21," Sasuke says. "It's going to become embarrassing to be seen with you!"
"Ouch," you say acting as if he wounded your chest. "You really know how to hurt a guy. Besides, I like to resolve my problems without combat if necessary. I find most of life's problems can be solved that way. Fighting isn't always the answer, and it should always be seen as a last resort".
"I know, I know," Sasuke replies begrudgingly.
"I could still whip YOUR ass any day though," you say with a playful push. You look at Kakashi with a knowing stare for a brief moment. Kakashi gets the hint.
"Sasuke, I want you to practice that a couple more times, then work on your breathing exercises," Kakashi states. "If I'm not back after an hour, take the rest of the day off. You've earned it".
Sasuke cheers and jumps into the air. He runs back to his former position, and tries to copy the stance that Kakashi was emphasizing. Kakashi follows you down off of the roof. You take Kakashi to your quarters. The file you asked for is waiting on your nightstand. You place it on the table and open it to examine it with Kakashi.
"Yakushi Kabuto eh?" Kakashi comments as he skims through the file as well. "It says here he's pretty much an underachiever. Is he our guy?"
"Most likely," you answer. "This guy has been working double shifts, one of the only in his unit. He wasn't suffering from malnutrition, and he only lost a few pounds due to this genjutsu incident. Sound suspicious enough for you?"
"Sounds like you hit the jackpot," he replies without much enthusiasm. "But why would he still be here? And what would Madara allow such an obvious weak link to stand out like this? No doubt Madara knows what we're capable of. I can't believe he would expect us to not find this out. Is this bait?"
You exhale deeply and take a seat. You offer one to Kakashi but he prefers to stand.
"Well, that's just the thing," you begin as you place one leg up on the table. "It doesn't make sense. Chances are, this Kabuto guy, is a huge player too. Think about everything we've heard about Madara. Danzo himself referred to him as some sort of master puppeteer, never getting his own hands dirty. Yet how powerful does someone have to be to have people like Sasori and Orochimaru falling in line?"
"Yeah, I read what you gave me," Kakashi adds. "Seems Sasori was a real menace to the Hidden Sand. They want his head for some reason. I also saw that my father... killed his parents".
"Sorry about that Kakashi," you say as you take your foot off the table. "It is another motive for him to hate us. But Sasori was definitely powerful enough to destroy us back there, yet he didn't. All because of Madara's whim? I doubt it, Madara isn't such a nice guy. I think Kabuto is a trap".
"For what goal?"
"That's the trouble," you explain. "He could have had Itachi, Sasuke, Naruto and me on a platter. Yet he didn't. He let us go, even took the statue away. Itachi thinks it's a test, and I agree with him. But why would Madara be testing us? He's only giving us a chance to grow stronger. Why the hell would he allow that? The ONLY thing I can think of, is Naruto".
"Naruto?" Kakashi asks curiously. "He obviously has plans for the tailed beast. You think he's letting Naruto grow stronger? For what, better control over the tailed beast? That wouldn't suit his purposes though".
"Yeah, you're right," you reply frustrated. "But it's the only thing I got. I also think he's afraid of Itachi's Giga Eye. This guy has been around a LONG time, yet Itachi has something never seen before. If I was around for as long as Madara has been, and just NOW found out something new that the Sharingan can do, I'd definitely be intrigued. Wouldn't you?"
Kakashi nods as he continues to read the file.
"Alright, so what is the worst case scenario?" he asks.
"Worst case scenario?" you pause a moment. "I meet up with Kabuto, it's a trap sprung by Madara's faction, they beat my ass and kidnap me. But it wouldn't make sense, he could have done that last week. Wait a second... Could he be finishing what he started with Danzo?"
"I don't follow".
"Think about it. The Danzo scandal nearly destroyed the village. As it is right now, the Third is covering this up. He's saying that Danzo was responsible for this. If we catch a traitor, the Third is made to look like a liar. We obviously could kill him, but then people would wonder where the hell this Kabuto guy went. If Kabuto is a heavy hitter, I approach him, he starts a fight, makes a scene. People are obviously going to see it. Now, the Third is a liar, and all the sudden WE'RE the bad guys. The village starts another civil war because it can't trust the government. And this time, WE have to take the fall".
"And that means we have to leave the village," Kakashi continues on what you're thinking. "We leave the village, that makes us vulnerable and destroys the village Madara hates. It sounds plausible to me 21. I'd recommend getting Itachi's input on this, and of course run it by the Lord Hokage. This does leave us in an interesting position though. It means Kabuto knows that we know he's the spy. It also means, we really can't do anything about it, can we?"
"No, we can't," you insist. "But Sarutobi-sensei can. He could deploy Kabuto's squad on a mission, then we nab him when the opportunity presents itself".
"I really don't like that plan," Kakashi says with a shake of his head. "It doesn't account for the Third being held accountable if we fail. And if his squad sees us, they're going to inform the people. Obviously, we can't just kill his squad in that case either. Not to mention, it would have to be one whopper of a crisis to deploy a full medical squad".
He's right, so what do we do here?
"Hey, let's check up on Itachi. Maybe Sarutobi-sensei can come with us and we can all talk this out," you suggest.
Kakashi agrees and the two of you head towards the Hokage. After a short explanation, the Third follows you to Itachi's home, where he's resting. Even Fugaku seemed courteous with the Third, something that seriously surprised you.
When you finally made it to Itachi, you got some good news for once. Your eye drop solution worked, and Itachi's eyes were healed as if the Mangekyo had never been used. You informed Itachi and Kakashi of this, and that you would be mass producing the medicine for future applications.
Now with both Itachi and Sarutobi-sensei present, you and Kakashi outline the entire situation, with all the possible pitfalls you discussed and what your thoughts on the matter were. Itachi takes a look at the file and sighs before giving his opinion.
"Not to sound like I'm the only pessimist in the group, but Kabuto shouldn't be the only concern we have," Itachi points out. "We still have Tsunade to deal with. Hows that been going along? What if Madara only kept Kabuto here because of the fact that Tsunade is still trying to decide what she wants to do? There's too many coincidences here. Kabuto just happens to stay while Tsunade just happens to arrive? They're both medical-nin. And if Kabuto is our spy, and everything points to him being the spy, then that also means that they're both powerful shinobi. Too many things in common if you ask me".
"Interesting points Itachi," Sarutobi-sensei comments as he scratches his chin. "I have been watching over Tsunade and Naruto personally. If I know my former student, I'd say she's completely accepted Naruto. They have a nice relationship blossoming. I don't think she is going to accept Madara's offer, but nonetheless, Jiraiya is still observing her on a 24 hour basis. He said he wouldn't report anything unless something came up. He's waiting for us to call him off before he stops his surveillance".
Kakashi nods and then runs his hand through his hair. You look at Itachi as he continues to read the file. No one, including you has anything to say. You're all facing a block.
"Well, I think Itachi's right," you say breaking the silence. "It's too perfect. Everything just falls into place too easily.I'd like to hear some options though. We can't just pretend nothing happened".
"If it's as you say, we can only wait," Sarutobi-sensei states. "It's terrible and I can't believe I'm saying this, but we have to wait until they strike. It risks exposing the cover-up, but we can't have you just killing the man".
"I respectfully disagree Lord Hokage," Kakashi states. "I think we could just arrest him as an accessory to Danzo's plot. No one, save maybe his coworkers will know he even disappeared. And if they find out about that, they might not even care, they might condemn him immediately. That way, we can just interrogate him at our leisure".
"I doubt it will go that smoothly," Itachi refuses calmly. You note a stillness in his voice. Cool and emotionless as ever. "As I advised earlier, Kabuto might just be here for Tsunade. If Tsunade really is progressing as you say Sarutobi-sama, then Kabuto might even be plotting to kill Tsunade. That will definitely destroy any chance at covering this up since Danzo's long gone and would have no reason to want her dead. We should kill Kabuto immediately, while we have the chance. Arresting and then interrogating him will only lead to him having a chance to escape. Possibly even having his friends break him out. If that happens, now we have a full out war in the middle of our village".
"Those are all good points," you admit. "But I think we're just going to have to..." --------------------- A: Go with Kakashi's plan B: Go with Sarutobi-sensei's plan C: Go with Itachi's plan D: Free Will- Make your Fate
"Let's go with Kakashi's plan," you state. "I think it's whats best for us. And he's right, most won't notice Kabuto even disappeared. I think only maybe only close coworkers are going to remember him. I can think of one in particular. But regardless, we have to grab him and find out the game is".
"If that is your decision then, very well my child," Sarutobi-sensei replies. "I will draw up the warrant, and you can execute it immediately. I assume you two will be going?"
"I'd like to go as well," Itachi states as he tries to stand up from bed. You place your hand on his shoulder.
"Don't worry about it," you assure. "I still want to get clean results from the experiment. Stay resting for the rest of the day, stop taking the eye solution. I want to check with you tomorrow and make sure the improvement sticks. For now, all we know is that it brings your eyes back to healthy levels, we need to make sure it stays that way".
Itachi nods knowingly and slides back into bed.
"You good with that Kakashi?" you ask. "Or do you think we should get some more help in executing this warrant?"
"We should be fine, we just have to drop him off at the interrogation corps building anyway," Kakashi answers.
You nod your head and gasp, you had almost forgotten.
"I don't want us to ever fall into this problem again," you note as you remove several communicators from your pocket. "I tuned them up a bit. I made them self reliant and much more durable. I don't want us to ever be out of communication again. Itachi, I'm giving you two, give one to Sasuke when you get the chance. Sarutobi-sensei, I know you're not usually in on the action, but I figure you'd appreciate being in the loop. So here, you take one too, and give one to Jiraiya, Guy, Naruto, and Randel when you see them. If Tsunade ends up being loyal, we can give her one too".
"Very ingenious 21," Sarutobi-sense says with joy. He seems to like them as he admires them in his hand. "I will be dropping lines in on you from time to time, but for the most part, I'll stay out of the way. I have to allow the new generation to take the lead. How far do they work anyway?"
"At least 250 miles," you state. "But I'm also working on improving my Shared Consciousness jutsu. If I can perfect that, we won't need these at all, they'll become our backup communication system".
"Very well," Kakashi says as he places his communicator over his ear. "It's comfortable too. You really outdid yourself this time 21. Shall we get to it?"
"Yeah, sensei, please have Yamanaka Inoichi waiting for the package at the corps' HQ," you reply as you turn your head to look at the Third.
Kakashi and you head back to the hospital wing that houses the unit Kabuto is in. You both immediately spot Kabuto coming into his workspace. You also notice that Tsuki immediately goes towards him and gushes all over Kabuto. Geez... Kakashi and you hang up against the wall making casual conversation as you both continue to subtly spy on Kabuto. After ten minutes or so, Tsuki goes away, and an annoyed Kabuto starts to walk away. Kakashi motions towards him with his head, and you both begin to tail him, following him through the busy hospital.
As you make it towards a part of the hospital that is nowhere near as busy, you and Kakashi decide to take him down. You both rush towards him and knock him out quickly and quietly. You remove a sack from your pocket and place it over Kabuto's head, and bind his hands and feet. You then take Kabuto to the interrogation corps headquarters, and throw him into a room. You secure him firmly to the bench in that room and remove the sack. He's smiling at you, apparently he regained consciousness.
"Is all this necessary 21?" Kabuto taunts at you. "Did you really think we hadn't planned on this? We counted on this. We needed you to do this".
"Why?!" you ask sternly. "Why on earth would Madara leave you behind?! Did you let yourself be captured by us?! You knew we were coming?!"
Kabuto laughs to himself with a proud smile on his face. Kakashi merely stares silently.
"Of course I let you two capture me," Kabuto points out. "I don't appreciate you hitting me so hard Kakashi. I would have gone with you had you let me know. I did know you were coming after all, and I was polite enough not to hide from you. So please, a little more respect? I'm still a human being after all, I deserve that much".
It's as you feared. Kabuto was part of a trap, but to what end? Kabuto sure is a smug bastard. You lean in towards Kakashi's ear, and whisper to please get Yamanaka. Kakashi nods and exits the room. You look back at Kabuto who is still smiling.
"You know who's coming," you state calmly. "So it's just a matter of time. Why don't you start talking, and just tell me what the hell is happening here?"
"Oh, I figure it's too late for you to do anything now," Kabuto says with a sense of mock sorrow. He looks at the clock on the wall. "Wow, it really is late. Have you accounted for all your people lately 21?"
Kabuto bursts into hysterical laughter. You frantically activate your communicator.
"Itachi, you there?!"
"I'm here, what's wrong 21?" Itachi answers.
"Is Sasuke with you?!"
"No, he isn't," he replies with a growing urgency in his voice. "Should I be worried?!"
"I told Sasuke to go home hours ago," Kakashi chimes in over the comm. "Where else could he be?"
"Sensei, are you reading this?" you ask hoping to get an answer from Sarutobi.
"I'm on, I just finished giving the communicators you provided to Naruto, and Jiraiya. I haven't found Guy yet," Sarutobi-sensei informs.
"So Naruto is definitely safe?!" you ask trying to talk over Kabuto's maniacal laughter
"We have him now," Kabuto answered, tears from laughter in his eyes. "Itachi was wanted for the Akatsuki. But you ruined him. Nonetheless, Madara-sama was able to awaken Sasuke's Mangekyo. Now we have a younger Uchiha with potential, who will be much easier to handle and mold. Genius, wasn't it? You can sure lay a plan, but you're nothing compared to Madara-sama".
"Akatsuki?!" you scream. "WHERE IS SASUKE?!"
You punch Kabuto hard in the chest, he coughs up a little blood and looks back at you.
"It'll do you no good, he's gone already," Kabuto says smugly as he sits back up on the bench. "We learned a lot from your blood. Including this".
You look at him in confusion as he disappears in front of you, leaving behind a golem in his place. Kabuto made no handseals, and you couldn't detect him using any chakra. He was summoned and the golem took his place, like a reverse summon. Someone is reverse engineering your jutsus.
The golem stands up and attacks you, it's swing is lethargic to your trained eye. The golem is drenched in what you assume to be poison. You duck and roll backwards.
"You're just a petty imitation," you say angrily. "Let me show you the real thing. Golem Style: SHATTER"
You make the seals and extend your right fist and clench it fiercely. The golem shatters violently, exploding shrapnel everywhere. You flip the table in front of you and shield yourself with it.
Kakashi rushes in with Yamanaka closely behind him.
"What happened?!" Kakashi asks in frustration.
"We got played," you reply as you drop the heavy, steel desk. "Yamanaka-san, can you please have a team pick up the pieces of this golem with extreme caution? I suspect it's coated in poison. Have it dropped off at the Hokage mansion, my quarters please. Kakashi, let's head there immediately. Inform the others to meet us there. Request from the Third to bring his best trackers there. We got to make sure to get Guy on this, we might need him also".
"Sarutobi-sensei? Itachi?" you speak into your communicator. They both acknowledge. "Itachi, make your way to the Hokage mansion immediately. They got Sasuke, that was their plan all along. They just wanted to secure Sasuke after Madara made sure to awaken his Mangekyo. We need to set up a party. Sensei, we need Tsunade to analyze this poison immediately, I think it's new. Someone is reverse engineering my jutsus. I'll fill you all in on the details on the way, but in the mean time, make sure that we try to get Guy. We're going to need him".
You all make your way to the mansion. On the way you explain everything in detail over your comm. By the time you reach the mansion, everyone knows the situation. Guy, Jiraiya, Itachi, Sarutobi-sensei, Naruto, Tsunade, Kakashi, Randel, and members from the Aburame and Inuzuka clans are there.
You have no time. You must rescue Sasuke. But who to take? ------------------------ Form a team to take back Sasuke out of the members mentioned there. Kakashi mentions he can summon his ninja hounds to track down Sasuke, and they know how he smells very well. So the Aburame and Inuzuka aren't exactly mandatory, but it's better to be safe than sorry.
How many teams are you taking?
Who is making up the teams you have created?
Is Tsunade going to stay and analyze the poison, or should she be a medic for one of the teams you are taking in case the poison is even more lethal this time?
Should Naruto stay, just in case this is also meant as a distraction to take him among the ruckus?
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:07:52 GMT
Winning Vote: Team A. 21, Miz, Itachi, Guy, Inuzuka Jonin Team B. Jiraiya, Tsunade, Kakashi, Randel, Aburame
"Golem Style: Scout Bugs!" you cast your jutsu and summon a dozen scout bugs that lack explosive capabilities. You give one to each member of Team 21, as well as Sarutobi-sensei and the Aburame and Inuzuka jonin that are going with you. You provide everyone with communicators, and you give a soldier pill to Itachi, Guy, Jiraiya, Tsunade, Kakashi and Randel, you remain with the rest.
While you explain the plan to everyone in attendance, Kakashi is behind you summoning his ninja hounds. You see him speaking with a small brown, pug like dog. Kakashi hands a garment to the pug and the dog is on it's way, his pack following.
Naruto complains to no end when he finds out that he has to stay with Sarutobi-sensei, but you're adamant in this issue. The Inuzuka clan member identifies himself as Shin as he also requests one of Sasuke's articles of clothing. Itachi hands him the shirt Sasuke usually wears while training, and Shin and his massive dog pick up the scent.
You all wish each other luck and depart, each following your individual trackers' leads. Little by little the scent trails off, until it completely forks in a 45 degree angle.
"21, bad news," Kakashi states over the comm. "Pakkun, one of my hounds, found a peace of Sasuke's clothing. They tore up his shirt and spread it out all over the area. I don't think this is a trap, I think he really is after Sasuke. They littered the area with minor traces of Sasuke's scent, only thing we can do is go in the direction where his scent's strongest".
"Understood," you reply as you raise your hand to your ear. "This is Madara we're talking about here. He counted on us having separated, he knows our number. Keep me posted as much as you can. If I'm right, he's going to be picking at us like a sniper".
"Most likely," Kakashi responds. "You heard the man. Move out! No one takes from the Hidden Leaf".
After about 5 minutes of running at a full sprint, you approach a clearing. There's a man up ahead who wears a white kimono. He has very long, untamed hair, light eyes that have a sort of glossy film over them, and a thing mustache. He looks at you all and bows.
"Gentlemen," he says maintaining his bow. "I am sorry. I'm not doing this because I want to, but you shall go no further".
"I don't have time for this crap!" Itachi screams as he activates his Mangekyo Sharingan. "Amaterasu!!!"
A black flame jets out from his eye and snakes its way towards the man. The man doesn't move, yet Itachi's jutsu passes right through him. You hear Itachi exclaim in outrage, he's losing his cool.
"I see," you hear Guy say from behind you. "Very impressive. You are extremely fast. I doubt anyone was able to keep up with your after image. But you underestimate the Leaf! I saw right through your technique! But how are you capable of maintaining the Gates without actually using chakra?"
"I have trained a very, very long time," the man answers. "I truly am sorry for this. Please understand that we all have family suffering because of Madara. I have to fight you, or else they will suffer".
"A true warrior battles alone!" Guy challenges. "Let my friends pass and I will duel you with honor and a flaming intensity you have never heard of!"
"That's bull**** 21! We don't have time for this, let's take him out right now, quick and fast and move on!" Itachi demands.
You look at Itachi and try to calm him down.
"He's my brother too Itachi," you state peacefully. "The only family I have is you all. Family doesn't stop at blood. This foe is powerful, and Guy knows something we don't".
"I don't care about that, he's on Madara's side, that means he must die," Itachi says coldly.
"I'm sorry young sir," the man says. You feel true empathy emanating from him. You actually think he means it. "I will allow you to continue if you let me fight the warrior in green. After all, I was meant only to detain you, and I have accomplished that".
"Who are you?! Where's Madara taking Sasuke? Why does he want him?" you demand trying as best as you can to get whatever information you can.
"I was made to swear I wouldn't divulge too much information, on penalty of death to my family," the man says as he readies his stance. "My name is Akisame, you may call me by that if you so wish. I'd suggest taking me up on the offer. It's a good one".
"Yes! Akisame! A worthy opponent! Go forth team! Rescue Sasuke!" Guy declares.
"Another problem 21," you hear Kakashi's voice over the comm. "We're about 5 or so miles from your position, at least, and we have a real ringer here. This guy has clearly been experimented on, he's hardly human".
"They're stalling us," you reply. "This was the intention all along. What does Madara need time for? Can you handle the opponent Kakashi?"
"Going to have to leave someone behind," Kakashi answers. "Aburame-san and Jiraiya-sama have volunteered to stay and handle him while we move on. We all knew the risks". ----------------------- A: Sneak attack Akisame while he is speaking to Guy B: Follow Itachi's advice, attack him as a unit C: Allow Guy to fight Akisame one on one and keep moving D: Retreat and send help to Kakashi
Who do you want Kakashi to have fight the enemy? 1- Jiraiya 2- Tsunade 3- Kakashi 4- Aburame 5- Randel 6-Leave the decision to Kakashi
"Very well, Guy, he's all yours," you say with a smile. You then push the button on the comm. "Kakashi, handle it however you see best, we're going to keep moving in this direction. Please make sure to not leave Tsunade alone, we got to protect the medical-nin, and make sure Jiraiya's with her the entire way. After all, we can't separate the Sannin, they've been separated enough".
"Copy that," Kakashi replies.
"Don't worry, I won't leave Tsunade's side," you hear Jiraiya over the comm.
"I suppose we work best as a team anyway," Tsunade adds.
Good, she seems to understand your strategy, even though it's a bluff. Itachi however, is livid.
"This will be GLORIOUS!" Guy says as if victory is already predetermined. "I can tell that you walk the path of a true martial artist Akisame! Let us fight with all the power we have! Let this one be for the history books!"
"Indeed," Akisame says as he cracks his knuckles. "While I don't share your love of fighting, I do believe this will be an interesting contest. After I break the bones in your body, I will make sure to set them correctly. It's the least I can do considering that I'm fighting against my will".
"But don't let that make you hold anything back!" Guy demands. "I will never forgive you for that!"
"Let's go," you say before continuing your sprint.
Itachi reluctantly follows you. Shin continues his tracking.
"Itachi, I had to make a decision, it was a strategic decision I had to make to succeed in the mission," you explain as you step on a tree branch.
"Yeah?" Itachi responds with obvious irritation. "And if he dies? What then? That's another one of our team members gone. You said we were all a family, is it worth sacrificing one family member for another?"
What has gotten into Itachi? He's lost his cool, you can feel his anger, it's actually palpable.
"But it's okay if you sacrifice yourself for Sasuke or Guy or whoever else?" you answer trying to knock some sense into Itachi. "It's fine for YOU to throw your life away for one of us, but we can't do the same for you? We ARE a family little brother. And family means sacrifice. And right now, Madara is using our bond against us".
"Hmmph," Itachi replies before sighing. "You're right... I just haven't managed to master the Giga Eye yet, I can't manage to block out all the negative emotions. There is too much anxiety, fear, revenge and hatred lingering around us. I'm also concerned about Guy".
"Why's that? Guy can definitely handle himself".
"I felt no emotion coming from Akisame," Itachi answers. "He is in a life or death situation, telling the truth about being forced to do this, yet he still felt nothing. That's the greatest trait any warrior can have, whether you're a samurai, a shinobi, or just a street thug. If you can hold back your emotions, and fight with a clear head no matter what, you will make the best possible move you can every single time".
You take a moment to ponder over this. You'd be inclined to agree with Itachi, but you also know that Guy is more than capable, and he knows what he got himself into.
Your thinking is interrupted by blades of wind cutting in front of you. The blades have separated your group, and injured Shin pretty badly. Itachi sucks his teeth as he looks up.
A young man with glowing blue eyes floats down from the sky. He's wearing an elegant suit and a calm expression.
"Can't let you through," the young man says, maintaining his position in midair. "You got past the old man? I'm impressed".
"He's an advanced wind user," Itachi states as he gathers Shin and stands him up against a tree. "You're at an extreme disadvantage 21... I better handle this myself. After I heal Shin".
"Sasuke... is just up ahead," Shin struggles to say. "I'm glad I made it this far... but I don't think I can survive. He cut my leg up pretty bad".
"Give him this, it's my backup emergency syringe. I keep it in case anyone loses there own," you say as you toss him your emergency syringe.
Itachi catches it and injects Shin straight in his chest with it. Shin winces and then sighs in relief. He nods his head and thanks you both.
"So you really do have magical blood," the young man states with a cynical expression. "I could see why that would be useful. But to drag me into this... No idea, not worth my time".
"21, another sitrep," Kakashi cuts in over the comm. "Got a feisty young lady over here. She's wielding some kind of Flame Sword, but it's a spiritual weapon, we can't break it".
"A spiritual flame sword?" you ask. "They pinpointed these ambushes at the precise moments. What is Madara stalling for?"
"Going to have to stay behind," Kakashi replies. "Someone has to stay here, maybe two. Sasuke's up ahead though. We're almost there".
"Your friends ran into her huh? She's a real pain in the ass," the young man states. "She's probably more than enough to handle you and your friends though".
"You know her?" you ask trying to gain more information.
"Yep, you could say that," he responds. "She's the reason I'm in this mess... Madara's got her father. Can we get done here? I'm in a rush".
"What's your name? Can't we talk this out?" you plead.
"No point in giving you a name," he replies. "I just got to do what I was ordered to do, and that'll be it".
You want to stay here and allow Itachi to proceed with Shin as support so that Itachi can save Sasuke himself, but you know you're at an extreme elemental disadvantage. This guy is using techniques you didn't even know existed, so Itachi might be the better option... And there's still Kakashi to worry about.
"Kakashi you need help?" you ask over the comm.
"I might, I'll let you know. You get any info from your guy?" he asks.
"Nothing, he's pretty cold," you answer.
"I got a name from this girl, she's a real chatterbox," Kakashi answers. "She kept ensuring that I knew it, real proud, this one. Ayano she called herself".
"I think Ayano is this guy's girlfriend," you answer.
"Ayano is NOT my girlfriend," the man states now losing his composure. He balls his fists up and you see the air around his fists start to create a vacuum.
"Yeah, she's this guy's girlfriend," you answer no convinced.
"Dude, what is with you?!" the young man screams.
"21, go up ahead, get Sasuke back, Madara probably wants you to face whatever is ahead anyway," Itachi states.
"Yeah, but if that's the case, then we're playing right into his trap aren't we?" you state.
Itachi nods.
"Hate to interrupt your argument," Kakashi interrupts. "But I think your guy might be Yagami Kazuma".
"Let me check on that," you reply briefly. "Hey Kazuma?!"
"What?! Is she talking about me?!" the young man screams.
"Yeah, it's Kazuma," you acknowledge.
"Well, what are we going to do?" Itachi asks anxiously. ----------------- A: Have Itachi and Shin fight Kazuma B: Stay and fight Kazuma, send Itachi up ahead with Shin C: Stay and fight Kazuma with Shin, send Itachi up ahead D: Have Itachi fight Kazuma, go ahead with Shin
Regarding Kakashi: 1: Use Golem Substitution and help them out 2: Trust in Kakashi's selection of who should fight and who should move on 3: Advise Kakashi as to who should stay and fight (Put names with your votes. On Kakashi's team, there are three members left, Kakashi, Tsunade and Jiraiya)
"Itachi, Shin, you handle this, but you make it back alive, alright?" you order as you move on. "I'm moving on. Keep it under control".
Itachi looks at you, wipes the dirt from his brow and nods his head. Shin is still surprised that his leg is whole.
"Yeah, whatever," Kazuma states. "Get out of here. And if you can take out Madara, I'll give you a freaking medal. I can't handle that guy and his threats anymore".
You look at Kazuma curiously and then sprint past him. For some reason, every single person you've run into has been reluctant to fight you. What does Madara have on all these powerful fighters?
You continue running across the tree canopies and turn your attention to your communicator.
"Kakashi, sitrep," you speak into the comm.
"Left the Sannin to fight her," he answers. "How about you? You closing in on the position?"
"As best as I can tell," you reply.
You remain silent until you make it to a clearing that overlooks a steep chasm. There you see Madara standing close to the chasm's edge, an extremely large basket stands in front of him. You see the kanji for "seal" all over the basket. He is accompanied by Kabuto, a female and 3 males you've never seen before.
To your right, Kakashi emerges out of the forest. He gasps as he sees the situation.
"You know, a very interesting idea came to me when I realized how intelligent you were," Madara begins as he places his hand on top of the basket. "There's a fatal flaw to everything, as I'm sure you know. Almost nothing can be perfect. But, it'd be reckless to not strive for perfection. By now, I've concluded that you would have recognized my machinations and limited your losses. But you're still at a disadvantage, and you know this. That must burn you up inside, doesn't it?"
"Is there a point to this lecture?" you cut him off in irritation.
"I imagine there is," he replies. "I'm quite surprised that you hadn't found out yet".
"Found out what?!" you demand.
"21! We need help here now child!" you hear Sarutobi-sensei scream over the comm. A disturbance in the background disrupts the signal for a second. "Sasori and Orochimaru are here! They have Naruto, they're trying to escape. I've been- I've been poisoned".
"The look on your face tells me you just found out," Madara replies. "By the way, 21, meet 3. She's your mother. And through her bloodline, and the small traces of your blood left in your syringes and capsules, I've been able to learn some interesting things about you".
"21, this isn't the time," Kakashi urges. "What are we going to do?!"
"Yes, please decide 21," Madara chuckles. "Either way, no matter what happens, who lives or who dies. I WIN.Here, have fun!"
Madara grabs Kabuto and teleports away, leaving the four shinobi and the basket. ------------------------ A: Teleport Kakashi to Sarutobi-sensei. Have him deal with whatever is going on at the Leaf B: Teleport yourself to Sarutobi-sensei. Have Kakashi deal with the four shinobi to save Sasuke C: Throw a kunai at the basket as you animate it, then use golem substitution, grab the basket and teleport to the Leaf (Leaving Kakashi to fight the four shinobi) D: Same as C, but instead, teleport Kakashi with the basket back to the Leaf
"Kakashi... you ready to go to the Leaf?" you ask softly. "I'm going to engage them while you do your thing in the Leaf. Save them both".
Kakashi nods and raises his headband.
You throw a barrage of shuriken at the shinobi, with one aimed at the floor near the basket.
"Flying Golem God!" you yell out as you substitute yourself for the shuriken you threw clearly near the basket. You emerge near the basket, the shinobi all move out of the way, except for 3. She just stands there, a portion of the metal heap behind her spins in front of her like a whirlwind. You grab and basket, it's heavy, there's definitely something in here.
You teleport back to where the shuriken took your place a mere second ago. Kakashi runs next to you.
"Get Sasuke safe, if there's any such place in Konoha right now," you instruct.
You make the necessary handseals and substitute Kakashi and the basket for the tiny golem you left in Sarutobi-sensei's pocket earlier.
"I'm here, and I got the package," you hear Kakashi say over the comm. "The Third's still up, we're dealing with Sasori and Orochimaru right now".
"Keep me posted," you say, never taking your eyes off the three shinobi in front of you.
Three? Where did the fourth go?
Your question is answered immediately as your face gets smashed in with a heavy knee from the air. You try your best to roll with the blow as much as you can to avoid damage. Mizuumi is dealing with two of the shinobi now. 3 is merely looking at you, the whirlwind of metal still going in front of her. So that's mom huh? You're not that impressed. But you do wonder what she's like...
"You're the lucky one, 21," the shinobi who just needed you says. "We're all experiments here. But as you can see, you're the only one that managed to survive without any help from Madara. You're the only one that was able to resist his control. You gotta die. You ruined our lives!"
"I didn't ruin anything! I merely lived!" you say as you backflip and throw two kunai at the shinobi. They fly wide and land on either side of him.
"My life is garbage because of scum like you?! You can't even land a simple shot from such close range?! Die you punk bastard!"
"Lightning Style: Lightning Shuriken," you call out as you send a surge of chakra directed at the kunai on the floor.
The shinobi looks at you in confusion as the lightning arcs between the two kunai like points in a circuit. The shinobi doubles over in pain as his body completes the circuit.
"I don't want to fight any of you!" you exclaim. "Madara is using all of you! He's using me right now too! This is all one sick game!"
"Yeah, no ****," the shinobi replies. "But we don't have a choice! Now, feel my powers!"
You blink a little as you notice his body start to flicker like a lightning rod, it's almost blinding. He extends his hands and shoots lightning at you. You try to jump to the side, but he catches your leg. You feel your leg scream in protest as pain pours over it.
"Meet your senior," he says. "I'm 8, and anything you can do, I can improve on and send it right back to you".
"I got to tell you," you say with a chuckle. "For an 8 year old, you sure look like an old punk ***** to me".
8 looks at you menacingly.
You get up from your knees and crack your neck as you meet his gaze.
"I'd bow, but you seem like the type who'd cut my head off," you state. "You have a useful ability, but at the end of the day, you're just a parasite who can't do anything for himself".
8 is really riled up. He wears an obvious vendetta for you all across his expression. He runs at you with a lightning encased fist. 3 has still not engaged you or Mizuumi, she merely watches and studies you and Mizuumi with lifeless eyes and a blank expression.
You animate two kunai and throw it to a tree near the beginning of the clearing, the other at the cliffside of the steep chasm. It's a long way down you think as ready yourself for the attack, holding another kunai in your hand. 8 seems to absorb ninjutsu and redirects it back at an exponential rate. How do you want to handle this guy? ----------------------------------- A: Plasma Bolt 8 B: Send this kunai into 8's chest, and then use Flying Golem God to throw his ass off the cliff and into the chasm C: Flashburst 8 to get a better position and coordinate a strategy D: Fissure 8
"Let's see you redirect this," you state as you charge up your attack, animating the kunai in your hand and letting it loose into 8's chest.
8 grunts, showing slight discomfort.
"This? Of course I can't redirect this! But you intend to cut me to death with a butter knife?" 8 asks mockingly.
Good to know... You make your seals before 8 can even think to pull the knife out of his chest. You teleport near him, 8 is shocked. You grab the kunai in his chest to maintain it's position and use golem substitution again, this time, directing him into the chasm. You both free fall down into the chasm. You smile at 8 as he curses you in his last moments.
"Nah, I actually wanted you to try to redirect falling damage," you cry out as you throw the kunai you ripped out of 8's chest back into the battlefield and use golem substitution again.
You're now in the battlefield, you're feeling well, but you know your chakra is at about 40% right now. The teleporting of Kakashi and the basket really did a number on your chakra, you'll need to work on it if you want to continue using this type of fighting, but it seems effective enough to be worth it.
You notice the two shinobi have encased Mizuumi in an earth wall prison up to his head, and are now banging on his head like a drum. Mizuumi really is taking a beating, you'll also need to repair him after this you note. Between that, adapting Shared Consciousness to work on your team, and making Flying Golem God more effective, you've got a full plate.
3 is still whirling that metal debris in front of her, only observing you. The two experiments that were beating on Mizuumi turn to you. You ask Mizuumi if he's alright, he says he's fine. He only suffered superficial damage, he just didn't have a way to get out of the earth prison.
The two male shinobi come walking towards you now, one even peers over the cliff.
"Yeah, he's dead," he says before placing his attention back at you. "Never really liked him".
"Then it works out for everyone," you reply. "What's your story? You want to kill me too? I killed your puppy? Stole your girlfriend? What's the sob story?"
"Don't really have one," he answers. "I'm 15, he's 16. We basically were prototypes of what you turned out to be. They just couldn't get it right I guess. If it were left up to me, we wouldn't have to fight. But we have these little things inside our necks ya see? They make us really obedient mutts. And you? You're the pick of the litter I guess. The big, bad, disobedient dog that needs a spanking. But you can't really give such a massive beast a spanking now can ya? Not if ya be wanting ya hand back that is".
You nod as you ready more kunai. You consider taking a soldier pill, but you're not quite sure if this is the moment to do so... Then again, the moment might not present itself later.
"I could help you," you state. "8 was an idiot, but you don't have to be. I can remove whatever's inside your neck".
"Can't do that neither, yeah?" 15 answers. "See 3 over there? Well, let's just say, she's got a nasty disposition ya? She'll carve us all a new one if she doesn't see us playing nice like. Sorry 21, really. Wish it didn't have to be like this".
"Yeah, same here," you answer.
16 launches an earth missile at you that pounds you straight on your chest. The blow floors you completely, knocking you back easily four or five feet. You feel your heart beating vigorously as you sit up. Your shirts been ripped and is hanging to one side. 15 and 16 gasp as they see the wound in your chest close before their eyes.
"There's really no point in fighting me guys," you answer honestly. "This will happen every single time".
16 looks anxiously at 3 and then at 15.
"Maybe he's right?" 16 asks nervously. "I mean come on, he's the only one that got that gift and survived. What's the point in beating a dead horse that can just come right back to life? Then he's a zombie horse, and I'm really sure that beating a zombie horse is worse than beating a dead horse!"
Both you and 15 look at 16 oddly.
"He's a bit touched in the head ya see?" 15 explains. "The process isn't exactly pleasant ya? It's leaves ya bit of a mess. Being bred just for this, sad life. Be doing me a favor if ya just kill me, I think. If he doesn't do it, 3 or Madara will, get me 16?"
16 nods eagerly, his disposition changed. ----------------------------- A: Launch a False Ash Cloud B: Cast a Lightning Lion C: Fissure the both of them D: Try once more to appeal to their sense of survival E: Free Will- Make your Fate
You look at 15 and 16. You put your hands up and try to get their attention.
"Think about this a minute 15," you insist. "3 is really powerful right? Well, can she regenerate like I do?"
15 looks at you suspiciously and then shakes his head.
"She can't regenerate, and she is still under Madara's control," you emphasize. "Doesn't sound very powerful to me, well in comparison to me I mean".
"What ya getting at?" 15 asks, clearly dumbfounded.
"If you are afraid of her," you continue. "Then you should be terrified of me. I'm the one that got away from Madara. I'm the one that does what he wants. I'm the one Madara has done this whole elaborate plot for. ME, not HER! I can floor her anytime I want. And guess what? Madara isn't here, but I AM! And I'm promising you, that if you give me a chance, I'll remove that thing from your necks, and you can do whatever you want with your lives. You'll be free from your yoke, and you'll be men, not dogs. We AREN'T DOGS. We are HUMAN. Do you want to live as such, or die here and now for a cause you don't even believe in? I'm giving you the opportunity to live a free life, like I live".
You stand ready for combat, but extend your hand in friendship nonetheless.
15 looks at 16, who appears to be whimpering, and then at 3.
"Ya right, we be dead any a ways," 15 replies. "But what about her? What do we do bout her? She's gunna kick our asses but good".
"I'll handle her, you just leave her to me," you answer confidently as you look at 3.
She returns the stare, but you feel no emotion emanating from her. She has really been desensitized you believe. This isn't the way a mother should look at her child... Yet, you don't hate her. You pity her.
"One second, let me check in on things," you inform 15 as you maintain your sight on 3. You talk into your comm. "Kakashi, what's it looking like over there?"
"Got Naruto," Kakashi answers briefly. "We're all fighting Sasori. Orochimaru bailed out soon as I got here. The Third's at his limit. Could use some help".
You look at 3 once more in frustration. Right now, she embodies all the negativity that is Madara. And you boil with rage at that thought.
"Can you beat him?" you ask.
"That's not the problem," Kakashi answers. You hear people screaming in the background. "The village's getting wrecked. Third's pushing himself too hard, and Naruto is about to lose it. I think we're looking at an all out warzone if we don't get this resolved".
"My guy just left," you hear Itachi state calmly. "I didn't get to finish him, Shin got hurt pretty bad".
"We're all fine here," Jiraiya informs jovially. "That little girl wasn't bad after all. We gave her a spanking. She's all tied up now".
"Randel? Guy? Check in," you command.
"Guy here, 21," you hear Guy gasping for breath. "Akisame and I had a fight for the ages! And we both emerged victorious! We both held nothing back and have nothing but pride left in our performance".
"Okay..." you reply. "So you're alive and well? Did he make it?"
"Yes he did!" Guy answers almost proudly. "He's quite the warrior. We're both spent. We can't fight anymore. We promised each other a rematch though. He told me about what's going on in his village. Kazuma lives in the village where Akisame lives. Madara's shut it down, and plucks its citizens like a cad".
"That's great guys," Kakashi says sarcastically. "Can we PLEASE get some backup?! Naruto has gone two tails!"
You look at 3 with a sneer. Randel still hasn't checked in... Naruto is running amok in the village. You promised 15 and 16 freedom and a better life. Sarutobi-sensei is likely dying... Jiraiya and Tsunade have a prisoner. A show of force will likely make Sasori retreat... But you'll blow the chance to finish 3. All this and you still don't know where Sasuke is.
You don't know what to do... You think it over as you take a soldier pill. Your chakra is fully restored. -------------------- Clutch Moment A: Forget 3, teleport 15, 16, and yourself back to the village and try to stop the damage B: Ask 15 and 16 to help out in the village while you fight 3 C: Forget 3, teleport 15 and 16 to the village. Then teleport to every single member of your team and then teleport them to the village (this will likely leave you with almost no chakra) D: Free Will- Make your Fate
"Itachi, give Shin a blood capsule and head over here," you instruct over the comm. I'm sending you some backup right now Kakashi. Jiraiya, Tsunade, you think you got another fight left in you?"
"Absolutely, just pick us up," Jiraiya answers.
"Shin was about to die 21, a blood capsule wouldn't have cut it," Itachi informs you. "I had to use the syringe. As it is, he won't be able to fight, he barely survived".
"Well just bring him near enough to be able to see us. I'm going to need your help in fighting 3".
"Understood," you hear Itachi say. He seems a bit shocked with your orders.
You ask 15 and 16 to lower the earth prison, to allow Mizuumi to escape. 16 does so, and Mizuumi walks over to you. You inform Mizuumi to find Guy and then report to you when he does. He heads off into the forest. 3 does nothing but observe.
"I'm going to take you far away from 3," you inform 15 and 16. "I'm taking you to my village. Do you think you can help there? There's a lot going on, any help from you would be greatly appreciated".
"We can help ya, be glad to," 15 answers. "We know what they're up to ya? Plan was to kidnap the youngin', and if that didn't happen, just have him go right bonkers. Makes a great distraction ya?"
"A distraction for what?" you ask.
"That Orochimaru fella, he needed something from the village ya? In these last few days, ya've become quite the hot topic. It seems sentiments changed about ya, ya? It's not about killing ya, it's about making more just like ya," 15 explains. "I overheard them talkin' about it. Ya was a special experiment all along ya? But with what ya been doin' lately, it got ya special recognition. They want the wee ones, that Giga eye boy, and to make an army out of ya. Right frightening it is. But we'll stop Orochimaru, try to at least. If he gets whatever he needs out the village, gonna be bad for everyone".
No time for this now... You'll have to think over this information later. You teleport 15 and 16 to Konoha, and then teleport towards the Sannin.
"Took you long enough! Let's get moving, we got to get this young, precious little thing into a nice cold, jail cell," Jiraiya says.
"Let go of her!!!" you hear Kazuma scream as he flies through the air. His eyes are glowing blue, and the wind around him has turned an unearthly black. "Let me have her, and I will let you have your lives".
"We don't have time for this," Tsunade says.
"She's right," Jiraiya agrees. "The village is more important".
"Yeah, we'll get whatever information we need out of that Akisame guy," you add. "Your girlfriend is all yours Kazuma".
Kazuma lands on the ground next to your prisoner and picks her up. He looks at all of you suspiciously before he begins to float into the air.
"Thanks... thanks for not hurting her," Kazuma states.
"Tried our best to just subdue her," Jiraiya says with a smile on his face. "You've got yourself a nice feisty one there. Be sure to take care of her".
Kazuma scoffs and flies off.
"Alright, glad he didn't attack us," you admit. "Let me know how things look over there when you get the chance".
You use Golem Substitution to teleport Jiraiya and Tsunade to the Leaf, and then yourself back to where 3 was. She apparently hasn't moved a muscle.
"Your technique needs work," she finally says. She has a nice voice, almost enchanting. But it's devoid of emotion and has very little tone. "You're wasting too much chakra. And you've wasted too much time, by now you would be dead if I wanted to kill you".
"So then what do you want? Why haven't you killed me?" you ask calmly, hoping to get even more information.
"I just do as I'm told," 3 answers you. "You're to be tested. To see how far along you've come. Now that you're alone, we have to fight. Prepare yourself".
"Itachi where are you?! How long before you make it here?!" you ask into the comm.
"Going to at least be two or three minutes," Itachi answers. "Shin is hurt pretty bad still. I can't leave him out here, and I can't just use up all of our first aid. He's good enough to run with me, but we can't sprint".
The earth rumbles around you as it rises up in 6 spots. The ground itself begins to take shape, and you find yourself surrounded by 6 golems, perfectly carved to resemble warriors in full armor. They attack you all at once with their weapons, you jump back to the side and speed burst away. You take a soldier pill to replenish your chakra. The weapons the golems held appeared to have been smashed due to the force of their attacks, yet you see the golems begin to regenerate before your eyes.
"Like I said, you take too much time," 3 explains. "You were smart about sending your golem away though. See, we can turn anything into a weapon, even the Earth itself. Even the air around you".
Air? Is she serious?
You are forced out of your thoughts as you see the air around you phase a little and solidify enough to slap you across the face. For the first time ever, you see a smile on 3's face.
"You see? You're not yet ready," 3 explains calmly. "They might have given you regeneration, but you can't regenerate if your head is sliced off can you?"
She's right. And if she wanted to, that slap could have as easily been made into a slicing weapon to cut your head off. She's toying with you. ------------- A: Attack her with a False Ash cloud B: Animate 5 kunai and throw them around the battlefield for use later C: Retreat and regroup with Itachi, help out at the village D: Free Will
You feel completely outclassed by 3's mere presence. You decide to go all out.
"Fire Style: False Ash Cloud!" you scream at you bellow forth a vicious attack. You exhale a large, lion shaped dust cloud that sweeps over the battlefield. The cloud charges at 3 with a mighty roar.
3 looks at you and smirks at your attack as she sidesteps your effort with ease.
"Did you know that you can animate your very boots? Even the earth under you? The air current that hinders you, grants your body resistance, all that can be manipulated," 3 explains it to you as if you're a toddler. "When you do that, time seems to almost stop. It's as if I'm moving at normal speed, but you're moving, but just barely. Like you're in a state of suspended animation. I can't believe I gave birth to you. I can't believe Madara is showing such an interest in you".
Well, that sucks. She raises both her arms and makes a pushing motion. You see your lion turn and charge at you. She does another motion with her hands and the cloud changes shape, this time turning into some sort of huge deer. The cloud slams into you, you hold your breath. Yet how long can you? You backflip out of the cloud and exhale deeply. 3 waves her hand again and dissipates the cloud.
She's smiling at you again. You fall to your knees as you gasp for air. You feel your insides twist and turn as if you've been scarred in your very insides. The pain is indescribable, you are wishing for death. For it to just stop, all at once. But you have to see this through.
"I notice that you created a very destructive jutsu," 3 commends you. "Your only flaw is that you have to make your enemy inhale it. Why not just seep it in through the millions of pores all over their body? I think I'll be stealing that jutsu, if you don't mind".
You gasp for air as you feel water swelling up in your eyes. You thank your healing ability for saving your life as you stand up on your feet. The pain still lingering, but not as bad. You hope your regeneration will mitigate the after effects shortly, but you can't count on that.
"I imagine this fight would be over with if you didn't have your healing ability, right?" she mocks. "Maybe you do have a future after all. But you have to get stronger my son".
"Itachi," you say as you let out a cough into the comm. "Where the hell are you? I need you. Prop up Shin, and sprint over here".
"On my way," Itachi replies calmly. "Still going to be at least half a minute though. Take care of yourself til then".
"Half a minute? 30 seconds is more than enough," 3 states. "I've been listening in on your conversations. You really shouldn't be so open with your communication. You were born to be better than that!"
The six earth golems are making their way towards you. You notice the trees behind you blending together, changing shape. They've created a barrier, you can't get out unless you chakra walk up the tree's surface, there's no way you can fit through the tiny holes you see.
The earth golems are your justu. You suspect that the trees coming together is just a much higher form of your Green Animation. She's not merely communicating and seeing what the trees see, she's commanding them, and they obey.
30 seconds... It seems like forever away right now. ----------------------------------------- A: Run up in between the six golems and use Sudden Explosion B: Fissure the entire area, 3 and all. Hopefully, you can capture her C: Use Golem Substitution to get the hell out of Dodge D: Free Will: Make your Fate
To hell with this. A true warrior knows one's weaknesses. Especially, and most important, when a battle is lost. Only a fool will continue in vain. But the true master, bides his time, and strikes when it is most advantageous to do so. You've shown 3 a jutsu that you expected no one could live through, yet she turned it on you. You consider this at length as she paces around the battlefield.
She isn't attacking you. She's merely observing you. If this were a real fight, perhaps you could counter attack, or at least take advantage of a momentary lapse in her judgment. But no, this is another experiment, you've had enough. You make the seals necessary for Golem Substitution, she eyes you doing so and lays a right cross precisely on your left temple. Lousy *****, she sure hits hard for a woman. You go with the flow of the attack and continue casting your jutsu. You feel her hand grab your wrist as you warp into nothingness.
You emerge out of your jutsu next to Itachi, who wasn't expecting you. To your right is 3. She somehow forced her presence into your jutsu. What's worse is that you feel that her presence her caused an extra strain on your chakra. She exclaims as she notices Itachi turn to face her.
"Let go of him. Now" Itachi warns with a steady tone.
You notice 3's lips begin to quiver. You don't know if she's angry, or nervous, perhaps even fearful.
She knees you in your hip with her right knee, it stings badly. She knows how to affect joints, she's not an inexperienced shinobi. You once again move in response to the blow and turn it into a turning sweep. You feel the back of your boot clang against something metallic on 3's leg.
"That will be the final lesson I think," she says as a matter of fact. "There's no longer any benefit here. But perhaps that's enough... for now. You should work on changing organic matter. It would do you well".
Itachi moves to engage 3, but she disappears. No handseals, no chakra signature, nothing. She merely used Golem Substitution, because she felt like it... Even whilst toying with you, she showed an extreme aptitude in your style, and she has left you thinking about other uses for your jutsu.
"You alright?" Itachi asks as he studies you. His Giga Eye is activated. "She transferred her chakra into your body. Do you feel any different?"
"I don't think so," you stay as you turn to your right. You hear a slight snap as you involuntarily fall to the ground. You protest in severe pain.
"21!" Itachi yells as you fall.
"****ing *****," you curse as the pain blurs your vision. Your head pounds. You're suffering from a major headache now. "She used Mass Change. On my bones! I don't know why I didn't think of it before, but bones are just calcium and other trace elements, keratin, carbon, everything can be changed. That clang we just heard. She turned her bones into some sort of metal".
Itachi looks worried. He understands the situation. Who knows how far that jutsu went into your body.
"I think my hip's shattered," you say trying to bring it back into focus. "I think I got multiple fractures, all the way through my femur, down to my foot. It'll just keep breaking until it's reset in place properly and I can change my bones back into actual bones. One hell of a final lesson".
"You're not going to be much good in a fight," Itachi states calmly as ever. "What do you want to do?"
"We're picking up Shin, and getting back to Konoha," you explain. "Just do me a favor and hold onto me. I can't stand up. I'm going to have to do this jutsu from right here. How ridiculous..."
"Least you're alive," Itachi reassures. "And Sasuke?"
"I'm not going to lie, I don't know," you admit. "I think Madara had him in a basket, but I'm not sure. I grabbed the basket, it felt heavy. But it could just be a trap".
Itachi shakes his head sadly, speechless.
"Grab on, we're getting Sasuke back even if I have to bite Madara to death," you promise.
Itachi grabs onto you as you make the seals necessary to teleport to Shin. Shin eyes you both curiously as he sees you laid out on the ground.
"What happened to you? I thought I got it the worst out of all of us," Shin asks you, his tone inflecting concern.
"Yeah well, we still have some people who haven't checked in," you answer. You spot Shin's massive hound coming up from behind a nearby tree. "You all set to go? We gotta get back to the Leaf".
Shin nods his head. His dog is sporting some wounds as well, but nothing immediately life threatening. You teleport all of yourselves to the entrance to the Hokage Mansion. The Leaf is quiet mostly, there are some wrecked buildings, and some smoldering remains. Unfortunately, you notice Kakashi carrying some villagers bodies and lining them up.
"Oh... hey," Kakashi says. Even through his mask you can note his solemn expression. "We didn't do very well. We lost about a dozen civilians. At least an entire jonin squad, and two genin squads led by two separate chunin. We just managed to get Naruto under control not even a minute ago. Lord Jiraiya was a godsend. I don't know what we would have done had he not arrived. And Lady Tsunade has been extremely helpful. Had it not been for her, our casualties would have been catastrophic.... Um, why are you on the floor?"
"I think the right side of my lower body has been turned to straw, not a big deal though," you answer sarcastically. "Did you notice two shinobi here that didn't belong to our village? I sent them to help. They said Orochimaru had a very nasty plan for us. I'm thinking all this was a distraction".
"He went through quite the effort to 'distract' us," Kakashi replies.
"Well, we have to talk about that," you affirm seriously. "Our enemy isn't playing around. He's not toying with us. He's not doing this just for the sake of satiating his sadistic streak. He's testing us, trying to cut his losses short while he kills us off little by little. That's why Orochimaru got sent here, especially with Sasori. Sasori is too powerful a ninja for Madara to be throwing him around lightly. It's like sacrificing your Queen piece for a Pawn, it doesn't make sense. And it doesn't fit into Madara's style. What Orochimaru came here for today was important, and we need to find those two shinobi, they're experiments like me. Their names are 15 and 16... or their numbers, whatever, you get the idea".
"Glad to see you've made it my child," Sarutobi-sensei says as he walks up next to you. He eyes you curiously as you continue to lay on the floor. Shin limps away with his dog and Itachi rises up to bow respectfully.
"Have you looked inside the basket?" Itachi says now with a sense of urgency in his voice.
"Yes, we have," Kakashi says, his tone growing a little sour. "Itachi, I think it's best if you let 21 look inside the basket first and see if we can work something out".
"Why? What's wrong?" Itachi's tone is growing more impatient.
"Sasuke was indeed inside the basket," Kakashi says with melancholy overshadowing his words. "He's alive. But Madara did some cruel things to him..."
Itachi clears his throat and swallows before speaking.
"What did he do to Sa-chan?" Itachi asks, his tone hardening.
"Sasuke's eyes have been surgically removed," Kakashi says as he lowers his head. "And he now bears a mark. Sarutobi-sama believes it to be a curse mark, and believes Orochimaru had something to do with it".
"His eyes? A curse... mark?" Itachi falls to his knees. "He couldn't have my eyes... so he took Sa-chan's?"
Itachi throws his head into his hands and begins to breathe in and out deeply.
"Let me have a look at him," you say with confidence. "Don't worry Itachi. Our engagement with 3 has given me some new ideas... We just have to find out more about that curse mark. However, I'm almost 100% sure we can get Sasuke's eyes back".
Itachi doesn't say anything. He doesn't even acknowledge your statement.
In your heart you know Itachi is right. Madara couldn't possibly have replicated the Giga Eye, so he probably hoped to examine Sasuke's eyes. As Itachi's younger brother, the genetic material and potential for the Giga Eye was there. Let's hope he didn't come up with any breakthroughs...
"I'm sorry," you say with true sadness in your voice. "I failed you Itachi. And I failed our family, and the village".
Itachi hasn't moved. You motion to Kakashi to help you up. He walks towards you and picks you up. You grunt in pain as he places his head under your shoulder.
"How's that?" he asks.
"Hurts like hell, but at least I'm mobile," you reply.
You notice Jiraiya and Tsunade walking towards you. You acknowledge them both with a nod.
"Naruto is out like a light," Jiraiya informs. "He got taken for a real rough ride by the kyuubi. I can't imagine the strain it left on his body. I also found the two shinobi you sent here. They're dead".
You nod your head.... You promised them a better life. How many people have you failed today?
"Tsunade, I wanted to thank you," you start. "If it wasn't for you, today would have gone much worse. And of course, thank you Jiraiya. Tsunade... could you start analyzing the poison samples when you can? You and I have a lot of work to do".
"I want Naruto to be under strict watch," Sarutobi-sensei orders strictly. "This disaster is not to be allowed again. As for Sasuke, I want him transferred to my home immediately. Jiraiya, you and I will work on the curse seal. 21... I imagine you will speak to Tsunade about Sasuke's vision?"
"Yes," you say briefly. "I also want an autopsy of 15 and 16. We also need to get our members out of the field. Guy seems to feel the shinobi he fought isn't our enemy. And Randel is still not replying to my questions".
Sarutobi-sensei scratches his chin and nods before turning away. You hear him assigning several members of the village's militia orders.
Over the next week, you pour over every medical book, note, and journal at your disposal. The man known as Akisame is definitely a benevolent soul, he has taught you the basics of bonesetting, and even gone as far as to give you his personal diary on the subject.
Through Akisame's friendship with Guy, you feel as if you've made an important ally, both in strength and intelligence. Furthermore, he has explained that his village, Bellhelm, which resides to the northeast of Konoha is currently being ruled by Madara's underlings with an iron fist. He went on to explain that Bellhelm started as a village for retired shinobi who had amassed money and just wanted to live off the land. But that now, it has turned into quite the hub to find mercenaries or just all around skilled warriors. Akisame also asked for permission to stay in Konoha, out of fear that his family would suffer had Madara found out that he was alive. You of course, granted him permission under the Third's authority.
Your relationship with Tsunade has also changed, for the better. You've come to respect her and even admire her as a very skilled shinobi, especially in medical ninjutsu. Through your conversations, you've come to understand much more about the healing arts and the human body as a whole. You even managed to transmute your bones back to normal. Which is great as it was getting old and more than a little embarrassing to be constantly hanging from someone's shoulder.
Unfortunately, Randel was seriously injured and had to remain in the hospital for a few days... The Aburame clan's member, was not as fortunate. He died honorably in defense of the Leaf.
Which brings you to Sasuke. You managed to actually regenerate Sasuke's eyes, and even in Tsunade's expert medical opinion, his eyes are normal and just as good, if not better, than before. However... the curse mark is still a chore you continue to endeavor with. You've managed to figure out that it responds to negative emotions, most notably anger, hate and fear. But little else.
You also have come to notice that Itachi has begun to revert to normal, upon seeing Sasuke's improvement in mood. Yet you still notice that Itachi is very concerned about the curse mark. After another week, Itachi even apologized to you for his cold demeanor.
Your study of the devices in 15 and 16's neck was another affair altogether. Thanks to the training and tutelage of both Akisame and Tsunade, you were able to perform the autopsies truly flawlessly. But the devices left you quite baffled. They were coiled up around the spine, moving up towards the brain, only to end up further coiled at the base of the brain stem. The device would be most likely impossible to remove, and it was definitely booby trapped, as you found out firsthand when 15's device exploded in your face and through you up against the wall. When you worked on 16's device, you were much more careful and precise, and managed to remove it without exploding the device. You noted a neurotoxin present, most likely to induce a genjutsu effect on the victim, and an inhibition effect that would make one very hard to be independent.
This powerful technology left you more than shaken, and you immediately had Sasuke scanned for any similar device, luckily, he was without one.
Unfortunately... that only leaves Orochimaru. Sasori got away at a specific time. He didn't retreat because the battle was going badly for him. He must have left because Orochimaru got what he came for. Your search for insight on this matter has not been fruitful at all and you find yourself very frustrated as you oversee the repairs being made in Konoha. Luckily, Team 21 has bounced back to their feet. Mizuumi's all fixed up, and everyone's healed up and rest. You've been having dinner together, and discussing strategies and ideas of what Madara's real plans could be.
Yet one truth remained. You were all far from being safe. And you all needed to be ready for the future. While your bodies might be healed, the experience still lingered and it would never be forgotten by anyone who lived in the Leaf. You would strive to ensure that you never allowed such a thing to happen again. ----------------------------------- Rewards and End of Arc 2
Karma Reward (For staying true to 21's character): 1: Master Golem Substitution 2: Master your Regeneration. Make yourself virtually invincible, grant your blood higher healing powers, and make your bones unbreakable/unaffected by 3's Mass Change jutsu 3: Increase your Chakra Pool to 600
Experience Reward 4: Grant Mizuumi your ORIGINAL level of regeneration 5: 2 Stat points to distribute as you see fit 6: Learn 2 more S rank jutsu
And your next path? A: Find Bellhelm, and free the village. Hopefully, you'll gain some powerful allies like Akisame in the process? B: You're not even a genin. Neither are Naruto or Sasuke. They're much more powerful than genin. Perhaps it'd be best if you stay at the Leaf for a while. Attend Ninja Academy and graduate. Who knows, you might learn something through the process? Not to mention you'll ensure that no one hits home while you're away... C: Search out a cure for the curse mark that Sasuke has D: Track down "Insert villain here" (Examples could be: Kazuma, Orochimaru, Sasori, Madara, etc)
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:13:25 GMT
This time apart from battle or training has given you a lot of time to think. Think about life in general, the Leaf in specific. What happens to kids like Sasuke and Naruto as they grow through the system? The system is in place where they are born, nurtured, in some cases like Sasuke's, given a head start by belonging to a powerful clan or having a genius older brother. But then there are others... Like Naruto, and yourself.
"Sarutobi-sensei," you say with a bow as you enter the room. The Third looks at you and smiles as he takes a puff from his pipe.
"Ah, 21 my child," Sarutobi-sensei motions for you to sit. You do so. "How can I help? What's on your mind?"
"A lot actually," you confess. "I'd like to see if you would arrange a team to go to Bellhelm. I've already arranged a golem clone to be thrown in our prison to make it look as if we arrested Akisame. But I think we should send in a team to keep tabs on what Madara is doing there. If the village is as powerful as Akisame mentioned, we should keep that all it's citizens would be as kind or noble as Akisame".
"I was thinking that as well 21," Sarutobi-sensei agrees. "I will send the most qualified team I have immediately. A pure espionage and infiltration group, to avoid combat altogether. I am surprised however that you were able to make the golems so lifelike. It will pass for Akisame?"
"Well... close enough," you admit hesitantly. "I haven't mastered making golems human like yet. I've been spending all my time reading and studying. I basically got the most slender golem I could make, and disguised him as best as I could, with Kakashi's help of course. Akisame is also going under a new name, for his safety. He decided on Koetsuji, and has altered his appearance quite dramatically".
"Very good then, very good," he answers. "You keep working at it 21, I'm sure you'll get it. You always do. I know that the incident regarding 3 was... complicated and traumatic. I also know that there's bound to be a rift in your group after such an event. But you must never doubt yourself. If you doubt yourself, your enemy has already won. And in this case my son, our enemy being Madara, you can bet he will abuse that insecurity".
"Yes sensei," you say with an exhale. He's right. But knowing that feeling down won't solve anything doesn't make it any easier to be proud. You have a lot of ground to cover if you're going to catch up to 3. And she surely won't be resting on her laurels either...
"I'm glad you're here. There was something I wanted to offer you actually," Sarutobi-sensei says with a warm smile. "I want you to enroll in the Academy, with Naruto and Sasuke of course. It will be an excellent bonding experience, and it will serve to prove that you're just like any other Leaf citizen. We can have you train there, work on anything you might need help with, and of course, get you your first rank of being an actual shinobi. You'll be an official genin. It doesn't mean much in the scope of things... but it at least furthers your bond with the village, and represents your dedication to the cause. It's something to be proud of".
You smile as the idea of being in the Academy, with Naruto and Sasuke as your fellow students amuses you.
"It should be fun, sensei," you say, still smiling.
"I'm sure it will be," he meets your smile. "You need to take a break from the stress you've placed upon yourself. It's been well over three years since you first came to my door. You've accomplished so much already. And 3 years isn't a long time at all".
"No, I suppose it isn't," you reply. "Oh, and I have Jiraiya and L working on finding out about the curse seal. They'll be studying and trying to see if we can remove it from Sasuke".
"Yes, I will be working towards that end as well," Sarutobi-sensei answers, his tone growing dim. "For the meantime, it should be kept a secret. And as far as your regeneration is concerned, try to keep it a secret as well. I would like to have Tsunade study your blood if that's alright. I feel she has earned our trust. And with her help, we may be able to increase our hospital's efficiency tenfold. This is of course, with your permission. Even as Hokage, a true leader must always respect the wishes of his team. If you don't agree with it, we merely won't do it".
"I'm not sure of that yet, sensei," you answer honestly. "I do feel that she can be trusted, as least for the moment. She definitely missed her chance to jump ship... at least we would have to think so. But I think that my blood might lead to a lot of greed, perhaps even war. I'd like to talk it over with my friends first".
"Very well, take all the time you need," the Third answers humbly. "Let me know whenever you come to a decision. Speaking of your team, what will Itachi, Kakashi, Randel and Guy be doing in the meanwhile?"
"I was going to have Itachi look over any old Uchiha scrolls," you begin. "Hopefully, he won't feel inadequate or as if he's not contributing. With any luck, he can find something out about the Giga Eye, or what Madara might be planning with the stolen pair of Sharingan. As far as Kakashi, Randel and Guy, I was going to have them help out in the restoration effort. Randel and Guy love physical training, and Kakashi is the only one who can rein them in when they get going. I managed on being able to improve my Golem Substitution also".
"Oh?"
"Yes, I've made it cost less chakra to use, and I even developed some new jutsus that should come in handy. I hope to one day become completely immune to genjutsu, and I began taking steps towards that goal. I also tinkered around a bit with the comm system. i changed the frequency on them, so they should be harder to trace now... Although I suspect that 3 was just using Golem Style to intercept our transmissions... I sure wish I could master Shared Consciousness though..."
"Give it time," he advises hoping to encourage you. "If you ever feel that you could benefit from my experience, let me know. And we shall work on it together. Before I forget... here, take this. These are the documents I prepared for you and the younger ones. You'll be studying under Iruka, a VERY admirable man. Please give him the respect you always show me, as he will be one of your sensei from now on. Great shinobi usually do have several masters. Great students do their best to make their masters proud".
"And I will do mine, sensei," you answer honestly as you rise. You bow as you accept the Third's documents and head out the room.
After all your preparations, your plans are set, everyone's in place to do what you intended them to do. Now, it's just getting through your first day of class... Funny, you never thought you would have that concern. You wake up early the next morning and pick up Sasuke and Naruto and you all make your way anxiously to the Academy. You set up Mizuumi with Shared Consciousness in hopes that he can learn whatever you learn from this Iruka-sensei.
In your way in, you notice a man slightly shorter than you, with a very noticeable scar across his face on his nose. He smiles at all the kids as he waves them into class and he even pats you on the shoulder. That must be Iruka-sensei. The situation is no doubt awkward, even for him. The class takes their seats. You hear it already, the jokes and taunts coming from some of your fellow classmates.
"Down in front! you hear what sounds like a young boy's voice call out. "How am I supposed to see anything with this special ed kid in front of the board Iruka-sensei?!"
The majority of the class laughs. Naruto and Sasuke blush and pretend to read over the textbooks.
You turn in your seat, which is extremely cramped by the way, to see a young man with pronounced canines and red paint coming down from his eyes. He's got a small puppy resting on top of his head. You consider insulting him right back, but he's just a kid after all. You're the grownup here. You do the mature thing and turn back around and see Iruka-sensei stand to the front of the class.
"Kiba, that's enough!" Iruka-sensei shouts. The class listens and halts their chatter immediately. "He might be your equal in this classroom, but you know better than that. You show your elders respect!"
"Yes sir..." Kiba answers.
You turn to Kiba and smile. "An Inuzuka huh? I worked with Shin, he's a good guy".
Kiba smirks at you and turns his head, ignoring you. Brat.
"Now class, we have three new members," Iruka continues. "They are Uzumaki Naruto, Uchiha Sasuke, and 21. Please make them feel welcome".
"21?! Is that his name or his age?! I mean look at the guy, he has to be at least 16! How many times did he get left behind?!" you hear Kiba complain. The entire class begins to laugh again, Iruka-sensei appears to be of the "let them get it all out of their system" mindset.
"Hey 21, you got a clan name or anything like that?" Kiba continues to call out.
You begin to turn around, finally starting to get irritated, but Naruto and Sasuke hold you back. Kiba continues to mock you from the back of the class.
Until his ruler comes to life and slaps him across the face. You smile innocently. Sasuke sighs in disappointment and buries his head into the desk. Naruto laughs outrageously.
The class not quite sure as to what had just happened all quiet down in confusion. You animate the chalk inconspicuously to draw what you think was a very good caricature of Kiba on the chalkboard. The entire class laughs at Kiba now.
Before the end of the day, your classmates had grown to almost idolize you. It was pretty funny actually. There was even this one kid, Nara Shikamaru, who challenged you to a game of chess. You had heard of it, but never played it. After a couple of practice games and an explanation of the rules, you bested him 3 straight times. He eventually got frustrated and gave up, mentioning about "how troublesome" this all was, and how much of a "drag" that was. Interesting kid, and real bright for his age.
And that's pretty much how your first week went by. During the days, you spent your time learning the basics, even improving on your chakra control a little. You even learned how to transform your body to appear as other people and a jutsu that was called "Headhunter". Very useful indeed.
During the nights, you would go over all the research with L and Mizuumi and the rest of the team. Checking in on their progress and updating them as necessary. Even Itachi seemed to be getting a bit more cheerful as each day went by.
For the second week you... ----------------------- What did you work on?
After 8 more weeks of dedicating yourself to honing your skills further, you feel a definite improvement. After you dispelled your Shadow Clone and Lightning Clone Jutsus, the information you received was beyond intense. With 100 clones of you working nonstop and around the clock, you definitely felt your resources were being misused until now. You were able to create an incredible upgrade to your communicators, making them both smaller and more durable, as well as being able to communicate an estimated 400 miles. You studied with Tsunade as well and increased your knowledge of the human anatomy even further. She even taught you how to make soldier pills, although an experiment you conducted showed that soldier pills lead to destructive side effects, such as withdrawal symptoms, a chance at a reduced lifespan as well as a psychological dependency.
You managed to use your Green Animation jutsu to control trees, but you will need to continue studying with this technique if you wish to control it to the level of proficiency that 3 demonstrated. You also adapted your Shared Consciousness jutsu so that your team mates can communicate with one another via thought. This was excellent, except you would need to keep in mind that thoughts might not always be best to be shared.
You adapted some of your ninja tools to serve your purposes, most notably, you invented a syringe delivery system that wraps around the leg and with the push of a button delivers whatever solution inside directly into the femoral artery for a faster effect. You also invented a box you called a slam box. Basically, you slam the small, wooden box on the floor and it litters the battlefield with kunai and shurikens. Handy in a battle, especially if you could combine it with your Object Control jutsu, and your Flying Golem God jutsu.
Your chakra control has also become much more precise, thanks to the Academy and the time you spent with Tsunade. You've become a master of using chakra to walk amongst any surface. You feel able to actually mold chakra easier now, which you imagine could definitely come in handy.
The Academy wasn't without it's scholarly benefits as well. You learned all the basics of the ninja caste system, as well as how thoroughly politics and perception play a part. You created several friendships with the younger shinobi, you dubbed them the Konoha 9, for they would be the future of the village one day. The bond with Shikamaru was extremely important you felt. He was a kindred soul, a young man who was wise beyond his years, a true genius you recognized. Yet he longed for nothing more than to watch the clouds go by and be left undisturbed. Yet his laziness wasn't without patriotism. You originally hoped to turn him to putting his intelligence to good use and give him some strong work ethic... but that failed miserably. He was just really... really... lazy.
You also mastered formations and stratagems for Team 21 after you studied all of their techniques and memorized all of their weaknesses and strengths. Kakashi was particularly tedious.. but at least it's done.
You even managed to study genjutsu, and improved your genjutsu defense and created a genjutsu that was a mixture of your Scout Bug jutsu and your Flying Machine jutsus. Thanks to the Aburame clan, namely Shino, you managed to make your bug golems passable for real insects, and now, your Scout Bug jutsu has the ability to be created with wings and the ability to explode in a small cloud of carbon and other trace amounts of chemicals, that when inhaled or introduced into a mucus membrane in the body, placed the victim into a genjutsu where he would imagine being swarmed by bugs of all kinds. You called it Insect Swarm.
You endeavored to create golems out of organic matter from sheer force of will, but your progress wasn't impressive. That trial did provide you with the knowledge to recognize that you could work on organic control, utilizing your golem style to gain power over some part of your opponent's body; whether it's bones, minerals in people's blood, electrical charges within people, and perhaps most importantly chakra.
Unfortunately, you felt you were spreading yourself too thin, and would need to work specifically on Green Animation, Shared Consciousness, and the power to alter and create golems out of organic matter. The techniques were just too precise, and any miscalculation could prove catastrophic.
You graduated the Academy after only 9 weeks, and you were trying to not rush through. Your experience was an enjoyable one, and you wouldn't forget it.
Sasuke and Naruto were definitely ready to graduate as they had been given a great head start with Team 21. But you wondered if you should allow them the opportunity to further their bonds with people their own age. Naruto in particular, was very close to Iruka-sensei, and you felt a little reluctant to pull them out. But they were definitely physically ready and more than adequate enough to be genin.
Ultimately, the decision was left up to you.
The Bellhelm infiltration team has been reporting to Sarutobi-sensei weekly. Nothing really special to report, except that Akisame was right about the amount of powerful shinobi in the village. According to reports, the entire village is being held against their will, using every dirty trick in the book. Genjutsu, ransom, blackmail, you name it, it's being done in Bellhelm. The Leaf shinobi team also reports, that once someone enters the village, you can't leave. So the shinobi team, is no exception.
Jiraiya and L had also found out a lead on how to save Sasuke, a man named Juugo, but everything points to him being one of Orochimaru's subordinates.
You're now faced with the decision of what to do now... And you're not exactly sure -------------------------------- Add canonical knowledge that every reader would know after reading through Part 1 (Including CS information)
Do you let Sasuke and Naruto stay in the Academy while your team is out?
Who do you want going with you? If you're not taking the entirety of Team 21, what do you what the remaining members to do?
What are you going to do next? Hunt down someone? Liberate Bellhelm? Search out Juugo for the cure to Sasuke's CS? The chuunin exams are around the corner, maybe you'd like to participate? You, Sasuke and Naruto could definitely compete. It might even be a chance to scout out the other ninja villages...
"Here, I personalized all of them," you say as you hand out the remaining communicators to Jiraiya, Tsunade and Itachi. "If they happen to be off at the time anyone tries to send you a message, or you just don't respond. You have a mailbox where anyone can leave a message. We all have one".
"Neat toys," Jiraiya says as he holds the comm up to his eye.
"Yes, quite clever," Tsunade agrees. "You'll be having everyone using these over messenger birds if you keep at it like this".
You smile as you look over at Itachi, he hasn't said much all day.
"Well, you have the medkits, and you know how to use them... And of course Tsunade's presence will make for one hell of a health plan," you state, trying to get something out of Itachi.
He turns to you before he starts to speak.
"Just to make sure, let's go over the plan again," Itachi requests.
"Very well," you reply casually. "Naruto and Sasuke will remain in the Academy for now. There, they'll be watched over by the Third himself, as well as Kakashi, Guy, and Koetsuji. The Academy is the best place for them now, they'll be under constant supervision and surrounded by powerful shinobi at all times. Madara is most likely still not done with them, and is waiting for us to leave the village. However, with the size of our team, he's pretty screwed. We can always have a team going and a team staying behind. In this case, we split our usual number of people on one team into two teams".
You turn to make sure Randel is paying attention.
"We know that the man known as Juugo is the key to the curse seal," you continue. "We also know, that Orochimaru has everything to do behind that wretched seal. So obviously, Juugo is under Orochimaru's employ. We can't sit around anymore knowing this information. Madara will be expecting us in force, but while you three hunt down Orochimaru, we'll be looking for Juugo. I want to stress that this mission is vital to the success of our plans and will seriously hamper our enemies' efforts. I'm planning on taking Juugo alive, hopefully keep him in our prisons in case Orochimaru uses the curse seal again. Besides, we don't have the full story on him yet. For all we know, Juugo might just be another plaything Madara and Orochimaru are blackmailing".
"And if we need further backup on our mission?" Jiraiya asks coyly. "Not that there's much that Jiraiya the Gallant can't handle by himself. But let's face it, we gotta be really cautious here. With all these restrictions you're cramping my style".
"Oh please," Tsunade complains. "Don't act like such an idiot. If we can do this without any casualties, we do it. If not, we sit tight and call the cavalry. Even a moron like you should do fine".
"She's right," you agree and do a double take. "I mean everything except the moron part Jiraiya".
Jiraiya's face goes red and hangs his head low. You hear him mumbling something about not being appreciated as he walks off towards the gate. His mood is immediately fixed when he sees a young mother walking her toddler near the ferns. Tsunade looks at him in disgust... but perhaps some jealousy as well?
"Tch, dog," Tsunade says loud enough for Jiraiya to hear.
"Just please stay safe," you reiterate. "We've had so much to deal with. I don't want anything to happen to anyone on this mission".
"The same goes for you then brother," Itachi says firmly. "Randel, make sure my brother doesn't do anything heroic. Understood?"
Randel shakes his head hesitantly as if confused.
"That one had a lot of spirit," Jiraiya says as he walks back towards the group. His face has a red hand print on it. This is pretty typical for him. Tsunade giggles to herself.
"Alright then, let's get this over with, we still have a lot on our plate," you add. "This is only the beginning, as soon as we finish here, we have a ton of other things to set straight".
"Ah the life of a hero never is a restful one," Jiraiya whimsies.
"Idiot..." Tsunade says as she balls her fists in frustration. You think she might really let him have it this time.
"Alright, well see you all later then. Come on Randel," you say hoping to avoid the scrap in case Tsunade really hits Jiraiya.
"Hey 21! Come on! We're both men! Help me out here!? Randel?!" Jiraiya calls out to you desperately.
You don't turn. You merely raise your hand and wave. You don't want to turn, it'll only make it harder to leave everything behind. Interestingly enough, this is the first time you've been alone with Randel since the beginning of your quest many years ago.
"Glad you pi- picked me for this mission, sir," Randel says after the village leaves eyesight. "It's been a while".
"It has been, hasn't it?" you reply as you turn to look at Randel. "Sorry we haven't been spending as much time together lately for the missions. We just have such different styles, we need to train in those strengths, you know?"
"I understand, sir".
You feel pretty bad for the guy. He's covered in scars and battle wounds. He's gigantic and without equal in terms of strength, yet no one is more humble. He just sits back and does as he's told all the time. You feel as if maybe you've been taking Randel for granted, but Randel doesn't seem to mind. He seems truly happy to be part of the away team. You look back at Mizuumi to make sure he's there. Mizuumi seems to be busy keeping his gaze around the trail. The Academy has apparently taught Mizuumi much.
As L and Jiraiya searched for clues on the curse seal, the name Juugo, constantly came up. Juugo of the Scales. He supposedly leveled an entire village by himself and was never heard from again. You figured North was the best direction to start your journey, and head to the area where that village once stood. If luck was on your side, someone would know anything about Juugo or the village.
Because of the fact that Madara might be on the move, you decided to take the trip on foot. Opting to leave the Flying Lion in the village. This served a double purpose. If Madara did indeed still have spies or people watching the village, they would see that the Flying Lion was still there. And if things got particularly dangerous, and any of the teams needed emergency aid, the Flying Lion would be there. After all, you can't always count on yourself being able to cast Golem Substitution... The enemy has proven itself to be too strong to underestimate.
After two weeks of travel, you finally made it to the area where reportedly a man named Juugo destroyed a village. In the entire area, the only thing you found was a single merchant, traveling on highway. You waved him down.
"Hey there, got anything to eat or drink?" you ask politely. "My friend and I are on a research trip. Our home sent us here, but we couldn't find what we were looking for".
The merchant looks at you oddly with a bit of suspicion before opening his wares.
"I have plenty young man," the merchant replies. "But I don't have any money on me".
"No, wait," you say realizing what the merchant must be thinking. "It's really just us two. I figured we're better off buying something off of you than risk hunting and then coming up empty. Besides, I always believed in supporting the working man. You can trust me, I just want some food, some water, and if you know anything about the area, that would be great. I just want to go home, it seems there's nothing here".
You placed 2 Ryo in his hand. Much more than any supplies could be worth. He smiles as he verifies the authenticity of the coins. He hands you 4 boxes large boxes full of supplies. You examine them as if they were your real intent and start eating one of the meals.
"So you know anything about this area?" you continue. "My village used to deal with the village here. But we haven't heard anything since. They finally chose to send someone in and see why the trading stopped".
"The trading stopped years ago then," the merchant replies. "That village hasn't been here for at least 5 years. I've worked these roads for a while, when that village died, a lot of my profits died with it".
"Oh, so the village didn't relocate then?" you ask naively.
"Of course not!" the merchant corrects you. "The village was destroyed by some crazy punk that used to live there. When the village was alive and thriving, I would go in there. I would always tell the citizens to just get rid of that guy. A man goes around talking to himself is one thing, but that guy went around talking to himself, answering himself, and talking to whatever animal that would listen to him. It's not natural, and I wasn't surprised when it happened. Luckily enough for me, the route isn't a total loss. There's now a new stop on my trip. The Village Hidden in Sound. Maybe you boys should ask over there. There's not much for travelers, not even an inn. But they do have some fine wares. Strange too, for a village as small as that to have such fine things".
You remember reading something about this village. What the merchant said checks out, the Village Hidden in Sound is a new village, and doesn't really have anything as far as history is concerned. It's definitely shady, but it doesn't necessarily have to be involved with Juugo. Or maybe it does... ------------------------ A: Ask to accompany the merchant to the Village Hidden in Sound B: Thank the merchant for his time, and go somewhere to use Green Animation and scout the area for anything conspicuous C: Thank the merchant and go back to the village ruins. Maybe there's something there you can find to help D: Check in with the other team, maybe they have information that can help you E: Free Will- Make your Fate
"Well, I really appreciate everything," you say graciously. "I might end up heading out that way. I'm real homesick though, might just go down that way".
The merchant smiles and nods his head before leaving you.
You look at Randel and motion for him to come along. You crouch and relax, and enter your Green Animation jutsu to scour the area.
The area around this ruined village is still pretty scorched and barren. But the trees speak of a "disturbance" to the north. You ask for specifics and they guide you as far as they can, with a warning. "Beware of the snake" they say. As you make it to the final tree, you feel their uneasiness to continue. You see a barren, cliffside, completely devoid of greenery. You can't continue, but you somehow feel there's some chakra emanating from the cliff. A seal perhaps? A barrier?
You phase out of your jutsu and rise to your feet before activating your comm.
"Itachi, Jiraiya, any of you picking up on this?" you say.
"Picking you up 5-5, what's the situation?" Jiraiya answers playfully before you hear a bang and Jiraiya exclaiming in pain.
"This is Itachi, anything new?" you hear Itachi's familiar voice chime in. Jiraiya is still protesting in the background, looks like Tsunade really let him have it.
"Came over here to the ruins of Juugo's village," you explain. "Met one of the local merchants. He says this place has been like this for a while, so I did a sweep with my Green Animation jutsu".
"Did you find anything?"
"Yeah, the trees said to 'beware of the snake', sound ominous enough?" you joke.
"They clearly mean Orochimaru, anything else of note?"
"Actually there is," you continue. "I found this cliff, maybe another week's travel from here. I think it might have some sort of seal or barrier over it, not sure though. I was thinking about checking it out. Hey, are you in a bad mood or something?"
"These two," Itachi answers calmly. "They argue as if they've been married for their entire lives. It's... tedious".
"HEY!!!" you hear Tsunade scream in the background while Jiraiya laughs in victory before another crash is heard.
Itachi sighs into the comm.
"What have you guys been up to? Other than that i mean?" you ask trying to stifle an outburst of laughter.
"Orochimaru has at least 4 different bases," Itachi explains, the commotion still going on behind him. "If the one you found is also his, that makes 5. But the list keeps growing and there's no way to know how many men he has under his power. This is just a local sampling, he might have foreign influence as well".
"Makes sense," you add. "So what were you planning?"
"If the decision were mine, I'd try to level the nearest base and go from there," Itachi admits reluctantly. "Unfortunately, Madara has removed that chance. If we act out openly, there's a lot of people who will suffer for it. From what we've learned, he experiments on people in these bases, dozens, sometimes hundreds. We're talking about Bellhelm, but to a much more obscene degree".
"I didn't think it could get any worse," you confess solemnly.
"It can always get worse," Itachi replies. "Per your instructions, I was going to scout this area a bit longer and schedule a meeting with you. If we want to take down these bases, and minimize the loss of life, we're going to need a lot more people with us. That's if it's just these 5 bases, if we find more, well, you get the point".
"Hmmm... so if we go in and take them one at a time, we risk retaliation from Orochimaru? Maybe even Bellhelm could be endangered? And Koetsuji has been more than generous... I think I will" --------------- Free Will: Make your Fate
"Itachi, do me a favor," you ask sincerely. "Do some more investigation in the area. We should hold off on hitting these bases until we have a lead on which base Orochimaru is at, if he's even at a base. The Village Hidden in Sound is around here, I'll check it out before heading North."
"Understood," Itachi replies. "Remember your own orders. If it's too hot in there, you don't go in. We don't know if the Sound Village is under the same stress as Bellhelm. If they detain you, it's only a manner of time before someone finds out who you are. And if you make a blazing escape, well, that's just as bad as attacking one of these bases".
"I got it," you answer a little annoyed at Itachi's doting. "I'll keep in touch. Stay safe, little brother".
"Let's all do that".
Yeah, well. Time to head north you guess. Randel doesn't make for very good conversation, but you can't help feeling safer around the guy. At the very least, he looks the most dangerous. It's a terrible thought but, chances are, if you get ambushed, they'll try to take him down first. You almost laugh at the thought.
After walking the majority of the day, you make it to the outskirts of the Village Hidden in Sound. You slow down your march and crouch down to the floor. The setup isn't that of a normal village. You've studied the other villages, thanks to the Academy. Even though this isn't a major village, it's big enough to warrant a different layout in mind.
For starters, there's a strict check in lane heading into the village. That's normal during wartime, but it isn't wartime. Secondly, there are lookouts in towers all along the outside walls, every 100 yards or so, and the wall itself covers the entire city. This looks more like a military outpost, not a village. You don't even see any civilians or homes... Something is definitely off. You decide to update Itachi before you do anything else.
"Hey Itachi," you speak into the comm.
No response. You wait five minutes. Still no response, this is unlike Itachi. He has either turned off the comm, has gone dark... or worse. After several failed attempts to get Tsunade or Jiraiya on the comm, you turn to Randel.
"They're not answering," you state gravely. "You've worked with Jiraiya in combat situations before, when he had the comm. What do you think?"
"He might be busy, sir," Randel answers bluntly. "But, we are ninja.. after all I mean. He might have been taken prisoner. But I don't see who could do that to Jiraiya-san. He's too- too powerful for that".
Randel's right... and Jiraiya isn't even alone... Now what should you do? ------------------ A: Camp the night and wait until morning for a signal from Itachi B: Go into the village after speaking with Sarutobi-sensei C: Go into the village and put away your comms in case they get revealed D: Reverse summon the comms Itachi and his team had E: Modify one of the above
"Randel, keep a look out. I don't like the way this is looking for us here," you instruct calmly. Randel shakes his head.
"Golem Style: Shared Consciousness Jutsu..." you say slowly as you exhale and prepare to enter your friend's heads.
You find yourself almost literally inside Itachi's mind. It's got a lot of neutral colors in here, but he has a lot of pictures hung up, mostly of you and Sasuke. Maybe they're memories? Seems logical enough.
"Itachi?" you call out not quite knowing what to expect.
Itachi appears in front of you with a look of shock on his face.
"Um... what are you doing in my head?" Itachi asks. "This is you know, personal space?"
"You weren't responding with the comms, and I need to know if you all were fine," you reply. "I was worried, and I need to move in on the Sound Village, but it's not looking too welcoming, so I needed you to know... in case we don't make it out. Are you guys alright over there?"
"Yeah, we are, for right now," Itachi answers hesitantly. "We grossly underestimated their numbers bro... Remember that Zetsu guy? The one that showed up after we beat Sasori and Orochimaru? Well, either he has a large family, or he has a lot of clones. I don't think it's a Shadow Clone either..."
"Experiment subjects?"
"Most likely..." Itachi answers. "We had to lay low when Madara came by with an entire army of them".
"What?!"
"He has at least 2 thousand of them with him, he wasn't even trying to hide his numbers," Itachi adds. "They're heading to the southern most hideout. At least, that's what we think. We might have to rethink things a little. What do you think?"
"I could reverse summon you all here," you think aloud. "Or, we could just meet up at the village and rethink this whole thing. If he's got 2 thousand men to spare... we... are... well, we're ****ed".
"Articulate and eloquent as always big brother".
"Yeah well, I try... But seriously... for now let's just..." ---------------------- A: Let me reverse summon your group and infiltrate the Sound Village B: Let me reverse summon your group and regroup at the Leaf C: Keep doing what you're doing, I'm infiltrating the Sound Village for now D: Keep doing what you're doing, I'm going to sit here and examine this a little bit longer E: Free Will
"Itachi, you keep doing what you're doing," you continue. "I'm going to hang back a little, do as much scouting as I can. and then worse comes to worse, we're all sharing a link via Shared Consciousness. If you need to speak with me, or even Jiraiya, you can go ahead and do that. Although I hope things don't get so dangerous that you have to use the jutsu to speak to Jiraiya".
"Yes, I hope so as well," Itachi replies. "Be ready for an emergency evac just in case though. I have no idea what Zetsu is capable of, and if Madara has shown anything to us thus far, he's shown himself to be extremely cunning. If he's moving this many men at once, I wouldn't be surprised if this is just a fraction of his forces. He probably is moving them out of necessity, I wouldn't see him taking the chance to reveal this any other way".
"Hmm... yeah, to march on the Leaf?"
"Maybe, I hope not though," Itachi confesses. "But at least we know what Madara is capable of... somewhat. He's been busy. But, let me get back to this. We'll talk later".
You open your eyes and see Randel maintaining point with his Door Knocker. He notices you coming out of your jutsu.
"Are you well, sir?" Randel asks calmly.
"I'm fine Randel, thanks," you reply. "Still not done though. So please, keep my ass out of the fire alright?"
You make the seals necessary and cast Earth Eyes. You feel all your senses bond with the earth itself as you move through the rock and limestone towards the Sound Village. You see that there are seasoned mercenaries all over the inner walls, with expert shinobi marksman on the towers you noted earlier. You go deeper and deeper into the village, and you don't see a single person you would classify as a civilian. When you get to the very back of the village, you feel the presence of another seal or barrier. Exactly like the one you felt at what you suspect is the northern hideout.
You are concerned that entering the barrier might alarm them to your presence. So you use your jutsu to go underground and see if the facility can be seen from there. Luckily, it can. But what you see isn't pretty... It's completely disgusting. You witness lifeless husks walking around, bumping into each other mindlessly. Any humanity that was in them is now gone. These must be the experiments of Orochimaru and Madara as well... Their evil knows no bounds. They have to be stopped.
As you continue to probe around you eye something extremely discouraging. You see Zetsu, and about 5 thousand more of his clones just standing there, aimlessly. Now you're sure, this base belongs to Orochimaru, and this village is just a cover for his forces. You scour the village for another half hour, but don't find anyone other than Kabuto. He appears to be the only Akatsuki member here. After an exhaustive search, you dispel your jutsu.
Hmmm.... you think to yourself. If you remember correctly, and you always do, the Village Hidden in Sound were on the list for the chunin exams that were about to be held in the village in the coming months... This is interesting... Is it possible that Orochimaru has a similar army at each of his hideouts? This is all very helpful...But how should you use this information? --------------------- A: Inform Itachi that the whole thing is off for now. They have an army down there. Let's regroup at the village B: Inform Itachi and ask him what he thinks. C: Wait it out til you hear from Itachi D: Mention to Itachi about the upcoming chunin exams. E: Free Will
"Alright, cover me again, this just gets better and better," you say frustrated before entering your jutsu. You search out Itachi's mind.
"Something on your mind 21?" Itachi asks as soon as you enter his subconscious.
"Wow, you adapt fast," you remark. "Something I wanted to run by you".
"Go ahead, we're not going anywhere," Itachi responds. "Unfortunately, the army has halted their march. From what I can gather, they're trying to decide where to go. Although some extra stragglers are joining the march little by little. It's making me wonder how many of these Zetsu clones are actually out and about. And where they are... This seems like he's setting up for a war".
"I might have a lead about that," you answer. "At the Sound Village, they have about 5 thousand of those Zetsu clones. We're talking serious numbers below the village, in clones alone. Above the village, well, there's not a single civy. They are all seasoned shinobi or mercenaries. It's not a village at all, it looks more like a staging area for an attack party. And I found Kabuto. He's here overseeing the entire op, he obviously isn't the mediocre medical-nin he made himself look like".
"So at the very least, we're dealing with maybe around 10 thousand Zetsu clones," Itachi adds pensively. "And we're being conservative in that estimate. We don't know what Zetsu is capable of... and we still can't account for the other members of the Akatsuki. I can't imagine a group so powerful that they can put something like this together. Every single one of them must be a monster".
"Well, just look at the ones we have seen. Every single one is powerful enough to endanger an entire village. And I recognized the name of the Sound Village. It had been nagging me for a while, and I just couldn't remember. But I do now... they're slated to come to our village in 6 months to participate in the chunin exams".
"What?" Itachi questions you. You can tell by his tone that he isn't taking this well. "I wish they would just leave everyone be. They already own land, why aren't they satisfied with that? Allow me a moment, I must inform Jiraiya".
"Yeah, good idea," you agree. "Get them up to speed, and then I can bring them in here and we can all talk about it".
"Great... a party inside my head," Itachi comments sarcastically before disappearing.
You wait patiently before Itachi reappears. You use your jutsu to link the minds of Jiraiya and Tsunade.
"This is amazing," Tsunade says as she examines her environment.
"Leave it to the younger generation to outdo you at every turn," Jiraiya says with a laugh. "Now, what's all this I hear about a Zetsu clone army?"
"Yeah, and the Sound Village is coming to the Hidden Leaf in half a year for the chunin exams," you add. "I want to wipe out the bases, but we'd need some serious firepower to do this. Besides, we can't account for the defenses hidden within each individual base. What if the Akatsuki use the bases as summer homes? We just stroll in there expecting to shut it down, and now we have a full out battle with people strong enough to level villages".
"And we still don't have a clue about their numbers," Jiraiya mutters to himself. ":Can you use that Golem Substitution technique to at least nab Kabuto?"
"I thought about it," you admit. "But 3 saw our communicators before they were updated. She had such an extreme control over the inanimate, there's a possibility they could have copied our technology. If we kidnap Kabuto, we might lead 3 and Madara right to us. Kabuto doesn't seem indispensable, they saved him from us at the Leaf, and now he's here overseeing the entire base".
"I still think it's a chance we should take, one less Akatsuki is going to be one less enemy in the future. It's even better that Kabuto is important to their plans, we can sabotage them right now," Jiraiya contends.
"Normally, I'd agree," Tsunade states immediately after Jiraiya pauses. "But as it stands right now, we might be best just meeting up and getting rid of the Sound Village. We can't let them get to the point where we have the other Great Ninja Villages questioning why we attacked them at the chunin exams. If we just storm in and take the base now, we could kill off the entire base".
"How are we going to handle the 5 thousand clones underground?" you ask curiously.
"Randel and I can smash the entire thing into the ground," Tsunade admits. "You can also summon the other members of Team 21. This idiot can summon the Chief Toad. We have ways of bringing the village down".
"We could, but I still disagree," Jiraiya argues. "We'd be fighting an army topside anyway. And if we get more members from the Leaf, we're exposing Naruto and Sasuke".
"Not if we bring them along," Itachi adds reluctantly. "If we bring them along, that problem is solved".
"Itachi, are you supporting Tsunade's plan?" you ask hesitantly.
"I think we should do something, but not now," Itachi corrects you. "I think we should just go to the northern base together. That's where you think Juugo is right? Well, we should all go together and get Juugo. That's the only way to save Sasuke from the curse seal for now".
This decision isn't an easy one. You have to choose one. You're just not sure. In your heart, Sasuke's life means more than a hundred lives of strangers... but, you know that's just not the way it is. You know that to keep being a good person, the person that Sasuke admires... You have to choose the greater good. But that doesn't mean you can't save everyone... --------------- Turning Point A: Go with Jiraiya's plan B: Go with Tsunade's plan C: Follow Itachi's plan D: Free Will
"Itachi, we may not get another shot at this," you start reluctantly. "I care for Sasuke too... But you know that if we don't do this right now, many more kids just like him will stand to get hurt. If we can stop them here, we'll cripple their forces".
"I understand," Itachi says, his lack of emotion giving inflection to his voice. "It's the right decision. And it's the logical, ethical choice... It doesn't mean I have to like it".
"Jiraiya, summon Chief Toad," you instruct. "I'm going to bring the others. Slam Gamabunta right on their heads. As soon as I see we're done here, I'm going straight to the north base to get Juugo. So we have to hit them hard and fast, make sure they don't have any time to recover. If we get Akatsuki in the area, we're going to reconsider the battle, and might even have to retreat. We're not looking for a fair fight here. We're looking for a fight we can win with maximum losses to our enemies, with no losses on our end".
Itachi nods and turns around.
"If we get a chance... let's make sure to get Juugo," Itachi says.
"Of course... now, get ready. I'm going to try to summon you here with the communicators in your ears," you explain.
You focus your chakra and bring Jiraiya, Tsunade and Itachi before you. It worked nicely. The communicators are serving several purposes. And your jutsu has been improved upon as well. You're able to teleport them here without having to go over there first, definitely conserving your chakra.
"That was... interesting," Jiraiya says as he stretches his arms.
"Can anyone hear me? This is 21, reaching out to anyone that has their comm on," you call into the comm.
"Yes my child, how can I help you?" Sarutobi-sensei answers. "I usually leave this thing on to monitor your statuses. Great device you made here! Really a breakthrough, we should roll this out to all our shinobi squads".
"Thank you sensei," you reply. "We have an update for you. With your permission, I'd like to use Shared Consciousness on you, and the rest of the team members. I have huge news. Do you know where they are? I need everyone, even the kids..."
"Hmmm, this sounds pressing," he replies. "I will gather them all up. Give me ten minutes".
You wait around patiently for a bit. Everyone is on their toes and a little antsy, except Itachi. Itachi seems to have his mind somewhere else entirely.
"21, I managed to gather everyone, even Koetsuji volunteered to come," Sarutobi-sensei's update rattles you from your thoughts.
"Alright," you state. "This justu is going to be a little overwhelming at first... But just trust me. Let my memories explain themselves to you. You'll get used to it. My memories will become your memories after this".
You use your Shared Consciousness to connect with the entirety of Team 21. You feel their confusion to begin with, but they slowly accept it, and the jutsu runs smoothly.
"Most condemning," Sarutobi-sensei points out, now all the team members are inside your head. "I will go as well".
"Sensei, you mustn't," Jiraiya protests as he walks forward. "The Leaf needs you. If something happens to you, it'll be chaos. There might even be a civil war to see who would succeed you. We can't risk that".
"Listen here boy," Sarutobi-sensei responds gravely. "You might be a Sannin, and a great Sage. You might even be middle aged. But you're still my pupil. And you WILL respect your sensei's wishes. Itachi and 21 are right to be concerned about Sasuke. If I join the battlefield, it is one more person for your cause, for the cause of the entire world. And it means that you won't be as undermanned when 21, Itachi and Sasuke leave the field".
"Lord Hokage?!" Kakashi exclaims. "You imply for them to leave the skirmish before the fight has been decided? Do you think that's wise? We have no idea what awaits them at the north base, not to mention we have no idea what could happen in the Sound Village. The numbers are stacked against us, that's for sure. But we should be able to deal with it well enough.. but if the Akatsuki come and join them to even up the odds? We're going to need 21 to give us an emergency evac".
"You're right, of course," Sarutobi-sensei agrees. "Which is why I am giving 21, a 5 minute time limit. We all know that 5 minutes in a fight is an eternity. But today, we shall be fighting for much longer than that. 21, you have 5 minutes after the initial drop to find Juugo and teleport him into the Intelligence division to be restrained. I will inform the Yamanaka to enter his mind and subdue him until we have the chance to come and speak with him properly".
"So we go in hard, start our first pass," you reply. "Then, after bringing the roof down on the Zetsu clones, you want us to go get Juugo? I'm afraid I have to side with Kakashi on this one sensei. I'm not for splitting our numbers".
"I've never been one to let a member of the Leaf suffer," Sarutobi answers. "Besides, these are my orders. We go in, we try to destroy the base and cause a cave in. If there's anything waiting to surprise us, you can stay for that. But then I want you to immediately go and find Juugo. 5 minutes is not long enough for a full scale infiltration. But unfortunately, given what you've told me, I truly believe they will move Juugo after today. We may never find him... And if they are going to be placing these Curse Seals on everyone, we MUST have Juugo safely hidden away in our village to counter that".
Sarutobi-sensei is speaking soundly. There's no flaw to his reasoning... But you don't feel comfortable leaving the battlefield... There are so many random variables that could happen that would immediately turn the situation sour... Naruto could get enraged... that would be very bad. Regardless, you've been ordered directly. There is no alternative.
"Please teleport us there in five minutes," Sarutobi-sensei instructs. "Koetsuji, will you be joining us?"
"I will," he replies calmly. "However, I must go and hide my features. I will transform my appearance. I can not risk anyone knowing I'm not behind bars".
"You're a good man," Kakashi says with a nod of his head.
"You all, I feel very indebted to you," Koetsuji admits. "Besides, we are fighting for freedom this day. And this will help in freeing my home and family".
"And the minute we're done, we will see about Bellhelm," you state. "I haven't forgotten about that. We just have so many other things"-
"No, I completely understand," Koetsuji says cutting you off as he raises his hand. "I don't want you to even think I doubted any of you. Let's do this, before more suffer".
"Excellent then," Sarutobi-sensei states. "Five minutes 21. Please believe in my decision".
And with that, he disappears. The rest of the team look around at one another awkwardly. He wasn't really acting like himself.
"The Third has taken these last string of events very badly 21," Kakashi informs you. "He feels as if he has been failing his village. He is even contemplating stepping down. He thinks that the new generation is surpassing the old, and that it's about time he recognize that he's been surpassed. He has always felt that he shouldn't be Hokage right now to begin with... what with the Fourth and all..."
"Now it makes sense," Jiraiya says. "I haven't been around him as much as I usually am... but it definitely sounds like the old man..."
"No one could replace Sarutobi-sensei, that's just a foolish notion," Tsunade says. "There isn't a single shinobi worthy of succeeding him. This idea is so idiotic, I won't even give it further thought".
Tsunade disappears as well. Kakashi shrugs and closes his eyes while doing his nervous smile. Whew... a lot to take in before a major battle. You dispel your jutsu and wait the five minutes before summoning the entire team.
"You all brought the medkits I prepared for you in case of an emergency JUST like this one, right?" you ask hesitantly.
"I felt you in my mind advising us to do so," Kakashi says. "I didn't forget, and I made sure that everyone brought theirs as well".
Naruto smiles a really toothy grin. He seems to be in a good mood.
"You sure look chipper," you say with a smile of your own before playing with Naruto's hair. "What's got you so cheerful?"
"This is going to be my first, OFFICIAL! Fight! This is gonna be SO COOL!" Naruto answers and giggles to himself.
Sasuke crosses his arms, trying to be cool.
"Yeah, but it's not like a big deal or anything Naruto," Sasuke says playing it off. "We are ninja after all. It was just a matter of time".
"You're SO FULL OF IT!" Naruto says as they start arguing back and forth. You let the kids at it for a while, let them loosen up before the storm comes crashing down all around them.
You decide to talk to Randel who is next to Kakashi. Kakashi is just scanning the area, Randel is nervously fiddling with his lantern. Guy walks up to you and crouches down, also scanning the area. Koetsuji comes and places his hand on Guy's shoulder.
"This won't be easy Kakashi," Guy says. "We're outnumbered, at least 500 to 1".
"It's actually a tad higher than that," Koetsuji corrects. "Especially if those clones that are underground end up playing a part in this melee. We will definitely be fighting for more than five minutes Sarutobi-sama".
Sarutobi-sensei hears his name being called and comes to join you all. Naruto and Sasuke are still bickering, and you finally see a smile on Itachi's face. Jiraiya and Tsunade are talking about something in private, it seems serious.
"They are obviously not a village, anyone could tell that," Sarutobi-sensei suggests. "But why would they be so bold to make it so obvious?"
"I don't like it," Kakashi says, finally breaking his silence. "There's something more at play. I feel like we're being baited".
"Somethings been nagging at me too," you admit hesitantly. "I got the same impression. First, Madara marches an army of clones where Itachi was, and now they just happen to all be standing around? With Kabuto being the only major player here? It doesn't seem right".
"It is rather careless," Sarutobi-sensei adds. "It's especially uncharacteristic of Madara. He has been playing everything perfectly. Do you think perhaps this is a miscalculation?"
"No..." you reply. "I think this village could pass for a village started by survivors of the village Juugo destroyed. And to be honest, there very well might be people from that village in there. But if this isn't a trap, and I really hope it isn't, but if this isn't a trap, it can only mean one thing".
"What's that?" Kakashi asks anxiously waiting your answer.
"The trees were uprooted and burned," you recap. "That's obviously to prevent against my Green Animation jutsu. But apparently, they didn't count on my Earth Eyes jutsu. Madara might not be aware of that technique. If that is the case, then we need to figure out what else he doesn't know about me".
"You might very well be right my child," Sarutobi-sensei says. "Especially since Madara is desperate to replicate the process that led to your abilities...It's odd that he wouldn't know about that".
"If he doesn't know about Earth Eyes, then it's because 3 doesn't have it," you hypothesize. "I could be wrong though. And this might be a huge trap we're walking into".
"I could go in there myself," Koetsuji suggests. "Before we attack that is. I'm one of the faster members here. I can signal you all to launch an attack if I feel it's safe to attack. I'd be able to dodge your initial volley, and they shouldn't recognize me here".
"It's risky," Guy says. "If you're caught, you might be able to signal us, but you'll probably die in the process".
"I'm ready for that," Koetsuji states.
"I could send in my ninja hounds," Kakashi says. "They probably will go unnoticed in such a busy village. People might just think they're ordinary dogs. It's not like it would be unheard of".
"They do have dogs in that village," you reply. "But they're much bigger dogs than the majority of your ninja hounds. They're war dogs".
"It's just a thought," Kakashi contends. "It's better to endanger them. My link with them ensures that I can desummon them as soon as I feel they're in trouble".
"If that's the case," Jiraiya says as he walks towards you. "Why don't you let the Toads determine if it's a trap or not? They can DEFINITELY hold their own". ----------------- A: Follow Jiraiya's plan B: Follow Kakashi's plan C: Follow Koetsuji's plan D: Free Will
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:14:33 GMT
"We're ready to commence the attack then?" you ask after discussing your plan and strategy of attack.
No one shows any sign of disagreement, you decide to continue.
"Very well, then I will begin my preparations," you announce. "As soon as I can verify through my golems that it's safe to proceed we will".
"I must prepare sage mode as well," Jiraiya informs as he crouches down to the floor.
"Sage mode?! That sounds awesome! What's it like Jiraiya-sensei?!" Naruto cheers.
Jiraiya looks at him and chuckles. He then goes on to explain sage mode, adding flavor to the story by informing Naruto that he is the only man alive who could enter sage mode. Naruto gets so elated, he begins to beg Jiraiya to teach him sage mode.
You smile at the moment they're having, and get back to business. You summon a massive swarm of insect golems and send them towards the village. Once at the village, you can hear them say there is no traps by the looks of everything. And they sense no chakra at all. You set them up around various strategic points in the city where you believe they will cause the most damage, and create an opportunity to cause a cave in on top of the Zetsus.
"It's not a genjutsu," you inform the others. "Had it been a genjutsu, I obviously would have been affected, through the scouter bugs. And they also can't find any semblance of a trap. I think we're good".
"Fine! Stop your begging," Jiraiya exclaims. "I will get you to the Pa Toad when you are older and ready. If they deems you worthy, we will both help you in your sage training".
Everyone looks at Jiraiya and Naruto in disbelief. Tsunade clenches her fist and grits her teeth.
"Idiot..................." she growls lowly. You can tell she is being pained by the need to hit Jiraiya, but she's pulling back. This must really be murderous... How strange of a duo they are.
Sage training huh? Maybe you could be a sage too. The Steel Sage? Sage of Steel? Why are you bothering with this, you're about to go engage in a massive war.
Oh... you get it now. This is going to be the biggest fight of your life as well. And not only are you going to be fighting for the lives and freedom of your family, but you're going to be timed. And if you can't get the job done in time... Sasuke will suffer for it... The premise of failure is making you nervous, a bit scatterbrained. You shake your head and focus on the task at hand.
"Miz, for the battle, I want you here," you instruct. "Now, let's recharge my chakra a moment".
You sit down and cross your legs as you wait for Mizuumi to give you some chakra.You feel your chakra replenish, almost immediately. That jutsu was really worth it.
You then proceed to summon L and 100 of your shadow clones.
"So it's come to this then?" L asks. "I can't believe we're doing this".
"Desperate times and all that," you answer.
"I know," L replies. "Just make sure you don't fail in getting Juugo".
"Yeah, well, YOU just make sure you do everything like I would while I'm away. They're counting on strategy, only we know," you retort to L.
"Ummm, Pervy Sage?" you hear Naruto whisper in the background. "Don't you think it's creepy? I mean he's technically arguing with himself, isn't he? And questioning and answering his own sentences..."
"Maybe he's crazy? Maybe the source of his genius comes from the fact that he suffers from multiple personalities disorder?" you hear Jiraiya laughingly suggest behind your back.
"Idiots.." Tsunade exclaims before you hear a bop on what sounds like a skull.
Well, guess she couldn't hold that in much longer. You see Jiraiya sit down and concentrate for a moment. You sit down as well and use your new jutsu to extract even more chakra from Mizuumi.
"There's well over half of his reserves in there L," you explain. "If you need the chakra, fall back and get it from Mizuumi".
L salutes you playfully and walks over to Jiraiya to observe his technique. You turn to Itachi and Sasuke. Itachi takes a knee and pokes Sasuke in the forehead before placing his hand on his shoulder.
"I'm very proud of you Sasuke," Itachi says. "I want you to keep it together out there. When 21 gives the word, you're to drop everything you're doing and run to him. We might only get one chance at this".
Sasuke nods his head. Back to Jiraiya, L and Naruto, you hear a noise and then smoke appears in the center of them.
"I'd like to present to you Ma and Pa Toad," Jiraiya says with a proud look on his face. He motions with his hand down towards the floor. "They are some of the finest shinobi this world has ever known".
You see two small toads in the middle of the ground. Naruto's lips quaver as he tries to hold back a laugh. He wasn't successful. It wasn't long at all before Naruto began to outcry with boisterous laughter. Jiraiya hangs his head in shame.
"And just who is this Jiraiya-chan?!" Pa told asks.
"Please, Fuuuka-sama," Jiraiya says with reverence, "forgive the boy. I will tell you all about it later. Right now, we have a big problem. Kind of a world endangering one".
"Go ahead and give them the particulars Jiraiya," you explain politely bowing to the small toads. "I am pleased to make your acquaintance, my name is 21 honorable masters".
"I like this boy Fuuukasaku!" the female toad exclaims. "He's got manners! You don't see that now in any of today's youth!"
"Yes Shima dear," Fuuukasaku agrees. "Please start from the beginning Jiraiya-chan".
You excuse yourself politely and check around your camp, ensuring that everything is set. Your golems are still fine. Everyone's spirits have been raised with the bickering and joking. Things are looking pretty good. This must be the proverbial calm before the storm. After a short while, Jiraiya calls to you, you walk over.
"They're a little sore at me for not telling them all this earlier," Jiraiya admits. "But other than that, they understand and agree with our actions".
"You better start keeping us in the loop Jiraiya-chan! This is not a game!" Fuuukasaku exclaims before bopping Jiraiya on the head. Funny, it seems Jiraiya just has that effect on people. "If Madara is involved, this is an extreme situation. Jiraiya-chan has detailed some of your exploits boy. He seems to think highly of you and Naruto. Today, we shall prove if it's merited rightfully".
"Yes sir, Fukasuka-sama," you say with another bow. The elder Toad smiles at you.
The two toads jump onto his shoulders and begin concentrating.
"Is everyone ready?" you ask. Everyone murmurs their agreement. You look back to Jiraiya, and witness his steady transformation into Sage mode.
"Wow, you look hideous!" Naruto screams before laughing. He's not exactly lying...
"I'm ready," Jiraiya says confidently. "I will summon the Chief Toad, Gamabunta, as soon as you explode your golems, just as planned".
You order your golems to explode in waves, so as to allow Jiraiya to summon his Toads.
"Everyone! Charge! Jiraiya, your summons! Now!" you command forcefully.
Jiraiya summons three gigantic toads into the field and jumps on the biggest one's back. He starts screaming something. You hear nothing but utter pandemonium from the Sound Village as the golems continue to explode. Jiraiya and his massive toads jump into the village, squashing everything underfoot. You run to join the war effort.
"Just as planned," you say to yourself with a smile.
You hear Tsunade scream as she jumps up into the air and punches the earth underneath her. You see Randel activating his lantern, the eerie blue light emanating from it chills the enemy soldiers to their core. Team 21 is destroying everything that is still standing. You reflect back on some of what your team members said, as you cut through an enemy's neck with your kunai.
Tsunade, Jiraiya, and Itachi made it seem like destroying an entire village would be light work. At this point, you begin to understand why. You hear Randel's battlecry as he slams his giant weapon, the Door Slammer into the ground. The ground shakes under Tsunade and Randel's combined might.
You witness the giant toads stepping on enemies and jumping up into the air and stomping down back onto the village. Shockwaves erupt, sending dust and dirt throughout the village. Until you feel the entire ground collapse under your feet.
The battleground seems secure enough to complete phase 2 of the plan. There are still thousands of enemy shinobi and mercenaries, but they should be handled easily by your team. You look for Itachi and Sasuke but get mauled by a mercenary. You get him off of you with reckless force and send a lightning bolt into his chest as he flies through the air, dead before he even hits the ground. Itachi spots you and starts making his way to you, stopping briefly to break an enemy's neck before being near you. Sasuke was near Itachi the entire time.
"Where's Naruto?!" you exclaim into the comm.
"Relax, he's with me," Kakashi says, the war littering his message.
"Let's go," you instruct to Itachi and Sasuke. "Team, commencing part 2".
You grab onto your little brothers and use your jutsu to teleport to where you believed Juugo to be. It's definitely the cliffside you saw, where the trees spoke of.
"There's definitely a barrier of some kind here," Itachi states. His frustration and anger is almost palpable. "But we only have 5 minutes. I can dispel it, but that might take minutes alone, depending on how powerful it is. I'd rather smash it. We can handle whatever enemy comes our way. Look at how easily we dispatched an entire village!"
"Itachi... this isn't like you," you comment incredulously. "If we smash it, the base will be on full alert. We might lose Juugo altogether".
"We can find another way in as well, maybe using Head Hunter," Itachi says, almost apologetically. "We must save Sa-chan. But finding another way in might take even longer than dispelling the barrier".
Sasuke looks at you both nervously.
"Itachi..." you start. ------------------ Turning Point A: "I don't like it, but go ahead and smash the thing open" B: "I'm afraid we're just going to have to find another way in..." C: "Do as you please Itachi, I only wish to protect my family. But you're not acting like my little brother Itachi right now" D: "We will remove the barrier and risk the time delay". E: Free Will
"Earth Eyes," you say after completing your handseals and slamming your fist into the ground.
You scour through the earth, in all directions, frantically looking for your target. Time is of the essence, and you haven't disobeyed Sarutobi-sensei's orders yet. You don't want to start now.
The base itself is deep, with many compartments underground. You scour it for an entire minute, but you found Juugo. He's in a cell underground, attached to the machine.
"Get BACK and STAY HERE!" you warn.
Knowing that Itachi can't regenerate his chakra like you can, you create a giant fissure. The base crumbles in place, but you know the structure would hold. Itachi screams to you. He loudly demands you give him an answer. You hear people screaming above ground, they think it's an earthquake. Fools. You repeatedly cast Fissure upon massive Fissure. You feel the drain on your chakra, you're nearing 1/3 total capacity... This is going to be close.
You break into Juugo's room. A medical-nin shouts in shock as you appear through the rip you've created through the earth. You shut him up with a kick to his left temple.
"There's someone who needs you Juugo of the Scales," you advise. You can't warrant a fight here, and you know Juugo to be extremely temperamental and deadly while enraged.
"What?! What's going on?!" the red haired young man exclaims.
"There's a young man, my little brother," you say with anxiety littering your voice. "I need you to remove the Curse Seal from him. He will die if you don't".
"What? But, I need to stay here where I can't hurt anyone else!" Juugo argues.
"I know all about you," you say honestly. "And I know what Orochimaru is doing to you. He is my father. I'm his experiment as well. He's experimenting on you! Don't you want to help heal? You're not such a bad guy, just got caught up in a bad situation. I bet I can cure you, make it so you'll never hurt anyone ever again. I KNOW I CAN. I'm his son, but I don't want to hurt anyone. I want to SAVE my little brother, and you're the only one who can help me undo the wrong my father did with YOUR genetics!"
Juugo shakes his head.
"I... believe you," he says hesitantly. "And I've heard of you. We call you "He Without a Name". I thought you were a myth".
"We don't have time, there's a ton going on, can I explain on the way?" you question desperately.
Juugo nods, and you immediately jet towards him and use FGG to teleport back to Itachi and Sasuke.
"I'm sending you three to the coordinates sensei advised," you instruct firmly. "Juugo, this is Sasuke, my youngest brother. And this is Itachi. They will protect you. Itachi, I made this man a promise. Please protect him".
"Very well, brother," Itachi says with a tear of joy and sadness running down his eye. "I can see your chakra... you're overextending yourself. You're going to die".
"No, I won't," you say as you look down at your watch. "We don't have time! I will replenish with Mizuumi. Get Juugo to the Yamanaka's! They will ease his mind, and then when I get home, I'll destroy Juugo's curse".
"It shall be as you command, my brother," Itachi replies reluctantly. You can feel his misery.
"If... for whatever reason, I don't make it out... Give Juugo an emergency syringe to the heart," you instruct. "If I'm right, it will remove him of his curse, and reconstitute his genetic makeup to a perfect version. It won't be triggered by emotions anymore".
Juugo looks at you and gasps.
"Good luck," you say as you use your technique and they disappear before your eyes.
You clearly hear Itachi say "Don't you die on me".
The exhaustion makes you fall down to your knees. You cast FGG once more and return to battle. The battle is going well, you accomplished your task with 30 seconds to spare. But you're exhausted and near the point of death. Sarutobi-sensei rushes towards your side.
"Sensei..." you say softly as you run your tongue to the back of your dry mouth. Your throat itself feels grainy. "I made it with time to spare. Don't do it sensei, we need you".
"Don't do what my child?! Why did you tax yourself so much?!" Sarutobi-sensei shouts.
"I realized why you're here, with us," you admit. "I know what you plan to do to Madara. We can handle him, we can handle everyone".
You cough as you tell Mizuumi to come to your side.
"And Itachi? Was the mission successful?"Sarutobi-sensei inquires.
"Yes, was the mission successful? And what mission exactly was it?" you hear Madara's familiar voice calling to you. He's walking towards you and Sarutobi-sensei with A LOT of back up. You recognize Zetsu, Orochimaru, and Kabuto. There's a new shinobi there that you don't recognize, even though he wears the dark cloak with red clouds as well. He wears a mask covering his entire face, minus his strange eyes. His eyes are... red and green. You think. Your vision's fading in and out. Behind that shinobi is another shinobi with long hair, silver you think, maybe blonde. He carries a large scythe. You think it's red, maybe purple.
Where could Sasori and 3 be?
Behind their initial group, are at least about a thousand White Zetsu clones.
You feel Mizuumi approaching behind you. Madara looks at Mizuumi and scoffs.
"I do have 3 here, you know?" Madara states confidently. "Just because you don't see her, doesn't mean she's not here. What is that rust bucket going to do against her?"
You see the rest of Team 21 jump in front of you and Sarutobi-sensei, who is still holding you in his arms.
"Hiruzen, seriously, call off your dogs," Madara advises. "If I wanted them all dead, they would be. 21 is more than half dead. I can save him. Don't you care about him? You obviously can't escape. Your one ticket out of here is out of chakra. Let's negotiate".
"Yes, let us negotiate," Sarutobi-sensei says as he gently places you on the ground and stands up.
"I want you to pick the Fifth Hokage 21," Sarutobi says to you directly. "The rest of you, do as 21 instructs for now".
Sarutobi-sensei walks through Team 21 and steps before Madara, about 20 feet away from him.
"No one interfere," Madara commands to his crones. "I want to see if I was truly worthy of the title back when Hashirama stole it from me. What do you think Sandaime? Or would you prefer I call you Shinobi no kami? It's all the same to me".
The smug bastard. He really wishes to try his hand against Sarutobi-sensei. You look around as best you can, your mind and soul still reeling from the Third's last statement and your almost nonexistent chakra levels. You could use chakra transfer and Madara would never expect that. But then would do you do with that chakra? ------------------------- Ultra Clutch Moment, lots of people can die here A: Use Fissure, the biggest one possible and divide and battlefield and retreat B: Slowly make scouter bugs with increased explosive potency and have them crawl to the otherside of the battlefield C: Summon a plasma clone to explode in the middle of their group and retreat D: Create a golem and them cast Living Plasma on it to divide their unity E: Free Will
You guys can fight if you want, or you can retreat. There are no bonuses or penalties to either. So don't think that you HAVE to do one or the other. Obviously one comes with greater risks. You might be able to kill a few Akatsuki, but do you wish to endanger your team members?
"Hey Madara!" you say at the top of your lungs. You crawl towards the group weakly, and stare at L for a second. You begin your chakra transfer jutsu, and can feel L pulling chakra from Mizuumi as well. "Who are the two new members of your outfit?! You bothered that we smashed your little base to the ground?"
"Ah 21, how it pains me to see you like this," Madara says honestly. "I took great lengths to ensure my plans go by smoothly. And I'll admit, you destroying the Sound Village is a slight hindrance, but that's all it is. I expected more out of you".
"I'm here to please," you reply to Madara as you continue to crawl further. Your chakra is now complete. "You took advantage of the fact I have no chakra. How long did you wait in the corner before you gained enough courage to face us?"
"21, I'm shocked, I didn't think you were expecting a real fight," Madara says as he begins to scoff. "What warrior would really put themselves on a level playing field? I thought you knew more than that!"
"These Leaf ninja... they sure are... hardy," the man with dark red and green eyes speaks. He has a deep, booming voice. "I still do not think our presence here was necessary.."
"Let's kill them all and make the sacrifice to Lord Jashin already!" the man in the back with the long hair and scythe exclaims. He speaks brutishly, and his eyes... don't look right. "This is one hell of an offering! I don't care whether he wants to or not! We're doing this!"
"Still yourself," his partner with the red and green eyes instructs. He focuses his eyes on you. "50 thousand..."
"What are you talking about now you idiot?!" the long haired man shouts at his partner. "He is not a bounty, he is a sacrifice. Only Lord Jashin shall benefit from the bounty! You DARE stand in my way?!"
"Enough!" Madara says. "You will all get what you want. I am sure that there are enough here to divide as we see fit. Besides, 21 and the jinchuriiki are to be taken alive. They are no good to us dead. The rest... are of no interest. Come Hiruzen, defend your beliefs against mine. Show me your strength".
Blast it... they wouldn't give you their names... You and L use FGG on your entire party, and you end up in front of the Hokage Mansion. L disperses and his experiences flow into you. It was a tough fight while you were away, and Sarutobi-sensei was in the think of it. It seems he wasn't expecting to make it through this battle after all...
Everyone changes their attention from you to Sarutobi. Who seems disappointed and relieved at the same time.
"Sarutobi-sensei, I couldn't allow that fight to happen," you begin to explain. "The Village needs you. And the fact that we still don't know about their numbers, or who those two new men are. For all we knew, Sasori and 3 were waiting in the wings. Any attack we would have committed to would have been countered, and then, your technique is revealed and we are left at a disadvantage. We have to distract our enemies, divide them, and then conquer them".
"You are right, of course," Sarutobi-sensei answers. "It seems Madara controls each of them by manipulating what they are after. That one with the scythe mentioned Jashin... I can say I've never heard of Jashin, although he made him seem like a kami or emperor. While the other was just interested in money".
"The group is eventually going to fall apart," Jiraiya says softly as he removes Ma and Pa Toad from his shoulders. He returns to normal.
"Do not be so surprised if it lasts," Sarutobi suggests. "I'm going to see what the Yamanaka have found from your work, 21".
The Third turns without hesitation and starts walking away. You all stand there dumbfounded and watch as he leaves.
"He was planning to use the Death Reaper Seal," you say aloud. "I think it would have been a sacrifice in vain. I'm sure Sasori or 3 would have intervened somehow".
"Most likely," Kakashi says thoughtfully. "However, we can not continue to rely on your jutsu for so much. They will find a way to neutralize it. It's becoming too much of a nuisance. We only escaped today because when you initially arrived, you were near death and they didn't know about your chakra transfer jutsu. They will be better prepared in the future".
"You're right," you reply solemnly. "The rest of you, we should all rest. If the opportunity presents itself, we should try to find information on them. I wonder how many number the Akatsuki... I'm going to check up on Sasuke".
You all say your farewells and you meet up with Sasuke and Itachi, who are resting at their home. You're delighted to see that the curse seal is gone. Itachi had grown worried you wouldn't return, and injected Juugo with the emergency syringe, like you instructed. He reported that Juugo felt immediately at peace, and wasn't feeling the heavy burden he once felt. After describing your experiences you give your thanks and depart, heading to meet with Juugo. You find Sarutobi-sensei overlooking the Yamanaka interrogation procedure.
Juugo is hooked up on a chair, and you see Inoichi is probing his mind.
"I hear that boy is also cured," the Third says. "You've done such a good job. It is common to be surpassed by the young in this world. I was once told that should be your only objective as a teacher, to be surpassed by your students. If your students don't surpass you, then that is your failure as a teacher, not theirs as a student. I shouldn't be the Hokage right now. It should be poor Naruto's father... who has given so much to this village, and continues to give even after death through his son".
"That's nonsense sensei," you argue. "You have always been a great leader. No one argues that, and everyone wants you in that position".
"The chunin exams are coming up," Sarutobi-sensei says dismissively. "I will oversee them, as if everything is normal, and after they are done, I will name my successor. You shall pick my successor. Whether it's you, or a friend of your choosing, or someone else entirely. I leave the future of this village in the hands of those that are our future. I am much too old for this".
"What about the time before then?" you ask incredulously. "Madara is going to be seriously pissed we just trashed two of his bases".
"I have stated before that in terms of Madara, I think it best to wait before risking our resources," he replies. "Do you know what would have happened if we had engaged their group? We would have been slaughtered, like children. They had the field, they knew what was where, they had the men to back up their will. And they had us at a disadvantage because we knew nothing about them, but they know what we can do, and how we all fight. It is foolish to treat any members of the Akatsuki as weaklings. I am sure they are all extremely powerful. They have joined for different reasons, but they were formed because Madara willed it. And what is Madara hunting? Tailed beasts and you. These are not small game. You do not bring a small dagger to kill a bear. What Madara hunts, is ten thousand times bigger than a bear. Every member of the Akatsuki is to be treated as an extremely dangerous foe. You will not underestimate them in the future. All of your enemies won't be like Orochimaru and gloat to you about what he can do before killing you. Some of your opponents will just go in for the kill, and if that happens, and we're not ready, many of us will die".
He exhales as if a giant weight has just been lifted off his shoulders.
"I've come to love all of you, as my sons," he continues. "After announcing my successor, I will explain the Akatsuki threat to the other villages. If they choose to listen, excellent. If they choose not to, then their blood will be on their hands".
You sigh as Sarutobi-sensei walks away. You could feel the frustration Sarutobi-sensei was feeling. You feel like you're not really making much progress. Sure, a couple bases were destroyed, but Sarutobi's speech wasn't overblown. You still don't know how many Akatsuki there are, and what they're capable of. The two new ones, you don't even have a name for them. The chunin exams are around 5 months away... What should you do now? --------------------- Arc Complete + Turning Point + Rewards
Karma Reward- For playing 21 IC A: Master your Regeneration. Make yourself virtually invincible, grant your blood higher healing powers, and make your bones unbreakable/unaffected by 3's Mass Change jutsu. It provides genjutsu resistance, and restores 15 chakra per 6 seconds. B: Increase your chakra pool by 600 C: Increase your stats by 5 stat points D: Master a Jutsu E: Give your golems the ability to cast jutsus
Experience Reward: F: Grant Mizuumi your original level of regeneration G: Give yourselves 2 points of stats, to distribute as you see fit H: Learn 3 S rank jutsu I: Increase your chakra pool to 800 J: Make your golems able to pass as completely human/animal
And what are you doing now? 1: Saving Bellhelm 2: Training Arc 3: Looking around the village for a suitable Hokage 4: Hunt down xxxx
Who are you taking with you on this next arc?
You decide that now is the time to save and liberate Bellhelm. You promised Koetsuji a while ago, and he even helped during the Sound Village mission without any incentive, he deserves to have his home free. You walk around your hometown and inform the team and the Third what's going down and what's necessary. You make yourself to Koetsuji, and find himself chiseling a slab of stone. Behind that slab he's working on, are rows upon rows of Buddha statues, all of varying sizes and weights.
"Wow, that's amazing," you say as you examine his masonry. "Your craftsmanship is... simply remarkable. You do all these by chisel? Yourself?"
"It's a hobby," he answers with a slight smile. "It clears the mind and helps me deal with stress. I call it the Throwing Buddha. It's a technique I came up with to help teach my daughter jujitsu".
"Jujitsu? What's that?" you ask curiously.
"Oh, it's a form of taijutsu I developed," he answers. "I realized that many people do not have the strength to perform normal taijutsu. There are many that simply do not have the ability to manipulate chakra either. So how are these people to defend themselves? That was the motivation, the inspiration if you will, behind jujitsu. It is a form of taijutsu that revolves around manipulating joints, disorienting your enemy, and bringing him to the ground. The strong are much weaker on the ground, and height is irrelevant".
"That's very interesting," you comment aloud. "How does the statue come in?"
Koetsuji laughs to himself knowingly.
"That's pretty interesting," he replies. "I encourage the pupil to find a way to throw this statue. I give some pointers of course, but I allow them to figure it out mostly by themselves. Then, as they grow proficient in throwing the current statue, I change and replace that statue with a slightly bigger one. The student never notices because it's a very small increase in weight and size. It's a little deceptive, but it's very effective".
"I bet it is," you answer with a soft chuckle. "Hey, speaking of your daughter. I wanted to ask you, we're going to Bellhelm soon. Will you be joining us?"
"I'd look forward to being called by my actual name again," he answers. "That would be a nice change of pace. And... it'd be great to see my family again. And if we manage to free Bellhelm, it'd be great to live in peace".
"Hey, we squashed the Sound Village," you mention hoping to encourage him. "Why would Bellhelm be any different?"
"We need a different type of approach to the problem in Bellhelm 21," Koetsuji replies. "It's easy to let go of a sledgehammer and break the wooden floor underfoot. It's much harder to swing that same sledgehammer as hard as you can and hold it from hitting the floor at the last possible second. In Bellhelm we will need to do just that. Hold off until we can strike as hard as we can. Until that precise moment, we can't get caught or arouse any type of suspicion. Madara has many spies in town, not by their choosing mind you. But Bellhelm has become a place of great unrest. If you speak ill against the regime, you are slaughtered in public. If you hear people speaking ill of Madara or his faction, and you don't report it, your entire family is slaughtered in public. The one you call 3 is sometimes there".
"3... is there?" you ask, remembering your last encounter.
"Sometimes," he answers. "There is a lot of enforcement there. People that have been experimented on run the majority of the security. They use genjutsu to force truths from you. This will not be easy. Who else accompanies us?"
"I was going to bring Guy and Kakashi," you explain. "With you, that makes four. Not too big of a group, to avoid arousing attention".
"You don't choose to bring your younger brother, Itachi?" Koetsuji says with a hint of surprise in his tone.
"He hasn't been feeling well," you reply. "I'm giving him time to rest, alongside Sasuke. I informed Jiraiya to train Naruto while we're away. Itachi will work on Sasuke's jutsus too, but it'll be more of a brotherly thing than anything else".
"Hmmm, I'm not sure if leaving Itachi here will be wise," he advises. "But then again, our group is at enough risk. You all have made a very big name for yourselves. Fighting villainy is a fantastic way to spend your life, but it comes at a high price. They took my family from me, because... of that. And well... it doesn't feel good 21. I am concerned that they might recognize us, I know we both share a fondness for reading, so I had wagered you would enjoy this 'light' reading".
He throws several books at your feet softly. You crouch down and read the titles. They are bingo books. Several of them.
"I'm not familiar with this one," you say as you hold up one of the books, it has a green cover.
"Ah, that one," he says as he turns back to his work. "That's not really important, just interesting. Well, maybe it is important. Open it and turn to page... 17 I think, if I remember correctly".
You do as instructed and see your face and name printed on the sheet. It's a bingo book entry, but why are you in a bingo book?! It lists your regeneration, and a slew of other of your abilities. Orochimaru is named as the client. There's a 250 thousand ryo bounty on your head!
"What?! What is this?!" you scream in outrage.
"Did you think that the good guys were the only ones with bingo books?" Koetsuji asks as if he read your mind. "Our enemies have allies as well. And that's a gigantic bounty. I think you might have set a record. There's an entry on all of us. It means we have a lot of trouble. It means the Leaf is in danger... before you know it, every mercenary, scoundrel and cutthroat in the country will be knocking on our door".
You look through the pages in terror and shock. This... can't be.
"It unfortunately is a reality," he informs you, again as if reading your mind. "There is good news however, pick up the red book and turn to page... 34".
You once again do as instructed and see the man with the dark red and green eyes. His name is Kakuzu. But this can't be right... If this is right then he's...
"He's ancient, isn't he?" Koetsuji says, reading your mind a third time.
"How do you do that?!" you exclaim a bit in frustration.
"Read your mind?" Koetsuji asks. "It's not a jutsu... just something I picked up. I can't explain it... It used to bother my old disciple... He was a good boy... Madara took him as well".
You clench your right hand as tightly as you can.
"I know how you feel," Koetsuji explains. "But 21... we might be in over our heads here. I love my wife and daughter... And my disciple is like a son. I love him as well. And I have friends in Bellhelm. Friends that I care deeply about. One of them, has even been called the 'Superman'. But that doesn't change the fact that we are few against many. Take those books. Read up on them. I think Madara is going worldwide with his plans, using Orochimaru as his public face".
"But I don't understand," you stammer. "This suggests that Kakuzu is as old as Madara. How can these two possibly be alive? Did you find anything on the other unknown shinobi? His partner, the loudmouth one?"
"Unfortunately, nothing," he answers with a sigh. "I did a lot of digging, but still came up short. I took the liberty of passing this information onto Sarutobi-san. I hope you don't mind".
"No, thanks," you reply. "He'll make sure to spread it out immediately. This does however put me at a problem. Even though they didn't mention that my blood heals injuries in others, it has been made public knowledge that I regenerate. People will come looking for me, just for that reason alone".
"Yes," Koetsuji nods sadly. "It is a chore. But on the brightside, at least they want you alive. They want the rest of us dead. Except for your two younger brothers and Naruto. Although I doubt they could take Naruto alive..."
You stand up and place the books in your jacket pocket.
"I've got some things I have to sort out," you say, your head drowning. "I have to think about a lot of these things. But we're going to get Bellhelm liberated, just give me a few days to clear my head and think of a way to... change things".
"Good luck 21," Koetsuji adds encouragingly. "You remind me a lot of him, my disciple. You're both good hearted young men, with a lot of promise. Although I will admit, you have much more of an affinity for the martial arts".
You bow and exit his dwelling to make your way to your quarters. You informed Itachi to train to get his Giga Eye under control, and left instructions to the rest of Team 21. Everything had been accounted for, until this. You apparently can't get any good news. Every time you're updated of the situation, it's about another negative development... How depressing...
You make it into your room and close your eyes to lose yourself in deep thought.
For the next several days, you develop several powerful jutsus, and were even able to enhance your regeneration. You did a little bit of experimenting on yourself, and managed to make your bones almost unbreakable. Although morbid, you cut off your own pinkie to test out a theory. You were surprised when your pinkie evaporated into chakra before it even hit the floor and a new one had regrown in its place, good as new.
This was starting to get weird, but at least it was useful. You also found yourself incapable of fatigue. You concluded that your body no longer produces the toxins to make your lungs constrict to prevent overexertion. You're not sure if that's a good thing, or a bad thing. But for the time being, you tried everything and were completely incapable of causing yourself to be even slightly tired.
It was time to leave for Bellhelm, Sarutobi-sensei decided to see you all off. The rest of the team was busy following your advisement, Tsunade was helping at the hospital, while Randel was busy training under Sarutobi-sensei.
"Before you go," Sarutobi sensei says. "Here is the information on the advance team I sent. You'll find enclosed their pictures, and their intelligence reports as they came into my office. Make sure to discard of them before going into Bellhelm. You will identify yourself with the following pass phrase. When Jin speaks to you, he will say 'The sun always rises clearly at this time of year'. You are to respond, 'And yet, it is always lightest before the coming darkness'. Do you understand?"
You nod and thank him. You say your farewells and leave onward to Bellhelm. Time passes by, and before you know it, you're on the outskirts of Bellhelm. It's been setup similarly to the way the Sound Village was. With a difference, Kakashi states that there is a powerful barrier surrounding the entire area of Bellhelm. To get into Bellhelm, there is only one entrance, and it has a powerful group protecting the entrance. It seems Bellhelm is under a full military state.
"If we wait, we could just drop in during the night on the Flying Lion couldn't we?" Guy asks. "I hate having to sneak around like this, but it sure beats having to kick the tar out of those poor souls".
"Lower your voice Guy," Kakashi says in a whisper. "That could work, but if we get caught, this is going to be the shortest infiltration in history. We'll have people fighting us against their will. And I don't think it's going to go over as smoothly as the Sound Village did. I can't remove the barrier without them noticing... Maybe we should just get rid of our things and go in as refugees?"
"They're separated and self sufficient," you deduce. "But they still might have heard about us".
"He's right Kakashi-san," Koetsuji comments. "I could just remove my disguise and hope they don't question why I'm back".
"All reasonable," you conclude. "But I think we're better off..." ---------------------- Clutch Moment A: Going with Kakashi's plan B: Going with Guy's plan C: Going with Koetsuji's plan D: Free will
"Well, let's take a closer look," you say as you inch your way towards the barrier. "Have any idea of what this barrier does?"
"No, not a clue..." Kakashi says hesitantly. "It would have been nice to have Randel here... I wonder if this is a genjutsu barrier. I'm going to check it out myself".
Kakashi drops his gear in front of you, and starts heading into the barrier. He stops, almost in shock as soon as he enters. He turns around, and you note his headband is up, revealing what should be his Mangekyo Sharingan. But insteadd... you just see a dark eye. He steps back to you, out of the barrier, and the Mangekyo Sharingan returns to normal. Kakashi gasps and quickly covers it up with his head band.
"I felt all my chakra leave and return in seconds," Kakashi states, a little winded. "I think that barrier actually removes the ability for chakra to work".
A thought enters your mind.
"I guess we'll just have to rely on good old fashioned taijutsu," Guy states, you think he's actually excited.
You take out a kunai and walk into the barrier yourself. You feel yourself drained as well. You cut your left palm with the kunai, and watch. Your hand heals, but not to the level that you expected it too. You walk out, kunai still in hand.
"Well, at least your regeneration is still intact," Kakashi surmises.
"Not quite," you reply. You show Kakashi your palm before slashing it again. The beginning of the wound is completely healed before you finish cutting your palm.
"WHAT?!" they both exclaim.
"I've been working on my regeneration," you say, just realizing now that your friends haven't seen it in action. "But it doesn't work this fast in the barrier. It works less effectively, like I did before I trained it to this current level".
"How fast can you heal?" Guy asks you concerned.
"Fast enough, I suppose," you answer a bit unsure. "I'd place it somewhere between my last upgrade on the technique, and a step before that... What concerns me most is if my blood will still work to heal you".
"I'm not stepping into that battlefield without a full knowledge of our tools," Kakashi states. "And I know you well enough to say with confidence, that I KNOW you won't either".
"I didn't want to suggest it, but who is willing to get cut for the purpose of science?" you say with a slight chuckle. They're not very amused. "Alright... was just trying to lighten the mood".
"This stinks of Madara and his thugs," Guy comments. "They have no honor, they cower. They don't have a nindo! What shinobi cowers and refuses to face his fate with eyes wide open! Thrusting ever forward with the power and dedication of all their beliefs behind them!"
"I'll do it, before he goes into a full rant," Koetsuji states as he rolls up the sleeve of his kimono and offers his arm.
You slit his forearm, making sure to avoid any major arteries, getting just enough of a vein to ooze out a little blood. You hand him a blood tablet, and you ask him to move forward into the barrier. He does so and then takes the tablet. The wound doesn't close. He steps out of the barrier, and the wound still doesn't close. You give him another tablet, and this time, the wound closes.
"This is very... inconvenient," Koetsuji states. "At least we know ahead of time".
"Let's put all our packs together," you instruct them, caution being the first thing in mind. "I'll warp them to my room in Konoha. Hopefully, we can bring that barrier down, and warp our things back to us. First things first though, we must find this Jin character. But before we can even do that, we got to make it past these guards. Let's make ourselves look extremely filthy, and we'll go with Kakashi's plan".
You all take the time to disguise yourselves to look like refugees. After that is done, and you're all satisfied with the results, you warp the packs back to Konoha. You suppose you really will have to rely on your taijutsu for the time being. You're glad you didn't completely abandon it. You all make your way to the entrance gate, where two guards stop you. They are both wearing the same suit of armor, and carrying spears.
"What's all this? Who are you?" one of the guards ask as he walks towards your group. He's really short.
"We're just travelers sir," you answer with a weak cough. "We have been traveling for days without food. Weeks ago, our caravan was attacked, we've been wandering ever since. But please sir, help us out. We only want lodgings and food. We're starving and thirsty".
"You're filthy as well," the short guard states. "You definitely don't have the build of a warrior, neither does that older guy back there. Go ahead then, spend your coin. He he..."
He turns around and lets the other guard to open up the gate. You walk through the gate and you hear the gate immediately slam behind you.
"Afraid you'll never be leaving," the short guard clarifies with a chortle resembling a pig.
Your group continues walking through the city. Funny, the guard thinks he locked you in here with him and his buddies. The truth is, the guards are all locked in this city with you and your buddies.
As you walk throughout the city, you note that there are guards posted at literally every corner. You've never seen or heard of anything like it. You make it to the town square. There's a huge fountain there, it's run dry, but you suspect that it was once beautiful. You take a seat nearby on a bench.
"And now?" Koetsuji asks as he looks around.
"Now, we see if Jin can make contact with us," you reply. "He had been contacted prior to our arrival. I wonder why people avoid this part of town. Is there still crime going on with all these guards around?"
Koetsuji laughs briefly.
"The guards ARE the crime," he corrects you. "People don't sit here because the guards come here most often. And when they're in a bad moon, they rough up whoever is nearby, which at this moment, would be us".
"Well then, that puts us in a spot," you say as you stand. "We can't exactly get arrested and we can't make ourselves known by punching in a guard's teeth. I guess we got to find Jin ourselves".
"It looks that way", Kakashi says as he adjusts the eye patch he placed over his left eye.
You move away from the fountain and hear a stranger's voice behind you.
''The sun always rises clearly at this time of year''.
''And yet, it is always lightest before the coming darkness," you respond as you turn around. It's Jin, but he's been beaten up pretty badly. "Where's the rest of your group?"
"Follow me 21," Jin instructs as he leads you away and into a dark alley.
Your group follows anxiously and you all lurk around, until Jin feels it's safe enough to talk.
"I came here with two others, but they were captured and arrested," Jin begins. "Our cover hasn't been blown. They were arrested for being 'rowdy at night' or something like that. Phony, trumped up charges. They would have taken me in too, but I bribed the soldiers, so they left me with a severe beating instead. Great trade".
"Well, sorry to hear that," you say with empathy, "We're going to get all our boys home in one piece, you included. So just tell us everything you've observed, and then let us down our thing".
"The layout to this place is insane, like nothing I've seen," Jin continues, his concern at the risk of being arrested is visible. "They have way more guards than any village would ever need, especially a village like this. This is a pretty quiet, out of the way place. The only reason to have guards here is to enforce local laws, not for the security of the citizens. They don't really have anything worth stealing. Not to mention, the local citizens are VERY powerful. They had a dojo... Ryozanpaku I think it was called. There were a bunch of local masters in taijutsu, they all got enlisted or jailed. They felt the dojo was too much of a threat to create 'insurgence'. They closed it down".
"What about the masters? The two young ones, a boy and a girl, about 16 years of age, both of them?" Koetsuji asks fervently.
Jin lowers his head mournfully.
"I'm sorry," Jin says. "The day they closed down the dojo, the ones you spoke about, well the boy... he didn't accept it. He fought when they touched the girl. The Akatsuki were here... Madara feared their power so much he brought several of the Akatsuki here. The ones you've identified as Sasori, 3, and Orochimaru, as well as two others were accompanying Madara. A man with a gigantic sword, and a pretty young girl were here. They didn't hesitate in cutting the boy and the girl down. And then... well... I believe his name was Hayate... He came out. And... Madara took care of him personally".
Koetsuji's face is littered with shock and dismay. He falls down to the floor. You notice goosebumps all over Koetsuji's skin.
"The Elder is... dead?" Koetsuji says, the shock lingering in his voice. He covers his face with his hands to cover the tears that are pouring out of his eyes. "And Kenichi... Miu.."
You place your hand on his shoulder to comfort him. Everyone bows their head in respect. Although you didn't know them, they were surely good people to have been friends with Koetsuji. Koetsuji continues to slowly whimper to himself before clearing the hair from his face and wiping the tears from his eyes.
"21... they killed the 'Superman'. I can't believe it," Koetsuji says pained. "He was revered as the strongest fighter on the entire planet. No one was considered his equal. My fellow masters... must have been dismayed over this".
"They were.." Jin replies softly. "But they still wanted to help. Kensei introduced himself to me. He told me about his plans. He and Sakaki are serving as guards, but only to ration out their food with the hungry, and feed me information".
"And the others?" Koetsuji asks anxiously.
"Apachai has fallen to despair," Jin informs woefully. "Kensei says that Apachai has reverted to the way he was before he met Master Hayate. Shigure hasn't said a word since Kenichi... was taken. And Koetsuji... I'm afraid there is more bad news..."
You felt it. You felt it the moment Jin started his briefing. There was a feeling of foreboding. This must be it.
"When you left the village, to do as Madara ordered," Jin stutters as he speaks. Koetsuji rises up, propping himself up against the wall and using it for support. "He let your wife and daughter go, just as promised... But... the guards... they... killed them".
"WHAT? Why?" Koetsuji states in outrage.
"The guards, most are civilians," Jin replies, fearfully. You place your hand on Koetsuji's chest hoping to discourage violence. He's burning hot.
"They were civilians I mean," Jin clarifies. "They knew what it was like. So they're fair, for the most part. But some are very cruel... Madara left your family at your home. He stated that you had done as ordered, and that he was a man of his word. They were fine for a couple of days, at least that's what I've heard. But when Madara left... the guards barged in. And they... they stole your wife's virtue... They killed your daughter, and ransacked your home. Your home was torched down".
"Who did this?" Koetsuji says with no pitch in his voice. His tone is cold, and his eyes have a deadly sharpness to them.
"We never got the chance to find out," Jin replies. "Apachai killed them... He smashed their helmets so badly, the metal warped and crushed both of their skulls. He's been in jail ever since. They would have killed him, but they're afraid to get near him".
"When did the ordeal at Ryonzanpaku happen?" Koetsuji asks, again, with a disturbing lack of emotion in his voice.
"About a week and a half ago," Jin replies.
"Around the same time frame as the Sound Village," Kakashi comments. "Do you think he recognized you Koetsuji?"
"No, I would have sensed it," he replies. "And from now on, please. Call me Akisame. That is my real name, and I refuse to hide any longer. I have nothing left. For vengeance isn't even an answer".
Kakashi nods as he places his head in his hand. He runs his fingers through his wild hair in silence. Guy has his eyes lowered to the ground, almost as if facing Akisame would be too painful now.
"How did they manage to defeat such strong martial artists Jin?" you ask. You know it's an uncomfortable moment, but that information is crucial.
"The people who are in Madara's trust, hold a special talisman," Jin explains. "This talisman identifies themselves to the populace, but we also suspect that it allows you to manipulate and use your chakra in here. I also made you this, it's a map of the possible points of where the barrier maintains its hold. I know there are a lot of possibilities, but I couldn't get any closer without risking my capture".
Kakashi takes the map and analyzes it. He looks up and around the village several times, checking it's suggestions against the map. He takes out a pen and marks out several points.
"These spots here, can't possibly be it," Kakashi explains as he holds the map to you, pen still in his mouth. He points with his free hand the places he has marked. "This is most likely a 3 point seal. After all, the triangle is the most stable structure in nature. I believe this is a 3 point seal, which will make it impossible to remove from outside. I had considered calling in for backup, but after seeing this map, and walking within the barrier itself, I'd bet my life on it. This barrier was made by a sealing master, a true genius at his craft. The only way to remove it is from the inside".
"But if we remove even one part of the triangle, the entire village will be alerted," Guy states. "I'm not a master, but I can probably remove one part of the seal. But won't all three of them have to be removed at the same time?"
"Most likely, yes," Kakashi states. "Either way, if we remove one of the seals, the village's guards will know about it, especially if their talismans really are keyed into the barrier that way. If I'm right about the barrier, if you remove one seal, the barrier will be slightly weakened for a moment, but will reseal itself within a minute. Think of it as a failsafe of sorts".
"I've never removed a seal before, I wouldn't know what to do," you admit. "If you teach me, I bet I could pick up on it".
"I know you could," Kakashi reassures. "But this isn't exactly the type of information the guards are going to be fine with us talking about. And we will need to go over it in secret".
"We should leave now," Jin interrupts nervously. "If we're here any longer, they're sure to notice and the whole thing will be blown. You must stay moving and act natural".
"Very well then, thank you Jin," you state. Jin rushes off. Your group begins to walk around in quiet discussion, mingling in with the rest of the town.
"Remember what I said, no one can hear us speak ill of the regime," Akisame reiterates coldly.
"Over there, I just want to go over our options," you say as you motion towards a dark corner near the entrance to a tavern.
"Alright, let's recap then," Kakashi says urgently. "We can try to find an area with no one looking, and hope to teach 21 how to destroy the seals safely. But that is risky because we expose ourselves, and if we remove the seal as our first action, we'll heighten the security around town, and it's bad enough as it is".
"We could also try posing as guards you know," Guy says as a matter of fact. "If we find a group of guards with talismans, we could just take them out and take their positions as guards. But then we would have to masquerade as guards and go on about our business. None of these options look good to me".
"There's a third option," Akisame informs. "It's probably the riskiest, as I'm sure the dojo is being watched. But there's a secret hatch in the dojo. It leads to a secret room. There, lies the Sleeping Master... He taught Hayate everything he knew. His chakra was so powerful, that he was forced to enter a state of hibernation through his meditative techniques. His chakra literally burned and destroyed everything around him. He sealed himself up in that room. He has vowed never to fight again however, but at the very least, we can hide out while we plan our next move. We need a place to retreat too regardless".
"How come you never trained under him?" you ask curiously.
"He only took Hayate as a disciple, for reasons all his own. He never explained to any of us why. But he saw something in Hayate, he didn't see in anyone else," Akisame explains. "He knew that with such great power, a person had to have a steadfast heart, or else, they would fall into the trap that comes with such power, The temptation to get whatever you wanted through force".
"He sounds amazing," you comment.
"He is, but what will be more amazing is if we can actually sneak into the dojo without alerting the entire village," Akisame retorts.
"What about your friends? Should we speak with them?" you ask Akisame. His mood hasn't changed at all.
"That's another option, but we still need a place to stay. Jin has pretty much given us all the information we need for the time being," Akisame states. -------------------------------- Clutch Moment + Turning Point A: Go with Kakashi's suggestion. Find a place to study quietly, and learn how to undo seals as quickly as possible B: Go with Guy's suggestion. Tail a group of guards, kill or capture them, and take their items and pose as guards. C: Go with Akisame's suggestion. Try to find a way to break into the dojo. Akisame makes it sound impossible, but hey, you've made impossible do whatever you want before, right? D: Try to find Akisame's dojo companions. Maybe they can offer you some help. E: Free Will
"I want to see Ryozanpaku first before we determine it's impossible," you say softly. "We've been against impossible before, I don't think impossible is a problem, as long as we know what we're facing".
Akisame looks at your stare and nods.
"Very well, let's not dawdle," Akisame states with concern. "We must be quiet and precise".
Akisame leads you through the back streets of Bellhelm, occasionally stopping as he sees a guard, and waiting til they pass. It's not long before you're hanging your head out onto the street and examining the setup.
They have one guard on a roof to the north, and one on the roof of another building to the south. In front of the building, you see three guards. They look extremely bored and tired. You slowly make your way around the entirety of the building.
There are a total of 6 guards in this entire area. The two on the roof, three in front of the dojo, and one standing on the immediate east side of the dojo. You make your way back to your party members to analyze your plans.
"This wouldn't be a problem under normal situations," you begin. "But conveniently enough for the enemy, they have chakra, and we don't. They are stationary for the most part, although I suspect those three guards in the front are not supposed to be still like that. I think if we're going to make a way in there, it's going to have to be through the roof somehow, or a hole in the dojo. If those guards actually do what they're supposed to, we wouldn't have an opportunity like this".
"A hole in the dojo? Entry through the roof? We don't have any tools for that," Akisame replies.
" You have windows we could break through," you clarify. "When I walked around the dojo, I saw that a lot of the windows are broken. It wouldn't be unreasonable to think that they wouldn't notice an extra one. Or, we can go through the roof, it's a very far off plan B. But the roof appears to be loose on the northwest side. We'd have to do something about the guard on the roof to the north. Either way, I'm not liking our odds, because we have to create a distraction, and if we need to come and go, it's going to be unrealistic to think we can keep making distractions".
"A distraction huh?" Kakashi states pensively.
"We could use your friends, couldn't we?" you ask Akisame. "They could cause a distraction every single time we need to go in and out. Let us know? What do you think?"
"I think it's a great idea..." Akisame says, almost surprised. "It doesn't seem so impossible now... but you know that they will be at risk if we have to depend on them too much".
"Yes, I had thought of that," you answer honestly. "Which is why we can't go in and out as much as we please. And time is a huge issue here. We have to decide what we're doing quickly, and get it done".
"Well, are you going in through the roof or through the window?" Akisame asks for clarification. "And what kind of distraction would you like them to create?" -------------------- 1: We're going through the roof 2: We're going through the window 3: We're not going to risk it, let's go back to our other options 4: Free Will
A: Tell them to call for help and fake an injury B: Tell them to start a fire in a garbage bin C: Ask them to call away the guards for some bogus reason from the higher ups D: Have Sakiki and Kensei fight amongst themselves E: Free Will
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:15:15 GMT
"Very well, we're going to go in through the window," you say as you point at a specific window to break. "Tell Sakaki and Kensei that we need a lot of garbage to be burnt over there. By the north, hopefully that guard on that roof to the north can avert his gaze".
You hand Akisame an extra communicator.
"Tell them to hide it as best as possible," you instruct. "Let them know that it will ensure their safety. Once this barrier goes down, we're going to need all the help we can get. Let them know the things that can be done with this device. When you get back, we'll wait for their fire as a signal that we can get in that dojo. For the future, we'll need to rely on different methods to enter and leave the dojo. Although I want to limit our time there if possible. We shouldn't be taking too long on this, we need to devise a plan on how to fix the situation in Bellhelm and clean this place up immediately".
"We are in agreement then," Akisame states as he eyes the comm. "I've always had a hidden fancy with this device. It's very inventive. We should swap notes one day, I fancy myself an inventor as well".
Akisame forces a smile before leaving. His smile didn't seem genuine. Poor man is probably torn up inside. He's placing a brave front, but for whose sakes? Probably his own... If only you could have done something.
As you and Kakashi wait for Akisame to return, you hear the three guards in the front. They're louder than ever, and either they've started drinking, or have been drinking. But at this moment, they are extremely drunk and unruly. Amongst their drunken ramblings, you do hear one piece of information that seemed to have triggered your neck hairs to stand on end.
It seems there was some difference of opinion of what to do with the corpses. Orochimaru apparently wanted the corpses of Hayate, Kenichi and Miu.
Madara wouldn't allow it. But to appease Orochimaru, he would allow him to have one corpse. He gave Orochimaru the choice between Miu or Kenichi. It seems Orochimaru hasn't made his choice yet. All three of the bodies are over at the coroner's office. Hayate's body is scheduled to be burned tomorrow during the dusk hours, and if Orochimaru hasn't made a choice, so will Miu and Kenichi's body.
Why would Orochimaru want a set of corpses? More experiments? You can't allow that. The disrespect has been unfathomable already, you can't allow this to continue. What if Orochimaru intends to hand over the corpses to Sasori, for him to use as puppets? That would completely destroy the Ryozanpaku, and by the looks of it, the one known as Apachai would go completely insane.
"We're set," Akisame says as he sneaks up on you, pulling you from your thoughts. "We only need to wait for their"-
He stops his sentence as you all hear a huge explosion. You cover your face from the light and heat as you see the flames fan.
"That's more than a few garbage cans worth of fire Akisame!" you shout as loudly as you can and maintain a whisper.
"Tch, leave it to Sakaki and Kensei to turn a garbage can fire into a full out explosion," Akisame says as he bites his lips in frustration. He points as the guards run towards the fire.
Kakashi sprints quickly to the dojo and breaks the bottom corner of the window you marked earlier. He chips away the remaining glass and slips inside. You climb through as does Akisame. Akisame rushes to a bookstand and pushes it to the broken window.
"In case they end up trying to climb through, we'll at least have a warning as they come crashing through the bookcase," Akisame explains. "Come, the hatch is this way".
Akisame runs toward the back of the dojo, and slides a training mat to the side. You see a large combination vault on the floor, it's door flush with the floor. No one would have ever noticed this here. You note the combination to the safe, 7-17-7, as Akisame puts in the code and opens the hatch. A dark tunnel leading straight down awaits you, a ladder is attached to the wall of the tunnel. Kakashi places his hand on the sides of the ladder and slides all the way down. You follow as Akisame motions you in, and he jumps behind you and shuts the door behind him. You continue going down the ladder til the floor. At the ground level, there's yet another dark tunnel that has a faint light glowing at the end of it.
You make your way towards the light and realize it's the light of a door, slightly ajar. You open the door, and you gasp when you see the man inside the room. The room itself is gigantic, and very well lit. But even the majesty of this grand room is overshadowed by the man sitting in the middle of the room in quiet meditation. He opens his eyes as he looks at you all enter the room.
His eyes are golden and catlike. No human could possess those eyes. The man's slitted pupils watch you, as if your next words could be your last. His long, silver hair runs down to his back, covering most of the sides of his face. It reminds you immediately of a lion's mane. His beard is feral, and braided at the end.
"Akisame, why have you disturbed my slumber?" his voice booms and echoes across the room. It's as if the earth itself responds to this man's roar, everything lies still.
"Master, we had no alternative, much has happened," Akisame says with a bow. "Much has happened since we have last spoke... Hayate-sama is dead".
"WHAT?!" the venerable master's voice quakes the room. His fury has turned into something tangible. "Who would dare do something so atrocious? To my disciple no less!"
"Excuse me, but I'm afraid there's more than that," you say with a bow. "Something else has come up, that I think you should both know about".
"And who are you, cub?" the master eyes you. His golden eyes pierce your soul. You feel as if he is trying to place you in a genjutsu. You feel this man is powerful, but his genjutsu is nothing compared to Itachi. You must be below ground enough that the barrier is ineffective. Or perhaps, such is this man's power.
You stand your ground, and don't say a word. ------------------------- Clutch Moment A: "When you treat me with respect, I will show you the same and tell you everything". B: "My name is 21. And yours?" C: "I am 21. Your genjutsu falls short, I have seen and fought against the real thing. D: "I have nothing to say to a man who needlessly uses genjutsu on a man who presents himself in friendship". E: Free Will
"My name," you say with a slight pause. "I don't really have a name. It's more like a number, but that's what we're working with. I'm 21, and yours?"
The man stands up, almost in shock. You see him scratch the side of his face and notice the gigantic manacles he wears on his wrists as bracelets. His chest is bare, and from sight you notice that his skin resembles leather. He's huge, with a wide chest, and a perfect v shaped upper body. This man is most likely a weight lifter... As a hobby
"Hmpfh, I like the smell of you, cub," he says with a slight huff as he walks towards you. Even under his hulking mass, the floor doesn't let out even a minor creak. "But I sense a totem on you... You've been affected by others... A toad's stench lingers on you, as well as a vile dog. A... crow as well. And you come from... a snake?"
You look at him with narrowed eyes. None of it makes sense.
"I've never doubted your instincts before Akisame-chan," the man says as he goes back to his spot and sits down, again without making a single noise. "Why don't you let the cub explain everything. So that we may start off fresh. My name is Shishi, although most refer to me with a little.. reverence. As long as you continue being respectful, you may call me as you wish. I am known as the Ancient Lion Master, or the Lion that Sleeps".
You nod your head at the irony. The majority of your techniques are modeled after the lion, and you've always paid great respect to the lion as a creature of power, nobility, and fierce loyalty. And here was, as much there will ever exist, a man who should have been born a lion. Perhaps he is the embodiment of nature for the lion, just as Jiraiya uses the Chief Toads to become one with nature.
"Well, Shishi-san, it started like this," you begin respectfully. "It's a rather long story. So I think we should all sit down, while we reflect".
You discuss the wealth of knowledge that is at your disposal. Everything from the first moment you remember, with Orochimaru immediately presenting himself, to the last few words the guards spoke about the corpses of the ones known as Hayate, Kenichi, and Miu.
Shishi just sits there, silently absorbing the information, habitually running his hand through his thick beard. He adjusts himself in his seat before speaking.
"And this barrier, does it extend to down here?" Shishi asks, even his slightest whisper commanding respect.
"I don't think it does," Akisame replies. "But this information about their corpses is most unforgivable. I didn't know about it until just now".
"We had just found out after you left," Kakashi explains.
"What is your plan now, cub?" Shishi asks with interest. His golden eyes reflecting almost all the light.
You contemplate his question before answering. There are many points that you can hit on... But you're not sure... ------------------------ A: We will go and free the rest of Ryozanpaku first, to pad our numbers B: We should scout out the areas we suspect are the points for the three point barrier C: Learn how to undo seals here from Kakashi, in the safety of Shishi's lair D: Obtain talismans so that your group can use chakra even in the influence of the barrier. (Either by stealing them, or killing guards) E: Free Will
"Shishi-san, Akisame," you say with a slight clearing of your throat. "I'd like your blessing in going to get the corpses of the recently deceased. It's the least we can do... They deserve to be interred properly, with respect and dignity".
Shishi nods his head pensively.
"That is a fine idea," he says low, his voice like a growl.
"Is it alright with you if I bring them here?" you ask as respectfully as you can.
Shishi nods again. You look at Akisame, waiting for a response. He exhales finally, and nods as well.
"I feel as if we can turn Madara's suspicion of Orochimaru against them, against all of the Akatsuki," you explain. "If our enemies are fighting themselves, they won't be able to fight us".
"A sound strategy," Shishi comments as he runs his fingers through his beard. "I do enjoy when a brilliant plan is birthed... Like a keen hunter, stalking your prey... Very well then 21. You have both my blessing and my encouragement. After this is accomplished however, we need to decide on how we can scout out whether or not this deception of yours was successful. We also need to find a way to get inside their heads, and launch our next move".
"Our next move should be to take out this barrier," Kakashi advises. "If we allow them to dig themselves in deeper, we might never uproot their presence here".
Shishi says nothing, he merely nods and grunts his acceptance.
"Can you get Kensei and Sakaki to let us know how it's going up there?" you ask as you notice Akisame is already talking into the comm.
"Already done 21," Akisame says calmly. "They are currently the ones guarding the dojo. Their fool sergeant seems to have forgotten why they are in the local militia to begin with. Kensei says it's safe outside for the moment, but there is rumor that Madara is on the move".
"On the move to where?" you say as you cast your jutsu to retrieve your tools from Konoha. Kakashi sighs with relief as he picks up his bag.
"No idea, it's just a rumor," Akisame answers. "What's all this?"
"This?" you say innocently as you hold up some of your experimental supplies and chemistry set. "A thought had occurred to me, for a new invention. I just wanted to keep this here, you know, just in case".
"You're an inventor?" Shishi says. Is that disappointment in his voice?
"I try to be as much as I can be anyway," you answer hesitantly.
"That's good," Shishi informs with a smirk on his face you can barely make out through his beard. "A true warrior is well versed in every aspect of the battlefield. Science is one of those aspects".
You set up your equipment hastily and climb up the ladder to have a look around. It seems like the area has quieted down since your diversion from earlier. Kakashi, Guy and Akisame join you.
"Akisame? Get out here now, you fool. We aren't going to have this opportunity forever!" you hear a voice calling from outside.
"Kensei? We're coming out now," Akisame says as he slides the furniture away from the window you used as an entrance.
Akisame leaves the dojo and you all follow. Outside, you see a very small man, with an odd round bowler hat. His brown hair pokes out at the sides of the hat. He has a lot of facial hair, and a kind demeanor about him. The man next to him, is very tall. He has many scars all over his bare chest and face. On his side, he has a sake jug, hanging loosely. He eyes you suspiciously.
"Who's the wimp?" the large man says as he points to you.
"Easy Sakaki," Akisame warns cautiously. "This man is no less of a warrior than me. It's because of him that we're rescuing... their remains".
"Maybe if they were here earlier, they'd be alive, and we wouldn't be in need of rescuing anyone," Sakaki contends.
"I'm sorry young man," the man with the bowler hat who must be Kensei says with a bow as he takes off his hat. MAN, is he BALD. "Sakaki is a bit emotional when it comes to our disciple. And we all loved Hayate-sama and Miu-chan. We both thank you for your sacrifice in this situation".
You bow to both men and introduce yourself.
"Yeah... well, thanks," Sakaki says with a frustrated sigh. "Come on, we ain't got all day".
He's off like a lightning bolt in the direction you suspected is the coroner's office. His speed was so startling, the backlash of Sakaki turning around and sprinting knocked off Kensei's hat. Kensei motions for you all to run and Guy is off like a kid in a candystore. Kakashi grunts in frustration and chases after Guy.
Eventually, you all make it to the coroner. Guy looks crazed, and you know exactly why. He's happy that there are such strong fighters around, even while the barrier is active. Kakashi, looks concerned. You lean in and whisper into Kakashi's ear.
"What's got you looking so glum?"
"We need to make this quick," Kakashi answers immediately. "We don't have all day, and if we want to make this look authentic, we have to make it before Madara gets here".
"You're right," you say with a shake of your head. "Let's go. Guy, we're moving. You two, guard our exit please".
Sakaki nods as you and your group slip in. You consider it strange that there were no guards posted at the coroner's office. Even stranger that no one is inside the office itself. You make it towards the housing room and see several bodies. Judging by the corpses, you immediately could tell who was who.
Going by the age, and body type of what martial artists usually have for builds, you easily discern the identities of Hayate, Kenich, and Miu. Their bodies have been embalmed perfectly, maintained by a state of the art refrigeration unit. You think that... it might just be possible.
You grab Kenichi's body and slip it over your shoulder respectfully. Kakashi grabs Hayate and Akisame opts to pick up Miu. You exit the building, still at a complete shock that no one is here. Kensei sighs with relief. Sakaki merely closes his eyes for two seconds, you think he's praying to himself. Your group rushes to the dojo, once again without incident. You slip into the dojo, and say your farewells to Sakaki and Kensei. They must remain undercover.
Your group manages to bring the cadavers back into the presence of Shishi. You ask Guy to close up the perimeter topside, and make sure everything is secure. Shishi looks at their bodies with a tear in his eye.
"They look exactly like I remember them," Shishi notes.
"I think Orochimaru was trying to experiment on them," you inform. "He has a partner, a man named Sasori. He uses puppets. There's also a woman... 3. She... has a certain style that animates the inanimate. Breathes life where once there was none... She's my mother".
Shishi doesn't react at all. Kakashi seems surprised that you're admitting all this at once.
"Do you possess this same ability?" Shishi asks.
"I do," you say without hesitation. "I also have regenerative abilities".
Shishi says nothing. You are curious if it would be possible to do what you've been thinking about. You might be able to save them... But it'd be taboo, and more than a little... insulting if you fail. But, their bodies are so fresh, it's like they just passed. It's feasible... but the more time you spend on this, the less likely it will be to actually work.
If it works, they'll be alive and well.
If it doesn't... they will be like soulless husks, walking around like your average golem. ---------------------- Turning Point + Clutch Moment A: Experiment with a piece of their flesh in secret and see what happens B: Slip a double dose of an emergency syringe inside their hearts without telling anyone C: Explain your idea to Akisame and Shishi, and go through with it as you're explaining it D: Don't do a thing until you explain all the risks and rewards you're facing now E: Free Will
"There's something I wanted to discuss with you all," you announce as you begin to picture the right words to say. "There's really no easy way to say this... but I think I might be able to bring them back, using my blood. I'm not certain, but I'm almost certain it will work. But time is a factor. The longer we take, the less chance we have to bring them back".
"How is this possible?" Shishi asks as he leans forward.
"My blood, it restores chakra and heals wounds, it even regrows organs in others," you explain further. "There's a chance it won't work, and if we continue to wait, the chances it won't work increase. There's also the possibility that their bodies will work, but their minds will be gone. If I do manage to bring them back however, which I'm fairly sure I can do, they might be as good as they ever were. Or another risk is, the might come back as normal, but won't be able to manipulate their chakra...But because Orochimaru wanted their bodies, he kept their extremely well preserved, it's as if they just passed".
"I have a technique that I think may help you," Shishi says as he stands up. "It's something I learned, a very long time ago. and I think this is worthy of a trial. What do you say, Akisame?"
"This sounds like forbidden jutsu," Akisame says. "But there's really no difference in between using your blood while alive over this... It would be hypocritical to assume otherwise".
Shishi sits down in front of Hayate's body, and places his hands on the corpse's chest and stomach. You witness as his hands begin to glow golden. You quickly unwrap a piece of the embalming wrapping and take a small fleck of skin from Hayate's knuckle. You rush it towards your makeshift lab. Under your microscope, you notice that the skin hasn't deteriorated, not even a little. Something is off here. You break open a blood tablet and let the skin get a drop. You witness as it returns to life under your microscope, complete with heat and cellular activity.
You're convinced, this should work.
"Let me have all your emergency syringes," you shout as you take out your emergency syringe. Akisame, Guy, and Kakashi hand you their emergency syringe. You walk towards Hayate's body and find his heart. Shishi remains silent in his technique. You place the two syringes into Hayate's heart. You watch anxiously, awaiting any signs of live, a flicker of movement, anything. You notice Hayate's lip quiver, his fingers twitch. You immediately go to his eyes, and raise his left eyelid gently. You place a light to his eye.
"We've got pupil dilation," you say with a smile. "That's a good sign".
Hayate coughs as he turns to his side. Shishi smiles as he sits back and exhales. Hayate pushes himself to his back, he looks at you and grabs you by the throat.
"Who, are you?" Hayate demands.
Shishi grabs his disciple's hand and makes him release his grip. Hayate seems extremely confused.
"Akisame, we need a makeshift bed of some sort, let's use our bedrolls," you instruct. "He's probably disoriented. Shishi, let's move, we don't have time to waste! Kakashi, run this line into my left arm. We don't have enough emergency syringes".
Kakashi grabs the line you gave him, and ties the armband around your brachial artery. He injects you with the line you gave him, and starts draining your blood into the first emergency syringe.
"I hope this takes like it did for Hayate," you say as you feel around for Miu's heart. "Shishi-san, you ready?"
Shishi nods as he sits down and meditates. His hands begin to glow again.
"I should probably give you some time so that our procedure is exactly like before," you state. You turn to your left to see Kakashi still extracting blood from you. "Besides, we don't have the blood needed for Kenichi yet... What's that technique you're using?"
"This is an ancient technique, that the first Lion Masters learned," Shishi explains as he watches all the blood being removed from you. "When they first roamed with the lions to try to learn their ways, the lions were very protective of their secrets. This technique heals the body, and provides a little bit of chakra back into them. It's not refined like medical ninjutsu, but it is effective. I'm focusing on jumpstarting their heart. I'm trusting you, to do the rest".
You insert the syringes into Miu's heart when you notice Kakashi finishes extracting the first emergency syringe. Miu coughs and turns to the side. Her big, bright eyes open as she looks at you. She notices Hayate in the background.
"Guy, please get her situated," you instruct. "Akisame, you might want to speak to her and explain everything. She's going to need your comforting words. Get another bed ready for Kenichi".
Shishi stands and goes over to Kenichi, then begins his technique. You look at Kakashi who has just finished filling up both syringes. He hands them to you.
"I'm going to check up on something," Kakashi says to you as he stands up.
You walk over to Kenichi and find his heart. You pause a moment to allow Shishi to carry on with his technique for a while longer. And then finally, you perform the same procedure. Kenichi comes back to life as well. Akisame rushes over, and carries Kenichi to the bedrolls. All three of them are alive, and their minds have been preserved. You sit back and exhale a sigh of relief.
"That was good work," Shishi says proudly. "I'm glad we didn't let those ruffians win after all. You're real gutsy, cub. Most wouldn't have spoken up to me about such a method. Even though you've been around other totems, you still managed to keep your heart. The heart of a lion. That's very good".
"21, we have to talk," Kakashi says as he apologizes for his interruption.
You look at Kakashi oddly. This can't be good news...
"What's up?" you ask Kakashi as you stand up.
"I've been looking at the embalming wraps, and I found binding seals all over them," Kakashi says as he hands you a tag. "I found this under their collars, near the back of their heads. I bet that kid Kenichi has it too if we look. Impure World Resurrection...."
"I'm sorry, what?" you ask as you begin to go over all the possibilities.
"I heard, through various circles, that the honorable Second Hokage, Tobirama-sama, created a technique so vile and reprehensible, that he immediately made it forbidden," Kakashi explains. "We need to take this tag back to Sarutobi-sama. He will recognize it for sure. But, it's my firm belief that these bodies were preserved with the thought of resurrecting them in mind. The binding seals only give more credibility to this. It suggests that they bound their souls to their corpses".
"That would explain why we were able to do such a miracle," Shishi says as he gets up. "I've never seen anything like it in my life. What we just did, should be impossible".
Your mind reels from all the possibilities. The missing guards, the lowered security, the three bodies set up for this. Just what the hell is going on?
"Sarutobi-sensei, can you read this?" you speak into the comm.
No response.
"Itachi, bro, can you hear me?" you speak into the comm again.
"I hear you, everything alright?" Itachi replies.
"Ran into a bit of a snag here," you answer. "I need to send you something, and I need you to take these things to Sarutobi-sensei and tell him we found them and three corpses. Tell him Orochimaru is here, and that we suspect he was using a jutsu created by the Nidaime...It's important".
"Alright, I'm home, can you send it to the backyard porch? We're out here training," Itachi states.
"It's pretty late, glad to see you guys keeping at it," you state proudly. "It's going to be there soon".
You place the wrappings and the tags into a small pouch and use your jutsu to send it to Itachi in the Leaf. You hear Shishi marvel at your technique, and you see him smirking curiously as he nods his head. Akisame and Guy come up to you and Kakashi. Shishi walks towards you as well.
"This is going to send a rocket up their ass," Shishi says with a chuckle.
"That it will, Shishi-sama," Akisame agrees. "They need their rest. They seem fine, but it will be a long road to recovery. But what do we do now? You got any ideas?"
They all turn to you for an idea. ---------- A: Strike while the iron is hot and cause more anarchy in Madara's regime by taking the roles of some guards B: Rest and restock on supplies, while you check on the status of the recently resurrected. C: Start learning from Kakashi immediately on how to break the seals on the barrier D: Go upstairs to the dojo and see if you can hear anything. Have Akisame speak with Kensei and Sakaki to find out what's going on in town E: Free Will
"Kakashi, I'm going to leave some Shadow Clones here," you state as you formulate your plan. "We're going to nail these bastards right now, while they're still wondering what the hell is happening. You think you can teach them how to undo the seal? I'm thinking Akisame, Guy and myself should go up there, and snag us some guards and their uniforms. With my clones down here, learning the method to remove this seal shouldn't be a problem, and they can help care for the wounded".
"Sounds good," Kakashi responds. "But you're going to be fine up top? You guys have no emergency syringes to fall back on".
"We never needed emergency syringes before, we don't need them now Kakashi!" Guy exclaims. "We'll burn through their wilting shrub of deception, like a cleansing flame of righteousness!"
Kakashi lowers his head and sighs... There's really nothing more he can do. Shishi raises his eyebrows and looks at Guy curiously. You cast your Shadow Clone technique and summon forth ten shadow clones. They know what they have to do and immediately start working.
"The warrior that spreads himself too far, loses balance and falls over," Shishi points out. "Make sure not to spread yourselves too thin".
You nod and follow Guy, who has energetically taken to going up the ladder.When you reach the dojo, Akisame informs you that Kensei and Sakaki are still out there. The rumors are still going on about Madara. Akisame then informs you that Kensei had been tracking a group of guards that had two talismans, but that was the only group of guards that had more than one talisman per group. It was obviously a very trusted group of soldiers, four of them in all.
You exit the dojo and meet up with Kensei and Sakaki.
"Is it true?" Kensei asks enthusiastically. "Are they all right after all?"
Akisame nods his head, his eyes are reflecting the moon's light. Tears are in his eyes... You look at him curiously. You failed to save his family... How must he be feeling?
"I'm feeling fine 21," Akisame says convincingly. "Don't worry about me... It wasn't you that killed my wife and daughter... It was Madara's men, his regime. I'm just happy we got at least some of our little family here back".
You look at him in shock, and then remember his uncanny knack for this. You should know better than to think things near Akisame. Akisame turns to you and smiles knowingly.
"We have a group of guards, like he told you Akisame," Sakaki says abruptly. "They have two talismans in their group of four. We figure they're heavyweight hitters for the mug in charge. They should be light work for you though. That's not the problem though. The problem is, we can't do anything just yet. So it's only going to be you three lugs. And if you allow these finks even a second, one of them will scream. Then you're going to regret it. You can take on other groups, but they all have a four soldier, traveling formation. It's routine for this time of night".
"I see," you say intuitively. "So no matter what group we choose, four is the number we have to take out".
Sakaki nods.
"That won't be a problem at all," you say as a plan springs to your mind. "Just let me know where they are".
"We'll take you right to them," Kensei says cheerfully. "Thank you... thank you so much for bringing them back".
You nod and smile slightly. It feels good to know that you've helped them, they really seem like warm, kind-hearted people. You follow them until they signal you to stop. The four guards are walking away from you. Kensei and Sakaki wave to you and then disappear amongst the night sky.
"This is my plan," you whisper softly. "I'm going to distract them with this slam box. That should divide them. These are seasoned soldiers, not the rabble we were dealing with earlier. They won't break formation and send the entire squad to check out on the noise. If we're lucky, they send one, but they'll most likely send two of their number to investigate the noise. When that happens, Akisame, I need you to use your jujitsu to silence them immediately. Grab them as they come around the corner, I'll signal you. Just make sure they don't make a noise".
"I think I can handle that," Akisame says calmly.
"When they're down, the rest of the group will obviously come to investigate, that's when Guy, you, are going to jump in here, behind the leader's back. I'll engage the other".
"Understood 21, hell of a plan, I like it," Guy says with a smile and a thumbs up... Jeez, Guy is corny...
You throw the slam box out of the patrol zone of the group of soldiers. Just as predicted, two of their number come to investigate the noise. When the first soldier is about to turn the corner, you signal Akisame. You witness Akisame grab the man by his throat, pulling him off the street and into a trash can and crush the poor fellow's larynx. His friend, who followed shortly behind, met with a similar, and unpleasant fate.
You motion with your hand for Guy to jump behind the leader's back. Guy punches the guy square in the jaw and then proceeds to punish his midsection, ending the combo with a debilitating elbow to the inside of the leader's knee. You jump behind the last enemy, just as he turns to see Guy take down his leader. You grab your enemy by the neck, and place him in a sleeper hold. After your enemy passed out you motion to Guy.
"We need to interrogate these guys," you say. "This guy is going to wake up any second now. Bind and gag the others, they're coming with us".
You gag the enemy you downed, and secure his arms and legs before throwing him over your shoulder. You witness Guy and Akisame do the same to their targets.
When your group reaches the dojo, you hear an emergency message from Kensei.
"Madara found out about the coroner!" Kensei says over the comm. "He's all pissed off, and he suspects it was a villager! He's giving orders to kill any civilians that are on the streets, no questions asked!"
"Anything else? What about Orochimaru? He doesn't suspect him at all?" you ask.
"No, they were together the entire evening," Kensei informs. "Orochimaru is angrier than Madara. He wants to torch the town, but Madara made sure that wouldn't happen. You guys need to stay off the streets".
"That's fine, we were done anyway," you say as you throw your captive into the dojo. "You two make sure to stay safe. When we hit, we need to make sure we're ready".
You all make your way down to Shishi-san's room and place your captives there. Akisame ended up killing his two targets, and Guy ended up breaking his target's jaw. None of them can talk, except the one you captured.
"I wish you wouldn't have killed them," you say in earnest to Akisame. "I don't think it was necessary".
"Better safe than sorry my friend," he answers you. "Besides, it's scum like them that deserve our wrath".
"Alright, tie this one up, he's going to answer some questions," you say as you motion to a chair. "Let's not talk a lot about what we have, or who we are. Alright?"
"Let me interrogate him, I can be quite convincing," Akisame states.
"I'm not so sure that's a good idea," you say hesitantly.
"I agree with the cub," Shishi says. "Your head isn't where it should be. Let someone else interrogate this man".
"You're way too busy," Akisame says as he looks at you. "Please, trust me with this. Alright?"
Guy nods his head, Kakashi shrugs. You're not quite sure either. This man's information is vital, and anything that's lost is lost forever. ---- A: Allow Akisame to interrogate him, as long as he promises not to kill him B: Trust in Akisame fully C: Recommend to everyone that you should be the one to interrogate him D: Ask Shishi to interrogate the man. It's the middle ground... but it won't give you all the information you need. E: Free Will
"Alright, you do it," you say as you place your hand on his shoulder. "But promise me he'll live. Alright? He's defenseless right now".
"You have my word," Akisame says in an aloof manner before stepping in front of the prisoner.
You look at Shishi and point towards your eyes at him and then nod your head towards Akisame. Shishi understands clearly what you're saying. You take all the medical supplies into the hallway, away from Shishi's room and begin restocking them with new blood.
Kakashi comes in to check on you.
"How are you doing?" Kakashi says as he looks at the syringes. "Got a lot of work to do, huh?".
"Yeah, how did my clones do while I was away?" you ask.
"Just as well as you'd expect," Kakashi replies. "I think you'll learn the way to destroy the seal. But we have some issues, even with the talismans. Who gets the talismans? What's our next move?"
"We'll wait until Akisame is done," you inform. "Hopefully he can keep it together".
"Something happen when you guys were out?"
"I think it's the fact that we were able to save Hayate, Kenichi and Miu, but not his wife and kid," you opinion. "That can't be easy. It can't seem fair either. And I can't help for feel that if he hadn't of been helping us, he would have been home".
"Enough to drive anyone insane I bet," Kakashi says as he crouches down to pick up one of the syringes you just filled. "You know what else would drive a man insane? Putting all that weight and guilt on his shoulders. You're putting too much on yourself". "The price is high," you reply as you finish topping the last syringe off. "There's a lot depending on us. The other villages might not believe us. If we do anything wrong, it might be the world".
You hear a scream come from the room. Guy walks towards you and Kakashi.
"We got the guy to snap," Guy informs you. "Unfortunately, it took the snapping of his elbow to do this..."
"Least he didn't kill the guy," you comment as you get up and walk towards the interrogation.
The captive has passed out from the pain, Akisame is merely dressing his wounds.
"Ah, there you are," Akisame says. "Did Guy fill you in? This man told us everything, I was merely setting his bones back into place. It's a painful process, and he couldn't take it. He'll be fine, we just need to get him a doctor, in case he gets a fever".
"He did well," Shishi reports. "This man here was very loyal to Madara. He was willing to die for him".
"I just had to show him that there are worse things in life than death," Akisame says with a steely stare in his eyes. "The guards number in the 200. About 30 of those, are serious die hard Madara supporters. The rest are civilians forced into this, or civilians that are willing to do some dirty work to improve their lives".
You check on the guard in the chair before gagging him and untying his bands. You set him down on the floor next to his comrade with the broken jaw, and then you bind them together.
"Whoever is going to take on the north most point," Akisame continues. "is going to need to deal with Kazuma. Remember him? He's still in Madara's employ. As far as the other two points, both of them are guarded by two platoons a piece. Although the east and west points have the numbers, Kazuma is the real danger here. Madara was planning on leaving, but the little event at the coroner left him with a new course of action. He thinks the villagers are rebelling, and he's willing to go through some pretty drastic measures. Madara also just finished moving in some important hardware through here. That might explain the swelling of their numbers, but according to this guy, Madara only has Orochimaru and 3 here with him. But he said 3 has been in a real foul mood lately, and she's using harsh discipline on even the soldiers".
"No idea of what that hardware was?" you ask.
"He said it was huge and crated up," Akisame replies. "It was heavy too. But no idea of what was inside. But it was obviously important enough to merit having a lot of Akatsuki here. So it means bad news for us".
"Yeah... most likely," Kakashi says pensively. "So what's our next move then? We have those guys in jail, they might feel better now that Hayate-san is back".
"That's an option," Akisame agrees. "But Apachai is VERY reckless when angered. And Hayate-sama is in no shape to handle him. He might turn into a problem, and no one here will turn their hand against Apachai, he's family".
"What about Shigure? You mentioned her? Knowing her, do you think she'll be okay?" you ask Akisame and Shishi.
"Most likely," Akisame says definitely. "But breaking into jail... that's right next to Madara's outpost. I want to save them too, but that might endanger our mission".
"What are we going to do, even if we do bring down the barrier?" Kakashi asks you. "What's to stop them from erecting another?"
"We could go after Madara," you suggest halfheartedly. "But I'm not sold on it. Madara has the numbers right now. We could just make him realize this town isn't worth the expenditure of his resources. If he has to retreat, he's done it before".
"So, what are we going to do then?" Guy asks with confusion on his face. ====== What is your next course of action? A: Break the barrier B: Break out Shigure and/or Apachai from jail C: Get more help from Team 21 D: Lay low for now. Have Kensei and Sakaki report as the situation develops.
Who are you giving the two talismans to? 1: Guy 2: Kakashi 3: 21 4: Akisame 5: other team member (if so, mention which)
"We don't have time for this," you state. "We're going to bring down that barrier. Hopefully, that will incite enough commotion to have the people join us in this fight. It is their fight after all, and I doubt that they will stand for much more now that Madara is ordering civilians to be killed on sight if they're out at night".
"And Apachai and Shigure?" Akisame asks you. "You going to leave them in jail? They are formidable fighters, they could help us".
"I'm sure they could, but we don't know where their heads are at," you reply. "Not to mention we have enough problems to worry about right now. At least we know they're safe in jail. Will Kensei and Sakaki help us in our siege?"
"Well, there won't be any going back after this," Akisame points out. "They won't have much of a choice. I'm sure they'll help. What do you want them to do?"
"We have two talismans, those two need to go to the ninjutsu specialists," you explain. "I'm going to give one to Kakashi, and the other I'm staying with. Because of this, have Sakaki meet up with you Akisame, have Kensei escort Guy. They can help you with your barriers. Kakashi and I will be going up to the north point to handle Kazuma. Hopefully Kazuma remembers our previous kindness, if not... well, he's going to be a tough opponent".
"We're going to need to give everything we have in order for this to succeed," Guy adds. "It's going to be us against a small army, and whatever Akatsuki is thrown at us! But we shall plow through our enemies like an unstoppable wrecking ball smashing down an old abandoned building!"
"Terrible metaphors aside," you say as you clear your throat. "Keep your comms on at all times. If you don't answer you comms, it's because you're dead or dying. Which means, I'm going to drop everything I'm doing to come to your location. So make sure you don't set off any false alarms".
"What about the rest of the team at Konoha?" Kakashi asks. "You bringing Itachi or the rest on this?"
"I spoke with Itachi," you explain. "He's got everyone ready over there. But I told him to hold off until we get the barrier down. When that barrier comes down, all hells going to break loose. We have to make sure that it's not too hot, we can't bring them until we know what's going on... Besides, not that I doubt you, but if this barrier doesn't come down, we're going to have a serious problem".
Kakashi and Guy nod. The team walks out the room, and you hear them go up the ladder. Shishi walks up to you and places his hands on both of your shoulders.
"You've proven yourself to have the heart of a lion, cub," Shishi informs. "We might make something out of you yet. You have shown to be both brave, and loyal. Protect these people, they are your pride, and a lion never gives up on his pride. Keep this up, and soon, maybe you will be the newest Lion Master, if you so choose. But for now, know that you are 21, the LionHeart".
"Thank you," you say as you bow respectfully. "I must take my leave".
You excuse yourself and follow your team mates out.
"Have you two decided which points you all are taking?" you ask Guy and Akisame.
"Yes, I'm taking the east point," Akisame states. "Kensei and Sakaki are outside already waiting for us. Madara is at the coroner's office now. So he's going to be near you and Kakashi at the north point of the seal. Be careful".
You nod and exit the dojo. You say your hellos and goodbyes to Sakaki and Kensei, then you and Kakashi head towards the north point. The village is in chaos. The guards seem to be distracted as they kick open doors and drag poor, innocent villagers out of their homes. It's a witch hunt, and unfortunately, it won't end until Madara's driven out of the area. The guards are looking for three corpses, and they won't find them. Not as corpses anyway.
You and Kakashi slow down as you make your way towards the northern seal. You both spot a guard tower that extends way above the village. Kazuma is on the tower. You could try to take out the seal without causing a commotion and try to do it without arousing any suspicion. Or you could try taking out the tower itself, hoping it brings Kazuma down with it. Or maybe you'd like to attack Kazuma sneakily, or would you rather try to talk him out of Madara's service?
"In position," you hear Guy say over the comm.
"As will I in two seconds," you hear Akisame add over the comm. You also heard people screaming in the background, and then a thud that interrupted their scream. "In position".
"21?" Kakashi asks softly as he turns your way. "What's it going to be? They're ready". --------------------- A: Try to sneak up on the seal and take it down without alerting Kazuma B: Destroy the tower C: Sneak attack Kazuma with your most destructive jutsu D: Call out to Kazuma and try to show him you don't want to hurt him. E: Free Will
You send Kakashi and yourself towards where you suspect is the seal. You both arrive under the tower in a flash. Kakashi starts working on the seal right away, as per your instructions.
"Going to try to buy you some time," you instruct. "If we can't finish this fast, we're in trouble. Kazuma is dangerous, and if Madara is nearby, him hearing us is the last thing we need".
Kakashi nods his head and continues working. He instructs Guy and Akisame to begin their work over the comm. You focus your chakra and focus on entering Kazuma's mind. You fade out of your body, and enter Kazuma's mind. Inside his mind, are thunderous cyclones, tornadoes so big they make the mountains of Konoha look diminutive by comparison.
"Kazuma, I need to speak with you," you say out loud to the empty, abyssal storm. "You remember me don't you?"
You wait in silence for several moments before Kazuma appears in front of you. He floats down towards the thin, flowing air that is serving as your ground, his hands in his pockets. He doesn't seem to find you very threatening, even though you just entered his mind against his will.
"Interesting genjutsu you have here 21," Kazuma says sarcastically as he eyes you. "What is all this supposed to be? And why are you making me see all these things? How is it even possible? I'm under Madara's barrier".
"I remember you cared about Ayane," you say.
"Her name is Ayano," Kazuma states as he narrows his eyes. "And don't tell me you came all this way to lecture me about her".
"No, that's not it at all," you say, rather embarrassed. "Sorry about that. I meant Ayano. But I'm here to help. I'm trying to free Bellhelm, my team is here to help you and your fellow villagers. You're not interested in any of this are you? You don't seem the type to go and try to conquer the world".
"I don't give a rat's ass about ruling the world," Kazuma admits as he removes the hair from his face. "But Madara's in power. He's got some crazy device, and people of ridiculous power. For heaven's sake, the man killed Hayate. Do you realize how STRONG Hayate was? The people he is hanging out with are beyond powerful. Do you have ANY idea of how powerful this village used to be? We're tiny compared to your village! But our might was comparable to your own! Do you realize what that means? Your village is in just as much risk as ours. We couldn't do anything to stop it. What can you do to stop it?"
"Listen, Hayate is alive," you say convincingly. "I brought them back. The reason men like Madara get what they want is because good men stand around and do nothing about it. If we free Bellhelm, and ally ourselves together, our TWO villages will ensure that this NEVER happens again!"
Kazuma lowers his head and shakes his head.
"It's way too risky," he says. "I know where you're coming from, but you didn't see what I saw. That thing in the crate... it's... it doesn't matter how many people or armies you unite. There's nothing that can stand in the way of it".
"What did you see Kazuma?" you ask urgently.
"It's a chakra attack," Kazuma states as he stares at the floor. The memory causing him visible discomfort. "But it doesn't use any element we've ever seen. It's black, jet black. It steals whatever brightness comes near it. He fires it like some sort of science fiction death ray, except this isn't a book, this is real life. And in real life, we can't fight against it".
"Yes, we can! Just TELL me about the ray, I promise we'll take him down," you swear, almost pleading with him to trust you.
Kazuma eyes you suspiciously before exhaling.
"Fine," he says reluctantly. "But I'm not endangering Ayano in this. If you intend to fight this guy, I'm not doing anything to endanger Ayano's life until you win. And if by some grace of God, you do win, you gotta promise me to never allow Ayano in a fight. She's a bratty, immature, little girl, and she's in way over her head. Can you promise me to never allow her to fight?"
"Kazuma, I never break a promise," you reply honestly. "But if the girl wants to fight, she's going to fight. I can swear on my family, that I will never ask her to fight. I swear that if I know she's fighting, I'll try to stop her and inform you about it right away. But I can't swear to you that she'll never fight in this war. What's coming... it seems to be getting worse everyday. That's as much as I can honestly promise you. Anything anyone else tells you, is just a bold faced lie".
You stare at Kazuma. He meets your gaze and narrows his eyes. He grabs the back of his head and starts scratching his head.
"Yeah, well, at least you seem honest," Kazuma answers you. "That'll have to do. But I'm not joining your little party of goody goods. And don't expect me to help you in whatever it is you're doing in Bellhelm now. I'll help at my convenience, and only after I see Madara has lost. Got it?"
You nod with understanding.
"Like I said, it fires chakra, black chakra," Kazuma continues. "It's a solid ray of chakra. He tested it out on a nearby mountain. It completely disintegrated the thing. It didn't even take a second, if you looked away, you would have missed it. The thing has a cooling down period, but it's not long. Couple' a minutes, at the most. It will level a village in seconds. It's a game changer man..."
"What could power such a device?" you ask. "Did you note any power sources?"
"Nah, it's a real secret man," he answers quickly. "He kept it in the crate the entire time. Huge crate, heavy as hell too. Whatever powers that thing, never left the crate".
"Any idea of why he had it through here?"
"Nah, maybe he was trying to scare us back into his loyal service," Kazuma answers. "Things were getting a little rowdy. That's why he attacked Ryozanpaku, and shot off his fancy toy. Most likely why'a he's hanging out with all his Akatsuki thugs".
"What can you tell me about the Akatsuki?"
"What? Other than they're a bunch of badasses? Nah, Nothing much," he answers immediately. "They're bad dudes. They made even the people in this village scared, and that is something that doesn't happen easy".
"21, it's finished," you hear in your ear.
"What's up Kakashi?" you ask back.
"Barriers down," he answers back.
"Alright Kazuma, it's done," you say to Kazuma. "Make yourself scarce. Things are about to get ugly".
You phase yourself out of your jutsu and appear next to Kakashi.
"Did it work?" you ask into the comm. "Did everyone get their chakra back?"
"We're great over here 21," Guy says with enthusiasm.
"Same," Akisame says in monotone.
"Itachi, you got everyone there?" you ask, hoping Itachi has been following your situation.
"Yeah, been on the entire time brother," Itachi responds. "I have everyone here. We're ready. Just let us know who you want".
"21, what's it going to be? We have civilians getting murdered in the streets here," Akisame states with a newfound emotion in his tone. --------------------- Turning Point + Clutch Moment If you're teleporting people here, who are you bringing? (Pick as many as you want) 1: Itachi 2: Sasuke 3: Naruto 4: Randel 5: Jiraiya 6: Tsunade 7: Sarutobi
What are you going to do now? A: Release everyone from the prison. Most of the people in there are political prisoners, and will likely fight against Madara B: Try to use a Massive Shared Consciousness, speak to everyone in the village, and show them your own memories of Madara's wickedness hoping to incite a riot C: Tell everyone you're going to find Madara and kill him. Summoning your team members to his location when you find him D: Ask your team members to disable the guard's as they go throughout the city. Helping as many civilians as possible E: Free Will
"Nothing to boil the blood like a little civil disturbance," you say into the comm. "Listen team. We have a serious situation here. We've got ourselves a village filled with serious martial artists called Bellhelm. Said town was taken over, and literally sat, in Madara's lap, for several months now. If that doesn't scream bad news, then maybe this will. Kazuma, for those that remember, has just finished telling me a very scary story. According to him, Madara has himself, a death ray. Don't tell me, I know exactly how it sounds. But this weapon is what Madara was carrying around in the crate. This weapon can level mountains. And considering the fact that he was able to hold a village filled with hard asses for such a long time, means we have ourselves one hell of a fight. Akisame, Guy, let's break open the prison. Let's see how much Madara likes it when the masses turn him up and over like a tumbleweed".
Kakashi stands up and looks at you before pointing behind you. The towns been lit ablaze.
"Itachi, I need you and Jiraiya over here, I'm summoning you now," you instruct. "Sarutobi-sensei, please protect Sasuke and Naruto as much as possible. I suspect Madara is still after them. We're heading towards the prison now".
You use your jutsu and summon Itachi and Jiraiya. Itachi has his Sharingan activated, and Jiraiya has Ma and Pa Toad on his shoulders.
You motion toward the fires. Several men jump in front of you. 4, by your count, they're all deformed, but in some way... they seem to resemble you.
"What the?!" Jiraiya exclaims. "What have they done to these poor men?!"
You analyze them, taking in every subtle piece of information they provide. Their movements, their gear... they're modeled directly after you. Some are deformed in the face, with blank slabs of skin covering their expressions, others, like the one on the left end, has an extra arm that protrudes from his back. But they all share one thing in common, a crude blue light that blinks from where their left ear is supposed to be. It reminds you of your communicators.
"Guy, take care of that, we need reinforcements," you speak into the comm. "Our enemy apparently has reinforcements too".
They stand still and analyze you. They surely can't stand up to you, or your party members... But the fear of revealing moves is there... And if that is a communicator, then Madara knows you're here... Or worse, he has more of these... things, searching the entire village for you. ==== A: Jiraiya, use your Swamp! B: Itachi, fireball the hell out of them! C: Kakashi, handle this! D: Use False Ash Cloud, they've seen the jutsu, let's not give Madara anymore points E: Free Will
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:16:02 GMT
"Kakashi, give these gentlemen a seat," you instruct as you make the seals for your jutsu.
"Lightning Style! Bolt Chakrams!" you witness Kakashi summon two sets of chakrams, one in each hand. They are made solely of lightning chakra.
He throws them towards the clone monsters, from each side. The chakrams go through all of their bodies, and cut them in four, uneven, portions.
Randel appears in front of you with a dumbstuck look on his face.
"Sir?" he asks.
"Sorry about the lack of notice Randel, you're on us," you instruct. "Kakashi, what the hell was that?"
"Yeah, I made that jutsu up a little while ago," Kakashi responds with an obvious smile under his mask. "You never know... it was only a matter of time before Madara used your regeneration against us.. And they were obviously Madara's attempts at cloning you".
"Ahuh... alright, let's go, everyone on me, we're going to the prison," you continue without skipping a beat. "We're liberating our compatriots. If anyone sees an opportunity to take out the bad guys in cloud robes, take it, but NOT before letting us know. Let's try to clear up these fires as well".
Your group continues moving through the town. Your eardrums are drowning with the echoes of the poor townspeople, crying in agony and screaming for help. The dull roar of fire crackles as the backdrop to their misery. You finally make it to the prison, you find it strange that you haven't run into any Akatsuki. As you make it to the prison, you can see Akisame and Guy, struggling to clear out the flaming support beams that have collapsed inwards on the prison. You hear the inmates screaming for succor.
"What a terrible means to an end," you say aloud.
Your eyes tear up as you feel the wind swirl all around you. You look up and to the left to see Kazuma flying towards the prison, he claps his hands hard, sending a wall of air towards the prison, extinguishing some of the flames.
"21! They got her!" Kazuma cries out to you. "They took her! The Akatsuki have Ayano! I need you to bring her back for me!"
The panic is deafening. You point to Kakashi amongst the chaos. He understands you and he begins his Water Dragon jutsu. Kazuma uses his jutsu to funnel the intensity of Kakashi's water dragons. The jail is safe, for now.
"It's a trap!" you hear coming from inside the prison. You see it's Akisame running towards you with a female shinobi draped over his shoulder. Guy helps another giant you assume to be Apachai out of the immolation. Kensei and Sakaki appear suddenly next to them and help them place their comrades down on the floor.
"21, there's these monsters all over the village," Kensei informs. "They're everywhere. They're killing women and children. They're not strong by themselves, but they won't die! Some of them, look like you".
"You have to behead them," you inform coldly. "They're based off of me".
"Indeed they are," you hear that familiar tone of arrogance behind you. "Don't do anything hasty. I have hostages".
****. You turn around and see Madara floating in midair. He has some sort of gigantic backpack strapped on. He makes his way to the ground and glares at you menacingly, his Sharingan visible.
"I have a proposal," Madara says. "You know me to be a man of my word. And I will continue to be... but... you see, you laid out everything perfectly for me".
He motions to his back and you see Madara's crew walk slowly towards you. A large constrictor snake is poking out from Orochimaru's robe, holding up the girl you assume is Ayano. Zetsu is there, as is 3, Kakuzu, and the other unnamed shinobi with the large scythe.
"Why do you keep playing these ****ing games with me?!" you shout menacingly. You're at your limit with this man. "What the **** is your problem?! Why can't you just fight like a god damn man, and get it over with?!"
"Tsk, tsk 21," Madara says as he looks up at Kazuma. "How is it that you inspire such loyalty in your comrades with such a mouth? We've spoken about this before. You know that battles aren't won everytime by the best warrior, but by the one who is best prepared. I will never fight an even battle. Why would I risk so much on skill, when I can just place the odds heavily on my side?"
You hate this man. You have always tried to believe in the inherent good of mankind. That every cloud has a silver lining... But this man... is a monster.
"I have Kazuma's lovely Ayano here," he continues. "And I have others. At this point, your monstrous brothers are ripping apart the town. And while what Kensei says is very true, they're not very strong on their own... But they are really hard to kill, and loyal to a fault, like you. I knew it was you all along. I was wondering when you'd come here. Did you really think I'd allow Kensei and Sakaki to join my army just like that? I was playing them, so they could play you, just like I knew I could. Your kindness is your folly. I knew the plight of these people would tear your poor little heart apart. I'll admit, I wondered why you stole the corpses from the coroner's office at first. But when the job was TOO clean... I simply knew Orochimaru couldn't have done it. You see, his style is far too flamboyant. But no, not his son... His son likes to be quick and precise, with no need for theatrics".
Madara paces back and forth. Laughing softly to himself the entire way, he finally exhales before continuing.
"I want a little match, one on one, no tricks. You against a new member here, I need to see how far you've grown, and if this man is worthy of wearing my mantle," he says arrogantly. "If you win, I give up all the hostages I have, and we'll leave peacefully".
"And if I lose?" you ask, the red film covering your eyesight completely.
"Then you have to swear to follow me for my tests, so that I can reproduce the miraculous procedure that made you possible," Madara states. "Just like the last time we had a stand off. Well, maybe not the last time, the last time we had a stand off, I seem to remember you running like a coward, but the time before that. Mind you, I'm keenly aware of your prowess. I'm afraid there's just one thing I have over you... I don't have a standard. There's no 'dirty trick' I won't pull... Minus breaking my word, nothing is too low. My beliefs are TOO important to me to be trifled with what's socially acceptable. Maybe it's time you grow up 21, and let go of this foolish naivete. So... do we have an arrangement?"
You look around, you swore to Kazuma... Sasori shows up behind your group and he's holding several hostages with his Hiruko puppet. Madara wasn't lying...
"And you're order your monsters off of the town? You won't come back?" you ask.
"I will never step foot in Bellhelm again, nor will any of my associates," Madara assures.
"You can't even be contemplating this!" Itachi complains. Kakashi raises his hand, halting Itachi's speech.
... ======= Clutch Moment A: Agree to duel this mystery member B: Ask to know who you will be fighting C: Agree to duel this mystery member, but in reality, tell your team to take out as many of the Akatsuki as possible when the opportunity arises D: Hell no, there won't be a deal E: Free Will
"I'm going to need something from you Madara," you say confidently. Your breath steaming with anger. It begins to rain softly, then it becomes a downpour. "I want you to answer one question I ask you if I win. I want it answered truthfully, and FULLY to your knowledge. I need you to give me your word on that, since you value it so much. Give me your word that if you lose, you will answer any question I ask completely, honestly, without any type of trick".
Madara laughs as he looks around. You look up at Kazuma flying midair. Kazuma is livid as well... This isn't going good... You need to calm yourself down.
"Very well," Madara states confidently. "Anything else o' hero of the people?"
"Now that you mention it, yeah," you reply. "Who is this man you're having me fight?"
"Now you're asking for too much, I think," Madara retorts arrogantly. "If I answer that question, you have to promise me that if we lose, you won't attack any of my men. You'll let me collect my wounded, and we'll depart peacefully. It's a fair trade, considering that Jiraiya over there, knows him, quite well actually".
He points a finger at him.
"How about it wise leader of the young yet legendary Team 21? Do we have an arrangement?" == A: I give you my word B: The information isn't that important, bring your guy out C: Yeah, I promise (Lie) D: Free Will
"Very well, I give you my word," you answer confidently. You look back towards Jiraiya, who has an expression of confusion across his face.
"Meet, the legendary Hanzo," Madara says as he motions to his right. From far away you see a figure coming towards you. "By now, I imagine you figured out that Danzo was my puppet all along. Did you know that Hanzo and Danzo actually go way back? Have you ever heard of a place called Amegakure? The Village Hidden in Rain? No? Hmmm, a shame. Well this is their leader..."
You hear Jiraiya gasp. You turn around to see the embodiment of terror on Jiraiya's face. He looks at you, and blinks his eyes as the sweat pours down into them from his forehead.
"I believe he is known as Hanzo of the Salamander?" Madara continues as he places his finger up to his temple as if thinking. "I don't really do well with things like that.. When you become my age, things come and go like seconds on a clock. Well, let's just say that I orchestrated a little coup on the Rain Village, on behalf of Danzo. And Danzo wanted to have control of the Rain Village, so he created a fake treaty with Danzo here. When I told Hanzo it was all a lie, we set about an elaborate play to convince Danzo that he was successful in his machinations to have Hanzo killed. Suffice it to say, Hanzo was more than a little upset at that betrayal. He was also upset at the fact that he could never get revenge on Danzo because you robbed him of it. So, I believe it's best if you two settle it like men".
The man identified as Hanzo stands at roughly your height, but he wears a strange breathing apparatus around his mouth and nose. He doesn't seem very impressive. You turn to Jiraiya to see if his condition has improved.
"21, DO NOT fight him!" Jiraiya pleads. "No one man can defeat him!"
"Ah, one of the Legendary Sannin," Hanzo says, his voice deep and altered by his apparatus. "You ally yourself with this young whelp? I expected more out of you".
"He's actually a lot older than he looks," Madara says with a scoff. "Now, shall we begin?" ====== A: Give me a second, I need to speak with Jiraiya B: We need to change locations, and you should release the hostages, you got what you want C: I'm ready. He doesn't look so tough. D: On second thought, maybe this isn't such a good idea... E: Free Will
"We can't fight here," you say as you look around. "Your men wrecked the village enough. And you have my word already, you can release the hostages".
"Very well," Madara says as he motions to Sasori and Orochimaru.
They let go of Ayano and all their hostages. Kazuma flies down and sweeps Ayano off her feet and retreats to the village. Sasori walks around your group and rejoins his group. Even more women are released from behind them. Which means that there are people behind the Akatsuki that you still haven't seen.
"Be warned however," Madara says as he looks at the women run by him crying. "Any tricks, or reneging on your part, and I'll do much worse than screaming them. I'll level the city".
"I believe you," you answer with a smile. "You don't have to worry about that, I'm the stupid, good guy, remember?"
You turn back to Jiraiya and walk towards him.
"I want to move the battlefield, I came here to save this people," you inform. "I wouldn't exactly be saving anyone if my battle brings down all of their homes".
"I can understand that," Madara answers. "What are you doing? Having a little pep talk with your cheering squad?"
"Something like that," you answer as you turn back to Jiraiya.
"Hurry up," Madara says. "My patience has limits".
"What's up?" you ask Jiraiya as the rest of the team converges on you two.
"That man is a legend for a reason," Jiraiya states. "He is the one that gave the title Sannin. How powerful does one have to be that merely him giving three young shinobi a title, those three shinobi become famous themselves? This man is bad news 21. You shouldn't have given him your word, he's too powerful for one shinobi to take alone. How did Madara get him to serve him? Hanzo is extremely paranoid... Madara must have reached a whole new level".
"That backpack he's wearing, it might be linked to the crate," you suppose. "But that's something we'll have to consider AFTER this village is freed. What can you tell me about him? What does he use? Anything that stands out?"
"He's the Salamander because of his summon and chakra nature," Jiraiya replies hastily. "He has a huge salamander summon, and he breathes fire. He's completely immune to all fire jutsu, he will just redirect it towards you. Don't let him catch you off guard, he can make flame out of anything, and out of anywhere. He's also very skilled in taijutsu. He's a very well rounded shinobi, but he never used any genjutsu on us, so I don't know if he's capable of it. I also don't know if a genjutsu would work on him. This fight is important, so assume it won't. He uses bombs, and other ninja tools to lure you into traps he's set on the battlefield. So changing the battlefield is a great bonus for us".
"That's enough I think," Madara shouts. "Let's go. This wasn't part of the arrangement".
"You're too kind," you say as you turn around and thank Jiraiya. He's given you the most he could in the small amount of time you had. "Follow me then, I'll take us away from this place".
"After you," Madara says politely.
You and your group go far away from Bellhelm to a clear field near a small lake. You stop there and both of the groups take opposite ends. You tried to see who Madara was holding as back up, but you couldn't get a clear glimpse of them. But you know someone is lurking just beyond your senses.
"Thanks for being such a gentlemen," you say snidely as you walk towards the other group. "I wish all evil megalomaniacs were as honorable as you".
"Yes well, I'm one of a kind," Madara says with a chuckle. He lays his hand outward, and Hanzo steps forward.
The battle is on, under the full moon. It shimmers brightly off of the cool water, almost as if it's little sister was drowning in the depths of the lake. A calm stillness... To soon be disrupted.
Hanzo readies an attack and runs at you, a steady stream of fire from his hand. From above, you see a fireball coming down towards you, and from behind, he has more fire trying to lure you into taijutsu range. ==== A: Use Headhunter and appear in the lake to catch him off guard with ____ B: Use Flashburst and jump to the side C: Use Raisoku and get the hell out of this death trap D: Use Sudden Explosion and try to push all the flame back E: Free Will
You use HeadHunter perfectly and go underground and rise above the depths of the lake. You make the unique seals of the Golem Style and summon forth a crystal golem. Lightning strikes the earth as it rises, crystallizing it, and making it take shape. The crystal golem rises from the spot you used HeadHunter on.
Hanzo turns to his right to see you on the lake's surface. He tries to run towards you, but the crystal golem gets in front of him and engages him in taijutsu.
Hanzo does several backflips and shoots a powerful fireball at the golem, who walks right through it and slugs Hanzo hard in the jaw. Hanzo tries to block the blow, but can't and ends up hitting himself in the jaw. He falls back and shakes his head. His apparatus has been shattered, he rips off the rest of it and spits a mouthful of blood onto the ground.
He makes some seals and suddenly you see the lake you're in start to boil.
==== A: FGG behind Hanzo and use Plasma Weapon on him B: Activate Raisoku and burst out of the lake C: Use Mass change on the water and turn the lake into a puddle (it will cost more than the basic cost) D: Ignore the boiling water and let your regeneration take it. Cast _____ E: Free Will
You use FGG and manifest your plasma sword while teleporting behind Hanzo. You arrive behind him and take a swipe, he jumps high up above you and launches himself further into the air with a pillar of blazing flame. Your arms gets completely singed to the bone, and it hurts like a mother******. You growl in pain as you look up.
Hanzo changes his direction in midair by kicking a current of warm air towards you. It hits you in the face but you maintain your ground.
"Did you think I wouldn't have let my associates in on all your secrets?" you hear Madara jeer you over the roar of the flames on the ground around you. "You didn't think I wouldn't plan on that did you? Hahaha... you really thought I couldn't recognize a teleportation jutsu after so many decades of being a master at it? Poor, self-righteous fool".
Hanzo lands on the ground and spits on the ground, slamming his palm on the ground. It's a summoning jutsu! A gigantic puff of smoke, and then there it is. His colossal salamander. And it's eyeing you as it's next meal. ============ A: Fissure the thing B: Use Anthem of Horus on Hanzo to stop his onslaught C: Use Lightning Force with Paralysis on the salamander D: It's time to construct a Crystal Prison E: Free Will
That salamander eyes you like a chew toy. Little does it know, you won't be its next meal. You start casting your jutsu, when the salamander turns and tries to whip you with its enormous, spiked tail. You backflip back onto the water. You feel at ease now. Your training and trials, although extreme have made you this. They've made you into something else. You no longer fear, anything. There isn't any anger either... Just... cold, precise, undeniable logic.
Your body itself urges you to use your Golem Style. You had originally intended to use Mass Change on your Crystal Golem, but the salamander's tail attack prevented you...
"Golem Style: Mass Change..." you whisper at your own reflection in the lake. You picture the Crystal Golem becoming bigger than the salamander. You know that the jutsu is basic amongst your style, and requires you to touch the desired target. But you know this golem is yours. And reality is a trivial thing. You will bend reality to what you see fit. Through hard work, and most important, the trust and wellbeing of your friends. The innocents who have suffered... You look up to see your Crystal Golem has indeed grown to gargantuan proportions.
Just like you knew it would. You instantly conclude that any golem under your power and control, must bend to your will, and your will alone.
You disappear in an instant using FGG, and grab your golem's head, and then FGG with it a little above the salamander's head. The golem comes crashing down on Hanzo's salamander. Hanzo jumps off frustrated and surprised. You hear some of the Akatsuki members gasp in amazement. You hear Team 21 roar in surprise, they didn't see this coming either... But somehow... as your blood gets stronger, so does your control over your golem style...
You stare at Madara. You hope to see his mask try to deny his horror. But, there is no shock to be found there. No anger. No disappointment. Not even a hint of frustration. You feel a smile under that mask. You sense he craves you even more, like a starving dog begs for a stake. The sick bastard is drooling for you, his prize, and he won't be denied.
"You won't have me without a fight," you say lowly to yourself. You use FGG to attack Hanzo from several sides. Hanzo has superior taijutsu, but your FGG jutsu won't be denied. Your style is the better style. Your style is the most powerful. With this style, you will protect your village, and all of your family.
You continue to teleport all around Hanzo, befuddling him to the point of audible desperation. You kick him as you jump with your right instep, turn in midair, and give a spinning heel kick with your left foot. You send Hanzo crashing through the ground.
"And you'll NEVER get my friends. NOT AS LONG AS I LIVE," you state authoritatively.
Hanzo looks at you as he stands up in pain. He's confused as to what you're talking about. He begins to chuckle to himself.
"You're good kid, I'll give you that," Hanzo says. First thing he's said the entire time. "But I'm done messing around".
You hear your golem and Hanzo's salamander going at it viciously away from your battle. They tear into the nearby forest.
Hanzo slaps both hands together, and you think he made several seals within one second. But before you know it, thousands of salamanders begin emerging from the ground. Each one, small, a little bigger than a common salamander. But from each mouth, a steady stream of fire comes forth. A literal tidal wave of these creatures is coming your way, and Hanzo is completely covered by the beast. They seem to be generating some sort of heat source, and now Hanzo appears to be wearing a complete set of armor, made entirely of fire. ====== A: Set up a lightning trap B: He's relying on his fire armor, use Crystal Prison on him C: Lightning Lion him D: Send Hanzo a Plasma Bolt with your regards E: Free Will
"Neat trick," you say with a smirk. You use your FGG jutsu to teleport randomly towards him, reappear 10 feet away and let loose with a plasma bolt.
Hanzo moves to his right, and just barely gets nicked by your jutsu. His shoulder falls apart at the socket. His arm falls to the floor, before the smoke appears and you hear it. POOF. It was a clone. You turn around towards the tidal wave as it parts and you see Hanzo there arms crossed, being suspended in mid air by the salamander swarm. He moves his arms and points the swarm downwards.
The wave slams into your chest in its full fiery glory. You get knocked off your feet, and almost drown in the sea of infernal amphibians. Your regeneration is kicked into full gear as you struggle to get to the surface of the salamander ocean. Your skin peels away painfully as the flames flicker over your body over and over again. You scream in agony as you feel your skin regrow only to be scorched once more. You hear the Akatsuki snicker, but you see Madara raise his hand in silence, and they heed his order. They all quiet down immediately. You grit your teeth in pain as you look over at your team mates...
"Finish him," Madara orders calmly.
Hanzo throws more seals into the air, Rat, Rat, Ox, Tiger, you can't follow more than that... he's so fast. You see from around you, a small, cyclone made entirely of flame is closing all around you. Your feet are burning, your eyes are stinging. The very air itself is painful to breathe. You feel as if you might pass out if you're not careful. ==== Clutch Moment A: Use FGG to move up and out of here towards the sky. By the time you fall back to earth, you should be healed up and have another plan B: Summon a gigantic Swamp of the Underworld to swallow up all the flame C: Use an Earth Wall to surround yourself while you catch your breath D: Use Hanzo's Exploding Tag Technique. He finally revealed himself, time to strike E: Free Will
You use FGG to escape from the inferno to a lower level of the earth's atmosphere. You take a soldier pill immediately, and cast Hanzo's Exploding Tag jutsu, ironically enough, a jutsu that Hanzo made famous. You streamline your body as you freefall to speed up your descent. You see your jutsu explode all over Hanzo's leg. His sea of salamanders disappear, you then FGG next to Hanzo and hold up your plasma sword next to his neck. Hanzo is in visible pain, you think he's gone into shock. His legs are a mess, the explosion bit to the bone, in some places, even deeper.
"Enough," Madara says with a tone that makes it seem as if he won. "Hanzo, send your salamander back. You can join our rank as promised. And you will maintain your position amongst the Rain Village. Thank you 21, this has been most... educating. Orochimaru, pick him up will you. As promised, I will withdraw from Bellhelm... Before I go however.. what do you think I should call your cloned brethren?"
Hanzo desummons his salamander as Orochimaru's snake comes from under his room and grabs him.
"You're forgetting something aren't you?" you say as you make your gigantic golem walk towards your group. The earth shakes with its every step.
"No, I am not," Madara says. Again, even under the mask you feel him smiling. "I know what you're referring to. You can go ahead, ask me a question. It was worth it".
"Fine, one question it is," you say your plasma weapon still in hand. Kakashi and Guy get near you, ready to back you up. ---------------- What do you want Madara to answer honestly?
You look at Madara before passing by a brief thought. Somethings that's hounded you since you discovered the presence of the Akatsuki.
"Tell me about the members of the Akatsuki, all of them," you say firmly. "I want to know why you selected them, how they help further your cause".
"Ah, I see," he answers without surprise. "An excellent question. One that even forces me to reveal our number... Well, I'm a man of my word 21. But we have many members, Zetsu alone has dozens of thousands of himself. He acts as a most important spy for me. There's 3, but of course you know of her and Orochimaru as well. You know what both of them can do. Hidan here is immortal, he's the one with the sunny disposition and welcoming scythe. Kakuzu, who by all accounts is immortal too. But then again, it seems you've reached a certain level of immortality as well... Hanzo here is extremely knowledgable, and his presence in my group grants me the Rain village to work out of. Without even having to result to my usual methods, which is VERY time efficient. Sasori as you know, is the greatest poison maker and puppeteer in the world. I also have Kabuto, our medic. Pain and Konan, they are invincible... I have Zabuza, perhaps you've heard of him? One of the legendary seven? No matter. He has a vassal, but he's not a member. There are also several members I am considering extending membership to, but haven't yet".
"And who are they?" you ask a bit more aggressively.
"No no," Madara corrects you. "you asked for the Akatasuki. They aren't members yet and might never be. So nothing is to be said on them. As to why they further my plans... Any one of them can level a village if I wanted them to. They all come together for different reasons, but in the end they are all loyal to me. I needed a powerful group to enact my plan, to cover me. What better group than one formed of rogue ninja? They have nothing to lose, and most of them are VERY upset at their home villages. Although some are more important than others, of course. The group had to expand beyond my previous estimations because of you. Team 21 made recruiting necessary. As a freebie, the one I mentioned earlier, Pain, he can control the tailed beasts. So as you can see, you might want to take him out first. As you've surely concluded by now, the beasts are a part of my plan. Although your interference has changed my main plans and forced me to focus on you".
You nod, at least you have a basic idea of their names and membership count. Maybe you should work on stopping their recruitment drives to stop their numbers from swelling. But that's going to take some massive intelligence gathering. He answered your question better than you expected.
A half dead Hanzo motions towards you before speaking.
"I named the Sannin," he informs. "It was a half compliment, it was also an insult... But you, I deem you Tatsujin. You are truly worthy of the honor".
Madara scoffs and nods at you. He bids his farewell before he reprinted his entire group out.
You turn to your group.
"I'm going to go check on the village," Kakashi informs as he leaves with several members leaving only Itachi with you.
"You need to get stronger you know," Itachi states.
I know you think to yourself...
Karma Reward A: increase your chakra pool to 850 B: master a jutsu/ try to improve a mastered jutsu C: give yourself 5 stat points D: grant your golems your previous regeneration
Arc reward E: make all your golem style jutsus able to work from far away (no need to touch objects for the certain jutsus) F: gain another chakra element and five jutsus, any rank from that element G: increase your chrak regen to 20/ 6 seconds H: make every golem you summon able to cast your jutsu, C rank and lower chakra capacity 60. No regen
Exp reward (for picking up on clues) 1: make a jutsu cost no chakra (specify which) 2: make your body as hard as steel. (weights your blows in taijutsu, and could hurt your opponent who punches/kicks you without enhancing their blow with chakra. Also makes you heavier, for story purposes) 3: raise the stat cap to 12 on all your stats. Essentially giving you the potential to be considered superhuman.
You turn to Itachi as he looks at you curiously.
"Brother..." you say weakly. You place your hand to your forehead. "I.. don't feel too well".
The last thing you see is Itachi rushing towards you to catch you. Your vision becomes blurry, and the sound becomes amplified. You feel Itachi drag you back to the dojo. Shishi is nearby, you can somehow sense his presence.
"What happened to the cub?" you hear Shishi ask. You want to answer, but you're so disoriented, it's impossible.
"He fought Hanzo and then just collapsed," Itachi answers.
You feel your body being placed onto the ground.
"He's absorbed nature chakra," Shishi says. "How the hell did he do this?"
"No, he didn't. I mean, we didn't see that," Itachi stammers a bit. "What's happening to him?"
"He's undergoing a serious transformation," Shishi explains. "And he obviously wasn't ready for this. Nature chakra is... tumultuous like nature itself. You need to be be strong in mind, body and soul".
"My brother is all of those things," Itachi defends. "Is he going to recover?"
"Of course he will," Shishi says. "Let me work on him. But he obviously wasn't ready. He needs something. He has the power and he obviously has a strong mind and soul. Perhaps it's his lack of experience. He is only 5 years old mentally isn't he? Maybe he needs to mature a bit. 21, if you can hear me, this is Shishi. I will help you. Just try to relax. Trust in me to place you back to normal".
You feel warmth all over your body. You feel Shishi's massive hands touching your chest, there's a soft warmth to them. You hear him talking to you, telling you to sleep. He's using hypnosis. You fall asleep peacefully.
You find yourself awakening, an unknown amount of time has passed. Your vision is clear, and your senses are back to normal. Everyone is around you, even Hayate who is walking with the aid of a cane. Shishi is meditating next to you, his eyes open as you turn to face him. His cat like pupils examine you cautiously.
"How do you feel cub?" his golden eyes pierce your soul.
"Fine, thank you," you answer. "I heard you. Thanks for what you did. I know you where there".
"It's not often that nature itself selects a champion cub," Shishi answers. "I must train you. It came to me, in a vision. You are to be the next Lion Master. Hayate-chan is unfortunately, going to remain crippled. After examining everything, your sensei, Sarutobi, and I came to the same conclusion. The only reason you were able to resurrect Hayate and the rest was because of the seals Orochimaru placed on the bindings. But your blood itself, contains the essence of life, of nature. It is life itself".
"Sarutobi-sensei is here?" you ask anxiously.
Shishi nods.
"Yes, that he is," he answers. "He was very interested in your health. Your little brother brought him here on your 'Flying Lion'. Funny how life is ironic that way... I did some talking with Sarutobi, we both believe you to be extremely gifted. I believe, and have been taught that nature itself sometimes, chooses a champion. I believe you are that champion. This Impure World Resurrection... it goes against nature itself, as Sarutobi explained it to me. However, you have one chance with me. If you fail, you will not have another chance. It means you weren't ready, or maybe I wasn't the one to teach you. But to roam with lions, you must succeed flawlessly, without fear. Without arrogance, but without doubt. Can you do this?"
"I believe I can," you answer honestly.
"That is the uncertainty I'm referring to," Shishi points out. "Either you can, or you can't. Don't waste both of our time cub. Will you succeed or will you lose?"
You look at Shishi dead in the eye. You honestly don't know. But you will try. Maybe one day, you will know for sure. But now isn't the day. And you're not a liar, silence is the only option.
"Very well, that's the eye," Shishi says. "And here's your task. You must become a chunin, recognized by the Leaf itself. These trials are petty and trivial, yet they teach much. If you can become a chunin out of the hundreds of candidates, then you have proven yourself worthy to stand in front of me again. At that time, I can see if you have... matured yet".
"We have a lot of things to worry about," you reply. "Madara is recruiting new people. We know where they are hiding now, in the Rain Village. We need to stop him".
"If you feel like doing that, then do so," Shishi says. "But do not expect me to train you. You do things my way, or you will not be my student. Ever. You can train or prepare for the chunin exams anyway you'd like. But you mustn't involve yourself with Madara. He is above your level cub. When you find yourself at the top of the food chain, then, you may feed. Not before then".
But Madara... You're not sure. People are suffering while you talk. You can't wait for the chunin exams in 5 months. People will die... But Shishi has proven himself wise... You're not sure what to do, and you know that's the exact thing Shishi has warned you to avoid. ===== Turning Point A: I will go train in preparation for the chunin exams B: I'm sorry Shishi, I can't avoid the people who are getting hurt because of my absence. C: I will train in preparation for the chunin exams, by destroying Madara's resources D: I must think on this E: Free Will
"Can you hear me 21?" you hear inside your head. It's clearly L.
"Go ahead L. Read you loud and clear".
"Been trying to get through to you for a while. What the hell was going on?"
"Lots, and lots. Then you pour some more on top of that. And well, bad metaphors aside, it's still nowhere near the level of crap that's been going down. You got something for me L?"
"Sure do, boss. Unfortunately, they said they know you're a stand up guy. They've heard all about our adventures. But, they can't support us in the effort, they can't believe that one man can hold a threat to their village. I told them it wasn't such a small threat, it was a global threat. They didn't bite on that either. They said that if one man was so powerful, it would be global news by now. That Madara can't be a real threat, because a person doesn't gain such power in a short amount of time".
"That's fantastic," you answer sarcastically. "Hold on a minute".
You turn to Shishi and bow.
"I will train Shishi-san," you inform him respectfully. "I will have my team mates scout out Madara's resources though. While I prepare, they will limit him as much as possible. Right guys?"
Kakashi nods, Guy gives you a smile and a thumbs up. Akisame comes up to you.
"I'd like to remain part of the team," Akisame states. "The guys here have a lot of rebuilding to do. But I still need to help... I can't have anymore children being made orphans by Madara's acts".
"And what about Kensei? Sakaki?" you ask.
"They will eventually join us as well I imagine," Akisame states. "I have known them the majority of my life. They will most likely take turns building the dojo, and then they will want to join up as well".
"I can certainly use all the help I can get, he's got an army," you say as you look around at Team 21. "But we got a real bad ass family".
"Then it's settled cub," Shishi says as he places both of his heavy hands on your shoulders. His manacles clang together. "Where will you be training?"
"Hehe... I think I'm going for a walk in the clouds..." you say whimsically. "I got someone to talk to".
You look around, and bow to your team mates. Kakashi nods knowingly as he places his hand on Itachi's shoulder.
"Let me and Itachi handle it," Kakashi says. "We'll stay on top of it. And if there's anything we need to know, we still have the comms and that jutsu of yours".
"Alright then," you say confidently as you turn your attention in your mind back to L, whose waiting inside your mind.
"I'm coming near you now L".
You use FGG to teleport near L who looks at you oddly.
"You look different," L says to you as he eyes you. "The hell happened to you? You look... real different".
"A lot, like I said," you say with a smirk. "Let's do our merge thing and exchange info. You're going to have much more chakra to use from now on... I can feel it".
L shrugs his shoulder and merges back with you. His experience floods into your brain, and you once again fall to your knees. The dark skinned man with the light hair and sunglasses... His name... it's Killer Bee. And his brother... is the Raikage, A. You remember your training sessions from before, but they're hazy. Just bits and pieces. But you remember that the village is nearby. You walk a short amount of time and make it to Kumo. The guards let you in immediately, they assume you're L. You are directed to the Raikage who is out on a balcony looking over his village. You bow respectfully.
"So, my answer comes with a reply now?" A asks you.
"No sir," you reply as you bow. "This time, it's me. The real deal. It's 21, Raikage-sama".
He turns to face you and notes the dirt on your uniform. He smiles softly as he looks you over.
"You haven't aged at all for real," he says. "I didn't think it was true, but here you are. And I know you're the real thing. Interesting... But I told your rep my answer. I can't just throw my people into a BS affair that might be a complete waste, no matter our history".
"I want you to see something... I want you to experience my memories," you state honestly. "It's going to feel weird. It might make you sick to your stomach, might make you nauseous enough to vomit. But you need to see it. Truthfully, I don't want a full out army against Madara. I think that would be ridiculously stupid. It would lead only to an unnecessary loss of life, and no one needs that. But A, if I'm right, he's going to be leveling villages. If I'm wrong, nothing happens except you lose a couple of men for a couple weeks. If you trust me enough, your village can be saved".
A grunts as he tilts his head and narrows his eyes. He starts playing with his facial hair before stepping up to you. The man has definitely gotten bigger since your memories of training with his brother, and you don't really remember him all too well.
"What do you need me to do? How will you show me your memories?"
"I can show you what's inside my head," you answer honestly. "No tricks, no genjutsu. You might even see things in there that I don't want you to see. But the threat is real, and that's why I'm here. Our villages have had problems with one another in the past, but Madara threatens the world. Like I said, I don't need an army. I just want you to be ready so that what happened to my village doesn't happen to you".
"How does one man take on an entire village and win?"
"The same way Team 21 took on an entire army without a casualty," you reply. "But I need you to trust me enough to see my memories".
"B said you were a standup man," he adds. "Let's just see. Go ahead, but first, let me get some security. Don't be insulted, it's just a precaution".
"I understand," you say as you wait while A leaves. A returns with several attendants.
"These are my personal guards," A explains as he waves his hand. "One of them is a master in genjutsu. So he will be able to tell me everything, as it is. Can you bring him with us?"
"I can," you reply cautiously. "But can he be trusted? I have a lot of secrets that threaten the world".
"If you're trusting me, you're trusting him," A admits. "Whatever you tell me, I'm going to eventually tell him".
You nod and close your eyes. You exhale softly and concentrate your jutsu. You allow A and his confidante to see the memories you want him to see regarding Madara, the statue, Bellhelm, every sick act committed by the man. After the flood of information, you phase out of the jutsu and open your eyes. You look at A and his confidante anxiously. They open their eyes and A nods before looking at his genjutsu specialist.
"Well, was it a trick?" A asks.
"No, I really doubt it," his confidante suggests. "He is extremely powerful however, and that jutsu he just used, he could have placed us under a genjutsu".
"Yet he didn't," A says interested. "Very well 21. What do you need from me?"
"I need to speak to your brother," you confess. "I need him to work with me on my chakra control. My taijutsu, my stamina, my seals. Everything he can train me in. He might get a kick out of my new sword. As for your village's safety, I think you should double, triple check everyone who works for you. Don't leak this information out to anyone. The less people know about it, the better. Change your information networks, stir the pot, you know? Keep em' guessing. Like I said, an all out war is not reasonable right now. Madara has too many things we don't know about yet. But, if we can get some of the Akatsuki members put down, that'd be great".
"Fine, we will start on that immediately," A says confidently. "I know exactly how to deal with this. I'll get my brother, he'll be happy to know you're here in person this time".
"Oh and A?"
"Yeah?"
"He's counting on the tailed beasts," you explain. "That means that he is going to come after B eventually. You GOT to protect B".
A nods his head as he bites his lips. He's obviously bothered by the mere suggestion. He turns around and walks back into the palace. His guards follow him immediately. You stand around for a half hour before Killer Bee makes it to you. He smiles as he rushes you and picks you up.
"21 you damn fool, don't stand there with a drool," B raps. "Ya know the B's got to know, after all you did tell my bro. Now move them lips, don't give me no skips, then the B can give ya the tips".
"Still think you got the ill rhymes B?" you say as you continue to remember. "Poor misguided not knowing Killa B, the guy actually thinks he can flow with me. It's real sad man that you think you can rap, why don't you sit for a while, slap your trap and let me give you all that".
"Respect brother," B says as he gives you a fist. You give him respect and continue to explain to him the whole ordeal.
As the days go by, days become weeks, weeks become months. You've trained with Killer Bee for almost 4 months. He's been working with you very thoroughly, especially on your swordsmanship. He never seemed to get over how "cool" your plasma sword was. It's the final day, and it's the last day of his training.
"Listen here jack, yeah you ain't whack, but before I give you the juice you got to prove you ain't loose," Killer B spouts. "I been peeping your style, gotta say it's been a while. But there's one thing you don't know, and this ya need before ya go. But the only way you get this info, is if you can beat this bad mofo".
You see as he sizes you up. You've had many practice brawls with him over the few months. And he knows all about your healing blood. You know he is going to go all out against you, and you'd insult him if you don't go all out against him. You know he expects you to fight with your all, and that should you win, you'll get something "special" from Killer B. Of course, you don't want to kill him... But then again, do you even want to fight? ===== A: Tell B you're going to both give it your all. And that if you win, you'll use your blood to heal him B: Tell B you're thankful for the training, but there's no reason to do this right now. The training's done. C: Ask B if you can just get this "special" thing for free. You're friends, and the world is at stake. D: Don't do anything. See if Killer Bee makes the first move E: Free Will
"I can definitely feel that B, so let's fight you'll see, before the days done, you'll owe me one. After I'm done with you, my blood'll make ya feel new".
Killer B smiles at you and takes out his swords. By now you have his style down pretty well. And you're thinking of trying something you haven't before...
He charges at you and takes several swipes at you with his swords. You know that if the fight drags on, he will summon his tailed beast, and then it's going to be taken to a new level. If you can end the fight quickly, you'll definitely have it easier.
You backflip away from him and move to higher ground. ======= A: Use Object control on his swords and animate all of them against him. B: Use Plasma Release: Incinerate C: Rain of Ash him D: FGG above him and use Lightning Lion E: Free Will
You call down a Rain of Ash upon Killer B. Fire litters the battlefield from the sky, but Killer B darts side to side, avoiding the dangerous orbs.
He makes it to within striking range and lets loose a barrage of sword swipes on you. Some of them, you dodge, one you block with a kunai you made handy, but the rest, you tank. B slices your sides and your leg before elbowing the back of your head sending you down into the ground.
You can hear him grunt, almost in surprise. You usually do better than this... ===== A: FGG out of there and use a False Ash Cloud B: Headhunt through the ground and set up Lightning Traps on your way back up to ground level C: Seal him within an earth dome as you get up D: Summon your plasma sword to be on equal ground with him E: Free Will
You summon your trusty plasma sword to your hand. You've become very comfortable with it. You take a swipe as you twirl your legs around and kick yourself up.
You slash and stab at Killer Bee, but his many swords parry your advances.
"That's what makes ya the fool, you waving that thing like a tool," Killer Bee explains. "That ain't just there for protection, ya gotta change your direction. Stop acting like it's apart from you, if I said it ya know it's true".
He ripostes your attack and begins to give you a real work out. You roll backwards and swipe at his feet. He jumps up and is baring down on you. -------- A: incinerate B: FGG out of there and give him a surprise counter attack C: raise an earth wall D: summon L to try to overwhelm B E: Free Will
You disappear in a flurry of teleportation attacks with your plasma blade. Above, to his right, behind him, below him, you're all over Killer Bee. If it wasn't for the fact that he is a master swordsman, wielding a ridiculous style, you're sure your relentless offense would nail him. Until you finally succeed and land a blow straight to chest, slashing him from the 3 block to the 7 block.
Killer Bee backs up and pants as he spits up some blood.
"Now you're working right, but that ain't the fight," Killer Bee states. "You know I'm not done, let's have some more fun. Time to bring out the octopus, see if we can't make a ruckus! Stab and storm all over the place, but don't disappoint ya gotta save face".
Killer Bee begins his transformation into the 8 tailed beast. **** just got real. His tailed beast form swipes at you with his tentacles and you dash back, holding your blade before you in defense. How are you going to surpress this beast? ===== A: SoTU him and see how he handles your attacks at that point B: Crystal Prison the **** out of him C: Summon a Crystal Golem to handle him D: Fissure him and see if you can trap the beast E: Free Will
The massive tailed beast roars at you, trying to intimidate you. But you will not be moved. And you're not afraid. You've faced death before, and this, while serious, is no where near bringing you your demise.
It takes a step towards you as you make the necessary seals.
"Sorry B," you say calmy. "I can't have you winning, I am the older one here after all".
You open a great chasm with your Fissure jutsu and watch as the Hachibi falls in. You immediately close the chasm, and await Killer Bee's surrender. But after a bit, you decide it's not coming. The beast breaks through the earth, and you feel a heavy frustration linger in the air.
"It will take more than that boy," you hear. It's the beast talking this time. B is really going all out. You consider slicing the beast in half with your plasma sword, but you doubt you can heal the tailed beast itself.... You will have to surpress it somehow if you wish to win this battle without killing Bee. -------- A: Cast crystal prison on the entire creature B: try to use Anthem of Horus on KB's body C: use Lightning Force to paralyze the beast D: this battle has gone on long enough, you have nothing more to prove. Just give up, it's not worth anymore endangering E: Free Will
You teleport towards the top of the beast's bulbous head and try to use Mass Change on it. The bijuu overpowers you through sheer will, and denies your jutsu. It flings you to the ground. You bounce off the rocky ground like a smooth pebble across a calm lake. You FGG immediately back towards the beast and use FGG to teleport together with it about 6 miles up into the earth's atmosphere. Give or take, of course.
You watch as he Hachibi screams next to you in pain. It's tentacles are beginning to freeze over.
"You win, mortal," the beast says. "Truly, you are the tatsujin. Bring Bee and I safely towards the earth. This test is finished".
You grab the beast and bring it smoothly towards the surface.
"For the future 21," the bijuu advises. "I wouldn't recommend using such an attack. It worked on me because I was working actively to counter your other abilities, but had I been waiting, and just holding off until I could counter attack... My chakra could surely overpower yours. Although I question for how much longer that will be the case. Protect Bee, he is an honorable and good man".
The beast dissolves and Killer Bee returns to normal. You inject some of your blood in him to fix up the wound from your plasma sword. Although you do note, that the plasma sword cauterizes the wound, which reduces damage to your target as it immediately stops the bleeding.
"Now that there was surreal, but before we go have a meal, let's go back to our original deal," Killer Bee states as he leads you towards the treasury room. A is there and nods as you both pass.
"How's your last day among us going 21?" A asks you curiously as Bee disappears into the treasury.
"Going well, Raikage-sama," you answer with a smile. "Bee and I just blew off some steam you know?"
"Excellent, you will be missed," A states, "You know, your advice and input has increased my intelligence network by at least 3 times over. And the routes you selected to patrol save us valuable time, and increase our perimeter net by almost twice of what it was before. I'd hire you as my personal military adviser if you'd take it, but I won't insult you with the offer".
"Yeah, stop tripping bro, you now he's gotta go," Killer Bee says as he comes out of the room with a long, slender chest. It is made of pure silver you suspect. It has chakra seals all over it, with lightning and thunder runes carved all around the box. A smiles as he notices the box.
"So, you're giving him that sword huh?" A says. "He must think a lot about you, that katana was originally meant for B, but it's too long ahd heavy for his style. It harnesses chakra like a... battery almost. And once it has an owner, it can't be used by anyone except that owner until the owner either gives it up, or dies. That katana is very powerful, it's one of the great treasures of our land. I suspect B wants you to use it in combination with your plasma sword jutsu. You can summon it and send it away in the very same way as your current jutsu".
"It don't take no great sleuth, to deduce that that's the truth," Killer Bee raps as he hands you the box.
You bow and accept it graciously. You don't open the chest yet, out of respect to the Raikage's attention.
"This kingdom will owe you for decades to come," Raikage admits. "And if you continue to age this way, you might end up having to depend on my successor to repay you. What are you going to do now?" ===== A: Going to go back home, try to become a chunin B: Not really sure C: Not really sure (lie) D: You'd laugh if I told you E: Free Will
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:16:57 GMT
If you are going to do the chunin exams. Pick your team. Naruto, Sasuke, and Randel have all become genin in your absence. You can take up to 3 others with you, but you know the more people with you, the harder the tests themselves become. So whose going with you?
Before departing, you explain all of your plans for the chunin exams to the Raikage. He laughed at the stupid, and often petty, protocols of the ninja system. How could a person, who could easily level a village, and fight against an army single handedly be assigned something so trivial as a chunin rank, and it actually maintain significance? But, all the same, the two brothers gave you their blessings. You strapped Wind Catcher to your back, feeling it felt most comfortable there, and whisked the fancy silver box to your room back in the Leaf.
Fancying a grand entrance, you FGG to the front gates of the Leaf, and walk calmly towards the village. It seems you've become quite the icon here. People cheer for you, kids are pretending to be you, and even adults are asking for autographs. You also notice the pretty girls that seem to not be able to gaze at you for long. You smirk to yourself as you begin to lose yourself at the possibilities.
"Brother," you hear Itachi call out to you. Wow, didn't notice him. Good possibilities though.
"What are you doing? You gawking at the girls?" Itachi asks with a warm smile. "That's not something I thought I'd ever see YOU do. How was the training?"
"Damn Itachi, you've gotten tall," you say as you size him up. You slap him in the arm and hug him. "I missed you little brother. How's Sasuke and Naruto? How's the team?"
"Well, Kakashi and I had some big shoes to fill," Itachi admits with a scoff. He's in great spirits. It's great to finally see him this happy. "It was pretty touch and go for a while. But eventually we got into this flow, and it just became routine. Sasuke's gotten big too. Naruto is still a little short for his age, but he's grown a lot. No trouble on our front either".
"Really?" you ask with surprise. "Did you manage to get any intel at all on him?"
"Yeah, we have intel, not that it's any good," Itachi answers as his cold demeanor returns. It must be grim news. "Madara isn't a liar, it would seem. He managed to recruit several new members. Kisame from the Mist, Deidara from Iwa, and at least two other members whom we haven't been able to identify. That's who we know of for sure, but we suspect there's more. Kakashi and I wanted to go, especially after Jiraiya riled us all up with his talk of him possibly knowing Konan".
"He knew a member?"
"If it's the same girl, yeah," he answers with a shrug. "Strict orders from the Hokage however. We were ordered to not move until your return. Jiraiya really wanted to test his theory, but his loyalty to the Third is unshakeable. You didn't write or anything. What were you doing all this time?"
"Oh bro... well, I became a pretty decent swordsman for one," you say as you take out Wind Catcher and hand the katana to Itachi, handle first. "Check it out. It's an artifact from the Cloud. Sorry about not being real chatty, was really busy working my ass off. I've been fighting the 8 tailed beast for almost 5 months straight".
"The beast itself?"
"Yeah".
"You're crazier than I thought," Itachi says with a laugh and a poke to your arm. "Don't think that we've been slouching here either. Between Guy, Kakashi, and Jiraiya, our team has been going through some crazy training regimes. We also have two new kids who have been hanging out with us a lot lately. Rock Lee and Nara Shikamaru. Guy took a particular interest in Lee... the poor kid has terrible chakra control. He'll never be able to use anything but taijutsu. His presence has turned Sasuke and Naruto's determination up exponentially".
"Shikamaru too huh?" you remember aloud. "I really like that kid, he's got a great head on his shoulders. If he only weren't so lazy... Is he still lazy?"
"There's lazy, and then, there's Shikamaru. That kid puts lazy to shame".
"Then why does he even hang out with you guys? Isn't he put off by the whole training all day and all night thing?"
"Actually, funny thing," Itachi explains with a slight smile. "He was wondering were you'd been. He said he had been practicing chess, because he wanted to beat you. He said you'd understand. Little by little, he just started coming around more often, and then he just became a regular. Everything is a drag, and he finds everything 'oh so troublesome', but eventually he started analyzing our methods and making suggestions to us that stuck. He reminds me of you in a way, but then he's almost the complete opposite of you. He said he learned a lot from you, he'll be happy to know you're in town".
"Sounds good, let's move," you say as Itachi hands you back your sword. "How much time before the chunin exams start?"
"You came just in time, as your usual," Itachi says as you walk towards the center of the village. "Most of the foreign villages are here already. Hey actually, about that... did you hear about the Kazekage?"
"No... what about him?" you say as you smile at the people screaming "TATSUJIN!"
"He's gone missing," Itachi informs you. "The Sand Village is really up in arms about it, as they should be. But we think it might lead to something, so we're monitoring the situation closely".
"I'd expect nothing less," you say to your little brother proudly. "So, you told me about the new members to our team, which I'm happy about. Sasuke and Naruto need more friends their own age. We can't be hanging out with them too much bro. We got to move aside and let them become their own men, ya know?"
"You're right, as always brother," Itachi agrees. "But you know how I am... That's Sa-chan, and he will always be that to me. Just like you'll always be my bossy, paranoid, reckless, selfless, kamikaze older brother".
"Ouch," you protest. "How long have you been saving that one?"
"A while, actually," Itachi says with a laugh. "So, what was on your mind?"
"Well, like I said, you told me about the kids. What have the rest of you guys been working on? Any new jutsu?"
"Oh, of course, we had to keep up," Itachi answers with a patronizing nod of his head. "After all, Team 21 and all that. I mastered the Giga Eye, and I managed to improve my chakra capacity too, something I've been wanting to do. I'm also working on something ancient from the Uchiha clan, but I was waiting for your return before I messed around too much with it. The Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan. I think Madara might be using it".
"The EMS huh? How could the Mangekyo possibly be improved upon?"
"There's been lots of lore on the subject," Itachi explains. "And I've done a lot of research and practice runs, but I need a new set of eyes to attain it".
"That sounds really... gory and macabre," you state with a little concern. "We don't have to go to such an extreme..."
"I feel like we do," Itachi states coldly. "Madara was right, he wins because we have rules. There will never be anything but war if we allow this ass to run around unchecked. And while we're busy training like a traditonal warrior, he's using forbidden jutsu and obscene experiments to gain strength. He's got a super weapon that's portable and some sort of magic backpack, that at the least, let's him fly".
"Look, I know how it seems," you say as you turn to him and place your hand on his shoulder. "But everytime we use a forbidden jutsu, we have to think about why it's forbidden. We'll talk about it more later".
"Yes, well at least consider it," Itachi suggests. "Kakashi has learned a new Mangekyo technique. Jiraiya has been pounding Naruto hard, he's got this jutsu brother, well, you'll just have to see it. It's really something. He also took Naruto to the Toads up on the Mount, he started training the kid to become a Sage, if you can believe it. The toads up there said he can definitely do it, one day. He needs to grow up a little more before they will train him".
"Naruto? A Sage? Wow, that's great," you say. "And Sasuke? Has he mastered Susanoo?"
"Yeah, he's getting there," he explains sourly. "He is really frustrated... He keeps holding himself to my standard, and he's not happy at his progress. His Susanoo is different than my own though, it actually shoots a chakra arrow. Pretty amazing too. I don't want him using it too often though... I'd like him to try to gain the Giga Eye first, if possible. I need him to understand compassion... I'm afraid this world, and the things he's seen have made him a little more... cynical than he should be. Luckily, he's still the cheery kid we all know, but he's not really expecting much from his fellow man, you know?"
"I understand... we'll work on that," you say as you continue to walk. "And Guy? Randel?"
"Guy thinks he might be able to reach 8 Gates if you're around," Itachi explains. "But he was waiting for you before he tested his theory out. I don't know if he should even try it... Akisame said it's possible, but I'd rather not risk losing a team mate. Randel has actually become quite the monster under the Third's care. His strength has become something monstrous".
"Interesting..."
You make it towards your team and are welcomed warmly. You all catch up and spend some great days together. You all exchange stories from your training. You learn that the crew at Ryozanpaku have rebuilt the dojo completely, and although Hayate, Miu and Kenichi are very physically healthy, they will never be able to use ninjutsu or genjutsu again. You learned that at first they were extremely disappointed by this, but that they eventually were cheered up as their dojo grew larger and larger because of their role in the freeing of Bellhelm.
Sarutobi-sensei was very happy to see you, and reminded you of your responsibility to choose a Hokage elect. You let him know that your team for the chunin exams would consist of Randel, Naruto, and Sasuke. He seem relieved, as there were several teams that were competing in a four man cell.
On the day of the exam, you sit down with your team and they separate you all immediately. There are a ton of participants in this exam, some are even from a village you've never heard of before, The Village Hidden in the Shade. Odd, you think.
The teachers enter the room and immediately hand you all a test, face down, with a pencil. They explain the rules, the time limit, and how the test is scored. If one member of a team is caught cheating, you're all thrown out from the test and humiliated. The test begins, and everyone flips over their paper. You read over it briefly. Is this a joke? You answer all the questions within the first minute and place your pencil down. You look over at Naruto and Randel. Randel looks like he's been frozen by a paralysis jutsu, and Naruto looks like he's going to explode. ----- A: Animate the pencil in Naruto's hand to give him the answers and then move on to Randel B: Use Shared Consciousness jutsu on your team mates and give them the answers C: Don't cheat, it's wrong. They should get by on their own merits D: Try to look around and see how "secure" the test security really is E: Free Will
You look around the room, paying special attention to the proctors. You study them in frustration, the rules state that if they get questions wrong, a point is deducted from their ten point total. But there is no question ten... This is obviously a mind ****, but to what end? Hey... Wait a second... Shino is... Is he cheating? He is!
He just finished sending a bug to someone elses test and back! In front of the proctor's faces no less. Wait a second... As an Aburame clan member, every Leaf shinobi in the room should know their deal. And if they're proctoring this exam, they should be skilled shinobi. Is that what this is? Who can cheat? If that's the test, then is the tes figuring that out and cheating?
You wait a bit more to see a genin get caught cheating. But they caught him for looking over another examinee's paper. So... It must mean they want you to cheat, but in a subtle and clever way, like Shino did. Heh, you can do that.
You fake a headache and place your hands towards your temple, covering your eyes. You use shared consciousness on your team. You bring them into your mind, Naruto freaks out a bit at the process, even though he has heard of this jutsu. Randel merely looks around curiously, and Sasuke stands still awaiting your counsel.
"What's up bro?" Sasuke asks. "Did you finish the test? It's a little harder than I thought it would be".
"I think that's the point," you explain. "They put questions in there the average genin could never hope to answer. That means the genin have to get creative. They gotta cheat. Think about it, shinobi cheat all the time. We cheat during sabotage missions, we cheat when we gather intel, hell, we cheat death itself. They want us to cheat, as long as we don't get caught doing it. So Naruto, Randel, take it easy. Just place a nice loose grip on your pencils, I'll take the test for you".
You exit your jutsu and take control of your teammate's pencils. You fill out their tests, accurately answering all the questions. After that, you place their pencils softly on the table in front of them and wait.
After waiting close to an hour, many genin have been singled out and made to leave. Then, at the 45 minute mark, the main proctor explains question ten.
"Question ten will now be given to whoever chooses to go forward," he states. "However, if you fail and get the question wrong, you will never, ever be allowed to take this exam again. That means you will forever be a genin. Forced to always be an underling, with no choice or hope of having anything better in this world for you than to be someone's do-boy. If you get the question right, you can pass on to the next stage of the exam. If you choose to not take the question, you can simply try again in six months, no big deal. One other thing though, if you screw it up for yourself, you screw it up for your entire team. They'll be forced to be genin for the rest of their lives too. They might not like that".
This is another mind ****. You know it is. But... Naruto is about to explode. What if they're favoring caution at this point? Several teams take him up on the offer and excuse themselves. You look towards your team mates. Randel shrugs at you. Sasuke nods. Naruto is about to explode though, for real. ==== A: Use Shared Consciousness again to distract Naruto B: Use Shared Consciousness to try to calm Naruto down C: Let Naruto make his own decision, this is for their growth, after all D: Have a talk with the entire team via Shared Consciousness E: Take the heat off of Naruto, give up yourself F: Free Will
You let Naruto make his own decision. This isn't only about Shishi's test, this is about them. Eventually... they won't be able to depend on you. It's time they make their own decisions. Sasuke cooly shakes his head at the thought of quitting now. Randel looks around, looks at you, and then nods his head hesitantly.
But there's Naruto.
He maintains his expression, and he appears to be losing his cool.
"So...Are you having a problem son?" the proctor asks of Naruto.
Naruto starts shaking even more violently. He slams his palm down on the table.
"Just WHERE do you get OFF?!" Naruto screams in outrage. "These poor guys are out here, just trying to become chunin. It's bad enough we have to compete against one another, but then you make your own team think about turning against one another! You scare them, big scary guy here. He's scaring kids! Well, guess what mister. I don't scare EASY. You see them!? They're my team mates, and we WON'T FAIL! So you can go ahead, take your question and just cram it! Do you know who he is?! That's the Tatsujin! Yeah, THEE Tatsujin! And you see that big guy over there?! The walking lamp pole? That guy has been trained personally by the Third! And you see that guy down there?! That's Uchiha Sasuke, one day, he will be the 8th Hokage! Right after I become the 7th! We're Team 21, the Leaf's FIRST ninja family, where all clan members come under one name. You'll be in a home somewhere when we're running the place! Now, get outta my face".
Naruto sits down in his seat and bites his lips in outrage. The room has an... awkward atmosphere to say the least. In a way, Naruto said what you felt. You admire his bravado. You love the fact that Naruto doesn't give up, and he has a can do attitude. But damn... did the kid have to single everyone out? He just placed a huge target on all your backs. You feel the stares of everyone in the room.
Yeah... you guys are going to sit as big targets now. And Naruto's little rant has actually angered several of the staff.
"Is that the way you all feel?" the main proctor asks you.
"That kid is a loudmouth," you reply without hesitation. "But what he said about family is real, no matter which way you put it. I understand your game, and I can understand why you need to play it. I can even agree with it on one level. But if you mess with my family, I'm coming after you, no matter how right you may be. So bring on your question. We'll answer it, and become the first group ever to have an entire team pass all at once. We'll also become the first 4 person team ever to be so successful".
You didn't want to say some of that, especially the arrogant bit. But you have to back up Naruto. You'll talk to him about tact later.
"Very well," the man says sternly. "It seems that you do indeed possess the will of fire... It seems you've turned the meek outcast into a big bad wolf. I respect you Naruto. And 21, your deeds and contributions to our village demand respect. But I will not give a braggart an edge just because he is confident and is riding on the coat tails of previous accomplishments. If you're in this room, you pass and may go onto the next part of the exam. But 21... I can assure you, we will be watching you. We will be expecting more out of you, since you're such a celebrity and all".
The genin in the room cheer for a moment as the proctors all exit the room. So that was the test huh? Trying to break your spirit with a threat? Interesting mind games... You love mind games. Can they even compete on your level?
The next day, the exam starts early, but not too bright. You meet outside the "Forest of Death", and the rules are explained indepth. You pay attention carefully and thoughtfully. As far as power is concerned, you're sure you could easily remove the scrolls from every group here... But you don't want to kill or hurt anyone unnecessarily. And lucky for them... you have an ace up your sleeve that makes all sensors impotent by comparison. ===== A: Actively search out all groups you can and try to get the needed scroll immediately B: Camp out and let the other groups take each other out C: Go towards the tower and camp out there D: Ask the other's what they think and how they want to handle it E: Free Will
"So what's the plan then guys?" you ask your team. "we talked a good game, but we need to back it up too. These are team exercises. And if you two are serious about being hokage someday, you're going to be faced with these decisions. What do you think Randel? Haven't really heard much from you lately. You gotta speak up, you're the first member ever of the team".
You smile hoping to encourage him. Randel looks at you in shock. He looks at Naruto and Sasuke before speaking.
"I'm just happy you brought me along", he stammers. "I was beginning to think you had forgotten about me sir... I want all of us to become chunin too... But these are just kids, some are younger than Naruto and Sasuke... If- if we fight them, we're going to hurt them something bad".
"Cheer up Randel!" Naruto says with a cheerful, inspirational smile. "We are all one big family! You're just as important as anyone! Sorry you got to baby sit Sasuke and me sometimes..."
"It's okay Naruto..." Randel answers with a blush.
"He's right Randel," Sasuke agrees also smiling. "But you're right too. We shouldn't hurt anyone here, we got some friends here. Shikamaru and Lee are competing, and a lot of others from the academy... We shouldn't show off. We are going to hurt their feelings. Besides, Team 21 is above that".
"It's great that we are of one mind," you add. "But that doesn't solve our next step in the process. I want to hear what you guys want to do".
"We could set up a camp in a place, make it look like we're hiding," Randel suggests. "Then, if we get attacked- I mean when we get attacked, we take their scroll. You know, without roughing them up too much. I think..."
"Nah, we can go and get the scroll already!" Naruto argues. "Let's just find someone and ask them to give up the scroll or get schooled!"
"Idiot," Sasuke says with a cold expression. "21 can use his green animation, we'd have a view of the entire forest. Then we could hit only the team with the scroll we need".
"Whatever," Naruto replies. "You're just being a cocky bastard. They could just disguise their scroll or put a dummy scroll to hide their real scroll, you dummy. We could probably do that too".
"As if we'd need to," Sasuke says snidely.
"At least I'm doing something other than criticize everything ya big jerk!" Naruto starts.
"That's enough you two," Randel says as he pulls them apart. ---- A: go with Naruto's plan B: go with Sasuke's plan C: go with Randel's plan D: free will
"Alright, I think we should go with Sasuke's plan," you inform. You look at Sasuke who closes his eyes and crosses his arms. He briefly opens his right eye narrowly to ensure Naruto is looking.
You touch the grass and start your jutsu. After scouring the area for a while, you encounter two groups who have thus far, shown you that they have the scroll you currently need. One is a group from the Village of the Shade, the other, is a group from Konoha. It has Kiba, Shino, and Hinata in their group.
Kiba's group is about an hour's hike to the north, if they don't move.
The Shade group is about 3 hours west, if they don't move either.
You hate the idea of hurting Kiba's chances... And Shino did help you... And Hinata has a REAL serious crush on Naruto... but logic is logic... but it's so damn cold... ---------- A: Go after Kiba's group B: Go after the Shade, you wanted to know about them anyway C: Keep looking for more groups, you still have plenty of time anyway D: Camp out and reorganize your plans E: Free Will
"I'm finishing up these syringes, just in case," you inform as you prepare some extra. "Then, in a couple minutes, we'll move. The Shade group is there, and considering everything we know and have been through, we should definitely make sure they're a legitimate village, and not just another front for Madara".
"You think Madara would be stupid enough to do something like that?" Naruto asks with a smile as he points his thumb to his chest. "We'd totally wipe them out!"
"Perhaps, Naruto," Sasuke adds. "But it's not strength we're concerning ourselves with. We have to assume Madara isn't looking for a straight up fight. He's a coward".
"Perhaps," you reply as you finish up. "But he is right about something. You never want to fight an 'even' fight. You always want to set up the battlefield to your advantage. Turn your opponent's strengths against him. That's why things like knowing the terrain and identifying possible ambush spots are so important. Missing little things like that can cost you the fight".
The children nod, and you think you actually got through to Naruto. Hopefully.
You all travel towards the Shade village group, careful to avoid encounters with other groups as well. As you finally draw upon them, you look around carefully for any other possible variables that could come into play. You let your team know, via shared consciousness, that the coast is clear. ======= A: Attack the team with a SotU B: Send in Mizuumi as a liason, and ask them to peacefully give up their scroll. C: Track them stealthilty for now, and when they rest or divert their attention, animate the box their scroll is in and summon it to you D: Have the group do whatever they'd like at this point E: Free Will
You let your team know what you're going to do, and inform them to act as soon as they see you trap the group. You also let them know to try and take it easy on them if possible, but to not endanger themselves in the process.
You summon your massive swamp upon the Shade Village group. You hear confusion amongst them, but they are quickly silenced as you and your group bare down upon them with a cold ferocity.
You come down on the lead shinobi with an axe kick to the shoulder. This makes him kneel, and you follow through with a punch to the throat. You place a kunai to the neck of your enemy and dunk his head into your swamp.
The Shade never stood a chance. Your team has cleaned up the rest of the Shade almost as easily. Randel is carrying the three unconscious ninjas to a nearby tree.
"Yeah, that's good Randel, tie them up there, make sure they don't move for now," you say as you see the giant following your instructions. You turn your attention to the barely conscious shinobi in your hands. You grab the back of his collar, and eye the kunai in your hand. "As you can see, you're in a compromising position. I'd advise a little bit of discretion in what you say to me. I'm going to ask you some questions. For your sake, I hope you're honest. Do you understand".
"Yeah, I understand," the shinobi answers as he begins to come around. "What do you want? You got us, just take the scroll and go".
You look at him suspiciously.
"That's not all we came for," you reply as you stare him down. "I've never heard of your village before. Why is that?"
"Hey, it's not my fault, we're a new village. We can't all be as large as the Leaf," he argues as he eyes the kunai at his throat cautiously.
"I pride myself on certain things," you explain honestly. "Knowing geography, is one of those things. You could say I have a very good understanding of what's where. For me to have never heard of your village, raises a lot of questions. Whose your boss?"
"What? No one, why are you asking me these things?" he says hesitantly.
You lean in closer to his face. You grit your teeth as you narrow your eyes and try to pierce him with your gaze alone.
"Why don't I believe you?" you ask him with a low growl. ------ A: Tie him up and move out, you got what you came for B: Knock him out, and loosen the ropes so that they don't die of starvation or dehydration out here C: Use Shared Consciousness on him, invade his mind D: Ask Sasuke to use his Sharingan on him E: Free Will
"Sasuke, I need you little brother," you say as you look at the Shade leader. "Tell me if he's lying or if he knows anything useful. If I'm wrong then I truly apologize".
"I'm telling you, I don't have a boss," the Shade leader pleads fearfully. "I have heard of you. You're insane, we're just trying to get the chunin rank for more money!"
Sasuke walks over and activates his Sharingan.
"This won't hurt at all," Sasuke suggests. "Just don't try to resist".
Sasuke stares at the ninja for a bit and then screams in pain. He drops to his knees and clutches his eyes.
"What did you do?!" you demand as you clutch him tighter and press the kunai to his skin.
"Nothing! I swear!"
"There's a barrier on him," Sasuke explains in agony. "Someone was expecting this. I think I need Itachi".
"I swear I have no idea what you're talking about!" the captive begs. You notice tears forming in his eyes before switching your attention to Sasuke. ---- Turning Point + Clutch Moments A: don't trust this guy. He's most likely lying. Tie him up B: tell Randel to hold him and FGG Itachi here. It's against the rules, but Sasuke might need it C: try using your blood to heal Sasuke D: use shared consciousness on your captive E: Free Will
You take out a medium syringe from your pack and inject Sasuke in the arm.
"How is it now?" you ask your little brother. You look at him carefully. The grimace he was carrying is gone.
"I feel better," Sasuke reports. "But... I'm still not right. I feel... Dizzy and nauseous".
"Naruto, take Sasuke to that tree," you instruct. "Listen here, what is going on? What happened to my brother?"
"I told you, I didn't do anything," the Shade village shinobi stammers.
"What's your name kid?" you interrogate.
"I'm called Kuwe;" he answers.
"Kuwe, you need to tell me what happened here," you state. "I'm starting to think you might have been used. How did the Shade village get started? Who leads your village?"
"Yes, I will answer your questions. Just please, don't hurt us," Kuwe pleads.
"I won't unless I need to, so don't make me need to, alright?" you inform.
"We just started the village. Tobi got us together, he's the closest thing to a leader we have. Nothing can be done without his approval. He is the one that sent us, he said we were ready. He really expected us to do well".
"Where did Tobi come from?" you ask. "What's he look like? Does he wear dark robes with red clouds on them?"
"Yes, he wears that," Kuwe replies.
"I guess it's a new Akatsuki member," you think aloud. "Anything else about him? Do you know how he fights or what he is capable of?"
"No, none of us have fought him, we wouldn't dare," Kuwe answers. "He has a fearsome eye, similar to your brother. We all fear it".
"Tobi has a Sharingan?" you ask in shock.
"Yes, I think he only has one eye, because he covers the other with a mask".
"Wait, a mask? What kind of mask?" you ask.
"An orange one, with a swirl," Kuwe clarifies.
"Thats Madara," you say as you exhale. "Did he ever speak to you with that eye? Did you look into it? At all?"
"Yeah but nothing happened to me".
"Oh something happened, you just didn't know it," you reply. "But where does that leave us?" --- What are you going to do with Kuwe and his team? A: keep them tied loosely enough so they could get out eventually B: restrain them firmly C: let them loose
What are you going to do with Sasuke? E: maintain a watch on him and escalate as necessary F: get Itachi here G: try to let the authorities know what's going on
You can free will both of the questions
You gag Kuwe and his crew and bind them firmly. You then inform your team about what's going to happen, and where you're teleporting. You take the two groups to the tower in the center of the Forest of Death. The Third is there, and he's not surprised to see your team, although he is surprised to see the Shade team. You contact Itachi and let him know what's going on. After Itachi is summoned, you fill in Sarutobi-sensei and Itachi about everything and how it went down.
Randel, who is carrying Sasuke, lays him down gently on a gurney. Itachi takes a look at him and activates his Giga Eye.
"This is most troubling information," Sarutobi-sensei says as he finishes thinking. "What are your thoughts?"
"This is really dumb," you admit bluntly. "It doesn't fit. Madara is a sick bastard, he enjoys playing mind games. These little back and forths between he and I, it's fun for him, it's like he feels a kinship with me. He wants to see what I'll do if placed in certain situations, and he is planning on me to act a certain way... That means that, in some respects, I have to be less predictable. Which is going to be hard, because I have my nindo, and I never will break my ninja way. Madara knows that, he's counting on that".
"Surely he will count on you not killing these four," Sarutobi-sensei states warmly, it's obvious the idea never entered his mind.
"Yeah, he knows I won't," you respond. "And that's what he is planning. So why would he throw us such an obvious clue? His plans usually are plans within plans. And if one fails, the other succeeds. He must have known I would catch on to them, confront them, and capture them. Then I imagine he would think I would bring them to you, or maybe his game is to get at all the kages? I don't know, I don't think so".
"Why do you say that?" Sarutobi-sensei asks, his finger to his chin.
"Right now, the Cloud couldn't render us aid," you explain. "Not openly at least. We have a good relationship with them right now, and they still couldn't help us. Obviously, that means that it's unlikely the other kages would render us aid. If he makes an attempt on their lives with these four, his presence would be confirmed, and he'd have the entire ninja world against him. The kages are too strong, even if these men were rigged with explosives, some would live, and then the reverberation to hit Madara would be too much".
"You're making great points my son," Sarutobi-sensei says. "But then what was his purpose?"
"I think he's sending me a message sensei," you answer. "I think he wants me to know he's watching... I think we have a very real security risk here. His agents are most likely in the village, and with this many foreigners here, no one would suspect a stranger, everyone's a stranger. He might be looking to do more scouting on me, to improve his clones. Any news on the Kazekage? I sense tension between the villages".
"No, afraid not," he answers. "I have Guy and Kakashi looking into it, otherwise they'd be here. They wanted me to express their regret for their absences. 21, there is a lot of talk in the shadows about you... You're being targeted by many of the students here... And I'm afraid, that because of all this, you're going to have to fi-"
Sarutobi-sensei interrupts himself as he sees Itachi walk towards you both, concern etched in his face.
"Itachi, what troubles you child?" Sarutobi asks.
"That trap was meant for you 21," Itachi explains. "Sasuke was fine, but only because of his Sharingan, and my Giga Eye. He was hoping to get into your body".
"What?"
"I examined the other four Shade shinobi," Itachi continues. "They all had the same genjutsu placed on them. Madara was counting on you using Shared Consciousness. It was a very powerful genjutsu. Frankly, I'm impressed. I'm going to need to go to our family's libraries. I need to look up the old jutsus, see if anything matches what happened here".
"There's a genjutsu the Uchiha use that you might not know?" you ask puzzled.
"It must be ancient," Itachi states. "I've never heard of anything like that, we're talking a full body control. And you wouldn't have known you were under his control. Your thinking would have changed, and you would be doing exactly as he commanded and assume you were acting on your own".
"Sounds... ridiculous," you respond. "Does he know that it didn't work you think?"
"I can't be sure, but just by the very nature of the jutsu, I'd say no," your brother answers.
"Damn..." you say as you search for an answer. "I was hoping to play it like it had worked... Maybe he is hoping to make the Leaf look bad? Do you think he knew I would be announcing my choice for the Fifth?"
"It's a possibility..." Itachi answers as he looks at the Third.
"Have you made a decision as to that 21?" Sarutobi-sensei asks. "I plan on announcing it before the matches start, after the preliminaries. Which by the way, I never mentioned to you. I will give you the floor, and after all the matches, you will be present to discuss it with the kages here at the war council I'm calling. How are you going to proceed?" --- Have you made a decision on who should be the 5th? If so, who?
And, what are you going to do now? A: Proceed as if nothing has happened B: Inform Team 21 of what's going on, and tell them to search for anything or anyone that might be related to this C: Pull Guy and Kakashi off of the Kazekage investigation for now, and place every member of Team 21 on security to the kages D: Have the Yamanaka's see if they can pull anything from the minds of the Shade shinobi
What are you going to do with the Shade shinobi? 1: Arrest them 2: Execute them 3: Hold them until the end of the exams 4: Hold them indefinitely as "guests" that can't leave
As always, you have a free will option for everything.
"Team, this is 21," you speak into your comm. "I got a situation. I need everyone searching for something... maybe someone".
You go on to explain the situation, and that the Shade ninja will be held until the end of the exams. Everyone voices their opinions and state they're dropping everything and working on this. You also inform everyone, including Sarutobi-sensei, that Tsunade shall be the fifth, if she's willing. After a lot of convincing from Naruto and Jiraiya, she accepts the position graciously.
A surprisingly number of teams have made it through the Forest of Death. As such, the preliminary tournament that they had planned, had to be made into an even bigger bracket.
After the first round, the competition has slimmed down considerably... The winners of their next match will move on to the real tournament.
On the tournament line up, unfortunately, a lot of Leaf genin ended up having to fight one another.
Hinata vs Kiba Gaara (of the Sand) vs Rock Lee Neji vs Choji Naruto vs Shino Sasuke vs Sakura Shikamaru vs Temari (of the Sand) Ino vs 21 Randel vs Kankuro TenTen gets the by.
Kiba beat Hinata in his match, which really shook Naruto up because he was constantly cheering her on... The poor girl kept getting up because of Naruto's cheering.. It was a sad incident, and you consoled the girl after the fight and healed her.
Next up, was Lee's fight. Lee is a Team 21 member, so everyone looked on with anticipation.
The fight started and you note that Gaara carries a gigantic gourd on his back. The red headed kid looks... disturbed. And he definitely has a tailed beast inside him, you can just feel these types of things now. As the fight continues, it's clear that Gaara's defense is extremely impressive but Lee is relentless. Eventually, Lee is forced to remove the weights, and begins to knuckle up Gaara really badly. And then it happens... Gaara catches Lee in a move he called Sand Coffin and then Sand Burial. Lee is maimed badly, Gaara is emotionless and doesn't make any move to help Lee.
You jump down from the viewing rail and run towards Lee. The match was declared over and a med team was already trying to help him. The rest of Team 21 that's present jumps in after you and stare at Gaara with cold eyes. You analyze Lee's wounds... If you don't heal him, he's going to be maimed, and possibly, never be able to walk again. You look over at Gaara, who is still emotionless.
"Tell me..." Gaara says with a harsh, grainy voice. It's rather deep for his age, or maybe he's just short for his age. "Why do you coddle your weak? Do you believe this makes him stronger? He will never get stronger with you there picking him up. Strength is earned by standing by yourself against the world".
You see Naruto clench his fists and about to shout something, before Sasuke covers his mouth.
"Tell me something Gaara," you say as you remove a syringe slyly and hide it amongst your palm. "Your jutsu, you had him, you could have restrained him and not maimed this boy. He didn't deserve your wrath".
"Any... who stand against me... will be destroyed," Gaara warns. "I suggest you leave before I see you as a threat".
"That's enough," the referee says. "Get him out of here".
"Let me work on him, I can fix him," you say as you lean into Lee's ear. He eyes you desperately. "You know what I'm going to do. Don't walk, let them carry you out. We'll talk later".
You inject him steathily and witness his injuries heal before covering him up with a medicine blanket.
"Take him to my quarters, he will be fine for now," you say trying to hide your secret.
"The Leaf are getting special treatment because they are hosting this tournament," a Sand jonin argues. "If Gaara wishes to fight this fool, it should be allowed".
"Nevermind, I have no time for cowards, or scarecrows," Gaara states. "You're not the Tatsujin... And I look forward to killing more Leaf members"
He's hurting people, on PURPOSE? ----- A: Accept his offer, duel this punk ***** now B: Let it slide for now, you don't have to stoop to his level C: Berate him with your wit and then go back to the viewing rail D: Let Naruto say whatever he wants, and see what unfolds E: Free will
Evn though Gaara publicly insulted you, you still have Naruto's growth to consider. Besides, arguing with a boy won't solve anything. And beating him up, won't take back the insult or make you look any stronger in the eyes of the observer. Instead, you go a different route.
"Hey Naruto, why don't you tell Gaara exactly how you feel," you advise as you throw a quick glance at Sasuke.
Naruto looks at you in confusion for a minute. He can't believe you're giving him free reign to have an outburst.
"You know what Gaara? Being a ninja means hurting people," Naruto says as he tights both fists. "We've all had to do things like that. Maybe they're things we aren't proud of, but they had to be done. What you did to Bushy Brow, you didn't have to. You hurt him badly for no reason at all. We're here to compete to see who should be the next chunin, that doesn't mean we have to kill anyone!"
"You are weak as well then," Gaara replies as he walks away. "No reason to bother... with the weak..."
Gaara goes and jumps up back to the viewing rail. The crowd murmers with speculation. You look around and notice that most of the eyes are on you.
Order is restored, and the prelims can continue. The rest of the lineup...
Neji vs Choji Naruto vs Shino Sasuke vs Sakura Shikamaru vs Temari (of the Sand) Ino vs 21 Randel vs Kankuro TenTen gets the by.
Through a very impressive volley of a clan's special taijutsu you learned was called Gentle Fist, Neji trounched Choji. Naruto destroyed Shino with a new jutsu Jiraiya taught him called the Rasengan. Sasuke took it easy on the girl named Sakura, but still beat her soundly. Shikamaru used brilliant strategy and forced Temari to give up using his Shadow jutsu.
Your match was next. Ino stands before you. Pretty girl you think... You don't want to have to hurt anyone so young, especially a lady... But, you don't know anything about her, and your title as Tatsujin is very closely tied to the prestige of the Leaf. Any taint on your title, is a taint on the Leaf itself... You can't be made a fool of anymore...
But still, it's not the girl's fault. You eye her as she trembles visibly. She's frightened and nervous... You feel horrible. ----- A: Make her look good by taking it easy on her and making it look like she's stronger than she is B: End the match as quickly and painlessly as possible C: End the match as quickly as possible, whatever means necessary D: Reassure Ino that this is just a match between two fellow Leaf. Tell her that she should give it her all in everything she does, so she won't regret it. Then hold back against her, but not so much that she overestimates her abilities. (you'll still show the difference in strength is vast this way, and might still crush her self esteem)
"Ino, you have a bright future ahead of you," you start, hoping to ease the young lady. "We're both Leaf ninja, it's only a match between the two of us. Give it your all so you won't regret it. Alright?"
"Al- alright," Ino stammers as she flutters her eyelashes at you. Is this little girl, hitting on you? Oh boy...
The judge starts the match. Ino throws some kunai at you and nails a backflip, she begins casting a jutsu. You FGG behind Ino, grab her shoulder and project your paralysis jutsu through her entire body. You catch her as she falls.
You look at the judge.
"She won't be getting up for at least 20 seconds," you state. "I respectfully ask that I be declared the winner, as I could easily strike with a coup de graz if I wanted to".
The judge agrees and declares you the winner. You crouch down and turn Ino's face and look at her.
"I'm sorry," you say as you help her up. "Do you think you can forgive me? I tried my best, I hope you did too".
Ino smiles at you, then blushes, then taps your hand away from her face.
"You made me look like a fool," she says with a bit of a stutter. "You did it on purpose. But at least you respected me enough to not hold back on me..."
"I didn't do anything on purpose, I just wanted to win without hurting you," you correct. "Alright? Still colleagues right?"
"Wha-? Yes, of co- course," Ino says as he looks at you and then turns her head sharply away from you. "Good match, excuse me I have to go back to my team now".
She almost sprints away from you. That was... odd. You jump back up to the viewing rail and get congratulated by your team mates and friends. You continue to watch the matches as they continue.
You root for Randel, but the Sand village genin never stood a chance. Randel easily dodged the puppets, and then smashed them for good measure. Without any of his puppets, Kankuro quit the tournament. You think he was intimidated by Randel's impressive physicality.
The committee announces that the real tournament will be held in a month, and that you're free to do as you'd like in the mean time. ---- Turning Point A: Train with _____ for the entire month B: Spend the month trying to reveal Madara's plot C: Work on the rest of your team's training regime trying to improve their skills for the month D: Try to work on helping every Leaf member excel so they can really wow the judges at the tourney E: Free Will
You learn your new technique, Golem Style: Golem Manipulation over the course of the month with the aid of L and your (now) 200 shadow clones. You also managed to help all of the Leaf members train, they all graciously accepted your help. You're seen as sort of the Leaf's royalty here you've noticed, and everyone is deeply thankful to you for all you've worked towards.
You subtly have prepared the battlefield with your chakra, and are constantly adding chakra to it.
TenTen however is VERY disturbed about her match and is considering quitting. You let Shikamaru choose the game you would face each other in, and he chose Shogi, a game you're not familiar with...
You're concerned about TenTen's match as well... But you don't want her to just quit, but it is for her own good, Gaara's TRYING to kill people. But the fact remains the tournament staff would be accused of favoritism if they rearrange the matches... Unless you can somehow make it Gaara's idea to fight you... Then TenTen could fight with Shikamaru.... It's an idea.. ----- A: suggest to TenTen to quit B: try to provoke Gaara into challenging you C: use shared consciousness on Gaara and MAKE him challenge you D: leave the matter alone and let the exams go until your match
You inform Guy of what you want him to do. He tells you he was already planning on it. In secret, you hand him your emergency syringe and tell him he knows what to do. Guy nods knowingly and walks off. You watch on anxiously as L and some of your shadow clones learn the fundamentals of Shogi.
Gaara and TenTen walk onto the field. She exhales obviously and takes a stance. Gaara looks directly at you, his arms crossed. He points to TenTen and then to you, and he scratches his thumb across his throat in a threatening gesture...
Bastard.
The match starts and TenTen, having followed your battle advice, she litters the battlefield with proximity based explosives and launches several kunai and weapons at Gaara in trying to trip him up and lead him towards an explosive.
Gaara however, is unfortunately, in a completely different league. He rams TenTen with a barrage of sand and then picks her up with a hand made of sand.
"That's enough!" you scream. "You got her, there's no need for you to continue!"
Gaara looks at you, and you think you see a smirk beginning to form before the cold blankets his face once more. TenTen is horrified.
"That's it! I-" TenTen shouts before Gaara covers her mouth with sand.
He smashes TenTen's body with the fist, and begins to walk away. Guy rushes the field and carries her off. From what you could see, her wounds were life threatening.
"I'll do that to your legendary Tatsujin later," Gaara taunts before disappearing into the stands.
You're livid, but you're bound...
Your match has come up. You reluctantly take the field, Shikamaru takes the field sadly as well. The whole mood has changed now... You both give it your all, but L and your shadow clones ensured no one could ever beat you in Shogi.
Randel beats Sasuke in a close match, although it wasn't as close as you thought it would be. So Neji will be fighting Randel.
Naruto completely overwhelms Kiba. Naruto gets the by for next round.
You go to TenTen who was miraculously healed, good as new. She hugs you when she sees you.
"Guy-sensei says you saved my life," she says still hanging from your neck. "thank you so much..."
"She will be fine," Guy says with a smile. "Could I speak with you 21?"
Guy grabs you by the arm with urgency and escorts you out of the room.
"If it wouldn't be for you, that poor girl would be dead. And for what? Nothing".
"Will she be fine? Can she still continue as a shinobi?" you ask.
"Only because of your latest upgrade to your healing," Guy admits with frustration. "Do me a favor 21, I've never asked you for anything. But please, beat that boy well, teach him a lesson. Show him that with power, you need to be careful in using it".
"Consider it done,my friend," you say as you put your hand on Guy's shoulder. "I will teach him".
The day has come for Gaara to face you... He stares you down, arms crossed.
"I will show the world that you aren't worthy of the title," Gaara warns.
The judge starts the match, but Gaara just stands there ---- A: taunt him B: continue to wait until he makes a move C: attack him with taijutsu D: cast _______ E: free will
"Have you lost your nerve?" you ask as you create scout bugs from the earth underneath Gaara. "You almost killed that girl. Did you know that?"
The crowd starts chanting "FIGHT FIGHT FIGHT". You think they really want you to pound this kid.
"I don't care about that, I don't care about anyone... or anything," Gaara says as he eyes you suspiciously.
"Those two kids with you, your brother and sister, don't you care about them?" you ask curiously.
"How did you know they were my siblings?" Gaara asks, obviously shaken.
You smile as you pace knowingly around Gaara.
"Have you ever heard of something called the pinna?" you ask, your smile broadening. "No? The pinna, or the shape of your outer ear, is something that is passed down, directly by the same bloodline. Considering your age, and theirs, they can't be your mother and father, so that remains the obvious answer. They can only be your brother and sister. But please, answer my question. Don't you love them?"
"I... I don't love anyone," Gaara replies unconvincingly.
"I doubt that," you say as you continue to walk around him. "Your tattoo, it's not a tattoo at all is it? It's a burn, a deep scrape, almost as if sand has been grated into your forehead. You gave yourself that, didn't you? Why?"
"What? How? Who told you that?" Gaara says, his voice quavering.
"You just did, Gaara," you reply. "I can make many deductions from appearances alone. It's a rare talent I am VERY proud of... but I can only know for certain when you yourself tell me so".
"Why do you care?"
"Because I want to know why you would turn into such a young man, with such troubles," you explain. "Your father, your mother? How were they with you? Did they treat you well? No... there is far too much loneliness in your eyes for that... isn't there? So you decided to become strong all on your own. Show the world you didn't need anyone to make it. Please, stop me when I'm wrong".
You look towards Naruto who is leaning on the railing with gritted teeth.
"You see that blonde haired kid over there? You can't miss him, he's the loud mouth in the orange suit," you point. "He's a lot like you, he's a jinchuriiki, also. And I brought him into my family, because I KNOW what it feels like to be an outcast. To feel like a monster... like a thing. I was brought into this world to be a weapon, to be the perfect soldier. I KNOW what it's like to have terrible parents. My mother and father are constantly trying to kill me. But you know what made me stronger? You know what made Naruto, that blonde kid over there stronger?! FRIENDS. FAMILY. THEY made me unbeatable. They made me unable to lose, because IF I LOSE, they're dead. And they know if THEY LOSE I'm dead. We can't fail, because we refuse to fail each other. Gaara, please, I know you're not swallowed in hate. Accept my offer. Accept the offer no one EVER extended to me. I can see from the eyes of your sister that she loves you. LET HER love you. I give you my word you WON'T regret it. You know I'm powerful enough to not need to resort to such tactics. We could still have our fight, but let's fight as friends, trying to see who the better fighter is. Let's not fight with hate, let's fight with a competitive spirit. Let's fight hoping to one up one another. But not with jealousy".
"As... friends? Why do you want to be my friend? I hurt that girl... and your friends..." Gaara is starting to waiver.
"Because that's what friends do, they forgive each other, they help each other," you correct. "If we keep going like this, nothing will be left. There won't be anyone left. There's always someone more powerful than you... and that hatred, festers. BELIEVE ME, I KNOW"
"Fight, as friends?" Gaara says as he bends with the wind, almost weak kneed. "I will fight as your friend... But only if you can beat me. Show me this power of friendship you speak of".
He readies himself. ---- A: Explode the scout bugs B: End the fight as quickly as possible, causing him no pain if possible C: Get a feel for his defense with your taijutsu D: Take it easy on him, taking the fight as long as need be, while you wait to counter and put him down E: Free Will
"Let's go then Gaara," you say firmly as you draw your sword. "This sword was given to me by a friend of mine. Something I never would have gotten had I not let people in".
You sprint towards him and slash him with the blunt end of the sword 11 times. Gaara's defense is impenetrable with taijutsu, your sword crackles with energy, even as the sand of his defense tries to extinguish the lightning that goes up and down your sword.
"You attack me with the blunt end?" Gaara says in shock as he moves back. "You really don't want to kill me".
You shake your head as you put your sword away.
"You attacked me so fast... I couldn't keep track of all of your attacks," Gaara states honestly. "It doesn't seem like taijutsu is your specialty either".
"It's not, I'm a ninjutsu expert," you admit.
Gaara sees the sincerity of your voice.
"Can you get through my ultimate defense?" Gaara asks, it seems like he's genuinely curious.
"Yes, I could," you confess. "If you were truly my enemy, I could easily penetrate that defense. It's exceptional, but it has a flaw".
"What flaw is that?"
"It's too slow to keep up with me," you point out. "I'm not even going all out yet... If I was, the defense would be nullified".
"Show me then," Gaara replies as you see him hold a wave of sand behind him. "Show me this power of friendship".
The sand rolls it's way towards you, you hold your hand up and use Golem Manipulation, and hold his sand at bay. Gaara is extremely shocked by this development and struggles against you for control of the sand. You maintain your ground, but the sand is slowly, very slowly, moving towards you. You smirk at Gaara and summon a SotU. He struggles as he loses his footing.
You use Toxicity on his clothing, and you see it's burning away what seems to be layers of sand. Gaara gasps as he realizes what's happening.
"I... submit," Gaara says as he releases all the sand and lets it fall to the floor. "You can hold my attack at bay... And you can even turn my sand armor into dust... I know when I am outmatched... I have much to think about".
You dispel your Toxicity jutsu and bow towards Gaara and the judges.
You're declared the winner and you walk out of the battlefield.
Neji gets absolutely demolished by Randel, he never stood a chance. Meanwhile, Gaara walked over to your group and apologized to Lee and TenTen, and swore to never do such a horrible thing again. You accepted his apology as did Lee, but TenTen was still mortified. You comforted Gaara and advised him to give it time. You were also introduced to his brother, Kankuro and Temari, his sister. They hung out with you and your group to watch the entire fight between Neji and Randel.
You're expecting the announcement of the upcoming battles when you notice Sarutobi-sensei walk onto the field. He raises his hand to lower the noise in the arena.
"The kages present have decided that there is no further contests are necessary and would be an unnecessary risk to life," he announces. "However, I do need 21 to come down for a moment".
Bewildered, you jump down to the arena and make your way to the Third.
"Yes sensei?"
"I have... unsettling news," Sarutobi-sensei informs. "I explained the threat of Madara, and the Raikage backed me up, but he was the only one to validate the threat. The rest of the kages weren't convinced... The Tsuchikage in particular has accused the village of rigging the fights and purposely misleading the ninja world into believing your stronger than you really are. Onoki, the Tsuchikage, states that we are propping you up as a deterrent to war, and to discourage other villages from attacking the Leaf. He suspects deceit... He believes you're being used as a political device, and that there is no threat from Madara. That we're merely trying to incite a riot, and take advantage of the chaos. He even suggested that the Cloud and the Leaf are plotting together..."
"That's ridiculous," you state in frustration. "I'd like to speak with him, he's being a fool".
"Fool or not, he still is a kage, child," Sarutobi cautions. "He says that there is only one way to prove this isn't an act by the Cloud and the Leaf... He wants to fight you himself. And to prove that we're not being deceitful in our accusations, he demands that the Raikage and I fight alongside him. He said that we can fight you merely to incapacitate you if you wish, but that if you were truly the Tatsujin, you'd fight us with the three of us not holding back. There are five kages, and only the Raikage agreed with me... It makes things impossible from a political level. Onoki also wants you to not use taijutsu either. He says that the stories he has heard of your ninjutsu prowess are ridiculous. That there hasn't been a bigger legend than the Sage of Six Paths. He believes you're destroying the memory of Rikkudo".
"Fighting 3 kages at once?" you add. "That's ridiculous. And he also wants me to NOT use taijutsu? This is... extreme. How could he expect anyone to do this? Is every other kage going along with this? This can't be considered fair by all of them".
"21, I know, and I'm sorry," Sarutobi-sensei replies. "I know what I'm asking is preposterous. But when I announced my retirement, and that you would be choosing the next Hokage, the shadow of doubt first appeared. Then, when I began to explain the threat of Madara, everyone felt that it was too convenient that you were the one that discovered all this... I'm truly sorry child. Will you do this?" ---- A: Tell the Kages I accept, but only if they fight to not kill me B: Tell the Kages I accept, with no restrictions on their end C: I can't do this sensei. Can't I prove myself in some other way? D: Please give me some time... I must talk to my team mates about this E: Free Will
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:18:00 GMT
"Very well sensei," you say confidently. "I'm sorry that it has to come to this... I'm also regretful that I have to fight you and the Raikage. You both have been good to me".
"Nonsense child," Sarutobi-sensei replies. "I understand how you feel... I wish it didn't have to come to this... But eventually you were going to fight me, if only so that I may gauge you completely. It is a sensei's responsibility after all. It is regrettable that it had to be done like this... But Onoki is a very senior kage, and his words have much weight, whereas I am biased in the matter. I love you like a son, after all".
You smile and bow.
"Tell Onoki that you can come at me with whatever you have," you reply, a tear swelling in your eye. He chose this moment to tell you that? You can't help but feel terrible. He could get really hurt... or worse. And it'd be on your head... all because of Onoki. Then there's the Raikage as well... "I would like to voice my displeasure however. I feel this is unjust".
"That is understandable," Sarutobi-sensei responds, noting the watering of your eyes. "Do not be afraid, child".
He motions behind him and the Raikage and the Tsuchikage appear next to him. Sarutobi begins to announce and explain what is going on, and who is being selected to be a chunin.
"So, you're supposed to be a legend huh?" the short man you assume to be the Tsuchikage asks. "You don't even look like you're in your mid 20's. How could you do such a thing?"
"I have done nothing wrong," you say with a bow. "I have just done my duty as a shinobi. You would fault that. I believe this is extremely unfair, and wrong. Did you know that the Third is my sensei? That I trained with the Raikage's brother, B? You're asking me to fight against people I respect and care about. Why would you do such a thing? How could you do such a thing?"
"Watch your tone with me, boy," Onoki replies. "I will gladly teach you a thing or two Sarutobi obviously failed at. Respect. There's a reason why I've been a kage for so long, and it isn't my dashing good looks. It's because I have the experience and knowledge to lead people properly. The power to protect them when they're in need. I am clear that the Raikage and Hokage mean much to you. I was thinking of that when I made my decision. They aren't thinking properly, and this Madara business is ridiculous. He's been dead for decades. You're starting a riot if you continue with such outlandish claims. And the fact that the Hokage hasn't stopped you, only supported you, is evidence that this is a political coup. The Raikage defending your claim, shows that the Cloud and the Leaf have made an alliance in secret. If I'm wrong, then now you have the opportunity to prove it to me, boy".
"He's not a boy Onoki," the Raikage adds. "He just looks that way, because of his kekkai-"
"Enough!" Onoki exclaims, interrupting the Raikage. "You're one of the youngest kages, you lack the experience to give me an opinion. Show me on the battlefield, don't hold back, and if he lives, then I'll believe you".
"You'd kill the boy just to prove there isn't a conspiracy?" A asks.
"Yes, if necessary," Onoki answers. "Peace between our villages is usually fleeting. I'd say the continuing peace of our villages is more important than the life of one arrogant, pompous whelp. This whole thing is suspicious, has been suspicious from the start. But I couldn't place my finger on it until recently. You all made it even more obvious by promoting FIVE genin. That's unheard of! On top of that, they all happen to be from the same village, the Leaf. What a coincidence... I think not!"
Sarutobi-sensei finishes his announcement. The crowd is an uproar. They are booing the hell out of the place.
"Remember, this is to kill him," Onoki states. "Let's put this braggart to sleep so that the legend of Rikkudo stays untainted. We do not defile traditions boy. We do not bad mouth the father of our world, our culture. Your legend has grown too much, and you do not rival the Sage of Six Paths. Nor will you ever, none of us will. When a legend grows too large, too epic, it's a dangerous thing. It's a weapon of fear, and I am not afraid".
"You should be," you answer seriously. "I specialize in the impossible, and my area of expertise lies in the ridiculous".
You smile and bow.
"I'm sorry about this again, sensei, Raikage-sama," you say as you walk away.
Onoki is livid. He's literally hopping mad. You can't help but think that he looks like a cartoon character. They all take their places and get into a fighting stance. You call Mizuumi to your side. ---- A: Activate Raisoku B: Wait until they make the first move and try to counter it C: Summon L D: Rain of Ash them E: Free Will
Having heard of Raikage's legendary speed, you activate Raisoku to ensure that you maintain the speed advantage. Raikage activates his shroud and tries to blitz you. You block all of his taijutsu assault, but you know that he is much better than you, you can't keep this up for long.
You backflip and burst through the air, your chakra propelling you and changing your direction in midair. Onoki is placing his hands towards his face, and opens his mouth.
You FGG Mizuumi next to him, and Mizuumi engages the Tsuchikage in taijutsu.
Sarutobi meanwhile has casted an earth technique, and the earth is rolling towards you with jagged edges pointing towards you. You FGG out of the way and look around for options. You know you NEED to finish them quickly, the longer the fight takes, the more of an advantage they will have. They have more chakra than you, after all, it's 3 people's chakra against your own supply... -------------- A: AoH Onoki B: Summon a Crystal Golem C: Summon L D: Lightning Lion Sarutobi E: Free Will
You release a lightning lion aimed directly at Sarutobi-sensei. He notices your attack and erects an earth wall, which your lion smashes through and tumbles into Sarutobi-sensei. He stumbles a few feet to the left, pretty shaken up. He's right above some of your scouter bugs, you detonate 4 of them, ones that were at certain locations, your aim to merely disable the Third enough for him to fairly say he can't continue.
Your bugs explode, sending earth and lethal air waves all towards Sarutobi-sensei. He falls to the ground, completely immobile. You FGG next to him, and check on him. He's messed up badly. He looks you in the eye, and smiles, blood dripping from his mouth. You take out a small tablet and place it into his mouth.
"For the pain, I am sorry sensei," you say, tears blurring your vision. "Satisfied now Onoki?!"
"I told you to watch your tone boy!" he says as he dodges Mizuumi's strikes and touches Miz right on the chest. Miz collapses in a heap onto the floor. "And when addressing someone above your station, you should always use the proper honorific. Sarutobi was going easy on you, he wasn't fighting you at his peak. You better not hold back A!"
"No one's holding back you short, bitter, prick," you shout at Onoki. "People are getting hurt because of your stupid conspiracy theories! Are you just jealous of my sensei? Or is it jealousy you feel towards the Cloud?! Are you compensating for your lack of size?! You miserable puss sore, speaking of sores, you should really have a doctor look at that nose. It looks infected".
Onoki is steaming mad at this point. He looks at A and tells him to continue his attack. He is charging up a huge attack you feel, and he's using A as a diversion to keep you busy and buy him time. ------ A: Plasma Weapon and slice Onoki's arm off B: Fissure Raikage C: Fire Lion Explosion on Onoki D: Use Insect Swarm on Onoki E: Free Will
You eye the path that A has to take in order to strike you. You blow up all of the scout bugs that could hurt the Raikage as you FGG behind Onoki, and slice off his arm with your manifested Plasma Sword. Onoki cries out in pain as he cups his stub and falls to the ground.
You noticed that the scout bugs did nothing to A because of his shroud, at least, you think it's the shroud that's responsible. You pick up Onoki and present the Plasma Sword to his throat.
"Did you know what that technique is called?" you say as you eye the Raikage, who is staring at you cautiously as you hold Onoki hostage. "That technique, the one where I teleport, it's called the FGG, the Flying Golem God... or as I like to call it..."
You lean into Onoki's ear. "Fucking Good Game".
Onoki sighs as he eyes the floor.
"I am beaten," Onoki admits in shame. "You're indeed powerful".
"You killed Mizuumi, my first creation, he was with me for over 5 years," you reply. "And you made me seriously hurt the honorable Third, who has been like a father to me. All because of your baseless predictions. Will you make me cripple the Raikage as well? This has to stop Onoki. If you apologize to Sarutobi-sensei and call this off right now, I promise to heal your arm. It will be better than new".
"You can't possibly do that as well," he replies. "What type of warrior are you?"
"I'm what came out when they tried to create the perfect soldier," you answer coldly as you eye the blade. It's green hue glowing and reflecting off of Onoki's eyes. Energy sparks fly randomly off the weapon and crackle with energy. "You were fighting to kill me, I was fighting to restrain and disable. I have never broken my word before. I promise you, I can heal your arm. And make you feel much younger to boot. But you have to call this farce off now, and apologize to Sarutobi-sensei. Do you yield to my requests?"
"Judging by your style, reputation, and ability," Onoki starts. "I can clearly see that the Raikage is not enough to handle you... After witnessing your prowess, I can state with confidence you are as powerful as the rumors said you were, if not more so. If you were really holding back... then you are a scary monster. You're a weapon... How can the world trust you? How can the world trust the Leaf to not abuse this weapon they created? You don't even have a name, just a designator number, a serial number, like a mechanical part. You're not even human. It's appropriate that you don't have a name. You're nothing but a weapon".
"You trying to get on my good side?" you reply with a smile. "If you've heard of my exploits, then you should know that I'm a good person, and try my best to help people, no matter what banner they wave. I've saved villages that have nothing to do with the Leaf, like Bellhelm for one. I was created by Madara, Danzo and Orochimaru, not the Leaf. But regardless, I'm asking you a very simple question. I'm just going to have to have you trust me on this".
Onoki eyes the Raikage, who stands there shaking his head.
"Onoki, we couldn't handle him when it was a three on one," A states firmly. "If he wanted to, he could kill you right now. We have eye witnesses that can verify the stories to be true. You yourself have just seen him in action. If you believe in the Rikkudo Sennin, why is it so hard to believe that 21 could be just as powerful? It doesn't take away from his memory, it adds to it because now we know how important the Sage of Six Paths was to our world".
"You're right," Onoki admits reluctantly. "I am an old fool. This exercise... was a failure and pointless... I wish for it to be ended, with 21 as the clear winner".
You deactivate your Plasma Sword and help the Tsuchikage down. You instruct him to wait for you while you tend to Sarutobi-sensei. You head over to the Third who is smiling weakly. The arena is in a dead silence, half of them are mortified by your raw power. By how easily you trounced three kages at once, and by how soundly they were defeated. The other half are concerned for the wounds of the kages.
"Very clever, my child," Sarutobi-sensei says. "You hit him with the one thing he cares most about, his own life".
You smile and shrug your shoulders as you slip an emergency syringe into Sarutobi-sensei's heart as you lean in to conceal it. He grunts and informs you he feels very well now. You pick him up, and walk with him to Onoki.
"I am sorry... Hiruzen. It was... my mistake," Onoki says. "Your pupil here, is extremely resourceful. He's skilled, and methodical. I accept him as suitable to choose your successor. I also will accept him as a fellow kage, as I think he is well suited for it. But I won't move my forces against Madara until there's solid proof. Even if he is alive, it doesn't mean he wishes to attack Iwa. He might just have a thing against the Leaf".
"You're sure stubborn," you say as you pick up Onoki's arm. "Your process is going to be a little longer. Will you trust me to take you to a private room to attach this arm? "
"Very well," Onoki says as he exchanges looks between the kages. "But escort me here A, Hiruzen".
The Raikage picks up Onoki and you all walk out of the arena to a private room. You tell Onoki to bite down on a towel, and throw it on his face. In reality, you're just distracting him and covering his eyes. You quickly inject him with an emergency syringe in his heart, and hide his arm under the table. Onoki grunts and removes the towel from his face.
"What was that?!" Onoki exclaims. His arm magically grows back. He eyes it oddly. "This is... a miracle... this is impossible".
"My specialty," you say. "Now, gentlemen, if you'll excuse me. I have a team to congratulate. I hope this shows you can trust us Onoki. If I was the monster you suggested me to be, you would be dead".
"You..." Onoki starts. He is dumbfounded. "You are surely the Tensei... the reincarnation of the Rikkudo Sennin... There is no other explanation".
You turn around, sigh and roll your eyes.
"21, wait, seriously," Onoki pleads. "You are the reincarnation aren't you? Please, answer me".
"My name is 21," you begin. "I specialize in the impossible... and my area of expertise lies in the ridiculous".
You walk towards the arena to a standing ovation, but are interrupted by the Tsuchikage's personal security.
"He's in there, I'm not going anywhere, I just want to see Mizuumi," you say as you hold your hands up. "He's my friend, and I need to help him. If I wanted to disappear, I wouldn't have come out, would I? It would be stupid... Now please, get out of my way. I'm aggravated, hungry, and very tired of all this tedium".
Most of the men rush into the opening behind you, while some remain here watching you. You walk towards Mizuumi and drop to your knees. He's been completely disintegrated... There might be a way to bring him back however... And what should you do now? ---------- 21, the Tensei Arc Completed, almost 100% ranking, S rank granted
New Title, Tensei. You are considered and recognized as the reincarnation of the Rikkudo Sennin. Armor of Rikkudo Sennin given, your stat cap is now at 15, and all your stats go up by 1 while wearing it
What are you going to do next? A: Train with the Shishi. Duh Mav, why are you even asking? B: No seriously Mav, wtf are you even asking us for?
Arc Reward C: Upgrade Ninja Army- Make it summon 100 jonin level golems, capable of using all of your A and lower jutsu D: Give yourself 5 stat points E: make all your golem style jutsus able to work from far away (no need to touch objects for the certain jutsus) F: gain another chakra element and five jutsus, any rank from that element G: increase your chakra regen to 20/ 6 seconds H: make every golem you summon able to cast your jutsu, C rank and lower chakra capacity 60. No regen
Karma Reward 1: increase your chakra pool to 1450 2: master a jutsu/ try to improve a mastered jutsu 3: give yourself 7 stat points 4: grant your golems your previous regeneration
Exp reward (for picking up on clues) !: make a jutsu cost no chakra (specify which) @: make your body as hard as steel. (weights your blows in taijutsu, and could hurt your opponent who punches/kicks you without enhancing their blow with chakra. Also makes you heavier, for story purposes) # Increase your kekkai genkai's ability of life. Give yourself superhuman reflexes and thought reactions $ Give Itachi and Sasuke EMS through your research, so Itachi doesn't work on it the normal way
As you look at Mizuumi, you try to come up with a way to reconstruct him. You feel a little echo beginning to buzz in your ears, slowing increasing in volume. Your vision gets blurry as you fall to the side. You feel your body undergo a change... You look at your hands, they're spinning, and you're seeing double. You close your eyes and try to focus. You open them slowly as your head bobs drowsily. You shake off the cobwebs and check your hands again. Your vision has cleared and the echo fades away. You immediately know how to fix Mizuumi now, with memories intact and everything. An idea also springs to your head about how you could easily upgrade Itachi's Sharingan to the EMS how he wanted, without the gory process..
It's clear what's happening, your genetic makeup has changed. This is obviously a further evolution of your bloodline. You place your hands over Mizuumi and focus your chakra, you change the dust particles back into the weapons Itachi gave you so long ago, and you pump your chakra into the mass of weapons, and Mizuumi springs forth, back to life in front of you.
"What happened?" Mizuumi asks. "I thought I was dead".
"You were," you state. "I fixed the problem. Be a little more careful, alright bud? You're part of the team".
You feel Mizuumi's gratitude inside your mind. You stand up and see that Team 21 is coming onto the field, and the Tsuchikage is exiting the room, and walking towards you as well. Team 21 is really proud of you, you smile proudly and crack your neck. Over the years, Team 21 has become much more than a shinobi team, they've become a family. You go over and hug your family one by one. You also notice that Ino and TenTen are waiting behind them waiting for you. You pick up Itachi with a big hug.
"Hey! You're squeezing the crap out of me," Itachi exclaims. "Did you get stronger brother?"
You hear Onoki begin to speak loudly to the arena, introducing you as the Tensei. He is also talking about how the 5 kage's have fully recognized you as the reincarnation of the Rikkudo Sennin, that there is no doubt. And that you will be awarded with "your old armor".
"Just a bit," you say with a smirk. "I think I'm... evolving, it's hard to explain. But I have good news, I can give you BOTH the Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan, with no pain whatsoever! No need to do the traditional process. And it won't leave Sasuke traumatized".
"Really?" he asks.
"Yeah, it just... came to me," you answer.
"I'm glad, I was getting concerned," Itachi admits. "I was going to go through with it while you were training with Shishi-san. And I was reading, that there was a possibility to corrupt the user with overwhelming hatred... The Sharingan is usually very detrimental to its user. But I had to do it, and Sasuke was in agreement with me. Madara is too great a threat, it would of had to be done".
"I don't want you taking unnecessary risks, we're all here for that," you say as you motion to Team 21. "This is our extended family. We've been in the trenches with one another, we've bled on each other, we've done everything together. Count on us to help so that you never have to do things like that. Before I go and train with Shishi-san, I will get perform the procedure, so that you can train while I'm away".
"Sounds great," Sasuke says as he comes up behind Itachi. "We can't have Madara disrespecting our clan brothers. The Uchiha name is being disrespected".
Itachi nods proudly. You excuse yourself and walk behind Team 21 and approach TenTen.
"I see you're doing well," you say as you look at her. "You look pretty spry".
"Thanks again for saving me 21-sama," she says with a bow.
"Hey, drop that alright?" you say with a smile. "I am going to go away for a while... you two make sure to train hard while I'm away alright? I don't want to see you guys go down to a foreigner ever again. You can train with Team 21 if you want. The options there if you want to take it".
"Yes sir!" TenTen says eagerly with a bow before she runs off embarrassed.
You look at Ino and shrug your shoulders.
"I'm going to work hard too 21," she says softly. She catches herself and blushes uncontrollably. "I'm sorry if I was too forward! I just thought you meant both of us. My apologies 21-sama".
"No, you're included too Ino," you say with a laugh. "I really respect your father. Say hi to him for me, alright? How do you feel? You're not angry at me are you?"
"No, I could never be mad at you," she says averting your eyes. "You looked... really good out there. Are you going to be the next Hokage?"
"No, I don't think that's a good idea for now.." you explain. "I have everything under control though. Will you be taking me up on my offer of training with Team 21?"
"Ye-, yes of course!" Ino exclaims awkwardly. You look at her with one eyebrow raised. "I just wanted to congratulate you. Great work 21-sama".
She rushes away before you have the chance to remind her to drop the honorific. Odd...
You turn around and see Gaara hanging out with Naruto. Temari and Kankuro are behind him. Temari walks up to you and bows. She thanks you for helping her brother, and explains that Gaara has completely changed thanks to you. You bow back and explain it was your pleasure. You look over to see Gaara actually laugh with Naruto. Things are good... You regret having to leave now.
"I just heard," Tsunade says to you, snapping you out of your thoughts. "I am surprised. But, I truly respect your decision, and if you think I deserve it, then I am honored".
"You're the best for the job Tsunade," you say with a slight smirk. "You deserve it, and the Leaf needs you".
"I will miss being part of Team 21".
"You won't stop being part of Team 21," you correct. "You just have more responsibilities now, hehe. Speaking of that, you won't be splitting us up right? I understand the village needs the manpower, but I don't want to affect the team's morale. They're much stronger together than apart".
"How could I deny the Tensei?" Tsunade says with a smile. She gives you a hug, ruffles your hair, and walks away.
"Damn.." you think to yourself. "I can see why Jiraiya is so in love with her. I hope they admit it to one another, life's too short".
You say your goodbyes, and go to the private room you worked on Onoki. You completely vaporize his arm with a plasma jutsu and sneak out, unnoticed. Thankfully, Madara's agents hadn't found it. As you walk out, Sarutobi-sensei presents you with your new suit of armor. It looks... incredible.You bow and graciously accept the gift. Akisame also walks in, and he informs you that he wants to go back to Bellhelm while you train. After saying goodbye to Sarutobi-sensei, you FGG Akisame and yourself to Bellhelm and present yourself to Shishi, wearing the Rikkudo Sennin armor.
"I saw your battles," Shishi states. "One of the many talents you can learn, if you succeed in becoming a Lion Master. I also sense a... calm in your heart now. You have grown and matured drastically. I sense... life inside you, you are already becoming one with nature. There are many ways to evolve as a Lion Master... I myself focus on the strength aspect of it. But you can also go with the speed path... There's a combination that is a mixture of both, it's up to you. Depending on which route you choose, you will develop certain techniques, but everyone is different. And I can not tell you what path specific talents you will develop because of that. No matter what however, when and if, you are successful, you will notice you will become superhuman in almost every trait, have great chakra capacities, develop a rare taijutsu style, several auras that affect your allies and enemies, and some genjutsu". ---------- Turning Point A: I'd like to train in the strength path B: I'd like to train in the speed path C: I'd like to become the hybrid D: Whatever you think would be best
"I depend on my speed as it is," you explain. "I could always use more speed".
"Ah, so you wish to be the lithe, slender kind of hunter eh?" Shishi says. "Let's go then, we must go to the training grounds. There, we will meditate on your training. We will see if you can handle the natura chakra in its entirety".
You both leave the the dojo and walk towards the training grounds.
"Nature must be your mother," Shishi explains as he sits down at the grounds. "You must observe the lion. The lions are the most powerful, dominant creature in their habitat. They are graceful, big, powerful, yet still extremely fast and agile. In order to gather nature chakra, you must be at rest, at peace. You must try to resemble the lion in every form, function, thought and attitude. The lion doesn't kill for sport, only for sustenance, so you too, must accept this mantle of responsibility. If you gain the power of the legendary Lion Masters, then you must only fight when necessary. Calm your heart, just like the lion while hunting. Their adrenaline rushes as they sense the kill, yet their heart is calm and at peace so they can make the kill efficiently, with no mistakes".
You sit down in front of him and reflect on his words. He wants you to be at peace. But there's so much going on... and you're used to CONSTANTLY thinking, over-thinking even.
"Instead of trying to empty your mind," Shishi suggests. "Why don't you try thinking of a calming thought? Something that makes you feel at ease". ----------------- A: Think of Team 21 B: Think specifically of _____ C: Imagine a lion hunting their prey D: Think of the Leaf, your home E: Free Will
You slow down your thoughts and concentrate on the lake. That peaceful lake, where so much has happened. It's significance is unquestioned, yet it never gave you a reason to shudder. It remained always, no matter what, above anything else, a place of tranquility. You exhale deeply and think about skipping stones along the lake.
"There you go," you hear Shishi say. "Concentrate on whatever is keeping you calm. Focus on it. Try to hear and feel nature. It's all around you. Call to it, similarly to how you call your golems. Ask it for help. Communicate with it. See if you can feel the chakra slowly revitalize you, If I'm right, you will easily accomplish this. You already teem with nature chakra as it is. This should come natural to you".
You lower your head and continue thinking of the lake. You imagine the sounds it used to make as it swirled around. You try to call to the trees around you, the earth, even the wind. You feel yourself being washed over by a warm, fulfilling feeling. You've felt small amounts of this before, but never anything this impressive. So this is nature chakra...
"I feel it master," you say softly.
"I noticed," Shishi states calmly. "You're doing very well, I expected you to excel, but you're doing even better than that. You've grown well. I believe you're ready for the first lesson. Try to focus that nature chakra to a specific area of your body, the same way you would focus your stomach chakra for your fireball jutsu, focus it to your legs, let's see if you can do that".
You direct that warm feeling to your legs as instructed. You feel your legs throb with power.
"Try to see how fast you can run now," Shishi says. "The Toad Sages know all about nature chakra, but the Lion Masters found a way to always have a large amount of nature chakra in them. At all times, we have nature in us. Even while we sleep, because a lion must always be ready to pounce, to react. Keep the chakra in you by maintaining a clear head, your mind always focused on your objective. If you can't do that, you won't be able to keep the nature chakra in you. You can calm yourself with one thought, but before the nature chakra will remain in you indefinitely, you have to train your mind to focus on the objective AFTER you concentrated and gained your nature chakra. Give it a try".
You open your eyes and run, you're definitely faster, several notches faster. Your skin actually tears under the pressure of your speed, and before you know it, you're tumbling forward, even faster than when you were running at full sprint. You couldn't maintain the thought. You fall and bounce off the ground like a pebble being skipped across a lake. You travel so far, you can't even determine the distance you've gone. As you sit up, you realize, that you have NO idea of where you are. Judging by the climate, you know you're north of Bellhelm, but it's way too cold, how far DID you go?
You FGG back to Shishi. He is still meditating still, but opens up his left eye slightly and looks at you with a smile.
"You went further than you wished, cub?" Shishi says. "You couldn't control your thoughts? You figured out how to collect nature chakra, now let's see if you can maintain it. After years of doing this, it will stay in you at all times. Take a seat, collect more nature chakra, and let's try again. This time, direct it to your legs, and think of something you need to do. But this can't be a fleeting goal. It has to be something that won't change. If it does change, you will never be able to maintain nature chakra again. Your body must focus on something that is as unchanging as nature itself, something you either want to get, or accomplish".
"Master, did you see me run?" you ask.
"Yes, I regularly commune with the earth," Shishi says.
"How far did I get? I was running only 5 seconds at most," you explain. "When I was falling, I was moving faster than when I tried to use the nature chakra to run at a full sprint".
"Yes, because your mind fogged, and the nature chakra spiked in you," Shishi answers. "You were almost at the Village Hidden in Frost. You went quite a ways, you've obviously increased your speed since I saw you last. Now, what shall be your objective? Can you focus on that?"
Wait, the Land of Frost? That's two countries away... By your calculation, you're traveling several hundred miles per second, at least 336.2... That's... impossible. Your specialty. ------ A: Your focus is beating Madara B: Your focus is protecting your family C: Your focus is to always strive to be the best person you can be D: Your focus is to get stronger E: Free Will
"I will strive for world peace," you say aloud as you think of the lake, and then imagine a world without the need for ninja. "I want my family and friends, and even strangers, to enjoy a world where kids don't have to be forced to grow up to be shinobi. I want countries to care about neighboring countries, without ulterior motives. I want people to help one another without reason, just because it feels good".
"A noble goal, it is lofty, can you reach it?"
"One day, I will change this world of ninja," you explain as you stand up. "Let me try again".
Shishi motions with his hands and you take off. You head north and immediately, before you know it, you're maintaining the speed easily. It's second nature for you. You've reached the northern ocean. You look around as you observe your surroundings. Your keen intellect and reflexes are able to input all the stimuli at once, even at these superhuman speeds. You're thankful you trained your mind in such a way, if you hadn't, you wouldn't have been able to deal with this speed. Satisfied, you FGG next to Shishi.
"Master, I did it," you say triumphantly. "I was able to do it, it's amazing. I saw the world in less than ten seconds..."
"I noticed, you might really be the Tensei after all," Shishi says with a smile.
"I have a problem though," you point out. "When going that fast, my skin tears, my eyes are going to pop out due to the air pressure-"
"You're thinking ahead," Shishi interrupts you. "I realize that this is how your thought process works, but you have to let me teach. The lion's have a thick hide, with big pupils to allow them vision even in the dark. The eyelids of a lioness are special as well, as they run faster than most of the other big cats. You will notice your eyelids change as well. You must give it time".
Humbled, you sit down again and await your next lesson.
"You have the basics of gaining and maintaining the nature chakra, this is good," Shishi informs. "I want you to practice this for the next several days, without thinking of anything else. When I see something in your progress, we will move towards step 2".
You nod and watch Shishi-sensei get up and leave. You start practicing immediately. But you realize that you have it down already... You almost get frustrated, but then you remember his words...
Weeks pass by before Shishi comes to you.
"I'm glad that you have finally come to terms with the world," Shishi states. "There are things, that no matter how powerful you become, will be out of your control. This is a good thing to learn and accept. Now comes the next step. The lions have an aura about them, they command respect, and the world obeys. It provides the lions with the climate they need and the food they desire. This is something that is in their very nature. It's an aura that you can't turn off. People will be able to detect you easier, but your prowess will be... amazing. This aura soothes the body and sharpens the mind of those that you consider worthy. Your essence of life is so powerful that you can instill this in others, through presence alone. This aura will make you seem more convincing and trustworthy to the good people of the world, as good is in your nature. It will help you in dealing with the people you wish to save, but it will make the evil people you fight spot you easier... But that is only the first level. You can choose to not gain this aura however, if it is your wish". --- A: Grant my the Aura of Life please B: I'd rather not make myself known to my enemies C: What would it be capable of doing at later levels? D: I'm not sure I need that... is that all it does? E: Free Will
"Yes, please teach me the Aura of Life," you say respectfully.
Shishi leans in and pats you on the shoulder. You stand up and he asks you to mimic his movements. He is doing a kata, but this form is reliant on palm strikes, clawing at the eye sockets, nostrils, ears, it's all very visceral.
"I want you to practice this form for a while," Shishi instructs. "Do as you have been doing, and you will receive the fruits of your training. Once again, I will wait for you to develop a certain... talent before we move on. Maintain your nature chakra as you perform these katas, do not lose it at all. You will notice several changes to your body, this is normal, do not worry".
You perform as instructed. Months pass by before Shishi speaks to you about training again. You've come to accept that certain things are out of your control. You believe this is all part of Shishi's training. After the first few weeks of the regime, your eyes start to turn hazel. By the time Shishi begins training you again, your eyes' pupils are slitted, like a cat, and a golden color that reflects light. Your hair has become thicker and longer, your skin tougher, thicker as well, like a hide.
"I see you have managed quite well," Shishi tells you finally. "Your growth is extraordinary. Now, you face a fork in the road. Their are certain attributes you possess that can be expanded upon, or we can release the limits placed on you by nature. If we work on expanding your current attributes, you will not be able to release the limit nature has placed on you. If you release the limits nature has placed... well, obviously you won't get any immediate reward, but that's not the point now, is it?" ======= A: I want to increase my current stats B: I want to release the limit nature has placed on me C: Can I do a little of both? D: I'm not sure yet... Do you recommend anything?
"I want to release the limit placed on me," you answer firmly. There is no doubt in your words, no doubt in your decision.
"Good, very good," Shishi states as he begins to walk. "Follow me then".
You follow Shishi out of Bellhelm to the middle of the forest. He stops in a clearing and turns to you.
"This is just a part of nature," Shishi informs. "There are many places where a lion can thrive, although this is not part of the lion's natural habitat, it can survive here. You must survive under any conditions to become hardy, to become stronger than anything else in your habitat. I want you to survive out here, using only the little I've taught you. If you do this, nature itself will recognize you as limitless, and you'll feel your nature chakra change. Always maintain your nature chakra active. It will start as a pain in the stomach, and then a cold wave over you. I know this well, because I was taught this a very long time ago, and I chose this path as well".
He walks away and disappears in the trees. The first few days go easily, and before you knew it, your beard has become long and unkempt. Another month passes by before Shishi visits you.
"I have been watching you, amongst the tree canopies," Shishi admits. "You have done well. You were true to my teachings. I admire that, and I respect you. Come, this is the final doorway to your training..."
You follow him out of the forest, to a lush green plain. The light of the sun blinds you at first, but you shield your eyes. Shishi turns once more.
"I have taught you for a long time 21," Shishi states. "I present to you, the final option. This last question will decide your future as a Lion Master. Inside some of us, we have the ability to use nature chakra. For those that do possess that ability, they tend to have an animal totem. A spiritual link to a particular animal. As you might have guessed, we share the same totem, the lion. You should be able to summon nature's incarnation of the lion in the form of an actual beast. I summon an ancient lion that was born during the first week of the planet's creation. If you like, I can summon him and see if he will engage in a contract with you. Or... you can try to summon up your own lion, with your own chakra, and see what the earth grants you. I can teach you and guide you on how to summon your own, but it will be harder, but it will be your own. You wouldn't be taking any shortcuts or piggybacking off the work of a predecessor. You'd be your own master, but it might fail".
"What would be required of me to summon my own?" you ask.
"It would be the same as summoning nature chakra, but with a different image," Shishi explains. "Your motivator here must be what you embody and imagine as strength and purity of spirit. You must maintain this until you finish the summoning, then, we will introduce ourselves to your creature, if you're successful. Either way, whether you summon my friend, or try to get your own, this process is necessary". ==== Do you want to learn Shishi's summon or try to gain your own? 1: My own 2: Let me go with Shishi's summon
What is your motivator, your vision of strength and purity of spirit for your summon? A: Itachi B: the Leaf C: Sarutobi-sensei D: Kakashi E: Free Will
"I will make my own destiny... as much as I can," you announce. "I will summon with my own nature chakra... I will make my own path... You asked me for something strong and pure. I know exactly what that is. It's love, the love I have for all. My desire to protect everyone I care about. The poor people in Bellhelm who I never knew existed but were suffering in silence... I fight for their protection, so they can live good lives. Lives that don't involve this lopsided, political horse ****".
"So this is the fabled Will of Fire?" Shishi says with a look of admiration on his face. "Amazing... you can't manufacture that 21. No matter what your origins are, no matter how you were born. That will you just displayed... it can't be injected or fabricated. Go, take your place".
You sit down and begin to meditate, following Shishi-sensei's advice. You infuse your thoughts and chakra with that notion in mind. After a short while, the earth itself shakes. You hear Shishi exclaim. Before you, a large ball of light appears in the air. It gets bigger and bigger as you concentrate, until eventually it takes the shape of a lion. It's massive, at least 200 feet tall, and it's longer than it is tall. It looks down at you and squints.
"My God..." Shishi-sensei gasps. "11 tails... you summoned... no... you must have created this. Could you truly be the Rikkudo Sennin?"
"That is a name I have not heard for a long while," the thunderous voice of the tailed beast reports."Are you the Rikkudo Sennin little one?"
"No, my name is 21," you correct. "I am called many things, but I am not the Rikkudo Sennin. I am the Tensei and the Tatsujin".
The lion eyes you cautiously. You look at it fearlessly. You won't back down.
"Very well," the lion says, his voice echoes as if many creatures are speaking at once. "Then show me that you deserve those titles, mortal".
"21, you must fight him for your mantle," Shishi-sensei explains. "But... I've never seen anything like this before in my life. This is something a person could live a dozen lifetimes and never see".
"What should I call you?" you ask the lion as you look up. You have to scream for him to even hear you.
"I have no name, for no one has been able to face me yet," the lion announces. "I will go by whatever name you wish if you can defeat me. Use whatever you can against me. For the moment... you can call me.. Aslan".
Aslan charges at you, the earth shaking beneath his massive weight. ===== A: FGG on top of his mane and give him a stab with your Wind Catcher B: Fissure this bad boy C: SotU D: Summon Shadow Clones E: Free Will
EVERY round is a Clutch Moment
With blinding speed, you make the handseals necessary for lightning clone. Your hands moved so fast that Shishi had no idea of what you were doing. But within one second, L pops up next to you. Together, you both once again do another series of handseals, and you both summon 200 shadow clones each.
Aslan is confused, he doesn't have enough time to react, and he exclaims at your speed. You cast Crystal Golem, and while the golem forms before your eyes, L is already casting Living Plasma on it. A fourth of your Shadow Clones use Mass Change on your Crystal Golem, making the Golem even bigger than the 11 tails.
The two gargantuan monsters clash, as their weight rocks the earth beneath their struggle. 20 of your clones cast SotU on Aslan's legs, rocking Aslan's balance. While some of your clones turn the swamps toxic, a majority of your clones use plasma kunai on the front leg's of the 11 tails, right on the knees.
Just as the the Titans are battling for supremacy, one of your clones uses FGG and teleports the Crystal Golem to send it above Aslan. Aslan is beyond blitzed, he is trying to react, but there are far too many threats to react to at once. L goes to Aslan's right side using FGG, you do the same and FGG to the opposite side. The clones divide themselves evenly amongst Aslan's side.
Aslan's front legs buckle, you think they're about to give. You notice that his body is beginning to glow, he's gathering energy around his entire body. You think he's trying to cast a jutsu similar to Sudden Explosion, but he seems to be using plasma. ===== A: Use Tensei's Exploding Tag on his front legs, completely obliterate his legs B: Use Flashburst C: Set up a Lightning Trap D: Have all your clones use Fire Lion Explosion E: Free Will
Three-fourths of your clones go and FGG in front of Aslan. 30 of your clones go up to Aslan's face and shoot lightning into his eyes. Aslan emits a deep bellow you can tell is coming from his belly that has a fierce, wind chakra in it. Any lesser clone would have surely been disintegrated by it, but your clones stand tall. L teleports behind you and summons a second Crystal Golem. You then cast Living Plasma on it, while 50 of your Shadow Clones use Mass Change on it. Making a second Crystal Golem that's larger than life appear to fight Aslan.
270 Shadow Clones use a powered version of Flashbang, creating a blinding light that dazes Aslan, while you and L, and 50 clones repeat the process again, and summon a Third CG, that's colossal and has Living Plasma on it.
The first Crystal Golem has JUST fallen on top of Aslan from before and is struggling for dominance over it with a headlock. The second CG (Crystal Golem) goes to the opposite side of Aslan and starts punching him in the gut.
Two of your clones teleport the two newer CG's to be on opposite sides of Aslan, while the first, original CG is still holding a headlock, trying to bring Aslan to the ground.
Your final jutsu is Tensei's Exploding Tags, an improved version over the one you used in your fight with the Salamander. You focus it on the already damaged legs of Aslan, and you exclaim as you see the damage done, it's significant. Even Aslan couldn't handle 3 giant CG's at once, much less CG's that had your improvements added. The Golems manage to bring Aslan down to the ground in a fierce, feral struggle. L and 399 of your clones use HeadHunter and disappear into the ground, and one stays above ground, hoping to see what Aslan's attack is capable of.
You teleport far away to be safe from the blast radius, at least, what you think is far enough away. You notice Aslan glow green, then blue, then back to green before you notice that all of the sound has been sucked into the vacuum created by Aslan's ridiculous explosion. The trees are incinerated, the ground kicked up, and all of your clones have returned to you, destroyed.
Your eyes were burned away from watching the explosion directly. You regenerate them in nanoseconds, and process the information. You have to come up with a new game plan. Aslan's front set of legs are definitely weak, but the only allies you have on the field now are the 3 gigantic CG's, which thanks to your Living Plasma jutsu, were able to tank the jutsu, only getting hurt by the sheer force of the blast.
Shishi, is nowhere to be found. --------------------- A: Cast Raisoku and cut the crap out of Aslan's legs until he only has nubs B: Send the 3 CG's upon Aslan's leg's and order them to rip them from the sockets C: Send your 3 CG's upon Aslan's head, and order them to explode D: Fissure Aslan now that his movement has been impaired E: Free Will
You tell the first golem to maintain its grasp, and direct the others to pull off Aslan's legs. You summon more Shadow Clones.
You summon Mizuumi to your side and begin collecting from your stored chakra reserve.
Your fifty clones cast Toxicity on the golem on top, while another 50 use mass change to increase its weight. Continuing the assault, another 50 clones shatter the heavy golem that is on top of Aslan while the remainder of your clones direct all the shards into Aslan with overwhelming force.
One of your clones FGG's to safety, while another detonates all the shards. Amidst all the chaos, you hear Aslan scream in pain. Your chakra fully charged, you stand up and assess the damage. Your golems are worse for wear, but each of them hold one of Aslan's front legs in their hands. Aslan stares you down.
You FGG infront of Aslan, and look at his wounds. Aslan notices you and tries to stand up on his nubs.
"You are indeed worthy of my power mortal," Aslan states. "I am losing, with little chance to win. A real warrior knows his limits Besides, it is no shame to lose to the likes of you. You didn't underestimate me, and because of this, you never gave me a chance to attack".
"Will you be alright?" you say as you analyze the wounds.
"Of course, I am a part of you after all," Aslan states. "Let the contract be finished then. From this day forward, I am your summon, and you will be mine".
"Excuse me?" you ask curiously. "I'm your summon?"
"Yes, you are on the way to becoming a true Lion Master," Aslan states groggily. "You are now, one of the pride. And our contract works as a two way agreement. There may come a time when I need you, and I will summon you. Do you accept the terms of these arrangements?"
You begin to explain everything you know about Madara, and his usage of the bijuu. Aslan confirms your suspicions that he was the original bijuu, that the ten tailed beast was merely his spawn gone mad. Aslan also informs you that the 10 tails was always running from him, until he fought the Rikkudo Sennin. Fearing that humans would one day need his power, Aslan went into a deep hibernation, hoping to never be awoken. But now that the 10 tails has been changed into 9 different beasts and a man is collecting their powers, it seems that the moment for Aslan to walk the earth has come again. He is not afraid of Madara. ==== A: I would be honored to be your summon as well Aslan B: Can I house your chakra as a jinchuriiki? C: Why would you need me as a summon? D: Just be my summon, I can't really be whisked away at any time, I'm on an important schedule E: Free Will
"From now on, your name is Leo, after your scientific name," you inform the 11 tails. "But I would be honored to be your summon as well".
Leo shrinks down to the size of a "normal" lion and spits up a summoning contract. Shishi appears next to you as you crouch down to begin the contract.
"I can't believe you're real," Shishi says with a sigh. "There were rumors. But everytime it always ended the same. That only the Rikkudo Sennin could possibly summon you".
"I really doubt I'm the Rikkudo Sennin," you reply, finishing up the contract. "But, maybe I'm just lucky".
Leo puts his paw print on the contract and then swallows it up again.
"Our business is done then mortals," Leo states. "Call me as needed. I do not need a paltry blood sacrifice, the whole affair is pathetic. Just think of me, and use your chakra like you did before, and I will appear. But you must be ready to be summoned as well".
"Understood".
Leo disappears in a fiery burst. Shishi looks at you before speaking.
"I am very impressed," Shishi says. "Now we can continue with the rest of your training. After this, you will be a Lion Master".
You both walk back towards the village and continue your training. Over the next several months, you notice your bones become thicker, and your vision is even better. You learn several new jutsus, and gain a new aura. You've gotten significantly faster, and even though Shishi predicted it would be years before you could maintain nature chakra within you at all times, you realize that you already accomplished this. You also managed to work on your swordsmanship a little as well, although you figure KB would be a better outlet way to train. Your training has concluded, and you are now a full fledged Lion Master. Your chakra control is so precise, that you can maintain this mode without a consequence. ======= You have learned:
Lions Roar- S Rank Genjutsu- 80 points- You emit a powerful, deafening roar. Any who hear it must resist this genjutsu or be shaken with an overwhelming fear that forces them to flee, as quickly as they can, using whatever means.
Lions Claw- S Rank, close range ninjutsu- 60 points- You surround your hands in nature chakra, forming the shape of massive lion paws. Anything hit by it, is subject to severe blunt and piercing damage
Maw of the Beast- S rank- 90 points- An area of effect jutsu that makes a large area (30 square feet) of the earth turn into a mouth of razor sharp teeth that close in on your enemies, both trapping them, and most likely, killing them.
Night Vision- always on, no chakra cost- Your eyes have changed to the point that they literally work in total darkness. However, your eyes can not see into the darkness if you are in the light, and vice versa
Aura of Justice- 21's mere presence hurts the body and fogs the mind of those evil aligned. Also makes 21 look more powerful and persuasive to evil aligned people.
Special Taijutsu Style- Lion Style- a hard martial art that focuses on speed, dodging and palm strikes
21's new stats Chakra Pool is 1600 Ninjutsu 16 Taijutsu 12 Genjutsu 11.5 Intelligence 16 Strength 13 Speed 18 Stamina 13 Hand Seals 15
Arc Reward: A: Add 3 stat points B: Give your golem's a regenerative ability and 100 chakra C: Expand your Shadow Clone's chakra to 100, and summon 400 of them
Karma Reward: !: Give yourself 3 stat points @: Make one jutsu cost no chakra # Give Mizuumi a higher chakra capacity, and a regen
And now, where shall you go? 1: Back to the Leaf, let's see how things have been 2: Let me check in with the Ryozanpaku dojo before I leave 3: Let me go straight after Madara and crew and not endanger anyone from Team 21 4: Train in the sword with Killer B 5: Free Will
You drop in on Ryozanpaku dojo for a quick farewell. Shishi is there, and he is bragging about how well you did. It seems as if all the masters at the dojo wish to spar you now, but Shishi explains that it's useless. Akisame requests that he go back with you to the Leaf to check on Team 21, as he has also been worried about them. With everything normal, you say your farewells and FGG back to the Leaf.
You're greeted warmly, you feel more like a celebrity than ever. This time however, instead of the "Tatsujin" chant or outcry, the streets are flooded with "Tensei". You can't help but feel a little shy, especially since you haven't cut your hair or beard in a very long time. Nonetheless, you go to the Hokage Mansion to check on the status of things. Tsunade is there and greets you, her surprise evident on her face.
"21, I can't believe you're back!" Tsunade exclaims. "At first, I thought you wouldn't be gone long, then I found out that the training would take years! I thought it would at least be two years before I saw you again".
You smile and bow.
"Tsunade-sama, it is good to be home," you say respectfully. You notice an engagement ring on her hand. Curious... "Who is the lucky man, if I may ask?"
Tsunade looks at her ring and smiles.
"What can I say... I finally gave in," she answers. "Jiraiya and I will get married, maybe. If things die down".
"What's been going on?" you ask with a hint of shock in your voice.
"It's the Mist..." she says. "I've sent Itachi and his team to the village, and they are saying that what you did... was a hoax. The Mizukage, Yagura, wishes nothing but all out war with the Leaf. He wishes to erase us off the map, and negotiations have been going... downhill to say the least. It's really gotten worse in these last few months. The Tsuchikage, Onoki, has been adamant that it wasn't a hoax. That he truly believes you to be the Tensei... but... it hasn't been easy with you gone".
"Itachi's team? What about Team 21?"
"You were gone 21," Tsunade says. "I needed to make use of the resources I had. We all thought you were going to be gone for years. And Madara, he hasn't made a move at all, not that we know about. We even thought he could have killed you. Itachi leads Team 21 now".
"And Sasuke? Naruto? They're all with him?"
"No, Naruto is here in the village," Tsunade says. "He's been training to become a sage, like Jiraiya. If you ask me, he's become very powerful. He will be happy to know you're here. But the rest of the team is with Itachi. I knew you would wish the team to remain together, so I sent them all under Itachi's leadership. Sarutobi-sama is also around, and I'm sure he'd like to see you".
"Hmmm," you think aloud. "Is the Mist capable of war against us?"
"Yagura is inciting a war against us," Tsunade clarifies. "He is accusing you of being the cause for the Kazekage's disappearance, and that you orchestrated everything in the chunin exams. The Mist is capable of hurting our village greatly, and the Sand has done everything it can to avoid going to war against us... Gaara, if you remember him, has taken up the position of Kazekage... But they still haven't found what happened to the previous Kazekage... that's something of a sensitive issue".
"Jeez... I've been gone for too long," you say in frustration. ======= Turning Point + Clutch Moment The Leaf is on the verge of war A: Go speak to Sarutobi-sensei, seek his counsel B: Speak with Naruto and Jiraiya C: Go to the Mist, unite with Itachi's Team D: Speak with Naruto and Jiraiya, interrupt their training, and reunite Team 21 at the Mist E: Free Will
You charge Mizuumi up to full and congratulate Tsunade once more on her engagement. You ask where Sarutobi-sensei is and she directs you to the old training grounds...
Interesting, you think. The "old" training grounds. How much farther have you come from that point? You remember how many years have passed, but you still don't know what had happened to you before you woke up in Danzo's possession. When you make it to the grounds, you see Sarutobi-sensei, Jiraiya, Naruto, Ino and TenTen.
The girls run up to you almost hysterically. You cover up your face even further with your mask, but there's no hiding your wild, thick, mane.
"21-sama?! Is that you?!" Ino asks. Ino's grown... as has TenTen, and oh yeah, Naruto has grown too.
"Are those contacts?!" TenTen asks as she looks into your eyes. "You look SO cool!"
"21!!!" you hear Naruto's telltale scream. He runs and bowls you over. You hear Jiraiya and Sarutobi-sensei laugh as you tussle with Naruto on the floor.
"You've gotten bigger little guy," you say playfully. "What's going on here? Training? I thought you would be with Itachi".
"I wanted to go..." Naruto says as he jumps to his feet. "But Pervy Sage wouldn't let me. He said that the village could use our presence, in case we get attacked, and that way we could train at the same time".
"That sounds like a good idea," you state honestly as you make your way to Jiraiya and hug it out. Manly hugs, a hug between bad ass men who have bled in the trenches together. No emo type stuff here.
"You look like a bum," Jiraiya points out. "Hiding behind that beard and mask? And look at that long hair, you trying to go for the look of Jiraiya the Gallant?"
"It is good to have you home, child," Sarutobi-sensei says as he hugs you and interrupts Jiraiya. "You came home much sooner than we thought. This is good".
"I actually need some information," you reply. "I'm sorry to cut our time short. I know it's more than a little rude right now, but I have to stop the war before it starts".
"YES! The return of Team 21!!!" Naruto exclaims as he cups his hands together. "Come on Jiraiya-sama, let's go reunite the team!"
"Now it's Jiraiya-sama eh?" Jiraiya says as he scratches his head. "What happened to Pervy Sage?"
"Can we go too 21-sama?" TenTen begs, practically hanging off your arm. Ino apparently gets jealous and does the same to your free arm.
"Um..." you answer hesitantly as you look at Sarutobi-sensei. "Can you brief me before I make a decision?"
Sarutobi-sensei goes on to explain that he let the Shade shinobi go back to their home village after their memories were erased. He also explains that they have been keeping an eye on the Shade Village, but that they have no evidence to prove Madara is influencing the village. You listen intently while you make enough pills to give you TEN soldier pills in total. Sarutobi confirms everything you heard from Tsunade.
Now the decision to let the young ones tag along goes to you. Jiraiya and Sarutobi-sensei both feel that with your communicators, the village can afford to lose the presence of Naruto, TenTen, Ino, and Jiraiya. But it's up to you ==== A: Take all the kids B: Take only Naruto and Jiraiya, leave the girls training with Sarutobi-sensei C: Take Jiraiya D: Take only the girls E: Free Will
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:18:42 GMT
You summon L to watch over Konoha. Then you used Shared Consciousness on Sarutobi-sensei and Jiraiya to inform them of your experiences with the 11 tails. They are both flabbergasted at this information, and both really want to see it in action.
"TenTen, are you sure you want to go?" you ask as you stare deeply into her eyes. "Have you forgiven Gaara? He was just a lonely kid, like me. Like Naruto. He was called monster and his life wasn't easy. Are you fine with us speaking with him".
"Ye- yes 21, I really want to go," she says acting a little fluttered. "I want to join the team on help you out as best as I can. You all have done such great things... The rest of us are falling behind..."
You look over at Jiraiya, and he nods his head. You look at Ino, and she is pretty lovestruck. At this moment, there is no doubt in your mind that she is infatuated with you.
"Alright, if you want to be part of Team 21, you have to get your hands dirty," you reply. "You two need some serious fieldwork experience. Let's go, Jiraiya, you're in, I assume?"
"You know I am," Jiraiya answers.
"By the way... congratulations," you say with a heartfelt slap on the arm. "I'm happy for the both of you".
"Hey, it was only a matter of time before she gave up, right?" Jiraiya says with a chuckle.
Tsunade would never forgive you if something happened to Jiraiya... You say your farewells and walk the team to the main gate of the Leaf. You close your eyes and remember the maps you studied so long ago. You've gained your barrings, and tell the team to wait here for a moment. Using your LM powers, you run towards the Sand Village and then stop on the outskirts. You FGG your team here, and advise them to wait.
"Alright, you all have your communicators," you begin to explain. "I'm going up to see if I can get a meeting with Gaara. Jiraiya, stay here and keep a look out. The rest of you, this is what being part of Team 21 is all about, we take impossible and overwhelmingly important missions on all the time. We can't afford an international incident, so please, exercise caution".
Jiraiya nods and the rest of the team is ecstatic to be on board. You turn and head towards the gates of the Sand, and are stopped immediately by a guard.
"Who are you?" he asks. "What business do you have here, Leaf ninja?"
"I have important information for the honorable Kazekage," you reply with a bow. "I must speak with him at once".
"I have to check that out, I can't let you in," the guard says nervously as you look at him with your intimidating eyes.
"That won't be necessary, the Kazekage will surely want to see me," you say as you use your Bestial Stare technique.
"The Kazekage will probably be mad if I don't let you see him right away," the guard corrects himself. "Let me escort you to him".
The guard, having been influenced through your LM powers, takes you all the way to Gaara's personal chambers. Gaara is very happy to see you, but wishes you could have seen him under a better circumstance.
You want to tell him everything you can, but you know that this might end up in vain... Or worse, if Madara has taken control of Gaara and this is all a trap... Your Aura of Justice would have let you know if Gaara was planning something evil. And the Wind Catcher would have alerted you to danger... But if Gaara is under a genjutsu, neither your Aura nor your sword could have caught this. ======= A: Err on the side of caution and ask him how everything has been going. That you'd like to try to help B: Hopefully, Gaara isn't being used here. Confide in him and tell him you can find out where the Kazekage is C: Enter Gaara's mind using Shared Consciousness D: Make small talk, and ask him how everything's been going E: Free Will
"Gaara, I'm here because of the troubles going on in the Leaf," you admit respectfully. "I hear you're in a tough position... But I hope I can help".
"How could you help?" Gaara asks incredulously. "You're the reason why we're going through this. I don't believe a word of it, but the entire village is accusing me of treason. They say I am protecting you because you spared my life at the exams. But I'm no fool, I saw what you did in the exams. How easily you defeated me. Then went out to defeat 3 kages at once... I know if you truly wished me dead, I would be dead. And... you showed me kindness when everyone else saw a monster. But what good can you do here?"
"Gaara, I need you to trust me, I know I can help," you explain. "But before I explain that, I need to make sure you're not under a genjutsu. Normally, my brothers could tell me, but they're not with me, so I have to go about it in a different way. I have to have my golems ensure you're not under Madara's control".
"Madara again?" Gaara asks. "I heard a lot about this, isn't that man dead? It's all rumor, and Yagura is saying it's just a Leaf plot to cover up your tracks. I don't believe it... but, I have an entire village to think of".
"I am going to handle all of that," you reassure. "But first, I need to find out who abducted the Kazekage. And before I do that, I need to make sure you're not transmitting anything to Madara. Trust me, I wish there was some other way than having to resort to this... but these are desperate times in our history".
"Very well," Gaara states. "As I said before, if you wanted me dead, I'd imagine I'd be dead. Do as you will".
You begin the procedure by conjuring up two separate golems. You link them together using Shared Consciousness, and then instruct them telepathically on what to do. One of them uses that same jutsu again, and looks to the other after a short brief moment. The second golem declares that while Gaara's mind is very tough to reach, he appears to not be under any type of genjutsu.
You postulate that if even with Shared Consciousness, and a willing Gaara who is understanding your jutsu and eager to help has a mind that is tough to reach, then most likely Gaara would be hard to place under a genjutsu to begin with. Besides, you feel very confident that nothing happened to the first golem. After all, Itachi stated that the genjutsu trap that was on the Shade shinobi was designed for you, so it would be devastating to your golems.
"Very well Gaara," you begin. "You appear to not be under anyone's influence. But I ask that you not mention this to anyone. What I'm about to tell you, and reveal to you, is extremely confidential. I can't risk anyone being able to inform Madara of what I'm doing, or he will just change his plans to counter me".
"I understand, what do you need from me?"
"If the Kazekage is dead, I can have him take the form of a golem, and he can speak with us," you explain. "This is of course with your permission. But if we summon him to speak with us for just a few brief moments, he could reveal to us what happened to him, and who did it. But if he's alive, my jutsu won't work, and then at least, we'll know he's alive".
"If that is the only way..." Gaara answers, obviously not too happy with the thought.
"Do you have anything from your father, like a lock of hair? Something else that we can use that was from his body? Nail clippings, a belly button, anything with his genetic code on it," you explain. You realize this is most likely too technical and scientific for the average person, but you hope Gaara can follow.
"I have a lock of his hair from when he was a boy," Gaara states hesitantly. "Would that work?"
You nod and Gaara walks away from the room. After a little while, he returns with a lock of hair and hands it to you. You use Golem Clone and try to summon the spirit of the previous Kazekage into your golem. You succeed.
After a short greeting from Gaara, the Kazekage tells you everything he can about how he died, and about who captured him. He states that he is "tired" of seeing his image used on "puppets" and that he hopes this will be the last time he sees this. He also fingers Orochimaru as his murderer, but informs Gaara that there is a group that wear dark robes with red clouds on them that are working together. After you get all the information you can, you allow Gaara to say his goodbyes to his father before dispelling the jutsu and returning the lock of hair to Gaara.
"That was definitely my father.." Gaara says sadly. "I believe you, now, without any hint of doubt. But... that doesn't mean my village will. And I can't justify this jutsu to them. Many will argue that you are just using a trick".
"Can you at least hold off your forces until I handle the situation in the Mist?" you ask anxiously.
"I will try my best 21," Gaara admits. "But I'm almost nothing more than a figurehead here. The people feel wronged, and they haven't had answers or justice. I don't want to take action against the Leaf, but the jonin council demands it. They have been demanding it for a long time, I don't know how much longer I can keep them from attacking".
"But don't they know that if they attack, it will just end up a struggle in vain?" you contest. "If I fight for the Leaf, and my team does too, what chance could the Sand's army have? Every member of my team is strong enough to be Hokage, we don't want to hurt anyone. We only want to stop the REAL enemy".
"21, I understand all of that," Gaara interrupts you. "But what can I do? I already said I will try to stall the council. I just can't do more than that, I've already bought as much time as I can. There's not much else I can do. I can try to tell them about your visit, maybe that will work. But if it doesn't, they will march on the Leaf".
Gaara is obviously broken up about the entire thing. Who would have thought that the kid who almost killed two of your friends a year ago would have grown and changed so much?
"And TenTen, I'm happy you're here," Gaara says remorsefully. "I'm truly sorry about my actions... I was a different person back then. I can understand if you hate me forever..."
You watch TenTen as she walks up to Gaara and smiles. They start talking, but your thoughts drown their voices out. You've got a serious situation here... You can either risk Gaara stalling the attack and go to the Mist yourself and see if you can sort out this problem. The real bump in this plan, is that the people of the Sand are still demanding justice, and have the Mizukage blaming the Kazekage's death on you. You've been gone for almost a year and now just show up... It just doesn't look good.
You think up all your options, one by one. Going to the Mist helps out Itachi and his team. But it might not stop the attack on the Leaf from the Sand. Alternatively, you COULD speak to the jonin council yourself, but how can you possibly prove that the disappearance of their Kazekage was not your fault? Sure, you could do the same procedure with Gaara, but if they're out for blood, they're going to try to get it... Or, you could make yourself vilified to spare the needless bloodshed and just intimidate the Sand with a display of power... If you remove yourself from the Leaf's banner, the Sand will merely blame you, and not the Leaf. You're very uncertain at this point... You fear for the future relations between the Leaf and Sand. ===== Turning Point (for the entire story) + Clutch Moment (for a ton of people) A: Try to speak with the Sand's jonin council B: Risk Gaara stalling for time, and go to the Mist to expedite the mission there C: Take the blame for the Kazekage's death, saying it was you acting alone, and that your Team and the Leaf had nothing to do with it. D: Use Shared Consciousness on the entire jonin council against their will and make them see the truth E: Free Will
"I'd like to speak with the Jonin Council," you say with determination. "I realize it's going to be tough, but I should at least let them know I'm here and that I have nothing to feel guilty or hide about".
"That wouldn't be recommended," Gaara replies. "You are the most wanted man in the entire village, if you walk in there, you'll most likely be attacked no questions asked".
"I understand, but I can't run from them either as if I'm guilty," you answer as you turn to the kids. "I want you three to go and wait with Jiraiya outside. Keep your comms on, and be ready to evacuate if I give the order".
They start to complain until they see you raise your hand.
"Just do it," you say strictly.
They leave reluctantly. Gaara shrugs his shoulders and leads you to the conference hall, it's smaller than you thought it would be. Gaara then explains he will call the council for an emergency session but it might take a while. After about half an hour, everyone is gathered, and you peek out from the corner you were hiding in.
"What's the meaning behind this Gaara-san?" an elderly man asks with almost no respect.
"I called this meeting to talk about what we know about 21 and what we've been told to believe," Gaara begins. The people gathered around the table all moan in protest. "I know that you're all bent on having him crucified, but do we have any proof? Any at all?"
"Of course we have proof!" a younger man shouts.
"Mind your tone Yura," the elderly man advises.
"We right now are in one of the biggest disasters of our proud history!" Yura continues to argue. "We shouldn't be debating and talking about what to do! We should be marching on the Leaf! Don't you think it's a little strange that everyone who comes in contact with this 21 character immediately has a change of heart? The Tsuchikage was one of his most vehement protesters! Yet 21 takes him to a special room, and not only is his arm back and normal, but now the Tsuchikage is calling 21 the Tensei! It's not a coincidence! If the Mizukage says there's a danger in 21, what do you think is going to happen next?! My money is on 21 paying a visit to the Mizukage, and then the Mizukage will soon become great buddies with 21. We can't let that happen to us! I bet the previous Kazekage was the only one with the will to say 'no' to 21, and that's why we can't find him now".
Well, it sure does look bad that you took Onoki away from the crowd and then he magically became your supporter alright... Now, how to handle this? ====== A: There's nothing I can do now, FGG out of here and head to the Mist B: Let Yura finish talking and then pop out and ask him to prove something beyond heresay C: Interrupt Yura and ask why a guilty man would present himself in person D: Interrupt Yura and offer to use your jutsu to let them see your memories E: Free Will
"That's a brilliant story," you say still hiding behind the corner. "It's amazing what one man can say to a group of people who are desperate, scared, and in a major need of answers".
"What?! Who's out there?!" Yura demands.
"I guess the correct answer would be the boogeyman," you say as you turn the corner and expose yourself. "That's what you'd make me out to be, right? Blame one person for everything that's gone wrong. It's a lot easier than finding out the truth. It's a lot cleaner that way too, isn't it? The truth has all these complications, what with facts, reasons and examples. It's way too much trouble. Much easier to point the finger at me, and say hey, there's the reason for everything. '21 corrupted the entire world, that's just what he did. We don't need evidence'. Is that about right gentlemen?"
You look around at the expressions on the faces of everyone. They're mostly terrified of you, some won't even look at you in the face.
"If you all can begin to act like civilized men, we can talk about this," you suggest. "I look around the room, and I see a lot of scared faces. Judging by the age on these faces, I know they've been alive through tougher times. Yet now, in their old age, they want to crucify one person, because it's easier. Can you give any simple evidence that convicts me? What is this scarecrow argument you're making? That because I was able to heal Onoki, I must have also changed his mind through some sort of jutsu? I don't know if anyone has noticed, but if a kage started acting differently, do you know just HOW many people would take notice? I came here to help. There's a war brewing, and it isn't between the Sand and the Leaf, it's between the threat you're all choosing to ignore. That threat, is Uchiha Madara, and right now, he's managed to play all of us like a kid's toy. Madara has spies in every village I've visited. And I wouldn't be surprised if you have spies here as well".
"Nonsense! This man is merely misdirecting the guilt off of him, he's nothing but a stage performer," Yura argues. "Trouble follows this man everywhere he goes! He="
"Tell me something Yura," you interrupt. "Was the Kazekage a powerful shinobi?"
The room stirs with a mild uproar. That question shouldn't even be raised. Yura's eyes are searching the room desperately.
"That goes without saying, mongrel," Yura answers.
"Then wouldn't a powerful shinobi go out with one hell of a fight?" you ask casually. "Was there any evidence to that? Did you know that the Kazekage has been missing before you even knew of my existence? Gentlemen, you're taking the easy road to war. If I was a guilty man, I would be eluding you, not trying to help you. I can prove without a doubt that I am who I say I am. Madara has done this to countless villages. He placed the Leaf in a genjutsu, over 4 years ago. Village wide, you know how it was powered? With a tailed beast. Ever hear of a town called Bellhelm? That's an entire town that can verify he's real. Did you ever hear of the Sound Village? Another front, all working for Madara. I have witnesses, I have proof. I came to stop the needless bloodshed. Madara has amassed an army of spies, genetic experiments, and extremely dangerous missing nin. Maybe Sasori of the Red Sand rings any bells?"
The room quiets down, you notice more people are listening to you now. Yura is barely maintaining his panic.
"He's there too," you continue. "Was that your village's little secret? I've fought with him, several times, he's as dangerous as they come. Yet, you don't see me pointing a finger accusing your village of anything. Right now, Madara is winning. It's because good people are sitting by, having conferences, arguing amongst one another. Where we should be taking action against Madara and the Akatsuki, we're going to war against one another. What do you want from me? I can prove my innocence. But not from you Yura. I can smell the taint off of you..."
You walk closer to Yura and you notice your Aura of Justice is having a particular effect on him. He is trying to get away from you.
"You're under his influence right now, aren't you?" you ask. "I would suggest you restrain him. He's got evil intentions. I've seen it before, get your best genjutsu specialists, have them probe his mind. But you're going to need a team. My guys and I have been calling it a mind trap, it's a genjutsu that buries itself in the host, and only activates subtly, over time. But when someone tries to remove it, it blows up in their face... It almost killed my little brother. I'm not lying, have him checked".
Gaara motions to the guards and requests this to be verified. Yura tries to leave, but his apprehension fills your argument with validity.
After a bit, a team comes into the room and begins to scan a restrained Yura. The team goes in turns, slowly. But eventually, one falls under the mind trap. Gaara has him rushed out the room.
"So... Yura... you?" one of the elder's say with a sigh. "You betrayed us?"
"I would never do that," Yura says in a straight panic. "This man has placed you in a genjutsu. All of you are in a genjutsu right now. He's obviously gotten through to Gaara!"
"I don't know what you're referring to boy," a really old man with long eyebrows replies. "I might be going a little senile, but I'm not dumb. You're just making things up now".
The council is on your side now. They wish to know what they can do. They're requesting guidance. They wish to break Yura out of the genjutsu safely, and want to treat the member of the genjutsu team that fell under. They don't believe that Madara is back from the dead, but they're willing to believe there's definitely something going on. They won't go to war with you until there's definitive proof of Madara. How do you go about this? ====== Turning Point + Clutch Moment A: Give them a syringe of your blood, to get them out of the genjutsu B: Call Jiraiya in, he should be able to fix this C: Call Ino in, maybe she has improved to be more like her father D: Tell them to wait until you can bring your brothers back
As far as their actions, how should they go about it? 1: Tell them to pretend as if they are going on without a change in their plans 2: Tell them to spread to the Mist, that 21 has attacked the Sand and leveled the city. Prevent all coming and going from the Sand 3: Announce to all the villages that there was a conspiracy to kidnap the previous Kazekage 4: Announce to all the villages that 21 was apprehended for the kidnapping of the previous Kazekage
"Unfortunately, I can't fix the genjutsu that's affecting them, but my brother can," you explain. "We need the Sharingan for this, it's the only safe way. That genjutsu was most likely placed by Madara, who has the Sharingan, we need one to break it. So please give me a little time to finish up in the Mist. There's a reason that everything is going on like this, and everything I've seen tells me it's Madara. I wouldn't be surprised if Madara is behind the stir in the Mist... Maybe he's controlling the Mizukage... at this point, anything's possible".
"What happens in the mean time?" one of the council members ask.
"For now, act as if nothing happened," you instruct. "Pretend that I never came, act natural. Just don't march on the Leaf. Gaara, I know I'm asking a lot, but you have to pretend that your hesitation is prompting a split in the council. A split that keeps your army here, because you are all unable to come to a majority decision. Can you all do that?"
You look around and wait for their response. They all seem to be on board. You walk around the the room to determine whether your aura picks up any other response from any in the room. It seems that the room is clean, except for Yura of course. Hopefully, no one in the room is a gossip.
"Keep all of this secret, it's extremely important," you emphasize. "If this plan gets out, we have nothing in our favor. It's imperative that we maintain this as hush hush as possible. Keep Yura, and the genjutsu specialist that fell under restrained, quarantined, and gagged. Make sure that only one of you feed them, don't let anyone outside this room feed them or talk with them. And for Heaven's sake, DON'T believe a word they say, and keep all conversation with them at a minimum. They will say whatever they want to escape, and get word back to their boss. Is that understood? I can't stress this enough. The WORLD depends on this".
Gaara and you watch the room as they come to a consensus. You feel a little better now, but you're not certain they'll keep quiet about this... but what else can you do other than trust this to Gaara. You thank them for their time, and you give Gaara an extra communicator. You tell him to not let anyone know about it, or see it. You explain how it works, and ask that he please keep you informed of anything new that might come up. He understands. You rendezvous with your team outside the Sand, and then find your way to the Mist village with your Lion Master powers.
You teleport Jiraiya, Naruto, Ino and TenTen next to you. The girls seem a bit... excited.
"Fun trip!" Ino says while blushing. "You do that all the time?! We're at the Mist! This is super far away from where we were! And you're fine? You're not tired".
"It's kind of my thing," you say with a smile as you walk towards Jiraiya. "Any idea about where they could be? They aren't responding to their comms".
"They couldn't risk bringing them," Jiraiya informs. "You do have extra I hope?"
"I'm always prepared," you answer. Jiraiya isn't surprised at all. You do a quick inventory and ensure that Ino and TenTen know how they work, and you warn them to not lose the ones they have. "When we reach the team, if I'm not there, I'll give them these comms. Hopefully they've made progress. Any word on what they've been doing?"
"The current Mizukage, Yagura, he's a known jinchuriiki," Jiraiya explains. "He is the host for the 3 tailed beast. From Itachi's reports, he rules this village with an iron fist, but he is still in power... Itachi was attempting to make contact with a rebel group. That was the last report, but that was over a week ago".
"Did they go dark?" you ask.
"Maybe, they could have gone in too deep," Jiraiya replies. "There was too many of them. I tried telling Itachi that... but 21, I think Itachi is trying to follow in your footsteps... Every day he changed more and more. He's trying to take over for you, his older brother. We all watched his personality change, little by little. We saw how hard he was on himself because he couldn't think up the solution to our problems. He became really hard on himself. I told him not to take so many to the Mist, but he was the team leader, and the most qualified for the job. There's no denying that the kids a genius, but he was made to live in your shadow 21... It's unfair, but he had to live up to be your replacement".
"But it doesn't make sense," you add as you think aloud. "Itachi is much better than that. You mean to tell me he brought the entire team here? That's way too obvious. I'm assuming he broke them up into two different squads at least?"
"Everyone's here, at least they were as of the last report," Jiraiya corrects. "Itachi did separate them into two teams. Kakashi led the other. But both teams had one final goal. To infiltrate the rebel group, and then identify themselves as sympathizers. It's a lot, and we're stretched too thin. But the importance of this mission was too much to wait for you 21..."
"I understand," you say with a deep breath. You crack your neck and think up a quick solution. "Do you want to come with us Jiraiya? I know you were sure back at the training grounds... But... Look, I know how much Tsunade means to you. And if-"
"Enough kid," Jiraiya says as he interrupts you. "I'm lucky that she finally gave in. I'm probably the happiest man on the planet right now. I've got the love of a beautiful woman that I've been after for decades, and I have a ton of foster kids who anyone would be proud of. If I go back to Tsunade like a coward, I wouldn't be the man that she deserves".
"But Jiraiya, I can handle things here," you say softly. "If there are this many people here, it could risk suspicion".
"Yeah, it could," Jiraiya answers. "But if you were to set aside all your attachments to us. Would you go on this alone?"
You look at the ground and exhale deeply.
"If I go into the village by myself, it will look suspicious," you answer honestly. "And these two need experience. And if an all out war happens... well, I need Team 21 here. Alright, ladies, come collect this. It's the 21 first aid kit, heh. There's a variety of instruments and medicines, all for different amounts of damage".
You hand Ino and TenTen the femoral wrap that supplies the different sized syringes in case of emergency. You then go on to explain how everything works, and that they can't lose any of this, no matter what. They understand, even if they use it, they must keep the syringe.
"We're ready I suppose," you say reluctantly. "So just as a quick recap. Lee, Shikamaru, Kakashi, Guy, Randel, Itachi, and Sasuke, they're all here?"
Jiraiya nods.
"Any idea on who went with who?" you ask.
Jiraiya shakes his head.
"Give me a moment," you say. "Protect me while I cast this jutsu. And by the way, ladies, this is a black op, remove anything that would identify us as Leaf shinobi".
They do so as you sit down and use Nature's Vigil. You speak to the Earth itself, scouring it for clues and information. You run an exhaustive sweep on the entire village. Thankfully, there is no barrier. You manage to find the group led by Itachi. Itachi is with Sasuke, and Randel. You continue your search and find Kakashi, he's with Guy, Lee and Shikamaru. Interestingly enough, they are all wearing a Mist pin on their collars and are surrounded by men and women wearing the same pin.
You want to search out Yagura, but you're uncertain whether or not he will be protected by a barrier, or if any contact with him might alert Madara to your presence. Knowing Madara however, if he is in fact behind this, he should have known by now that Itachi's team is here... Something here doesn't add up... ------------ A: Continue to use your jutsu to try to observe Yagura B: Exit your jutsu and teleport to Itachi's team C: Exit your jutsu and teleport to Kakashi's team D: Use your jutsu to unite the minds of all of Team 21 E: Exit your justu and update Jiraiya and crew to the variables. Then go in and wander the village normally. F: Free Will
You inform Jiraiya of your plan and crouch down. You reach out to Itachi first with your mind, he recognizes your presences immediately.
"Brother, it's good to see you," Itachi states. "You look, very different".
"And you, you've grown," You reply. "Everyone seems to be growing up all around me. Itachi, I'm in the village. I'm here to help. But I don't understand, how have you been here so long? Why have you been here so long?"
"I've joined up with a group of rebels led by a woman named Terumi Mei," Itachi explains. "They all are secretly trying to overthrow the current Mizukage, for his ruthlessness, among other things. But while here, I found that Madara was here, or at least was. He of course, knew we were here too. Yagura was nothing more than a puppet for Madara. Yagura commands a very real fear in these people. He is a jinchuriiki, or at least was".
"Was? What do you mean?"
"I imagine you know that when a tailed beast is extracted from its host, the host dies, without exception," Itachi continues. "But... Madara has extracted the tailed beast, somehow. Yagura is alive, and completely under Madara's genjutsu. Madara has someone created a failproof genjutsu that completely dominates the victim. It's similar to the mind trap jutsu back from the chunin exams. He is controlling people, entire bodies, like if it were his own finger, an extension of himself".
"That's a powerful technique, but you still haven't told me why-"
"Because he placed all of us in this genjutsu," Itachi states. "Or rather, he thinks he did. I took precautions against that. I right now am maintaining genjutsus over the entire team. I intercept Madara's command and then relay it to the team, so as not to arouse suspicion. His orders so far have been to enter the rebel's group, and identify all the members. I have alerted the rebels, and so far, he only knows of Mei, not about anyone else. And we're keeping it that way, it was her idea. We're trying to figure out what he wants to learn from the rebel group. If Madara is convinced we're under his control, he wouldn't have a problem smiting the group entirely. Unless he's playing it safe, and is cautious that we would fall so easily. Any way you look at it brother, Madara is learning about the rebels for an unknown reason. Maybe he is trying to recruit more Akatsuki, or maybe he has some other goal. The point is, we have no idea what he wants with the rebels".
"Little brother..." you say sadly. "I'm so sorry to have left you with such responsibility... No one should have to shoulder such a burden".
"I am proud and honored to do it," Itachi states. "I'll admit, it was hard at the beginning. But now, I'm used to it... I'm just tired... I find myself not sleeping well, my chakra restores itself just to be used again. Madara is constantly testing and prying with his genjutsu... It hasn't been easy, the man is quite skilled".
"But you spread your own genjutsu over 7 people, to protect them," you reply. "That couldn't have been easy. How long have you been under these conditions?"
"Far, far too long," Itachi says solemnly. "I'm tired. And you need a serious haircut and shave. You look terrible. The eyes are passable, but everything else just makes you look... like a rabid animal".
"What do you think I should do?" you ask sincerely.
"At this point, I can tell you that Madara has grown in power exponentially," Itachi replies. "What he has done to Yagura, and the genjutsu he seems to think he has us under is testament to that. If he isn't straining himself, then I have no idea how this is happening.... How he is maintaining this..."
"What if he is just testing you?" you suppose. "What if he is just testing this new jutsu against the master? You're the world's foremost expert on genjutsu, everywhere I go, they say so".
Itachi laughs softly. He really IS tired.
"Brother... I've missed you," Itachi admits. "I can bring in Kakashi if you'd like. I know you were probably thinking that. It'd be an incredible strain on me though, this is hard enough to do as it is".
"I imagine meeting in public is unheard of?" you opinion.
"Yes, if I'm right, he'll see you," Itachi answers.
Alright... So Madara has managed to take a biju out of a host, without killing the host. Has managed to make a genjutsu that controls people, like puppets... He probably had assistance from 3 or Sasori there... And now, he believes that he has the entire team under his genjutsu, or at least is SUPPOSED to believe that, yet he doesn't take out the rebel group...
This is... not going to be easy. ===== A: Thank Itachi for his time, Tell him that you will pursue this matter separately, with Yagura personally B: Thank Itachi for his time, ask him to please bear the burden a little more and allow Kakashi to join the convo C: Ask Itachi to meet with Mei in person to organize a strategy D: Come out of Shared Consciousness and inform Jiraiya, see what he says E: Ask Itachi if he could hold his jutsu in place while you do Shared Consciousness on the entire team F: Free Will
"Is Mei safe from Madara's genjutsu?"
"She hasn't been affected," Itachi answers. "It seems Madara wants to let her act naturally and see what she does".
"Is Mei the beautiful woman next to you?" you ask, you're obviously interested. "The one with the long auburn hair all the way down to her ankles almost?"
"Yeah..." Itachi says with a sly look on his face. "Hard to miss, huh?"
"Definitely," you answer. "I need to meet with her, anything I should note about her?"
"She is a genuinely kind person," Itachi explains. "She is a little... touchy when it comes to her age. The rebel group is usually commenting her on how she is past the age of being married, and it apparently really bothers her. But from what I've seen, she's very approachable and sincere. And really, shave that thing off and cut your hair before meeting her, if you want any chance with her at all".
"Me?" you act offended. "This is purely professional. Mostly professional".
"I'm serious 21," Itachi replies coldly. "You've become what the ninja world aspires to. You have to keep a certain look. People have come to idolize you, almost worship. You have to look the part. Long hair and a grizzled beard speaks only of a lazy bum who can't keep his hygiene in order. Perception is very important, especially in this case".
"Why's that?"
"Because, if we remove Yagura from his position, she is the only person that the people will vouch for," Itachi explains. "We've all spoken about you with great reverence. I won't lie to you, she's expecting a knight in shining armor. And you just don't look the part right now. We NEED her support. If we take down Yagura, she's going to be the next Mizukage. So just do it".
You groan and resign yourself.
"You're right," you reply. "The hair, the beard, they were just keepsakes from my training.. but I guess the eyes will do".
"Thank you," Itachi says.
"Alright, I'm going to wash up," you inform. "I wouldn't want to make a bad impression on the next Mizukage. Make sure you all stay there. When the time comes, I'm going to animate the floor with the location of where I'm at, and she can meet me there".
"Understood," Itachi says. "Good luck bro. And it was great seeing you again".
"We'll see each other in person soon enough I'd wager," you answer as you exit the jutsu.
You inform the team about everything that you and Itachi discussed. The girls seem a little... dejected, hopefully, it's just a little school girl crush and they won't hurt for long... After all, this is for the mission and the safety of hundreds of thousands of people.
Yeah, that's what it is. It's not like you find Mei irresistible.
Well, maybe a little.
After going to a local bathhouse, you exit the bath clean and refreshed. Then, you trim your beard to a short mustache and goatee. Not what you usually used to sport, but it looks pretty good anyway you think. You lose the long hair completely, and go back to it's original short length. Using Nature's Vigil and Object control, you pick up a stick and write in the ground where you want Mei to meet you.
After waiting a while, Mei comes and meets you. She's even more attractive in person.
"Hi there," she says with a cheerful smile. "I guess you're the one I've heard so much about? It's hard to believe that you are what they say you are... I hear you've never been with a woman either... That's a pity, I'm sure a good, strong man like you would make a wonderful husband. And I must say, your younger brothers are really handsome, but you're... absolutely gorgeous..."
"Pleasure to meet you Mei-san," you say with more than a little confusion in your voice. "Is this how you greet all of the most wanted criminals in the world?"
"You know what they say," Mei says as she comes up next to you. "Women love danger. You're a dangerous man, aren't you? And drop the honorifics, we're both adults here".
"I wouldn't say I'm dangerous," you say with a casual smile. "I'm pretty tame once you get to know me. I came here because you needed my help. Anything you know off the top of your head that can help me?"
"I know plenty of things that you can help with," she says evading the question. "But why are you sacrificing your team and yourself for a group of strangers you don't even know?"
"Because that's what I do," you reply firmly. "That's what Team 21 does, that's what we've been doing for years now. Yagura is under Madara's control, and if this continues, the entire world is going to enter a war. It's going to be the next Great Shinobi World War, I'm trying to stop that from happening".
She licks her lips as she paces around you. Obviously, a woman of such beauty is used to getting what she wants. But you're above such petty tactics.
"I think I am going to like you," Mei thinks aloud. "I think I'm going to like you a lot... You're playing hard to get. All business and no fun, makes 21 a dull boy".
You step forward slowly and whisper in her ear.
"Who said I was all business? We can get to the fun later. We're both grownups here. I know that men are your playthings. And why wouldn't they be? You're gorgeous, obviously capable, and I can tell you're extremely intelligent. But sweetheart, you haven't met a man like me before. That's not just some line either, I plan on proving it to you. But for now, let's concentrate on putting that nice little tush of yours on the seat of power. Shall we?"
You lean back and smirk at her.
"You probably deserve to get slapped for that," Mei says with a mischievous smile. "But I won't hold it against you. I admire a man who talks straight. So I'll explain the situation as bluntly as possible".
She motions to a nearby bench and sits down. She starts patting the bench so that you can sit down next to her. You roll your eyes, crack your neck, and make your way over there.
"We're in a dictatorship right now," Mei says. "Many of the people are unhappy with the way Yagura is running things, but they can't do anything about it. There's too many soldiers, and not enough rebel forces. Some people, are happy with the way things are, they want it to stay that way. So removing Yagura won't be easy. You won't be getting any support from the townspeople, whether they like the way things are, or not, they're too afraid to change anything".
"Let's suppose that I go in there, by myself, incognito," you say. "If I take Yagura out of the picture, then what? What kind of support do YOU have? If he was gone, would the people unanimously nominate you for the position? I'm concerned about the backlash this could bring upon the great shinobi villages".
"Yes, most definitely," Mei reassures you. "They would support the change entirely. But, the Yagura loyalists will demand justice and your death. To prevent a civil war, someone would have to pay for the crime..."
"What if I could provide someone to pay for the crime?" you reply. "I have an idea. And I think it's going to work out, easily actually. I just don't know what Madara will do".
"I don't know if Madara is real or not," Mei admits. "But I do know that there's something strange going on. How would you go about making someone pay for the crime?"
"Does the Mist have any enemies? Anyone that would have an axe to grind? And do you have any doctor's in your presence that would do what you ask without any questions being asked?"
"Yes, the Mist has several enemies," Mei says. “There's Kisame, Zabuza, He-"
"Wait, you said Zabuza?" you ask, interrupting her.
"Yes, we've been after him a long time," Mei says. "He's a monster. He practically ruined this village".
"I've seen Zabuza, he's a member of Madara's Akatsuki," you say as you smile. Your plan has just come full circle. "And you have doctors that will just do as they're told, no questions, right?"
She nods.
"Alright, this is what we're going to do," you explain. "I'm going to go in there, transformed as Zabuza. Then, I will proceed to kill or capture Yagura, depending on how much of a fight he can put up. When I do that, I need several people to identify me, as Zabuza as the murderer. I'm hoping to restrain him, so I can get some answers out of him... But if worst comes to worst, then I will need to kill Yagura. If I manage to capture Yagura however, then I will set up a golem to look exactly like Yagura, to take the place of Yagura's corpse. You have heard of my golem style, right?"
"I know a lot about you," Mei says as she looks into your eyes. "You know, you do have gorgeous eyes... Your girlfriend ever tell you that?"
"Actually, I've never- can we stay on track please?" you say as you look at her lips. "Your lips... they're very distracting..."
You both look into each others eyes for an awkward moment. You don't really know what's come over you, but she is just... incredible.
"As I was saying," you continue with a deep exhale as you try to focus. "If I can restrain Yagura, I'll leave a golem that looks like Yagura as the corpse. I need your trusted doctors to pronounce him dead. Then, you'll be the one to capture me, in front of your trusted doctors and allies. At that point, I will once again, create a second golem, that looks exactly like Zabuza, to take my place at the hanging. How does that sound?"
"You are truly a genius," Mei says as she flutters her eyelashes as you. "The legend doesn't do you justice. But how will you defeat Yagura all by yourself?"
"I think I can manage that," you say confidently. "But I do need you to make it so it's ONLY Zabuza there. No confidantes, no attendants, no one can be near him. If they see me fight, they will know for sure that it isn't Zabuza. And because Madara is keeping his identity a secret, he has to put up with my little deception, or else he reveals that Zabuza couldn't have been the murderer, because he was present in the Akatsuki at the time... That's something we won't have to deal with for a long time, if ever".
"I really think it's brilliant," Mei says. "So, how should I ensure that Yagura is alone? I don't know anything about his schedule, he keeps to himself. He's a very private person"
It's never easy is it? ====== Turning Point + Clutch Moment A: Can your rebellion fight off some weak golems I will pass off as bandits? B: Do you have any rebels inside his camp that could do this for us? C: I will speak with my team and see if they can start some anarchy D: I will just have to risk the attack and hope that no one sees me other than you and your doctors E: Free Will
"Mei, do you have anyone on the inside that could help us clear the room out?" you ask curiously.
She looks at you strangely.
"No.. if I did, I'd know Yagura's schedule a bit better don't you think?" she says with a sly smirk.
"Have to ask these questions," you reply. "If I don't get all the information, I can't make an informed decision".
"Right..." she giggles.
How frustrating...
"Well, I suppose I can go with fissure," you think aloud. "That would definitely turn the place upside down..."
"What's fissure? A jutsu?"
"Yeah, I crack a plate in the earth, it splits the earth open," you explain. "If I do that, people will have to evacuate, I just go in while that's happening".
"It's amazing how the legend is so much more than the man," she says as she lays her head playfully on your shoulder. "There are emergency procedures that they run for something like that. It'll remove a lot from the crowd, but his guards will still be there".
"I had thought of that..." you answer softly. She hasn't moved her head... She really smells nice. "But... I was thinking of having my brothers come in and handle... the guards... Make them forget..."
You stop yourself as you look at her, her skin emits a soft glow. You bet her skin would be soft.
"Something got you distracted?" she asks with pursed lips.
"A little, yeah," you say as you begin to stand up. "We've been at this long enough, tell Itachi I'll contact him. I don't want you to risk yourself any longer".
"What a gentlemen," she says as she rises and starts to make her exit.
You grab her by the hand as she's leaving, turn her around and give her a long, passionate kiss.
"I'm not that much of a gentlemen," you say as you briefly remove your lips. "That's just in case I don't make it out of there.. I could be a dying man you know? I hear the hero always gets the girl".
She playfully shoves you off of her. She's biting her lip, trying to contain a smile, but she's clearly failing.
"Well, he just might," she reassures as she exhales. Her face is red. THERE, how do you like being flustered? You think to yourself.
"Oh, and Mei, when this is over, no more mind games. No more beating around the bush. If you would go out to dinner with me, I'd love to take you out. That is, if you're grown up enough to handle a man that doesn't want to play any games..." you say with a confident smile as you walk away.
You go and sit back down on the nearby bench and wait a bit before contacting Itachi again.
"What did you do to Mei?" Itachi asks you.
"Hmmm? What do you mean?"
"She's literally floating on air right now," Itachi states. "Did you? Nah, you wouldn't. Not in the middle of a mission. Would you?... Did... Did you nail Mei?"
"No way bro," you say, shocked he would even ask that. "I just gave her some of her own medicine".
"Ahuh... She said you needed to speak with me, what's the plan?"
"I wanted to talk about that," you mention. "That genjutsu, is it always on, like back at the village? Remember?"
"Yeah, I know what you mean," Itachi informs you. "But no, I don't think it is. The problem is, he can cast it from anywhere it seems. We don't have to see him or anything. So I've been forced to shield everyone constantly".
"Now that makes sense," you say as the pieces come together. "How risky do you think it would be lowering your genjutsu while I attack Yagura?"
"It could be anywhere from not at all to asking for your own death," Itachi states. "If Madara is still here, which we have to assume he is, he can very easily cast it again. At that point, we won't know who is on our team, and who isn't. Bro, you've been gone a long time, but Madara hasn't forgotten about you. No one that knows you thought you were dead. The people who never met you merely thought you were a rumor to begin with. But anyone who saw you fight, they knew you wouldn't be killed so easily. Madara is going to suspect it's you, or at least suspect us if you attack Yagura. We can still come in and fight, but don't expect much from me, I have to maintain this genjutsu".
"How's Sasuke's progression come along?" you ask. "Could he genjutsu memories away from someone?"
"That's child's play 21," he answers you, almost insulted. "Sasuke and I... well... We are very different, even though we're brothers and share many of the same jutsu... His Susanoo has changed as well... His lust for battle is nearly limitless. He's changed significantly, but he still loves all of us very much. He just kept pushing himself harder and harder to be stronger than us. I'm not sure he's mature enough for a sensitive mission like this".
"How's that?"
"He can easily genjutsu the memories away from whomever you needed," Itachi explains. "But it's been a chore to keep him in line lately. Like I said, his Susanoo has changed, it's taken on the form of Kagutsuchi... When Sasuke gets angry... it wraps around him, and anything near him is charcoal".
"What? How did that happen?"
"I think it's the EMS," Itachi explains. "It's changed our core techniques, empowered them. But his is very destructive, and he is prone to using it even if unnecessary. He thinks he is dispensing justice.. His Susanoo takes on the shape of Kagutsuchi, it wields the Spear of Yomi. The tip of that spear burns hotter than Amaterasu itself... It's not something you want out in this type of operation".
"Wow... we definitely need to have a long talk about how much things have changed," you suggest as you go back to your possible list of options. ==== Clutch moment A: Fissure the place and FGG everyone in. Itachi can't fight, and hopefully Sasuke can keep his head cool B: Use the Scout Bugs to cast Insect Swarm on everyone in Yagura's palace (700 chakra) C: Go into the palace henged as Zabuza, but use Lion's Roar, and amplify it to make sure it's heard throughout the palace D: Use Golem Manipulation to build a cell to box in Yagura, then FGG in there with him E: Free Will
"We're going to have to improvise," you say in frustration. "Have the rebels create a distraction outside the palace. Maybe they need to attack the guards, I just need to make sure no one sees me fight, or they'll know it's not Zabuza".
"You can't create a distraction yourself?" Itachi asks in surprise.
"We're on a time issue, and this is the only thing I could come up with," you answer, still frustrated.
"We're running thin, what are they supposed to do?"
"The plan stays the same," you instruct. "Just have Mei ensure that she and several doctors can verify it was Zabuza that atttacked and killed Yagura. I'll leave a golem corpse, they need to destroy it right away. Then she needs to verify the golem substitute I leave behind posing as Zabuza gets hung immediately and declared dead. Or she could just destroy the golem and have the doctor declare Zabuza dead too. The point is just to make sure that we don't get blamed further".
"I got all that part of the plan," Itachi answers. "But why send the rebels to start a commotion outside? That's not going to get us anywhere, just going to endanger even more people".
"Like I said, that's all I got".
"Did you come alone?" Itachi asks.
"No, I have Jiraiya, Naruto, Ino and TenTen with me," you inform.
"And they can't do anything?" Itachi asks in surprise.
"Yeah, they could I suppose," you say hesitantly. The idea never entered your mind. ====== Clutch Moment A: Have Jiraiya create a distraction by creating a huge SotU B: Have Naruto summon a mass of Shadow Clones to overrun the guards with taijutsu, (While henged as Haku) C: Have Ino walk by the palace, and use her Mind Transfer jutsu on a guard and then start a riot like that D: Have them all henge into different forms and attack the palace together E: Free Will
"Sorry Itachi, it's a necessary step," you inform. "I'm just trying to see if you could handle the reins. Didn't mean to throw you too far into the loop... I do have a plan though, and I need you to tell me how the kids will handle it. You have spent more time with them than I have after all".
"Alright..." Itachi answers with a curious stare.
"I'm going to have Ino use her mind transfer jutsus," you explain. "Hopefully on a higher ranking guard. She should be able to evacuate the palace that way".
"That will work well I think," Itachi replies. "Ino should fill in that role well. If you see a need, we can press my team here also. I would just rather avoid that... They're tired and in need of rest".
"I understand," you answer. "I hope to finish the operation tonight. Let me take care of somethings... Keep your ear to the ground".
Itachi nods and disappears. You emerge from your jutsu and explain your plan to the crew. Ino is ecstatic that she can be useful to you. TenTen seems a little jealous.
You all prepare and set up near the palace. Ino exhales deeply as you point out the guard, who is obviously higher ranking than the other. Jiraiya restrains Ino's body, which immediately collapses to the ground. Not what you were expecting. After a couple moments, Ino comes back to you and says:
"We're on, they bought it. They think there's a training session involving the kage. This Yagura guy has been trying to learn all sorts of things. He's trying to master this guard's jutsus. Maybe he's not as tough as we thought".
You take this into consideration as you head into the guard and mimic the Hidden Mist jutsu with Golem Manipulation. Yagura is the only one in the building. Yet you hear a familiar tone from a strange voice.
"You cannot fool me, 21," Yagura speaks with a voice and tone that is not his own.
There is something going on here, you're just not sure what it is. ====== Turning Point + Clutch Moment A: Engage him with the Wind Catcher hoping to neutralize his probably large chakra reserves B: SotU the area to further improve your speed C: FGG him and yourself to another area. Leave a Golem clone for both you and Zabuza D: Summon L E: Free Will
You waste no time in summoning your Shadow Clones. Such is your speed and proficiency in your jutsu that you seamlessly make your handseals and finish your jutsu before Yagura has any idea on what to do. Your Shadow Clones appear next to you, immediately casting Crystal Golems. They come out literally a fraction of a nanosecond later. They're more powerful than their usual brethren, and immediately begin to attack Yagura.
Yagura still hasn't been able to react, he hasn't even noticed that one of your golems has shattered his left ankle already.. Your speed blurs time and space and turns it into a suggestion. Your technique is unrivaled, and you've broken reality. You even have time to reflect back on how much faster you've become, Yagura still hasn't done anything. Your training has made you so fast, you can definitely move onto a second jutsu, what would best complete your second action? ====== A: Summon L to get even more actions out of your speed B: Lightning Lion Yagura C: Use Lightning Force on Yagura D: FGG around the battle and set Lightning Traps all around him. He won't be able to move without getting hit
You concentrate your chakra into a focused ball of energy in the middle of both of your hands and charge up the lightning. You hold it tight and let loose an arc of Lightning Force onto Yagura and the Crystal Golems, to ensure you hit your mark. The golems shrug off the technique. You command your golems to break his limbs and grab his neck, they do so immediately. You grimace as you see Yagura's neck change shape... He turns into a strange, almost liquid type ooze and falls onto the ground.
You look at him in shock. It's not a substitution jutsu you've seen before... Is this the result of an experiment?
You're not sure you got your man, but you're not sure what to do with this development, but you have to decide, you don't know what's coming. ===== A: Approach him cautiously and analyze this ooze more thoroughly B: Hit him with Lightning Force again C: Crystal Prison him, for all you know this could be a contingency plan D: Advise the golems to beat on the oozy mass, see how it reacts
Concerned at this new development, you order your golems to use incinerate on the gooey puddle of flesh. It gets completely vaporized from the jutsu.
There's definitely something off here...
You've become extremely powerful, but that was too easy... You suspect Madara's treachery is somehow in play, even now.. Although while you've been training, Madara has certainly been preparing as well, he can't possibly have matched your battle prowess... Could he?
You still don't approach the area as you ponder this situation a bit more...
You furrow your brow in concentration, standing still as if to avoid waking a sleeping dragon. You look at your golems who turn to you, in your head you hear a collective voice.
"Orders" your golems ask.
You're not sure... That just went... way too easily. Could it be a clone? You scan the area, still not moving with Nature's Vigil... you don't detect any chakra in the area...
You begin to take a step back before you double over in pain. You feel yourself dry heaving, as you see a Zetsu clone come out of your shoulder. He smiles at you evilly.
"21, I find your lack of foresight... discouraging," the clone says in Madara's voice.
You continue to dry heave, you can't move your body. In between your coughing fits, you notice Zetsu is eying you like some sort of meal. His form is starting to destabilize. You notice that his body falls out of you. You're still coughing as he spasms on the floor.
"Your body... it's changed," Madara's voice struggles to say. "Your body is rejecting Zetsu? How is that possible?"
Your vision blurs as you start to stand. Zetsu's face is emotionless as he merges with the ground under him.
Mei and crew rush into the palace as you pant and catch your breath.
"Viral warfare," you say, panting. "He managed to overcome my regeneration, but only slightly and for a moment... That's not good enough. And I think I need to do some bloodwork on myself.. I have to compare my current genetic state with my last samples".
"What just happened?" Mei asks in shock. "Is Yagura gone?"
"I'm... not sure he was ever here to begin with," you answer honestly.
"We have seconds at most, what are you going to do?" Mei asks in obvious concern.
That's right... You need to leave the golems to hang... but is the plan still safe? It would seem Madara got what he came for... You suspect he probably wanted a glimpse at your DNA... but how did he manage to pull off that jutsu? That jutsu Zetsu used was almost instantaneous, but it wasn't faster than FGG... Could he have done it under the cover of the blast from the golems? None of this makes sense...
"21," Mei says as she grabs you by the chin. "Are we going on with the plan or not?"
Damn... If he got what he wanted, he can definitely make a safe retreat... But he could just as easily, turn your plan on its head, and make the entire situation sour, further incriminating you and besmirching your name worse... As if THAT were possible. ==== A: Complete the plan as planned B: We need to change the plan, something's not right C: Mei, you decide D: Free Will
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:19:30 GMT
You look at Mei with uncertainty and blink your eyes to wet your dry eyes. You're not sure on what to do... You see Mei is screaming and motioning towards you and her team. She's trying to calm down the doctors with her. All of this is happening in slow motion, and you don't even hear any audio.
And then... you remember. An image of Master Shishi appears before you, you shake your head in disbelief.
"Shishi-sama?" you say in disbelief.
Mei looks at you as if you're insane.
"Cub, what was your final lesson?"
"My final lesson?" you say as you try to think and reflect back on his teachings. "That there are things that are completely out of my control..."
"You cannot plan for everything my student," Shishi's projection reminds you. "The true Lion Heart remembers this, and makes his decisions with pride. Courage, to hold yourself true to these decisions, to be ready to face your decisions regardless of what happens. Are you not the Tensei? Are you not the one who will change the world, forever?"
"Thank you master," you answer reverently with a bow. "I had forgotten your teachings... Very important as they were... I will endeavor to never forget what I've learned from my past, and what mistakes or stumbles I have made will serve as personal advisers to me so that I never falter again".
Shishi smiles and disappears.
"What are we doing 21?!" Mei asks as she grabs you by your hair.
"My apologies," you reply. "I had forgotten an important lesson. We're going through with this".
You make every preparation and FGG out of there and henge back to your normal form. You meet Jiraiya and crew out of the building and hear the anarchy inside the building. You use Nature's Vigil and see that the plan is working perfectly... Now to wait.
But you will wait as Shishi-sama taught you. With pride and courage. Steadfast in your decision and ready to face any consequences.
After the incident, Itachi's team shows up and you have a joyous reunion. Itachi informs you that he thinks Madara is gone, and you fill him into the particulars of what happened.
"That would explain why he left out of here in such a hurry," Itachi states.
"Yeah, I guess he didn't get what he wanted," you say. "Not mostly anyway. But he did learn something about me. I suspect he realizes my regeneration has improved... As soon as we're done here, we need to do some bloodwork on myself. I need to see if my blood has changed any further from the last time I took the sample".
"It's funny that I'm not surprised that you keep a library of your own blood," Kakashi says with a soft chuckle. "We do have a problem though. That genjutsu is gonna be a real problem for us 21. We can't keep being held down like that".
"He's right," Itachi adds. "One man was effectively able to neutralize almost the entire team. That's a problem".
"You're damn right it's a problem," you say as you grimace in frustration. Your thoughts are racing. "I need to think about it. Itachi, do you think it's safe for you to rest now?"
"I don't think he's going to make another move, not so soon," Itachi replies.
"Yeah, I doubt it," Kakashi adds. "He doesn't want to make so many moves, not with our team back at full power. He'd be foolish to do so, and he isn't foolish".
"No... no he isn't," you answer, still concerned over whether the plan will work or not. "All we can do, is wait".
You wait the next few days and keep a close eye on the situation. Mei was almost immediately named the next Mizukage. Shortly after the assignment of her position, she immediately declared Team 21 the saviors of the village. Praise was thrown all over you and your team.
But what Itachi had said earlier, was important after all...
How could one man paralyze an entire team of shinobi? YOUR team no less? This was... devastating. You were summoned to the Mizukage's court by special decree.
"Hello there big boy," Mei says to you as you bow. "Where have you been?"
"I was handling things, watching things unfold," you reply with a flirtatious smile. "I was doing the whole silent guardian from the shadows things. I thought you would appreciate that".
"I was under the impression that there was something you had promised me," she suggests. The sexual tension thrown right back at you.
You'd really love to. But you do have a lot of stuff to do. And Madara has gotten enough of a headstart. But then again, the team COULD use a rest... But that doesn't mean you can rest... Ah... Everything is always so complicated. ===== A: I'm sorry Mei... I really have a lot to do B: Sure, tonight? Whatever you'd like to do C: How about tomorrow? I want to take care of some things today now that everything's settled D: Hmmm... I like women of power, so whatever you say I'll take as a direct order E: Mei, can we do this at a later time? People close to me are huge targets. I don't want you to get hurt, for many reasons. Your village finally got the kage they deserve. And if I were to lose you... F: Free Will
You look at all the people in the room and crack your neck.
"Mind if I make a request?" you ask respectfully.
"Very well, one request," Mei says, her anticipation clear on her face.
"Can we talk in private? I'd like to be alone when I say this," you reply.
Mei tilts her head and sighs. She dismisses everyone in the room, and now it's just you two alone.
"You could have had anything in the kingdom, and that's your request?" Mei says with disbelief and disappointment in her voice. "I thought you were done with business. Obviously, you're just a little boy".
"No, I was doing it for your sake," you correct firmly. "We're going out tonight. Someplace nice, I'll pick you up properly, in let's say 6 hours. Just wanted to let you know. And I don't think it's anyone's business what two adults want to do with their time, we don't need an audience".
"But I only allowed you one request," Mei replies mischievously. "You wasted your request on clearing the room, remember?"
"Sweetie... I have textbooks I read over 6 and a half years ago still memorized line by line, page by page," you answer with confidence to match Mei's. "I made the request to not make it a public spectacle. But we're going out tonight. That wasn't a request. I'll be here in six hours, you're going to go out with me, you're going to have a good time, and I'll think about what time I should get you home, I don't want you turning into a pumpkin... Or do I? Not sure yet..."
"Aren't you being a little presumptuous there, Mr. 21?" Mei answers, feigning seriousness. "Who said I would go out with you? Who said you can tell the Mizukage what to do?"
You walk up slowly, methodically, to her and crouch down and place your hands on her knees. Her skin's soft, very feminine. She smells really good... She's pretty irresistible. But you can't let her know that.
"I got it from a reliable source..." you say in a whisper, like a secret. "That I could. This friend of a friend, told me that the Mizukage wanted to stop playing her games. I heard she wanted to grow up and find her king. I figured, maybe I could be that king. And then I look at you, feel your trepidation, notice the anxiety you're feeling, and I can only come up with two things. Either you are into me as much as I'm into you, or you really want me to go... Which is it then, Mei?"
You lean in slowly, switching your gaze from her eyes to her lips every so often. Her lip quavers again. You stop her lips from moving with a kiss, a short, yet satisfying one, and stand up. You bow and turn around.
"I guess I'll see you in 6 hours?" you say, still turned around.
"You better..." Mei says, catching her voice.
You walk out and regroup with your friends. You explain how much work needs to be done, and how you're going to go about getting all of this done. You inform your closest confidantes, Itachi and Kakashi, that you'll be out with the Mizukage tonight, They're both pretty happy for you, although Kakashi sighs at the question of when he'll meet his match.
Before leaving to pick up Mei, you summon L and he gets right to work. You pick up Mei, and show her a great evening. She showed up in this amazing, white dress, it had this top that split in the middle and then, well, yeah, she look good.
Throughout the night however, you were curious as to why she was single. She's gorgeous, sweet, funny, witty, intelligent and actually seemed to be a really good person who cared about her people. After dinner, you took her for a walk amongst the stars outside. You had setup a nice bottle of wine at this clearing you picked out earlier. There, you both talked and talked for a long time.
Eventually, well, gentlemen never tell.
The next morning, you brush Mei's hair out of her face and kiss her gently on her cheek. You leave her a communicator and a note, expressing that this comm was for emergencies and that you would both need to repeat last night. A couple more thousand times. You also explained that there was a lot you had to do, but promised to check on her later, and to not mistake this as one of "those notes". You expressed your sincere happiness while you were in her company, and admitted you wanted to be selfish and continue to be happy... But you explained there were many things that would have to be done in order to prevent Madara from rising to a seat of power.
When you regroup with Team 21, everyone's whooping except for Itachi, Lee, Kakashi, and Shikamaru. Ino and TenTen look furious... but what the hell?
"That's our leader folks," Akisame states whimsically. "He's just like one of those super secret agents from the mangas, no name, just a number. Comes in, saves the day and then gets the girl".
"Yeah, yeah, alright," you say as you finish off the last round of high fives. "Anything new for me?"
"Yeah, we got a couple things to address," Itachi states as he motions to Kakashi, who walks over immediately.
You nod your head and ask L if he's done via Shared Consciousness. He answers in the affirmative, and you desummon all your clones and gain their knowledge.
"Seems like I've got news too," you announce. "Jiraiya, Guy, let's have a small meeting. Randel, Akisame, can you two watch the kids?"
The five of you walk to the nearest place to have some breakfast while you discuss things. Itachi and Kakashi had found out that the Shade village has become a huge power, expanding to be almost bigger than the Leaf itself in two months.
"That's not natural," you state. "That means there's definitely a plan there... But Madara was shocked about Zetsu's reaction to my blood. And when L ran the tests, there wasn't a single difference between the blood sample I collected from after my fight with Zetsu and my previous catalog entry. But I never consider things that easily when we're dealing with Madara".
"There was something else," Guy adds. "It's not something I've been able to verify, it's not something we are going to be able to check on in such a short amount of time. But I heard that the organizers of the bingo books have actually made an alliance to catch us. I managed to get this, and well... it's not good".
Guy reaches into his back pocket and brings out a small red book with black lettering. It's titled, Bingo Book: Team 21 edition. Your jaw drops in shock as you pick up the book. You read through it briefly, but EVERYONE is in there. There's a list of accomplices, known members, known benefactors, known contacts, almost everything about your life and the lives of your family and friends. The rewards for bringing you in... are astronomical.
Your head begins to throb in a dull pain.
"Great..." you say in frustration. "Can I hold this so I can read all of it?"
Guy nods as he takes a sip of his coffee.
"So, the two obvious questions are, how did they get this info and why do they want us out of the picture so badly?" Kakashi asks.
Itachi agrees.
"Yeah... but these bingo books have been around forever," you add. "I've never heard of a bingo book dedicated to a single group. And these bounties on us... Everyone is going to want us dead. How could someone afford these bounties? Guy, is this up to date? I'd guess that Madara has something to do with this, but it's not likely, these things have been getting published for a very long time... And how exactly can Madara afford any of this?"
Your headache is increasing, and you're having flashes of a battle you haven't had. You lower your head as you continue your powwow.
"The guy I got this from said this just came out about 2 months ago," Guy answers. "I figured you'd want to know about the group. It's not likely that Madara had anything to do with this, but, who knows. We don't need new enemies. And the Leaf..."
"Hate to interrupt you with only more bad news," Jiraiya says. "But I did receive word from Tsunade. And we have, not a problem, but a concern, at the Leaf".
"That's fantastic," you answer as you try to figure out the visions in your head.
"The jonin council are accusing Tsunade of favoritism in regards to all of us," Jiraiya explains. "Some of them want her ousted because she has placed so many shinobi under your command, 21. They feel we are crippling the Leaf, by having so many powerful shinobi in one group at a time. They want us to show up in person and explain why we're wasting so many resources".
"All they care about is money," Itachi answers in disgust. "If we could give them a sack of gold, they'd never bother us again".
Everyone's in agreement with this, you know it to make sense. But you'd need a lot of money...
"So, any plans 21?" Kakashi asks you as he narrows his eyes. "What did you want to handle first? We still have to get Madara, I'd prefer not to get sidetracked".
"And I would prefer not to separate our group either," Itachi adds. "If we keep this up, Madara is going to keep us perpetually separated and running different errands while he gains strength and resources. We can't allow that. I wouldn't be surprised if Madara is behind all of these problems, it means we can't hunt him down. If we can't hunt him down, he's running around unchecked. He could just keep bringing new problems to our attention and not deal with us until HE'S ready".
"You alright 21?" Jiraiya asks as he grabs your wrist.
The pain... the images... what do they mean? ======== Turning Point + Start of New Arc, Rewards to follow A: Succumb to the images B: Move out to the Shade and figure out what's going on over there and how they grew so quickly C: Track down the people behind this new Bingo Book D: Report back to Konoha and try to make a deal with the Jonin Council E: Hunt down Madara
End of Arc Rewards
Arc Rewards 1: Grant yourself 5 stat points 2: Make a jutsu cost no chakra 3: Increase your chakra pool to 2200 4: Make Mizuumi able to store 3000 chakra
Karma Rewards 5: Learn, at almost a Master Level, 5 Water Element techniques (whichever rank) 6: Give yourself another Lion Master jutsu (create your own) 7: Expand the amount of Shadow Clones you summon to 300, and give them 100 chakra each 8: Allow your Shadow Clones to enter a minor LM state, whereas L becomes a full LM $: Grant your team members your special surgery. Granting them a 20 stat limit cap, just like you, and gives them 2 to all skill points immediately. (you pick whoever you want, each team mate takes a week to fulfill the procedure)
Experience Rewards 9: Master a jutsu/try to improve a mastered jutsu !: make your body as hard as steel. (weights your blows in taijutsu, and could hurt your opponent who punches/kicks you without enhancing their blow with chakra. Also makes you heavier, for story purposes) @: increase your chakra regen to 25/ 6 seconds
The images swirl inside your head, they're violent and loud. You can almost smell the burning bodies... Were you there? Before you completely black out, you summon L. L should take care of things while you're gone. He has to. You black out, but in a manly way, not in any way that a female protagonist would.
You smell the burning flesh, you see the villain that is war. All around you, the overwhelming presence of despair lingers. You know this place... although, this is not your current life... This is... was... your life.
"21, let's go! The enemy is going to rain down bombardments!" you hear your friend call to you.
You turn to him. You recognize him, it's Kakashi! No... wait... it isn't...
"Sakumo?" you ask unsure.
"21, we're both going to get blasted to hell! Let's go!" he exclaims as he grabs you and rushes you off.
Now you remember... You've always been called 21... No wonder you don't hate the name... It's your name, the only one you've ever had.
"Where's my father?!" you ask as you run closely behind Sakumo, the resemblance to Kakashi is uncanny.
"They're fighting the Salamander now!" he answers as catapult fire rains down upon you. You push Sakumo forward and take the shot straight to the chest.
You fall to the floor and writhe in pain. Sakumo comes over, tilts his head, and helps you up.
"Thanks, that's the second time you've saved my life," he says. "You don't follow the same... strategies that most shinobi follow".
"What's that?" you say as you rub the debris from your chest.
"The mission, we're supposed to be loyal to the mission, and not take the lives of our comrades over the mission," Sakumo explains. "You don't seem too fond of that idea, considering you're the one with the information that needs to be passed on".
"If we all follow the 'mission' blindly, eventually, the mission will cease to be important," you reply. "At what cost does a mission get done? For what purpose? To serve the people? Isn't it counterproductive to sacrifice those very same people in the name of saving them with the importance of a mission?"
You continue to sprint alongside the battlefield, dispatching enemies on sight. People seem truly terrified of Sakumo, whereas they really don't know who you are. You pat your face and notice your face is completely covered in a mask, save your eyes.
"I couldn't ever have imagined you to say such words," Sakumo says as you continue your sprint. "You, who have killed so many in the service of Konoha, you sound like some sort of pacifist right now".
You lower your head in deep contemplation.
"I don't like the killing," you answer thoughtfully. "It's my father... he expects much out of me".
"Father? How could a person designed to solely be a weapon speak such words of humanity?" Sakumo asks as he motions you up against a wall. "You really do surprise me at every turn... When my father was alive, he spoke about the First Great Shinobi World War... I never imagined there'd be a second. But... I suppose that's why your 'father' has given you life. I just can't believe the honorable Third allowed this... But, then again, these are desperate times we are living in".
You nod as you feel a pain swell at the base of your skull.
"Sakumo," you exclaim. "It's my father... he's in trouble against the Salamander. If they don't make it out alive, the Leaf will be seriously injured".
"21, we got the information we came for," Sakumo explains firmly. "If we lose it, a lot of people will have died for nothing".
"You can take it then Sakumo," you say as you hand out the large scroll case. "I've read it over. It's not worth anyone losing their life over. It's just another document dealing with forbidden jutsu... The same jutsu that gave me life".
"What?!" Sakumo asks in outrage.
"It's true, Sakumo," you reiterate. "We're here, only to get the knowledge to build better, stronger versions of me. They don't want their weapons with emotion, or limits. These plans describe a process to create a fearless, mindless, extremely intelligent super soldier. Just like me... but better. I bet Danzo will jump for joy when he has this".
"But... how? Why would the Rain have such a thing?" Sakumo asks in shock. "Why would the Leaf start a war over such a document?"
"The morality of the village depends on the people that live in the village," you answer. "The Third is a good man, but I fear he will be ousted if he doesn't stop waving the olive branch. I suppose Danzo was behind this war... Although I can't imagine how he worked alone... And there's more to it then just the super soldiers. This scroll also references the tailed beasts being weaponized, made mobile, without the need for a jinchuriiki. They even speak of wearing one on your back and gaining all of it's powers. Even a pacifist such as Hiruzen must be afraid of such weapons. I know I am. But we don't have time for this, please! Get these to the Third, I will aid my father!"
"No, I can't allow that," Sakumo says firmly. "Please, reconsider". ==== A: Insist on giving him the documents and you leaving once more, if that fails, FGG out of here B: Ask him to come with you, stress the importance of your father's work C: Agree to go with Sakumo and finish your mission D: Ask Sakumo what he really thinks is the right thing to do E: Free Will
"It's fine Sakumo," you say softly. "I can send them there myself then... I was just hoping to not get you involved..."
"By telling me of your intentions, you have done precisely that," he replies. "How can I possibly carry on now and not be labeled a traitor?"
"What was your mission after delivering that blueprint of carnage?" you ask intuitively. "More violence? For a war you don't believe in? While we debate this, many of our friends, your family, are being endangered. We know that Team Hiruzen is strong, they SHOULD be protected".
"Do you understand what you're suggesting 21?" he asks in surprise. "You'll be branded a traitor. Team Hiruzen had their orders, we have ours. Defying them is high treason. You know the routine as well as I do! You finish the mission, you get your next one!"
"Sakumo... you're a good man," you state honestly. "Although Orochimaru is not what one would call the traditional father, I still feel... beholden to him. He has been kind to me, he has taught me much".
"He's using you 21!" Sakumo interrupts. "Just like everyone else! I'm being used too! We're all... just pawns... The political heads are the kings and queens here, it is our place to silently obey. And if they so choose, to be sacrificed".
"I will listen no longer," you inform, slightly offended. "You can go with, or without me. My choice has been made".
Sakumo looks down at the floor as you FGG the documents to their destination back at base. He sighs as he releases the tension in his shoulders.
"I will be roasted alive for this," Sakumo announces reluctantly. "But... I think it's wrong... what they're doing... They are my village leaders, but... this is wrong. It is forbidden jutsu by definition, yet they are throwing lives away to acquire it. Let's go... you shall have my aid".
You tilt your head and narrow your eyes. You adjust the mask on your face slightly and bow to Sakumo.
"You have my thanks," you say. "If you do not wish to come, you can say I forced myself away from you. They will believe that".
"They might," Sakumo insists. "They might not... I am the guardian of the Leaf's great dark secret, after all... I doubt they would believe me if I said you overpowered me completely, not without some critical injury. And I just got off the mend, I don't want to see a hospital for a long time. But... when we get home, you're buying".
"I know that this mask covers my face Sakumo," you say softly. "But thank you. I will endeavor to repay this to you. Somehow".
Sakumo nods and places his hand on your shoulder. He's ready. You FGG to the point where Team Hiruzen was sent by the elders to try to assassinate the legendary Hanzo. When you arrive, the battlefield is a warzone. You see Jiraiya and Tsunade jumping from rock to rock in a sea of lava, trying desperately to avoid a lethal fall. You find Orochimaru involved in combat with Hanzo. Hanzo exclaims when he notices your presence.
"So... perhaps the Sannin aren't worthy of the name I just gave them?" Hanzo asks dubiously. "I gave them such an honor... huh. Perhaps the more deserving reward would have been to die at my boot heel!"
"Your orders were to never engage in direct combat here!" Orochimaru screams with anxiety, desperately trying to connect with Hanzo. "Sakumo, remove him this instant!"
"No, that isn't happening," you answer. "At least, not the way you all think". ====== A: Help the newly dubbed Sannin fight Hanzo. Use your Golem Manipulation to turn the sea of lava into fiery golems at your command B: Hanzo has wounds all over his body... Use Body Vaccuum to stun his movements and increase his pain C: Fissure the lava away to help the battlefield conditions for Team Hiruzen D: Apologize as you FGG everyone to safety E: Free Will
"Sakumo, do what you can," you say as you make your handseals for your jutsu. "Golem Style: Body Vacuum..."
The air around Hanzo contorts and becomes a blur, even the fire around him is swallowed up in your vacuum. He staggers a bit before getting decked in the jaw by Orochimaru.
Sakumo casts an Earth jutsu, a potent one, you're not familiar with it. But you notice the ground before him ripples and rolls, shaping the very battlefield as it passes through the field.
"Jump!" Sakumo advises to the younger shinobi. Tsunade and Jiraiya jump over and meet up with Sakumo, who catches Jiraiya by the collar.
You make a mental note of that jutsu, it could come in handy, it reshaped the battlefield to suit the needs of Sakumo, in this case, lessening the extent of lava.
Hanzo wastes no time in counterattacking. Except he chose to attack you, the meddler. You try to defend against him, but his blows land quite precisely.
"Jump him!" Jiraiya says as he bares down on Hanzo using Lion's Mane. From under Hanzo's legs come long snakes, aimed at his footing. Tsunade hangs back, waiting for a moment to strike.
Before you can react fully, Hanzo decks you in the nose hard, you imagine its broken. But the Sannin are working on Hanzo, as Tsunade jumps into the air and punches the earth beneath her. Her attempt was aimed at knocking Hanzo's footing, and aiding Orochimaru's snakes in getting Hanzo to the ground.
You hear Hanzo laugh, as an inferno immediately surrounds him, protecting him. It scorches the snakes in an instant, and hurts Jiraiya badly.
"We must flee!" Sakumo says as he turns to you. "We may win! But at what cost?!"
The whole point was to get them out of here... How could ONE man be so powerful that he is taking on an entire team the caliber of Team Hiruzen? You could end the war right now... But... at what cost? ===== Turning Point + Clutch Moment A: FGG everyone back to base B: Your wounds regenerate, Hanzo will never see it coming. Be the sacrificial pawn for the Leaf, so that they may live C: Continue the fight, cast Terror Creep on Hanzo and see if you can invade his thoughts D: Free Will
Your responsibility was to save everyone here, and you feel that you can accomplish this. The chance to defeat Hanzo is there, or maybe not, this man has shown himself to be exceeding powerful. Regardless, it's not worth the risk to find out. You FGG around the battlefield and get everyone to safety. Now, back at base camp, the medical-nin immediately rush to the aid of the entire group. Orochimaru pats you on the head before being carried off with the rest of the Sannin. You look at Sakumo and shrug your shoulders.
"What happened here, Sakumo?" inquires a demanding voice. You turn to see Danzo. "Why were these documents delivered without 21? Have you forgotten the importance of his safety?"
"No sir, I haven't," Sakumo replies.
"It was my idea," you interrupt. "So lay off of Sakumo. I can teleport, how is he supposed to stop that? You got your precious war documents, so you should be thrilled. Now shut the **** up, and while you're at it, get the **** out of our faces. Before I teleport you somewhere... unpleasant".
Danzo fumes and approaches you, his face inches away from yours. He stares you down and pokes you hard in the chest.
"Listen here, freak," Danzo starts menacingly. "I don't care how anyone feels about you, you're just a weapon. And weapons don't get to speak to people the way you do, in fact, they don't speak at all. They just do as they're told by their masters. Your irresponsibility leads to a break in the chain of command. And when the chain of command is broken, it gives others the idea to disregard orders too. And that's high treason during war time. Do you know what the penalty is?"
"Yeah, I do," you reply sarcastically. "It's to listen to you lecture me, then it's the death penalty. I feel like I'm being punished by two death penalties here. Can you seriously just shut up and get out of my face before I mess you up? The council might put up with your bull****, but I don't care who you are. You're nothing but another crooked politician. You want to kill me? Go ahead, I'll let everyone know about why YOU and your buddies started this farce of a war. I'm sure the village will be happy to know that their friends and family are dying only because you wanted to strengthen our military might. You know what? It's such a great idea, I'm going to go right now, starting in the medical ward. Excuse me".
You make to leave, but Danzo grabs your wrist. You turn to him, and look down at his hand. You bite your lip before you slug this old bastard.
"The Third has seen fit to treat you with humanity," Danzo whispers softly. "But you're nothing more than an attack dog. And to me, you're not even human. As soon as we get home, we'll get back to poking and prodding. But this time, I'll have extra fun, but it will be for your own good".
"You want to keep that hand?" you ask cryptically as you look down at it again and right back at Danzo.
Danzo turns to Sakumo, still not releasing his grip.
"And what good are you? You're standing there, while I suffer this indignity?" Danzo asks almost at the point of bursting. "You're supposed to keep this rabid beast on a leash, how can you fail so miserably?"
You yank your wrist from Danzo's grasp and push his shoulder to get him off balance. You then grab him by the collar.
"Next time you touch me like that, you're dead," you say menacingly. "You disgust me. You're nothing but a small, feeble worm. You'd love nothing more than to be able to fly, avoid getting pecked by the pigeons that make your kind their meal. You'd rather be a hawk, intimidating the other birds and flying amongst them. But you'll NEVER be that Danzo. You're just a measly worm, and you'll ALWAYS be that".
You back away from him, staring him down the entire time and motion with your head to Sakumo. Sakumo follows you after bowing to Danzo. He chuckles softly under his breath.
"You're going to get an extra bad session when you get back to his facility, 21," Sakumo says as he walks up next to you. "Why do you do these things?"
"I couldn't take him talking to you like that," you inform. "Besides, I don't know why you just don't slam him, at least once. He'd get off your back".
"Everyone would get off my back," Sakumo says with a laugh. "I'd be a dead man".
You make your way to the medical tent and show yourself in. The Sannin are being treated there. Orochimaru notices your presence and stands up. He hugs you and then looks at you grimly.
"You know better than that 21," Orochimaru says scolding you. "You know what they'll do to you if you disobey orders. It's not good for you, they'll hurt you, try to break you".
"Yeah, I know," you reply dismissively. "That doesn't bother me. He can cut and burn me as much as he wants. Besides, you'll protect me, right?"
"Always my son, always," Orochimaru says with a smile. He looks over at Sakumo and gives him the same smile.
You bow and make your way out of the tent, a younger ninja rushes towards you.
"You have urgent news, Sakumo-san," the young shinobi informs. "The Third and the jonin war council wish your presence immediately. They also wished to give you this".
He hands Sakumo a coded letter. You were never taught these codes, but from your self-teaching, you have managed to learn most of the code. As Sakumo opens the note, you read the top line "Keep away from Subject 21 and never inform him of the following: You are to reign in his leash, or it will be your family. If you continue to-
Sakumo rolls up the note and shoves it in his pocket. There was a lot more written on that note... Does Sakumo suspect you know how to read the codes already? You look at him curiously.
"Well, orders are orders," Sakumo states nervously. "I'll be seeing you. Please stay out of trouble".
Sakumo walks away, towards the direction of the war room. ===== A: Seek the Third to speak with him (Select your choice of discussion) B: Return to Orochimaru and ask him if he knows anything about Sakumo's note C: Follow Sakumo using Sightless Presence D: Free Will
You summon L while no one's looking and you each follow your prospective objectives. As you go back to the medical ward, you notice Orochimaru is heading out. He sees you coming and tilts his head with a smile.
"Still worried about your dear old dad, 21?" Orochimaru asks with a chuckle. "Come with me. Let's walk. I can always tell when you're troubled. You don't have to tread lightly around me".
He places his arm around your shoulder and begins to walk with you off the battle campgrounds. As you both make it to the outer perimeter, Orochimaru exhales deeply before turning to you.
"So, what is it son?"
"Do you really see me as your son?" you ask bluntly before you begin your main argument. "I just had a rather... nasty conversation with Danzo. He wasn't his usual chipper self".
"21, we've spoken about this," Orochimaru replies as he places his hand on the side of your head. "You're as close to a real son as I ever could have. I suppose you could say I even love you... It's not easy for a man like me to say these things... I've always been, different. You've seen how I've been treated. I know a thing or two about being disliked by people as well. You think Danzo likes me? No... not at all. And just because your mother didn't birth you like regular boys doesn't mean she's not your mother either. One day, I expect that all couples who can't have babies naturally will use the procedure that gave you life".
"But look at me... I'm only a couple years old, and I'm full grown already!"
"That's true," Orochimaru laments. "I would have enjoyed seeing you torture your mother a bit longer as a baby. But, at least now we can do better things, as adults, together. You saved your precious father's life today, for once. Even though that was very naughty of you. I must admit I'm glad you did it. I don't think we would have made it out of there alive without you. And now we get to be called the Sannin. Although I'm not sure if Hanzo was honoring us, or mocking us..."
"Danzo looks at me like a monster, and I think he's responsible for a rather nasty note Sakumo was given," you begin to explain. "Sakumo is a good man, but I fear that his role as my guardian is going to get him hurt. I don't believe in this war... I'm sure you don't either, do you?"
"I believe in absolute knowledge 21," Orochimaru replies. "I believe that the majority of the world blinds themselves to truths that are scary, just because they are scary. I think we should know these truths, I think they only make us stronger, better, more capable. I think people have to be made to realize that they're wrong sometimes. I don't agree with Danzo's platform, or why he started the war, but I have to agree with gaining the absolute knowledge he's after. But Danzo, he's not a thinking man like us. He's a passionate one. And I suppose that's good, for what it's worth. But it doesn't make for a good leader. A good leader would have kept funding the project that made you possible, so that other people could have benefited from having a good boy like you as their son".
"I'm serious dad," you reiterate. "Sakumo has a wife and child, they made threats on his family. Will you do whatever you can? Can you speak to the Third about it? He likes you, he respects you. Maybe he can protect Sakumo and his family?"
"Sarutobi-sensei is a very powerful man 21," Orochimaru explains softly, his hand patting your shoulder before he returns it to his lap. "But I fear he will be passing on the torch soon. He is getting on in years... Hopefully I will become the Fourth, if I do, your friends and you, will be safe forever. So don't worry, it's a sure thing. Your dad's going to be the big boss around here!"
Orochimaru chuckles and leans in to shoulder bump you. You're a little relieved... but not very.
"When do you think he'll retire?"
"Soon, I expect," Orochimaru states without doubt. "I don't imagine him being the Hokage for more than three or four years".
"That's not soon father," you correct. "That's a lot longer than the time I have to protect Sakumo. He received this note, I'm trying to tell you. It was very threatening. And it was very clear. It said that if he didn't manage to rein me in, his family would suffer for it".
"There's not much I can do right now," Orochimaru admits. "Danzo can have us both killed if he chose. He has that kind of power here. That's the truth people refuse to see. Sarutobi-sensei has failed to see that... He's failed to see that his leniency is making him appear weak. But, if that is his will... I will try to speak with Sarutobi-sensei about it. And now that I think about it... Sakumo's son... is Kakashi right?"
You nod your head eagerly.
"If I'm not mistaken... that's the boy that graduated last year right?" Orochimaru asks as he rubs his eyes. "He's six now I think? A chunin? He's Minato's boy".
"Who?" you ask curiously.
"Minato, he's a former student of Jiraiya-chan," Orochimaru explains. "I'll speak with Jiraiya-chan about it too. Will that make you feel better?"
"As best as it could I suppose," you say honestly.
"Well, be optimistic 21," he advises. "I'll let you know as things progress. Please rest your mind. And if this is bothering you so much, then the common sense answer would be to just play along with Danzo for now. Right?"
You nod your head silently as you look out into the horizen. Orochimaru stands up, pats you on the shoulder again, and heads back to camp. Well... it wasn't everything you wanted... But at least you learned some vital information. Before long L returns to you and merges with you once again.
From L's memories you see him using Perfect Deception on the note in Sakumo's pocket. You realize that it appears Sakumo allowed it to happen, and it was L's impression that Sakumo didn't feel the need to hide anything. While inside the jonin council's war tent, Sakumo was berated and threatened by the jonin council as to his failure in controlling you, and making you obedient.
Apparently, Sakumo is the only person who knows the secrets of your existence minus the people behind your "birth" and the leadership. Sakumo was made aware that it would be his family that would suffer for his failure if this continued, and Danzo did not mince words. You feel horrible... but you never knew all of this...
Your next mission is seemingly of great importance to the Leaf. Danzo stated that the war was coming near an end, and that it was important for the Leaf to establish itself as a powerhouse early on while the other nations rebuilt. Their way to establish this reputation was to have Sakumo and you infiltrate the Sand Village, and capture several of their artifacts. Namely, a scroll for puppet masters and a kiln that was used by the puppet masters of the Sand to create special puppets. The Leaf had suffered much trouble in dealing with the Sand's puppet masters... This order was no surprise, you are just unsure if this is the best time.
"There you are," Sakumo says as he sits next to you. "Orochimaru-san told me you might be here. What are you doing way out here?"
"Just thinking," you reply honestly. "What's up?"
Sakumo proceeds to tell you every detail of the mission, never once mentioning how your attitude has endangered his family. He didn't hold back anything at all... except that... Why is that? You really feel terrible now... He's not even bitter or petty about it. He's just telling you your next mission.
"21?" Sakumo asks, pulling you from your thoughts. "Are you alright?"
"I'm fine..." you lie. "I'm sorry Sakumo. I'm really sorry".
Sakumo looks at you with a slight smile. He knows what you're talking about.
"I don't know what you mean," Sakumo insists, not wanting to make an issue out of it. "Besides, I know we've only been traveling together for a year, but I've come to respect your sensibilities. I suppose I was like that when I was young. But then you get older, and you just, you just go with things. You become cynical and gnarled by the weight of life. It's hard to explain. Just don't let yourself became bitter. Always fight for what you believe in, and protect those you care about. But make sure you can protect those you want to protect, alright?"
"Yes, I will," you promise. Sakumo is truly an inspirational man.
"I hear that when I'm dead and gone, hopefully from old age, you'll still look like that," Sakumo says curiously. "Is that true?"
You nod your head.
"Then do me a favor," Sakumo requests. "You make sure to protect my son and wife if I'm not here. Alright? No matter what, you protect them. Is that a promise between men?"
You extend your hand gratefully. Sakumo shakes your hand firmly. Instead of making a big deal out of this... he's offering you his hand in friendship... Asking you to protect what's dearest to him... Damn... you feel like a jerk.
"I swear Sakumo," you affirm.
"And remember, never make a promise you can't keep," Sakumo says with a chuckle. "That's also part of being a man. A man keeps his word, always. I hope my Kakashi-chan grows up to be like you though... Passionate... strong, intelligent, honest, even a little headstrong. It would be better than the current regime, it values nothing but double dealing and sucking up. But, that's a story for another day. In regards to our next mission, they want us to leave right away. But I did tell them that it might be a while, that I would be leaving the preparations to you, so we have a couple of days. I told them it was in your best interest. After all, being able to come up with a plan is something every good shinobi must excel in. I'm sure you'll do great".
He hands you a notebook with his personal notes and smiles. He points at the notebook.
"These are my personal notes I've taken from previous engagements in the Sand," he explains. "I want you to study this, and come back to me when you have your plan, alright?"
Sakumo stands up, smiles and walks away. You analyze the notebook thoroughly over the next couple days.
The Sand have patrols every hour, with guards switching places every hour to not become stagnant. At night is when their patrols are lightest, but they also consist of the strongest ninja. The other opportunity is right before dawn, but they have more ninja patrolling the village, and the risk to sound an alarm is greater, but you won't be dealing with the most elite the Sand has to offer. Trying to infiltrate at any other time would be suicide.
How do you wish to infiltrate the Sand? ========= Turning Point + Clutch Moment 1: Right before dawn, there might be more shinobi but they're not as skilled, it's the better choice 2: They might be elite, but there's fewer of them. Infiltrate at night
How will you be infiltrating? A: Use FGG to teleport Sakumo and yourself to the highest tower, where the guard is lightest, and proceed your way down B: Use Earth Mover to go in through the underground at the base of the building where the Sand keeps their treasures. There will be lots of guards, but you can stop them from sounding the alarm C: Try to dress up as Sand refugees from the war and hope to make it pass their checkpoints. With the war going on, security will be lighter than normal, and you can always make a better decision when you see the village's interior D: Free Will
The studying and planning you did leads you to conclude that the best way to handle this would be tackling on the guard shift that's on right before dawn. You inform Sakumo of your plan and use Earth Mover to get in there inconspicuously. Just under the foundation of the building, you notice a handful of guards. You and Sakumo emerge from the ground, and quickly engage the guards before they get the chance to sound any alarms. You both tie up the guards that remain alive, and secure the door as well as you can.
The building is a large one, and although the notes said it was three floors, it was really much more than that, it's just that the building has only 3 used levels, the rest is made of stairway and walls.
"All the way to the top," Sakumo whispers softly as you continue up the stairs.
You both continue walking up the staircase and find no resistance, until you make it to the top. At the top, there's a long walkway that's out in open air and it leads to the vault you're searching out. There are two guards at the either side of the vault, a red haired man, and a brunette woman. You notice there's a barrier around the vault door, and you deduce that you must remove the seal on the vault door to enter the vault. However, that means you have to take out these two quickly and effectively.
Any slip up, and the whole village will be alerted. But you have to get to them quickly, FGG might be the only answer here... But then that would leave Sakumo on the other end of the long walkway...
"Wait," Sakumo advises. "Up until now, your plan has worked brilliantly, the true mark of an accomplished shinobi. But you know those two there are guarding the treasures of the village. They must be tougher than the rest. As a ninja, you must always come up with backup plans to your backup plans. Got it?"
You nod your head as you continue your analysis. You've truly learned a wealth of knowledge from Sakumo, and in a lot of ways, he's helped you mold you into being the person you are. You're very thankful to him you think as you look around. You don't want to let Sakumo down. We might not be able to do this... Not without alerting the village... Those two are on serious alert, and you can't linger either, the shifts about to change... The memories of L remind you how dire this situation is... You need to get whatever is in there, for Sakumo's sake. ===== A: It might be best to retreat B: Go back down to the base level and impersonate the guards, hide the bodies underground C: Engage the two guards as quickly as you can. Use L and try to double team one of them while L takes on the other. Use Golem Blade in taijutsu form on their throats. D: SotU GG E: Free Will
"Somethings... not right here Sakumo," you point out. "That's the vault, and it protects several of the puppeteers greatest treasures of the Sand?... It doesn't make sense to only have two guards posted. And that barrier... I'm not sure about this".
"We're on a strict time table 21, you yourself made it," Sakumo says as he looks around. "We don't have the time for this. Are you heading somewhere?"
"Yeah, I am," you say. "I'm going to use my Shared Consciousness jutsu on the guards we have down there, strip their clothes, and we're going to pass ourselves off as them".
"That's about the safest way we can go about this I guess," Sakumo states. "But how are we going to get into the vault? The shift's about to change".
"We'll get to that when we actually get there," you affirm as you head back down to the ground level in full sprint.
You use your Shared Consciousness jutsu on all of the prisoners and snatch up any type of information that can help you. You take their clothing and hide them in a hole you create in the wall. Sakumo and you change into the guard's uniform.
From your jutsu, you learned that the two guards at the vault right now are indeed puppeteers, a married couple, and two of the greatest of the village. And those two things standing guard outside the vault are actually puppets being controlled by them. Which means they're somewhere nearby. The man's name is Togu, and the woman is Megimi. But the real problem is the mother and uncle of Togu. They appear to be legendary amongst this village.
Chiyo is a master puppeteer and poison user, without equal. And her brother Ebiso, the uncle of Togu, is a renowned jutsu specialist with at least 3 elements, wind, earth, and fire. They take turns patrolling the village, Chiyo during the day hours, Ebiso during the night hours. But their first rounds are always at the vault to check in with Togu.
The guard whose identity you stole, does in fact know all four of them, as they interact on a regular basis. But you couldn't find anyone suitable for Sakumo to impersonate. He would most likely have to stay on the ground floor and pretend to be one of the other guards that you locked away.
But that's not the most dangerous part... The worst of it, is that from the guards' collective minds, you gathered that the Kazekage's office would be alerted the moment the vault was accessed. Furthermore, there wasn't a reason under normal circumstances that any guard would need to enter the vault...
So many variables... The true flaw of analyzing every aspect of a plan is that you can see just how vulnerable it really is... But at least you can see them and prepare in advance.
On one hand, you don't want to risk the presence of Sakumo when you try to enter the vault because there is no feasible back story. On the other, you can't help but think this might end up turning sour... If that happens, Sakumo's abilities would definitely be needed. And if Chiyo is half as great as everyone thinks she is, her presence will make this mission really touch and go. Her arrival might even make your mission fail...
If that does happen... Sakumo should be nearby, if the worst case scenario comes up, you don't want to have to FGG out of the Sand and leave Sakumo alone in enemy territory... ====== Turning Point A: Have Sakumo go with you and explain to Megimi and Togu that there was an attack and if one of them would back you up in finding the intruder B: Have Sakumo pose as the intruder, making up a story that there might be more intruders C: Leave Sakumo down in the base of the building, and go up to Megimi and Togu alone. Make small talk and see where it goes from there D: Leave Sakumo down in the base of the building, run up to Megimi and Togu and say that he's the intruder, hoping to get them away from the vault's door E: Free Will- Make your Fate
Get Sakumo with you and cast L. Both 21 and L try to take over the two puppets and locate the puppetmasters; when they're found, use a free action to FGG Sakumo to their position.
You inform Sakumo of the plan and the potential risks. Sakumo understands, but he also points out that you both might end up having to take the lives of Megimi and Togu. While you recognize his issue as valid, you hope that it doesn't have to come to that. After all, it would seem that the sole objective of this mission is only to cripple the Sand's forces even further. The Leaf really doesn't need these artifacts, but there is merit in this decision... Still, you don't like the fact that the Leaf's leadership has placed the lives of two of their ninja only to hurt an enemy's military might.
You summon L and link up all three of your thoughts together with Shared Consciousness. You look at L and nod your head. Using Golem Manipulation, you both target different puppets and pull on them. Like a fish on a line, you feel the puppet struggle against you. The puppeteer is indeed competent, trying to follow your movements, mimicking them to make the puppet flow along with your jutsu trying to hide his position.
Inside your head, L says that his puppeteer is above the vault. You deduce that the puppeteer handling your puppet is under the catwalk you're on... This won't be easy...
"Sakumo, head to the roof," you instruct calmly. "There's one below the catwalk, we'll have to handle that later".
You use FGG to teleport Sakumo to the top of the vault and then direct your attention to the puppet you're trying to control. You manage to wrest control from the puppeteer, and smile in victory.
L exclaims in surprise. As you turn to see the puppet L was controlling, you notice that the puppet you were using disassembled itself, as did the one L was using. The puppets' arms and legs expose vicious blades. From what you know from the guards' memories, these blades are likely dipped in the infamous poisons of Chiyo... This could turn ugly.
As all your thoughts are connected, Sakumo realizes what is going on. He informs you that he regrets this but he has to kill the puppeteer before this gets anymore serious. His target appears to be Togu, which means your puppeteer is Megimi... Clever, they both control the likeness of the opposite partner.
You realize that Sakumo is right... Killing them might be the only option... and Sakumo might have the opportunity, but there's no time to delay. Chiyo is coming any second now. Only you have the speed to run towards the vault and remove the barrier with your special jutsu quickly enough to avoid Chiyo... But as you know, that jutsu comes with a price... But if Chiyo comes... it's bad news all around.
What the hell are you going to do? ------ Turning Point + Clutch Moment (only one right answer guys) A: Allow Sakumo to deal with his enemy as he feels, asking him to then take care of the second puppeteer while you use Destroy Chakra on the seal to destroy the barrier without raising the alarm B: Risk the arrival of Chiyo and engage Megimi in taijutsu so that she doesn't run and sound an alarm. She also might be able to aid Togu against Sakumo if given the chance... C: FGG to Megimi and use Golem Blade on her to knock her out D: Free Will
You instruct L and Sakumo quickly using Shared Consciousness. You FGG to the vault and use Destroy Chakra on the vault's barrier. You witness as the seal crumbles up and falls down to the floor in pieces. You feel a sudden pain in your side and you notice your chakra has been crippled to a trickle, just enough to be able to FGG out of here.
Knowing your regenerative ability, you realize that your weakened chakra levels are going to limit your recovery rate. You rush inside the vault, hearing the sound of battle outside. The vault is huge, there are many different treasures here. You look around the vault first for the kiln, that has to stand out if only because of the size. You scour the vault desperately, and you find the kiln. You imagine that the scroll should be nearby the kiln. You search throughout the bookcase that's there, in your haste, you find nothing on puppetry. But there's a lot of bookcases to be searched...
You inform the group of your problems. L has problems of his own, he's been poisoned, and he thinks he's going to "buy the farm". Sakumo has gone to help L, but he is being hounded by his opponent. You've taken too long on this... But you can't fail the mission... Sakumo's family depends on this... If your opponents were silenced, Sakumo and L could help you search for the scroll, and it would go by much faster. Or, you can take the kiln and abort the mission with at least one object captured... ====== Turning Point A: Have everyone gang up on one puppeteer and neutralize them as quickly as possible. This will kill both puppeteers, but you can at least search out the vault with three people. B: Continue searching by yourself and hope to find the scroll C: Abandon the mission and FGG Sakumo and yourself out of there with only the kiln D: Free Will
You explain your battle strategy to Sakumo and L, and you all decide to converge on one target. You chose the male first, hoping to finish him off before Sakumo could be poisoned. You run towards Togu and slide on the floor as his puppet makes a dash at you. The dodge was close, but you gather yourself up from the floor and punch Togu directing in the sternum. He backs up a little after a loud grunt, and you notice L kick his left knee, shattering the joint completely. Sakumo appears behind him and snaps his neck unceremoniously, the remorse clear on his face.
"May you find peace in a better place," Sakumo says somberly.
"NO!!!!" Megimi screams as she manages to regain her footing on the catwalk. She rushes at you with her puppet, trying desperately for revenge. You backflip and send a wave of weapons at her while L uses Lightning Lion on her. She loses control of the puppet, falls to her knees and looks directly at Sakumo, is on now on her left.
She looks down at her wounds that are still steaming from under her uniform. She tries to raise her arm, but she cannot.
"Finish it," Megimi says decisively as she turns to Togu's body, her tears streaming down her face.
Sakumo takes out his blade and impales Megimi straight through the heart, apologizing to her as he does so.
"That's only two more lives taken needlessly because of the Leaf's ambitions," Sakumo states regretfully. "How many more shall fall for this, will of fire? Let's go 21, we don't have time for this".
You hear a shriek as you turn around and see Chiyo there, she's about 30 feet away, and absolutely besides herself with rage. She begins casting a jutsu.
"That's Chiyo! Make for the vault!" you instruct as you and your group run towards the vault.
You all get inside the vault and rush the door closed. Sakumo casts two earth domes, anchoring the wall in place.
"It'll be a while before they can get through, but we're still in a hurry," Sakumo says, not losing his calm at all.
Your group searches for about a full minute before the pounding on the vault door stops.
"That's not good," Sakumo says as he looks through another bookshelf. "Silence in these kinds of situations are not good at all".
"Found it!" L announces as he holds up the scroll. "This really is a shame though. They have tons of stuff here. We could use all of it".
"I was thinking that too," you admit. "I don't know though..." ======== A: Continue ransacking the place while you look for more items that could help you B: Focus specifically for (name a specific type of item) C: Have L cast a Lightning Trap set up to catch up anyone who opens the vault door, and then have him help you search (L's chakra will be needed for FGG btw. If a fight occurs, L will be unable to do anything) D: Forget it, teleport home E: Free Will
*****
"He's been in that coma like state for weeks," Naruto says as he overlooks your body. "How much longer do you think before he's back Pervy Sage?"
"It's only been a week and a half Naruto," Jiraiya corrects. "Who knows what he's going through in there. L is busy patching everyone up with instructions he received from 21 before he passed out. If L is around, 21 should be alright".
"I hope so..." Naruto replies sadly as he turns his attention back to you.
*****
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:20:08 GMT
"We're already here, and we've already done some wicked things," you say regretfully. "We're not going to ransack the place completely, but pick up whatever you can, scrolls, documents, anything that you can carry in your pockets or seal up in your scrolls. Just pick it all up as fast as you can, and then we're getting out of here".
L and Sakumo pick up all sorts of things until they can carry no more, you do as well. You tell L where to FGG the kiln and Sakumo, and you FGG yourself to that point. You arrive shortly before L and Sakumo at the point you asked for, a spot covered by trees outside of the battle camp.
"Alright, by my calculations, L, you should have enough chakra for Perfect Deception," you say as you look around. "That should please the jonin council. But we're not giving them the originals. Lay out everything we have on the floor, then we'll place it all in the kiln, and we'll use Perfect Deception on the kiln. It will copy everything we just pilfered".
"The kiln is magical and infused with heavy amounts of chakra," Sakumo explains. "Your jutsu can't copy the special properties of it, can it?"
"No, but I don't see much use for the kiln, not for now anyway," you reply. "I do have ideas for it however. I can imagine I could create a golem piece by piece using the kiln, and it would be very effective. But I don't think Danzo is going to allow that. I'll just have to find out where he put it later".
L uses Perfect Deception on everything that you took from the Sand's vault after placing it inside the kiln.
"Empty the fake kiln, and place all the real artifacts from the Sand into the fake kiln. Gives them the copies," you instruct. "After all, these are just bonuses. They didn't ask for any of this stuff, but I'm sure they can make use of some of it".
Sakumo nods his head, he is in agreement. "Hopefully, this will get me out of the hot water I'm in. It's a shame blood had to be spilled, but... sometimes that happens. We can only hope that the Leaf truly benefits from this and that the future generations that come after us won't be forced to act as we did".
"Indeed," you reply. "You can get that out of here then, I'm exhausted. Actually, let's hide this before we do anything else. I'd like to have ourselves rested before we present ourselves to Danzo. We have no idea what he might do. He might even send us out on another mission".
"Very well," Sakumo says softly. "Let's hide this, rest a while, and then I'll take this to Danzo. He won't know about anything yet. He doesn't even know if we were hitting the dawn squad or the night squad. For all he would know, we haven't even gone yet".
"Great," you answer. "Could you move the earth here for me Sakumo? I want to dig and keep this in a secure place".
Sakumo nods and moves the earth with his jutsu, creating a long rectangular spot about 4 feet below ground level. You both push the fake kiln filled with the real documents and the like into the hole. Sakumo then covers the hole as you look around and memorize this location. To be extra safe, you placed a small golem bug inside the hole to wait there for extraction.
You dispel L and camp out for a while, until you have all your chakra back. After your rest, you inform Sakumo you're ready, and you two march to the battle camp with the kiln filled with the fake assortment of documents, scrolls and weapons. You make it to the war tent, and push in the kiln and bow before Danzo. You hate it, but you don't want to risk Sakumo's family anymore than you have already.
"Mission accomplished sir," Sakumo says as he demonstrates the kiln. "We were also able to get some extra things. We thought you might enjoy these. We're not sure of what they are, as we just picked things at random. We were under attack and couldn't search much. We managed to get the kiln and the scroll you requested, so the rest of this can hopefully help the Leaf".
"So I see," Danzo says as he stands up. "You both did well. I'm glad to see that you were able to get this rabid thing under control Sakumo. He can be useful after all".
You grit your teeth in frustration but maintain your bow, if only to hide your expression.
"It's time we test 21 the best way we can," Danzo announces. "He must go on a mission alone, we will see if he can handle himself without his babysitter there".
"But sir, this is not necessary," Sakumo says in your defense. "21 is very important to the Leaf. If he dies, think of all the work that you would have lost".
"It has already been decided, this is the will of the entire council," Danzo announces. "There is nothing further to discuss. Take this 21, it will explain the mission and what you have to do. You seem rested enough. Make sure to head out immediately".
You accept the scroll Danzo offers and bow as you excuse yourself. Sakumo bows and tries to leave, but Danzo grabs his wrist, preventing him from leaving.
"You stay here," Danzo explains. "I can't have you helping him at all, not even words of advice".
"I see," Sakumo states. "Good luck then 21, try not to get yourself killed. I'll be waiting for your safe return. I'm sure you're ready".
You don't know why, but there's something off here. You want to speak, but you'll feel as if you're endangering Sakumo further. You merely say farewell again, and leave. Outside the tent, you open the scroll and read the mission briefing. Easy enough you suppose. They want you to go back into the Hidden Rain village and steal another thing from Hanzo, this time an apparatus that lets you breathe underwater.
Something about all of this seems off. Worried about Sakumo, you wish to finish this mission immediately, and considering that you have no intel whatsoever, now that it's night, this is a good a time as ever. You FGG back to the Rain Village, right outside where you stole the first information from Hanzo. The village has no guards to speak of, not where you're at anyway. The situation is getting more and more suspicious. As you make your way to the room where this item is supposed to be, you can't help but think this doesn't make any sense. This is either some sort of trap or perhaps the Leaf forces hare truly decimated the Rain. Either way, you didn't like the way Danzo gripped onto Sakumo, you want to make it back immediately.
You enter the room after making sure the way was clear. Once again you find yourself in an empty room. Except this room truly is empty, there's nothing here.
"What the hell is this?" you ask yourself as you look around.
"This is what is normally called a trap," you hear an unfamiliar voice as a man in an orange mask walks forth.
"You hid your presence from me, I'm very impressed," you reply as you ready your stance. "That mask is a horrible fashion statement. But then again, you must have your reasons for wearing a mask".
"You have your own reasons for wearing a mask, don't you? 21?" the man says.
"How do you know about me?! Who are you?" you ask in confusion.
"I am but a man who is willing to do everything in the name of peace," the man replies. "I know about you because I helped make you. I've been watching with a lot of interest. My name is Uchiha Madara".
"Uchiha?!" you say, your confusion growing. "Then you must have placed the council in a genjutsu! No wonder Danzo has been such an ass".
"Oh no, that is Danzo," Madara explains. "I never had to use any genjutsu on him. He just has that type of personality, abrasive I suppose. He came to accept my help willingly, once I told him what I could do".
"And what is that?"
"I have been able to manipulate souls, I can even create them," Madara says. "I can change souls to suit my purpose. But perhaps I went a little bit too far with you. Maybe I was being a little arrogant when I helped create you... The Rikkudo Sennin himself... I must say, I was expecting much more out of you Rikkudo-sama, ha ha ha..."
"What the hell are you talking about?!"
"By now you've figured it out," Madara replies. "You will one day come to serve me, Rikkudo. It has been implanted in you even before you were born. And your friend, Sakumo? Well, he's in the way. So, we'll have to take him out of the picture as they say".
"I'll kill you," you state viciously as you draw a shiny, new knife. "Sakumo is a good man, and you have no reason to do this!"
"I do," Madara informs you coldly. "The last time we had true peace was when you were around. Everyone was terrified that the big bad Sage would come and defend the weak people. With you back, we can finally have peace. I was a little mistaken in my time table, certain things matured faster than others... But I suppose that's to be expected when you're pulling souls back that were never meant to be reincarnated... I would have preferred if your ninjutsu abilities would have manifested before your strong will returned, but unfortunately, that didn't happen. So for now, I'm going to need to work on you a little longer... It's unfortunate, Sakumo had much potential... I think I will give him a dramatic death, one worthy of such a great man".
"You won't touch him!" you say as you charge at him.
As you strike at Madara, he phases right through you, and before you know it, you feel nothing. You curse yourself at your own feebleness. You pant hard as you try to stand up from the ground, but you can't. Your heart becomes heavy as you feel the weight of the situation drag you deeper into despair. They're going to hurt Sakumo! The Leaf has been manipulated by this foul villain. You have to get up, you have to!!!
Almost hyperventilating you struggle to your feet and begin casting Lightning Lion. You launch it at Madara who merely laughs as it goes right through him. Your senses are jump started back in your body as he rips open your torso. The black, empty room is now colored in the crimson of your blood. You grip your knife and look at your reflection.
"You're completely useless," Madara taunts as he kicks you in the side. "But we'll fix all of that. Your father will help too".
"Orochimaru knew about this?!" you ask as you concentrate on your reflection, your vision going completely red.
"Of course he did," Madara replies. "All he cares about is becoming Hokage. He just used you as was needed. His abilities were the foundation for your regeneration, well that, and the jutsu we stole from Tsunade. But you know what's really interesting? Your mind can't heal, can it?"
e kicks you hard in the temple. You hear a loud ringing in your ears as you struggle to maintain your balance and not fall to the ground completely. You are on your elbows and knees, trying in vain to not pass out. You ready your knife again, you're about to send this knife right into his chest with your Object Control. But then, something in the reflection of the knife catches your attention. Your eyes, they have changed. They are now a light purple, with several circles in them.
"Ah, the Rinnegan," Madara says. "Now do you understand? You were the strongest ninja in our history. The first. And now, you're merely another tool for me to use. Take peace in the fact that I am still trying to uphold your dream. Peace will come, and you'll help us. And you, you won't remember a thing".
Madara grabs your hand and activates his Sharingan on the reflection of the knife. Damn... You fell for it...
"MADARA!!!" you scream as you wake in the hospital bed. It's your present time... How many more memories are locked up within your mind? Madara was mistaken... luckily. Your mind did heal itself, it just needed time...
But this new found information, what should you do with it? Should you reveal any of this to your team? You notice Naruto and Jiraiya there, smiling as they're happy to see you back. And Kakashi... his poor father...He wasn't disgraced at all, he was set up. You get up and off the bed eagerly.
"Take it easy 21," Jiraiya advises. "You're moving too much, take it easy. You have been out 2 weeks, we don't know what type of damage has been done. And you don't have to worry about Madara, everything's been quiet".
If you only knew what the truth is, you think to yourself. =================== End of Arc Arc Rewards 1: Grant yourself 5 stat points 2: Make a jutsu cost no chakra 3: Increase your chakra pool to 2500 4: Make Mizuumi able to store 4000 chakra
Karma Rewards 5: Learn, at almost a Master Level, 5 Water Element techniques (whichever rank) 6: Give yourself another Lion Master jutsu (create your own) 7: Expand the amount of Shadow Clones you summon to 300, and give them 100 chakra each 8: Allow your Shadow Clones to enter a minor LM state, whereas L becomes a full LM
Experience Rewards 9: Master a jutsu/try to improve a mastered jutsu (Includes FGG, Crystal Golem, Shared Consciousness, and your Regen) !: make your body as hard as steel. (weights your blows in taijutsu, and could hurt your opponent who punches/kicks you without enhancing their blow with chakra. Also makes you heavier, for story purposes) @: increase your chakra regen to 50/ 6 seconds #: Create 4 LM Mode jutsus, any rank $: Grant yourself 8 stat points %: Make Leo cost no chakra to summon
Where do you go from now? A: Explain to the Third you remember the Second Great Shinobi World War B: Speak with Kakashi about his father, explaining to him what really happened C: Track down the Jonin Council, see who is left that committed this treachery. Perhaps they are still spies for Madara D: Call a meeting with the Team and inform everyone E: Start training while L continues the surgeries, you once were able to activate the Rinnegan. Maybe you can do it once again F: Free Will
Having realized that Madara has had decades to prepare for this, you have come to the conclusion that there is a massive war brewing. Madara will not give up his position, and if after so many years he is still hounding and chopping at the bit, he won't stop now. Even if the Rikkudo is back... But your heart goes out to Kakashi. Even though you have known him all these years, you could have saved his father. Had you just been stronger... The only proper thing now is to explain your identity in full to Kakashi first. And then the rest of the team. Your shadow clones can handle the rest of your obligations.
You detach all the wires from your body as you get off the bed. Jiraiya places his hand on your shoulder firmly.
"What are you doing 21? Are you not listening to me?"
"It's not that Jiraiya," you insist. "This is really important. I just had some of my memories come back, and I need to make sense of them. Can you gather up the team? We need to have a meeting, a serious one. Where's Kakashi?"
"He's training with Itachi and Sasuke," Jiraiya says. "What about the rest of the procedures you left in L's care? We're not even halfway done".
"He can continue them," you state, your anxiety about to boil over. "How is everyone handling them? Is everyone alright? Reacting to them well?"
"I guess well is an understatement," Jiraiya answers. "We were told what to expect, but the procedure was... pretty incredible. It takes about two full days per person, but the recovery time is the pain. You just got to lie around, doing nothing. It's a bother. At first, we were all concerned about it, it sounds like a forbidden jutsu. But after we saw Itachi and Sasuke emerge, we knew it was the only way to beat Madara... I don't know about living forever, but, at least we'll have family. And a great, big family at that. It would have been nice to get this a little earlier in my life, but I suppose I can live with being a 50 year old man for the rest of my life".
"Have you had it done yet?" you ask emphatically.
"No, not yet," Jiraiya replies quizzically. "Why do you ask?"
"It's going to place you at the peak of your power," you inform him as you put on your shirt. It's dirty and hasn't been washed... God damn it... Oh wait, someone managed to bring you clean clothes, you take the curse back. You throw the dirty shirt on the floor and pick up the new one. "When you get the surgery done, you'll be back to the age when you were at your most powerful. And you still can get killed, if someone removes your head for a while, you're a memory. Please, you have to be careful until I can perfect the procedure. You won't be 50 for the rest of forever. Naruto won't likely be 14 forever either. You'll grow up until you're 19 or so I'd wager. At least until your body stops growing".
"Hmmm, peak power huh?" Jiraiya says with a smile. "That's probably right now. But we'll have to see. That clothing by the way, you should thank Mei. She is the one that came by and prepared that set of clothing for you".
"Is that right?" you ask unsure.
"Yeah, you should speak to that woman if you know what's good for you," Jiraiya advises. "Trust me, a woman like that, you don't want to make angry".
"I'm sorry Naruto," you say in earnest. "I wish we could have more time to talk, but I really have to see Kakashi. We'll meet in a couple hours".
"L just got finished with today's surgery," Jiraiya informs you as you walk out the door. He follows you briefly. "Today Guy went under the knife, yesterday it was Akisame. So far, Itachi, Sasuke, Akisame, Guy, Randel, and Kakashi have completed the procedure".
"Alright, and Guy came out fine right?" you ask as you stop mid-step.
"Yeah, good as new".
"Alright then, nevermind calling the group, I'll use my jutsu," you state. "Guy should be well enough to hear what I have to say".
You cast Shared Consciousness and find all your group members. You inform them that there is an extremely important meeting, to be held in your quarters at the Hokage mansion. You might all be a little cramped in there, but at least it's safe there. You ask that they give you two hours and then meet you there. You get an emphatic yes from everyone. You then give your farewells and then speak to Kakashi alone inside his mind. You ask him to meet you privately in your quarters as soon as possible. Noticeably concerned, Kakashi agrees and makes his way there immediately. You take the time to cast your Shadow Clones so that they can handle your other odds and ends. Namely, digging up that treasure you hid outside the battle camp, informing Sarutobi, and speaking to Konoha's younger generation. You meet up with Kakashi less than ten minutes later.
"I have something important that I wish for you to know," you say sadly. "It's not a tale I am happy to tell, but I believe in honesty. I also believe that you are a brother to me. Everyone on Team 21 has become a family really. But I can't help but hold a special place in my heart for you and Itachi. That's why what I have to say is going to be... very hard for me to explain".
"Alright, I'm intrigued," Kakashi admits as he sits back in the chair. "What can possibly be so bad that you have to set it up with a disclaimer like that?"
"It's about your father, and I know it's a sensitive issue," you confess. "I don't think anyone in your position would want to hear another person speak of your father, but what I have to say is important. And I want you to understand that I only found this out now, in my latest spell".
"You mean your little black out episodes?"
"Precisely," you reply. "This one was longer than normal, because the memories I was going through were much more vivid, it's like I was living them a second time... Your father... he... he was my first friend".
Kakashi gasps and sits forward, now eagerly hanging on your every word. You inform him of the situation in a very honest fashion, hoping all the while this won't affect your relationship with Kakashi. At the end of your story, Kakashi weeps a single tear. You stare at him, your eyes watering up, you're not quite sure if this was what was best... But he deserved to know.
After a short while, Kakashi silently stands up and stares at you, before hugging you.
"I never told a single person this," he says. "But I want you to know that I'm glad it was you. I'm glad my father knew you. And I'm glad you made good on your word. But promise me, please, you... you PROMISE me. We'll get this son of a *****. You PROMISE ME THAT. This is information that I know can never be released from our group, and so my father will never have redemption. My mother was murdered... and my father's suicide was a sham... Everyone will believe that for the rest of eternity... But you can't let Madara do this to anyone else, ever again".
"Then that's how it will be, I promise you Kakashi," you swear without hesitation. "For now, we have to keep all this under wraps. If people are angry about people claiming me to be the reincarnation of Rikkudo, they'll absolutely flip when they hear that I am claiming that I am the Rikkudo Sennin".
"It's a big deal," Kakashi says nonchalantly. "I had my suspicions for a while, I'm not surprised".
You narrow your eyes and look at Kakashi questioningly.
"You're not surprised that Madara can manipulate and create souls?"
"21, look at what we have been able to accomplish in these last 6 and a half years. Does any of that make sense? You can summon the 11 tailed beast, a beast we didn't even know existed. How can any of that seem unreal after all we've been through?"
"You're right I suppose," you admit. "I'm sorry to take up your time, especially with such sad news. You can go back and continue your training with Sasuke and Itachi if you want".
"I'll wait here if you don't mind," Kakashi states. "We only have a little bit of time before the team meets. And I'd rather just... talk about my father if you don't think it would bother you".
"Not at all," you answer sadly. "He was a great and powerful man, his memory deserves recognition and honor. Ask me anything you'd like to know".
"I have thousands of questions," Kakashi replies. "But before I forget, I would suggest that we have a huge training session after L is done with the team. Just between Itachi, Sasuke and I, we have several new jutsu that bear significance. And you need to know about them... It's to your advantage. And if Madara really has the ability to control souls, then who knows what he could do? What if he is able to manipulate the Reaper himself? It wouldn't seem odd, would it? He's basically denying the basic nature of what the Reaper exists for".
"You're right..." you add. "I never thought of that... but that's a very real possibility..."
And so you and Kakashi spoke for as long as you could about poor Sakumo. Kakashi seemed genuinely moved, and this thrilled you. It was a horrible shame that he had to die in such a way... Before long, the entire team was gathered up, and you explained the entire dilemma to them. Many people were surprised by your claim to be the Rikkudo Sennin. Others, like Itachi, Kakashi, Sarutobi-sensei, and Shikamaru, were not surprised at all. This perplexed and disturbed you, all at the same time.
"I'm not surprised at all," Itachi states coldly. "You're an Uchiha. It would only make sense for you to be reborn in the bloodline of one of the two clans".
"I've never seen power such as yours," Sarutobi-sensei adds. "I don't find it hard to believe. They called me Shinobi no Kami. And your skill dwarfs me at my peak by at least threefold. Not to sound arrogant, but I don't find it surprising to be outclassed so easily by the Rikkudo. The true puzzle now, is how do we maintain this secret".
"Yes, and are we supposed to start calling you Rikkudo-sama?" Guy jokes. He pauses as no one really laughs. Except Naruto. And he's laughing at Guy's awkwardness. Guy slinks back into his seat.
"I'm happy to see we're in good spirits, heh," you say. "But what do you feel we should be doing?"
"I think Kakashi has an excellent point," Guy replies. "We need to train harder than ever! Vitalized by the fact that we're training under the Rikkudo Sennin himself! Besides, Madara is training his men, working on their unity. That's easy to see in their team work. We need to train ourselves together. We have a ton of new abilities that can't go on untested in the field. We'll be screwed if we run into the Akatsuki. They know each other well and what they can do. Do we really want to know our limits WHEN we have to depend on them to survive?"
"That's certainly true," Sarutobi-sensei affirms. "I can see the sense in that".
"I agree," Itachi announces reluctantly. "It's important, but I'm still adamant about my opinion. We can't afford luxuries right now. Training is a luxury at this point. We'll have to learn as we go, or else Madara will be setting up more distractions, and we'll never get to him directly. Right now, he could have a dozen or more safehouses, and how are we supposed to bring him down when he can just move from place to place?"
"But how do you stop that phasing 21 mentioned?" Kakashi argues. "We can act like we know what to do when he uses that jutsu, but we really don't. And we can't continue relying on 21 as a one man show. Madara might not be as powerful as 21, but he's the one making the moves. We're just trying desperately to keep up with him, and that's not cutting it. He's got these ridiculous shinobi running around, doing as they please, that has to come to a stop".
"I believe the Rinnegan is the answer," Sarutobi-sensei suggests. "The Rinnegan is a legend, but it was described vividly. It was stated to turn the tide of war. And with 21's susceptibility to genjutsu... it might be the only way... We might just have to take the chance in training 21 to use the Rinnegan".
"With all due respect sensei," Jiraiya interrupts. "There's no way any of us can help with that. 21 would have to dedicate himself to it, and we don't know how long that would take. Kakashi and I have spoken about it, albeit briefly, but we both believe that the Rinnegan is either a myth or a mutation. With 21 stating that it isn't a myth, then perhaps it IS a mutation, a genetic offshoot that wasn't occurring naturally in nature. We wouldn't be able to help him. He'd have to do that all by himself".
"I hate to get caught in this drag..." Shikamaru starts with hesitation. "But haven't we forgotten about the Jonin Council? They still might be hurting us as we speak. Are we just going to let that fly? Sounds like they need to be checked... And we can't reveal our hand now either, they'll get wise to our act, and Madara will nail us".
"Plus, am I the only one that's worried that Madara can manipulate souls?" Shikamaru questions thoughtfully. "What if he is able to destroy souls? Where do the limits start? Are there even any limits? Why would Madara be letting 21 roam free like this? None of it makes sense. If 21 was such a threat, Madara could have easily neutralized him if he wasn't lying back then".
The group looks around at one another before their discussion is lowered to a dull roar.
"What about those plans?" Naruto chimes in, to the great shock of everyone. "I don't want more people suffering! If 21 stole those plans, then they got stolen back right?! Well, do you guys really want to fight an army of 21's?! That's insane! Madara's already made an army of Zetsus, do we really want to forget about that?! What if he makes an army of 21's? Super-ninja guys, with 21's abilities.... It's a scary thought..."
"The boy is right, although a bit over-enthused," Akisame states. "That scroll was most likely the one Orochimaru was after when your village was attacked. I for one do not wish to fight a 21 clone army".
"As always, the decisions rests on 21's shoulders," Sarutobi-sensei says with a deep sigh. "I'm sorry my child, the pressure seems to always be on you. But what will you do?" ====== Turning Point A: Go with Kakashi's plan B: Go with Sarutobi's plan C: Go with Itachi's plan D: Go with Naruto's plan E: Go with Shikamaru’s plan F: Free Will
"I have to agree with Itachi on this one," you announce after some internal debate. "We really can't keep up like this. Every time we make a move, Madara has made 4. Every time we shut down an operation, we find out there are 3 other ones. Right now, we have so many objectives, there's no possible way we can get anything done this way. We still have this bingo book to deal with. The jonin council has been sabotaging us for decades. I think if we tackle that issue, it will help us in the long run. It would certainly explain why we've been running into walls for so long. Frankly, I'm pretty pissed off about it".
"Yes..." Itachi says with an expression of frustration. "The worms have dug themselves in deep. To think they have been working with Madara for such a long time..."
"The situation is heinous," Kakashi states. "I've thought about this before, but I really got to stress this. We're each others weakness. Madara is exploiting this".
"What do you mean Kakashi?" you ask curiously.
"We're at our strongest while we're together," Kakashi insists confidently. "There's no question about that. But we're also at our weakest. Think about this for a sec. When we're together and out, we leave the village relatively unsafe. When we encounter Madara in the field, he is working with smaller numbers, yet he's succeeding more often than we are. When we're together, we care too much about one another. Your idea with the surgery has definitely helped us. We can rush in with more confidence now, and that's a huge factor. We don't have to worry as much about losing a family member anymore. But I'd like Madara to not know about this. It's best if Madara continues to think he can abuse our love for one another by endangering us, we can definitely use that as a moment of opportunity".
"I see what you're getting at," you reply as you place your fingers to your chin. You scratch your forehead before continuing. "This is really, really aggravating. We can't let Madara know about the surgeries at all though. If he were to get to any of you, he could very easily reverse engineer my procedure. We don't want that, we can't even handle that. Which leads me to my decision..."
The room's inhabitants sit up firmly in their seats as they ready themselves for your instructions.
"Itachi, I know you don't want us to separate the group," you inform. "Kakashi, your opinion is very important to us. I agree with what you're saying. To me though, we have to pick between the lesser of two evils. Right now, we have at least a dozen objectives, and if I were to make a guess, I bet there's at least two dozen more that we don't even KNOW about yet. So, to combat that, we're going to do a couple of things. I will be making clones who will be concentrating on scouring the entire land to find out as much information as they can. Our relationship with the other major villages has gotten so well, that we can be certain that if we find an outpost, or a village that has ANY type of barrier, we can bet it's Akatsuki".
"No arguments there," Akisame agrees. "Speaking from experience, I wouldn't be surprised if Madara has 50 more villages just like Bellhelm under his thumb".
"L has to continue the surgeries anyway," you rationalize. "So, during this time, I'm going to have other clones working with the team members that feel up to training. We need to see what these surgeries can allow you to do. I'm sure you've all felt increased proficiency in your jutsus after the procedure. I need to know exactly what you can do with your newfound powers. Itachi, we need to become immune to Madara's genjutsu. This is crap brother, we can't continue like this".
"21, I don't know what to say," Itachi replies, his disappointment is clear on his face. "I know it doesn't make up for anything, but I couldn't do more than what I did at the Mist".
"No, that's not what I mean," you correct. "I'm saying we can't keep falling for his genjutsu. There HAS to be a way to resist it, without half killing you. I'm not critiquing your performance at the Mist in the least. I'm sorry you felt that way. I'm just... really pissed".
"There is one thing that comes to mind," Itachi says as if an idea is about to escape his grasp. "I'm not sure if it will work, but I think it should. The Rinnegan. The legends spoke of it, no one believed it because of how long ago the last reported case was. But, if the Rikkudo Sennin gave the Uchiha their Sharingan, then it's only natural that the Rinnegan could outclass its progeny. The Sharingan is the Rinnegan's son after all".
"It might just be a mutation Itachi," Jiraiya argues. "Can we really trust so much to a technique none of us know about?"
"It might be our only chance at becoming immune," Itachi adds softly. "I'm merely going over possibilities".
"I agree with Itachi's supposition," Sarutobi-sensei concurs. "It's at least a step in the right direction, and if nothing else, it will at least eliminate another possibility. We can continue working towards our goal if we fail".
"Sarutobi-sensei," you begin. "I'd appreciate it if you and Shikamaru work on uncovering as much as you can about the jonin council's plot. I'll be working on ideas with Itachi when the time comes. For now, let me just reiterate our concerns. They're becoming so long, we should really keep a list... Really... really aggravating... We have the bingo book people making an edition just for us. The Shade Village has grown to ridiculous levels of power in a very short amount of time. The jonin council was accusing Tsunade of favoritism, NOW we know why. I bet if we had paid the jonin council off, they would have directed it right back to Madara... We also have to figure out some way to activate my Rinnegan, if I do... Well, we'll get to that when we actually get to that point".
You sigh and look around the room. Nothing but looks of concern and gloom.
"Come on everyone," you say, trying to be optimistic. "We'll beat Madara. We just have to be smart about it".
You hear a knock at the door, and then it opens up. It's your clones with your buried treasure. Hardy Har Har!
You pick up the kiln and empty its contents onto the table. Most of the material is puppet jutsus and earth style jutsus. But there is a very nice looking knife amongst them, a dagger that appears to be weighted enough for both throwing and melee combat.
"You guys take the day off," you say hoping to alleviate their dejection. "I don't want to see us with such low morale. I'll be examining these things, and handing them out after I analyze them further".
"I don't need rest, I need answers," Sasuke says as he stands up. "Madara is disgracing the Uchiha name, and making the Leaf look like gutter trash. We gotta finish this, he's hurting tons of people. I'll be training".
Sasuke makes to leave the room without another word. Everyone follows Sasuke with their gaze as he stops at the doorway. Itachi lowers his head and shakes it disapprovingly.
"If training makes you comfortable, puts you at ease, go ahead and do that," you say. The team is obviously agitated, hard to blame them. "But don't let this break your will. Don't let Madara break your fighting spirit".
"I'm tired brother," Sasuke announces. "People are dying. We're getting more and more powerful, yet we can't use our power. We have nothing to answer Madara with. This is complete bull****. I'm sorry, but I can't just sit here as he goes about doing as he pleases".
Sasuke leaves and closes the door behind him.
"I'll go talk to him," Itachi whispers to you as he walks past you.
You nod your head as you look at the rest of the team.
"I appreciate your efforts," you say with hesitation. "I know it looks bad... But we WILL get him. We just have to be careful".
"We know that 21," Shikamaru says plainly as he stands up. "I'm going to do my part right now. If you'll all excuse me, I'm going to start right away".
You dismiss the team and make a surprise visit to Mei in the Mist Village. You both spend the day together.
"Thanks for taking care of me," you say softly in her ear. "I didn't take you to be the coddling type".
"I take care of my man," she says softly back. "I was... worried about you".
"I'm sorry... didn't want to worry you," you inform. "I wanted to ask you something... There's this procedure..."
You explain the surgery and the benefits it will bring. You insist that you want her to do it so that you would never be without her, but she scoffs at that. You also tell her that the risk of Madara is very real... Eventually, she answers you.
"A surgery that will make me live forever, like you huh?" Mei starts. "That's a pretty long time. You sure you're ready for that kind of commitment?"
You smile softly as you look at her eyes.
"I am, are you tired of playing games?"
"No more games then..." Mei laughs and bites her lips before kissing you.
Mei is on board, and she wants to experience the procedure to be with you. She's even willing to fight for Team 21, she wants to. But you can't help but think maybe you should extend the offer to other people, like Gaara and Killer B and A.
After a day of R&R at the Mist, you return home, with Mei on your arm. You introduce her to L and she goes to receive her surgery.
The artifacts from the Sand are all pretty high ranking jutsus, The knife is extremely sharp, and you discovered it's called "Comet", and returns to your hand if you merely think about it. It could REALLY help anyone's arsenal. Everything else is pretty ordinary. How you wish you could have made a golem out of that kiln though...
The next day, your clones come to report that there are 18 different villages in the nearby vicinity. They all have barriers erected over them that prevent further spying on the inner workings of each. By your estimates, the "villages" are just really scouting outposts. They were strategically placed to box in the Hidden Leaf. You could easily wreck the villages, assuming that the Akatsuki aren't there in mass... and that this isn't a trap... ============= The scrolls are basically opportunities for you to create your own mastered jutsu. You can give it to anyone on the team, or yourself. There are EIGHT of them, meaning you can balance out the team, or you can hoard them all to yourself. We'll talk about that a little later. Also, you guys need to decide on whether or not you're keeping Comet or giving it to someone.
For now though, what do you want to do? A: Try to work on awakening your Rinnegan with Itachi B: Help Shikamaru and Sarutobi-sensei in their investigation of the council C: Train with the entire team D: Work on the morale of the team E: Free Will
Noticing that there was something clearly wrong with the morale of the team, you decide maybe you should work on improving that. It's not a factor you can quantify, but it's definitely something that can lose a battle. But in this case... the soldiers fighting are family. And if they lose their cool... You don't even want to think about it.
You first head to Jiraiya and Tsunade as you exit your room for the morning. They're having breakfast together, and oddly enough, they seem like a normal, well adjusted couple. Hmm, you guess Jiraiya finally did tame her after all.
"Good morning 21," Tsunade says as she notices you in the hallway. "Won't you sit and join us? We're having breakfast, but we could definitely get you something".
"I'd appreciate that," you say with a smile as you enter the room. "Nice of you to offer. How'd you guys sleep?"
"Not good," Jiraiya answers almost immediately. "I've been thinking about what you said, and it's a feeling I can't shake. The Rinnegan is... a major development. We might really have peace in our lifetimes. If we could only stop Madara".
"Jiraiya, enough, let's just enjoy breakfast," Tsunade suggests.
"No, it's alright Tsunade," you say as you sit down. "I actually planned to do this today. I need to know where everyone's head is at".
"We've lived through some crazy times," Jiraiya says as he grabs Tsunade's hand. "We're fine, this won't shake the cages of us. We've worked through tougher times".
"No we haven't," Tsunade admits. "Don't try to be such a bigshot there, idiot".
Jiraiya laughs nervously and returns to his breakfast. An attendant comes by and asks you what you'd like to eat. You let her know and she excuses herself.
"But seriously 21," Tsunade continues. "We know it's a lot of pressure on you. You're dealing with a lot, and whether you're the Rikkudo or not... it's too much for one person. You have to trust on the team to do it's fair share too. If there's anything you want to talk about, remember, there's a lot of people who will listen".
"Thanks," you say earnestly. "I'm lucky I ran into you two first then. I've been thinking the team's morale has been terrible lately. I want to raise it. All I saw at the last meeting we had were defeated faces. We're not out of this yet, I don't want anyone thinking we've lost. But, it's hard to believe that when you can't land a solid success on the enemy".
"You're the most intelligent man on the planet," Tsunade states confidently. "But you have to remember, not everyone is like you. They're going to have doubts, it's only natural. I have doubts too. But as this lunkhead has told you, we've seen stuff like this before. I don't think you have to worry about Jiraiya and I, or Sarutobi-sensei. Akisame is very calm as well. Normally, I would say Kakashi never loses his cool, but... the things he learned about his father have really affected him. When you were out yesterday, he actually trained with Guy. They've always been friends, but Kakashi was never one to train so hard, it was always Guy that has overworked. Kakashi just sort of... broods".
"Don't say things like that Tsunade, you know life has been hard on him," Jiraiya interjects.
"Life's been hard on all of us," Tsunade adds. "He's had a tough chapter of his life revealed to him. No one is going to deny that. But we still have children, much younger than Kakashi, that are going through similar things and are taking it better".
"You mean Naruto?" you ask.
"Yes, exactly," Tsunade replies. "Naruto reminds me of Jiraiya in so many ways, right down to his stupid boyish mannerisms. He's naive, he thinks he can save the world by himself. But the kid never gives up. I think talking to the team and finding out what they're thinking is a great idea. You should try to raise their morale. But Jiraiya and me, we're fine. I KNOW Sarutobi-sensei is fine, nothing can really shock him anymore".
"Yeah kid, we'll trust you to see us through," Jiraiya agrees. "Don't worry. We got your back no matter what. Now finish up that breakfast of yours, you have a lot of work to do".
You continue eating and talking about what your plans are for today. Thinking upon what Tsunade said, you decide to go visit the kids after breakfast. You find Naruto hanging out with Shikamaru, Lee, TenTen and Ino. It's a little odd to not see Sasuke there...
"Yo," you greet them with a smile. Naruto runs towards you and jumps on you. You pick him up and look at him. "What's got you acting like a baby?"
"Heh! Today's my turn!" Naruto says with a chuckle. "I get to join the 21 club of regenerating super shinobi!"
"You always were a super shinobi dummy, and you were always a part of the '21 club'," you reply. "How come Sasuke isn't here?"
"Eh..." Naruto replies. "He's gotten too cool or whatever. He's been like that for weeks. He keeps challenging people to sparring matches, he does nothing but train. He's reminding me of bushy brow and Guy-sensei!"
"That's not good..." you say hesitantly. "Any leads on your end there Shikamaru?"
"We have a couple," Shikamaru says with a tilt of his head. "It's a major drag though... I think the majority of the council is in on it... They balked at us wanting to ask them questions... It's not going to be easy... And to make things worse, the accusations of Tsunade's favoritism have come back.... It's so troublesome..."
"Don't worry about that Shikamaru," you reassure. "I'll be helping you soon. I think it's an important job, that's why I entrusted you with it. You're my competition when it comes to brains, you're just lazy as hell!"
Naruto and you share a laugh as you walk towards Shikamaru. You lean a little bit lower to the ground so you can see him in the eyes.
"Seriously, you trust me right?" you ask as you raise your eyebrows. Shikamaru nods. "You're the only one for this job. I know it's been a big pain in the ass, but we're going to pull through. I swear it. I've never broken a promise have I?"
"No, no you haven't," Shikamaru admits with a sigh. "I'm glad I have your confidence though. This is going to really turn into something. I'm going to need you and Tsunade present when Sarutobi-sama and I go back to our inquiries. I think you should use your Shared Consciousness jutsu, see if there's anything you can pick up. If my hunches are right, almost the whole council is in Madara's pocket. And that's just bogus".
"It would certainly make sense..." you add. "Alright, next time you go, make sure to let me know. I'll join you two, and I'll have Tsunade tag along".
"Make sure you bring some ANBU also," Shikamaru insists. "This might turn ugly. I don't know how you're going to go about spinning this, if it goes public it's going to be... hard to explain... And chances are... this will go public... It's REALLY such a drag..."
"You're constantly repeating how much of a drag it is doesn't make it any less troublesome, you know?" you ask with a smile and a nudge to Shikamaru's shoulder. He gives you a rare smile and a laugh of his own. "A game later? Or is that too much of a drag too?"
"Heh, whatever you want, old man," Shikamaru replies. "You're going to have to lose to me eventually".
"Eventually, maybe, but not soon," you reply as you move towards TenTen and Ino.
"Good morning 21!" Ino says barely able to restrain herself. "How are you?"
"I'm doing well Ino, thanks for asking," you say with a bow. "How are you two ladies doing today?"
"Just deciding on what to do," TenTen answers. "We want to train too, but the guys really aren't into training us. They've been going at it really rough lately, and they're saying that we're not at that level yet".
"Really? Who said that?" you ask, more than a little surprised to hear that.
"Guy-sensei," TenTen answers. "It's not exactly like he's lying either. Guy-sensei and Kakashi-sensei have been going at it really rough lately... REALLY REALLY rough. I know they're trying to reach another level, but they're going to kill themselves".
"Guy should even be working out at all yet," you say in confusion. "So you guys haven't been training at all lately?"
"No, we have," Ino says clearly embarrassed. "We've just been having to train with ourselves. Lee is trying to catch up to Guy-sensei. Naruto is always training with Jiraiya-sama... And Shikamaru is well... he's Shikamaru".
"I'm right here Ino," Shikamaru complains. "It's not like I'm out of ear shot or anything".
"I didn't mean it like that!" Ino apologizes. "It's just, well, that's the way it's been... We're getting left behind".
You think about this for a moment before you make your decision.
"Alright, I can understand the guys not wanting to bring you guys along, they are probably training and sparring much harder than I want them to be," you begin. "But that doesn't mean we can have you two just sitting idly by not making progress. Naruto, I want you to take these two young ladies to Jiraiya and Tsunade. Tell them that I say they've been losing out on a lot of training. Maybe Tsunade can train them. Ask her if she would do that for me".
"Really? The Hokage herself?" TenTen asks a smile taking up almost her entire face.
You nod your head and chuckle softly to yourself. You motion for Naruto to come closer.
"And the next time I hear that you've let this happen Naruto..." you say before quickly grabbing Naruto in a headlock. "I'm going to squeeze the hell out of you! I'm going to see if I can make that little blond head of your pop off!"
Naruto complains as he tries to wrestle you to the ground. He fails miserably. You laugh and help him up.
"Good luck today, all of you," you say as you begin to walk away. "And in the future, don't let things like that happen. You are all chunin now, you're not precious porcelain babies. You need to be a little more headstrong. More confident. Try to take the initiative to handle these problems yourselves. But, I get the feeling I know what's going on here... When something comes up and you feel like you can't handle it. Make sure you let me know immediately. That way, it gets handled. Alright?"
The girls both nod anxiously as you turn and make your way to the training grounds. You know... it might even be a good idea to ask Mei if she would train the girls... She would hate the fact that the girls were left out of training sessions...Mei would also probably make it out to be a guy thing, and that the girls are the victims of chauvinism... You don't think that's the case here. Most likely, Guy and Kakashi are busy trying to kill each other in an effort to get stronger. Itachi and Sasuke are probably working in a similar way...The morale was worse than you thought...
You make your way to the training grounds, and as usual there is Guy, Lee, and Kakashi. No surprise there. Akisame is under the nearby canopy of trees writing in a notebook, Randel is near him looking at the birds flying around as they play with one another in the air. Lee is desperately trying to keep up with Guy and Kakashi's training regime, it looks like they're in the middle of their cardio. It's not going to help them much now that they've had your surgery. But you decide to let them notice that for themselves before you interrupt them. You sit down next to Akisame and Randel.
"Morning guys, how's everything?" you ask as you look at Akisame and then turn to Randel.
"My morning is going well," Akisame says as he diverts his attention from the notebook. "I'm just writing this down before I forget it. Then, Randel and I are going to work on our taijutsu. We're not going at it as violently as the others you see? We're more calm hearted people".
"That much I know," you say as you turn to look at Randel again. "How are you doing big guy? How do you like the new you?"
Randel turns to you slowly.
"It's going well, sir," he answers. "I just wish we could train with the rest of the guys... We've been mostly working with ea- each other. Not that I'm complaining though sir".
"They're not letting you guys train either?" you ask in utter shock. "What is going on around here?"
"No, it's not that, sir," Randel replies slowly. "Itachi and Sasuke are fighting constantly. Sparring I me- mean. And they are working on that. Just them two. But Guy and Kakashi, they are going at it for days. I don't think they've eaten, sir. They want us to join them, but I think we'd just be holding them back".
You exhale deeply and shake your head. These are issues that are always going to occur in a group this size. That's a given, and you understand that. But unity is one of the most important things in a team. Madara's Akatsuki are made up of people who are most likely in it for themselves, yet they have shown more unity than you've seen here today.
"Don't give it that much thought," Akisame says with his trademark mind reading. "They don't mean anything by it. They just are going overboard, that's all. Randel and I have been training, we are just using moderation. We don't feel like outcasts or anything like that. Do we Randel?"
"Oh, no sir, no sir, we don't," Randel stammers. He looks at you nervously as if he screwed up. "I wasn't meaning that. We're fine here, we just didn't want to slow the- them down, is all, sir".
"Randel, you were the FIRST member of my team," you say firmly. "You would never slow anyone down. You're an asset to us, and you've saved my life more than once already. I don't ever want to hear you doubt yourself again. We're FRIENDS, I'd like to think we're BROTHERS. So enough of this sir crap, alright? And seriously, don't let me catch you doubting yourself again. You're too good for that, alright?"
Randel nods. You pat him on the back and start standing up. You take a look at what Akisame was writing at a glance.
"Yes, it's poetry," Akisame says, once again reading your mind. "It relaxes me. Do you enjoy poetry?"
"On occasion, I can't say it's a hobby though," you say as you turn towards Kakashi and Guy. "I'd love to see your work though. You'll have to show me it, if you don't mind, I'd really love to see your writing. I'd read it now, but-"
"I know, and you're right, you do have pressing business," Akisame finishes your sentence. "Go ahead, maybe you can get through to them".
Akisame has you at a loss. You close your mouth without uttering a word and just smile before bowing and walking over to Guy and Kakashi. Lee is on the floor, panting hard.
"You guys satisfied yet?" you say as you make your way to where Lee is. "Lee is trying to keep up with you guys. And I don't know if you've noticed yet, but training in cardio is almost completely unnecessary for you guys at this point. The surgery should have removed the toxins in your lungs that make you fatigued. Look at him, I've never seen Lee like this. He's sprawled out on the floor".
Lee tries to stand up immediately out of embarrassment, but you hold him down.
"Take it easy Lee," you say as you look back up to Kakashi and Guy. "Guys, seriously. What are you doing? Guy you should even be training. And Kakashi... why? Words can't even begin to describe this... I'm not understanding you guys at all".
"We need to be stronger 21," Kakashi states, the focus in his eyes is unreal. "We noticed we couldn't get tired. We bet that it was because of the surgery. But what if the enemy finds a way around that? Then what? And Lee will be able to keep up with us as soon as he goes through the surgery too".
You look at Kakashi in amazement. You then turn to Guy.
"I'm not able to stay in hospitals 21," Guy tries to answer weakly. "I just need to be out here. I can't stand the thought of Madara and his men getting stronger while I'm strung up in a hospital bed".
"That's just perfect guys, really," you reply, clearly frustrated. "We all have different ways of dealing with things. But did you guys know that the entire team is being alienated? TenTen and Ino haven't been able to train at all these last few days. That's two members of the team that are literally just rusting. I expected much more from you two. And you see Randel and Akisame there? They want to join you, but they don't want to hold you back. This isn't what we're about. We've never been about this".
"21, this is hard on all of us, okay?" Kakashi states. "No one is having a good time here. We just want to get the job done. That's it, that's all there is to it. No one should have to go through what I went through".
You sigh before exhaling deeply through your nose. You crack your neck and shake your head.
"Kakashi... Guy... we ARE a family, aren't we?" you ask seriously.
"Of course we are," Guy says immediately.
"You know we are," Kakashi agrees.
"Then what the hell is happening to us?" you ask sincerely. "When did we turn into this? Don't you guys remember eating at the BBQ Restaurant? We would stay there and laugh so much, we'd have to go for lunch and then stay right through til dinner. What has changed? Madara? You're allowing HIM to change US? We're the only good thing ANY of US have left. He's already taken SO MUCH from us. You're going to let him take EVEN MORE? SERIOUSLY?"
You let that sink in for a moment. You look at Guy and Kakashi closely. Guy seems truly sad and disappointed in himself. Kakashi looks frustrated...
"I'm sorry," Kakashi finally says with a sigh. "I just feel like we're beginning to fall apart. And I don't know how to handle that. We prided ourselves on always maintaining our cool, remember? It's been really hard to do that lately. And what used to be one big family, has now turned into a clan with many separated houses. Itachi hasn't been near us as much anymore because he has to keep Sasuke on a leash, and I feel like that's my fault. And then Naruto is training with Jiraiya-sama, so that's another group. And it goes on and on like that".
You shake your head.
"I can understand..." you admit. "So the guys are just grouping up into small clicks, instead of hanging out with the entire family..."
"I didn't want to say anything about it 21, you have enough problems already," Kakashi confesses. "But Sasuke really needs you there for him. If we could just get everyone back together, back to the way things were, I really think we could start all hanging out together again. I have no idea how we will ever get seated at a restaurant again, but I'm sure we'd all be together and happy again".
"Yeah, you're right," you say. "I'm going to go talk with him right now. But seriously, from now on, you don't spare me from anything. You be upfront with me. And no more of this BS, even if TenTen and Ino can't train at your level, you ELEVATE them to train at your level. Or at the very least, make them train next to you. Same thing goes for Akisame and Randel. And Lee, don't worry about keeping up with these two. You'll get there very soon. I'm going to go talk with Sasuke".
You look at everyone before walking over to Sasuke and Itachi who are at the far end of the training grounds, beyond the stream. You make your way towards Itachi first and witness as Sasuke emits a massive fireball, the size is unparalleled to any you've seen before.
"He's surely come a long way from training behind the house with kunai hasn't he?" you say with a slight smile.
"Yeah, he has," Itachi says sadly. "He's been very bent on sparring with me. I've denied him so far. He's also bent on sparring with you. I am really trying to tone down his temper.. But ever since his Susanoo changed form... He's really been an avatar for a raging god of battle... It's strange, he was never like this. I know I'm going to have to fight him eventually... If just to satiate his battle lust. He took the surgery from L very well. Now, he's moving at superhuman speeds. He gets frustrated that he can't keep track of my movements however. And he isn't too happy with Guy either".
"Why, what happened?"
"He challenged Guy to a sparring match," Itachi explains softly as he turns to look at Sasuke. "Guy, thinking that it was normal, accepted. This was yesterday. Sasuke went all out against Guy. He even summoned his Susanoo. He scorched the hell out of the battlefield".
"This didn't happen here then I suppose?"
"No, when Guy accepted the challenge, I asked for the battle to be had somewhere else," Itachi informs. "It's a good thing I did. Sasuke's Susanoo burned everything around him. Guy wasn't expecting this. He thought it was just going to be a friendly spar to see how far the surgery had taken them both... Guy had to kick it up a notch, for his own safety, and hopefully, to teach Sasuke a lesson. He's become arrogant, brash, more so than before. He believes strength is the answer to everything. I think the time will come where I have to put him in his place soon..."
"What happened during the fight?"
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:21:10 GMT
"Guy went 8 gates, and defeated Sasuke soundly," Itachi answers calmly. "He thrashed Sasuke around like a child. In the face of Guy's experience, Sasuke's power means nothing. He still doesn't understand that... I fear for his sanity. He won't stop talking about living in our shadows... He never thought he was so far from Guy's reach, he believed himself to be superior to Guy. When he found out this wasn't the case... Well, he's been out here ever since. He hasn't eaten, hasn't slept. He just keeps practicing, he uses his jutsu and then turns to me and asks 'how was that?', 'was that finally good enough?'. He insists on becoming useful to us. I tell him he's family and that he IS useful to us. But... I don't think words reach him anymore. Sometimes, it's been recorded that the Sharingan has that effect on people. It's written that sometimes they become more aggressive, more competitive. It explains even further why the bloody practice of murdering your siblings and family members was so commonplace back then. Not only did it enhance your powers, but you were already inclined to do it anyway".
"Do you think there's a danger of Sasuke turning on us?" you ask bluntly.
"Not in the sense of betrayal," Itachi admits. "I'm more concerned about Madara's words from back then. He said Sasuke would come to him on his own. That bothers me... If this continues... Who knows what can happen. He might even think he's doing us a favor. Sasuke wants me to teach him more Sharingan abilities, but I can't. I have to be sure that he is mentally ready, that he's mature enough to handle them. I just hope I'm making the right decision, and not pushing him towards Madara. If he does go rogue... I don't know what I'd do... It would be all my fault for failing to save him. I think your Rinnegan might be our last chance".
You rub your face in frustration, trying to make sense of all this. It would seem that the lack of unity stems from Sasuke. Because of Sasuke, Itachi has to dedicate his time to checking Sasuke. Itachi's lack of presence is being suffered by the group as a whole. His leadership is needed. Kakashi needs Itachi as much as he needs you. The group has always seen you, Itachi and Kakashi as the leadership. And because of that, they depend on you more so than they depend on one another. You need to somehow bring the team together as it once was, as a family.
"Hey, 21," you hear Sasuke say from 30 feet away. You turn your head up to see him.
"Morning little brother," you say with a wave and a smile. "Why don't you come and eat? I hear you could use a nap too".
"Is that what you two were talking about? Talking about me behind my back?" Sasuke accuses. "I know I'm weak alright?! I'm working on it!"
"Sasuke, I don't know where this outburst is coming from," you reply calmly. "But I have never thought of you as weak. You're my youngest brother, I'm just worried about you. There's nothing wrong with people caring about one another. I was just asking what you two had been up to lately. So just chill out with the attitude alright? It's not needed. We're all frustrated with this thing here, we shouldn't take it out on ourselves".
"No, you're not HALF as frustrated as I am," Sasuke argues angrily. "You're gone for MONTHS on end. Then, this new woman pops into your life, and even though you've been ignoring ALL OF US for all this time, you now dedicate even more of what little time you have to her. And not to mention, the world is ending all around us RIGHT NOW. But hey, it's alright, it's not YOUR fault, it's my fault. If you really cared, where were you all this time?! When we were roughing it, WHERE WERE YOU?!"
"You're right," you admit regretfully. "You're right, and I'm sorry. It won't happen again. But this little feud we're having it needs to stop. Family doesn't fight like this, alright? When you have a problem, you should speak with me about it. Not let it fester inside you and then make you so angry at me that you're ready to rip my head off. I just want us to go back to the way things were. There's no crime in that. Come on Sasuke, please let me take you out to eat? You need some rest. We can all start training again, together. Just like the good old days".
"Fine, I'll tell you what's on my mind," Sasuke offers. "I need to know just how much more powerful you are than me. I was thinking I was the third or fourth strongest in the group. And now... I find this out, I get humiliated by Guy".
"He didn't humiliate you Sasuke," you propose. "He was just sparring with you. He was trying to make you better".
"No, he humiliated me!" Sasuke continues. "At first, I WAS complimented that he had to go 8 gates against me. I thought it meant something, not much, but at least it was a consolation. But did you know he can go at least TWO MORE? He held back on me, because I'm weak! I don't even know why you have me on this team!"
"I didn't even know there existed more than 8 gates..." you confess. "I'm amazed he was able to do that and live... The surgery I guess? Besides, Sasuke, you're just a teen man. Come on. Guy has been fighting longer than you've been alive. You're extremely strong, everyone knows that. Just please, stop it with the attitude. This isn't Sa-chan. This isn't you".
"I stopped being Sa-chan a long time ago," Sasuke says as he gets into a fighting position. "Itachi refuses to fight me. But I know that you're the strongest member in this group. I need to know how much stronger you are over me if I'm going to continue training. I need to have a goal. And you'll be my goal. If you fight me, I don't need to fight Itachi, because I know you can make a better measure for my power. I'm doing this BECAUSE I care!"
You're not so sure... He's acting insane right now... Is this something he needs to get out of his system? Should you even consider fighting him? Itachi has jumped away from you, he is obviously trusting whatever choice you make. Kakashi, Guy, Randel and Akisame have come to see what the commotion is about. This isn't exactly what you set out to do when you woke this morning... ===== Turning Point + Clutch Moment A: Refuse to fight outright, and walk away B: Agree to fight in a desolate, unpopulated area C: Stand there and let him beat on you to his heart's content D: Fight him for a bit and throw the fight E: Free Will
"So. It has come to this. You're intent on fighting me? Is this truly what you want Sasuke?"
"Yes, I'm tired of being a fifth wheel," Sasuke replies, his eyes burning with literal fire for a moment. What has this Susanoo done? "I am not a child. I am a proud shinobi, from the Leaf. A member of the mighty Uchiha clan. I won't back down from you. Besides, you're forgetting something. I know ALL of your moves. You haven't seen me fight in how long? You've been absent for what seems like years now".
"That's not fair Sasuke," you reply, your feelings hurt. "I was trying to protect everyone. I had to go away, I had to get stronger".
"So do I," Sasuke says as he takes out a large shuriken. "I HAVE to get stronger. I'm tired of living in the shadows of my two older brothers. I want to do the protecting for once!"
You tilt your head to the side and scratch your five o'clock shadow. Ever since that LM training, your hair has really started to grow faster than normal.
"That doesn't sound like you want to gain power to help people," you suggest as you narrow your eyes against the harsh sunlight. "You aiming to get more powerful because you want to help people? Or are you just looking for power to surpass your older brothers? This isn't a contest. I would be happy if you were stronger than I. I'd be happy for you. We're family, we're supposed to be happy when one of us succeed. This sounds like an immature, selfish excuse. You don't want to get more powerful to help the group, you just want to be stronger than Itachi and I. That's not right Sasuke".
"Enough talk!" Sasuke replies angry at your accusation. "I'll admit it! It's a pain in the ass to always come up short! Father only talks about how great Itachi is! He even calls YOU son now! But what does he say about me?! He hates me! But when I show him I'm your greater, I'll be loved by my father! And he won't look at me with that disgusted expression anymore".
"Sa-chan..." Itachi says softly. His eyes are almost lifeless, as if that last revelation really took the spirit out of him. "I'm sorry that I made you feel that way. I'm sure 21 is sorry as well. Father doesn't hate you... He's always been very strict".
"Not WITH YOU!" Sasuke screams, louder than before. "I still remember everything ITACHI! ALL OF IT! He NEVER treated you that way! And 21 went from being despised to being praised by father so quickly that it only proved my feelings were right further. This is the only way to do this. I have to gain more POWER. Itachi refuses to teach me anything anymore! It's just the same training routine over and over. I am tired of being held back And STOP calling me Sa-chan! I'm NOT a kid".
"Sasuke... fine, I will fight you," you say reluctantly. "You're not a kid. I agree with you. It's just we see you grow up so fast... it's hard on us. That's what happens when you have siblings that are so apart in age. Before you know it, they're grown up. But after this match, we will train together, alright?"
"You're so sure you're going to win huh?!" Sasuke protests. "I don't need to train with you if I beat you!"
"Ah..." you sigh deeply. "Very well... Let me teach you about the bonds of family. I will take us somewhere safe, you too Itachi".
Itachi nods. Sasuke steps forward in anger.
"NO!" he screams. "I want everyone here to witness this as well. This is what I should have done in my fight yesterday. I won't make the same mistake again. Take all of us to someplace safe. I will show you, MY TRUE SUSANOO!"
You scratch your face again before looking at the rest of the team present. You think that Sasuke is definitely going to need to be healed by Itachi's Giga Eye, and now you can definitely understand why Itachi has refused to teach Sasuke more techniques. You teleport everyone to a barren plain, right near a cliff.
"Does this work for you?" you ask politely, trying not to rile Sasuke up any further.
Sasuke's chakra explodes around him as he growls like some sort of feral animal. Around him, Susanoo is manifested. But this is like something you've never seen. Sasuke seems truly intent on hurting you, maybe even killing you. Is his jealousy THAT much?
"Come here!" Itachi screams to everyone as he raises his own Susanoo. Itachi's Susanoo has a light blue tint to it. "Everything around here will be engulfed in flames!"
The group rushes into the protection of Itachi's Susanoo.
Sasuke's Susanoo, meanwhile, has fully formed. It has five arms now, and in the extra arms, a gigantic spear is held in his hands. You sense the air get heated up around you. You look down at your skin and notice that your skin is starting to burn up as you get closer to him. Fire pours over from the armor of the Susanoo, and sets the ground ablaze.
You study him carefully and shake your head.
"It's not honorable to start a duel without giving your opponent fair warning," you say truly disappointed in Sasuke.
"I am no idiot," Sasuke replies harshly. "I won't let you get the drop on me like you did Ino. I won't let you humiliate me further".
"As you wish..."
You raise your hand and cast Anthem of Horus on Sasuke. To your surprise, Sasuke is STILL able to manipulate his chakra. He laughs as he comes walking towards you.
"I am actually really surprised that didn't work," Sasuke says, the first smile you've seen from him in a long time. "I suppose this Susanoo comes with some major perks".
He tries to speedblitz you with his Susanoo, for a moment, you think about perhaps blocking the spear, but there are too many weapons there. You FGG to the otherside of the battlefield.
"Be careful not to get hit by this spear," Sasuke warns you. "If you do, I think it might actually kill even you".
You look towards Itachi hoping to get some sort of clue from him.
"He's right, it is a possibility," Itachi says calmly. "That spear is an artifact, a very old one".
Luckily, you've got speed in spades. Sasuke shouldn't be able to touch you.
Your thoughts are interrupted as a massive yellow arrow is shot towards you. The fire that the arrow was engulfed in falls off a little as you move your head to avoid it. Your face is singed, but only temporarily.
"I see your healing has improved as well," Sasuke says with a smirk.
"Are you TRYING to kill me Sasuke?" you ask in total shock.
"No, I'm not," Sasuke says, his disposition returning to a more serious tone. "But I know if I'm going to beat you, I have to try my hardest. I doubt there's much that could kill you".
He seems to be telling the truth, but his Susanoo is readying up another arrow for a second shot. ======= A: Fissure Sasuke B: Summon a Crystal Golem right in front of Sasuke C: Run at Sasuke, and try to see if the Wind Catcher can destroy Susanoo D: SotU E: Free Will
With speed that can only be described as inhuman, you summon a flurry of Shadow Clones.
Already knowing your intentions, the Shadow Clones begin to try to use Golem Manipulation on anything they can. One of them also summon a Crystal Golem, who then in turn makes itself change into a ridiculous size.
While all this is happening, you cast Raisoku on yourself to increase your speed even further. You notice that the clones using Golem Manipulation are stuck trying to control the divine flames, but that's a bust. They then try to hit Sasuke, within the ribcage of his Susanoo technique, using the air around his face. This has very little effect as well. But then they move the earth beneath his feet. At THIS point, you notice Sasuke react defensively and jump to his side.
You take this opportunity to jump at him, and using a technique that Killer B taught you, Iaijutsu, you draw your sword. The beauty of Iaijutsu is that it wastes no energy in the drawing of your katana. In truth, it's meant to dispose of your threat on the draw itself, but should that fail, you should immediately follow up the attack with a reverse slash.
As Wind Catcher hits Susanoo's outer armor, you definitely feel the pain of the intense fire you're surrounded by. It's much harder to breathe, and you're lucky that you're hardier. The Wind Catcher begins absorbing chakra, pure raw chakra. You feel as if it is making the Susanoo weaker, but you also notice that the handle to your sword is seething hot, and the traditional lightning bolt that sometimes jets up and down the blade is being overpowered and turned into a flaming sword. Sasuke is rocked by your sudden burst of speed and attack, but after the initial shock, he ripostes with Susanoo's spear. You kick off of the Susanoo, scorching your leg and ruining your shoe in the process, and do a backflip to block the dreaded spear.
You can't hope to match strength with the Susanoo, not at this point. You give up the deadlock and begin sprinting to your right, using your speed advantage as much as possible.
"This?! This is the legendary shinobi?!" Sasuke asks, almost disappointed. His Susanoo still volleys arrows at you while he speaks. "Or are you STILL taking me lightly?!"
You turn to see your golem almost upon Sasuke and his jutsu, but even the Crystal Golem is beginning to burn as it gets nearer to Sasuke. Judging by it's current state, it definitely won't be able to last near that thing. Sasuke still has your regenerative qualities... you might be able to take this up a notch. Sasuke is not going softly about this either. It seems he is casting a cooperative jutsu with his Susanoo's two free hands. ================= A: Have the Golem take a suicide tackle to bust Susanoo over the cliff B: Use your clones to Fissure AWAY from the cliff and try to imprison Sasuke underground C: Use an empowered Maw of the Beast, it should give you more time to strategize. At least, it should stop the rain of arrows falling upon you. Temporarily. You hope. D: Test out an empowered Plasma Bolt. This flame couldn't possibly be hotter than plasma... Although it does feel like it might very well be. E: Free Will
*****
Naruto and the rest follow Jiraiya desperately trying to keep up.
"What's going on Pervy Sage?!" Naruto protests. "Why are we leaving training?! We just got Grandma Hokage to start training the girls too!"
"I'm right here Naruto, within earshot," Tsunade complains. "We had to leave".
"There's a huge battle going on," Jiraiya says solemnly. "We both felt the chakra disturbance. And for two chakras to clash so fiercely that we could detect it from so far out... It's not a good thing if one of our boys are involved. And I recognized 21's chakra immediately".
"You don't think 21 could be in danger do you?!" Ino asks innocently.
Jiraiya turns back to the horizon. Not able to answer the question, not willing to lie, either. His silence qualifies the question as possible. The group hurries their pace.
*****
You tell your clones to summon 100 more Crystal Golems, they do so immediately. Those Golems in turn cast Raisoku on each other.
You also order your gigantic Crystal Golem to charge into the Susanoo, and charge it over the cliff. It runs as fast as it can, and prepare to dive bomb the fiery sphere surrounding Sasuke. But you notice that the closer it gets, the pieces falling off of the giant monstrosity are becoming more and more significant in size. Your Crystal Golem finally makes it to arm's reach of Susanoo, and hits it head on. The Golem begins to disintegrate, but not before managing to push the entrenched Susanoo off the cliff.
You hear the crowd gasp as Sasuke's Susanoo gets uprooted, like an invincible oak. It had planted it's spear into the earth, trying to steady itself. But it was still too unbalanced from the previous assault. As it falls down the side of the cliff, it claws and slashes at the cliff face, trying desperately to not fall all the way down. You note that your giant Crystal Golem is now just a giant pile of purple goo.
"It burns really hot," you say sarcastically as you inch your way towards the ledge.
Sasuke is still wrapped in his jutsu, and he did fall almost to the ground floor, but his Susanoo is clawing its way back up, like a rabid animal. You can actually feel this things anger and battlelust. How powerful IS this thing? You look around you, hoping to get inspired. It could work... ====== A: Your clones, golems, and you use Golem Manipulation and create a giant rockslide to bury Susanoo with B: Beat Susanoo back with Wind Catcher, while the rest of your creations manipulate the earth underneath and entrap it on the cliff's wall C: Have everyone use Golem Manipulation to suck the air out of the vicinity of Sasuke's technique. Perhaps the fire won't burn if it doesn't have oxygen to fuel it.. D: Turn the entire cliff toxic with Toxicity (will use the help of all your clones and golems for this round as well) E: Free Will
You mentally inform all your clones of what to do. They start carving the earth from their positions in preparation of your signal. You FGG towards the Susanoo, Wind Catcher in hand, and begin attacking at him from all angles. Susanoo might have you beat in strength, but you haven't met a man or a god that can beat your speed. You slice at the armor, the arms, at everything you can. You can actually hear the god screaming in agony as you feel Wind Catcher pulse with divine might.
"Can you follow his movements Guy-sensei?!" you recognize Lee's voice over your battle rage.
"No, I cannot..." Guy answers, almost as if not surprised.
"Itachi-san, how about you? Can you see what's going on?" Lee asks again, trying to get an answer anyway he can.
"Yes, but just barely," Itachi answers.
"I'm impressed," Kakashi says with a chuckle. "I lost count after 87".
"87? He's sliced his katana 87 times?" you hear Randel, with an uncharacteristic tone of emotion in his voice.
"No, he's still going," Akisame says. "He's right now on 149".
"They're just flashes of light to me," Lee says, sounding dejected.
The world is moving in slow motion for you at this moment. Time is an illusion. You feel as if you have broken that barrier. As you look at the Susanoo, you can tell it's about to give way. The Wind Catcher is much more powerful than you originally surmised. You instruct the clones to back everyone away, this explosion might bring down the entire cliff.
Once the clones inform you that the group is safe you FGG away towards the group and detonate your tags, right under the Susanoo. The explosion was even greater than you had expected, perhaps Sasuke's Susanoo's very nature increased the blast. You grabbed Itachi's Susanoo and teleported your entire group 10 miles away, kept them there for 5 seconds, and then teleported back.
You see Sasuke's Susanoo disintegrate before your very eyes. He's falling, you rush to his side to save him, but he lances you hard in the shoulder with a Chidori. You punch Sasuke as hard as you can, and free fall with him, your katana near his neck the entire time. Just before impact, you FGG him back, in front of the group. Itachi is very disappointed.
"Have you no shame?!" you ask, infuriated, you feel betrayed. "You're acting worse than a child! You're acting like a villain!"
"No..." Sasuke says weakly as he eyes the Wind Catcher. "I merely wanted you to see... I could have pierced your heart if I had chosen to".
You stand up, but continue pointing your sword at Sasuke. You see Guy start to step forward, but Itachi restrains him by extending his arm out. Itachi shakes his head no.
"This is a problem they, as brothers, must resolve," Itachi claims somberly.
With a swift action, you feint a downward stroke with your sword, and pierce your own heart. You leave the Wind Catcher inside your heart, and allow the blade to sit there. The wounds close up immediately, yet you feel your heart beat painfully. The crowd winces in pain as if disgusted by your display.
"Your technique, would have done nothing to me," you instruct. "Why would you want to hurt me further? This sword, right now, is through my heart. It hurts, it's almost unbearable. I feel the properties of the sword sucking my chakra away. But you know what Sasuke? It doesn't hurt half as much as what you did to me".
Sasuke's eyes swell up as they begin to tear. He jumps up and removes Wind Catcher out from your chest and hugs you. You place your head on his head, and drape your right arm over his shoulder. He hands you back the katana and apologizes.
"It's his Susanoo," Itachi says as he disperses his jutsu. "He can't control the manifestation yet. I fear it will be the death of him. It's ironic that his took on the form of Kagu-tsuchi and that my own took on the form of Mizuhame. I suppose I will have to further endeavor to calm his fiery nature".
"Indeed," you say. "But before that, I'd like to pay a visit to 'father' if that's alright with you".
"By all means," Itachi says with a slight bow. "I had intended to do so as well".
"We're going to handle this, and then I would like some time with each of you," you announce as you notice Jiraiya, Naruto, Tsunade, Ino and TenTen sprint towards you. "You're a little late Jiraiya... Heh... Let me take us all back to the village. We'll just have to take it from there. Please try to stay on the training grounds, I'm going to need a moment of everyone's time. Kakashi if you could fill in everyone, I'd really appreciate it. I also need to speak with Shikamaru, so if he could be at the grounds too..."
"I'll handle it," Kakashi assures. "Just go do what you have to do".
You bring everyone back to the main square of the village using FGG. From there, you, Itachi and Sasuke walk back to their home. An eager Fugaku greets you as he sees you approach. You ask Sasuke to go inside and wait. He does so.
"Father, up until now, we haven't mentioned this," Itachi begins. "But Sasuke has unlocked his Susanoo, and with it, the form of Kagu-tsuchi. His temper, his emotions, everything, have been working overtime. He's extremely stressed out".
"Sasuke... he was able to unlock Susanoo?" Fugaku says dumbstruck. "That's... why that's amazing".
"Yes, it is," you agree. "But he's having a huge issue in being proud of that development. He feels you hate him. If you do, I'd like to know. We're all men here. And let's not beat around the bush with niceties that are unnecessary. I know that you herald Itachi as the future of the Uchiha clan. And I have no argument there with you. Itachi is a prodigy that might come once every 200 years. But are you holding Sasuke to that very same and unfair standard? That would be the equivalent of berating a fox for not possessing the strength of a bear".
Itachi and you both stare at Fugaku, not relenting. He finally gives in.
"I know what you're referring to," he says. "But it's the only way to motivate that boy. He's not as naturally talented as Itachi, but if you push him to be, he can be. He can reach Itachi's level, I know he can. It will just be harder for him than it was with Itachi. I'm surprised that he was even able to reach the Susanoo at his age... Many masters have tried, and most have failed at attaining that technique".
"So instead of discouraging him, or putting him down," you begin. "I want you to instead only focus on the positive. I want you to only encourage him. What you just said to me? Say it to HIM. Tell him that you're impressed, that you're proud. Don't fuel him with negativity and expect results. He is imploding under this weight you've put on him. We all have to work through this with him. That includes Itachi and I. He's going through a very difficult stage with his jutsu. As if being a teenager wasn't difficult enough..."
You continue to look at Fugaku before he sighs and nods his head.
"Alright," he resigns. "As if it wasn't enough hearing it from my wife... Fine. I will be much easier on him".
You look at Itachi and wonder if he is fine with that. Itachi shakes his head before exhaling deeply.
"I will hold you to that father," Itachi states calmly. "We're in the middle of a very important mission. I will explain what happened to my father 21, you go on ahead. I think we'll be alright here".
You nod your head and turn around to begin walking.
"And 21," Itachi says. You turn to face him. "Thank you. Thank you for everything".
He leans in towards your ear.
"Your eyes... they changed..." Itachi whispers. "I think you're unlocking the Rinnegan... Reflect on what you felt while you struck during that last attack. It might help you".
You nod slowly. You bow and excuse yourself as you head towards the training grounds. Once there, you gather up the group and start handing out items.
"Shikamaru, this knife is for you, and so is this jutsu scroll," you state as you hand over the items. "Randel, this one I picked out specifically for you. Hold that, thanks. Kakashi, I have one for you as well. Okay, I think that's all for now... I asked you all to be here, because I want to discuss a lot of things with you all. I know we have all been through a lot, but we need to always maintain our unity. We're not just a huge team, we're a real family. Some of us have had it rougher than others... but in the end, when it counted most, we were always there for one another".
At that point, you continue by taking each team member separately and gauging their strengths. During training with Kakashi, you were able to learn a lot about the Wind Catcher. Yet you still feel as if there's more that sword has yet to reveal to you. You continue this, and eventually Itachi and Sasuke meet up, and you're able to gauge their growth as well.
It has become apparent however, that all the things you wanted to do can't be done in the time frame you have left. That is, before L finishes all the surgeries. You decide to take tonight and tomorrow off with the team and bond as a family should. Hopefully it would renew that team unity.
Renewed and with newfound morale, you must decide what to do with the three weeks you have left before L finishes all of his procedures... ============ Slight Turning Point with a possibility of starting a new arc A: Begin your journey in unlocking the Animal Realm of the Rinnegan B: Track down the kiln and try to enhance Mizuumi C: Try to develop an AoE jutsu powerful enough to take on multiple opponents D: Work on your swordsmanship with KB, he's going to be in town soon for his surgery E: Free Will
DB Stats to follow. BTW, Randel has a special jutsu I created for him. But I need you guys to come up with a jutsu for Sasuke, Kakashi, and Shikamaru (from those scrolls). And you still have two more scrolls to go if I'm not mistaken
"You're still looking at that?" Itachi asks as he comes into the room. "I know you love books, but what exactly do you hope to attain in there that could possibly help you unlock the Rinnegan? It's a legend, and your past life started it. Anything you read in there is only going to be conjecture and hearsay".
"For the most part, you're right," you answer, keeping your eyes on the book. "You have a knack for making the logical choice. Unfortunately, we're dealing with the illogical here. I don't think the Rinnegan is a mutation. I think it was the culmination of a man's work, his life's work. The Sage of the Six Paths, or me rather... I think I gained the Rinnegan from the way I lived my life".
"Are you saying you remember back then?"
"Not at all," you reply immediately. "I'm still fuzzy on what happened after the Second Great Shinobi World War. But... what do you know about Buddhism?"
"Some people believe he lived a long time ago..." Itachi states plainly. "It's often mistaken to be a religion, and it could be classified as one. However, it was more an idea than anything else. A concept laid out by one man, who was advising people to live their lives in a certain way to reach their 'nirvana'. Is that about it?"
"Brilliant as ever Itachi," you commend. "But... did you know how exactly it was explained to go to their nirvana? This was laid out very clear, and there were many tenets that had to be closely adhered to. I know you know about karma... but basically, there was something called the Desire Realm. It was one of three worlds a person could be reborn into. The Desire Realm acted as a gateway for the soul. The soul would pass this gateway, be judged, and then reborn in one of the six realms... or paths".
You turn the book and push it towards Itachi. You notice Itachi's eyes widen as he reads the script.
"You mean... the Sage of Six Paths... He... You-," Itachi stammers uncharacteristically. "You were reborn six times?"
"Think about it..." you say analytically. "What do we know about Rikkudo Sennin? He was a priest that started the ninja world. A PRIEST. Up until now, we believed him to exist, but some threw the idea out and considered it a legend. At this moment, we believe I'm the reincarnation of the Sage of Six Paths. But that's a suggestion that was implanted by Madara. However, has Madara lied to us before? No, not directly. Everything he has told us has been true. Madara fully expected me to never remember these memories. And if it wasn't for the bonds I have made with all of you... well, he probably would have had his way. I most likely never would have remembered any of this without the help of the team. Being next to Kakashi might have driven out the memory of Sakumo. But Madara couldn't have planned me befriending Kakashi".
"Of course not," Itachi states. "You were strong willed and you weren't suited for the purpose he created you for. You couldn't play his mindless soldier. So he erased you, locked you away. Until he could try again, see if it would work the next time. He couldn't plan on the Third assigning Kakashi or I to your team".
"Exactly," you say with a smile as you motion for Itachi to sit. "Now, Madara likes to hear himself talk. He has been shown to be honest, for the most part, especially while gloating. Why would a man with all of these characteristics LIE to a man who was about to lose his memory forever? Itachi... Madara said he can manipulate souls, and after all of this, I know he can".
"But that's terrible," Itachi says concern breaking his normally emotionless face. "What could a man like that do?"
"He could obviously summon a soul from a very long time ago back into a new, manufactured body," you surmise. "But that's not all. The Six Paths themselves, they ALL depend on reincarnation. The fact that I am here, that you saw the Rinnegan manifest during my fight with Sasuke, the personality we have seen Madara give us, ALL OF IT! It ALL leads to the same answer. I MUST be the reincarnation of the Rikkudo Sennin, and furthermore, the secret to the Six Paths, are here, in the Desire Realm".
"But how can you be so sure?" Itachi asks. "I can understand everything, and I do believe you're the Tensei. But, how can you be so sure that the Six Paths are the same thing as the Six Realms here you're showing me?"
"The Sage was a priest," you explain again. "He was a priest, and a good man, through and through. Judging by the his actions, and with the little religion we have in our world, we have to believe he was a BUDDHIST priest. If we assume that to be the case, then the ONLY logical answer, is that the Six Paths are an allusion to something else. And this is the only thing that matches. The Animal Realm or Path, the Demon Realm, the Human Realm, the Hell Realm, the Hungry Ghost Realm, and finally, the God Realm. It's the only thing that makes sense..."
"Alright, I'll give you that," Itachi says with a slight nod. "But it says here that you have to be reborn each time. Do you believe that to be symbolical or literal? I mean, you are a reincarnation after all".
"I believe it to be a little of both," you admit. "In this ancient text, the person has to have had at least six different lives. But that doesn't necessarily mean that they had to die and be reincarnated. It might just be, that after you complete one realm, you are 'reborn' into the next corresponding realm".
"Is there any particular order to the realms?"
"I'm sure there is," you say. "I just am not sure which is the first realm. I believe the first realm would be the Animal Realm. Born as an animal, building up your karmic balance, hoping to advance to a more enlightened realm. Then, I believe it should be the Human Realm... But there's where it gets tricky. In order to achieve oneness, all six paths must be ventured and conquered. Depending on the actions taken in the Human Realm, you could fall into the Hell Realm because of strong feelings of negativity, like hatred or prejudice. If I am reborn into the Human Realm, and I am covetous, I will next be reborn into the Hungry Ghost Realm. I could even be born into the Demon Realm if I commit acts of violence towards others. But the ultimate goal, is the last realm, the God Realm. I am positive that is the last realm, and I'm pretty sure the Animal Realm is the first".
"That sounds like you could be going through all the realms several times before finally reaching the God Realm," Itachi points out.
"Yes, but if I do..." you continue. "I can unlock the full power of the Rinnegan. And it might even help me regain more of my memories".
"Alright, where do we begin?" Itachi asks as he stands up.
"I think I have to do this alone," you say. "I'm not sure why... but I think this is something I HAVE to do alone. Take care of the team while I'm away.. I will try to make sure this doesn't take too long".
Itachi nods. He's obviously against the idea.
"I believe the fight, the training, might just be all inside my head," you suggest. "Take care of things, hopefully, I'll be back in two weeks".
You pick up the book from the table and the backpack you had prepared for yourself ahead of time and venture out of the village. You want to say goodbye to your team... but you don't want to ruin their happiness... If just for a little while, let them enjoy tonight and the next few days... Who knows, this might end up being an impossible goal. In your sentimentality, you FGG yourself to the training spot in the lands of Rivers. You prepare camp, and sit down over the edge of a small nearby stream.
You meditate for hours on end, before you hear a voice. You think it sounds exactly like yours. You open your eyes calmly and see the silhouette of a man floating on the stream's surface.
"Are you a spirit?" you ask gently.
"I suppose you could say that," he replies. "I am you, or, I am your former incarnation. We share the same soul".
"How can one soul be a spirit, and the other a man in the physical realm?" you ask, more than a little confused.
"There are many realms in existence," he says. "By now, I know you have managed to discern my identity. Yes... I was known as the Rikkudo Sennin. I speak to you now from a different realm, a realm for souls to be at peace. Unfortunately, our soul will never truly be at peace until we are reunited as one. To do this, you must reclaim your former knowledge, experience... All of this will reconstitute us, and make us one again. Then, we will both know peace".
"You speak of unlocking the Rinnegan? Why not speak to me about this earlier?"
"No, not only that," he answers. "I had to wait until our current incarnation was ready to accept the truth. That time is now. But the second step, is to see whether your body and mind can withstand the teachings. Madara has disrupted and torn our soul. It has left us in pieces, and at a fraction of what we were at one point".
"What about the Paths?" you ask almost at the point of desperation. "Was I right about the paths?"
"For the most part," he says. "In order to join both of our halves together again, you must reclaim what was lost. The first path will indeed be the Animal Realm, then Human Realm, followed by Hungry Ghost, Hell Realm, Demon Realm, and then finally God Realm. This is a battle that will be fought inside your mind. If you fail even at one of these trials, we may never be whole again".
"How can I guarantee my victory then?" you ask calmly now. "I need this to work. The world is at stake".
"I can grant you the power to relive the experiences I lived," he answers. "But I am weak already, and this conversation drains much of my being. I can only tell you that within each Realm, you will be able to take a break only after completing the realm. If you fail, we might both be lost forever. After I transfer my experiences in the realms to you, you will be able to enter them as you see fit. But you are merely reliving my trials a second time. Which means, failure is not an option. If you fail in a realm, we will lose our bond, perhaps forever".
"How can I beat each realm? What do I do? Will I be turned into an animal in the Animal Realm for instance?"
"Each realm is different," he explains. "Everything you have read is true of the realms. In the Animal Realm, you must deal with strong acts of stupidity that we had to overcome from our past. Likewise, in the Human Realm, you must strive to be a good man. You must not focus on the material, on the fleeting, on the petty... Remember what you have read, and you will be fine. The Animal Realm is the easiest realm to conquer, I doubt you will have trouble with it. But the others, might be deceptive and will surely be harder. You will be dealing with demons, demigods, vengeful spirits, and all sorts of other unworldly things. These entities will wish your failure, not out of malevolence, but to ensure you deserve to reach the God Realm. We might only have one opportunity at this, be sure you know how to treat every situation as it is expected in the corresponding realm. You can take a rest ONLY after completing the realm successful, or failing it. Once inside the realm, nothing can take you out from inside your mind. And I will be long gone from this plane of existence by then... Are you ready for me to take you to the first realm? The Animal Realm? If you manage to complete it successfully, you will find that you can enter the subsequent realms on your own through meditation. My time here is fleeting however, and I don't have much left. Will you go now?".
"I'm... honestly not sure," you confess hesitantly. ======== Turning Point + Clutch Moment A: Yes, take me to Animal Realm inside my mind B: This sounds too risky C: Give me a moment to think about this. I must let my team mates know D: I might need to read up on the realms more before I take a trip that I might only have one shot at E: Free Will
"Thank you. Please take me into the Animal Realm inside my mind," you ask politely as you ready yourself for meditation.
You see the Sage touch your forehead and disappear as if phasing into you.
You close your eyes and concentrate as you feel your body become lighter. You open your eyes after a moment, and find yourself in a lush jungle that extends farther than your eyes can see. You notice several birds looking at you curiously from the trees. On the ground nearby, there's a group of foxes looking at you as well. You stand up slowly, fascinated by your surroundings. The colors are vivid and seem... alive.
"So this is the Animal Realm?" you say out loud to yourself. "I can understand why Realm and Path are interchangeable in this sense... You must conquer this realm, walk this path successfully, before you may reach the enlightenment of this plane..."
"This guy's a regular genius," you hear.
You look around with interest. You're cautious, but you know that the only dangerous thing here is yourself. You remember reading that all the realms come with their unique challenges, and none of them involve physical might. Still... to whom does that voice belong to?
"Hard to believe," you think you hear one of the foxes speak. "But I think that human can see us".
"I can hear you too," you inform as you make your way closer slowly. "Is that unusual?"
"You can HEAR us?" the other fox exclaims. "Hmmm... You have lived this before then...? Why would you wish to subject yourself to this again? Did you fail in reaching nirvana?"
"I'm not sure, I think I was pulled away from it..." you suggest. "There's someone back in the physical world... He can manipulate and control souls. Even create them..."
"Does he have any idea of how he's affecting the wheel of life?!" you think it was one of the birds speaking this time.
"I don't think he really cares..." you answer. "But how would it affect the wheel of life?"
You look directly at the birds and wait, hopefully to gain information.
"The wheel of life is the order of enlightenment, the ascension of a soul to go through their lives and eventually make it to nirvana, what some call heaven," the bird replies. "Anyone here is either trying to gain enlightenment to proceed to be able to enter Human Realm, unless they are animal spirits. If you run into an actual animal spirit, be careful... They exist solely to test you. I imagine there are spirits in the other realms as well, to serve as judges to measure your worth. But I wouldn't know". You reflect on the significance of this realm... You're supposed to gain enlightenment through the Animal Realm by overcoming strong acts of stupidity you've committed in your past...
"Excuse me, bird," you say awkwardly. "If I were to recognize my acts of stupidity, what do I do from there?"
"You would do well not to trust everything or everyone you speak to for starters," the bird advises. "You don't have to worry here, as we are all in the same situation... But once you recognize your past mistakes, the way will reveal itself to you. From experience, I can tell you that when you acknowledge your errors, the animal spirits will come and test you. It's always different, and sometimes you can't pass their test... I imagine it's like that in every realm. At least here, it's not so bad".
His voice trails off with melancholy. It might not seem so bad but it sure doesn't seem like heaven. There's nothing to do here. ====== Name three of your greatest mistakes in no particular order. Clutch Moment
You concentrate on all the grave mistakes you've made... You've made plenty of mistakes in the last 6 and a half years alone...
As you contemplate over these events that could have turned out better, you notice the world around you begin to warp.
"It seems like he has gotten it," the bird says. "Good luck! Remember the animal spirit! Remember all the spirits!"
You stand in the middle of a giant Shogi board. You look around and see a lone, solitary fox. You guess it's one of the same foxes from before, but then again, a fox is a fox.
"You have come to prove that you have learned from the mistakes of your past?" the fox inquires. "You believe you have learned from the stupidities you have committed? You must prove this before you reach enlightenment and travel one step closer to nirvana. If you can pass this, then your final test awaits... The result of all your mistakes..."
Before you, several figures emerge. Itachi, Sasuke, Naruto, Kakashi, Akisame, and Randel appear before you.
"Step forward mortal," the fox instructs. "Face each of these men, and name the single biggest wrong you committed to each of these men. You must get at least four of these correct... If not, you fail". ===== Name your greatest mistakes that involved these men individually. Clutch Moment
You exhale deeply and step in front of Itachi. You know it's all an illusion, but even then... It's hard. It's hard to step in front of the image of someone you care about and talk about the bad times... You're not embarrassed or object to admitting to when you were wrong. But this test is a sobering one. It goes to show you what mistakes you've made... and how far running the consequences go. Perhaps that is the way to reach enlightenment itself? That thought, is a revelation within itself, you decide. ' "Do you have something to say to me brother?" the vision of Itachi asks, his Giga Eye activated.
"It's my fault you have that Giga Eye," you reply somberly. "It was my powerlessness that allowed you to see me almost get killed. It was my mistake, for that Giga Eye has brought you much burden. You have had to put up with that burden, and even more so, you've had to carry the weight when I was away and lead the team. All the while having your own troubles. I am sorry".
Itachi smiles and bows before disappearing.
"Spoken wisely and truthfully," the fox spirit praises. "Only through admittance and remorse can a person truly learn and improve themselves. You may continue".
Not quite sure where to walk to next, you step in front of Akisame. You're positive you know what your mistake was. Akisame looks down towards you, and bows formally. You never noticed this, but this image of Akisame is obviously taller than you. Now that you think of it... Akisame doesn't share this image's presence. The real Akisame seems to have been broken by life, and as a result is hunched over and lackluster...
"It was my procrastination that turned you into the man you are now," you say, spitting out each word painfully. "I took too long to save Bellhelm. And as a result, your family was taken from you. As if that wasn't enough the dojo at Ryozanpaku was razed and your friends killed, hurt, and imprisoned. If this is the reflection of what you once looked like, then the reason you no longer resemble this form is my own fragility. You trusted in me to save your home... and I kept moving the time back. I'm deeply sorry".
Akisame smiles weakly and disappears.
" In this wicked and insane world, nothing is ever solely one's fault," the fox says. "However, you must still account for your stake in the hardships of others. You are once again, right on the path to enlightenment. You may continue".
You look towards Kakashi and step towards him slowly.
"My grand stupidity got your father killed, set up and shamed as a result," you say not even being able to look this Kakashi in the eye. You bow and softly apologize to Sakumo under your breath. "You were forced to live with a lie orchestrated by a group of evil politicians, and your name has a blemish on it that can never truly go away. All because your father trusted in me to do the right thing... In doing the right thing, I trusted the wrong man, and I wasn't able to truly see how black Danzo's heart was and how real his threat was. I made you an orphan, all because of my impotence at stopping Orochimaru, Danzo, and for allowing Madara to get the jump on me... Even though I knew there was something wrong with that mission... Words could never express my sorrow Kakashi... You are my brother".
"Perhaps it was your fault," Kakashi's image says as he places his hand on your shoulder. "But you didn't murder my father and mother. You still kept your word to my father, and you have become my brother. I'm sure my father would be happy with the way things turned out. Although I never stop thinking about my father and mother, I will never see you as being at fault. You didn't commit the act. But you were honest and had enough integrity to tell me the truth about my parents. I look up to you, and following in my father's wishes, I try my best to emulate you".
Kakashi nods his head to the side and closes his eye before disappearing.
"His tale is indeed a sad one," the fox spirit judges. "He never had the chance or choice of altering his destiny. His parents were just involved in something bigger than themselves for reasons that were evil and petty. Yet, in the face of your involvement, you still owned up to your mistake, and tried to make amends. That is the mark of a person of true character. From Kakashi, you should learn that we are all tied to one another in some way. Even a stranger in a far off land, of whom you have never met, you can somehow link his life to yours. This is life's beauty, and perhaps one of its greatest tragedies... A person you don't know at all can make all the difference in the world in improving... or destroying, your life. You may continue, you have one correct answer left".
"I know that these are imagines, but are they a reflection of what they truly think and feel?" you ask curiously.
The fox spirit nods as he looks to the remaining three men. "This is exactly how they think and feel, for as each person acts and carries on with their life, the Animal Realm is always watching. Although no one knows this, we are always watching".
You walk towards Sasuke and meet his gaze.
"I haven't been there for you as I should have," you begin. "Because of this, we've grown apart. Instead of having you be proud or happy of my advancement, my absence has made me a rival you must beat. I should have been around you more, I should have had more to do with your upbringing".
Sasuke smiles and disappears.
"You are correct," the fox spirit agrees. "But this is not an exclusive case with Sasuke. You have touched many lives, you are an important person in that you have the potential to change the world. But in improving the world, you must never neglect the bonds you have already made. Does this ring true of anyone else in your life?"
You immediately look at Randel. He is undoubtedly the person you most neglect, but in truth, you know that you repeat this mistake often with many of your friends.
"It is natural to have certain people you get along with better," the fox spirit advises as if reading your mind. "There will be people you don't get along with at all, that is not your fault. But try to always cherish the bonds you do have, so that you may never lose them. You have gotten four right, and that was all that was required of you. Are you ready to move on?"
"I am," you answer confidently.
"Then prepare yourself to fight the results of your stupidity," the fox spirit says as the world changes all around you. "This beast, is but one of the effects your lack of forethought has allowed to bring into the world".
A massive tailed beast appears before you. It looks like a giant, haired ape, yet it bears seven uneven, misshapen tails, except it has the mouth of an alligator.
"This is not a natural tailed beast," the fox spirit says. "This is a reflection of the real world. This is the direct result of one of your mistakes".
"Madara has created this?!" you exclaim as the beast rampages around the grounds.
"I am not here to give you insight into your quest," the fox spirit replies calmly. "I am here to enlighten your soul. You should know the answer to all of your questions if you apply what you have learned".
The gigantic ape looks at you, and barrels it's way towards you. You instinctively reach towards your back to reach for Wind Catcher, but it's not there.
You look around and notice that the Wind Catcher is in front of the fox spirit on the ground. The fox spirit walks away from it. On the other side of it, you see Sasuke, already engulfed in his Susanoo's flames. To your back, you see Kakashi ready to fight, and to your left, you see Randel, his Door Smasher in hand.
"Choose wisely," the fox spirit counsels. "You only get one choice to fight this beast. Keeping your lessons in mind, how should you face this beast? Truly think this out". ==== What is the best option to fight this beast? Clutch Moment A: FGG to the Wind Catcher, atone for your mistakes by yourself B: FGG to Kakashi and fight the beast with him alongside C: FGG to Randel, and fight the beast with him alongside D: FGG to Sasuke and fight the beast with him alongside E: Free Will
|
|
|
Post by Yushinoki on Feb 1, 2011 19:21:48 GMT
You look around you, not satisfied with any of your options. You close your eyes and imagine your family... Team 21. As you open them, you see everyone near you, ready to back you up. Even Mei, Gaara and Killer B are here...
"Ah... so you have learned," the fox spirit says as the 7 tailed ape disappears. "Alone you are indeed mighty. Perhaps the strongest man on the planet. But together, with your family, you are unbeatable. That is what makes a legend, a true legend".
"Thank you wise spirit," you say with a bow and a thankful smile. "Is there really such a beast on my world however? I know you've helped me a great deal... I don't want to be ungrateful, but you said that this realm is sort of a mirror of the real one".
"I did say that," the fox affirms. "And I meant it. The mortal you refer to as Madara has amassed an army like one never before seen on this world. He has had ample time to prepare for your rebirth. I shouldn't be telling you this, as it affects the balance, but I fear many more people will be passing through our realm here shortly. That much is inevitable at this point, he has grown far too strong. Be mindful of the demons, spirits and devas that hound you in the other realms. They will not be as hospitable as we have been with you here mortal".
"So I passed?"
"A foolish question," the fox replies as everything begins to go hazy. "You passed the moment you reached enlightenment, and chose to not repeat the same stupidity over again. May your travels be blessed, wanderer".
You wake up in the remote area your mystical journey began, in the Land of Rivers. You see a much clearer spirit form of Rikkudo in front of you.
"I am glad to see we could do it a second time," he says. "Now, what shall you do?"
You look around and notice that it's no longer the same time of day anymore.
"I can deduce that I was gone for longer than it felt," you continue. "Do you know how long I was gone?"
"I am not of the physical world," he explains. "I only appear to you so that our soul may once again be whole. The more tasks you complete, the clearer you will see my visage, but once you have opened all the paths to enlightenment, you will never see me again. The spirits have no need or concept of time".
"Can you tell me how to activate my Rinnegan?" you ask curiously, not sure where to continue. "I should at least be able to use the Animal Realm powers, right?"
"Very perceptive," he states. "Yes, you can. However, the Rinnegan is something that should not be taken lightly. It will mark you, for better or for worse... And those that know of it's origins will come to know of our secret. I would suggest you activate your Rinnegan without losing the physical appearance your eye has now".
"I didn't know I could do that..." you admit.
"Yes, you most definitely can," he continues. "However, there are advantages of having it activated. Some fights may be avoided altogether if they see their opponent carries such a doujutsu. You might also find yourself more influential. Everything comes with it's balance, you receive some advantages, you must also accept the shortcomings".
"Spoken like a true priest," you say with a smile. "Is there anything else I should know about? At least for now?"
"Yes, one very important thing I need to explain," he emphasizes. "We have learned a very different style of ninjutsu in this life. You have reached enlightenment, and therefore can progress to the next realm, if you so choose. However, if you wish to make use of the Animal Realm's powers, and I would suggest you do so, you'll find your other powers changed. Most notably, you'll find you can not use your Kage Bunshin Jutsu to reach hundreds of clones anymore. You'll have ten, maybe a little more".
"That's a huge disadvantage!" you exclaim.
"I was never one to interrupt people midspeech," he states calmly. "Ahem... As I was saying... But you'll notice that your clones are decidedly stronger, and having them out will give them the Rinnegan, which in turn will give you the shared vision of everyone at once. It's a huge tactical advantage, but you must train and get used to it. It made me very nauseous at first. Also, you'll notice your golems will take on a more bestial appearance by default. You can always mold them to disguise themselves and pass off as human, but with the Animal Realm's powers unlocked, they will initially look like animal/human hybrids. Both of these summons will get more powerful. In the case of your Shadow Clones, you're just trading off quantity for quality... It's up to you".
"Any other things I should know about the Animal Realm?"
"It's powers stem mostly from summoning," he adds. "That is why it will have such an affect on your summons, as clones are essentially you summoning forth a fraction of your power. The only other thing I can foresee is that even if you choose to hide your Rinnegan behind your golden, catlike eyes, your clones will not be able to hide the truth, it is simply too powerful. L and your Shadow Clones will always appear with the Rinnegan intact. As you continue gaining realms, I will connect closer to you, and fuse our souls back to the way it used to be. However, as I explained, you do not have to gain the powers of the Animal Realm if you do not wish it. I could seal away that power, and we could carry on to our next realm. I don't see why you would squander the power of ANY of the realms, but if you're used to fighting this way and wish to not have to learn a new strategy for combat, I can understand".
"I'm not so close minded that I would completely refuse it," you reply. "I just have to think about it".
"Well, don't take your time," he insists. "This isn't something that can be held off for much, we've wasted enough time as it is. Unless you wish to do the Animal Realm over again".
"I understand," you say as you hold up your hand and reach for your comm. "Itachi, you hear me?"
"Loud and clear, where have you been?" Itachi answers over the comm.
"How many days was I out of it?" you ask, keeping mind that you don't have time to chitchat.
"You've been gone two days," Itachi answers calmly. "Is everything alright?"
"Yeah, wow," you answer, clearly surprised. "I can't believe I'm done. I am trying to open up the Realms, like I mentioned. I thought time would move differently, and it did, but it moved a lot slower than I thought it would".
"If you're not doing anything destructive, you should come home," Itachi states. "We can't have you blacking out in the wilderness for days on end".
"Yeah, you're right," you agree. "Itachi, let me get back to you, I have the ghost of my former self here, and he is getting impatient".
"Riiiiiiight," Itachi responds. "Over and out then..."
You turn back to the spirit of Rikkudo. -------- Turning Point 1: I want to adopt the "look" of the Rinnegan and have it replace my golden lion eyes 2: I want to stay with my LM Mode eyes
A: I would like to receive all the powers of the Animal Realm B: Unlock the Realm, but I would rather not use the powers of the Animal Realm. Seal it.
And what to do next? C: Go back home and check up on everyone D: Go back home, continue training your Rinnegan E: Free Will
You turn to the spirit of Rikkudo and smile slightly.
"Ready to go to the Leaf?" you ask. "I'm going there, so my body doesn't sit idly by in the wilderness for two days... I'm not even hungry, pretty odd".
"Are you unlocking the powers of the Animal Realm?"
"Yes, and I do not wish to forsake the eyes of the lion, nor do I wish to forsake the Rinnegan," you explain. "They are both a part of me, and serve as my history, and who I am. Where I came from... that sort of thing. I wish to have a mixture of both doujutsus".
"I know what you are thinking of," he says as he sticks his hand into your chest. You feel your chakra jump for a moment, and then a powerful throb in your head. A quick jolt of pain, and then your vision get's blurry.
You open and close your eyes, wetting them to sooth their irritation. You stand up and FGG back to your quarters. Rikkudo is waiting there, sitting down in one of your chairs, as if he were comforted.
"Itachi, I'm home," you say into your comm. "I'm going to try to unlock as many realms as I can in the meantime. I'm trying to rush this as much as possible to hopefully finish all of it before L is done".
"Alright, understood," Itachi answers. "Good luck in limbo".
"Thanks," you say as you turn to Rikkudo. "So, Human Realm is next right? Anything I need to know?"
"There's much you must know," he replies. "Unfortunately, we don't have time for any of it. Just know that from now on, EVERYTHING you see IS a potential problem. The animal spirits in the Animal Realm were kind, and they are used to visitors. It is a realm that everyone visits, and the lessons there are plain. In the Human Realm, you have to always assume that you could potentially be making a fatal mistake. As the fox told you in the Animal Realm, you will see things there that are exactly like that on earth. In this realm, you may even see the future. But the goal of the Human Path, is to avoid the trivial and materialistic gains which we as ALL humans tend to seek. In life as humans, most of us are trying to get ahead. We are almost always self centered and selfish. This behavior, if performed in the Human Realm, will condemn our soul to a lower realm. A subsequent reincarnation that is lower than human, another lifetime as an animal. The beings there will tempt you with everything, they will fool you, offering up everything you could ever dream of. But these are all false idols, they wish only your failure".
"So... you're saying Human Realm is basically regular life, with everything I could ever want?" you say confused. "It sounds like... heaven itself... But it's not real? And the spirits there... they're trying to screw me over just to see me fail? Wow... that sounds just like humans alright".
"Exactly," he answers. "This realm might have other spirits in there that aren't human, you must be careful. Do not trust your eyes. You must go with your instinct in this realm. To call this realm extremely unpredictable, is a very large understatement. We have always been a good and caring soul, we must carry that out in this next path. However, remember that sometimes, a person does good just for the selfish feeling one gets when they perform good deeds".
"I understand what you're saying," you say slowly as you scratch your chin and crack your neck. "But it seems like you're saying I'm damn if I do, and damned if I don't. You're advising me to be altruistic, but not be proud of myself for doing the right thing?"
"Precisely," Rikkudo answers with a smile. "It is good to want to help people. But in doing so, some mistakenly get addicted to that feeling. It's almost an addiction. But never do good just because it MAKES you feel good. You must do good in the NAME of good. Just do noble works in hopes that OTHERS will repeat your kindness".
You nod your head to the side... It's a lot to take in, and you're more than a little nervous.
"Alright, I'm as ready as I'll ever be I suppose," you say with an exhale as you sit down on the floor.
Rikkudo leans in and touches your forehead, a blinding light floods the room. You close your eyes and place your hands in front of your face. When you finally open your eyes, you're in a bustling metropolis. There are droves and droves of people, all with happy faces and most are laughing in joy.
You remind yourself that this is a false heaven. Most likely, this realm traps you by giving you whatever you want. And if you take it, then you are doomed to suffer the same fate as these people. Who instead of reaching heaven, are doomed to live this life, only to be reborn as a lower creature.. It's sad.
"Hey there 21!" you hear as you turn around and see Sasuke smiling. "Glad you could make it big brother! We were worried about you!"
"We?" you ask suspiciously. This is an obvious ruse, they could have tried to not make it so obvious.
"Yeah! It's time for you to rest brother," Sasuke says with a small chuckle. "You've fought long and hard! You deserve a break. No one should have to put up with what you had to put up with. We're all here though! We can enjoy the peace we created together!"
"There's peace now?" you ask, your suspicion not lowering even a fraction. "And where are we?"
"This is the capital, Arak," Kakashi says a chuckle as he walks towards you. "After we defeated Madara, the five great nations decided to bond. We finally completed our dream.. My father's death wasn't in vain after all".
Your mind begins to wander as you take in the sights and sounds. In the Animal Realm, the fox explained that the realms act as a mirror to the real world. Could this be a possible future? Or is that precisely what the spirits here want you to think?
"Stop dawdling," Kakashi says as he pushes you softly. "Come on, we've been waiting all day for this. It's your birthday after all!"
"My birthday?" the mere suggestion is more than outlandish. "How the hell is it my birthday? We don't even know when I was born the first time, much less created the second time".
"You picked a day, did you forget?" Itachi asks as he calmly comes up on your shoulder. "You took all of our birthdays, and averaged them out, giving yourself a birthday. What's happened with you?"
Itachi looks... happy. You walk with them for a little before coming upon a large picnic area. It's decorated nicely, and everyone is there. Everyone greets you warmly and congratulates you. This feels like home.. it's warm and inviting... You can understand why people get lost here. But where's the test?
"Sit down my child," Sarutobi-sensei says as he offers you up his own seat. "I'm not going to take up a chair from the birthday boy".
"Yeah, and be sure to try the cake, it's made of rum!" Lee stammers. Is the kid DRUNK?! OFF RUM CAKE?! Jeez...
"Here you go," Mei says as she offers you up a huge plate or sirloin steak and potatoes. "Your favorite, right honey?"
Akisame comes towards you and bows. Behind him, is a shy little girl who has Akisame's eyes. She's holding on to the hand of a beautiful brunette woman shorter than Akisame.
"21, I'd like to introduce my wife to you, and this here, is my little girl," Akisame says as he pulls his daughter's hand forward.
"Oh Akisame! Did I forget to serve you?" Mei asks. "21 babe, PLEASE eat before it gets cold! We have to play with the children! You know it's junior's favorite part of the party!"
"I have a son?" you ask as you look dumbfounded at Mei.
"Did someone hit my husband's head during training or something?" Mei asks. She turns around and calls "Da-chan! Come, play with daddy! He's not feeling well!"
A beautiful young boy comes running towards Mei. He has Mei's eyes, and your hair color. He looks like a strong young lad.
"What's wrong dad? You don't like the food, or you're just not hungry?" the child asks with a blissful smile. ==== A: I'm just not hungry B: No, everything's great C: I have only one problem, none of this is real. D: If you'll excuse me, I have to go now, I am feeling quite ill E: Free Will
"I'm sorry, I feel a bit ill," you announce as you stand up from the table. "Thanks for everything, it's really a shame that I had to feel this way... Now of all times too".
You walk away from the group, you hear the crowd gasp in disbelief as you leave. Maybe this is a possible future, in some regards, but Akisame's family is gone. And you don't exactly know what type of game this realm's spirits are getting at either. But one thing is for sure, if you had stayed there, it would have become harder to leave. That's most likely what the spirits were trying to do.
As you walk, the landscape begins to change. The metropolis changes into a serene countryside. Only a single farm exists as far as the eye can see. You walk slowly up to the farm, confused.
"How far does this go," you think to yourself out loud. "None of this makes sense... I don't know the first thing about farms..."
As you near the farm, you hear loud screams coming from inside the home.
"This is EXACTLY the reason why I LEFT YOU!" you hear a woman's voice scream. "You're ALWAYS out! And when you get home, you do this! You ignore me and you care only about dinner, your clothes being washed, and you don't talk to me!"
"Who would want to speak to YOU?!" you hear a man reply loudly. "ALL you do is YAP YAP YAP! I'm sick of it!"
The front door swings open violently, and you see a man and a woman walk swiftly out of the farmhouse. They both stare at you expectantly. They're absolutely livid and extremely emotional.
"What do YOU think?!" the woman asks. "If you were my husband, wouldn't you hear me out instead of only bossing me around all the time?!"
"Wait a minute here!" the man argues. "Don't you think I should get a say?! And why are you telling a complete and total stranger here OUR problems woman?!"
"Tell you what stranger," the woman proposes. "I'm DONE with HIM! You can have this house if you want it! Keep it! This man is TERRIBLE! And I can't live with him anymore!"
"Would you please talk sense to her?" the man asks desperately.
"Would you please make him listen to reason?" the woman pleads.
Dude... WTF? ====== A: Why don't both of you tell me what started all of this? B: I'm sorry, but this isn't my problem C: I'm sorry, but I really don't think it's wise for any stranger to get involved in such a situation D: Mam, don't you think it's a little reckless to offer your home to someone you don't even know? E: Sir, maybe you two can talk it out inside? F: Free Will
"Why don't I listen to both of you, one at a time." you suggest calmly. "Then, I can get to hear about each of your sides. What started all of this?"
"This is an ongoing problem, we never stop arguing," the man declares.
"It's always your fault," the woman accuses. "If you were different, I wouldn't need to complain. And when I complain, we stop arguing".
"Do you see what I mean?" the man asks. "I can't even say a simple fact without having her correct me. Isn't it true that we never stop arguing? Did I say something that was not true?"
"So what, you're smarter than me?" the woman questions in outrage. "That's JUST like you".
You don't know these people, but somehow, you feel as if you've heard of this story before...
"Are both of you honest?" you ask cautiously, hoping to test the waters.
"I tell the truth all the time," the woman states. "But one of us here lies about everything".
Yeah... you thought you heard this before...
"She's right," the man states. "One of us lie all the time, the other can do nothing but tell the truth".
"Are you husband and wife?" you ask the couple trying to further gauge the situation.
"Yes," they both say in unison.
Something's not right here. ======= A: So, the man is the one that must lie all the time B: So, the woman is the one that must lie all the time C: One of you is wrong, unless half truths are considered truths D: You've baited me into an unsolvable riddle. You're leaving out a third person E: Free Will
You look at both of the "people" standing in front of you. You've got a gut feeling about this, but you're not technically sure. Better safe than sorry you suppose.
"Say, I was wondering something," you say slyly. "Out of curiosity, I know you're both spirits in this wacky fun house and all. But would you mind telling me exactly what kind of gender you're portraying right now? The both of you?"
"I'm a man, clear as day!" the husband answers quite annoyed as he looks to his wife.
"Well, I'm a man too," the woman says frustrated as well.
"Okay... I think I get where this is going..." you say aloud. ==== A: So, the man is the one that must lie all the time B: So, the woman is the one that must lie all the time C: One of you is wrong, unless half truths are considered truths D: You've baited me into an unsolvable riddle. You're leaving out a third person E: Free Will
"Ah... I get it now," you say relieved. "You were trying to make it seem much more complicated than it ever was. It was all a play on words... Very clever.... Lady, you're lying through your teeth, I've heard this one before. You don't have anything interesting to say, you're just stalling".
The man looks at you and smiles before turning to his "wife".
"He's much better than we hoped," the man says. "What should we do with him?"
"What do you expect?" the woman replies. "He's been here before several times, if he can't get it right after so many repeat visits then he deserves to be stuck in Animal Realm".
"Look... I get it," you say with a deep sigh. "I got greeted with a bogus birthday party, and then presented with a riddle that bordered on unsolvable, until I realized the semantics of it. Just tell me what to do, or I'll end up leaving by myself. This is really a place I'd really rather not be here. I don't know why you're after me, but I'm pretty sure the reasons themselves are shady and self serving".
"Shady? Self serving?" the woman asks as she coils herself around the man's body as if she were a snake. "My boy, we were just trying to help you. Think about it. You're an intelligent enough guy. You finish this realm, then what? You got to do what? Four more realms? JUST like this one? No, you don't. You don't GET that luxury. You get to mess around with the souls of the condemned, Demons AND trickster angels. You thought THIS was bad? You've NEVER met an angel when he's PISSED off and just DYING to wreck a soul. And I hate to be the one to point this out to you, because you're as naive as they come, but even angels themselves hate seeing guys you like waltz into their turf. You make sugar salty kid, you're way too nice".
"You have an odd way of talking..." you comment as you tilt your head. "When were you human? And why shouldn't I just keep walking, ignoring you? This makes no sense. And I'm sure the next trial after you will make less sense".
"You can do whatever you want," the woman says smiling knowingly. "Point is, I can help you. All I want, is for you to go all the way. I'm stuck here, and I have my own reasons to want to cram it up some angel's ass". ===== Turning Point A: Alright, tell me more about your story B: I'm sure you got a great story, but I'm just not buying it, no matter how well written it is *walk off* C: Why should I believe you? You tried to lie to me from the beginning D: Your husband a mute over there? E: Free Will
"Lady... I'm sure you have a great story," you begin. "I'm afraid I'm just not buying it. I just finished solving a riddle that fingered you as a woman that can't do anything except lie. You think I'm going to trust someone like that? Yeah... Goodbye".
You sidestep and then keep walking. The woman begins to yell at you all sorts of obscenities and warnings. She even claims that she was only lying as part of the test, that you'll be sorry. Whatever.
You continue walking through this farmland and notice that the scenery out here is actually really beautiful. The crops add an interesting flavor to the environment, and you can't help but smile as you see the sun glisten on the fresh leaves. It's really a sight to behold. More and more, you can understand why people fall into this hole. They mistake it for heaven, or maybe the trick gets so much into their head, they don't care whether it's real or not. It's a shame...
With that thought, you're instantly transported to a village you recognize only from your locked away memories. You're in the Rain village, in an alley you don't immediately recognize. There's a man there, he has long red hair, so red it seems as it is on fire as it flows through the wind. He holds up a steel rod that ends in a point, and he's holding a woman against her will, as she's on the floor. It's MEI!
You immediately FGG next to the man, or at least you though you did. Your powers aren't working. You look down at your hands, your newfound powers of the Rinnegan SHOULD allow you to see chakra. But either they're not working, or you don't have chakra, or... maybe even both.
"This is your future 21, or Rikkudo, or 36, whatever you want to call yourself," you hear a familiar voice taunt you. It's DEFINITELY Madara. But is it TRULY him? "Funny how we meet in the strangest of places, isn't it?"
"Madara, I WILL kill you," you threaten with barred teeth. You feel enraged, probably the closest you've ever felt like a REAL lion yet. "I'm going to pull your spine out from your mouth, just fast enough for you to feel it!"
"No... no, you won't be doing that," Madara says, continuing in his attempts to provoke you. "At this moment, you're wondering why your chakra doesn't work. You're also thinking I'm an illusion from your ****ed up mind. You're considering whether or not I'm real... But let's face it, the more I talk, the more you realize... I AM REAL".
"You're full of **** and you know it," you say as you watch the man torture Mei. "Let her GO! She has nothing to do with this!"
"She has everything to do with it," Madara says calmly, almost surprised you would even mention such a notion. "But don't worry 21, this isn't real. Not yet. The only real thing here is you, and I. I admit I found out much later than I wanted to... but placing this ***** into the Mizukage's position? Did you REALLY think I wouldn't make that connection? I thought we were having a competitive rivalry going on. I thought you RESPECTED me. You obviously don't. So I'll MAKE you respect me. You've gotten some things over on me I REALLY wasn't counting on, I'll admit. Those golden eyes of yours... I haven't the foggiest of ideas of what they could possibly be... But you venturing into the realms? It means you found out something I didn't want you to find out... But, rest assured, I did PLAN on you finding out eventually. So I suppose you deserve a round of applause, you are maturing much faster than I anticipated".
Madara motions to the man with the bright fiery hair and Mei. They both smile at you and clap their hands. You don't recognize the man... but he's wearing an Akatsuki robe. Other than his massive frame, there's nothing discernible about him at all.
"I guess you remember who you really are now huh?" Madara prods at you further. "No need to continue hiding it. You know what I did by now, you must, if you made it this far. But you're only at the Human Realm... that's REALLY far away from your goal... And don't forget, this realm can show you the future. That touching scene of Mei getting slapped around a little before she get's gutted? That's your future 21. And eventually, that will be the future of everyone who associates with you. So go, unlock the Rinnegan. I already KNOW how it works. I've been doing nothing BUT preparing for you. You aren't safe ANYWHERE you go. I SAW you at the Land of Rivers. You know why I didn't pick you up? Because you WILL come to me eventually. Out of YOUR OWN FREE WILL. Want to know why? Because I MADE it so. You won't have a choice. Everyone close to you will die. They'll die slow. They'll be kept around for weeks before dying. ALL because you want to stand in the way of progress".
Words escape you at this moment... If this is truly Madara... You don't even want to think about that...
"I'm TRYING to make the world a better place 21," Madara continues. "YOU'RE hurting my process. I'm actually trying to save the world, YOU'RE the one condemning it to further chaos. What, you have some dream of world peace? IT WON'T HAPPEN! This realm is FULL of evidence as to that never happening. And these other Realms you have to complete? I saw your little escapade, you could barely solve a riddle, you think you can challenge four MORE realms and win? Or do you just want to risk losing and damning your eternal soul to this limbo. Your 'friends' won't stand a chance without you".
"No, no," you begin to argue as the flood of uncertainty threatens to overwhelm you. "You're saying this to throw me off guard. You're not real, you're a spirit from this realm trying to sway me from my path".
"That's really pitiful," Madara says with a scoff. "Yes, I AM trying to throw you off guard. But I AM VERY real. Did you know that I can control souls? I can CREATE souls. I am GOD-LIKE. Entering this lower realm isn't even difficult for me. And you want to know what's REALLY going to screw with your head? The fact that even if I AM a spirit from this realm trying to 'sway you from your path', it still means I'm a direct reflection of the living world. So guess what, 'Tensei', you're screwed either way. If I'm real, you know I'm capable of messing up your progress in the realms. If I'm not real, you know I still know everything I just said in the physical world. Because after all... this is just a mirror isn't it?"
You swallow hard and try to clear the dry mouth you're beginning to feel... This can't be real... This can't be true... But... If Madara can control souls, why wouldn't he have the power to enter the realms? Even if his power is limited in that regard, the realms are a mirror of the physical world... Aren't they? And this one seems to portray things that are going to come... Is destiny real? Is free will a joke?
Madara claps his hands spitefully in front of you, waking you from your speeding thoughts.
"Are you getting the picture now, 'Tensei'? You're not in control here," Madara points out arrogantly.
"Yeah..." you begin to say. ===== Clutch Moment A: I'm not in control, but you're not real B: I know I'm not in control. That's the point of being human C: Prove you're real then scumbag D: If I believe you're real, what does that even prove? That you have a lot more time to spare than I thought you did? E: Free Will
*****
"He seems to be in pain!" Mei says to Itachi as she sees your clenched fist. Even with your eyes closed, a single tear rolls down your face.
"There's really nothing we can do for him," Itachi says as he grimaces slightly. "We have to trust in him, as we always have".
Mei looks to you in concern.
Itachi wishes to inform the rest of the group... But he decides to hold off. For now, at least.
*****
"I know I'm not in control," you say calmly as you look up at Madara. "That's the whole point of being human. To recognize that fact. Sometimes, there's nothing you can do".
You crack your neck and look straight ahead calmly. Madara appears to have lost a little of his composure. The world wraps around you as you hear Madara exclaim. You open your eyes in a burst of transcendence. You're back in the normal world, staring at Itachi and Mei.
She's obviously worried, holding your hand affectionately.
"Are you okay?!" she asks, as she wipes the sweat from your face. "I don't know if this is the way it happened last time but it seemed like you were actually being tortured".
"I was..." you begin to explain. "Until I realized that some lessons stay true no matter how long ago you learned them. I have Shishi-sensei to thank for that".
Itachi looks at you with a smile on his face. From behind him, you see Rikkudo standing there proudly.
"Very good," Rikkudo states with a tip of his head. "I was impressed".
"Thank you," you say back. "It's Rikkudo, or me rather. I've been seeing his spirit because of Madara's tampering. The awakening of the Rinnegan triggered these visions. He and I are becoming one again. How long was I out this time Itachi?"
"3 days," he answers as he looks over his shoulder. "I felt a chill. Is he behind me?"
You nod your head slowly.
"That's more than a little eerie," Itachi states as he watches Mei dig her head into your lap. "Mei and B have had their procedures done".
"Guess you're stuck with me," Mei says as she looks up at you, tears welling in her eyes. Her face seems younger. You pass your hand across her delicate face and wipe away the tears.
"I'm sorry to have worried you," you say softly as you kiss her forehead. "I have to go through with this, it's... what's best for everyone".
Mei nods quickly, as if agreeing with you is just the fastest way to avoid the pain. You wish you could take that pain away... But hopefully, soon there won't be a need for such pain.
"I wanted to be here to let you know how everything is going," Itachi states as he takes a seat next to you. "The situation with the jonin council has become sticky. As per your instructions, Shikamaru was leading the operation. Per Shikamaru's orders, we held off on the council. Shikamaru suspects that the council is getting wise to our investigation, so he simply stated that he was checking on behalf of Sarutobi-sama to make sure they were getting along well with his absence. He made it seem like Sarutobi-sama was just trying to busy himself, like he wasn't used to having nothing to do".
"Smart, very smart," you say with a smile. "That sounds like something I would have done".
"Yes, it does," Itachi says with a chuckle that then turns into a smile. "That or you would have beat the answers out of them... Oh, and before I forget, I know this isn't a good time... Probably shouldn't even bring this up.... But it IS important, and you are going to know eventually anyway".
Itachi pulls a book out from his pocket and places it on the table. He slides it to you. It's another Bingo Book, once again based solely on Team 21. You pick it up and skim through the pages.
"Nothing really new..." you say as you search for any updates on the abilities and weaknesses of your team's members. "Except... THEY DOUBLED THE BOUNTY?! That's OUTRAGEOUS!"
"We've been getting bounty hunters here," Itachi says softly. "No one serious, but we did have a group that came after TenTen and Ino, 6 of them to be precise... With the amount of money they're offering, they could have easily lived the rest of their lives off of that money, even if it was split 6 ways. And that's the lowest bounties they got. The kids are the cheapest bounties, except Sasuke and Naruto. But they're wanted alive no matter what".
"It's not going to be long before the village is under siege by everyone," you think aloud. "Have you talked about this with anyone else? Does anyone want to relocate so we don't endanger the village?"
"That did come up as a possibility," Itachi answers. "But, separating the group from the village has huge consequences".
"Yeah..." you reply. "They would still use the Leaf as our weakness and attack the village itself... With us here, at least they go directly after one of us and we're here to defend it".
"My thoughts exactly, and Kakashi agreed," Itachi informs you. "Are you hungry by any chance? You haven't eaten or anything. Maybe you should take a break".
"Yeah, I'm not hungry though," you say, a little confused by all of this yourself. "Hey Mei, are you having any problems like this in the Mist?"
"Yes..." she confesses meekly. It's like she doesn't want to worry you anymore than you already are. "But it's nothing we can't handle. Most of them are gutter trash that shouldn't even pick up a blade much less consider themselves any type of warrior. I will have to return to the village soon though".
"I hate to interrupt you," Rikkudo says as he passes right through Itachi. Itachi shivers as he rubs his shoulder to try to warm up. "But we do have to discuss the benefits of the Human Realm..."
"I'm sorry, I was just catching up," you reply politely. "Give me a second guys. I've been neglecting Rikkudo. I really need to hear what he has to say".
"Of course," Itachi says as he stands up and bows. "If you'll excuse me".
Itachi leaves the room after clearing his throat. Mei stands up and gives you a long kiss as she scratches behind your ear, grasping at your hair. She looks at your eyes before she gives you a half smile and leaves the room.
"She's a wonderful woman," Rikkudo says. "I'm sorry to have to do this, but I know that you wish to finish this as quickly as possible".
"It's terrible that we have to do this," you say with a deep sigh. "I know that I'm doing it for a reason, but after leaving that place... and the Animal Realm... I can't help but feel lucky for what I have. And to do this... Well, it feels like I'm neglecting them".
"Bear with it for now," he advises. "As with the Animal Realm, you can choose to seal the powers of the Human Realm, or unlock their powers. Either way, we progress closer to becoming whole. You did very well in the Human Realm if you'll pardon my self indulgence, but I'm sure you realized the situation became extremely difficult. It only gets harder from here... Unlocking the Human Realm's power will make you faster, considering your already inhuman speed, you won't notice much of a difference, but you will be faster. Also, you will be able to read people's minds, much like your Shared Consciousness jutsu. If trained, this ability can also weaken the person by literally sucking the soul out of their body, little by little".
"Alright, I'm ready for it," you say expectantly. "What's the downside?"
"Yes, as with everything there is a trade off," he replies. "To read people's minds, you have to place your hand directly over them. It's a lengthy process, and it's very hard to master. There's also the risk of fragmenting your own personality. If you choose to use these abilities, you have to keep in mind that you risk losing a piece of your own identity. At first, it will be subtle. But if you abuse, or use this ability too much, you'll struggle to differentiate your memories from the memories of people you've read before. It's a dangerous trade off, but it would work well with Shared Consciousness, and you might be able to pull it off. Just don't use it too much".
"How much is too much?"
"A person's mind is a very fragile yet complex thing, you know this," he explains. "Your Shared Consciousness jutsu pushes the boundaries enough that you separate your own identity from the mind of your victim by placing a representation of yourself in that persons mind. That's not the way this ability works. With this ability, you literally will become one with the person temporarily. There is no answer to your question. It depends on the person's will, physical health, even if the person is neurotic, even that could have an effect on you".
"I could become insane?"
"Yes, you could," he answers plainly. "It could be after using the ability 100 times, or maybe after the first time. But it's all up to you".
"What did you do?"
"I had all of the abilities unlocked, and used them to gain an understanding of what I was going through," he explains. "But things were very different back then. People were less complicated.... it was... a much simpler time".
"I understand... So unlock the power and use it in case of an emergency... or don't unlock the power and not even have the temptation..."
"A wise way to look at it," he says. ===== 1: Unlock the power 2: Seal the power within me
A: Continue with your Rinnegan training B: Spend time with Team 21 C: Spend personal time with Mei D: Spend personal time with ______ E: Free Will
|
|
|
Post by giga on Feb 1, 2011 20:47:24 GMT
You got that book deal signed yet, Mav?
|
|
|
Post by hueyfreeman on Feb 1, 2011 20:53:56 GMT
Umm, wow.
|
|
|
Post by badjay on Feb 1, 2011 20:59:40 GMT
Yeah, when I last got the full story from Mav it was like 300 pages worth of word docs. I think the big vote was the sample a bit of everything. I don't mind going with that, but I do prefer sampling a little of one thing more than sampling a little of all things.
|
|
|
Post by evilmeatballnl on Feb 1, 2011 21:04:56 GMT
You missed one update. Good job saving the whole CYOA though.
|
|
|
Post by maverickraven on Feb 1, 2011 21:14:44 GMT
"Give me the powers of the Human Realm," you request. "All I have to do is never use the power, or at least pray I NEVER have to".
"For both our sake, and the sake of the entire world, I hope you never have to use this power," Rikkudo says as he reaches into your chest again. You feel your chakra destabilize for a little bit, and then return to normal. "It is done. Are you moving on to the Hungry Ghost realm?"
"I am, but not before spending time with Mei and my family," you state as you rub your chest.
"I understand... But listen," he insists. "This is much bigger than you think. I saw the last visions you experienced in Human Realm, and"-
"I know the score," you interrupt. "And I don't care if that was truly Madara, or if he was just a reflection I created, or even if the Human Realm was trying to scare me by showing me Madara's true power. It doesn't matter, because no matter what, he has to go down. And I'm the one to do it... That's really all it is, there's nothing more to it".
Rikkudo silences himself. You can see he doesn't agree with you, but his patience is in a league all its own. He merely nods before asking you.
"Will you resume training?"
"I am taking a whole day off," you admit. "Then we'll resume training... I'm sorry if I disappointed you, this is just important to me. Just give me today".
"Do as you wish, I cannot stop you, nor would I try".
You get up and bow to Rikkudo's spirit, it is weird, and now you understand what Rikkudo truly meant when he spoke of self indulgence. You walk away from the room and search out Mei. When you do, you speak to her and let her know your plans. You spend the day with Mei and your family, trying to integrate Mei into the family naturally.
After a nice day of talking about NO business whatsoever, you take Mei back to your room. After recounting the day's events, and talking about your own experiences in the previous two realms, you decide to take Mei up to the roof. You both spend the night there, talking and laughing. Truly blissful in each others company under the stars. You explain how you want clones to go back with her when she goes to the Mist.
At first, Mei is insulted. She's happy you treat her so politely and are so protective of her, but she insists to remind you that she's a shinobi first, and a kage. You eventually convince her that not only does the world need her and the Mist, but you need her as well. She relents when you say that to her, happy that you're softening up on her. When you both are getting sleepier, you carry your lady back to your room like a true gentlemen and lay her down gently on your bed. You brush her hair out of her face and kiss her cheek.
She's exhausted... You turn to see Rikkudo there staring, waiting.
"Can we continue now?" he asks emotionless.
You're speechless, but his logic is sound. You summon your Shadow Clones, and only 3 come out.
Shocked by this huge difference, you look at them and observe them. One of them appears to be half bull,another seems completely normal, and the last one has a rhinoceros head and a hump on its back.
"They look like freaks," you say in shock.
"Yes, the powers of the Animal Realm," Rikkudo states. "You will need to work on your abilities to get them under control. Your clones right now are quite misshapen, and they will still be quite deformed, even after you master the technique, but at least they won't have any imperfections that will hurt their performance. That hump on that one's back is going to make it harder for him to move. Once you perfect the techniques, you won't have this issue. How's your vision?"
"I'm nauseous as hell," you state as you travel to the desk and grab a sheet of blank paper and a pen. You begin writing a note to Mei. "You weren't kidding... This is something I definitely need to learn how to turn on and off, and get used to. I feel like my eyes are looking in 30 different directions".
"Yes, you're seeing 180 degrees from four difference angles," you hear him say. "It's going to be near impossible. But once you close your eyes, you'll be fine and we can continue".
You finish writing your note and cover Mei with a blanket. You leave the note under her hand and stumble to the floor. Your clones know what to do, all that's left is the Hungry Ghost Realm.
"What do I expect here?" you ask patiently.
"Think about it in this way," Rikkudo explains. "Anything after the Human Realm means that the spirits there, in any of the four remaining realms, have surpassed the Human Realm and Animal Realm. They have been animals and humans, at LEAST. In the case of the Hungry Ghost Realm, you will be dealing with the Preta. These are spirits of humans that in life, were extremely gluttonous and greedy. Remember, they reached enlightenment enough that they passed the Human Realm, but their karma doomed them to this realm. Their greed damned them to the Hungry Ghost Realm. There, they never feel satiated in anything".
"Anything huh?" you ask as you think. "I understand... I think I do. They're not just hungry for food. Gluttony and greed are very closely related... Vices in themselves are about a hunger you need to satisfy... Is that about the gist of it?"
"Yes," Rikkudo answers. "The beings here are usually doomed to ALWAYS be hungry. But as you noted, it doesn't mean food necessarily. It can be a slew of things. If a person was hyper-sexual, he might find that his lust is never satisfied. A gambler can never stop gambling. A drug addict will never get off from his addiction, you understand where this is going. But as torturous as this sounds, this is also a nirvana for these people, to some extent. But as you know, this is a false heaven. If you settle for this, you will be stuck in there. You'll never be able to leave, and you'll never know the feeling of satisfaction ever again".
"So what can happen in there?" you ask curiously. "I don't have any vices. And they have tried to trick me before, my will is strong enough that I feel safe. What's my objective there?"
"Careful 21," he advises. "The goal of this realm is MODERATION. You must understand that not having anything over there is guess what? A VICE. It would become YOUR vice. Your vice would be to restrict yourself from eating or enjoyment. There are people who torture themselves in this manner".
"Yeah... anorexia and bulimia," you think aloud. "And people who torture themselves to not gamble because they think it's wrong. Or not drinking for that matter, because some believe it clouds the mind".
"You don't drink," he points out. "I can understand why, you don't get intoxicated. This will sound strange coming from me, a former priest, but even the vow of chastity by it's definition is very similar to a vice. It's a complete and total aversion to sex. By definition, a vice is a fault that tends to be immoral, but you do it out of habit, maybe even necessity, like an addiction to cigarettes. So in OTHER words, do NOT venture to ANY extremes. The realms are VERY strict in their interpretation of the rules, EXTREMELY literal. The closer you get to God Realm, the more you'll notice that the realms are each becoming more and more enticing. More like heaven, but not even God Realm is heaven, heaven only comes after it. But let's take this one step at a time. Please... engrave my words into your brain if you have to, but PLEASE heed my advice. If you don't we'll be bound to one of the realms forever, and that's IF we're lucky".
"Wait, what about having to start all over again?" you ask incredulously.
"That was only with the first TWO realms," he explains. "Those were the lower realms. With every realm now, you won't be sent back to try again. You've finally reached enlightenment, at least enough of it that if you fail in this realm, this could be your final resting place. It's almost as if the better you were, the higher level of 'heaven' you reach, but only a select few reach the true nirvana after God Realm".
You exhale and crack your neck.
"So this time... it's for keeps," you say. "Alright, take me to the other side then. Wish me luck".
"I will be praying for our success," Rikkudo says as he reaches into your chest. "We will need it".
You open your eyes and you notice you're sitting in the middle of a luxurious casino. There's all you can eat buffets, an open bar, dancing, slot machines, everything. You get up and walk around. You're familiar with some of the games, Blackjack for instance. Some people are playing Shogi, some are playing chess. This is obviously not a normal casino.
A beautiful blond waitress, who is very skimpily clad walks up to you with a silver platter of a slew of different choices. You see a delicious, juicy looking steak, a pack of luxury cigarettes, a plastic bag of what you think is a narcotic, and a pack of gold ryo coins.
The blond licks her lips as she notices your indecision.
"You know sir," she says. "If you don't like what's here, you can always order... <b>off</b> the menu".
She slips the corner of her top a little lower, showing her soft shoulder.
This is truly a den of inequity you think to yourself... ====== Clutch Moment A: I'll take the steak B: Let me get the cigarettes C: Let me take that plastic bag D: I'll take the gold F: Let me take the off menu special G: Free Will
|
|